Cisco Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ONS Products
Retour à l'accueil, cliquez ici
Download this chapter
Download the complete book
Voir également :
![[TXT]](http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/icons/text.gif)
Cisco-Telephones-IP-..> 01-Jun-2013 10:28 2.4M
Cisco-UCS-C200-Serve..> 01-Jun-2013 10:27 2.6M
Cisco-ONS-15454-DWDM..> 01-Jun-2013 10:27 4.8M
Cisco-ONS-15454-Refe..> 01-Jun-2013 10:26 3.0M
Cisco-Unified-IP-Pho..> 01-Jun-2013 08:01 2.3M
Cisco-Meraki-Cloud-C..> 01-Jun-2013 07:55 2.3M
Cisco-IPSec-Negotiat..> 01-Jun-2013 07:52 2.1M
Cisco-ASA-5500.htm 01-Jun-2013 07:45 2.1M
CiscoSecurityApplian..> 01-Jun-2013 07:35 2.0M
Cisco-Manuel-du-tele..> 03-Apr-2013 15:45 2.0M
Cisco-836-Router-and..> 03-Apr-2013 15:38 1.6M
Cisco-837-Router-and..> 03-Apr-2013 15:38 1.6M
Cisco-Manuel-du-tele..> 03-Apr-2013 15:37 1.8M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 10:04 4.1M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 09:44 3.5M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 09:40 3.0M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 09:34 2.9M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 09:29 2.7M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 09:24 3.7M
CiscoPrimeNetworkCon..> 04-Sep-2012 09:17 3.0M
XML-Schema-Object-Do..> 03-Sep-2012 18:55 2.1M
XML-Schema-Object-Do..> 03-Sep-2012 18:35 4.9M
Cisco-IOS-XR-XML-API..> 03-Sep-2012 18:29 4.7M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 03-Sep-2012 17:25 5.0M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 03-Sep-2012 17:20 5.7M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 03-Sep-2012 17:15 5.9M
Cisco-IOS-XR-Carrier..> 03-Sep-2012 17:10 4.5M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 03-Sep-2012 17:07 4.3M
Cisco-Introduction-t..> 03-Sep-2012 16:57 4.2M
Cisco-Security-Appli..> 03-Sep-2012 16:54 4.2M
liendocumentationcis..> 28-Jan-2012 10:29 5.2K
white_paper_c11-4621..> 28-Jan-2012 10:24 55K
cisco.htm 26-Jan-2012 17:35 1.5M
liendocumentationcis..> 26-Jan-2012 17:32 5.2K
liensdocumentationci..> 26-Jan-2012 17:31 5.0K
CiscoASA5500.htm 01-Jan-2012 22:26 3.3M
ciscoVPNClientAdmini..> 01-Jan-2012 12:56 223K
Cisco7600SeriesRoute..> 01-Jan-2012 12:51 2.7M
CHAPTER
15-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
15
Turn Up a Network
This chapter explains how to turn up and test a Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division
multiplexing (DWDM) network. For DWDM topology reference information and span loss tables, see
Chapter 13, “Network Reference.”
There are two main DWDM network types: metro core, where the channel power is equalized and
dispersion compensation is applied, and metro access, where the channels are not equalized and
dispersion compensation is not applied. The DWDM network topologies supported are hubbed rings,
multihubbed rings, meshed rings, linear configurations, and single-span links. The DWDM node types
supported are hub, terminal, optical add/drop multiplexing (OADM), reconfigurable optical add/drop
multiplexing (ROADM), anti-amplified spontaneous emissions (anti-ASE), and line amplifier. For
DWDM and hybrid node turn-up procedures, see Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node.”
Note The procedures and tasks described in this chapter for the Cisco ONS 15454 platform is applicable to
the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Note In this chapter, “RAMAN-CTP” refers to the 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP card and “RAMAN-COP” refers
to the 15454-M-RAMAN-COP card.
Before You Begin
This section lists the chapter procedures (NTPs). Turn to a procedure for applicable tasks (DLPs).
1. NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2—Complete this procedure before beginning
network turn-up.
2. NTP-G52 Verify Node-to-Node Connections, page 15-3—Complete this procedure next.
3. NTP-G201 Configure the Raman Pump on an MSTP Link, page 15-4—Complete this procedure to
set the Raman total power and Raman ratio.
4. NTP-G53 Set Up Timing, page 15-27—Complete this procedure next.
5. NTP-G54 Provision and Verify a DWDM Network, page 15-33—Complete this procedure next.
6. NTP-G56 Verify the OSNR, page 15-37—Complete as needed.15-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
7. NTP-G142 Perform a Protection Switch Test, page 15-38—Complete as needed.
8. NTP-G164 Configure Link Management Protocol, page 15-40—Complete as needed.
9. NTP-G233 Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router
and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node, page 15-47—Complete as needed.
10. NTP-G303 Configure Virtual links on the Cisco 7600 and Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node,
page 15-66—Complete as needed.
11. NTP-G57 Create a Logical Network Map, page 15-69—Complete as needed.
12. NTP-G325 View the Power Levels of Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP Nodes, page 15-69—Complete as
needed.
13. NTP-G326 Provision SRLG on the Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP Network, page 15-70—Complete as
needed.
NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up
Step 1 Log in to an ONS 15454 node on the network that you will test. See the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task
for instructions. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not turned on. See the DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering task as
necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear (EQPT in the Cond column) indicating equipment failure
or other hardware problems. If equipment failure alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before
continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Step 3 Verify that the software version shown in the node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view
(multishelf mode) status area matches the version required by your network. (The status area is located
to the left of the shelf graphic.) If the software is not the correct version, perform one of the following
procedures:
• Perform a software upgrade using a Cisco ONS 15454 software CD or Cisco ONS 15454 SDH
software CD. Refer to the release-specific software upgrade document.
• Replace TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards with cards containing the correct
release.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > General tabs. Verify that all general node information settings are correct
according to documentation provided by the network administrator. If not, see the NTP-G80 Change
Node Management Information procedure.
Purpose This procedure verifies that each ONS 15454 is ready for DWDM network
turn-up before adding nodes to a network. This procedure applies to all
ROADM, OADM, and line-amplifier nodes.
Tools/Equipment Network plan provided by your network administrator
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 5 Click the Provisioning > Network tabs. Ensure that the IP settings and other Cisco Transport Controller
(CTC) network access information is correct according to documentation provided by the network
administrator. If not, see the NTP-G81 Change CTC Network Access procedure.
Step 6 Click the Provisioning > Protection tabs. Verify that all required protection groups have been created
according to documentation provided by the network administrator. If not, see the “NTP-G33 Create a
Y-Cable Protection Group” procedure on page 11-162 or the NTP-G83 Modify or Delete Card
Protection Settings procedure.
Step 7 Click the Provisioning > Security tabs. Verify that all users have been created and that their security
levels are correct according to documentation provided by the network administrator. If not, see the
NTP-G88 Modify Users and Change Security procedure.
Step 8 If Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is provisioned on the node, click the Provisioning >
SNMP tabs. Verify that all SNMP settings are correct according to documentation provided by the
network administrator. If not, see the NTP-G89 Change SNMP Settings procedure.
Step 9 Repeat this procedure at each node in the network.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G52 Verify Node-to-Node Connections
Note In this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 6, and Side B refers to Slots 12 through 17.
Step 1 Check to see if the fibers coming from the adjacent nodes are connected to the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E,
OPT-AMP-17-C (operating in the booster amplifier mode), or OSC-CSM card LINE RX and TX ports.
If yes, continue with Step 2. If adjacent node fibers are not connected to the LINE RX and TX ports, do
not continue. Install the cabling to the adjacent nodes using the “NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on
DWDM Cards and DCUs” procedure on page 14-78.
Step 2 Verify the following network fiber connections:
• The node’s Side A ports (LINE TX and RX) are connected to the Side B ports (LINE RX and TX)
of the adjacent node.
• The node’s Side B ports (LINE RX and TX) are connected to the Side A ports (LINE TX and RX)
of the adjacent node.
Step 3 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the network node that you want to verify.
Purpose This procedure verifies optical service channel (OSC) terminations
between nodes and checks span attenuation. This procedure applies to all
ROADM, OADM, and line-amplifier locations.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Comm Channels > OSC tabs. Verify that OSC terminations appear under the
OSC Terminations area for the Side B and Side A OSC-CSM or OSCM cards and that the port state is
In-Service and Normal (IS-NR [ANSI]/Unlocked-enabled [ETSI]). If so, continue with Step 5. If OSC
terminations are not created, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 14-126.
Step 5 Complete the NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC procedure for all OSC-CSM cards. If the
measured span loss is within the minimum and maximum expected span loss values, continue with
Step 6. If not, clean the fiber connected to the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-AMP-17-C (operating in
the booster amplifier mode), or OSC-CSM cards on both ends of the span, then repeat the NTP-G76
Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC procedure. If the span loss is within the minimum and maximum
expected span loss values, continue with Step 6. If not, contact your next level of support.
Step 6 Repeat Steps 2 through 5 at each network node.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G201 Configure the Raman Pump on an MSTP Link
Step 1 The Raman pump can be configured in the following ways:
• DLP-G468 Configure the Raman Pump Using the Installation Wizard, page 15-5—This procedure
is the preferred and recommended installation process.
• DLP-G690 Configure the Raman Pump Using Manual Day-0 Installation, page 15-19—Use this
procedure to configure and tune RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP cards, using manual day-0
installation.
• DLP-G474 Configure the Raman Pump by Importing the CTP XML File, page 15-25—Use this
procedure when the span is longer than 42 dB (expand on span). This procedure is not recommended
for spans of 42 dB or less.
• DLP-G489 Configure the Raman Pump by Setting the ANS Parameters Manually, page 15-25—Use
this procedure if the Raman installation wizard fails and expert intervention is required.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure configures the Raman pump on an Multiservice Transport
Platform (MSTP) link.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G468 Configure the Raman Pump Using the Installation Wizard
Note The installation wizard performs optical measurements and data exchange between the nodes. Make sure
that the data communications network (DCN) is stable.
Note Running the installation wizard without setting the automatic node setup (ANS) parameters causes the
wizard to fail. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127.
Note Running the installation wizard can impact traffic. Make sure that nobody is working on the nodes before
continuing with this procedure.
Caution To perform optical measurements, the installation wizard automatically turns on hardware resources
installed on the nodes. Alarms can occur during the installation process. Following the recommendations
is critical to the success of installation.
Note Make sure that a Muxponder, a WSS, or a tunable transponder is present before you run the Raman
installation wizard.
Note When the span is longer than 42 dB, do not use the Raman installation wizard.
Purpose This procedure configures the Raman Pump on an MSTP link using the
installation wizard.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • DLP-G46 Log into CTC
• NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127.
• Create an optical service channel (OSC) termination link by
completing the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure
on page 14-126 or create an optical transport section (OTS)
provisionable patchcord terminations on line ports by completing
“NTP-G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord” procedure on
page 16-72, as required.
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite and remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Note A bulk attenuator is not required between the transponder and the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE
card if the Raman installation wizard is started from a Raman only node (line amplifier node equipped
with OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card without post-amplifier).
Step 1 From the CTC View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 Figure 15-1 shows a sample network view of nodes (terminal or ROADM) connected in the network.
Figure 15-1 Network View of Nodes (Terminal or ROADM)
The Raman pump on the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card can be configured on a single span or
multiple spans.
Step 3 To start the Raman installation wizard, complete one of the following steps:
• To configure Raman amplification on a single span, go to Network view, right-click on a span and
choose Raman Installation Day0 from the shortcut menu. (Figure 15-2). Go to Step 5.
• To configure Raman amplification on multispans, go to Network view, right-click on a specific
node, and choose Raman Installation Day0 Multi-span from the shortcut menu (Figure 15-3).15-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-2 Installing the Raman Pump on a Single Span
Figure 15-3 Installing the Raman Pump on Multiple Spans15-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
The Routing page is displayed (Figure 15-4).
Figure 15-4 Selecting Spans for Raman Amplification
The Included Span list box lists all spans that are selected in the network.
Step 4 Select a span from the network to add a span.
If you are setting up multispans, make sure that the span selection is made in a sequence; otherwise, an
error message is displayed. For example, in Figure 15-4, begin with the span between the nodes
WXC_BSTE_Chica-155 and OLA2_CrownP-154, and then the span between OLA2_CrownP-154 and
OLAasym_Batavia-157, and so on.
Step 5 When you have selected the span or spans, click Next.
The Setting Parameters page is displayed (see Figure 15-5). 15-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-5 Setting Raman Calibration Parameter
Note The Hints area displays the status of internal operations.
Note If multiple spans are selected, the applicable nodes are displayed on the left side of the page.
Step 6 Select one or more check boxes as applicable:
• Autorun wizard—The Installation wizard tunes the selected span automatically, requiring no user
intervention. However, if the wizard displays errors, the wizard requests for user
acknowledgements.
• Even Band—This option is used for optical networks that support only even band channels. If the
network supports odd and even channels, the Raman Installation wizard tunes the transponder to the
first tunable odd band channel.
• Auto Skip Tune Path—The Raman Installation wizard skips spans that have been previously tuned
by the wizard.
• Bidirectional Path—This configures the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE cards in both
directions (source to destination and destination to source)
• MUX/DMUX Present—This option is used if the optical network has transponders connected to
the A/D stage (MUX or WSS).
Several scenarios are discussed in the following section. Select as applicable:
• Check box Bidirectional Path is unchecked and check box MUX/DMUX Present is checked. See
Figure 15-6 and Step 7a.
• Check box Bidirectional Path is unchecked and check box MUX/DMUX Present is unchecked. See
Figure 15-7 and Step 7b.15-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
• Check box Bidirectional Path is checked and check box MUX/DMUX Present is checked. See
Figure 15-8 and Step 7c.
• Check box Bidirectional Path is checked and check box MUX/DMUX Present is unchecked. See
Figure 15-9 and Step 7d.
Note Before you check the MUX/DMUX Present check box, ensure that the following prerequisites are
completed:
• At least one source node is a terminal node or a ROADM node.
• Two transponders/muxponders supporting wavelength of 1530.33 nm and 1560.61 nm, used as
probe signals, are available on the source node for odd channels or wavelengths of 1530.72 nm and
1561.01 nm for even channels.
• Trunk ports are connected to the correct ADD ports.
Note The Raman Wizard does not verify if the selected TXP connections are properly connected. The
calibration process is terminated if a LOS-P alarm is detected on the MUX input port when the trunk
port is turned on.
Note If you do not use the MUX/DMUX Present check box, ensure that the following prerequisites are
completed:
• Connect a UT2-based trunk port (from a transponder/muxponder card) to the COM-RX port of the
booster amplifier connected to the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card on the source node.
A full-spectrum, tunable interface allows the system to tune the signal on two required wavelengths
without any human intervention.
• A 10-dB bulk attenuator must be connected between the TXP trunk port and the COM-RX port of
the booster amplifier.
Caution Make sure that the bulk attenuator is removed as soon as installation finishes and the correct fiber is
reconnected to the COM-RX port of the booster amplifier.
Step 7 Perform any one of the following steps, based on your selection in Step 6.
a. Select the two transponders on the source node from the Slot drop-down list. The installation wizard
tunes the transponders to the required wavelengths. (Figure 15-6).15-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-6 Bidirectional Path Is Unchecked and MUX/DMUX Present Is Checked
b. Select one transponder on the source node from the Slot drop-down list. The installation wizard
verifies if the transponder can tune on the first tunable wavelength. Make sure that the card used is
a tunable C-band transponder and set the transponder to the “first tunable wavelength”. Otherwise,
the wizard fails and the installation must be repeated using a correctly configured tunable
transponder (Figure 15-7).
Note The wizard uses a pre-installed UT-2 based transponder.15-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-7 Bidirectional Path Is Unchecked and MUX/DMUX Present Is Unchecked
c. Select the two transponders on the source and destination nodes from the Slot drop-down list. The
installation wizard verifies if the transponders are tuned to the expected wavelengths or on the first
tunable wavelength. Otherwise, the wizard fails and the installation must be repeated (Figure 15-8).15-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-8 Bidirectional Path Is Checked and MUX/DMUX Present Is Checked
d. Select a transponder on the source and destination nodes from the Slot drop-down list. The
installation wizard verifies if the transponder can be tuned on the first tunable wavelength. Make
sure that the transponder is a tunable C-band transponder. Otherwise, the wizard fails and the
installation must be repeated (Figure 15-9).15-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-9 Bidirectional Path Is Checked and MUX/DMUX Present Is Unchecked
Step 8 Click Next. The Calibrate Raman Page is displayed (Figure 15-10).15-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-10 Calibrating Raman Amplification
The installation wizard changes the trunk port to the In-Service (IS) state and turns on all the amplifiers.
All the OTS and optical channel (OCH) ports in the span are changed to IS state.
Step 9 As soon as the Raman calibrations are complete, the Next button is enabled. Click Next.15-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-11 Calibrating Raman Amplification
Step 10 The power received on the destination node when wavelength on the source is turned on is shown. If you
installed Raman amplification on multiple spans, click Next to view results of other spans.
Step 11 If the installation wizard fails, click the Repeat button. The Raman installation wizard recalibrates the
values on the destination node.
Note If you have repeated the calibration several times and the wizard fails, press Cancel to abort the
installation process. Log in to the Cisco Technical Support Website at
http://www.cisco.com/cisco/web/support/index.html for more information or call Cisco Technical
Support at (800) 553-2447.
Step 12 Click Next. The Accept Results page is displayed (Figure 15-12).15-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-12 Raman Amplification Results
The calculated Raman power and Raman gain are displayed. (Figure 15-12.)
Step 13 The wizard compares the calculated Raman gain value with the expected results. Your action depends
on the Raman gain values:
• Expected gain (Gt) – 0.5 dB <= (gain) <= (expected gain) + 0.5 dB—If the Raman gain is within
this range, it means that the setup procedure was successful. Go to Step 14.
• (Expected gain) - 3.0 dB <= (gain) <= (expected gain) – 0.5 dB—If the Raman gain is within this
range, it means that the values are slightly outside the range. The wizard recommends that you verify
the span length and cabling, and repeat the installation wizard procedure. If the Raman gain values
are still not within the expected value range even after repeating the installation process, you can
choose to forcibly apply these values by clicking Force Calibration.
Note After you have forced the new calibration, the new value of the Raman gain is applied to the
OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card as the set point; However, the new value does not update
the value of the ANS set point for Raman gain. After the installation is complete, reanalyze the
network in Cisco Transport Planner using this new value for the Raman gain set point and verify
that it results in a good network design. After the CTP analysis is successful, import the updated
CTP XML file again into CTC by completing the “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport
Planner NE Update Configuration File” procedure on page 14-47. Launch, run, and apply the
ANS parameters by completing “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on
page 14-127. This resolves the discrepancy between the values of the ANS parameters and the
card parameters. 15-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
However, we recommend that you log in to the Cisco Technical Support Website at
http://www.cisco.com/cisco/web/support/index.html for more information if the Raman gain values are
still not within the expected value range or call Cisco Technical Support at (800) 553-2447.
• (gain) < (expected gain) – 3.0 dB or if (gain) < (expected gain) + 0.5 dB—If the Raman gain is
within this range and the values calculated are far from the targeted results, the installation fails and
the wizard recommends repeating the installation. If the results do not improve, it means that the
installation process has failed. The Force Calibration option is not available. Click Cancel to abort
the installation and log in to the Cisco Technical Support Website at
http://www.cisco.com/cisco/web/support/index.html for more information or call Cisco Technical
Support at (800) 553-2447.
Note The reason that the calculated values are not within the range may be due to installation issues
(for example, the actual fiber type is different than the one used by Cisco Transport Planner to
design the link) or procedural issues.
Step 14 Click Exports Data to export the Raman setup tuning data in text format (Figure 15-13).
Step 15 Click Finish.
Note When an error occurs during calibration of multiple spans, the calibration process stops and the Force
Calibration button becomes visible.
Note If an error occurs during calibration of multiple spans when using the AutoRun wizard, the calibration
stops and the Force Calibration button becomes visible. Click Force Calibration to force the results.15-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-13 Exporting Raman Tuning Data
Step 16 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G690 Configure the Raman Pump Using Manual Day-0 Installation
Purpose This task tunes the RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP cards manually
during day-0 installation.
Tools/Equipment • An optical spectrum analyzer (OSA) must be available at both the
local and remote nodes.
• A 15 dB bulk attenuator
Prerequisite Procedures • DLP-G46 Log into CTC
• Create an optical service channel (OSC) termination link by
completing the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure
on page 14-126 or create optical transport section (OTS) provisionable
patchcord terminations on line ports by completing “NTP-G184
Create a Provisionable Patchcord” procedure on page 16-72, as
required. The ONS-SC-OSC-18.0= SFP is supported.
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Note Perform the tuning procedure on one fiber at a time. Tune the RAMAN-COP module on the remote node
followed by RAMAN-CTP of the local node.
Note The RAMAN-COP card needs RAMAN-CTP card to operate.
Note If a 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C card is connected to the COM port of the RAMAN-CTP card, the
ADD-RX port of the 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C card must be set to the OOS,MT (ANSI) or locked,
maintenance (ETSI) state to enable the probe signals. Change the administrative state of the ADD-RX
port to IS,AINS (ANSI) or unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) after the tuning procedure is complete.
See the “DLP-G532 Change Optical Line Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards” task on
page 20-95.
Note If an OPT-EDFA-17, OPT-EDFA-24, OPT-AMP-C, or OPT-BST-E amplifier is used as a line amplifier
during the tuning procedure, the COM-RX port of the amplifier must be set to the OOS,MT (ANSI) or
locked, maintenance (ETSI) state. Change the administrative state of the COM-RX port to IS,AINS
(ANSI) or unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) after the tuning procedure is complete.
Step 1 To tune the RAMAN-COP card on the remote node, complete Steps 3 through 14.
Step 2 To tune the RAMAN-CTP card on the local node, complete Steps 14 through 22.
Step 3 On the local node, perform the following steps:
a. In the node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the
RAMAN-CTP card.
b. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
c. Choose On from the OSRI drop-down list for the RAMAN-TX port.
d. Click Apply and then click Yes. This forces both the Raman pumps of the RAMAN-CTP card to
shut down.
Note The DFB signal is not affected by the Raman noise because the Raman pumps of the
RAMAN-CTP card are shut down. The Optical Signal to Noise Ratio (OSNR) value remains
above the failure threshold during the RAMAN-COP card tuning procedure, when the Raman
ratio is forced to 100%.
e. Connect the OSA to the COM-TX port of the RAMAN-CTP card using physical patch cords.
f. Set the OSA Resolution Bandwidth (RBW) to 0.2 nm and the OSA Video Bandwidth (RBV) to
100 Hz.
Step 4 On the remote node, perform the following steps:
a. Connect a tunable C-band transponder or muxponder to the COM-RX port of the line amplifier that
is connected to the COM-RX port of the RAMAN-CTP card.
b. Connect a 15 dB bulk attenuator between the TXP trunk port and the COM-RX port of the line
amplifier so that the input power of the line amplifier does not exceed -7 dBm.15-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
c. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP or MXP
card.
d. Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
e. Select the wavelength as 1530.33 nm for odd band or 1530.73 nm for even band from the
wavelength field.
f. Click Apply to save the changes.
g. Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
h. Choose the IS option from the Admin State drop-down field and click Apply.
i. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs, and set the ALS mode to Disable. This enables the line
amplifier or the 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C card to detect a valid input power on the COM-RX or
ADD-RX port respectively. The line amplifier starts up in control power mode and reaches the per
channel power set point. A valid signal flows from the node into the fiber.
Step 5 On the remote node, perform the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the RAMAN-COP
card.
b. Click Maintenance > Manual Setup tabs.
c. Select the High Power First Lambda option.
d. Click the Pump On button. The High Power First Lambda field becomes editable.
Note The Raman pumps at 1428 nm on the RAMAN-COP card are automatically set to a high power
level of 450 mW.
Step 6 On the local node, record the peak optical power level at 1530.33 nm manually. The OSA detects a single
channel at 1530.33 nm.
Step 7 On the remote node, perform the following
a. Enter the peak optical power value recorded in Step 6 in the High Power First Lambda field.
b. Select the Low Power First Lambda option.
c. Click the Pump On button. The Low Power First Lambda field becomes editable.
Note The Raman pumps at 1428 nm on the RAMAN-COP card are automatically set to a low power
level of 200 mW.
Step 8 On the local node, record the peak optical power level at 1530.33 nm manually. The OSA detects a single
channel at 1530.33 nm. The peak optical power level has reduced significantly.
Step 9 On the remote node, enter the peak optical power value recorded in Step 8 in the Low Power First
Lambda field.
Step 10 Switch off the transponder or muxponder card on the remote node and select the last lambda values using
the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP or MXP
card.
b. Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
c. Choose the OOS,DSBLD option from the Admin State drop-down field and click Apply.15-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
d. Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
e. Select 1560.61 nm for odd band or 1561.1 nm for even band wavelength from the wavelength field
and then click Apply.
f. Click Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
g. Choose the IS option from the Admin State drop-down field and click Apply.
Step 11 Repeat Steps 5 through 10 to edit the High Power Last Lambda and Low Power Last Lambda settings.
Step 12 On the remote node, click Tune to calculate the power, ratio, and actual gain on the RAMAN-COP card.
The results are displayed in the result panel in the Manual Setup > Maintenance tab.
• Power—Displays the optimum total pump power value provisioned on the RAMAN-COP card to
reach the target Raman installation gain.
• Ratio—Displays the optimum pumps ratio value provisioned on the card to reach the target Raman
gain.
Note The newly calculated set points for the power and ratio can be viewed in the Maintenance >
Installation Report tab in the RAMAN-COP card view after the successful execution of Raman
tuning procedure. The newly provisioned values overwrite the values for the power and ratio
ANS parameters and the Origin field displays the value, “AUTOMATIC” in the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tab.
• Actual Gain—Displays the current Raman gain calculated using the power and ratio values. If the
calculated gain is less than the Raman installation gain setpoint, a warning message is displayed,
prompting the user to accept the reduced calculated gain.
Step 13 Click the Force button to force the new gain setpoint.
Step 14 On the local node, perform the following:
a. In the node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the
RAMAN-CTP card.
b. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
c. Choose Off from the OSRI drop-down list for the RAMAN-TX port.
d. Click Apply and then click Yes.
Step 15 On the local node, perform the following steps:
a. Connect the OSA to the COM-TX port of the RAMAN-CTP card using physical patchcords.
b. Set the OSA Resolution Bandwidth (RBW) to 0.2 nm and the OSA Video Bandwidth (RBV) to
100 Hz.
Step 16 On the remote node, perform the following steps:
a. Connect a tunable C-band transponder or muxponder to the COM-RX port of the line amplifier that
is connected to the COM-RX port of the RAMAN-CTP card.
b. Connect a 15 dB bulk attenuator between the TXP trunk port and the COM-RX port of the line
amplifier so that the input power of the line amplifier does not exceed -7 dBm.
c. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP or MXP
card.
d. Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
e. Select the wavelength as 1530.33 nm for odd bands or 1530.73 nm for even bands from the
wavelength field.15-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
f. Click Apply to save the changes.
g. Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
h. Choose the IS option from the Admin State drop-down field and click Apply.
i. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs and set the ALS mode to Disable. This enables the line amplifier
to detect a valid input power on the COM-RX port. The line amplifier starts up in control power
mode and reaches the per channel power setpoint. A valid signal flows from the node into the fiber.
Step 17 On the local node, perform the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the RAMAN-CTP
card.
b. Click the Maintenance > Manual Start tabs.
c. Select the High Power First Lambda option. Raman pump P1 is activated.
d. Click the Pump On button. The High Power First Lambda field becomes editable.
Note The Raman pumps at 1428 nm on the RAMAN-CTP card are automatically set to a high power
level of 450 mW.
e. Record the peak optical power level at 1530.33 nm manually. The OSA detects a single channel at
1530.33 nm.
f. Enter the peak optical power value recorded in Step 17e in the High Power First Lambda field.
g. Select the Low Power First Lambda option.
h. Click the Pump On button. The Low Power First Lambda field becomes editable.
Note The Raman pumps at 1428 nm on the RAMAN-CTP card are automatically set to a high power
level of 200 mW.
i. Record the peak optical power level at 1530.33 nm manually. The OSA detects a single channel at
1530.33 nm. The peak optical power level has reduced significantly.
j. Enter the peak optical power value recorded in Step 17i in the Low Power First Lambda field.
Step 18 Switch off the transponder or muxponder card on the remote node and select the last lambda values using
the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP or MXP
card.
b. Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
c. Choose the OOS,DSBLD option from the Admin State drop-down field and click Apply.
d. Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
e. Select the wavelength as 1560.61 nm for odd bands and 1561.1 nm for even bands from the
wavelength field and click Apply.
f. Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
g. Choose the IS option from the Admin State drop-down field and click Apply.
Step 19 Repeat Steps 17 and 18 to edit the High Power Last Lambda and Low Power Last Lambda settings. The
Raman pump P2 is activated and the Raman ratio is 0%.15-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 20 On the local node, click the Tune button to calculate the power, ratio, and actual gain on the
RAMAN-CTP card. The results are displayed in the result panel in the Manual Setup > Maintenance tab.
• Power—Displays the calculated optimum total pump power value provisioned on the RAMAN-CTP
card to reach the target Raman installation gain.
• Ratio—Displays the optimum pumps ratio value provisioned on the RAMAN-CTP card to reach the
target Raman gain.
Note The newly calculated setpoints for the power and ratio can be viewed in the Maintenance >
Installation Report tab in the RAMAN-CTP card view after the successful execution of Raman
tuning procedure. The newly provisioned values overwrite the values for the power and ratio
ANS parameters and the Origin field displays the value, “AUTOMATIC” in the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tab.
• Actual Gain—Displays the current Raman gain calculated using the power and ratio values.
The calculated gain (G) is compared with the expected Raman gain setpoint (GSTP). Your actions
depends on the value of the calculated gain:
– G
STP – 0.5 dB <= G <= GSTP + 0.5 dB—If the calculated gain is within this range, it means that
the tuning procedure was successful.
– G
STP – 2 dB < G < GSTP—A warning message is displayed, prompting you to accept the reduced
calculated gain. Go to Step 21.
– G < GSTP – 2 dB—A failure message is displayed. Go to Step 22.
Step 21 Click the Force button to force the new gain setpoint.
Note After you have forced the new calibration, the new value of the Raman gain is applied to the
RAMAN-CTP card as the set point. The newly provisioned gain setpoint can be viewed in the
Maintenance > Installation Report tab in the RAMAN-CTP card view. However, the newly
provisioned gain setpoint does not automatically change the values of the Value and Origin
fields of the ANS gain setpoint in the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tab. After the
installation is complete, reanalyze the network in Cisco Transport Planner using the new value
for the Raman gain set point and verify that it results in a good network design. After the CTP
analysis is successful, import the updated CTP XML file again into CTC by completing the
“NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File” procedure on
page 14-47. Launch, run, and apply the ANS parameters by completing “NTP-G37 Run
Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127. This resolves the discrepancy between the
values of the ANS parameters and the card parameters.
Step 22 Repeat the Steps 14 through 21 again after cleaning the fibers and checking the node connections.
Note The status field in the Maintenance > Installation Report tab displays the value, “Raman tuned by
WIZARD” after the tuning procedure is complete.
Step 23 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to complete the tuning procedure in the opposite fiber.
Step 24 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).15-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G474 Configure the Raman Pump by Importing the CTP XML File
Step 1 Install the ANS parameters calculated using Cisco Transport Planner, by completing the “NTP-G143
Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File” procedure on page 14-47.
Step 2 Launch, run, and apply ANS parameters by completing “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup”
procedure on page 14-127.
Step 3 Verify if the Raman pump was configured successfully. Perform the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-RAMP-C
or OPT-RAMP-CE amplifier to display the card view.
b. Click the Maintenance > Installation tabs.
c. Verify the value of the Raman Ratio and Raman Total Power parameters are consistent with the
ANS set points.
d. Verify if the status of the Raman configuration displays the value as “Tuned by ANS”. If not, go to
Step 1 to repeat the procedure again.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G489 Configure the Raman Pump by Setting the ANS Parameters Manually
Note This procedure can be performed only on a per span basis and not on multiple spans. To configure
multiple spans, repeat this procedure on each span that you want to configure.
Step 1 Provision the ANS parameters manually, by completing the “DLP-G541 Add an ANS Parameter” task
on page 14-60. The ANS parameters are:
• (Slot i.OPT-RAMP-CE).Port RAMAN-TX.Amplifier Gain
Purpose This procedure configures the Raman pump by importing the Cisco
Transport Planner XML file.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This procedure configures the Raman pump by setting the ANS parameters
manually.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed, when the wizard fails and expert intervention is required.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
• (Slot i.OPT-RAMP-CE).Port RAMAN-TX.Raman Ratio
• (Slot i.OPT-RAMP-CE).Port RAMAN-TX.Raman Total Power
ANS parameters are displayed in the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tab. For more
information, see Chapter 12, “Node Reference.”
Step 2 Launch, run, and apply ANS parameters by completing “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup”
procedure on page 14-127.
Step 3 Verify if the Raman pump was configured successfully. Perform the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-RAMP-C
or OPT-RAMP-CE amplifier to display the card view.
b. Click the Maintenance > Installation tabs.
c. Verify the values of the Raman Ratio and Total Pump Power parameters are consistent with the ANS
set points.
d. Verify the status of the Raman configuration displays the value, “Tuned by ANS”. If not, go to
Step 1 to repeat the procedure again.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-490 Restore Raman Link After a Fiber Cut Occurs
Note This procedure does not calculate the Raman pump ratio. The Raman pump ratio is not expected to
change after the fiber cut is repaired.
Caution This procedure affects traffic. Ensure that nobody is working on the nodes before you begin.
Step 1 Complete the “NTP-G54 Provision and Verify a DWDM Network” procedure on page 15-33.
Ensure that the network traffic is restored.
Step 2 Verify if the restore procedure was successful. Perform the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-RAMP-C
or OPT-RAMP-CE amplifier to display the card view.
b. Click the Maintenance > Installation tabs.
c. Verify the value of the Fiber Cut Recovery column. The possible values are:
• Executed— The restore procedure was completed successfully.
Purpose This procedure tunes Raman set points after a fiber cut has been repaired.
The Raman total power value is calculated again, and the original Raman
gain is restored.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
• Pending—The restore procedure is incomplete.
• Failed —The system failed to execute the procedure.
d. If the status is Pending or Failed in Step 2c., perform the following steps:
• Click the Maintenance > APC & Restore tabs.
• Click Restore from Fiber Cut. This recalculates the Raman gain on the span and verifies if this
value is consistent with the ANS set point for Raman gain.
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G53 Set Up Timing
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the node where you will set up timing. If you are already
logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G95 Set Up External or Line Timing” task on page 15-27 if an external building
integrated timing supply (BITS) source is available. This is the most common ONS 15454 timing setup
method.
Step 3 If an external BITS source is not available, complete the “DLP-G96 Set Up Internal Timing” task on
page 15-30. This task can provide only Stratum 3 timing.
Step 4 Repeat this procedure at each node in the network.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G95 Set Up External or Line Timing
Step 1 In node view (single-node mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > Timing >
General tabs.
Purpose This procedure provisions Cisco ONS 15454 timing.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task defines the ONS 15454 timing source (external or line).
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 2 In the General Timing area, complete the following information:
• Timing Mode—Choose External if the ONS 15454 derives its timing from a BITS source wired to
the backplane pins (ANSI) or a MIC-C/T/P front-mount electrical connection (FMEC) (ETSI);
choose Line if timing is derived from an OSC-CSM or OSCM card that is optically connected to the
timing node. A third option, Mixed, allows you to set both external and line timing references.
Because Mixed timing might cause timing loops, we do not recommend its use. Use this mode with
care.
Note In ONS 15454 M6 the BITS is connected to ECU or ECU2 BITS Connectors. Refer to
“DLP-G296 Install Timing Wires on ONS 15454 M6 - ANSI” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide. In ONS 15454 M2 the BITS is connected to BITS connectors
on the Power Unit.
• SSM Message Set—Choose the Generation 2 synchronization status messaging (SSM) option. See
Timing Reference for more information about SSM, including definitions of the SONET timing
levels.
Note Generation 1 is used only by SONET or SDH ONS 15454 nodes that are connected to
equipment that does not support Generation 2.
• Quality of RES—Sets the timing quality for the user-defined, reserved (RES) S1 byte if your timing
sources supports RES. Most timing sources do not use RES. If it does not support RES, choose
RES=DUS (do not use for timing reference). Qualities are displayed in descending quality order as
ranges. For example, in Generation 1 SSM, ST3 Timing >
General tabs.
Step 2 In the General Timing area, enter the following:
• Timing Mode—Set to External.
• SSM Message Set—Set to Generation 1.
• Quality of RES—Does not apply to internal timing.
• Revertive—Does not apply to internal timing.
• Reversion Time—Does not apply to internal timing.
Step 3 In the Reference Lists area, enter the following information:
• NE Reference
– Ref 1—Set to Internal Clock.
– Ref 2—Set to Internal Clock.
– Ref 3—Set to Internal Clock.
• BITS-1 Out/BITS-2 Out—Set to None.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click the BITS Facilities tab.
Step 6 In the BITS Facilities area, change the BITS In state and BITS Out state to OOS for BITS 1 and BITS 2.
Disregard the other BITS Facilities settings; they are not relevant to internal timing.
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G350 Use the Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix Report
Step 1 Display a printed copy of the Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix report for your network. The report
can be exported in Microsoft Excel (.xls) or HTML format.
Purpose This task describes how to use the Cisco Transport Planner traffic matrix
report to provision and verify a DWDM network.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files, page 14-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 2 View the following information:
• Service Demand—Lists the general service demand from site to site.
• Service Circuit—Lists the service circuit.
• OCH-CC Src—Lists the optical channel client connection (OCHCC) source site and the shelf
direction, either Side B or Side A.
• OCH-CC Src Position—Lists the OCHCC source rack, shelf, and slot.
• OCH-CC Src Unit—Lists the OCHCC source TXP, MXP, or ITU-T line card.
• OCH-CC Src Port—Lists the OCHCC source port.
• A/D Src Position—Lists the optical channel add/drop card source rack, shelf, and slot.
• A/D Src Unit—Lists the optical channel add/drop card source TXP, MXP, or ITU-T line card.
• A/D Src Port—Lists the optical channel add/drop card source port.
• OCH-CC Dst—Lists the OCHCC destination site and shelf direction, either Side B or Side A.
• OCH-CC Dst Position—Lists the OCHCC destination rack, shelf, and slot.
• OCH-CC Dst Unit—Lists the OCHCC destination TXP, MXP, or ITU-T line card.
• OCH-CC Dst Port—Lists the OCHCC destination port.
• A/D Dst Position—Lists the optical channel add/drop card destination rack, shelf, and slot
• A/D Dst Unit—Lists the optical channel add/drop card destination TXP, MXP, or ITU-T line card.
• A/D Dst Port—Lists the optical channel add/drop card destination port.
– Dest Unit is the product ID of the optical path source card.
– Dest Port is the port label reported on the front panel of the optical path destination card.
• Cl Service Type—Identifies the service type of the optical channel.
• Protection—Identifies the type of protection used for the optical channel:
– Optical paths for unprotected-Side B and unprotected-Side A optical channels are routed along
one direction only in the network.
– Optical paths for Y-cable, fiber-switched, and client 1+1 optical channels are routed along two
independent directions in the network.
• Op Bypass Site Name—Identifies where the optical channel is dropped and reinserted when it is not
terminated on a TXP or MXP card (optical bypass).
Note If the word None appears in the Op Bypass Site Name column, no optical bypass is defined
for the optical channel.
• Wavelength—Identifies the wavelength used for the optical channel. Table 16-6 on page 16-20 lists
the thirty-two available wavelengths.
• DWDM Interface Type—Identifies the DWDM interface type that is used for the optical channel:
– Transponder indicates that a transponder (TXP), muxponder (MXP), or DWDM pluggable port
module is used for the optical channel.
– Line Card indicates that an ITU line card is used for the optical channel.
• DWDM Card Type—Identifies the type of TXP or line card that is used for the optical channel. For
information about card types supported by Cisco Transport Planner, see Cisco Transport Planner
DWDM Operations Guide.15-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G54 Provision and Verify a DWDM Network
Note In this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 6, and Side B refers to Slots 12 through 17.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task to log in to an ONS 15454 node on the network.
Step 2 Click the Alarms tab:
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not turned on. See the DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering task, as
necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment (EQPT) alarms appear. If equipment failure alarms appear, investigate and
resolve them before continuing. Refer to Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for
procedures.
Step 3 Using the Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix (see Table 14-1 on page 14-4) for your site, identify
the first channel (ITU wavelength) to be provisioned. Use the TXP, MXP, or line card that corresponds
to the selected wavelength.
Step 4 For the ITU wavelength identified in Step 3, create an optical channel client connection (OCHCC)
circuit or optical channel network connection (OCHNC) circuit, or optical channel trail circuit using one
of the following tasks:
• DLP-G346 Provision Optical Channel Client Connections, page 16-17.
• DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-41.
• DLP-G395 Create an Optical Channel Trail, page 16-34.
.After creating the OCHCC or OCHNC circuit, return to this procedure and continue with Step 5.
Purpose This procedure describes how to turn-up an optical service in MSTP
networks. It also provides a guidance to perform an entry-level optical
performances verification of an optical circuit
(OCH-NC/OCH-CC/OCHTrail) created on the MSTP networks.
Tools/Equipment Test set or protocol analyzer
Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards.
Provisioning procedures of these cards are provided in Chapter 11,
“Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Note Every time a channel is created in the DWDM network, the amplifiers automatically calculate
the optical output power needed to maintain a constant power level on each channel when
working in Gain Control. If the amplifier is working in power control, APC tool is used for
amplifiers power level calculation and setting. Automatic power control (APC) runs when you
create new circuits. APC also runs periodically (every 60 minutes) to check and monitor power
levels in all the significant sections of the network. If the span length changes, APC modifies
amplifier gains and modifies express variable optical attenuation (VOA). For more information
about APC, see the Chapter 13, “Network Reference.”
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Circuits tab. Verify
that the OCHCC or OCHNC created in Step 4 has a DISCOVERED status and an IS state. If so, continue
with Step 6. If not, complete “NTP-G183 Diagnose and Fix OCHNC and OCH Trail Circuits” task on
page 16-63.
Step 6 Click the circuit and click Edit.
Step 7 In the Edit Circuit dialog box, click the State tab.
Step 8 In the Cross-Connections table, verify that the circuit path is correct and record all the nodes that appear
in the Node column. The first node is the circuit source, and the last node is the circuit destination. If
the circuit path is incorrect, delete the circuit and go back to Step 4 to create a new circuit.
Step 9 Perform the entry-level performance verification of the optical power levels matching with expected
setpoints for the OCH-circuit identified in Step 8.
Optical verification is done for cards in the OCH-circuit. The verification must be done node by node,
following the logical signal flow from source to destination node.
Verify the power levels on the following:
a. Fixed or reconfigurable add/drop cards.
b. Amplifiers, including the raman cards.
Note You need to verify the power setpoint for OPT-PSM cards in the path protection configuration.
Step 10 Display the circuit source node in node view (single-shelf mode), or shelf view (multishelf mode).
Following the signal flow from the TXP, MXP, or line card Trunk ports, if an fixed or reconfigurable
add/drop card is installed, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 11.
Note Use of Node Functional View to identify at a glance, the logical signal flow in complex nodes.
a. In node view (single-node mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector area, select the first fixed or reconfigurable add/drop card to be checked. Identify the
power parameter and record the corresponding port and active value from the parameter list.
c. Check the power setpoint on the ports displayed in the Port field in CTC. The add/drop cards must
meet this output power setpoint per channel.
d. Display the selected fixed or reconfigurable add/drop module in card view:
e. Click the Provisioning tabs.
f. Locate the port selected in step b in the CTC menu.15-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Note The CTC displays the name according to the card installed.
g. Identify the row associated to the Port. Check the value reported in Power or Power To column in
CTC.
– If the card value matches the VOA Power Ref. cell or the recorded Power value, with +/- 1 dB
of tolerance, continue with Step 11.
Note VOA Power Ref at card level must be equal to the Power Active Value recorded in step b. If not,
go back to Node view and click the ANS button. Then repeat this procedure.
– If the value is out of tolerance range from the VOA Power Ref, contact your next level of
support.
Step 11 Display the circuit source node in node view (single-shelf mode), or shelf view (multishelf mode).
Following the signal flow, if an amplifier card is installed, complete the following steps.
Note Use of Node Functional View to identify the logical signal flow in complex nodes at a glance.
If not, continue with Step 12.
a. In node view (single-node mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector area, click the amplifier card to be checked. Identify the power parameter and record
the corresponding port and active value from the parameter list.
c. Check the power setpoint on the ports displayed in the Port field in CTC. The add/drop cards must
meet this output power setpoint per channel.
d. Display the selected amplifier in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs. Identify the row associated to the
Port selected in step b. Check the signal output power value.
– If the value is equal to or greater (due to ASE accumulation) than the value shown in the
Channel Power Ref cell, continue with Step 12.
Note Channel Power Reference at card level must be equal to the Power Active Value noted in step
b. If not, go back to Node view and click the ANS button. Then repeat this procedure.
– If the value is lower than the value shown in the Channel Power Reference cell, contact your
next level of support.
Step 12 Go to the Edit Circuit dialog box and move to the next intermediate node in node view (single-shelf
mode), or shelf view (multishelf mode). Following the signal flow, repeat Step 10 and Step 11 in order
to check fixed or reconfigurable add/drop cards and amplifiers cards.
When all the intermediate nodes have been checked, move to Step 13 to verify the destination node.
Step 13 Display the Destination node in node view (single-shelf mode), or shelf view (multishelf mode).
Following the signal flow, if an amplifier card is installed, complete the power levels check according
with Step 11.15-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Complete the power level verification on the fixed or reconfigurable add/drop card that is dropping the
signal using the following steps:
a. In node view (single-node mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector area, click the last fixed or reconfigurable drop card to be checked. Identify the drop
power parameter among the optical parameters and record the correspondent Port and Active Value.
c. Check the power setpoint on the ports displayed in the Port field in CTC. The cards must meet this
Drop Power setpoint per channel.
d. Display the selected fixed or reconfigurable add/drop module in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning tabs.
f. Locate the port selected in step b in the CTC menu.
Note The CTC displays the name according to the card installed.
g. Identify the row associated to the Port. Check the value reported in Power or Power To column in
CTC.
– If the card value matches the VOA Power Ref. cell (when present) or the recorded Power Drop
value, with +/- 2 dB of tolerance, continue with Step 14.
Note VOA Power Ref at card level must be equal to the Power Drop Active Value recorded in step b.
If not, go back to Node view and click the ANS button. Then repeat this procedure.
– If the value is out of tolerance range from the VOA Power Ref, contact your next level of
support.
Step 14 Check the received power range on TXP, MXP, or line cards:
a. Navigate to the node where the first TXP, MXP, or line card is installed.
b. Display the TXP, MXP, or line card in card view.
c. Complete the DLP-G136 Clear Selected PM Counts.
d. Click the Performance > Optics PM tabs.
e. Record the values shown in the RX Optical Pwr field.
f. Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
g. Verify that the value in Step e falls between the values shown for the RX Power High and
RX Power Low. If so, continue with Step 15. If not, complete one of the following.
– Power lower than range—Clean the trunk fiber at the patch panel and on the TXP or MXP card.
Repeat Steps e through g. If the power is still too low, contact your next level of support.
– Power higher than range—Add attenuation to the fiber and repeat Steps e through g. If the
power still does not fall within the range, contact your next level of support.
Step 15 Perform a short-term bit error rate (BER) test:
a. Complete the DLP-G136 Clear Selected PM Counts for the TXP, MXP, or line card.
b. Display the TXP, MXP, or line card in card view.
c. Click the Performance > Payload PM tabs, or, if OTN is provisioned, the Performance >
OTN PM tabs. 15-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
d. Perform a short-term BER test using a test signal from a test set or protocol analyzer.
e. Monitor the payload performance monitoring (PM) for at least 10 minutes for errors.
Note To see an accurate PM count, the BER test results must be consistent with the transmitted
bit rate for at least 10 minutes.
Note For information about using a test set or protocol analyzer, see the test set or protocol
analyzer user guide.
Step 16 Create a new OCHNC or OCHCC circuit for the next ITU wavelength listed in the Cisco Transport
Planner Traffic Matrix and perform one of the following tasks:
• If the new circuit optical path is not including nodes different from those the first circuits belongs
to, perform only steps from Step 13 to Step 15.
• If the new circuit optical path includes new nodes, do the proper optical checks:
– Step 10 and Step 11 if the new node is the Source node
– Step 12 if the new nodes are intermediate nodes
– Step 13 if the new node is the destination node
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G56 Verify the OSNR
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at an ONS 15454 on the network.
Step 2 Using an optical spectrum analyzer, check the received OSNR for each transmitted channel on both ends
of the span. Identify the last OSC-CSM, OPT-PRE, or OPT-BST MON port that the channel passes
through before it is dropped.
Note The OPT-PRE reference also applies to the OPT-AMP-17-C card operating in OPT-PRE mode
and the OPT-BST reference also applies to the OPT-AMP-17-C card operating in OPT-LINE
mode.
Step 3 If OPT-PRE cards are installed with an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card, use the OPT-PRE
MON port.
Purpose This procedure verifies the optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR). The
OSNR is the ratio between the signal power level and the noise power level.
Tools/Equipment Optical spectrum analyzer
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Note For OSNR values for each card class, see Chapter 4, “Optical Amplifier Cards.”
Step 4 If the OSNR is too low, check the following, depending on your node configuration:
Note The purpose of this step is not to improve the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), but to match the
per-channel power level within the RX port power range.
• Check the fiber connections between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the
OPT-PRE amplifier. If needed, clean the connectors. See the NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors
procedure.
• On the near-end OPT-BST amplifier, check the equalization of the added channels at the monitor
output.
• On the OPT-PRE amplifier, check the output power on both COM TX and DC TX ports.
• On the far-end OPT-PRE amplifier, check the amplifier gain tilt at the monitor output.
If the OSNR is still too low, contact your next level of support.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 2 and 4 for all traffic in the network.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G142 Perform a Protection Switch Test
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at an ONS 15454 on the network.
Purpose This procedure tests the optical path, client TXP, MXP, GE_XP and
GE_XPE (when provisioned in 10GE or 20GE MXP mode), 10GE_XP and
10GE_XPE (when provisioned in 10GE TXP mode), and OTU2_XP (when
provisioned in TXP mode) cards and the Y-cable protection groups in your
network for proper operation. The test signals can be generated by either
the actual client device or a test set (whichever is available). We
recommend that you repeat this test at each node in the network where
protection group traffic is dropped.
Tools/Equipment A list of protection groups. This information is provided in the
Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix.
A test set or actual client device that provides the required payload for the
circuits that are provisioned.
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite; personnel are required to be on site at each end of the circuit under
test.
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 2 Identify the Y-cable circuit to be tested by viewing the Traffic Matrix for your site. Locate the TXP,
MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards in the ONS 15454 node that will
be used for the protection group.
Step 3 Verify that the Y-cable protection group is provisioned:
a. In node view (single-node mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Protection tabs.
b. In the Protect and Working areas, confirm that the correct TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards are in the Y-cable protection group by viewing the slot
number and card type.
c. If the required protection group is not provisioned, stop and perform the “NTP-G33 Create a
Y-Cable Protection Group” procedure on page 11-162. Otherwise, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Repeat Step 3 for each Y-cable protection group at the node. When all protection groups are verified,
continue with the next step.
Step 5 Physically connect the transmitter of the client or test set to either Port 10 or Port 12 of the Y-cable
module protecting the test circuit. (See Table 14-7 on page 14-109 and Table 14-8 on page 14-109.)
Step 6 If you connected the transmitter to Port 10, connect the client or test set receiver to Port 5 on the Y-cable
module. If not, connect the client or test set receiver to Port 11 on the Y-cable module.
Step 7 At the far-end site for the test circuit, physically loop the Y-cable module as follows:
a. If this is the first client on the Y-cable module, loop Port 10 to Port 5 on the far-end Y-cable module.
b. If this is the second client on the Y-cable module, loop Ports 11 and 12 on the far-end Y-cable
module.
Step 8 At the near-end site for the test circuit, place the client device or test set into service and begin
transmitting the required payload.
Step 9 In CTC, display the near-end site in node view (single-node mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 10 Click the Maintenance > Protection tabs.
Step 11 In the Protection Groups area, highlight the protection group to be tested.
Step 12 In the Selected Group area, identify the active slot and the standby slot.
Step 13 Verify that the LED s on the physical cards in the shelf match the following:
a. For the active TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card, record the
slot number: _____. Verify that the port LEDs appear as follows:
– DWDM port is green.
– Client port is green.
b. For the standby TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card, record
the slot number: _____. Verify that the port LEDs appear as follows:
– DWDM port is green.
– Client port is not illuminated or amber, depending on the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card.
Step 14 In the Selected Group area, highlight the active TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE,
or OTU2_XP slot.
Step 15 From the Switch Commands area below the Selected Group area, click Manual, then click YES.15-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 16 From the Selected Group area, record the following information and verify that the active and standby
TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP slot numbers are the opposite of
Step 13.
a. For the active TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card, record the
slot number: _____. Verify that the port LEDs appear as follows:
– DWDM port is green.
– Client port is green.
b. For the standby TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card, record
the slot number: _____. Verify that the port LEDs appear as follows:
– DWDM port is green.
– Client port is not illuminated or amber, depending on the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card.
Step 17 Verify that the LEDs on the physical cards in the shelf match the following:
a. For the active TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP slot LEDs:
– DWDM port is green.
– Client port is green.
b. For the standby TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP slot LEDs:
– DWDM port is green.
– Client port is not illuminated.
Step 18 Confirm that the client or test set at the local site is operating normally without alarms. If the test set is
reporting active alarms, contact your next level of support.
Note It is normal to see a traffic hit on the test set during a protection switch.
Step 19 From the Switch Commands area below the Selected Group area, click Clear, then click YES to return
the protection group to the original state.
Step 20 Repeat Steps 5 through 19 for each protection group at your site.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G164 Configure Link Management Protocol
Purpose This procedure configures Link Management Protocol (LMP). LMP
manages the channels and links that are required between nodes for
routing, signaling, and link management.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Note This procedure is normally required only when the Cisco ONS 15454 must run traffic to and from a
Calient PXC, a Cisco CRS-1 router, or a Cisco ASR 9000 router.
Note Cisco ONS Software Release 9.4 supports Cisco CRS-1 routers using Cisco IOS XR Software Release
3.9.0 and Cisco ASR 9000 routers using Cisco IOS XR Software Release 4.1.0. If you have an earlier
version of the Cisco IOS XR software, you cannot configure LMP on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 router, and the router will be visible as an unknown node in the CTC network view.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task to log in to the ONS 15454 on the network.
Step 2 To enable LMP, complete the “DLP-G372 Enable LMP” task on page 15-41.
Step 3 To set up one or more control channels, complete the “DLP-G373 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Control
Channels” task on page 15-42.
Step 4 To set up one or more traffic engineering (TE) links, complete the “DLP-G374 Create, Edit, and Delete
LMP TE Links” task on page 15-45.
Step 5 To set up one or more data links, complete the “DLP-G378 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Data Links”
task on page 15-46.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G372 Enable LMP
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > Comm Channels > LMP > General tabs.
Step 2 In the Configuration area, click the Enable LMP check box to enable the LMP function.
Step 3 In the Local Node Id text entry box, enter the local node ID in the form of an IP address.
Note Do not set the LMP Local Node ID to another IP address in use on the network. This introduces
a duplicate IP address in the network for traffic going to the IP address that is used as the LMP
Local Node ID. We recommended to you set the LMP Local Node ID to the node's IP address,
because this does not introduce a duplicate IP address in the network.
Step 4 If you are going to use LMP to manage a control channel between a Calient PXC node and a
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node or between a Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router and
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node, ensure that the LMP-WDM check box is unchecked.
Purpose This task enables the LMP function on the ONS 15454 node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 5 If you are going to use LMP to manage a control channel between the ONS 15454 nodes, check the
LMP-WDM check box and use the Role field to choose one of the following roles:
• PEER, to use LMP to manage links between two nodes where the other node is configured as OLS.
• OLS, to use LMP to manage links between two nodes where the other node is configured as PEER.
The role selection is available only when LMP-WDM is enabled on the local node. Both the local and
remote nodes must be configured with LMP-WDM enabled.
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 In the Status area, verify that the Operational State is Up. This indicates that LMP is enabled and the
link is active.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G373 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Control Channels
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > Comm Channels > LMP > Control Channels tabs.
Step 2 To create a control channel, click Create. The Create LMP Control Channel dialog box appears.
Note The values of the Admin State, Requested Hello Interval, Min Hello Interval, Max Hello
Interval, Requested Hello Dead Interval, Min Hello Dead Interval, and Max Hello Dead Interval
fields correspond to the values specified for these fields in the NODE > lmp section of the node
view Provisioning > Defaults tabs. If you change the NODE > lmp values, those values are
reflected as defaults in the Create LMP Control Channel dialog box. You can change the default
values using the dialog box. However, the NODE > lmp values are always used as the initial
defaults.
Step 3 In the Create LMP Control Channel dialog box, complete the following:
• Admin State—Select unlocked (if you are using an ETSI shelf) or IS (if you are using an ANSI
shelf) to establish the control channel; otherwise, select locked, disabled (ETSI) or OOS-DSBLD
(ANSI) to set the control channel to out of service.
• Local Port—Select Routed if the control channel is to be sent over the control plane or management
network; otherwise, if the control channel is to be sent over the same fiber as the traffic (either in
the payload or in the overhead), select one of the available traffic ports.
• Local Port Id—(Display only) Displays the local port identifier assigned by the node.
Purpose This task creates, edits, or deletes one or more LMP control channels
between pairs of Cisco ONS 15454 nodes, between a Calient PXC and a
Cisco ONS 15454, or between a Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router
and a Cisco ONS 15454 node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G372 Enable LMP, page 15-41
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
• Remote Node Type—Select 15454 or non-CRS1 if you are creating a control channel between two
Cisco ONS 15454 nodes or between a Calient PXC and a Cisco ONS 15454 node; select CRS-1 if
you are creating a control channel between a Cisco CRS-1 router and a Cisco ONS 15454 node;
otherwise, select ASR9K if you are creating a control channel between a Cisco ASR 9000 router
and a Cisco ONS 15454 node.
• Remote Node Address—In dotted-decimal format, enter the number that identifies the IP address of
the remote node (either a Calient PXC peer node, a Cisco CRS-1 router, Cisco ASR 9000 router, or
a Cisco ONS 15454 node) where the control channel will be established.
• Remote Node ID—Initially, CTC autopopulates this value to the remote node IP address that you
just assigned. However, you can change the identifier to any nonzero 32-bit integer in dotted
decimal format (for example, 10.92.29.10).
• Requested Hello Interval—Enter the Requested Hello Interval in milliseconds (ms). Before sending
Hello messages, the Hello Interval and Hello Dead Interval parameters must be established by the
local and remote nodes. These parameters are exchanged in the Config message. The Hello Interval
indicates how frequently LMP Hello messages will be sent; the interval must be in the 300 ms to
5000 ms range. The Min Hello Interval must be less than or equal to the Requested Hello Interval,
and the Requested Hello Interval must be less than or equal to the Max Hello Interval.
• Min Hello Interval—Enter the minimum Hello Interval in milliseconds. When the two nodes
negotiate for the Hello Interval, the value that you enter here will be the minimum Hello Interval
acceptable for the local node. The Min Hello Interval must be in the 300 ms to 5000 ms range. The
Min Hello Interval must be less than or equal to the Requested Hello Interval and the Requested
Hello Interval must be less than or equal to the Max Hello Interval.
• Max Hello Interval—Enter the maximum Hello Interval in milliseconds. When the two nodes
negotiate for the Hello Interval, the value that you enter here will be the maximum Hello Interval
acceptable for the local node. The Max Hello Interval must be in the 300 ms to 5000 ms range. The
Min Hello Interval must be less than or equal to the Requested Hello Interval and the Requested
Hello Interval must be less than or equal to the Max Hello Interval.
• Requested Hello Dead Interval—Enter the Requested Hello Dead Interval in milliseconds. The
Requested Hello Dead Interval indicates how long a device should wait to receive a Hello message
before declaring a control channel dead. The Requested Hello Dead interval must be in the 2000 ms
to 20000 ms range. The Min Hello Dead Interval must be less than or equal to the Requested Hello
Dead Interval and the Requested Hello Dead Interval must be less than or equal to the Max Hello
Dead Interval.
Note The Requested Hello Dead Interval must be at least three times greater than the Requested
Hello Interval.
• Min Hello Dead Interval—Enter the minimum Hello Dead Interval in milliseconds. The minimum
Hello Dead Interval must be in the 2000 ms to 20000 ms range. The minimum Hello Dead Interval
must be less than or equal to the Requested Hello Dead Interval and the Requested Hello Dead
Interval must be less than or equal to the Max Hello Dead Interval. When the two nodes negotiate
for the Hello Dead Interval, the value that you enter here will be the minimum Hello Dead Interval
acceptable for the local node.
Note The value of the Min Hello Dead Interval must be greater than the Min Hello Interval.15-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
• Max Hello Dead Interval—Enter the maximum Hello Dead Interval in milliseconds. This interval
must be in the 2000 ms to 20000 ms range. The Min Hello Dead Interval must be less than or equal
to the Requested Hello Dead Interval and the Requested Hello Dead Interval must be less than or
equal to the Max Hello Dead Interval. When the two nodes negotiate for the Hello Dead Interval,
the value that you enter here will be the maximum Hello Dead Interval acceptable for the local node.
Note The Max Hello Dead Interval must be greater than the Max Hello Interval.
Step 4 Click OK to accept the parameters that you have entered, or click Cancel to return to the Control
Channels tab without creating a control channel.
Step 5 If you have chosen the Remote Node Type as CRS-1 or ASR9K in Step 3 and if you have chosen that
automatic LMP configuration in the “DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series,
or Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters” task on page 15-50, a confirmation dialog box is displayed to
indicate that this operation will also change the configuration of the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000
router. Click Yes.
Step 6 If you created a control channel, verify that the parameters for the new Control Channel appear properly
in the Control Channels tab.
Note The Actual Hello Interval and Actual Hello Dead Interval parameters reflect the values of these
parameters as a result of the negotiated agreement of the local and remote nodes. They may be
different than the requested values.
Step 7 After the LMP control channel has been created, observe the status of the channel in the Operational
State column of the Control Channels tab, and take the appropriate action as shown in the following list:
• Up—The control channel contacted the far-end node and successfully negotiated a control channel.
• Down—LMP is enabled and the link is inactive. Ensure that the Admin State of the control channel
is unlocked (ETSI) or IS (ANSI) and not disabled (ETSI) or OOS-DSBLD (ANSI). If the state still
does not transition to Up, the far-end control channel might have disjointed Hello negotiation times
that prevent a control channel from transitioning to the Up state. For example, the local ONS 15454
Min Hello Interval and Max Hello Interval might be 900 to 1000, while the remote Min Hello
Interval and Max Hello Interval is 1100 to 1200.
• Config Send—The connection could not be made to the remote node. Check to make sure that the
remote node address and remote node ID addresses are correct.
• Config Received—The local node sent a configuration request to the remote node and received a
response of either ConfigNack or ConfigAck.
• Unknown
Step 8 To delete a control channel, click the channel row to highlight it and click Delete. A confirmation dialog
box appears that allows you to click OK or Cancel.
Step 9 To edit a control channel, click the channel row to highlight it and click Edit. A dialog box appears that
allows you to change the control channel parameters. You can then click OK or Cancel. If you are
editing a control channel that involves a Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router, a confirmation dialog
box is displayed. Click Yes.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).15-45
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G374 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP TE Links
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > Comm Channels > LMP > TE Links tabs.
Step 2 To create a TE link, click Create. The Create LMP TE Link dialog box appears.
Step 3 In the Create LMP TE Link dialog box, complete the following:
• Admin State—Select unlocked (for ETSI shelves) or IS (for ANSI shelves) to put the TE link in
service; otherwise, select locked, disabled (ETSI) or OOS-DSBLD (ANSI) to set the TE link to out
of service.
• Remote Node Id—Select a remote node (either a Calient PXC peer node, a Cisco CRS-1 router, a
Cisco ASR 9000 router, or a Cisco ONS 15454 node) for the other end of the TE link.
• Remote TE Link Id—Enter an unsigned 32-bit value (such as 0x00000001) to identify the remote
node identifier for the other end of the TE link. This option is not available if you have chosen the
automatic LMP configuration in “DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series,
or Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters” task on page 15-50.
• MUX Capability—Select the MUX capability. This option is not available if you are creating a TE
link that involves a Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router.
Step 4 Click OK to accept the parameters that you have entered and create the TE link, or click Cancel to return
to the Control Channels tab without creating a TE link.
Step 5 If you created a TE link, verify that the parameters for the new TE link now appear properly in the TE
Links tab.
Step 6 After the TE link has been created, observe the status of the TE link in the Operational State column of
the TE Links pane, and take the appropriate action as shown in the following list:
• Up—The TE link is active.
• Down—Ensure that the Admin State of the TE link is unlocked (ETSI) or IS (ANSI) and not
disabled (ETSI) or OOS-DSBLD (ANSI). The TE link does not transition to the Up state until a data
link has been provisioned.
• Init—Verify that the Remote Node ID and Remote TE Link ID values are correct for the remote
node. Verify that the remote node is using the Cisco ONS 15454 or the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 router IP address for its remote node IP and that the remote node is using the local TE link
index for its remote TE link index.
Step 7 To delete a TE link, click the link row to highlight it and click Delete. A confirmation dialog box appears
that allows you to click OK or Cancel.
Step 8 To edit a TE link, click the link row to highlight it and click Edit. A dialog box appears that allows you
to change the TE link parameters. You can then click OK or Cancel.
Purpose This task creates, edits, or deletes TE links and their association to
neighboring LMP nodes.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G372 Enable LMP, page 15-41
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-46
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G378 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Data Links
Note A port cannot be deleted if it is being used by a data link. A card cannot be deleted if any of its ports are
being used by data links. Changing the state of the port impacts the state of a data link using the port.
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > Comm Channels > LMP > Data Links tabs.
Step 2 To create a data link, click Create. The Create LMP Data Link dialog box appears.
Step 3 In the Create LMP Data Link dialog box, complete the following:
• Local Port—Select one of the available local ports for the data link.
• Local Port Id—(Display only) Displays the local port identifier.
• Data Link Type—Select Port or Component. A data link is considered to be either a port or a
component link on each node where it terminates, depending on the multiplexing capability of the
endpoint on that link; component links are multiplex capable, whereas ports are not multiplex
capable.
• Local TE Link Id—Select an identifier for one of the local TE links that has already been created.
• Remote CRS Port Id—Select one of the available remote Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 ports for
the data link. This option is not available if you are creating a data link between two
Cisco ONS 15454 nodes.
• Remote Port Id—Enter an unsigned 32-bit value (such as 0x00000001) to identify the remote node
identifier for the other end of the data link. This option is not available if you have chosen the
automatic LMP configuration in the “DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000
Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters” task on page 15-50.
Step 4 Click OK to accept the parameters you have entered and create the data link, or click Cancel to return
to the Data Links tab without creating a data link.
Step 5 If you are creating a data link that involves a Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router and if you have
chosen the automatic LMP configuration in the “DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR
9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters” task on page 15-50, a confirmation dialog box is
displayed to indicate that this operation will also change the configuration of the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco
ASR 9000 router. Click Yes.
Purpose This task creates, edits, or deletes one or more data links, which define the
node’s transport parameters. CTC supports up to 256 LMP data links.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G54 Provision and Verify a DWDM Network, page 15-33
DLP-G372 Enable LMP, page 15-41
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-47
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 6 If you created a data link, verify that the parameters for the new data link now appear properly in the
Data Links tab.
Step 7 After the data link has been created, observe its status in the Operational State column of the Data Links
tab, and take the appropriate action as shown in the following list:
• Up–Alloc or Up–Free—If the data link state does not transition to Up–Alloc or Up–Free, verify that
the port is in service. Verification must be done using the CTC card view > Provisioning tab for the
cards. (The difference between Up–Alloc and Up–Free is that an Up–Alloc data link is allocated for
data traffic. An Up–Free data link is not allocated for traffic. The far end is either not ready to
receive traffic through this port, or the path is being used as a backup in case some other allocated
data link goes down).
• Down—The data link will be in the Down state if the port is not unlocked or not in-service. Verify
that the remote port ID for the far-end data link is correct. On the far end, verify that the data link
is using the local port ID as its remote port ID.
Step 8 To delete a data link, click the data link row to highlight it and click Delete. A confirmation dialog box
appears that allows you to click OK or Cancel.
Step 9 To edit a data link, click the data link row to highlight it and click Edit. A dialog box appears that allows
you to change the data link parameters. You can then click OK or Cancel. If you are editing a data link
that involves a Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router, a confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click
Yes.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G233 Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco
CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM Node
Note This procedure is normally required only when the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node must run traffic to
and from a Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task to log in to a DWDM node on the network.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series
Router Parameters” task on page 15-50 to configure the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router
parameters.
Purpose This procedure configures LMP on the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node
and on the corresponding Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 physical layer
interface module (PLIM) port.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-48
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 3 Complete the “DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Series
Router and Verify Configuration” task on page 15-51 to establish a Telnet session with the Cisco CRS-1
or Cisco ASR 9000 router.
Step 4 Complete the “DLP-G510 Create a Task Group, User Group, and User Account on the Cisco CRS-1 or
Cisco ASR 9000 Series Router” task on page 15-52 to create task groups, user groups, and user accounts
on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router.
Step 5 If you have chosen the automatic LMP configuration in Step 2, complete the “NTP-G234 Automatically
Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco
ONS 15454 DWDM Node” procedure on page 15-48.
If you have chosen the manual LMP configuration in Step 2, complete the “NTP-G207 Manually
Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco
ONS 15454 DWDM Node” procedure on page 15-49.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G234 Automatically Configure Link Management Protocol
on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco ONS
15454 DWDM Node
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G372 Enable LMP, page 15-41 to enable the LMP function on the DWDM node.
Step 2 Complete the DLP-G373 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Control Channels, page 15-42 to create the LMP
control channel between the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router and the DWDM node.
Step 3 Complete the DLP-G374 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP TE Links, page 15-45 to create TE links between
the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router and the DWDM node.
Step 4 Complete the DLP-G378 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Data Links, page 15-46 to create a data link,
which define the node’s transport parameters.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure automatically configures LMP on the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM node and on the corresponding Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000
PLIM port.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G233 Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or
Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node,
page 15-47
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-49
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
NTP-G207 Manually Configure Link Management Protocol on
the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco ONS
15454 DWDM Node
Note For more information about the Cisco IOS XR commands used in the DLPs, see the Cisco IOS XR
Command Reference publication at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps5845/products_product_indices_list.html.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G372 Enable LMP, page 15-41 to enable the LMP function on the DWDM node.
Step 2 Complete the DLP-G373 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Control Channels, page 15-42 to create the LMP
control channel between the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router and the DWDM node.
Step 3 Complete the DLP-G374 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP TE Links, page 15-45 to create TE links between
the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router and the DWDM node.
Step 4 In node view, click the Provisioning > Comm Channels > LMP > TE Links tab and write down the
value of the Local TE Link field so that it can be used later.
Step 5 Complete the DLP-G378 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Data Links, page 15-46 to create a data link,
which define the node’s transport parameters.
Step 6 In node view, click the Provisioning > Comm Channels > LMP > Data Links tab and write down the
value of the Local Port Id field so that it can be used later.
Step 7 Complete the DLP-G482 Configure a Static Route, page 15-55 to configure a static route.
Step 8 Complete the DLP-G483 Configure Local and Remote TE Links, page 15-56 to configure the local and
remote TE links.
Step 9 Complete the DLP-G484 Enable the LMP Message Exchange, page 15-58 to enable LMP message
exchange with the LMP neighbor.
Step 10 In node view, click the Provisioning > Comm Channels > LMP > Data Links tab and from the Local
Port field, write down the card and the port involved in the LMP link. Double-click the card involved
in the LMP link. In card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs and write down
the value of the Actual Wavelength field for the port involved in the LMP link.
Step 11 Complete the DLP-G511 Configure the Wavelength on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router,
page 15-59 to configure the wavelength on the PLIM port of the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router.
Purpose This procedure manually configures LMP on the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM node and on the corresponding Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000
PLIM port.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G233 Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or
Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node,
page 15-47
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-50
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 12 If you need RADIUS AAA services, complete the DLP-G494 Configure the RADIUS Server,
page 15-61 to configure a RADIUS server.
Step 13 Complete the DLP-G485 Enable Index Persistency on an SNMP Interface, page 15-62 to enable index
persistency on an SNMP interface.
Step 14 Complete the DLP-G486 Configure the LMP Router ID, page 15-63 to configure LMP router ID.
Step 15 Complete the DLP-G487 Configure the 10 Gigabit Ethernet (GE) or POS Interface, page 15-64 to
configure an interface and specify the IPv4 address for the interface.
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform DLP-G482,
DLP-G483, DLP-G484, DLP-G494, DLP-G485, and DLP-G486. The task privileges required to
perform these DLPs are similar to the privileges required for automatic LMP configuration.
Step 16 Complete the DLP-G488 Display Summary of Link Management Information, page 15-65 to display the
interface resource or a summary of link management information.
Step 17 Complete the DLP-G374 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP TE Links, page 15-45 to edit the TE link created
in Step 3. Change the Remote TE Link ID value to the value (Local TE Link ID) noted in Step 1 of the
DLP-G488 Display Summary of Link Management Information, page 15-65.
Step 18 Complete the DLP-G378 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Data Links, page 15-46 to edit the data link
created in Step 5. Change the Remote Port Id value to the value (Local Data Link ID) noted in Step 1 of
the DLP-G488 Display Summary of Link Management Information, page 15-65.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or
Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters
Step 1 From the Edit menu, choose Preferences. The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 In the Preferences dialog box, click the Router tab.
Purpose This task configures the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 series, or
Cisco 7600 series router.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • NTP-G54 Provision and Verify a DWDM Network, page 15-33.
• (Cisco CRS-1 and Cisco ASR 9000 series routers only) DLP-G372
Enable LMP, page 15-41.
• DLP-G46 Log into CTC.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-51
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 3 (Cisco CRS-1 and Cisco ASR 9000 series routers only) Leave the Skip automatic LMP configuration on
routers check box unchecked if you want CTC to automatically configure an interface on the Cisco
CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 series router for the data link. Check this check box if you want to manually
configure an interface on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 series router.
Step 4 In the Router login area, enter the following:
• Username—Specify the name of the user on the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000, or Cisco 7600
router.
• Password—Specify the user password.
• Confirm Password—Specify the password again to confirm it.
Note If you leave the Username and Password fields blank, the CTC login information (username and
password) will be used for the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 series, or Cisco 7600 series router.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000
Series Router and Verify Configuration
Purpose This task establishes a Telnet session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 router and verifies the node configuration, SSH, and/or XML module
configuration.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 telnet {ip-address | host-name}
Example:
router# telnet 10.58.41.169
Establishes a Telnet session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000
router. When the session is established, you can log in with the
root-system username and password. After you log in, the router
displays the CLI prompt for the Cisco IOS XR software.
Step 2 show install active summary
Example:
router# show install active summary
Displays a summary of the active packages in a system or secure
domain router. Ensure that the output of the show install active
summary command includes the following lines:
hfr-mpls-3.9.x
hfr-k9sec-3.9.x
hfr-mgbl-3.9.x15-52
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G510 Create a Task Group, User Group, and User Account on the Cisco
CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Series Router
Note Only users who have permission to create new task groups and configure required task privileges, or a
system administrator, can perform this task.
Step 3 show running-config
Example:
router# show running-config
Displays the contents of the currently running configuration and
verifies that Extensible Markup Language (XML) agent service and
Secure Shell (SSH) client are installed on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco
ASR 9000 router. Ensure that the output of the show running-config
command includes the following lines:
ssh server v2
ssh server session-limit sessions
ssh server rate-limit maxsessions_per_minute
vty-pool default first-vty last-vty line-template default
xml agent tty
If the output does not contain the above lines, check the SSH and/or
XML module configuration. Refer to Cisco IOS XR System Security
Command Reference and Cisco IOS XR System Management
Command Reference for details about SSH and XML configuration.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This task creates task groups, user groups, and user accounts on the Cisco
CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 series router.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose15-53
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 2 taskgroup taskgroup-name
Example:
router# taskgroup ipodwdmop
Creates a new task group and enters task group configuration
submode.
If you have chosen the automatic LMP configuration in the
DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or
Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters, page 15-50, perform Step 3. If
you have chosen the manual LMP configuration in the DLP-G508
Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or
Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters, page 15-50, perform Step 4.
Step 3 task {read | write | execute | debug}
taskid-name
Example:
router(config-tg)# task read cef
Specifies a task ID to be associated with the task group named in
Step 2. Task IDs grant permission to perform certain tasks.
Ensure that you specify the following task IDs to set up required
privileges for the automatic LMP configuration:
task read cef
task read dwdm
task read ouni
task read snmp
task read static
task read sysmgr
task read logging
task read mpls-te
task read network
task read interface
task read basic-services
task write dwdm
task write ipv4
task write ouni
task write snmp
task write static
task write mpls-te
task write network
task write interface
Step 4 task {read | write | execute | debug}
taskid-name
Example:
router(config-tg)# task read cef
Specifies a task ID to be associated with the task group named in
Step 2. Task IDs grant permission to perform certain tasks.
Ensure that you specify the following task IDs to set up required
privileges for the manual LMP configuration:
task read cef
task read dwdm
task read ouni
task read snmp
task read static
task read sysmgr
task read logging
task read mpls-te
task read network
task read interface
task read basic-services
task write interface15-54
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 5 end
Example:
router(config-tg)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to commit
the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes to the
running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 6 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 7 usergroup usergroup-name
Example:
router# usergroup ipodwdmop
Creates a new user group and enters user group configuration
submode.
Step 8 taskgroup taskgroup-name
Example:
router(config-ug)# taskgroup ipodwdmop
Associates the user group named in Step 7 with the task group named
in this step. The user group takes on the configuration attributes (task
ID list and permissions) already defined for the entered task group.
Step 9 end
Example:
router(config-ug)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to commit
the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes to the
running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 10 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 11 username user-name
Example:
router# username user123
Creates a name for a new user (or identifies a current user) and enters
username configuration submode. The user-name argument can be
only one word. Spaces and quotation marks are not allowed.
Note The user that you specify for this command must be the user
you have specified in the DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco
CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Router
Parameters, page 15-50.
Step 12 password {0 | 7} password
Example:
router(config-un)# password 0 passwd
Specifies a password for the user named in Step 11. Entering 0
following the password command specifies that an unencrypted
(clear-text) password follows. Entering 7 following the password
command specifies that an encrypted password follows.
Step 13 group group-name
Example:
router(config-un)# group ipodwdmop
Assigns the user named in Step 11 to a user group that has already
been defined through the usergroup command in Step 7.
• The user takes on all attributes of the user group, as defined by
that user group's association to various task groups.
• Each user must be assigned to at least one user group. A user may
belong to multiple user groups.
Command or Action Purpose15-55
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G482 Configure a Static Route
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform this task.
Note In the examples shown in this task, the IP address of the DWDM node is 10.58.41.22 and the IP address
of the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router is 10.58.41.169. To remove the static route configuration,
use the no form of the Cisco IOS XR command. For more information about the Cisco IOS XR
commands, see the Cisco IOS XR Command Reference at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps5845/products_product_indices_list.html.
Step 14 end
Example:
router(config-ug)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to commit
the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes to the
running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 15 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This task explains how to configure a static route.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 2 router static
Example:
router(config)# router static
Enters static router configuration mode.
Step 3 address-family ipv4 unicast
Example:
router(config-static)# address-family ipv4
unicast
Enters address family configuration mode while configuring static
routes.15-56
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G483 Configure Local and Remote TE Links
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform this task.
Note In the examples shown in this task, the IP address of the DWDM node is 10.58.41.22 and the IP address
of the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router is 10.58.41.169. To remove the local and remote TE link
configuration, use the no form of the Cisco IOS XR command. For more information about the
Cisco IOS XR commands, see the Cisco IOS XR Command Reference at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps5845/products_product_indices_list.html.
Step 4 destination-prefix prefix-mask {ip-address
| interface-type interface-instance}
Example:
router(config-static-afi)# 10.58.41.22/32
MgmtEth 0/RP0/CPU0/0
Establishes static routes in address family configuration mode.
Specify the following options for this command:
• destination-prefix—IP route prefix for the destination (that is,
DWDM node involved in the LMP link).
• prefix-mask—Prefix mask for the destination. The network
mask can be specified as either a four-part, dotted-decimal
address or can be indicated as a slash (/) and number.
• ip-address—(Optional) IP address of the next hop that can be
used to reach that network. The IP address is required, not
optional, if the interface type and number are not specified.
You can specify an IP address and an interface type and
interface number.
• interface-type—(Optional) Interface type.
• interface-instance—(Optional) Either a physical interface
instance or a virtual interface instance.
Note The interface that you specify for this command must be
the management interface that connects the CRS-1 or ASR
9000 router to the DWDM node.
Step 5 end
Example:
router(config-static-afi)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This task explains how to configure the local and remote TE links.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose15-57
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 2 mpls traffic-eng interface interface-type
interface-instance
Example:
router(config)# mpls traffic-eng interface
TenGigE 0/1/0/1
Enables Multiprotocol Label Switching-Traffic Engineering
(MPLS-TE) on an interface and enters MPLS-TE interface
submode.
Note The interface that you specify for this command must be
the optical interface related to the PLIM port involved in
the LMP link.
Step 3 lmp data-link adjacency
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-if)# lmp data-link
adjacency
Enters the LMP neighbor adjacency configuration mode.
Step 4 neighbor neighbor-name
Example:
router(config-mpls-ouni-if-adj)# neighbor
10.58.41.22
Associates an interface with a given LMP neighbor.
Step 5 remote te-link-id unnum identifier
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-if-adj)# remote
te-link-id unnum 1
Configures the LMP neighbor remote TE link ID.
Note Specify the value (converted to decimal format) noted in
Step 4 of NTP-G207 Manually Configure Link
Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node,
page 15-49 for the te-link-id unnum identifier keywords
and argument.
Step 6 remote interface-id unnum identifier
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-if-adj)# remote
interface-id unnum 57410
Configures the LMP neighbor remote interface identifier.
Note Specify the value (converted to decimal format) noted in
Step 6 of NTP-G207 Manually Configure Link
Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node,
page 15-49 for the interface-id unnum identifier
keywords and argument.
Step 7 remote switching-capability fsc
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-if-adj)# remote
switching-capability fsc
Configures the LMP neighbor remote TE interface switching
capability.
Step 8 end
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-if-adj)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —15-58
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G484 Enable the LMP Message Exchange
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform this task.
Note In the examples shown in this task, the IP address of the DWDM node is 10.58.41.22 and the IP address
of the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router is 10.58.41.169. To remove the LMP message exchange
configuration, use the no form of the Cisco IOS XR command. For more information about the
Cisco IOS XR commands, see the Cisco IOS XR Command Reference at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps5845/products_product_indices_list.html.
Purpose This task explains how to enable the LMP message exchange with the LMP
neighbor.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 2 mpls traffic-eng signalling advertise
explicit-null
Example:
router(config)# mpls traffic-eng
signalling advertise explicit-null
Specifies that tunnels terminating on a router use explicit-null
labels.
Step 3 mpls traffic-eng lmp neighbor
neighbor-name
Example:
router(config)# mpls traffic-eng lmp
neighbor 10.58.41.22
Configures or updates a new or existing LMP neighbor.
Step 4 ipcc routed
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-nbr-10.58.41.22)#
ipcc routed
Configures a routed Internet Protocol Control Channel (IPCC) for
the LMP neighbor.15-59
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G511 Configure the Wavelength on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000
Router
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform this task.
Note To remove the wavelength setting, use the no form of the Cisco IOS XR command. For more
information about the Cisco IOS XR commands, see the Cisco IOS XR Command Reference at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps5845/products_product_indices_list.html.
Step 5 remote node-id ip-address
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-nbr-10.58.41.22)#
remote node-id 10.58.41.22
Configures the remote node ID for the LMP neighbor (DWDM
node).
Step 6 end
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-nbr-10.58.41.22)#
end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This task explains how to configure the wavelength on the PLIM port of
the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose15-60
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 show controllers dwdm interface-instance
wavelength-map
Example:
router# show controllers dwdm 0/1/0/0
wavelength-map
Displays the wavelength information of an interface.
Note The interface that you specify for this command must be
the optical interface related to the PLIM port involved in
the LMP link.
The output of the show command will include the following lines:
Wavelength band: C-band
MSA ITU channel range supported: 3~84
03 196.00 1529.553
----------------------------------------
04 195.95 1529.944
----------------------------------------
05 195.90 1530.334
----------------------------------------
06 195.85 1530.725
----------------------------------------
From the output of the show command, write down the channel
number of the wavelength that matches that of the wavelength
noted in Step 10 of NTP-G207 Manually Configure Link
Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000
Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node, page 15-49.
Step 2 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 3 controller dwdm interface-instance
Example:
router(config)# controller dwdm 0/1/0/0
Configures the DWDM controller.
Note The interface that you specify for this command must be
the optical interface related to the PLIM port involved in
the LMP link.
Step 4 wavelength channel-number
Example:
router(config)# wavelength 04
Configures a specific wavelength to the DWDM controller.
Note The channel number that you specify for this command
must be the value noted down in Step 1.
Step 5 end
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-nbr-10.58.41.22)#
end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —15-61
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G494 Configure the RADIUS Server
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform this task.
Note In the examples shown in this task, the IP address of the RADIUS server is 10.58.39.57. To remove the
RADIUS server configuration, use the no form of the Cisco IOS XR command. For more information
about the Cisco IOS XR commands, see the Cisco IOS XR Command Reference document.
Purpose This task explains how to configure the RADIUS server.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
For details on configuring a node for RADIUS authentication, see the
DLP-G281 Configure the Node for RADIUS Authentication task. See the
User Guide for Cisco Secure ACS for Windows Server for more
information about configuring the RADIUS server.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 2 radius-server host ip-address [auth-port
port-number] [acct-port port-number] [key
string]
Example:
router(config)# radius-server host
10.58.39.57 auth-port 1812 acct-port 1813
key 7 12485043475F
Specifies the RADIUS server host.
Step 3 aaa group server radius group-name
Example:
router(config)# aaa group server radius
radgroup1
Groups different RADIUS server hosts into distinct lists and
enters server group configuration mode.
Step 4 server ip-address [auth-port port-number]
[acct-port port-number]
Example:
router(config-sg-radius)# server
10.58.39.57 auth-port 1812 acct-port 1813
Associates a particular RADIUS server with a defined server
group.15-62
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G485 Enable Index Persistency on an SNMP Interface
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform this task.
Note To remove the index persistency configuration, use the no form of the Cisco IOS XR command. For
more information about the Cisco IOS XR commands, see the Cisco IOS XR Command Reference
document.
Step 5 end
Example:
router(config-sg-radius)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 6 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 7 aaa authentication login {{console |
default} {group group_name | local |
none}}
Example:
router(config)# aaa authentication login
default group radgroup1 local
Configures the authentication method used for login to the Virtual
Firewall (VFW) application CLI.
Step 8 end
Example:
router(config-if)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This task explains how to enable index persistency on a Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) interface.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose15-63
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G486 Configure the LMP Router ID
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform this task.
Note In the examples shown in this task, the IP address of the DWDM node is 10.58.41.22 and the IP address
of the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router is 10.58.41.169. To remove the LMP router ID
configuration, use the no form of the Cisco IOS XR command. For more information about the
Cisco IOS XR commands, see the Cisco IOS XR Command Reference document.
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 2 snmp-server interface interface-type
interface-instance
Example:
router(config)# snmp-server interface
TenGigE 0/1/0/1
Enables an interface to send SNMP trap notifications and enters
SNMP interface configuration mode.
Note The interface that you specify for this command must be
the optical interface related to the PLIM port involved in
the LMP link.
Step 3 index persistence
Example:
router(config-snmp-if)# index persistence
Enables index persistency on an SNMP interface. This command
must be performed to ensure that the LMP IDs are persistent even
after a system reload.
Step 4 end
Example:
router(config-snmp-if)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This task explains how to configure the LMP router ID.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-64
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G487 Configure the 10 Gigabit Ethernet (GE) or POS Interface
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform this task.
Note To remove the POS interface configuration, use the no form of the Cisco IOS XR command. For more
information about the Cisco IOS XR commands, see the Cisco IOS XR Command Reference document.
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 2 mpls traffic-eng lmp router-id ip-address
Example:
router(config)# mpls traffic-eng lmp
router-id 10.58.41.169
Configures the LMP router ID.
Step 3 end
Example:
router(config)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This task explains how to configure the 10 GE or POS interface.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-65
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G488 Display Summary of Link Management Information
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 2 interface interface-type
interface-instance
Example:
router(config)# interface TenGigE 0/1/0/1
Enters interface configuration mode.
Note The interface that you specify for this command must be
the optical interface related to the PLIM port involved in
the LMP link.
Step 3 ipv4 point-to-point
Example:
router(config-if)# ipv4 point-to-point
Configures a 10 GE interface to act as a point-to-point interface.
Note For a POS interface, skip this step and continue with
Step 4.
Step 4 ipv4 unnumbered interface-type
interface-instance
Example:
router(config-if)# ipv4 unnumbered MgmtEth
0/RP0/CPU0/0
Specifies the MPLS-TE tunnel IPv4 address for the interface.
Note The interface that you specify for this command must be
the management interface that connects the CRS-1 or ASR
9000 router to the DWDM node.
Step 5 end
Example:
router(config-if)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This task displays the interface resource or a summary of link management
information.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-66
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
NTP-G303 Configure Virtual links on the Cisco 7600 and
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node
Note This procedure is normally required only when the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node must run traffic to
and from a Cisco 7600 router.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G711 Configure SSH Server on Cisco 7600 Series Nodes” task on page 15-67.
Step 2 To enable IPoDWDM using the Cisco 7600 series router, add the attribute “ctc.isC7600Supported=1”
in the /users//.ctcrc file. This should be done prior to launching CTC. By default,
IPoDWDM using the Cisco 7600 series router is disabled.
Step 3 If you need RADIUS AAA services, configure a RADIUS server. For more information, see
“Configuring RADIUS”.
Step 4 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task to log in to a DWDM node on the network.
Step 5 Configure the Cisco 7600 series router parameters in CTC. See “DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1,
Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters” task on page 15-50”.
Step 6 Add a Cisco 7600 series node to the DWDM network in CTC. See DLP-G49 Add a Node to the Current
Session or Login Group.
Step 7 Repeat Step 1 through Step 5 to bring up the second Cisco 7600 series node in the network.
Step 8 Create Provisionable Patchcords between the Cisco 7600 series and DWDM nodes. See “NTP-G184
Create a Provisionable Patchcord” task on page 16-72.”
Step 9 Create an Optical Channel (OCH) trail between the two Cisco 7600 series nodes. See “DLP-G395 Create
an Optical Channel Trail” task on page 16-34”. After creating the OCH trails, traffic can be transmitted
between the Cisco 7600 nodes.
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 show mpls traffic-eng lmp interface
[interface-type interface-instance]
Example:
router(config-if)# show mpls traffic-eng
lmp interface TenGigE 0/1/0/1
Displays the interface resource or a summary of link management
information. From the output of the show command, write down
the value of the Local TE Link ID and the Local Data Link ID
parameters.
Step 2 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This procedure configures virtual links on the Cisco 7600 and the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-67
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G711 Configure SSH Server on Cisco 7600 Series Nodes
Note The user ID and password configured on the ONS 15454 and Cisco 7600 nodes must be the same.
Purpose This procedure configures the Secure Shell (SSH) server and performs
node authentication for Cisco 7600 series nodes.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
• Enter your password if prompted.
Step 2 shell processing full
Example:
router(config)# shell processing full
Enables shell processing.
Step 3 hostname host-name
Example:
router(config)# hostname test124
Configures the host name on the Cisco 7600 series router.
Step 4 aaa new-model
Example:
router(config)# aaa new-model
Enables authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA).
Step 5 username username password password
Example:
router(config)# username cisco password
cisco123
Enables the local username and password on the Cisco 7600 series
router to be used in the absence of other AAA statements. 15-68
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 6 username username privilege
privilege-level
Example:
router(config)# username cisco
privilege 1
Assigns user name and privilege levels to the CTC user.
Step 7 ip domain-name domain-name
Example:
router(config)# ip domain-name
rtp.cisco.com
Configures the DNS domain of the Cisco 7600 series router.
Step 8 crypto key generate rsa
Example:
router(config)# crypto key generate rsa
Generates the SSH key that is used with the SSH server.
Step 9 ip ssh version 2
Example:
router(config)# ip ssh version 2
Specifies that version 2 of SSH is configured on the Cisco 7600 series
router.
Step 10 ip ssh time-out seconds
Example:
router(config)# ip ssh time-out 60
Indicates the time interval that the Cisco 7600 series router waits for
the SSH client to respond. This setting applies to the SSH negotiation
phase. When the EXEC session starts, the standard timeouts
configured for the vty apply. The value can range from 1 to 120
seconds.
Step 11 ip ssh authentication-retries integer
Example:
router(config)#ip ssh
authentication-retries 2
Indicates the number of attempts after which the interface is reset.
The number of retries can range from 0 to 5.
Step 12 line vty 0 4
Example:
router(config)#line vty 0 4
Indicates that five terminal sessions are possible.
Step 13 transport input ssh
Example:
router(config-line)# transport input
ssh
Disables telnet mode and enables the SSH mode to login to the
Cisco 7600 series router.
Command or Action Purpose15-69
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
NTP-G57 Create a Logical Network Map
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at a node on the network where you want to create the
network map. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Change the position of the nodes in the network view according to your site plan:
a. Click a node to select it, then drag and drop the node icon to a new location.
b. Repeat Step a for each node that you need to position.
Step 4 On the network view map, right-click and choose Save Node Position from the shortcut menu.
Step 5 Click Yes in the Save Node Position dialog box.
CTC opens a progress bar and saves the new node positions.
Note Retrieve, Provisioning, and Maintenance users can move nodes on the network map, but only
Superusers can save new network map configurations. To restore the view to a previously saved
version of the network map, right-click the network view map and choose Reset Node Position.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G325 View the Power Levels of Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP
Nodes
Purpose This procedure allows a Superuser to create a consistent network view for
all nodes on the network, meaning that all users see the same network view
on their login nodes.
Tools None
Prerequisite Procedures This procedure assumes that network turn-up is complete.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This procedure displays the power levels of the ports of the ONS 15454
MSTP nodes that traverse through an OCH or OCHNC trail using the
Photonic Path Trace (PPT). The results are displayed in a histogram.
Tools None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-70
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task to log in to an ONS 15454 MSTP node on the network.
Step 2 In the network view, node view (single-node mode), multishelf view (multishelf mode), or card view
click the Circuits tab.
Note An OCHNC or OCH trail circuit must exist on the optical path on which PPT is launched.
Step 3 Select the OCH trail and click Edit. The Edit Circuit window appears.
Step 4 In the Edit Circuit window, click the Photonic Path Trace tab.
Step 5 Click Start to start the PPT. The PPT creates a histogram that displays the power levels of the nodes
versus the threshold levels.
Note The circuit must be in the DISCOVERED state to start the PPT.
Step 6 Click Export to export the data in the form of HTML.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G326 Provision SRLG on the Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP
Network
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task to log in to an ONS 15454 MSTP node on the network.
Step 2 To assign, modify, delete, or reset the SRLG attributes for the nodes or links, perform the following
steps:
a. Click the Manage SRLGs option in the Tools > Manage IPoDWDM menu. The SRLG Management
wizard appears.
b. Choose one of the following options from the Select Type drop-down list:
– Manage Node SRLG—To add or update the node SRLGs.
– Manage Link SRLG—To add or update the link SRLGs.
c. Click Next.
Purpose This procedure provisions Shared Risk Link Groups (SRLGs) for MSTP
nodes and spans of the currently managed network using the SRLG
management wizard. The SRLG information can be synchronized on Cisco
CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 routers and viewed as reports.
Tools None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-71
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
d. In the Manage SRLG page, complete the following fields:
– If you chose the Manage Node SRLG option in Step b., select the node from the Node
drop-down list. If you the chose Manage Link SRLG option in Step b., select the span from
the Link drop-down list.
– In the Unique SRLG field, an SRLG number is displayed. You can edit the value. If the SRLG
value already exists, a message is displayed.
To reset the SRLG value, click Set Default. A confirmation box is displayed. Click Yes.
Note The unique SRLG range is from 0 to 4294967294.
– To add an additional SRLG, type a numeric value in the Additional SRLG field and click Add.
If the SRLG value already exists, a message is displayed.
Note A maximum of 20 SRLGs can be added to the SRLG list.
– To delete an additional SRLG, choose the value from the SRLG list and click Delete. To reset
the value, click Set Default. A confirmation box is displayed. Click Yes.
e. Click Finish to exit the wizard.
Step 3 To view the SRLG values of the nodes and links, perform the following steps:
• To view the SRLG values for the OTS, OSC, or PPC links, go to the Network view and right-click
the link, or place the mouse pointer over the link to see the SRLG value as a tooltip.
• To view the node SRLG values, click the Provisioning > General tab in the node view (single-shelf
mode) or shelf view (multishelf view).
Step 4 To synchronize the SRLG information on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router, go to Network
view, right-click the router and choose Synchronise IPoDWDM from the shortcut menu.
Step 5 Complete the “DLP-G540 View SRLG Reports” section on page 15-71 to view SRLG reports.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G540 View SRLG Reports
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task to log in to an ONS 15454 MSTP node on the network.
Purpose This task explains how to view SRLG reports.
Tools None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G326 Provision SRLG on the Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP Network,
page 15-70
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-72
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 2 To view the SRLG reports, perform the following steps:
• To view the consolidated SRLG report, click the Consolidated SRLG Report option in the Tools
> Manage IPoDWDM > SRLG Report menu. The report displays the following information:
– Resource Name—Displays the node name or link name.
– Resource Type—Displays the resource type (node or link).
– Unique SRLG—Displays the unique SRLG value.
– Additional SRLG—Displays additional SRLG values.
• To view the detailed SRLG report, click the Detailed SRLG Report option in the Tools > Manage
IPoDWDM > SRLG Report menu. The report displays the following information:
– Resource Name—Displays the node name or link name.
– Resource Type—Displays the resource type (node or link).
– SRLG Id—Displays the SRLG value.
– SRLG Type—Displays the SRLG type (unique or additional).
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Americas Headquarters
Cisco Systems, Inc.
170 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, CA 95134-1706
USA
http://www.cisco.com
Tel: 408 526-4000
800 553-NETS (6387)
Fax: 408 527-0883
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide
Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6
Product and Software Release 9.2
July 2012
Text Part Number: 78-19286-02THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL
STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.
THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT
SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE
OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.
The following information is for FCC compliance of Class A devices: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant
to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case users will be required
to correct the interference at their own expense.
The following information is for FCC compliance of Class B devices: The equipment described in this manual generates and may radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not
installed in accordance with Cisco’s installation instructions, it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in part 15 of the FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable
protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
Modifying the equipment without Cisco’s written authorization may result in the equipment no longer complying with FCC requirements for Class A or Class B digital
devices. In that event, your right to use the equipment may be limited by FCC regulations, and you may be required to correct any interference to radio or television
communications at your own expense.
You can determine whether your equipment is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the Cisco equipment or one of its
peripheral devices. If the equipment causes interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures:
• Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops.
• Move the equipment to one side or the other of the television or radio.
• Move the equipment farther away from the television or radio.
• Plug the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the equipment and the television or radio are on circuits
controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.)
Modifications to this product not authorized by Cisco Systems, Inc. could void the FCC approval and negate your authority to operate the product.
The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB’s public
domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1981, Regents of the University of California.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH
ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF
DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO
OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. To view a list of Cisco trademarks, go to this
URL: www.cisco.com/go/trademarks. Third-party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership
relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1110R)
Any Internet Protocol (IP) addresses used in this document are not intended to be actual addresses. Any examples, command display output, and figures included in the
document are shown for illustrative purposes only. Any use of actual IP addresses in illustrative content is unintentional and coincidental.
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
Copyright © 2004–2012 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.iii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
CONTENTS
Preface lxix
Revision History lxx
Document Objectives lxxiii
Audience lxxiii
Document Organization lxxiii
Related Documentation lxxv
Document Conventions lxxv
Obtaining Optical Networking Information lxxxi
Where to Find Safety and Warning Information lxxxi
Cisco Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM lxxxi
Obtaining Documentation, Obtaining Support, and Security Guidelines i-lxxxii
CHAPTER 1 Install the CiscoONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 Shelf 1-1
CHAPTER 2 Install the Control Cards 2-1
NTP- G15 Install the Common Control Cards 2-1
DLP- G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card 2-2
DLP- G34 Install the AIC-I Card 2-6
DLP- G309 Install the MS-ISC-100T Card 2-7
NTP- G313 Install and Configure the TNC or TSC Card 2-8
DLP- G604 Install the TNC or TSC Card 2-9
DLP- G605 Provision PPM and Port for the TNC Card 2-12
DLP- G606 Configure UDC and VoIP for the TNC Card 2-12
CHAPTER 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI 3-1
Before You Begin 3-1
NTP- G17 Set Up Computer for CTC 3-2
DLP- G37 Run the CTC Installation Wizard for Windows PCs 3-3
DLP- G38 Run the CTC Installation Wizard for Solaris Workstations 3-6
DLP- G52 Change the JRE Version 3-9
NTP- G18 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the ONS 15454 3-9
DLP- G39 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft Connection to an ONS 15454 on the Same Subnet Using
Static IP Addresses 3-12Contents
iv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G40 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft Connection to an ONS 15454 Using Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol 3-15
DLP- G41 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft Connection to an ONS 15454 Using Automatic Host
Detection 3-19
DLP- G42 Set Up a Solaris Workstation for a Craft Connection to an ONS 15454 3-23
NTP- G19 Set Up a CTC Computer for a Corporate LAN Connection to the ONS 15454 3-25
DLP- G43 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Internet Explorer (Windows) 3-26
DLP- G44 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Mozilla (Solaris) 3-27
NTP- G21 Log into the GUI 3-28
DLP- G331 Adjust the Java Virtual Memory Heap Size (Windows) 3-29
DLP- G46 Log into CTC 3-30
DLP- G47 Install Public-Key Security Certificate 3-32
DLP- G48 Create Login Node Groups 3-33
DLP- G49 Add a Node to the Current Session or Login Group 3-34
DLP- G50 Delete a Node from the Current Session or Login Group 3-35
DLP- G51 Delete a Node from a Specific Login Node Group 3-36
DLP- G53 Configure the CTC Alerts Dialog Box for Automatic Popup 3-36
DLP- G448 Designate ONS 15454 SOCKS GNEs 3-37
NTP- G190 Use the CTC Launcher Application to Manage Multiple ONS Nodes 3-38
DLP- G440 Install the CTC Launcher Application from a Release 9.2 Software CD 3-39
DLP- G441 Install the CTC Launcher Application from a Release 9.2 Node 3-39
DLP- G442 Connect to ONS Nodes Using the CTC Launcher 3-40
DLP- G443 Create a TL1 Tunnel Using the CTC Launcher 3-41
DLP- G444 Create a TL1 Tunnel Using CTC 3-42
DLP- G445 View TL1 Tunnel Information 3-43
DLP- G446 Edit a TL1 Tunnel Using CTC 3-44
DLP- G447 Delete a TL1 Tunnel Using CTC 3-45
DLP- G449 Install or Reinstall the CTC JAR Files 3-46
DLP- G450 Configuring Windows Vista or Windows 7 to Support CTC 3-46
CHAPTER 4 Turn Up a Node 4-1
Before You Begin 4-1
NTP- G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files 4-3
NTP- G22 Verify Common Card Installation 4-7
NTP- G250 Verify Digital Image Signing (DIS) Information 4-8
NTP- G144 Provision a Multishelf Node 4-10
NTP- G23 Create Users and Assign Security 4-12
DLP- G54 Create a New User on a Single Node 4-13
DLP- G55 Create a New User on Multiple Nodes 4-14Contents
v
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP- G24 Set Up Name, Date, Time, and Contact Information 4-15
NTP- G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds 4-17
NTP- G26 Set Up CTC Network Access 4-18
DLP- G56 Provision IP Settings 4-19
DLP- G439 Provision the Designated SOCKS Servers 4-23
DLP- G57 Set the IP Address, Default Router, and Network Mask Using the LCD 4-24
DLP- G264 Enable Node Security Mode 4-26
DLP- G58 Create a Static Route 4-28
DLP- G59 Set Up or Change Open Shortest Path First Protocol 4-29
DLP- G60 Set Up or Change Routing Information Protocol 4-32
NTP- G194 Set Up EMS Secure Access to the ONS 15454 4-33
NTP- G27 Set Up the ONS 15454 for Firewall Access 4-33
NTP- G28 Create FTP Host 4-34
DLP- G61 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the ONS 15454 4-35
DLP- G62 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the CTC Computer 4-36
NTP- G132 Provision OSI 4-37
DLP- G283 Provision OSI Routing Mode 4-38
DLP- G284 Provision the TARP Operating Parameters 4-39
DLP- G285 Add a Static TID-to-NSAP Entry to the TARP Data Cache 4-41
DLP- G287 Add a TARP Manual Adjacency Table Entry 4-42
DLP- G288 Provision OSI Routers 4-43
DLP- G289 Provision Additional Manual Area Addresses 4-44
DLP- G290 Enable the OSI Subnet on the LAN Interface 4-44
DLP- G291 Create an IP-Over-CLNS Tunnel 4-45
NTP- G29 Set Up SNMP 4-47
NTP- G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration File 4-49
DLP- G351 Delete a Card in CTC 4-53
DLP- G353 Preprovision a Slot 4-55
NTP- G320 Configure the Node as a Non-DWDM Network 4-59
DLP- G693 Configure the Amplifier 4-59
DLP- G694 Configure the PSM 4-60
NTP- G328 Add and Delete ANS Parameters 4-61
DLP- G541 Add an ANS Parameter 4-62
DLP- G542 Delete an ANS Parameter 4-63
NTP- G30 Install the DWDM Cards 4-64
DLP- G348 Use the Cisco TransportPlanner Shelf Layout Report 4-66
NTP- G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units 4-67Contents
vi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP- G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP
Cards 4-69
DLP- G63 Install an SFP or XFP 4-71
DLP- G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot 4-73
DLP- G64 Remove an SFP or XFP 4-74
NTP- G123 Install the Filler Cards 4-75
NTP- G239 Add and Delete Passive Units 4-76
DLP- G543 Add Passive Units Manually 4-76
DLP- G544 Delete a Passive Unit 4-77
NTP- G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs 4-78
DLP- G349 Use the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report 4-80
NTP- G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes 4-82
DLP- G315 Install Fiber-Optic Cables From the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the
Standard Patch Panel Tray 4-85
DLP- G316 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE,
ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP Cards to the Standard Patch Panel Tray 4-89
DLP- G356 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the
Deep Patch Panel Tray 4-90
DLP- G427 Reroute Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 4-93
DLP- G428 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE
Cards in an Expanded ROADM, Terminal, or Hub Node to the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 4-95
DLP- G357 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE,
ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP Cards to the Deep Patch Panel Tray or 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 4-97
DLP- G530 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, or 80-WXC-C Cards in a
ROADM, Terminal, or Hub Node to the 15216-MD-40 or 15216-MD-48 Patch Panel Tray 4-99
NTP- G185 Install Fiber-Optic Cables between Mesh Nodes 4-101
DLP- G430 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C Cards in a Mesh Node to the
40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 4-102
DLP- G431 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-WXC-C, or 40-SMR2-C Cards in a Mesh Node to a
Mesh Patch Panel Tray 4-104
NTP- G191 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on Passthrough ROADM Nodes 4-105
NTP- G141 Install Fiber-Optic Cables for Y-Cable Protection Modules 4-108
DLP- G375 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on the Y-Cable Modules in the FlexLayer Shelf 4-109
DLP- G376 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on the Y-Cable Modules in the Y-Cable Module Tray 4-110
NTP- G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords 4-113
NTP- G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually 4-114
DLP- G354 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the Trunk to Trunk (L2) Option 4-115
DLP- G547 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OCH-Trunk to OCH-Filter Option 4-116
DLP- G548 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OCH-Filter to OCH-Filter Option 4-118
DLP- G549 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OTS to OTS Option 4-120Contents
vii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G531 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the Optical Path Option 4-122
DLP- G355 Delete an Internal Patchcord 4-123
NTP- G209 Create, Edit, and Delete Optical Sides 4-123
DLP- G491 Create an Optical Side 4-124
DLP- G492 Edit an Optical Side 4-125
DLP- G480 Delete an Optical Side 4-125
NTP- G38 Provision OSC Terminations 4-126
NTP- G37 Run Automatic Node Setup 4-127
NTP- G39 Verify OSCM Transmit Power 4-129
DLP- G314 Verify OSCM Transmit Power 4-130
NTP- G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode 4-131
NTP- G210 Provision Node for SNMPv3 4-133
NTP- G211 Provision Node to Send SNMPv3 Traps 4-134
NTP- G212 Manually Provision a GNE/ENE to Manage an ENE using SNMPv3 4-135
NTP- G213 Automatically Provision a GNE to Manage an ENE using SNMPv3 4-136
NTP- G214 Manually Provision a GNE/ENE to Send SNMPv3 Traps from an ENE using SNMPv3 4-136
NTP- G215 Automatically Provision a GNE/ENE to Send SNMPv3 Traps from an ENE Using
SNMPv3 4-137
DLP- G496 Create an SNMPv3 User 4-138
DLP- G497 Create MIB Views 4-139
DLP- G498 Create Group Access 4-139
DLP- G499 Configure SNMPv3 Trap Destination 4-140
DLP- G500 Delete SNMPv3 Trap Destination 4-141
DLP- G501 Create Notification Filters 4-142
DLP- G502 Manually Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table 4-142
DLP- G503 Automatically Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table 4-143
DLP- G504 Manually Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table 4-144
DLP- G505 Automatically Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table 4-145
CHAPTER 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests 5-1
Before You Begin 5-1
NTP- G41 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O Cards Acceptance Test 5-3
DLP- G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing 5-5
DLP- G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power 5-6
DLP- G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power 5-7
DLP- G78 Verify the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C Card Power 5-8
DLP- G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power 5-8Contents
viii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP- G168 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance
Test 5-9
NTP- G42 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS and 32DMX Cards Acceptance Test 5-12
DLP- G270 Verify the 32DMX or 40-DMX-C Power 5-16
NTP- G167 Perform the Terminal Node with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test 5-17
NTP- G153 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test 5-22
DLP- G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card for Acceptance Testing 5-26
DLP- G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power 5-27
DLP- G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power 5-27
DLP- G361 Verify the 32DMX-L Power 5-28
NTP- G43 Perform the ROADM Node with 32WSS and 32DMX Cards Acceptance Test 5-29
DLP- G310 Verify ROADM Node C-Band Pass-Through Channels 5-33
DLP- G311 Verify the Side B ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 32WSS Cards 5-41
DLP- G312 Verify the Side A ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 32WSS Cards 5-46
NTP- G154 Perform the ROADM Node with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test 5-51
DLP- G362 Verify ROADM Node L-Band Pass-Through Channels 5-56
DLP- G363 Verify the Side B ROADM L-Band Add/Drop Channels 5-64
DLP- G364 Verify the Side A ROADM L-Band Add/Drop Channels 5-69
NTP- G180 Perform the ROADM Node with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test 5-74
DLP- G310 Verify ROADM Node C-Band Pass-Through Channels with 40-WSS-C Cards 5-79
DLP- G311 Verify the Side B ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 40-WSS-C Cards 5-87
DLP- G312 Verify the Side A ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 40-WSS-C Cards 5-92
NTP- G276 Perform the 80-Channel n-degree ROADM Node Acceptance Tests 5-97
NTP- G44 Perform the Anti-ASE Hub Node Acceptance Test 5-101
NTP- G45 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM Cards Acceptance Test 5-104
NTP- G155 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM Cards Acceptance Test 5-108
NTP- G46 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test 5-111
NTP- G156 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test 5-115
NTP- G47 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance
Test 5-120
NTP- G157 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance
Test 5-124
NTP- G48 Perform the OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSCM Cards 5-128
DLP- G85 Verify Express Channel Connections on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards 5-130
DLP- G87 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output Express Power 5-131
DLP- G88 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output Express Power 5-131
DLP- G271 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output Common Power 5-132
DLP- G272 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output Common Power 5-132Contents
ix
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G89 Verify OADM Node Pass-Through Channel Connections 5-133
DLP- G92 Verify 4MD-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power 5-134
DLP- G90 Verify an AD-xB-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power 5-135
DLP- G91 Verify an AD-xC-xx.x Pass-Through Connection 5-136
DLP- G84 Verify the OSC-CSM Incoming Power 5-137
DLP- G93 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards 5-138
NTP- G49 Perform the Active OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM
Cards 5-140
DLP- G86 Verify Express Channel Connections on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards 5-142
DLP- G83 Verify the OSC-CSM Power on OADM Nodes 5-143
DLP- G94 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards 5-144
NTP- G50 Perform the Passive OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM
Cards 5-146
NTP- G186 Perform the Four-Degree and Eight-Degree Mesh Patch Panel Acceptance Test 5-148
DLP- G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength 5-158
DLP- G433 Record Transponder Optical Power 5-159
NTP- G187 Perform the Multiring Site Acceptance Test 5-160
DLP- 434 Record the OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value 5-165
DLP- 435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters 5-166
DLP- 436 Record the 40-WXC-C Power Value 5-167
NTP- G188 Perform the Native Mesh Node Acceptance Test 5-168
NTP- G189 Perform the Node Upgrade Acceptance Test 5-173
NTP- G243 Perform the Two-Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-1-C and OPT-AMP-17-C Cards
Acceptance Test 5-181
NTP- G244 Perform the Four Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-2-C Cards Acceptance Test 5-185
CHAPTER 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards 6-1
Before You Begin 6-1
NTP- G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules 6-3
DLP- G235 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Mode 6-4
DLP- G332 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Port Mode 6-6
DLP- G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode 6-8
DLP- G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port 6-9
DLP- G452 Change the OTU2_XP Card Mode 6-10
DLP- G277 Provision a Multirate PPM 6-11
DLP- G274 Verify Topologies for ETR_CLO and ISC Services 6-12
DLP- G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate 6-14
DLP- G280 Delete a PPM 6-19
NTP- G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group 6-21Contents
x
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP- G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP Card 6-24
NTP- G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 6-26
DLP- G461 Create a 1+1 Protection Group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 6-27
NTP- G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter
Thresholds 6-28
DLP- G229 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Settings 6-29
DLP- G230 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Settings 6-30
DLP- G231 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings 6-33
DLP- G367 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 6-34
DLP- G232 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder SONET or SDH Line Threshold Settings 6-35
DLP- G320 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G
FC/FICON Payloads 6-38
DLP- G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-39
DLP- G306 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-41
DLP- G234 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings 6-45
NTP- G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and
Thresholds 6-48
DLP- G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate 6-49
DLP- G712 Provision the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C Data Rate 6-50
DLP- G216 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Settings 6-50
DLP- G217 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Settings 6-52
DLP- G218 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings 6-56
DLP- G368 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 6-58
DLP- G219 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads
Including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy 6-59
DLP- G319 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
Payloads 6-62
DLP- G301 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-66
DLP- G302 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-67
DLP- G221 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings 6-69
NTP- G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Ethernet Settings, Line Settings, PM Parameters,
and Thresholds 6-74
DLP- G403 Create the ADM-10G Peer Group 6-75
DLP- G469 Provision the ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings 6-76
DLP- G397 Change the ADM-10G Line Settings 6-77
DLP- G398 Change the ADM-10G Line Section Trace Settings 6-83
DLP- G399 Change the ADM-10G Line Thresholds for SONET and SDH Payloads 6-84
DLP- G412 Change the ADM-10G Line RMON Thresholds for the 1G Ethernet Payload 6-88
DLP- G400 Provision the ADM-10G Interlink or Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-91
DLP- G401 Provision the ADM-10G Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-92Contents
xi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G402 Change the ADM-10G OTN Settings 6-93
NTP- G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 6-98
DLP- G222 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Settings 6-99
DLP- G223 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line Settings 6-101
DLP- G224 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Section Trace Settings 6-103
DLP- G225 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Settings 6-105
DLP- G369 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 6-107
DLP- G226 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder SONET/SDH Line Thresholds Settings 6-108
DLP- G303 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-111
DLP- G304 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-112
DLP- G228 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line OTN Settings 6-114
NTP- G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 6-119
DLP- G236 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings 6-120
DLP- G237 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings 6-122
DLP- G238 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) Settings 6-124
DLP- G239 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings 6-126
DLP- G370 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 6-128
DLP- G240 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds 6-129
DLP- G321 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Line Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON
Payloads 6-131
DLP- G307 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-133
DLP- G308 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-134
NTP- G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 6-137
DLP- G333 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings 6-138
DLP- G334 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings 6-140
DLP- G340 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 6-142
DLP- G335 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings 6-143
DLP- G336 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings 6-145
DLP- G341 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds 6-146
DLP- G337 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 1G FC/FICON, or
ISC/ISC3 Payloads 6-148
DLP- G338 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-151
DLP- G339 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-152
DLP- G366 Change the 10G Data Muxponder OTN Settings 6-156
NTP- G293 Modify the 40G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 6-159
DLP- G662 Change the 40G Multirate Muxponder Card Settings 6-160
DLP- G666 Change the 40G Muxponder Line Settings 6-161
DLP- G667 Change the 40G Muxponder Line SONET (OC-192) or SDH (STM-64), or Ethernet Line
Settings 6-163
DLP- G668 Change the 40G Muxponder Section Trace Settings 6-167Contents
xii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G669 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds 6-168
DLP- G670 Change the 40G Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 8G FC, or 10G FC
Payloads 6-170
DLP- G671 Provision the 40G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-174
DLP- G672 Provision the 40G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-176
DLP- G673 Change the 40G Muxponder OTN Settings 6-179
NTP- G281 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Channel Group Settings 6-182
DLP- G611 Create a Channel Group Using CTC 6-183
DLP- G612 Modify the Parameters of the Channel Group Using CTC 6-184
DLP- G613 Add or Remove Ports to or from an Existing Channel Group Using CTC 6-188
Before You Begin 6-189
DLP- G614 Delete a Channel Group Using CTC 6-189
DLP- G615 Retrieve Information on Channel Group, REP, CFM, and EFM Using CTC 6-190
DLP- G616 View Channel Group PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
Using CTC 6-191
DLP- G617 View Channel Group Utilization PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 6-192
DLP- G618 View Channel Group History PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 6-192
NTP- G283 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card CFM Settings 6-193
DLP- G621 Enable or Disable CFM on the Card Using CTC 6-194
DLP- G622 Enable or Disable CFM for Each Port Using CTC 6-195
DLP- G623 Create a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC 6-196
Before You Begin 6-196
DLP- G624 Delete a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC 6-197
DLP- G625 Create a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC 6-198
DLP- G626 Modify a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC 6-199
DLP- G627 Delete a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC 6-199
DLP- G628 Map a Maintenance Association Profile to a Maintenance Domain Profile Using
CTC 6-200
DLP- G629 Create a MEP Using CTC 6-201
DLP- G630 Delete a MEP Using CTC 6-202
DLP- G631 Create a MIP Using CTC 6-202
DLP- G632 Delete a MIP Using CTC 6-203
DLP- G633 Ping MEP Using CTC 6-204
DLP- G634 Traceroute MEP Using CTC 6-205
NTP- G285 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card EFM Settings 6-206
DLP- G639 Enable or Disable EFM for Each Port Using CTC 6-206
Before You Begin 6-207
DLP- G640 Configure EFM Parameters Using CTC 6-207Contents
xiii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G641 Configure EFM Link Monitoring Parameters Using CTC 6-209
DLP- G642 Enable Remote Loopback for Each Port Using CTC 6-210
NTP- G287 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card REP Settings 6-211
DLP- G713 Provision Administrative VLAN for Ports in a REP Segment Using CTC 6-212
DLP- G645 Create a Segment Using CTC 6-213
Before You Begin 6-213
DLP- G646 Edit a Segment Using CTC 6-215
DLP- G647 Activate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC 6-215
DLP- G648 Deactivate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC 6-216
NTP- G165 Modify the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE Cards Ethernet Parameters, Line Settings,
and PM Thresholds 6-217
DLP- G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings 6-218
DLP- G684 Provision the GE_XPE Card PDH Ethernet Settings 6-226
DLP- G685 Provision the GE_XPE Card Electrical Lines Settings 6-228
DLP- G381 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Layer 2 Protection
Settings 6-230
DLP- G507 Enable a Different GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card as the Master
Card 6-231
DLP- G382 Add and Remove SVLANS to/from GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE NNI
Ports 6-233
DLP- G383 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Quality of Service
Settings 6-234
DLP- G470 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Class of Service (CoS)
Settings 6-235
DLP- G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings 6-235
DLP- G221 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Cards 6-237
DLP- G460 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
CTC 6-238
DLP- G385 Provision the MAC Filter Settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Card 6-239
NTP- G237 Retrieve and Clear MAC Addresses on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Cards 6-240
DLP- G546 View Card MAC Addresses on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 6-241
NTP- G311 Provision the Storm Control Settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Cards 6-241
NTP- G205 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 6-243
DLP- G509 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 6-243
NTP- G289 Provision CVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card 6-244
NTP- G208 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card 6-245Contents
xiv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G515 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card
Using CTC 6-246
DLP- G471 Create a SVLAN or CVLAN Profile 6-246
NTP- G204 Enable IGMP Snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 6-247
DLP- G511 Enable IGMP Snooping, IGMP Fast Leave and IGMP Report Suppression on GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 6-248
NTP- G206 Enable MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card 6-249
DLP- G513 Enable MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Using CTC 6-250
DLP- G386 Provision the Gigabit Ethernet Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-251
DLP- G387 Provision the Gigabit Ethernet Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-252
DLP- G388 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card RMON Thresholds 6-254
DLP- G389 Change the Gigabit Ethernet Optical Transport Network Settings 6-257
NTP- G314 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring 6-260
DLP- G687 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Facing Master Card on a FAPS Ring 6-261
DLP- G688 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Between the Slave Cards on a FAPS Ring 6-262
NTP- G197 Provision the OTU2_XP Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds 6-263
DLP- G453 Change the OTU2_XP Card Settings 6-264
DLP- G454 Change the OTU2_XP Line Settings 6-265
DLP- G455 Change the OTU2_XP Line Section Trace Settings 6-269
DLP- G456 Change the OTU2_XP Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads 6-270
DLP- G457 Provision the OTU2_XP Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-272
DLP- G462 Change the OTU2_XP Line RMON Thresholds for the 10G Ethernet and 10G FC
Payloads 6-274
DLP- G458 Change the OTU2_XP OTN Settings 6-277
DLP- G523 Change the OTU2_XP Path Trace Settings 6-283
DLP- G524 Provision the OTU2_XP Path Settings for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy
Configuration 6-284
NTP- G162 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings 6-285
NTP- G192 Force FPGA Update 6-286
NTP- G196 Force FPGA Update When the Card is Part of a Protection Group 6-288
NTP- G232 Enabling Error Decorrelator 6-289
CHAPTER 7 Turn Up a Network 7-1
Before You Begin 7-1
NTP- G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up 7-2
NTP- G52 Verify Node-to-Node Connections 7-3
NTP- G201 Configure the Raman Pump on an MSTP Link 7-4
DLP- G468 Configure the Raman Pump Using the Installation Wizard 7-4
DLP- G474 Configure the Raman Pump by Importing the CTP XML File 7-19Contents
xv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G489 Configure the Raman Pump by Setting the ANS Parameters Manually 7-20
DLP- 490 Restore Raman Link After a Fiber Cut Occurs 7-21
NTP- G53 Set Up Timing 7-22
DLP- G95 Set Up External or Line Timing 7-22
DLP- G96 Set Up Internal Timing 7-25
DLP- G350 Use the Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix Report 7-26
NTP- G54 Provision and Verify a DWDM Network 7-27
NTP- G56 Verify the OSNR 7-32
NTP- G142 Perform a Protection Switch Test 7-33
NTP- G164 Configure Link Management Protocol 7-35
DLP- G372 Enable LMP 7-36
DLP- G373 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Control Channels 7-36
DLP- G374 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP TE Links 7-39
DLP- G378 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Data Links 7-40
NTP- G233 Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM Node 7-42
NTP- G234 Automatically Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 Router and the Cisco
ONS 15454 DWDM Node 7-42
NTP- G207 Manually Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 Router and the Cisco ONS
15454 DWDM Node 7-43
DLP- G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1 Router Parameters 7-44
DLP- G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 Router and Verify Configuration 7-45
DLP- G510 Create a Task Group, User Group, and User Account on the Cisco CRS-1 Router 7-46
DLP- G482 Configure a Static Route 7-49
DLP- G483 Configure Local and Remote TE Links 7-50
DLP- G484 Enable the LMP Message Exchange 7-52
DLP- G511 Configure the Wavelength on the Cisco CRS-1 Router 7-53
DLP- G494 Configure the RADIUS Server 7-55
DLP- G485 Enable Index Persistency on an SNMP Interface 7-56
DLP- G486 Configure the LMP Router ID 7-57
DLP- G487 Configure the 10 Gigabit Ethernet (GE) or POS Interface 7-58
DLP- G488 Display Summary of Link Management Information 7-59
NTP- G57 Create a Logical Network Map 7-60
NTP- G325 View the Power Levels of Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP Nodes 7-61
NTP- G326 Provision SRLG on the Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP Network 7-62
DLP- G540 View SRLG Reports 7-63
CHAPTER 8 Create Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords 8-1
Before You Begin 8-1Contents
xvi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP- G151 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Client Connections 8-2
DLP- G104 Assign a Name to a Port 8-3
DLP- G345 Verify OCHCC Client Ports 8-4
DLP- G346 Provision Optical Channel Client Connections 8-4
DLP- G689 Provision Optical Channel Client Connections on OTU2_XP Cards 8-10
DLP- G347 Delete Optical Channel Client Connections 8-11
DLP- G424 Edit an OCHCC Circuit Name 8-12
DLP- G394 Change an OCHCC Administrative State 8-13
DLP- G437 Set OCH Circuit Attributes 8-14
DLP- G438 Set OCH Routing Preferences 8-15
NTP- G178 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Trails 8-16
DLP- G395 Create an Optical Channel Trail 8-17
DLP- G418 Delete an Optical Channel Trail 8-19
DLP- G425 Edit an OCH Trail Circuit Name 8-20
DLP- G419 Change an OCH Trail Administrative State 8-21
NTP- G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections 8-21
DLP- G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections 8-23
DLP- G493 Provision Protected Optical Channel Network Connections 8-25
DLP- G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections 8-26
DLP- G426 Edit an OCHNC Circuit Name 8-27
DLP- G420 Change an OCHNC Administrative State 8-28
NTP- G200 Create, Delete, and Manage STS or VC Circuits for the ADM-10G Card 8-29
DLP- G463 Create an Automatically Routed STS or VC Circuit 8-29
DLP- G464 Create a Manually Routed STS or VC Circuit 8-33
DLP- G465 Provision Path Protection Selectors 8-36
DLP- G466 Delete an STS or VC Circuit 8-37
DLP- G467 Edit an STS or VC Circuit Name 8-38
NTP- G150 Upgrade Optical Channel Network Connections to Optical Channel Client Connections 8-39
DLP- G344 Verify Provisionable and Internal Patchcords 8-41
NTP- G183 Diagnose and Fix OCHNC and OCH Trail Circuits 8-43
NTP- G58 Locate and View Optical Channel Circuits 8-45
DLP- G100 Search for Optical Channel Circuits 8-45
DLP- G101 View Optical Channel Circuit Information 8-46
DLP- G102 Filter the Display of Optical Channel Circuits 8-49
DLP- G103 View Optical Channel Circuits on a Span 8-51
NTP- G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord 8-52
NTP- G181 Manage GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card SVLAN Databases 8-58
DLP- G421 Create and Store an SVLAN Database 8-58
DLP- G422 Load or Merge an SVLAN Database 8-60Contents
xvii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP- G60 Create and Delete Overhead Circuits 8-61
DLP- G76 Provision DCC/GCC Terminations 8-61
DLP- G97 Provision a Proxy Tunnel 8-63
DLP- G98 Provision a Firewall Tunnel 8-64
DLP- G108 Change the Service State for a Port 8-65
DLP- G109 Provision Orderwire 8-66
DLP- G110 Create a User Data Channel Circuit 8-67
DLP- G112 Delete Overhead Circuits 8-68
NTP- G62 Create a J0 Section Trace 8-69
NTP- G203 Create End-to-End SVLAN Circuits 8-70
DLP- G472 Edit the End-to-End SVLAN Circuit 8-72
NTP- G229 Provision DCN Extension for a Network Using GCC/DCC 8-72
DLP- G472 Merge two OCHNC DCN Circuits 8-73
NTP- G245 Create an Automatically Routed VCAT Circuit 8-74
NTP- G246 Create a Manually Routed VCAT Circuit 8-77
NTP- G247 Enable or disable Path Performance Monitoring on Intermediate Nodes 8-80
DLP- G551 Provision ADM-10G Ethernet Ports 8-80
DLP- G553 Create a Server Trail 8-81
DLP- G554 Repair Server Trails 8-83
DLP- G555 Provision a VCAT Circuit Source and Destination 8-84
DLP- G556 Provision an Open VCAT Circuit Source and Destination 8-85
DLP- G557 Provision a VCAT Circuit Route 8-86
CHAPTER 9 Monitor Performance 9-1
Before You Begin 9-1
NTP- G73 Change the PM Display 9-2
DLP- G131 Refresh PM Counts at 15-Minute Intervals 9-3
DLP- G132 Refresh PM Counts at One-Day Intervals 9-4
DLP- G133 View Near-End PM Counts 9-5
DLP- G134 View Far-End PM Counts 9-5
DLP- G135 Reset Current PM Counts 9-6
DLP- G136 Clear Selected PM Counts 9-7
DLP- G410 Clear All PM Thresholds 9-8
DLP- G137 Set the Auto-Refresh Interval for Displayed PM Counts 9-9
DLP- G138 Refresh PM Counts for a Different Port 9-10
NTP- G279 Monitor TNC Card Performance 9-10
DLP- G607 View Optics PM Parameters for the TNC Card 9-11
DLP- G608 View Payload PM Parameters for the TNC Card 9-11
DLP- G686 Set the TNC Card RMON Thresholds for the FE/ONE_GE Ethernet Payloads 9-12Contents
xviii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP- G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance 9-15
DLP- G139 View PM Parameters for OSCM and OSC-CSM cards 9-16
DLP- G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards 9-16
DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and 40-DMX-CE
Cards 9-20
DLP- G479 View Optical Power Statistics for the PSM Card 9-21
DLP- G276 View Optical Power Statistics for 4MD-xx.x Cards 9-21
DLP- G142 View Power Statistics for AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, and AD-4C-xx.x Cards 9-22
DLP- G143 View Power Statistics for AD-1B-xx.x and AD-4B-xx.x Cards 9-23
DLP- G525 View Optical Power Statistics for TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards 9-24
DLP- G475 View the PM Parameters for All Facilities 9-25
NTP- G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance 9-26
DLP- G390 View Ethernet Statistic PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
Cards 9-27
DLP- G391 View Ethernet Utilization PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
Cards 9-28
DLP- G392 View Ethernet History PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
Cards 9-28
DLP- G393 Refresh Ethernet PM Counts at a Different Time Interval for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
and 10GE_XPE Cards 9-29
DLP- G146 View Optics PM Parameters 9-30
DLP- G147 View Payload PM Parameters 9-30
DLP- G148 View OTN PM Parameters 9-32
DLP- G149 View Payload Statistics PM Parameters 9-33
DLP- G150 View Payload Utilization PM Parameters 9-33
DLP- G151 View Payload History PM Parameters 9-34
DLP- G152 View Payload SONET/SDH PM Parameters 9-35
NTP- G193 Enable or Disable AutoPM 9-35
CHAPTER 10 Manage Alarms 10-1
Before You Begin 10-1
NTP- G63 Document Existing Provisioning 10-2
DLP- G113 Print CTC Data 10-3
DLP- G114 Export CTC Data 10-4
NTP- G64 View Alarms, History, Events, and Conditions 10-6
DLP- G115 View Alarms 10-7
DLP- G116 View Alarm or Event History 10-8
DLP- G117 Change the Maximum Number of Session Entries for Alarm History 10-10
DLP- G118 Display Alarms and Conditions Using Time Zone 10-11Contents
xix
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G119 Synchronize Alarms 10-12
DLP- G120 View Conditions 10-12
NTP- G65 Delete Cleared Alarms from Display 10-14
NTP- G66 View Alarm-Affected Circuits 10-15
NTP- G67 View Alarm Counts on the LCD for a Node, Shelf, Slot, or Port 10-15
NTP- G68 Create, Download, and Assign Alarm Severity Profiles 10-17
DLP- G121 Create a New or Cloned Alarm Severity Profile 10-18
DLP- G122 Download an Alarm Severity Profile 10-20
DLP- G123 Apply Alarm Profiles to Ports 10-21
DLP- G124 Apply Alarm Profiles to Cards and Nodes 10-22
DLP- G125 Delete Alarm Severity Profiles 10-23
NTP- G69 Enable, Modify, or Disable Alarm Severity Filtering 10-24
DLP- G126 Enable Alarm Filtering 10-25
DLP- G127 Modify Alarm, Condition, and History Filtering Parameters 10-25
DLP- G128 Disable Alarm Filtering 10-26
NTP- G70 Suppress Alarms or Discontinue Alarm Suppression 10-27
DLP- G129 Suppress Alarm Reporting 10-28
DLP- G130 Discontinue Alarm Suppression 10-29
NTP- G72 Provision External Alarms and Controls on the Alarm Interface Controller-International
Card 10-30
NTP- G277 Provision Alarms and Controls on the TNC or TSC Card 10-32
CHAPTER 11 Manage the Node 11-1
Before You Begin 11-1
NTP- G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC 11-2
NTP- G77 Manage Automatic Power Control 11-4
DLP- G157 Disable Automatic Power Control 11-4
DLP- G158 Enable Automatic Power Control 11-5
DLP- G430 Run Automatic Power Control 11-6
DLP- G159 View Node-Level Automatic Power Control Information 11-7
DLP- G431 View Network-Level Automatic Power Control Information 11-8
NTP- G78 View Side Power Monitoring 11-9
NTP- G80 Change Node Management Information 11-11
DLP- G160 Change the Node Name, Date, Time, and Contact Information 11-12
DLP- G161 Change the Login Legal Disclaimer 11-13
NTP- G134 Modify OSI Provisioning 11-14
DLP- G284 Modify the TARP Operating Parameters 11-15
DLP- G286 Remove a Static TID to NSAP Entry from the TARP Data Cache 11-17Contents
xx
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G287 Add a TARP Manual Adjacency Table Entry 11-17
DLP- G292 Remove a TARP Manual Adjacency Table Entry 11-18
DLP- G293 Change the OSI Routing Mode 11-19
DLP- G294 Edit the OSI Router Configuration 11-20
DLP- G295 Edit the OSI Subnetwork Point of Attachment 11-21
DLP- G296 Edit an IP-Over-CLNS Tunnel 11-22
DLP- G297 Delete an IP-Over-CLNS Tunnel 11-23
NTP- G81 Change CTC Network Access 11-23
DLP- G162 Change IP Settings 11-24
DLP- G265 Lock Node Security 11-25
DLP- G266 Modify Backplane Port IP Settings in Security Mode 11-26
DLP- G267 Disable Secure Mode 11-28
DLP- G163 Modify a Static Route 11-29
DLP- G164 Delete a Static Route 11-30
DLP- G165 Disable OSPF 11-30
DLP- G167 Delete a Firewall Tunnel 11-31
NTP- G82 Customize the CTC Network View 11-31
DLP- G168 Change the Network View Background Color 11-32
DLP- G169 Change the Default Network View Background Map 11-32
DLP- G170 Apply a Custom Network View Background Map 11-33
DLP- G171 Create Domain Icons 11-34
DLP- G172 Manage Domain Icons 11-34
DLP- G173 Enable Dialog Box Do-Not-Display Option 11-36
DLP- G174 Switch Between TDM and DWDM Network Views 11-36
DLP- G330 Consolidate Links in Network View 11-37
NTP- G83 Modify or Delete Card Protection Settings 11-40
DLP- G175 Modify a Y-Cable Protection Group 11-40
DLP- G176 Modify a Splitter Protection Group 11-41
DLP- G177 Delete a Y-Cable Protection Group 11-42
DLP- G459 Delete a Splitter Protection Group 11-43
NTP- G84 Initiate and Clear Y-Cable and Splitter External Switching Commands 11-43
DLP- G178 Apply a Manual Y-Cable or Splitter Protection Switch 11-44
DLP- G179 Apply a Force Y-Cable or Splitter Protection Switch 11-45
DLP- G180 Clear a Manual or Force Y-Cable or Splitter Protection Switch 11-45
DLP- G181 Apply a Lock-On 11-46
DLP- G182 Apply a Lockout 11-47
DLP- G183 Clear a Lock-On or Lockout 11-47
NTP- G85 Modify or Delete OSC Terminations, DCC/GCC Terminations, and Provisionable
Patchcords 11-48Contents
xxi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G184 Change a DCC/GCC Termination 11-49
DLP- G185 Delete a DCC/GCC Termination 11-49
DLP- G186 Delete an OSC Termination 11-50
DLP- G187 Delete a Provisionable Patchcord 11-51
NTP- G86 Convert a Pass-Through Connection to Add/Drop Connections 11-52
NTP- G87 Change Node Timing Parameters 11-53
NTP- G88 Modify Users and Change Security 11-55
DLP- G188 Change Security Policy for a Single Node 11-56
DLP- G189 Change Security Policy for Multiple Nodes 11-57
DLP- G317 Change Node Access and PM Clearing Privilege 11-58
DLP- G328 Grant Superuser Privileges to a Provisioning User 11-59
DLP- G191 Change User Password and Security Level on a Single Node 11-60
DLP- G192 Change User Password and Security Level for Multiple Nodes 11-61
DLP- G193 Delete a User From a Single Node 11-62
DLP- G194 Delete a User From Multiple Nodes 11-63
DLP- G195 Log Out a User on a Single Node 11-63
DLP- G196 Log Out a User on Multiple Nodes 11-64
DLP- G281 Configure the Node for RADIUS Authentication 11-65
DLP- G282 View and Terminate Active Logins 11-66
NTP- G89 Change SNMP Settings 11-67
DLP- G197 Modify SNMP Trap Destinations 11-68
DLP- G198 Delete SNMP Trap Destinations 11-69
NTP- G231 View Optical Power Values and Alarms Using the Network Functional View 11-69
DLP- G529 Export Network Functional View Reports 11-70
CHAPTER 12 Change DWDM Card Settings 12-1
Before You Begin 12-1
NTP- G90 Modify OSCM and OSC-CSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-2
DLP- G199 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM OC-3/STM-1 Line Settings 12-3
DLP- G200 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM OC-3/STM-1 Line SONET/SDH Thresholds 12-5
DLP- G201 Change Optical Line Parameters for OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards 12-7
DLP- G202 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM Optical Line Threshold Settings 12-8
DLP- G203 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM ALS Maintenance Settings 12-12
NTP- G91 Modify OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-13
DLP- G204 Change Optical Line Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 12-14
DLP- G205 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 12-15
DLP- G206 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 12-19
DLP- G207 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 12-21
DLP- G322 Change the OPT-BST ALS Maintenance Settings 12-25Contents
xxii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP- G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Line
Settings and PM Thresholds 12-27
DLP- G323 Change Optical Line Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C,
and OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifiers 12-28
DLP- G324 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C,
OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifiers 12-30
DLP- G325 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C,
OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifiers 12-33
DLP- G326 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C,
OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifiers 12-35
DLP- G538 Change Optical Raman Line Settings for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE
Amplifiers 12-39
DLP- G539 Change Optical Raman Line Threshold Settings for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE
Amplifiers 12-40
DLP- G327 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings of OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C,
OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 12-42
NTP- G202 Modify PSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-44
DLP- G514 Change the PSM Card Mode 12-44
DLP- G476 Change Optical Line Settings for the PSM Card 12-45
DLP- G477 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for the PSM Card 12-46
DLP- G478 Change the PSM ALS Maintenance Settings 12-49
NTP- G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, and
4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds 12-51
DLP- G414 Change Optical Line Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C,
40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 12-52
DLP- G415 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L,
40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 12-54
DLP- G416 Change Optical Channel Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C,
40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 12-57
DLP- G417 Change Optical Channel Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L,
40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 12-59
NTP- G93 Modify the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Line Settings and PM
Thresholds 12-62
DLP- G212 Change 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Channel
Parameters 12-63
DLP- G213 Change the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Channel
Thresholds 12-66
DLP- G214 Change 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Line
Parameters 12-70
DLP- G215 Change the 32WSS, 32-WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Line
Thresholds 12-71
NTP- G240 Modify TDC-CC and TDC-FC Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-73
DLP- G545 Modify the Chromatic Dispersion Value for the TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards 12-74Contents
xxiii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G528 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for TDC-CC or TDC-FC Card 12-75
NTP- G174 Modify the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-76
DLP- G603 Change the 80-WXC-C Card Mode 12-77
DLP- G406 Change 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Card Optical Channel Parameters 12-78
DLP- G407 Change the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Channel Thresholds 12-81
DLP- G408 Change 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Parameters 12-84
DLP- G409 Change the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Thresholds 12-86
DLP- G413 Change 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Card WXC Line Parameters 12-88
DLP- G429 Multiplex a Single Wavelength on 40-WXC-C Card 12-90
NTP- G241 Modify the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-91
DLP- G532 Change Optical Line Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards 12-92
DLP- G533 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards 12-94
DLP- G534 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards 12-98
DLP- G535 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C
Cards 12-100
DLP- G536 Change 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Channel Parameters 12-105
DLP- G537 Change the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Optical Channel Thresholds 12-107
NTP- G149 Modify the MMU Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-111
DLP- G342 Change MMU Optical Line Parameters 12-111
DLP- G343 Change the MMU Optical Line Thresholds 12-113
NTP- G101 Modify Alarm Interface Controller–International Settings 12-114
DLP- G245 Change External Alarms Using the AIC-I Card 12-115
DLP- G246 Change External Controls Using the AIC-I Card 12-116
DLP- G247 Change AIC-I Card Orderwire Settings 12-117
NTP- G102 Change Card Service State 12-117
NTP- G280 Modify Threshold Settings for the TNC Card 12-118
DLP- G609 Modify Optical Threshold Settings for the TNC Card 12-119
DLP- G610 Modify Line Threshold Settings for the TNC Card 12-120
CHAPTER 13 Upgrade, Add, and Remove Cards and Nodes 13-1
Before You Begin 13-1
NTP- G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards 13-2
DLP- G254 Place Amplifier Ports Out of Service 13-4
DLP- G318 Place Amplifier Ports In Service 13-5
NTP- G127 Add an AD-xC-xx.x Card to an OADM Node 13-6
NTP- G129 Add a DWDM Node 13-9
NTP- G130 Remove a DWDM Node 13-11
NTP- G146 Add a Rack, Passive Unit, or Shelf to a Multishelf Node 13-13Contents
xxiv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP- G147 Delete a Passive Unit, Shelf, or Rack from a Multishelf Node 13-16
NTP- G173 Convert an OADM Node to a ROADM Node 13-18
NTP- G176 Convert an Line Amplifier Node to an OADM Node 13-21
NTP- G182 Convert a Line Amplifier Node to a ROADM Node 13-23
NTP- G195 Convert a Protected ROADM Node from two Separate Nodes to a Single Multishelf
Node 13-25
NTP- G177 Upgrade ANS Parameters on a DWDM Node 13-32
NTP- G242 Modify the CD setting of TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards 13-33
DLP- G526 Modify the CD Value of the TDC-CC and TDC-FC When Connected to OPT-AMP-C,
OPT-PRE, 40-SMR-1 and 40-SMR-2 Cards 13-34
DLP- G527 Modify the CD Value of the TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards When Connected to OPT-RAMP-C
and OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifiers 13-34
NTP- G278 Upgrade the TSC Card to the TNC Card 13-35
CHAPTER 14 Maintain the Node 14-1
Before You Begin 14-1
NTP- G103 Back Up the Database 14-2
NTP- G104 Restore the Database 14-3
NTP- G105 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration 14-5
DLP- G248 Use the Reinitialization Tool to Clear the Database and Upload Software
(Windows) 14-6
DLP- G249 Use the Reinitialization Tool to Clear the Database and Upload Software (UNIX) 14-8
NTP- G133 View and Manage OSI Information 14-10
DLP- G298 View IS-IS Routing Information Base 14-10
DLP- G299 View ES-IS Routing Information Base 14-11
DLP- G300 Manage the TARP Data Cache 14-12
NTP- G106 Reset Cards Using CTC 14-13
DLP- G250 Reset the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC Card 14-13
DLP- G251 Reset DWDM Cards Using CTC 14-14
NTP- G108 Viewing the Audit Trail Records 14-15
NTP- G109 Off-Load the Audit Trail Record 14-16
NTP- G110 Off-Load the Diagnostics File 14-17
NTP- G112 Change the Node Timing Reference 14-18
DLP- G259 Manual or Force Switch the Node Timing Reference 14-18
DLP- G260 Clear a Manual or Force Switch on a Node Timing Reference 14-19
NTP- G113 View the ONS 15454 Timing Report 14-20
NTP- G114 Inspect, Clean, and Replace the Air Filter 14-23
NTP- G274 Replace the Air Filter of the ONS 15454M2 Shelf Assembly 14-26Contents
xxv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP- G262 Replace the Air Filter of the ONS 15454M6 Shelf Assembly 14-28
NTP- G263 Replace the Air Filter of the AC Power Module in the ONS 15454M6 Shelf Assembly 14-30
NTP- G115 Clean Fiber Connectors 14-31
DLP- G261 Clean Multi Fiber-Optic Cable Connectors 14-32
DLP- G262 Clean Fiber Connectors with CLETOP 14-33
DLP- G263 Clean the Fiber Adapters 14-33
NTP- G40 Replace the Front Door 14-34
NTP- G116 Replace the Fan-Tray Assembly 14-36
NTP- G272 Replace the Fan-Tray Assembly of the ONS 15454M2 Shelf Assembly 14-41
NTP- G260 Replace the Fan-Tray Assembly of the ONS 15454M6 Shelf Assembly 14-43
NTP- G117 Replace the ANSI Shelf Alarm Interface Panel 14-45
NTP- G118 Replace the ANSI Shelf Plastic Lower Backplane Cover 14-48
NTP- G135 Edit Network Element Defaults 14-50
NTP- G136 Import Network Element Defaults 14-51
NTP- G137 Export Network Element Defaults 14-52
NTP- G166 View the Facilities 14-53
NTP- G119 Power Down the Node 14-53
APPENDIX A CTC Information and Shortcuts A-1
A.1 Multishelf and Single-Shelf Modes A-1
A.2 Display CTC Views A-2
A.3 Node Icons on the Network View Map A-3
A.4 Manage the CTC Window A-6
A.4.1 CTC Menu and Toolbar Options A-6
A.4.2 CTC Mouse Options A-11
A.4.3 Multishelf View Shortcuts A-13
A.4.4 Node View (Single-Shelf Mode) and Shelf View (Multishelf Mode) Shortcuts A-13
A.4.5 Network View Tasks A-14
A.4.6 Table Display Options A-15
A.5 Equipment Inventory A-16
A.6 Facilities View A-17
CHAPTER B Configuring GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-1
Before You Begin B-1
NTP- G222 Access PCLI Text Interface B-2
NTP- G223 Create a Policy on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-4Contents
xxvi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G517 Create an Ingress Policy on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards Using
PCLI B-4
DLP- G518 Create a Egress Policy on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-5
DLP- G519 Create a Service Instance Policy on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-7
DLP- G520 Apply an Ingress Policy to a Port on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-8
DLP- G521 Apply an Egress Policy to a Port on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-9
DLP- G522 Apply a Service Instance Policy to a Port on GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-9
NTP- G226 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Using PCLI B-11
NTP- G216 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-12
NTP- G225 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Using
PCLI B-13
NTP- G220 Enable IGMP Snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-14
NTP- G217 Enable IGMP Fast-Leave Processing on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-15
NTP- G218 Configure a Multicast Router Port on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-16
NTP- G219 Enable IGMP Report Suppression on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-17
NTP- G224 Enable MVR on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-18
NTP- G227 Create SVLAN for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-19
NTP- G228 Create a Service Instance Using PCLI B-20
NTP- G282 Configure the Channel Group on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-23
DLP- G619 Create a Channel Group on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-24
DLP- G620 Add Ports to a Channel Group on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-25
NTP- G286 Configure EFM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-26
DLP- G643 Enable EFM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-26
DLP- G644 Configure the EFM Mode on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-27
NTP- G284 Configure CFM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-28
DLP- G635 Enable CFM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-29
DLP- G636 Create a Maintenance Domain on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Using PCLI B-29Contents
xxvii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G637 Create a Maintenance Intermediate Point on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Cards Using PCLI B-30
DLP- G638 Create a Maintenance End Point on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Using PCLI B-31
NTP- G288 Configure REP on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-32
DLP- G649 Create a Segment on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-33
DLP- G650 Configure STCN on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-34
DLP- G651 Configure Preemption Delay on the Primary Edge Port Using PCLI B-35
DLP- G652 Configure VLAN Load Balancing on the Primary Edge Port Using PCLI B-36
I NDEXContents
xxviii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02FIGURES
xxix
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Figure 2-1 Installing TNC Card on ONS 15454 M6 Shelf 2-11
Figure 3-1 Login Node Group 3-34
Figure 4-1 Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout - ONS 15454 4-5
Figure 4-2 Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout - ONS 5454M2 4-6
Figure 4-3 Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout - ONS 15454M6 4-6
Figure 4-4 Selecting the IP Address Option—ONS 15454 Shelf Assembly 4-25
Figure 4-5 Changing the IP Address—ONS 15454 Shelf Assembly 4-25
Figure 4-6 Selecting the Save Configuration Option—ONS 15454 Shelf Assembly 4-26
Figure 4-7 Saving and Rebooting the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3—ONS 15454 Shelf Assembly 4-26
Figure 4-8 Nodes Behind a Firewall 4-34
Figure 4-9 CTC Computer and ONS 15454 Nodes Residing Behind Firewalls 4-34
Figure 4-10 Creating an SNMP Trap 4-47
Figure 4-11 Managing Cables on the Front Panel 4-79
Figure 4-12 Fiber-Storage Tray 4-80
Figure 4-13 Using the Patch Panel Latches to Slide the Patch Panel Away from the Tray 4-86
Figure 4-14 MPO Cable 4-87
Figure 4-15 Rear View of the Patch Panel 4-88
Figure 4-16 Top View of the Patch Panel Bar 4-88
Figure 4-17 Front View of the Patch Panel 4-89
Figure 4-18 Deep Patch Panel Tray 4-91
Figure 4-19 Deep Patch Panel Port Wavelengths 4-92
Figure 4-20 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray, Side View 4-93
Figure 4-21 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray, Top View 4-94
Figure 4-22 40-Channel (15454-PP-80) Patch Panel Port Wavelengths 4-96
Figure 4-23 Managing Cables on the Front Panel 4-106
Figure 4-24 Fiber-Storage Tray 4-107
Figure 4-25 Y-Cable Protection Port Label 4-111
Figure 4-26 Y-Cable Protection Module Tray 4-112
Figure 6-1 Single-Span Topology 6-13
Figure 6-2 Point-to-Point Topology 6-13Figures
xxx
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Figure 6-3 Hubs with No Line Amplifiers 6-14
Figure 6-4 Hubs with Line Amplifiers 6-14
Figure 7-1 Network View of Nodes (Terminal or ROADM) 7-6
Figure 7-2 Installing the Raman Pump on a Single Span 7-7
Figure 7-3 Installing the Raman Pump on Multiple Spans 7-7
Figure 7-4 Selecting Spans for Raman Amplification 7-8
Figure 7-5 Setting Raman Calibration Parameter 7-9
Figure 7-6 Bidirectional Path Is Unchecked and MUX/DMUX Present Is Checked 7-11
Figure 7-7 Bidirectional Path Is Unchecked and MUX/DMUX Present Is Unchecked 7-12
Figure 7-8 Bidirectional Path Is Checked and MUX/DMUX Present Is Checked 7-13
Figure 7-9 Bidirectional Path Is Checked and MUX/DMUX Present Is Unchecked 7-14
Figure 7-10 Calibrating Raman Amplification 7-15
Figure 7-11 Calibrating Raman Amplification 7-16
Figure 7-12 Raman Amplification Results 7-17
Figure 7-13 Force Raman Calibration 7-19
Figure 8-1 Upgrade OCHNC Initialization—Completed 8-40
Figure 8-2 Upgrade OCHNC Initialization—Failed 8-41
Figure 8-3 Viewing the Provisionable Patchcords Table 8-42
Figure 10-1 CTC Preferences Dialog Box 10-11
Figure 10-2 Shelf LCD Panel—ONS 15454 Shelf Assembly 10-16
Figure 11-1 Optical Side A Power levels of a Four-degree ROADM Node 11-11
Figure 11-2 Unconsolidated Links in the Network View 11-38
Figure 11-3 Consolidated Links in the Network View 11-38
Figure 11-4 Network View with Local Link Consolidation 11-39
Figure 13-1 ROADM Node 1 Shelf View 13-26
Figure 13-2 ROADM Node 1 Functional View 13-26
Figure 13-3 ROADM Node 2 Shelf View 13-28
Figure 13-4 ROADM Node 2 Functional View 13-28
Figure 13-5 Final Multishelf View of the Node 13-30
Figure 14-1 ANSI Shelf Fan-Tray Air Filter in an External Filter Bracket (Front Door Removed) 14-24
Figure 14-2 ETSI Shelf Fan-Tray Air Filter in an External Filter Bracket (Front Door Removed) 14-25
Figure 14-3 Replacing the Air Filter 14-27
Figure 14-4 Replacing the Air Filter 14-27
Figure 14-5 Replacing the Air Filter 14-28
Figure 14-6 Extracting the Air Filter 14-29Figures
xxxi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Figure 14-7 Replacing the Air Filter 14-29
Figure 14-8 Replacing the Air Filter—AC Power Module 14-31
Figure 14-9 Installing the Door Ground Strap Retrofit Kit 14-34
Figure 14-10 Shelf Assembly with Door Ground Strap Retrofit Kit Installed (ANSI) 14-35
Figure 14-11 Removing or Replacing the Fan-Tray Assembly (Front Door Removed) (ANSI) 14-39
Figure 14-12 Removing or Replacing the Fan-Tray Assembly (Front Door Removed) (ETSI) 14-40
Figure 14-13 Fan-Tray Assembly installed in the ONS 15454M2 Shelf Assembly 14-41
Figure 14-14 Fan -Tray Extracted Partially with Power Connector Disconnected 14-42
Figure 14-15 Fan-Tray Extracted 14-42
Figure 14-16 Extract the Fan-Tray Assembly 14-44
Figure 14-17 Fan-Tray Assembly Extracted Partially with Power Connector Disconnected 14-44
Figure 14-18 Fan-Tray Extracted 14-45
Figure 14-19 Attaching Plastic Lower Backplane Cover 14-49Figures
xxxii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02TABLES
xxxiii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Table 3-1 CTC Computer Setup for Local Craft Connections to the ONS 15454 3-10
Table 3-2 TL1 Tunnels Window 3-43
Table 4-1 Cisco TransportPlanner Node Setup Information and Files 4-4
Table 4-2 NE Update Wizard Options 4-52
Table 4-3 CTC Add Card Shortcut Menu for DWDM Cards 4-56
Table 4-4 Values for the ANS Parameters (amplifier) 4-60
Table 4-5 Values for the ANS Parameters (PSM) 4-61
Table 4-6 Cable Connections for Y-Cable Protection of One Client Signal 4-109
Table 4-7 Cable Connections for Y-Cable Protection of a Second Client Signal 4-109
Table 5-1 32WSS Ports and Wavelengths Test Checklist 5-30
Table 5-2 32WSS-L Ports and Wavelengths Test Checklist 5-53
Table 5-3 40-WSS-C Ports and Wavelengths Test Checklist 5-76
Table 5-4 From COM-RX Side A Verification 5-149
Table 5-5 From COM-RX Side B Verification 5-150
Table 5-6 From COM-RX Side C Verification 5-150
Table 5-7 From COM-RX Side D Verification 5-151
Table 5-8 From COM-RX Side E Verification 5-151
Table 5-9 From COM-RX Side F Verification Table 5-152
Table 5-10 From COM-RX Side G Verification 5-152
Table 5-11 From COM-RX Side H Verification 5-153
Table 5-12 Same Side Verification 5-154
Table 5-13 Side A Power Verification 5-155
Table 5-14 Side B Power Verification 5-155
Table 5-15 Side C Power Verification 5-156
Table 5-16 Side D Power Verification 5-156
Table 5-17 Side E Power Verification 5-156
Table 5-18 Side F Power Verification 5-157
Table 5-19 Side G Power Verification 5-157
Table 5-20 Side H Power Verification 5-158
Table 6-1 10G Data Muxponder Card Port Modes 6-7Tables
xxxiv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Table 6-2 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Modes 6-8
Table 6-3 PPM Port Types 6-16
Table 6-4 Protection Types 6-22
Table 6-5 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Settings 6-30
Table 6-6 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Settings 6-31
Table 6-7 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Section Trace
Settings 6-33
Table 6-8 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Wavelength Trunk Settings 6-35
Table 6-9 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Thresholds Settings
for OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 Payloads 6-36
Table 6-10 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card 1G Ethernet and 1G FC/FICON
Thresholds 6-38
Table 6-11 2R and 3R Mode and ITU-T G.709 Compliance by Client Interface 6-40
Table 6-12 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Trunk Port TCA Thresholds 6-40
Table 6-13 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds 6-42
Table 6-14 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds 6-43
Table 6-15 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card OTN Line Settings 6-46
Table 6-16 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings 6-46
Table 6-17 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card FEC Threshold Settings 6-47
Table 6-18 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Trail Trace Identifier
Settings 6-47
Table 6-19 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Settings 6-51
Table 6-20 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Line Settings 6-53
Table 6-21 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Section Trace
Settings 6-57
Table 6-22 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Wavelength
Trunk Settings 6-58
Table 6-23 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Line Threshold
Settings 6-60
Table 6-24 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card GE LAN Phy
Variables 6-63
Table 6-25 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port TCA Thresholds 6-66
Table 6-26 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds 6-67
Table 6-27 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Client Interface
TCA Thresholds 6-68
Table 6-28 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Client Interface
Alarm Thresholds 6-69Tables
xxxv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Table 6-29 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card OTN Lines
Settings 6-70
Table 6-30 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card ITU-T G.709
Threshold Settings 6-71
Table 6-31 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card FEC Threshold
Settings 6-72
Table 6-32 10G Multirate Transponder Trail Trace Identifier Settings 6-72
Table 6-33 ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings 6-76
Table 6-34 ADM-10G Line Port Tab Settings 6-78
Table 6-35 ADM-10G Line SONET or SDH Tab Settings 6-81
Table 6-36 ADM-10G Section Trace Settings 6-83
Table 6-37 ADM-10G Card Line Threshold Settings 6-85
Table 6-38 ADM-10G Gigabit Ethernet Thresholds 6-88
Table 6-39 ADM-10G Interlink and Trunk Port TCA Thresholds 6-91
Table 6-40 ADM-10G Interlink and Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds 6-92
Table 6-41 ADM-10G Card OTN Lines Settings 6-94
Table 6-42 ADM-10G Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings 6-95
Table 6-43 ADM-10G Card FEC Threshold Settings 6-96
Table 6-44 ADM-10GTrail Trace Identifier Settings 6-97
Table 6-45 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card
Settings 6-100
Table 6-46 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line
Settings 6-101
Table 6-47 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Section
Trace Settings 6-104
Table 6-48 MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Trunk Settings 6-106
Table 6-49 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card
Wavelength Trunk Settings 6-107
Table 6-50 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line
Threshold Settings 6-109
Table 6-51 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trunk Port
TCA Thresholds 6-111
Table 6-52 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trunk Port
Alarm Thresholds 6-112
Table 6-53 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Client
Interfaces TCA Thresholds 6-113
Table 6-54 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L Card Client Interfaces Alarm
Thresholds 6-114
Table 6-55 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line Tables
xxxvi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
OTN Settings 6-115
Table 6-56 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C ITU-T G.709
Threshold Settings 6-116
Table 6-57 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C FEC
Threshold Settings 6-117
Table 6-58 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trail Trace
Identifier Settings 6-118
Table 6-59 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Settings 6-120
Table 6-60 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Distance Extension Settings 6-123
Table 6-61 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line SONET or SDH Settings 6-125
Table 6-62 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Section Trace Settings 6-127
Table 6-63 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Wavelength Trunk Settings 6-128
Table 6-64 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Threshold Settings 6-129
Table 6-65 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR 2.5G Card 1G Ethernet or 1G, 2G FC/FICON Variables 6-131
Table 6-66 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds 6-135
Table 6-67 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds 6-136
Table 6-68 MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Line Client Settings 6-138
Table 6-69 MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Line Distance Extension
Settings 6-140
Table 6-70 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Wavelength Trunk Settings 6-142
Table 6-71 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Line SONET or SDH Settings 6-143
Table 6-72 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Line Section Trace Settings 6-145
Table 6-73 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_LCard Line Threshold Settings 6-146
Table 6-74 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Ethernet Variables 6-149
Table 6-75 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L FC/FICON Variables 6-149
Table 6-76 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L ISC and ISC3Variables 6-150
Table 6-77 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L GFP RMON Variables 6-150
Table 6-78 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds 6-153
Table 6-79 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds 6-154
Table 6-80 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card OTN Line Settings 6-156
Table 6-81 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings 6-157
Table 6-82 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card FEC Threshold Settings 6-157
Table 6-83 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Trail Trace Identifier
Settings 6-157
Table 6-84 40G-MXP-C Card Settings 6-160
Table 6-85 40G-MXP-C Card Line Client Settings 6-161Tables
xxxvii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Table 6-86 40G-MXP-C Card Line SONET or SDH Settings 6-163
Table 6-87 Ethernet Line Settings of the 40G-MXP-C Card 6-164
Table 6-88 40G-MXP-C Card Line Section Trace Settings 6-167
Table 6-89 40G-MXP-C Card Line Threshold Settings 6-169
Table 6-90 40G-MXP-C Ethernet Variables 6-171
Table 6-91 40G-MXP-C FC Variables 6-173
Table 6-92 40G-MXP-C GFP RMON Variables 6-173
Table 6-93 40G-MXP-C Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds 6-176
Table 6-94 40G-MXP-C Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds 6-178
Table 6-95 40G-MXP-C Card OTN Line Settings 6-179
Table 6-96 40G-MXP-C ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings 6-180
Table 6-97 40G-MXP-C Card FEC Threshold Settings 6-181
Table 6-98 40G-MXP-C Card Trail Trace Identifier Settings 6-181
Table 6-99 Channel Group Settings 6-185
Table 6-100 EFM Parameter Settings 6-208
Table 6-101 EFM Link Monitoring Parameter Settings 6-209
Table 6-102 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Ethernet Settings 6-219
Table 6-103 Ethertype Behavior 6-225
Table 6-104 GE_XPE Card PDH Ethernet Settings 6-226
Table 6-105 Jitter Buffer Values for Various Payload Types 6-227
Table 6-106 GE_XPE Card Electrical Lines Settings 6-228
Table 6-107 Storm Control Settings 6-242
Table 6-108 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Trunk Interface TCA Thresholds 6-251
Table 6-109 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Trunk Interface Alarm Thresholds 6-252
Table 6-110 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds 6-253
Table 6-111 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds 6-253
Table 6-112 Gigabit Ethernet \RMON Variables 6-255
Table 6-113 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card OTN Line Settings 6-258
Table 6-114 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings 6-258
Table 6-115 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card FEC Threshold Settings 6-259
Table 6-116 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPECard Trail Trace Identifier Settings 6-259
Table 6-117 OTU2_XP Card Settings 6-264
Table 6-118 OTU2_XP Line Settings 6-266
Table 6-119 OTU2_XP Section Trace Settings 6-269
Table 6-120 OTU2_XP Card Path Threshold Settings on a 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy Mode 6-271Tables
xxxviii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Table 6-121 OTU2_XP Card Line Threshold Settings 6-271
Table 6-122 OTU2_XP Port TCA Thresholds 6-273
Table 6-123 OTU2_XP Port Alarm Thresholds 6-274
Table 6-124 OTU2_XP Card 10G Ethernet Variables 6-274
Table 6-125 OTU2_XP Card 10G FC Variables 6-276
Table 6-126 OTU2_XP Card OTN Lines Settings 6-278
Table 6-127 OTU2_XP Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings 6-279
Table 6-128 OTU2_XP Card FEC Threshold Settings 6-280
Table 6-129 OTU2_XP Card Trail Trace Identifier Settings 6-280
Table 6-130 OTU2_XP Card Proactive Protection Regen Settings 6-282
Table 6-131 OTU2_XP Path Trace Settings 6-283
Table 6-132 OTU2_XP Path Settings 6-285
Table 6-133 ALS Settings 6-286
Table 8-1 OCHCC Client Rates 8-6
Table 8-2 OCH C-Band Channels 8-7
Table 8-3 OCH L-Band Channels 8-8
Table 8-4 Diagnostic and Fix Errors 8-44
Table 8-5 Circuit Protection Types 8-48
Table 8-6 Cisco ONS 15454 Circuit Status 8-48
Table 8-7 Provisionable Patchcord Ports 8-53
Table 8-8 PPC Origination Fields 8-56
Table 8-9 PPC Termination Fields 8-57
Table 9-1 TNC Card FE and ONE_GE RMON Thresholds 9-13
Table 9-2 Channel OADM Optical Line Ports 9-22
Table 9-3 Channel OADM Optical Channel Ports 9-23
Table 9-4 OADM Optical Line Ports 9-24
Table 9-5 OADM Optical Band Ports 9-24
Table 10-1 Alarm Column Descriptions 10-7
Table 10-2 Color Codes for Node Alarms and Condition Severities 10-8
Table 11-1 HTML Commands for the Legal Disclaimer 11-13
Table 11-2 Managing Domains 11-35
Table 11-3 Link Classes By Network Scope 11-39
Table 12-1 OSCM and OSC-CSM Card OC-3/STM-1 Line Settings 12-3
Table 12-2 OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards OC3 Line SONET Threshold Settings 12-5
Table 12-3 OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards OC3 Line SDH Threshold Settings 12-6Tables
xxxix
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Table 12-4 OSCM and OSC-CSM Card Optical Line Parameter Settings 12-7
Table 12-5 OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Optical Line Warning Thresholds Settings 12-9
Table 12-6 OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Optical Line Alarm Thresholds Settings 12-10
Table 12-7 OSC-CSM and OSCM ALS Maintenance Settings 12-12
Table 12-8 OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L Amplifier Optical Line Settings 12-14
Table 12-9 OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L Card Optical Line Warning Threshold Settings 12-16
Table 12-10 OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L Card Optical Line Alarm Thresholds Settings 12-17
Table 12-11 OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L Optical Amplifier Line Settings 12-19
Table 12-12 OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L Card Amplifier Line Warning Threshold Settings 12-21
Table 12-13 OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L Card Amplifier Line Alarm Thresholds Setting 12-22
Table 12-14 OPT-BST ALS Maintenance Settings 12-26
Table 12-15 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifier Optical Line
Settings 12-29
Table 12-16 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Optical Line Warning
Threshold Settings 12-31
Table 12-17 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Optical Line Alarm
Thresholds Setting 12-32
Table 12-18 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, and OPT-AMP-C Optical Amplifier Line Settings 12-33
Table 12-19 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Amplifier Line Warning
Threshold Settings 12-35
Table 12-20 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Amplifier Line Alarm
Thresholds Settings 12-36
Table 12-21 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Optical Raman Line Settings 12-39
Table 12-22 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Raman Line Warning Threshold Settings 12-41
Table 12-23 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Raman Line Alarm Thresholds Settings 12-41
Table 12-24 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE ALS Maintenance Settings 12-42
Table 12-25 PSM Card Optical Line Settings 12-45
Table 12-26 PSM Card Optical Line Warning Threshold Settings 12-47
Table 12-27 PSM Card Optical Line Alarm Thresholds Setting 12-48
Table 12-28 PSM ALS Maintenance Settings 12-50
Table 12-29 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Card Optical Line Settings 12-52
Table 12-30 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Card Optical Line Warning Threshold Settings 12-54
Table 12-31 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Optical Line Alarm Threshold Settings 12-56
Table 12-32 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Card Optical Channel Settings 12-57
Table 12-33 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Card Optical Channel Warning Threshold Settings 12-60
Table 12-34 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Card Optical Channel Alarm Threshold
Settings 12-61Tables
xl
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Table 12-35 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Optical Channel Parameter Settings 12-64
Table 12-36 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, and 40-WSS-CE Optical Channel Warning Threshold Settings 12-67
Table 12-37 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, and 40-WSS-CE Optical Channel Alarm Threshold
Settings 12-68
Table 12-38 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, and 40-WSS-CE Optical Line Parameter Settings 12-70
Table 12-39 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, and 40-WSS-CE Optical Line Warning Threshold Settings 12-72
Table 12-40 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, and 40-WSS-CE Optical Line Alarm Threshold Settings 12-73
Table 12-41 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards Optical Line Warning Threshold Settings 12-75
Table 12-42 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards Optical Line Alarm Thresholds Setting 12-76
Table 12-43 80-WXC-C Card Modes 12-78
Table 12-44 40-WXC-C and 80-WXC-C Optical Channel Parameter Settings 12-79
Table 12-45 40-WXC-C and 80-WXC-C Optical Channel Warning Threshold Settings 12-81
Table 12-46 40-WXC-C and 80-WXC-C Optical Channel Alarm Threshold Settings 12-82
Table 12-47 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Parameter Settings 12-84
Table 12-48 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Warning Threshold Settings 12-86
Table 12-49 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Alarm Threshold Settings 12-87
Table 12-50 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C WXC Line Parameter Settings 12-89
Table 12-51 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Optical Line Settings 12-93
Table 12-52 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Line Warning Threshold Settings 12-96
Table 12-53 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Line Alarm Thresholds Setting 12-97
Table 12-54 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Line Settings 12-99
Table 12-55 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Line Warning Threshold Settings 12-101
Table 12-56 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Line Alarm Thresholds Settings 12-102
Table 12-57 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Channel Parameter Settings 12-106
Table 12-58 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Channel Warning Threshold Settings 12-108
Table 12-59 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Channel Alarm Threshold Settings 12-109
Table 12-60 MMU Optical Line Parameter Settings 12-112
Table 12-61 MMU Optical Line Warning Threshold Settings 12-113
Table 12-62 MMU Optical Line Alarm Threshold Settings 12-114
Table 12-63 TNC Card Optical Warning and Alarms Thresholds Settings 12-119
Table 12-64 TNC Card Line Threshold Settings (Ports tab) 12-120
Table 12-65 TNC Card Line Threshold Settings (OC3 Line tab) 12-123
Table 12-66 TNC Card Line Threshold Settings (SONET) 12-123
Table 12-67 TNC Card Line Threshold Settings (SDH) 12-124
Table 14-1 Audit Trail Column Definitions 14-16
Table 14-2 ONS 15454 Timing Report 14-20Tables
xli
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Table 14-3 Incompatibility Alarms for ONS 15454 ANSI 14-37
Table 14-4 Incompatibility Alarms for ONS 15454 ETSI 14-37
Table A-1 Change CTC Views A-3
Table A-2 Description of Node Icons on Network View Map A-4
Table A-3 CTC Menu and Toolbar Options A-6
Table A-4 CTC Window Mouse Shortcuts A-12
Table A-5 Multishelf View Card-Related Shortcuts A-13
Table A-6 Node/Shelf View Card-Related Shortcuts A-14
Table A-7 Network Management Tasks in Network View A-14
Table A-8 Table Display Options A-15Tables
xlii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02PROCEDURES
xliii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards 2-1
NTP-G313 Install and Configure the TNC or TSC Card 2-8
NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC 3-2
NTP-G18 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the ONS 15454 3-9
NTP-G19 Set Up a CTC Computer for a Corporate LAN Connection to the ONS 15454 3-25
NTP-G21 Log into the GUI 3-28
NTP-G190 Use the CTC Launcher Application to Manage Multiple ONS Nodes 3-38
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files 4-3
NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation 4-7
NTP-G250 Verify Digital Image Signing (DIS) Information 4-8
NTP-G144 Provision a Multishelf Node 4-10
NTP-G23 Create Users and Assign Security 4-12
NTP-G24 Set Up Name, Date, Time, and Contact Information 4-15
NTP-G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds 4-17
NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access 4-18
NTP-G194 Set Up EMS Secure Access to the ONS 15454 4-33
NTP-G27 Set Up the ONS 15454 for Firewall Access 4-33
NTP-G28 Create FTP Host 4-34
NTP-G132 Provision OSI 4-37
NTP-G29 Set Up SNMP 4-47
NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration File 4-49
NTP-G320 Configure the Node as a Non-DWDM Network 4-59
NTP-G328 Add and Delete ANS Parameters 4-61
NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards 4-64
NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units 4-67
NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards 4-69
NTP-G123 Install the Filler Cards 4-75
NTP-G239 Add and Delete Passive Units 4-76
NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs 4-78
NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes 4-82Procedures
xliv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP-G185 Install Fiber-Optic Cables between Mesh Nodes 4-101
NTP-G191 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on Passthrough ROADM Nodes 4-105
NTP-G141 Install Fiber-Optic Cables for Y-Cable Protection Modules 4-108
NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords 4-113
NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually 4-114
NTP-G209 Create, Edit, and Delete Optical Sides 4-123
NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations 4-126
NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup 4-127
NTP-G39 Verify OSCM Transmit Power 4-129
NTP-G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode 4-131
NTP-G210 Provision Node for SNMPv3 4-133
NTP-G211 Provision Node to Send SNMPv3 Traps 4-134
NTP-G212 Manually Provision a GNE/ENE to Manage an ENE using SNMPv3 4-135
NTP-G213 Automatically Provision a GNE to Manage an ENE using SNMPv3 4-136
NTP-G214 Manually Provision a GNE/ENE to Send SNMPv3 Traps from an ENE using SNMPv3 4-136
NTP-G215 Automatically Provision a GNE/ENE to Send SNMPv3 Traps from an ENE Using SNMPv3 4-137
NTP-G41 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O Cards Acceptance Test 5-3
NTP-G168 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test 5-9
NTP-G42 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS and 32DMX Cards Acceptance Test 5-12
NTP-G167 Perform the Terminal Node with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test 5-17
NTP-G153 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test 5-22
NTP-G43 Perform the ROADM Node with 32WSS and 32DMX Cards Acceptance Test 5-29
NTP-G154 Perform the ROADM Node with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test 5-51
NTP-G180 Perform the ROADM Node with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test 5-74
NTP-G276 Perform the 80-Channel n-degree ROADM Node Acceptance Tests 5-97
NTP-G44 Perform the Anti-ASE Hub Node Acceptance Test 5-101
NTP-G45 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM Cards Acceptance Test 5-104
NTP-G155 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM Cards Acceptance Test 5-108
NTP-G46 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test 5-111
NTP-G156 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test 5-115
NTP-G47 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test 5-120
NTP-G157 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test 5-124
NTP-G48 Perform the OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSCM Cards 5-128
NTP-G49 Perform the Active OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM Cards 5-140
NTP-G50 Perform the Passive OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM
Cards 5-146Figures
xlv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP-G186 Perform the Four-Degree and Eight-Degree Mesh Patch Panel Acceptance Test 5-148
NTP-G187 Perform the Multiring Site Acceptance Test 5-160
NTP-G188 Perform the Native Mesh Node Acceptance Test 5-168
NTP-G189 Perform the Node Upgrade Acceptance Test 5-173
NTP-G243 Perform the Two-Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-1-C and OPT-AMP-17-C Cards Acceptance
Test 5-181
NTP-G244 Perform the Four Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-2-C Cards Acceptance Test 5-185
NTP-G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules 6-3
NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group 6-21
NTP-G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP Card 6-24
NTP-G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 6-26
NTP-G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 6-28
NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds 6-48
NTP-G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Ethernet Settings, Line Settings, PM Parameters, and
Thresholds 6-74
NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 6-98
NTP-G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 6-119
NTP-G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 6-137
NTP-G293 Modify the 40G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 6-159
NTP-G281 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Channel Group Settings 6-182
NTP-G283 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card CFM Settings 6-193
NTP-G285 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card EFM Settings 6-206
NTP-G287 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card REP Settings 6-211
NTP-G165 Modify the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE Cards Ethernet Parameters, Line Settings, and
PM Thresholds 6-217
NTP-G237 Retrieve and Clear MAC Addresses on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Cards 6-240
NTP-G311 Provision the Storm Control Settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 6-241
NTP-G205 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 6-243
NTP-G289 Provision CVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card 6-244
NTP-G208 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card 6-245
NTP-G204 Enable IGMP Snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 6-247
NTP-G206 Enable MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card 6-249
NTP-G314 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring 6-260
NTP-G197 Provision the OTU2_XP Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds 6-263
NTP-G162 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings 6-285
NTP-G192 Force FPGA Update 6-286Procedures
xlvi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP-G196 Force FPGA Update When the Card is Part of a Protection Group 6-288
NTP-G232 Enabling Error Decorrelator 6-289
NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up 7-2
NTP-G52 Verify Node-to-Node Connections 7-3
NTP-G201 Configure the Raman Pump on an MSTP Link 7-4
NTP-G53 Set Up Timing 7-22
NTP-G54 Provision and Verify a DWDM Network 7-27
NTP-G56 Verify the OSNR 7-32
NTP-G142 Perform a Protection Switch Test 7-33
NTP-G164 Configure Link Management Protocol 7-35
NTP-G233 Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Node 7-42
NTP-G234 Automatically Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 Router and the Cisco ONS
15454 DWDM Node 7-42
NTP-G207 Manually Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM Node 7-43
NTP-G57 Create a Logical Network Map 7-60
NTP-G325 View the Power Levels of Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP Nodes 7-61
NTP-G326 Provision SRLG on the Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP Network 7-62
NTP-G151 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Client Connections 8-2
NTP-G178 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Trails 8-16
NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections 8-21
NTP-G200 Create, Delete, and Manage STS or VC Circuits for the ADM-10G Card 8-29
NTP-G150 Upgrade Optical Channel Network Connections to Optical Channel Client Connections 8-39
NTP-G183 Diagnose and Fix OCHNC and OCH Trail Circuits 8-43
NTP-G58 Locate and View Optical Channel Circuits 8-45
NTP-G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord 8-52
NTP-G181 Manage GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card SVLAN Databases 8-58
NTP-G60 Create and Delete Overhead Circuits 8-61
NTP-G62 Create a J0 Section Trace 8-69
NTP-G203 Create End-to-End SVLAN Circuits 8-70
NTP-G229 Provision DCN Extension for a Network Using GCC/DCC 8-72
NTP-G245 Create an Automatically Routed VCAT Circuit 8-74
NTP-G246 Create a Manually Routed VCAT Circuit 8-77
NTP-G247 Enable or disable Path Performance Monitoring on Intermediate Nodes 8-80
NTP-G73 Change the PM Display 9-2Figures
xlvii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP-G279 Monitor TNC Card Performance 9-10
NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance 9-15
NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance 9-26
NTP-G193 Enable or Disable AutoPM 9-35
NTP-G63 Document Existing Provisioning 10-2
NTP-G64 View Alarms, History, Events, and Conditions 10-6
NTP-G65 Delete Cleared Alarms from Display 10-14
NTP-G66 View Alarm-Affected Circuits 10-15
NTP-G67 View Alarm Counts on the LCD for a Node, Shelf, Slot, or Port 10-15
NTP-G68 Create, Download, and Assign Alarm Severity Profiles 10-17
NTP-G69 Enable, Modify, or Disable Alarm Severity Filtering 10-24
NTP-G70 Suppress Alarms or Discontinue Alarm Suppression 10-27
NTP-G72 Provision External Alarms and Controls on the Alarm Interface Controller-International Card 10-30
NTP-G277 Provision Alarms and Controls on the TNC or TSC Card 10-32
NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC 11-2
NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control 11-4
NTP-G78 View Side Power Monitoring 11-9
NTP-G80 Change Node Management Information 11-11
NTP-G134 Modify OSI Provisioning 11-14
NTP-G81 Change CTC Network Access 11-23
NTP-G82 Customize the CTC Network View 11-31
NTP-G83 Modify or Delete Card Protection Settings 11-40
NTP-G84 Initiate and Clear Y-Cable and Splitter External Switching Commands 11-43
NTP-G85 Modify or Delete OSC Terminations, DCC/GCC Terminations, and Provisionable Patchcords 11-48
NTP-G86 Convert a Pass-Through Connection to Add/Drop Connections 11-52
NTP-G87 Change Node Timing Parameters 11-53
NTP-G88 Modify Users and Change Security 11-55
NTP-G89 Change SNMP Settings 11-67
NTP-G231 View Optical Power Values and Alarms Using the Network Functional View 11-69
NTP-G90 Modify OSCM and OSC-CSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-2
NTP-G91 Modify OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-13
NTP-G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Line
Settings and PM Thresholds 12-27
NTP-G202 Modify PSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-44
NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x
Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds 12-51Procedures
xlviii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP-G93 Modify the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-62
NTP-G240 Modify TDC-CC and TDC-FC Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-73
NTP-G174 Modify the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-76
NTP-G241 Modify the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-91
NTP-G149 Modify the MMU Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-111
NTP-G101 Modify Alarm Interface Controller–International Settings 12-114
NTP-G102 Change Card Service State 12-117
NTP-G280 Modify Threshold Settings for the TNC Card 12-118
NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards 13-2
NTP-G127 Add an AD-xC-xx.x Card to an OADM Node 13-6
NTP-G129 Add a DWDM Node 13-9
NTP-G130 Remove a DWDM Node 13-11
NTP-G146 Add a Rack, Passive Unit, or Shelf to a Multishelf Node 13-13
NTP-G147 Delete a Passive Unit, Shelf, or Rack from a Multishelf Node 13-16
NTP-G173 Convert an OADM Node to a ROADM Node 13-18
NTP-G176 Convert an Line Amplifier Node to an OADM Node 13-21
NTP-G182 Convert a Line Amplifier Node to a ROADM Node 13-23
NTP-G195 Convert a Protected ROADM Node from two Separate Nodes to a Single Multishelf Node 13-25
NTP-G177 Upgrade ANS Parameters on a DWDM Node 13-32
NTP-G242 Modify the CD setting of TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards 13-33
NTP-G278 Upgrade the TSC Card to the TNC Card 13-35
NTP-G103 Back Up the Database 14-2
NTP-G104 Restore the Database 14-3
NTP-G105 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration 14-5
NTP-G133 View and Manage OSI Information 14-10
NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC 14-13
NTP-G108 Viewing the Audit Trail Records 14-15
NTP-G109 Off-Load the Audit Trail Record 14-16
NTP-G110 Off-Load the Diagnostics File 14-17
NTP-G112 Change the Node Timing Reference 14-18
NTP-G113 View the ONS 15454 Timing Report 14-20
NTP-G114 Inspect, Clean, and Replace the Air Filter 14-23
NTP-G274 Replace the Air Filter of the ONS 15454M2 Shelf Assembly 14-26
NTP-G262 Replace the Air Filter of the ONS 15454M6 Shelf Assembly 14-28
NTP-G263 Replace the Air Filter of the AC Power Module in the ONS 15454M6 Shelf Assembly 14-30Figures
xlix
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors 14-31
NTP-G40 Replace the Front Door 14-34
NTP-G116 Replace the Fan-Tray Assembly 14-36
NTP-G272 Replace the Fan-Tray Assembly of the ONS 15454M2 Shelf Assembly 14-41
NTP-G260 Replace the Fan-Tray Assembly of the ONS 15454M6 Shelf Assembly 14-43
NTP-G117 Replace the ANSI Shelf Alarm Interface Panel 14-45
NTP-G118 Replace the ANSI Shelf Plastic Lower Backplane Cover 14-48
NTP-G135 Edit Network Element Defaults 14-50
NTP-G136 Import Network Element Defaults 14-51
NTP-G137 Export Network Element Defaults 14-52
NTP-G166 View the Facilities 14-53
NTP-G119 Power Down the Node 14-53
NTP-G222 Access PCLI Text Interface B-2
NTP-G223 Create a Policy on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-4
NTP-G226 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-11
NTP-G216 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-12
NTP-G225 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Using
PCLI B-13
NTP-G220 Enable IGMP Snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-14
NTP-G217 Enable IGMP Fast-Leave Processing on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-15
NTP-G218 Configure a Multicast Router Port on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-16
NTP-G219 Enable IGMP Report Suppression on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-17
NTP-G224 Enable MVR on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-18
NTP-G227 Create SVLAN for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-19
NTP-G228 Create a Service Instance Using PCLI B-20
NTP-G282 Configure the Channel Group on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-23
NTP-G286 Configure EFM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-26
NTP-G284 Configure CFM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-28
NTP-G288 Configure REP on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-32Procedures
l
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02TASKS
li
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card 2-2
DLP-G34 Install the AIC-I Card 2-6
DLP-G309 Install the MS-ISC-100T Card 2-7
DLP-G604 Install the TNC or TSC Card 2-9
DLP-G605 Provision PPM and Port for the TNC Card 2-12
DLP-G606 Configure UDC and VoIP for the TNC Card 2-12
DLP-G37 Run the CTC Installation Wizard for Windows PCs 3-3
DLP-G38 Run the CTC Installation Wizard for Solaris Workstations 3-6
DLP-G52 Change the JRE Version 3-9
DLP-G39 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft Connection to an ONS 15454 on the Same Subnet Using Static IP
Addresses 3-12
DLP-G40 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft Connection to an ONS 15454 Using Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol 3-15
DLP-G41 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft Connection to an ONS 15454 Using Automatic Host Detection 3-19
DLP-G42 Set Up a Solaris Workstation for a Craft Connection to an ONS 15454 3-23
DLP-G43 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Internet Explorer (Windows) 3-26
DLP-G44 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Mozilla (Solaris) 3-27
DLP-G331 Adjust the Java Virtual Memory Heap Size (Windows) 3-29
DLP-G46 Log into CTC 3-30
DLP-G47 Install Public-Key Security Certificate 3-32
DLP-G48 Create Login Node Groups 3-33
DLP-G49 Add a Node to the Current Session or Login Group 3-34
DLP-G50 Delete a Node from the Current Session or Login Group 3-35
DLP-G51 Delete a Node from a Specific Login Node Group 3-36
DLP-G53 Configure the CTC Alerts Dialog Box for Automatic Popup 3-36
DLP-G448 Designate ONS 15454 SOCKS GNEs 3-37
DLP-G440 Install the CTC Launcher Application from a Release 9.2 Software CD 3-39
DLP-G441 Install the CTC Launcher Application from a Release 9.2 Node 3-39
DLP-G442 Connect to ONS Nodes Using the CTC Launcher 3-40
DLP-G443 Create a TL1 Tunnel Using the CTC Launcher 3-41
DLP-G444 Create a TL1 Tunnel Using CTC 3-42
DLP-G445 View TL1 Tunnel Information 3-43Tasks
lii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G446 Edit a TL1 Tunnel Using CTC 3-44
DLP-G447 Delete a TL1 Tunnel Using CTC 3-45
DLP-G449 Install or Reinstall the CTC JAR Files 3-46
DLP-G450 Configuring Windows Vista or Windows 7 to Support CTC 3-46
DLP-G54 Create a New User on a Single Node 4-13
DLP-G55 Create a New User on Multiple Nodes 4-14
DLP-G56 Provision IP Settings 4-19
DLP-G439 Provision the Designated SOCKS Servers 4-23
DLP-G57 Set the IP Address, Default Router, and Network Mask Using the LCD 4-24
DLP-G264 Enable Node Security Mode 4-26
DLP-G58 Create a Static Route 4-28
DLP-G59 Set Up or Change Open Shortest Path First Protocol 4-29
DLP-G60 Set Up or Change Routing Information Protocol 4-32
DLP-G61 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the ONS 15454 4-35
DLP-G62 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the CTC Computer 4-36
DLP-G283 Provision OSI Routing Mode 4-38
DLP-G284 Provision the TARP Operating Parameters 4-39
DLP-G285 Add a Static TID-to-NSAP Entry to the TARP Data Cache 4-41
DLP-G287 Add a TARP Manual Adjacency Table Entry 4-42
DLP-G288 Provision OSI Routers 4-43
DLP-G289 Provision Additional Manual Area Addresses 4-44
DLP-G290 Enable the OSI Subnet on the LAN Interface 4-44
DLP-G291 Create an IP-Over-CLNS Tunnel 4-45
DLP-G351 Delete a Card in CTC 4-53
DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot 4-55
DLP-G693 Configure the Amplifier 4-59
DLP-G694 Configure the PSM 4-60
DLP-G541 Add an ANS Parameter 4-62
DLP-G542 Delete an ANS Parameter 4-63
DLP-G348 Use the Cisco TransportPlanner Shelf Layout Report 4-66
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP 4-71
DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot 4-73
DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or XFP 4-74
DLP-G543 Add Passive Units Manually 4-76
DLP-G544 Delete a Passive Unit 4-77Contents
liii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G349 Use the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report 4-80
DLP-G315 Install Fiber-Optic Cables From the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Standard
Patch Panel Tray 4-85
DLP-G316 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP Cards to the Standard Patch Panel Tray 4-89
DLP-G356 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Deep
Patch Panel Tray 4-90
DLP-G427 Reroute Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 4-93
DLP-G428 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE Cards in an
Expanded ROADM, Terminal, or Hub Node to the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 4-95
DLP-G357 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP Cards to the Deep Patch Panel Tray or 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 4-97
DLP-G530 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, or 80-WXC-C Cards in a ROADM,
Terminal, or Hub Node to the 15216-MD-40 or 15216-MD-48 Patch Panel Tray 4-99
DLP-G430 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C Cards in a Mesh Node to the
40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 4-102
DLP-G431 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-WXC-C, or 40-SMR2-C Cards in a Mesh Node to a Mesh Patch
Panel Tray 4-104
DLP-G375 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on the Y-Cable Modules in the FlexLayer Shelf 4-109
DLP-G376 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on the Y-Cable Modules in the Y-Cable Module Tray 4-110
DLP-G354 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the Trunk to Trunk (L2) Option 4-115
DLP-G547 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OCH-Trunk to OCH-Filter Option 4-116
DLP-G548 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OCH-Filter to OCH-Filter Option 4-118
DLP-G549 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OTS to OTS Option 4-120
DLP-G531 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the Optical Path Option 4-122
DLP-G355 Delete an Internal Patchcord 4-123
DLP-G491 Create an Optical Side 4-124
DLP-G492 Edit an Optical Side 4-125
DLP-G480 Delete an Optical Side 4-125
DLP-G314 Verify OSCM Transmit Power 4-130
DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User 4-138
DLP-G497 Create MIB Views 4-139
DLP-G498 Create Group Access 4-139
DLP-G499 Configure SNMPv3 Trap Destination 4-140
DLP-G500 Delete SNMPv3 Trap Destination 4-141
DLP-G501 Create Notification Filters 4-142
DLP-G502 Manually Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table 4-142
DLP-G503 Automatically Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table 4-143Tasks
liv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G504 Manually Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table 4-144
DLP-G505 Automatically Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table 4-145
DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing 5-5
DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power 5-6
DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power 5-7
DLP-G78 Verify the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C Card Power 5-8
DLP-G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power 5-8
DLP-G270 Verify the 32DMX or 40-DMX-C Power 5-16
DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card for Acceptance Testing 5-26
DLP-G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power 5-27
DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power 5-27
DLP-G361 Verify the 32DMX-L Power 5-28
DLP-G310 Verify ROADM Node C-Band Pass-Through Channels 5-33
DLP-G311 Verify the Side B ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 32WSS Cards 5-41
DLP-G312 Verify the Side A ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 32WSS Cards 5-46
DLP-G362 Verify ROADM Node L-Band Pass-Through Channels 5-56
DLP-G363 Verify the Side B ROADM L-Band Add/Drop Channels 5-64
DLP-G364 Verify the Side A ROADM L-Band Add/Drop Channels 5-69
DLP-G310 Verify ROADM Node C-Band Pass-Through Channels with 40-WSS-C Cards 5-79
DLP-G311 Verify the Side B ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 40-WSS-C Cards 5-87
DLP-G312 Verify the Side A ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 40-WSS-C Cards 5-92
DLP-G85 Verify Express Channel Connections on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards 5-130
DLP-G87 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output Express Power 5-131
DLP-G88 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output Express Power 5-131
DLP-G271 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output Common Power 5-132
DLP-G272 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output Common Power 5-132
DLP-G89 Verify OADM Node Pass-Through Channel Connections 5-133
DLP-G92 Verify 4MD-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power 5-134
DLP-G90 Verify an AD-xB-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power 5-135
DLP-G91 Verify an AD-xC-xx.x Pass-Through Connection 5-136
DLP-G84 Verify the OSC-CSM Incoming Power 5-137
DLP-G93 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards 5-138
DLP-G86 Verify Express Channel Connections on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards 5-142
DLP-G83 Verify the OSC-CSM Power on OADM Nodes 5-143
DLP-G94 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards 5-144Contents
lv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength 5-158
DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power 5-159
DLP-434 Record the OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value 5-165
DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters 5-166
DLP-436 Record the 40-WXC-C Power Value 5-167
DLP-G235 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Mode 6-4
DLP-G332 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Port Mode 6-6
DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode 6-8
DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port 6-9
DLP-G452 Change the OTU2_XP Card Mode 6-10
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM 6-11
DLP-G274 Verify Topologies for ETR_CLO and ISC Services 6-12
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate 6-14
DLP-G280 Delete a PPM 6-19
DLP-G461 Create a 1+1 Protection Group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 6-27
DLP-G229 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Settings 6-29
DLP-G230 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Settings 6-30
DLP-G231 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings 6-33
DLP-G367 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 6-34
DLP-G232 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder SONET or SDH Line Threshold Settings 6-35
DLP-G320 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON
Payloads 6-38
DLP-G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-39
DLP-G306 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-41
DLP-G234 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings 6-45
DLP-G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate 6-49
DLP-G712 Provision the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C Data Rate 6-50
DLP-G216 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Settings 6-50
DLP-G217 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Settings 6-52
DLP-G218 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings 6-56
DLP-G368 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 6-58
DLP-G219 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads Including 10G
Ethernet WAN Phy 6-59
DLP-G319 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
Payloads 6-62
DLP-G301 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-66Tasks
lvi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G302 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-67
DLP-G221 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings 6-69
DLP-G403 Create the ADM-10G Peer Group 6-75
DLP-G469 Provision the ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings 6-76
DLP-G397 Change the ADM-10G Line Settings 6-77
DLP-G398 Change the ADM-10G Line Section Trace Settings 6-83
DLP-G399 Change the ADM-10G Line Thresholds for SONET and SDH Payloads 6-84
DLP-G412 Change the ADM-10G Line RMON Thresholds for the 1G Ethernet Payload 6-88
DLP-G400 Provision the ADM-10G Interlink or Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-91
DLP-G401 Provision the ADM-10G Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-92
DLP-G402 Change the ADM-10G OTN Settings 6-93
DLP-G222 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Settings 6-99
DLP-G223 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line Settings 6-101
DLP-G224 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Section Trace Settings 6-103
DLP-G225 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Settings 6-105
DLP-G369 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 6-107
DLP-G226 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder SONET/SDH Line Thresholds Settings 6-108
DLP-G303 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-111
DLP-G304 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-112
DLP-G228 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line OTN Settings 6-114
DLP-G236 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings 6-120
DLP-G237 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings 6-122
DLP-G238 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) Settings 6-124
DLP-G239 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings 6-126
DLP-G370 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 6-128
DLP-G240 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds 6-129
DLP-G321 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Line Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads 6-131
DLP-G307 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-133
DLP-G308 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-134
DLP-G333 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings 6-138
DLP-G334 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings 6-140
DLP-G340 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 6-142
DLP-G335 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings 6-143
DLP-G336 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings 6-145
DLP-G341 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds 6-146Contents
lvii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G337 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 1G FC/FICON, or ISC/ISC3
Payloads 6-148
DLP-G338 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-151
DLP-G339 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-152
DLP-G366 Change the 10G Data Muxponder OTN Settings 6-156
DLP-G662 Change the 40G Multirate Muxponder Card Settings 6-160
DLP-G666 Change the 40G Muxponder Line Settings 6-161
DLP-G667 Change the 40G Muxponder Line SONET (OC-192) or SDH (STM-64), or Ethernet Line
Settings 6-163
DLP-G668 Change the 40G Muxponder Section Trace Settings 6-167
DLP-G669 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds 6-168
DLP-G670 Change the 40G Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 8G FC, or 10G FC Payloads 6-170
DLP-G671 Provision the 40G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-174
DLP-G672 Provision the 40G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-176
DLP-G673 Change the 40G Muxponder OTN Settings 6-179
DLP-G611 Create a Channel Group Using CTC 6-183
DLP-G612 Modify the Parameters of the Channel Group Using CTC 6-184
DLP-G613 Add or Remove Ports to or from an Existing Channel Group Using CTC 6-188
DLP-G614 Delete a Channel Group Using CTC 6-189
DLP-G615 Retrieve Information on Channel Group, REP, CFM, and EFM Using CTC 6-190
DLP-G616 View Channel Group PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using
CTC 6-191
DLP-G617 View Channel Group Utilization PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
Using CTC 6-192
DLP-G618 View Channel Group History PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
Using CTC 6-192
DLP-G621 Enable or Disable CFM on the Card Using CTC 6-194
DLP-G622 Enable or Disable CFM for Each Port Using CTC 6-195
DLP-G623 Create a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC 6-196
DLP-G624 Delete a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC 6-197
DLP-G625 Create a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC 6-198
DLP-G626 Modify a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC 6-199
DLP-G627 Delete a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC 6-199
DLP-G628 Map a Maintenance Association Profile to a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC 6-200
DLP-G629 Create a MEP Using CTC 6-201
DLP-G630 Delete a MEP Using CTC 6-202
DLP-G631 Create a MIP Using CTC 6-202Tasks
lviii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G632 Delete a MIP Using CTC 6-203
DLP-G633 Ping MEP Using CTC 6-204
DLP-G634 Traceroute MEP Using CTC 6-205
DLP-G639 Enable or Disable EFM for Each Port Using CTC 6-206
DLP-G640 Configure EFM Parameters Using CTC 6-207
DLP-G641 Configure EFM Link Monitoring Parameters Using CTC 6-209
DLP-G642 Enable Remote Loopback for Each Port Using CTC 6-210
DLP-G713 Provision Administrative VLAN for Ports in a REP Segment Using CTC 6-212
DLP-G645 Create a Segment Using CTC 6-213
DLP-G646 Edit a Segment Using CTC 6-215
DLP-G647 Activate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC 6-215
DLP-G648 Deactivate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC 6-216
DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings 6-218
DLP-G684 Provision the GE_XPE Card PDH Ethernet Settings 6-226
DLP-G685 Provision the GE_XPE Card Electrical Lines Settings 6-228
DLP-G381 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Layer 2 Protection Settings 6-230
DLP-G507 Enable a Different GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card as the Master Card 6-231
DLP-G382 Add and Remove SVLANS to/from GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE NNI Ports 6-233
DLP-G383 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Quality of Service Settings 6-234
DLP-G470 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Class of Service (CoS) Settings 6-235
DLP-G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings 6-235
DLP-G221 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Cards 6-237
DLP-G460 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 6-238
DLP-G385 Provision the MAC Filter Settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card 6-239
DLP-G546 View Card MAC Addresses on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 6-241
DLP-G509 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 6-243
DLP-G515 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Using
CTC 6-246
DLP-G471 Create a SVLAN or CVLAN Profile 6-246
DLP-G511 Enable IGMP Snooping, IGMP Fast Leave and IGMP Report Suppression on GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 6-248
DLP-G513 Enable MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Using CTC 6-250
DLP-G386 Provision the Gigabit Ethernet Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-251
DLP-G387 Provision the Gigabit Ethernet Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-252
DLP-G388 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card RMON Thresholds 6-254Contents
lix
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G389 Change the Gigabit Ethernet Optical Transport Network Settings 6-257
DLP-G687 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Facing Master Card on a FAPS Ring 6-261
DLP-G688 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Between the Slave Cards on a FAPS Ring 6-262
DLP-G453 Change the OTU2_XP Card Settings 6-264
DLP-G454 Change the OTU2_XP Line Settings 6-265
DLP-G455 Change the OTU2_XP Line Section Trace Settings 6-269
DLP-G456 Change the OTU2_XP Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads 6-270
DLP-G457 Provision the OTU2_XP Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-272
DLP-G462 Change the OTU2_XP Line RMON Thresholds for the 10G Ethernet and 10G FC Payloads 6-274
DLP-G458 Change the OTU2_XP OTN Settings 6-277
DLP-G523 Change the OTU2_XP Path Trace Settings 6-283
DLP-G524 Provision the OTU2_XP Path Settings for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy Configuration 6-284
DLP-G468 Configure the Raman Pump Using the Installation Wizard 7-4
DLP-G474 Configure the Raman Pump by Importing the CTP XML File 7-19
DLP-G489 Configure the Raman Pump by Setting the ANS Parameters Manually 7-20
DLP-490 Restore Raman Link After a Fiber Cut Occurs 7-21
DLP-G95 Set Up External or Line Timing 7-22
DLP-G96 Set Up Internal Timing 7-25
DLP-G350 Use the Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix Report 7-26
DLP-G372 Enable LMP 7-36
DLP-G373 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Control Channels 7-36
DLP-G374 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP TE Links 7-39
DLP-G378 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Data Links 7-40
DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1 Router Parameters 7-44
DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 Router and Verify Configuration 7-45
DLP-G510 Create a Task Group, User Group, and User Account on the Cisco CRS-1 Router 7-46
DLP-G482 Configure a Static Route 7-49
DLP-G483 Configure Local and Remote TE Links 7-50
DLP-G484 Enable the LMP Message Exchange 7-52
DLP-G511 Configure the Wavelength on the Cisco CRS-1 Router 7-53
DLP-G494 Configure the RADIUS Server 7-55
DLP-G485 Enable Index Persistency on an SNMP Interface 7-56
DLP-G486 Configure the LMP Router ID 7-57
DLP-G487 Configure the 10 Gigabit Ethernet (GE) or POS Interface 7-58
DLP-G488 Display Summary of Link Management Information 7-59Tasks
lx
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G540 View SRLG Reports 7-63
DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port 8-3
DLP-G345 Verify OCHCC Client Ports 8-4
DLP-G346 Provision Optical Channel Client Connections 8-4
DLP-G689 Provision Optical Channel Client Connections on OTU2_XP Cards 8-10
DLP-G347 Delete Optical Channel Client Connections 8-11
DLP-G424 Edit an OCHCC Circuit Name 8-12
DLP-G394 Change an OCHCC Administrative State 8-13
DLP-G437 Set OCH Circuit Attributes 8-14
DLP-G438 Set OCH Routing Preferences 8-15
DLP-G395 Create an Optical Channel Trail 8-17
DLP-G418 Delete an Optical Channel Trail 8-19
DLP-G425 Edit an OCH Trail Circuit Name 8-20
DLP-G419 Change an OCH Trail Administrative State 8-21
DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections 8-23
DLP-G493 Provision Protected Optical Channel Network Connections 8-25
DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections 8-26
DLP-G426 Edit an OCHNC Circuit Name 8-27
DLP-G420 Change an OCHNC Administrative State 8-28
DLP-G463 Create an Automatically Routed STS or VC Circuit 8-29
DLP-G464 Create a Manually Routed STS or VC Circuit 8-33
DLP-G465 Provision Path Protection Selectors 8-36
DLP-G466 Delete an STS or VC Circuit 8-37
DLP-G467 Edit an STS or VC Circuit Name 8-38
DLP-G344 Verify Provisionable and Internal Patchcords 8-41
DLP-G100 Search for Optical Channel Circuits 8-45
DLP-G101 View Optical Channel Circuit Information 8-46
DLP-G102 Filter the Display of Optical Channel Circuits 8-49
DLP-G103 View Optical Channel Circuits on a Span 8-51
DLP-G421 Create and Store an SVLAN Database 8-58
DLP-G422 Load or Merge an SVLAN Database 8-60
DLP-G76 Provision DCC/GCC Terminations 8-61
DLP-G97 Provision a Proxy Tunnel 8-63
DLP-G98 Provision a Firewall Tunnel 8-64
DLP-G108 Change the Service State for a Port 8-65Contents
lxi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G109 Provision Orderwire 8-66
DLP-G110 Create a User Data Channel Circuit 8-67
DLP-G112 Delete Overhead Circuits 8-68
DLP-G472 Edit the End-to-End SVLAN Circuit 8-72
DLP-G472 Merge two OCHNC DCN Circuits 8-73
DLP-G551 Provision ADM-10G Ethernet Ports 8-80
DLP-G553 Create a Server Trail 8-81
DLP-G554 Repair Server Trails 8-83
DLP-G555 Provision a VCAT Circuit Source and Destination 8-84
DLP-G556 Provision an Open VCAT Circuit Source and Destination 8-85
DLP-G557 Provision a VCAT Circuit Route 8-86
DLP-G131 Refresh PM Counts at 15-Minute Intervals 9-3
DLP-G132 Refresh PM Counts at One-Day Intervals 9-4
DLP-G133 View Near-End PM Counts 9-5
DLP-G134 View Far-End PM Counts 9-5
DLP-G135 Reset Current PM Counts 9-6
DLP-G136 Clear Selected PM Counts 9-7
DLP-G410 Clear All PM Thresholds 9-8
DLP-G137 Set the Auto-Refresh Interval for Displayed PM Counts 9-9
DLP-G138 Refresh PM Counts for a Different Port 9-10
DLP-G607 View Optics PM Parameters for the TNC Card 9-11
DLP-G608 View Payload PM Parameters for the TNC Card 9-11
DLP-G686 Set the TNC Card RMON Thresholds for the FE/ONE_GE Ethernet Payloads 9-12
DLP-G139 View PM Parameters for OSCM and OSC-CSM cards 9-16
DLP-G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards 9-16
DLP-G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L,
40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards 9-20
DLP-G479 View Optical Power Statistics for the PSM Card 9-21
DLP-G276 View Optical Power Statistics for 4MD-xx.x Cards 9-21
DLP-G142 View Power Statistics for AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, and AD-4C-xx.x Cards 9-22
DLP-G143 View Power Statistics for AD-1B-xx.x and AD-4B-xx.x Cards 9-23
DLP-G525 View Optical Power Statistics for TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards 9-24
DLP-G475 View the PM Parameters for All Facilities 9-25
DLP-G390 View Ethernet Statistic PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 9-27
DLP-G391 View Ethernet Utilization PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Tasks
lxii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Cards 9-28
DLP-G392 View Ethernet History PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 9-28
DLP-G393 Refresh Ethernet PM Counts at a Different Time Interval for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Cards 9-29
DLP-G146 View Optics PM Parameters 9-30
DLP-G147 View Payload PM Parameters 9-30
DLP-G148 View OTN PM Parameters 9-32
DLP-G149 View Payload Statistics PM Parameters 9-33
DLP-G150 View Payload Utilization PM Parameters 9-33
DLP-G151 View Payload History PM Parameters 9-34
DLP-G152 View Payload SONET/SDH PM Parameters 9-35
DLP-G113 Print CTC Data 10-3
DLP-G114 Export CTC Data 10-4
DLP-G115 View Alarms 10-7
DLP-G116 View Alarm or Event History 10-8
DLP-G117 Change the Maximum Number of Session Entries for Alarm History 10-10
DLP-G118 Display Alarms and Conditions Using Time Zone 10-11
DLP-G119 Synchronize Alarms 10-12
DLP-G120 View Conditions 10-12
DLP-G121 Create a New or Cloned Alarm Severity Profile 10-18
DLP-G122 Download an Alarm Severity Profile 10-20
DLP-G123 Apply Alarm Profiles to Ports 10-21
DLP-G124 Apply Alarm Profiles to Cards and Nodes 10-22
DLP-G125 Delete Alarm Severity Profiles 10-23
DLP-G126 Enable Alarm Filtering 10-25
DLP-G127 Modify Alarm, Condition, and History Filtering Parameters 10-25
DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering 10-26
DLP-G129 Suppress Alarm Reporting 10-28
DLP-G130 Discontinue Alarm Suppression 10-29
DLP-G157 Disable Automatic Power Control 11-4
DLP-G158 Enable Automatic Power Control 11-5
DLP-G430 Run Automatic Power Control 11-6
DLP-G159 View Node-Level Automatic Power Control Information 11-7
DLP-G431 View Network-Level Automatic Power Control Information 11-8
DLP-G160 Change the Node Name, Date, Time, and Contact Information 11-12
DLP-G161 Change the Login Legal Disclaimer 11-13Contents
lxiii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G284 Modify the TARP Operating Parameters 11-15
DLP-G286 Remove a Static TID to NSAP Entry from the TARP Data Cache 11-17
DLP-G287 Add a TARP Manual Adjacency Table Entry 11-17
DLP-G292 Remove a TARP Manual Adjacency Table Entry 11-18
DLP-G293 Change the OSI Routing Mode 11-19
DLP-G294 Edit the OSI Router Configuration 11-20
DLP-G295 Edit the OSI Subnetwork Point of Attachment 11-21
DLP-G296 Edit an IP-Over-CLNS Tunnel 11-22
DLP-G297 Delete an IP-Over-CLNS Tunnel 11-23
DLP-G162 Change IP Settings 11-24
DLP-G265 Lock Node Security 11-25
DLP-G266 Modify Backplane Port IP Settings in Security Mode 11-26
DLP-G267 Disable Secure Mode 11-28
DLP-G163 Modify a Static Route 11-29
DLP-G164 Delete a Static Route 11-30
DLP-G165 Disable OSPF 11-30
DLP-G167 Delete a Firewall Tunnel 11-31
DLP-G168 Change the Network View Background Color 11-32
DLP-G169 Change the Default Network View Background Map 11-32
DLP-G170 Apply a Custom Network View Background Map 11-33
DLP-G171 Create Domain Icons 11-34
DLP-G172 Manage Domain Icons 11-34
DLP-G173 Enable Dialog Box Do-Not-Display Option 11-36
DLP-G174 Switch Between TDM and DWDM Network Views 11-36
DLP-G330 Consolidate Links in Network View 11-37
DLP-G175 Modify a Y-Cable Protection Group 11-40
DLP-G176 Modify a Splitter Protection Group 11-41
DLP-G177 Delete a Y-Cable Protection Group 11-42
DLP-G459 Delete a Splitter Protection Group 11-43
DLP-G178 Apply a Manual Y-Cable or Splitter Protection Switch 11-44
DLP-G179 Apply a Force Y-Cable or Splitter Protection Switch 11-45
DLP-G180 Clear a Manual or Force Y-Cable or Splitter Protection Switch 11-45
DLP-G181 Apply a Lock-On 11-46
DLP-G182 Apply a Lockout 11-47
DLP-G183 Clear a Lock-On or Lockout 11-47Tasks
lxiv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G184 Change a DCC/GCC Termination 11-49
DLP-G185 Delete a DCC/GCC Termination 11-49
DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination 11-50
DLP-G187 Delete a Provisionable Patchcord 11-51
DLP-G188 Change Security Policy for a Single Node 11-56
DLP-G189 Change Security Policy for Multiple Nodes 11-57
DLP-G317 Change Node Access and PM Clearing Privilege 11-58
DLP-G328 Grant Superuser Privileges to a Provisioning User 11-59
DLP-G191 Change User Password and Security Level on a Single Node 11-60
DLP-G192 Change User Password and Security Level for Multiple Nodes 11-61
DLP-G193 Delete a User From a Single Node 11-62
DLP-G194 Delete a User From Multiple Nodes 11-63
DLP-G195 Log Out a User on a Single Node 11-63
DLP-G196 Log Out a User on Multiple Nodes 11-64
DLP-G281 Configure the Node for RADIUS Authentication 11-65
DLP-G282 View and Terminate Active Logins 11-66
DLP-G197 Modify SNMP Trap Destinations 11-68
DLP-G198 Delete SNMP Trap Destinations 11-69
DLP-G529 Export Network Functional View Reports 11-70
DLP-G199 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM OC-3/STM-1 Line Settings 12-3
DLP-G200 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM OC-3/STM-1 Line SONET/SDH Thresholds 12-5
DLP-G201 Change Optical Line Parameters for OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards 12-7
DLP-G202 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM Optical Line Threshold Settings 12-8
DLP-G203 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM ALS Maintenance Settings 12-12
DLP-G204 Change Optical Line Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 12-14
DLP-G205 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 12-15
DLP-G206 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 12-19
DLP-G207 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 12-21
DLP-G322 Change the OPT-BST ALS Maintenance Settings 12-25
DLP-G323 Change Optical Line Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, and
OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifiers 12-28
DLP-G324 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C,
and OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifiers 12-30
DLP-G325 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C,
and OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifiers 12-33
DLP-G326 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C,
OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifiers 12-35Contents
lxv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G538 Change Optical Raman Line Settings for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifiers 12-39
DLP-G539 Change Optical Raman Line Threshold Settings for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE
Amplifiers 12-40
DLP-G327 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings of OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C,
and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 12-42
DLP-G514 Change the PSM Card Mode 12-44
DLP-G476 Change Optical Line Settings for the PSM Card 12-45
DLP-G477 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for the PSM Card 12-46
DLP-G478 Change the PSM ALS Maintenance Settings 12-49
DLP-G414 Change Optical Line Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C,
40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 12-52
DLP-G415 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C,
40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 12-54
DLP-G416 Change Optical Channel Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C,
40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 12-57
DLP-G417 Change Optical Channel Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C,
40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 12-59
DLP-G212 Change 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Channel Parameters 12-63
DLP-G213 Change the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Channel Thresholds 12-66
DLP-G214 Change 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Line Parameters 12-70
DLP-G215 Change the 32WSS, 32-WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Line Thresholds 12-71
DLP-G545 Modify the Chromatic Dispersion Value for the TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards 12-74
DLP-G528 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for TDC-CC or TDC-FC Card 12-75
DLP-G603 Change the 80-WXC-C Card Mode 12-77
DLP-G406 Change 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Card Optical Channel Parameters 12-78
DLP-G407 Change the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Channel Thresholds 12-81
DLP-G408 Change 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Parameters 12-84
DLP-G409 Change the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Thresholds 12-86
DLP-G413 Change 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Card WXC Line Parameters 12-88
DLP-G429 Multiplex a Single Wavelength on 40-WXC-C Card 12-90
DLP-G532 Change Optical Line Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards 12-92
DLP-G533 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards 12-94
DLP-G534 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards 12-98
DLP-G535 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards 12-100
DLP-G536 Change 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Channel Parameters 12-105
DLP-G537 Change the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Optical Channel Thresholds 12-107
DLP-G342 Change MMU Optical Line Parameters 12-111Tasks
lxvi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G343 Change the MMU Optical Line Thresholds 12-113
DLP-G245 Change External Alarms Using the AIC-I Card 12-115
DLP-G246 Change External Controls Using the AIC-I Card 12-116
DLP-G247 Change AIC-I Card Orderwire Settings 12-117
DLP-G609 Modify Optical Threshold Settings for the TNC Card 12-119
DLP-G610 Modify Line Threshold Settings for the TNC Card 12-120
DLP-G254 Place Amplifier Ports Out of Service 13-4
DLP-G318 Place Amplifier Ports In Service 13-5
DLP-G526 Modify the CD Value of the TDC-CC and TDC-FC When Connected to OPT-AMP-C, OPT-PRE,
40-SMR-1 and 40-SMR-2 Cards 13-34
DLP-G527 Modify the CD Value of the TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards When Connected to OPT-RAMP-C and
OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifiers 13-34
DLP-G248 Use the Reinitialization Tool to Clear the Database and Upload Software (Windows) 14-6
DLP-G249 Use the Reinitialization Tool to Clear the Database and Upload Software (UNIX) 14-8
DLP-G298 View IS-IS Routing Information Base 14-10
DLP-G299 View ES-IS Routing Information Base 14-11
DLP-G300 Manage the TARP Data Cache 14-12
DLP-G250 Reset the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC Card 14-13
DLP-G251 Reset DWDM Cards Using CTC 14-14
DLP-G259 Manual or Force Switch the Node Timing Reference 14-18
DLP-G260 Clear a Manual or Force Switch on a Node Timing Reference 14-19
DLP-G261 Clean Multi Fiber-Optic Cable Connectors 14-32
DLP-G262 Clean Fiber Connectors with CLETOP 14-33
DLP-G263 Clean the Fiber Adapters 14-33
DLP-G517 Create an Ingress Policy on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards Using PCLI B-4
DLP-G518 Create a Egress Policy on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-5
DLP-G519 Create a Service Instance Policy on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-7
DLP-G520 Apply an Ingress Policy to a Port on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-8
DLP-G521 Apply an Egress Policy to a Port on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-9
DLP-G522 Apply a Service Instance Policy to a Port on GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-9
DLP-G619 Create a Channel Group on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-24
DLP-G620 Add Ports to a Channel Group on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-25
DLP-G643 Enable EFM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-26
DLP-G644 Configure the EFM Mode on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-27
DLP-G635 Enable CFM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-29Contents
lxvii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G636 Create a Maintenance Domain on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-29
DLP-G637 Create a Maintenance Intermediate Point on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Using PCLI B-30
DLP-G638 Create a Maintenance End Point on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-31
DLP-G649 Create a Segment on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-33
DLP-G650 Configure STCN on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-34
DLP-G651 Configure Preemption Delay on the Primary Edge Port Using PCLI B-35
DLP-G652 Configure VLAN Load Balancing on the Primary Edge Port Using PCLI B-36Tasks
lxviii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02lxix
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Preface
Note The terms "Unidirectional Path Switched Ring" and "UPSR" may appear in Cisco literature. These terms
do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration.
Rather, these terms, as well as "Path Protected Mesh Network" and "PPMN," refer generally to Cisco's
path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not
recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration.
This section explains the objectives, intended audience, and organization of this publication and
describes the conventions that convey instructions and other information.
This section provides the following information:
• Revision History
• Document Objectives
• Audience
• Document Organization
• Related Documentation
• Document Conventions
• Obtaining Optical Networking Information
• Obtaining Documentation, Obtaining Support, and Security Guidelineslxx
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Preface
Revision History
Date Notes
June 2010 • Updated “DLP-G450 Configuring Windows Vista or Windows 7 to Support
CTC” in the chapter, “Connect the PC and Log into the GUI”.
July 2010 • Updated “NTP-G203 Create End-to-End SVLAN Circuits” in the chapter,
“Create Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords”.
• Updated “DLP-G421 Create and Store an SVLAN Database” in the chapter,
“Create Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords”.
• Updated “DLP G431 View Network-Level Automatic Power Control
Information” in the chapter, “Manage the Node”.
• Updated “DLP-G346 Provision Optical Channel Client Connections” in the
chapter “Create Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords”.
• Updated “NTP-G293 Modify the 40G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM
Parameter Thresholds, DLP-G666 Change the 40G Muxponder Line Settings,
DLP-G667 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64)
Settings, DLP-G668 Change the 40G Muxponder Section Trace Settings,
DLP-G669 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds,
DLP-G670 Change the 40G Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet,
8G FC, or 10G FC Payloads, DLP-G671 Provision the 40G Muxponder Trunk
Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, DLP-G672 Provision the 40G Muxponder
Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, and DLP-G673 Change the 40G
Muxponder OTN Settings” in the chapter “Provision Transponder and
Muxponder Cards”.
• Added “NTP-G314 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring” in the
chapter, “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Added “DLP-G687 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Facing Master Card on a
FAPS Ring” in the chapter, “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Added “DLP-G688 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Between the Slave Cards
on a FAPS Ring” in the chapter, “Provision Transponder and Muxponder
Cards”.
• Deleted the section “DLP-G313 Verify OSC-CSM Transmit Power” in the
chapter “Turn Up a Node”.
September 2010 Updated the table “OTU2_XP Card OTN Lines Settings” in the chapter “Provision
Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
October 2010 • Updated “NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords” in the chapter,
“Turn Up a Node”.
• Updated “NTP-G207 Create, Edit and Delete Optical Sides” in the chapter,
“Turn Up a Node”.
• Added a note in the “NTP-G114 Inspect, Clean, and Replace the Air Filter”
section of the chapter, “Maintain the node”.
• Updated “DLP-G314 Verify OSCM Transmit Power” in the chapter ,“Turn Up
a Node”.lxxi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Preface
November 2010 • Updated “DLP-G645 Create a Segment Using CTC” in the chapter, Provision
Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Updated step 21 in “NTP-G42 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS and
32DMX Cards Acceptance Test”
• Updated step 22 in "NTP-G153 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS-L and
32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test"
• Updated step 21 in "NTP-G167 Perform the Terminal Node with 40-WSS-C and
40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test"
December 2010 Updated the section "NTP-G110 Off-Load the Diagnostics File" in the chapter
"Maintain the Node".
March 2011 • Updated the description of the rxTotalPkts variable in the chapter, Provision
Transponder and Muxponder Cards.
• Updated the table “ADM-10G Gigabit Ethernet Thresholds” in the chapter
“Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Added a note in the sections “Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters”,
“Perform the Native Mesh Node Acceptance Test”, and “Perform the Node
Upgrade Acceptance Test”.
April 2011 • Updated the card mode options for the 40G-MXP-C card in the chapter,
Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards.
• Added DLP-G689 to the chapter, Create Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords.
• Updated the section “NTP-G197 Provision the OTU2_XP Card Line Settings,
PM Parameters, and Thresholds” in the chapter “Provision Transponder and
Muxponder Cards”.
• Updated the purpose in "NTP-G151 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical
Channel Client Connections" and added notes to "DLP-G346 Provision Optical
Channel Client Connections" and "DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel
Network Connections" in the chapter, "Create Circuits and Provisionable
Patchcords".
May 2011 • Updated the note in “DLP-G266 Modify Backplane Port IP Settings in Security
Mode” in the chapter, “Manage the Node” and “DLP-G56 Provision IP
Settings” in the chapter, “Turn Up a Node”.
• Updated step 5 in the procedure “Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace
DWDM Cards” of the chapter, “Upgrade, Add, and Remove Cards and Nodes”.
July 2011 • Added Framing and CRC Encap entries to table in “DLP-G469 Provision the
ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings”.
• Updated “NTP-G54 Provision and Verify a DWDM Network” to generalize the
steps.
August 2011 • Updated the table “OTU2_XP Line Settings” in the chapter “Provision
Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Updated “DLP-G629 Create a MEP Using CTC” in the chapter “Provision
Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
Date Noteslxxii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Preface
September 2011 • Updated a note in “NTP-G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards” in the chapter “Provision Transponder and
Muxponder Cards”.
• Updated the “NTP-G78 View Side Power Monitoring” procedure.
October 2011 • Updated the “DLP-G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE QinQ Settings”, “DLP-G470 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Class of Service (CoS) Settings”, “DLP-G380
Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet
Settings”, and “DLP-G460 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for
GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE Cards” procedures in the chapter "Provision
Transponder and Muxponder Cards".
• Updated the MPLS Inner Label and MPLS Outer Label range values in the table
"GE_XPE Card PDH Ethernet Settings " in the chapter "Provision Transponder
and Muxponder Cards".
• Updated the “DLP-G471 Create a SVLAN or CVLAN Profile” in the chapter
"Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards".
• Updated information related to IB_5G in the chapter “Provision Transponder
and Muxponder Cards”.
• Updated the section “DLP-G281 Configure the Node for RADIUS
Authentication” in the chapter “Manage the Node”.
November 2011 • Updated the section “DLP-G645 Create a Segment Using CTC” in the chapter
“Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
December 2011 • Updated the procedure “DLP-G76 Provision DCC/GCC Terminations” in the
chapter “Create Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords”.
• Updated the following procedures in the chapter “Manage the Node”:
– NTP-G85 Modify or Delete OSC Terminations, DCC/GCC Terminations,
and Provisionable Patchcords
– DLP-G184 Change a DCC/GCC Termination
– DLP-G185 Delete a DCC/GCC Termination
February 2012 • Updated the procedure “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” in the chapter “Provision Transponder and
Muxponder Cards”.
• Updated the Mode parameter in the table “ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings”
in the chapter “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Updated the procedure “DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate” in the
chapter “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
March 2012 • Updated the bandwidth parameter in the procedure, “DLP-G383 Provision the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Quality of Service Settings”.
• Updated the procedure, “NTP-G129 Add a DWDM Node”, in the chapter
“Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Added a note in the procedure “NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord
Manually” in the chapter “Turn Up a Node”.
Date Noteslxxiii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Preface
Document Objectives
This document explains installation, turn up, provisioning, and maintenance for Cisco ONS 15454,
Cisco ONS M2, and Cisco ONS M6 systems. Use this document in conjunction with the appropriate
publications listed in the Related Documentation section.
Audience
To use this publication, you should be familiar with Cisco or equivalent optical transmission hardware
and cabling, telecommunications hardware and cabling, electronic circuitry and wiring practices, and
preferably have experience as a telecommunications technician
Document Organization
April 2012 • Added a note in the procedure “DLP-G368 Change the 10G Multirate
Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings” in the chapter “Provision
Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Added a new procedure "DLP-G713 Provision Administrative VLAN for Ports
in a REP Segment Using CTC" and updated "DLP-G384 Provision the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings" in the chapter, "Provision
Transponder and Muxponder Cards".
May 2012 • Added a note in the procedure “DLP-G507 Enable a Different GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card as the Master Card” in the chapter
“Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Updated the “Set Up SNMP” procedure in the chapter “Turn Up a Node”.
July 2012 Document Part Number revisioned to 78-19286-02 and a full length book-PDF was
generated.
Date Notes
Table 1 Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapters
Title Summary
Chapter 1, “Install the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS
15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 Shelf”
Explains how to install the Cisco ONS 15454
ETSI, Cisco ONS 15454 ANSI, Cisco ONS 15454
M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 shelf assemblies.
Chapter 2, “Install the Control Cards” Explains how to install the control cards needed for
the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M2, and
Cisco ONS 15454 M6 shelf assemblies.
Chapter 3, “Connect the PC and Log into the
GUI”
Explains how to connect Windows PCs and Solaris
workstations to the Cisco ONS 15454 and how to
log into Cisco Transport Controller (CTC)
software.lxxiv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Preface
Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node” Explains how to provision a single
Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division
multiplexing (DWDM) node and turn it up for
service.
Chapter 5, “Perform Node Acceptance Tests” Provides test procedures to verify that installed
cards are operating correctly in a
Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division
multiplexing (DWDM) node.
Chapter 6, “Provision Transponder and
Muxponder Cards”
Explains how to provision transponder (TXP),
muxponder (MXP), Xponder (GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE), and ADM-10G cards.
Chapter 7, “Turn Up a Network” Explains how to turn up and test a
Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division
multiplexing (DWDM) network.
Chapter 8, “Create Circuits and Provisionable
Patchcords”
Explains how to create Cisco ONS 15454 dense
wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM)
optical channel client connections (OCHCCs),
optical channel network connections (OCHNCs),
and optical trail circuits.
Chapter 9, “Monitor Performance” Explains how to enable and view performance
monitoring (PM) statistics for the
Cisco ONS 15454.
Chapter 10, “Manage Alarms” Contains the procedures for viewing and managing
the alarms and conditions on a Cisco ONS 15454.
Chapter 11, “Manage the Node” Explains how to modify node provisioning for the
Cisco ONS 15454 and perform common
management tasks such as monitoring the dense
wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM)
automatic power control (APC) and span loss
values.
Chapter 12, “Change DWDM Card Settings” Explains how to change line, performance
monitoring (PM), and threshold settings on
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM cards.
Chapter 13, “Upgrade, Add, and Remove Cards
and Nodes”
Provides procedures for adding and removing
dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM)
cards and nodes.
Chapter 14, “Maintain the Node” Provides procedures for maintaining the
Cisco ONS 15454, including database backup and
restoration, removing and replacing cards, viewing
the ONS 15454 audit trail, and hardware
maintenance procedures.
Table 1 Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapters (continued)
Title Summarylxxv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Preface
Related Documentation
Use the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide in conjunction with the following referenced
Release 9.2 publications:
• Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
• Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide
• Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
• Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide
• Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Reference Guide
• Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Quick Reference Guide
• Cisco ONS 15454 SDH TL1 Command Guide
• Cisco ONS 15454 SDH TL1 Reference Guide
• Cisco ONS 15454 SDH TL1Command Quick Reference Guide
• Cisco Transport Planner DWDM Operations Guide
• Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 DWDM, Release 9.2
• Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 SONET and SDH, Release 9.2
For an update on End-of-Life and End-of-Sale notices, refer to
http://cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/optical/ps2006/prod_eol_notices_list.html.
Document Conventions
This publication uses the following conventions:
Appendix A, “CTC Information and Shortcuts” Describes the Cisco Transport Controller (CTC)
views, menus options, tool options, shortcuts, and
table display options.
Appendix B, “Configuring GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI”
Describes how to provision GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards using Pseudo
Command Line Interface (PCLI).
Table 1 Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapters (continued)
Title Summary
Convention Application
boldface Commands and keywords in body text.
italic Command input that is supplied by the user.
[ ] Keywords or arguments that appear within square brackets are optional.lxxvi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Preface
Note Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to material not covered in the
document.
Caution Means reader be careful. In this situation, the user might do something that could result in equipment
damage or loss of data.
{ x | x | x } A choice of keywords (represented by x) appears in braces separated by
vertical bars. The user must select one.
Ctrl The control key. For example, where Ctrl + D is written, hold down the
Control key while pressing the D key.
screen font Examples of information displayed on the screen.
boldface screen font Examples of information that the user must enter.
< > Command parameters that must be replaced by module-specific codes.
Warning IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you
work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar
with standard practices for preventing accidents. Use the statement number provided at the end of
each warning to locate its translation in the translated safety warnings that accompanied this
device. Statement 1071
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
Waarschuwing BELANGRIJKE VEILIGHEIDSINSTRUCTIES
Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert in een situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan
veroorzaken. Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat werken, dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij
elektrische schakelingen betrokken risico's en dient u op de hoogte te zijn van de standaard
praktijken om ongelukken te voorkomen. Gebruik het nummer van de verklaring onderaan de
waarschuwing als u een vertaling van de waarschuwing die bij het apparaat wordt geleverd, wilt
raadplegen.
BEWAAR DEZE INSTRUCTIES
Convention Applicationlxxvii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Preface
Varoitus TÄRKEITÄ TURVALLISUUSOHJEITA
Tämä varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa. Tilanne voi aiheuttaa ruumiillisia vammoja. Ennen kuin
käsittelet laitteistoa, huomioi sähköpiirien käsittelemiseen liittyvät riskit ja tutustu
onnettomuuksien yleisiin ehkäisytapoihin. Turvallisuusvaroitusten käännökset löytyvät laitteen
mukana toimitettujen käännettyjen turvallisuusvaroitusten joukosta varoitusten lopussa näkyvien
lausuntonumeroiden avulla.
SÄILYTÄ NÄMÄ OHJEET
Attention IMPORTANTES INFORMATIONS DE SÉCURITÉ
Ce symbole d'avertissement indique un danger. Vous vous trouvez dans une situation pouvant
entraîner des blessures ou des dommages corporels. Avant de travailler sur un équipement, soyez
conscient des dangers liés aux circuits électriques et familiarisez-vous avec les procédures
couramment utilisées pour éviter les accidents. Pour prendre connaissance des traductions des
avertissements figurant dans les consignes de sécurité traduites qui accompagnent cet appareil,
référez-vous au numéro de l'instruction situé à la fin de chaque avertissement.
CONSERVEZ CES INFORMATIONS
Warnung WICHTIGE SICHERHEITSHINWEISE
Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einer Situation, die zu Verletzungen führen
kann. Machen Sie sich vor der Arbeit mit Geräten mit den Gefahren elektrischer Schaltungen und
den üblichen Verfahren zur Vorbeugung vor Unfällen vertraut. Suchen Sie mit der am Ende jeder
Warnung angegebenen Anweisungsnummer nach der jeweiligen Übersetzung in den übersetzten
Sicherheitshinweisen, die zusammen mit diesem Gerät ausgeliefert wurden.
BEWAHREN SIE DIESE HINWEISE GUT AUF.
Avvertenza IMPORTANTI ISTRUZIONI SULLA SICUREZZA
Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazione potrebbe causare infortuni alle
persone. Prima di intervenire su qualsiasi apparecchiatura, occorre essere al corrente dei pericoli
relativi ai circuiti elettrici e conoscere le procedure standard per la prevenzione di incidenti.
Utilizzare il numero di istruzione presente alla fine di ciascuna avvertenza per individuare le
traduzioni delle avvertenze riportate in questo documento.
CONSERVARE QUESTE ISTRUZIONI
Advarsel VIKTIGE SIKKERHETSINSTRUKSJONER
Dette advarselssymbolet betyr fare. Du er i en situasjon som kan føre til skade på person. Før du
begynner å arbeide med noe av utstyret, må du være oppmerksom på farene forbundet med
elektriske kretser, og kjenne til standardprosedyrer for å forhindre ulykker. Bruk nummeret i slutten
av hver advarsel for å finne oversettelsen i de oversatte sikkerhetsadvarslene som fulgte med denne
enheten.
TA VARE PÅ DISSE INSTRUKSJONENElxxviii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Preface
Aviso INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA
Este símbolo de aviso significa perigo. Você está em uma situação que poderá ser causadora de
lesões corporais. Antes de iniciar a utilização de qualquer equipamento, tenha conhecimento dos
perigos envolvidos no manuseio de circuitos elétricos e familiarize-se com as práticas habituais de
prevenção de acidentes. Utilize o número da instrução fornecido ao final de cada aviso para
localizar sua tradução nos avisos de segurança traduzidos que acompanham este dispositivo.
GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUÇÕES
¡Advertencia! INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD
Este símbolo de aviso indica peligro. Existe riesgo para su integridad física. Antes de manipular
cualquier equipo, considere los riesgos de la corriente eléctrica y familiarícese con los
procedimientos estándar de prevención de accidentes. Al final de cada advertencia encontrará el
número que le ayudará a encontrar el texto traducido en el apartado de traducciones que acompaña
a este dispositivo.
GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUCCIONES
Varning! VIKTIGA SÄKERHETSANVISNINGAR
Denna varningssignal signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en situation som kan leda till personskada.
Innan du utför arbete på någon utrustning måste du vara medveten om farorna med elkretsar och
känna till vanliga förfaranden för att förebygga olyckor. Använd det nummer som finns i slutet av
varje varning för att hitta dess översättning i de översatta säkerhetsvarningar som medföljer denna
anordning.
SPARA DESSA ANVISNINGARlxxix
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Preface
Aviso INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA
Este símbolo de aviso significa perigo. Você se encontra em uma situação em que há risco de lesões
corporais. Antes de trabalhar com qualquer equipamento, esteja ciente dos riscos que envolvem os
circuitos elétricos e familiarize-se com as práticas padrão de prevenção de acidentes. Use o
número da declaração fornecido ao final de cada aviso para localizar sua tradução nos avisos de
segurança traduzidos que acompanham o dispositivo.
GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUÇÕES
Advarsel VIGTIGE SIKKERHEDSANVISNINGER
Dette advarselssymbol betyder fare. Du befinder dig i en situation med risiko for
legemesbeskadigelse. Før du begynder arbejde på udstyr, skal du være opmærksom på de
involverede risici, der er ved elektriske kredsløb, og du skal sætte dig ind i standardprocedurer til
undgåelse af ulykker. Brug erklæringsnummeret efter hver advarsel for at finde oversættelsen i de
oversatte advarsler, der fulgte med denne enhed.
GEM DISSE ANVISNINGERlxxx
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Prefacelxxxi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Preface
Obtaining Optical Networking Information
This section contains information that is specific to optical networking products. For information that
pertains to all of Cisco, refer to the Obtaining Documentation, Obtaining Support, and Security
Guidelines section.
Where to Find Safety and Warning Information
For safety and warning information, refer to the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and
Compliance Information document that accompanied the product. This publication describes the
international agency compliance and safety information for the Cisco ONS 15454 system. It also
includes translations of the safety warnings that appear in the ONS 15454 system documentation.
Cisco Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM
Optical networking-related documentation, including Cisco ONS 15xxx product documentation, is
available in a CD-ROM package that ships with your product. The Optical Networking Product
Documentation CD-ROM is updated periodically and may be more current than printed documentation.lxxxii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Preface
Obtaining Documentation, Obtaining Support, and Security Guidelines
Obtaining Documentation, Obtaining Support, and Security
Guidelines
For information on obtaining documentation, submitting a service request, and gathering additional
information, see the monthly What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation, which also lists all new and
revised Cisco technical documentation, at:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/general/whatsnew/whatsnew.html
Subscribe to the What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation as a Really Simple Syndication (RSS) feed
and set content to be delivered directly to your desktop using a reader application. The RSS feeds are a free
service and Cisco currently supports RSS Version 2.0.CHAPTER
1-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
1
Install the CiscoONS15454, ONS 15454 M2, and
ONS 15454 M6 Shelf
For information on installing the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 shelf, refer:
Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.1-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 1 Install the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 ShelfCHAPTER
2-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
2
Install the Control Cards
This chapter explains how to install the control cards needed for the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS
15454 M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms.
Note The procedures and tasks described in this chapter for the Cisco ONS 15454 platform is applicable to
the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
This section lists the chapter procedures (NTPs). Turn to a procedure for applicable tasks (DLPs).
1. NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards, page 2-1—Complete this procedure to install the
contol cards needed for the ONS 15454 platform.
2. NTP-G313 Install and Configure the TNC or TSC Card, page 2-8—Complete this procedure to
install the control cards needed for the ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 platforms.
NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards
Purpose This procedure describes how to install the control cards needed for the
ONS 15454 platform.
Tools/Equipment Redundant TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards on ONS 15454 shelf (required)
AIC-I card (optional)
MS-ISC-100T (optional; for multishelf node configurations)
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G7 Install the Power and Ground” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide
“NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher2-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 2 Install the Control Cards
Warning During this procedure, wear grounding wrist straps to avoid ESD damage to the card. Do not directly
touch the backplane with your hand or any metal tool, or you could shock yourself. Statement 94
Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. For detailed
instructions on how to wear the ESD wristband, refer to the Cisco ONS Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
and Grounding Guide.
Note If protective clips are installed on the backplane connectors of the cards, remove the clips before
installing the cards.
Note If you install a card incorrectly, the FAIL LED flashes continuously.
Step 1 (ONS 15454 only) Complete the “DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card” task on page 2-2.
Note If you install the wrong card in a slot, see the “NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and
Replace DWDM Cards” procedure in the “Upgrade, Add and Remove Cards and Nodes” chapter
of the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide.
Step 2 (ONS 15454 only) Complete the “DLP-G34 Install the AIC-I Card” task on page 2-6, if necessary.
Step 3 (ONS 15454 only) Complete the “DLP-G309 Install the MS-ISC-100T Card” task on page 2-7, if
necessary.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card
Caution Do not remove a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card during the software transfer process, which is indicated by
alternate flashing FAIL and ACT/STBY LEDs. Removing a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 during the software
transfer process will corrupt the system memory.
Purpose This task installs redundant TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards. The first card you
install in the ONS 15454 must be a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card, and it must
initialize before you install any cross-connect or traffic cards.
Cross-connect cards are only required in hybrid nodes.
Tools/Equipment Two TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None2-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 2 Install the Control Cards
Note Allow each card to boot completely before installing the next card.
Step 1 Open the latches/ejectors of the first TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card that you will install.
Step 2 Use the latches/ejectors to firmly slide the card along the guide rails until the card plugs into the
receptacle at the back of the slot (Slot 7 or 11).
Note In Step 4, you will be instructed to watch the LED activity (sequence) on the front of the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. This activity begins immediately after you close the latches in Step 3.
Step 3 Verify that the card is inserted correctly and close the latches/ejectors on the card.
Note It is possible to close the latches/ejectors when the card is not completely plugged into the back
panel of the shelf. Ensure that you cannot insert the card any farther.
If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card, all LEDs turn off.
Step 4 As needed, go to Step a to verify the LED activity on the TCC2 card. For the TCC2P go to Step b. For
the TCC3 card go to Step c.
a. For the TCC2 card:
• All LEDs turn on briefly. The red FAIL LED and the yellow ACT/STBY LED turn on for about
15 seconds. (For TCC3 card it takes around 20 to 25 seconds)
• The red FAIL LED and the green ACT/STBY LED turn on for about 40 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED blinks for about 15 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for about 15 seconds. All LEDs turn on for about 3 seconds before
turning off for about 3 seconds.
• Both green PWR LEDs turn on for 10 seconds. The PWR LEDs then turn red for 2 to 3 minutes
before going to steady green.
• While the PWR LEDs are red for two to three minutes, the ACT/STBY turn on.
• The boot-up process is complete when the PWR LEDs turn green and the ACT/STBY remains
on. (The ACT/STBY LED will be green if this is the first TCC2 card installed, and amber if this
is the second TCC2 card installed.)
Note It might take up to four minutes for the A and B power alarms to clear.
Note Alarm LEDs might be on; disregard alarm LEDs until you are logged into CTC and can view the
Alarms tab.
Note If you are logged into CTC, the SFTWDOWN alarm might appear as many as two times while
the TCC2 card initializes. The alarm should clear after the card completely boots.2-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 2 Install the Control Cards
Note If the FAIL LED is on continuously, see the tip in Step 8 about the TCC2 card automatic upload.
b. For the TCC2P card:
• All LEDs turn on briefly. The red FAIL LED, the yellow ACT/STBY LED, the green SYNC
LED, and the green ACO LED turn on for about 15 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED and the green ACT/STBY LED turn on for about 30 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED blinks for about 3 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for about 15 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED blinks for about 10 seconds and then becomes solid.
• All LEDs (including the CRIT, MAJ, MIN, REM, SYNC, and ACO LEDs) blink once and turn
off for about 5 seconds.
• Both green PWR LEDs turn on for 10 seconds. The PWR LEDs then turn red for 2 to 3 minutes
before going to steady green. During this time, the ACT/STBY, MJ, and MN LEDs might turn
on, followed by the SNYC LED briefly.
• The boot-up process is complete when the PWR LEDs turn green and the yellow ACT/STBY
remains on. (The ACT/STBY LED will be green if this is the first TCC2P card installed, and
yellow if this is the second TCC2P card installed.)
Note It might take up to three minutes for the A and B power alarms to clear.
Note Alarm LEDs might be on; disregard alarm LEDs until you are logged into CTC and can view the
Alarms tab.
Note If you are logged into CTC, the SFTWDOWN alarm might appear as many as two times while
the TCC2P card initializes. The alarm should clear after the card completely boots.
Note If the FAIL LED is on continuously, see the tip in Step 8 about the TCC2P card automatic
upload.
c. For the TCC3 card:
• All LEDs turn on briefly. The red FAIL LED, the yellow ACT/STBY LED, the green SYNC
LED, and the green ACO LED turn on for about 25 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED and the green ACT/STBY LED turn on for about 15 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED blinks for about 3 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for about 60 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED blinks for about 15 seconds and then becomes solid (the LED is turned on
for about 20 seconds).
• All LEDs (including the CRIT, MAJ, MIN, REM, SYNC, and ACO LEDs) blink once and turn
off for about 5 seconds.2-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 2 Install the Control Cards
• Both green PWR LEDs turn on for 10 seconds. The PWR LEDs then turn red for 2 to 3 minutes
before going to steady green. During this time, the ACT/STBY, MJ, and MN LEDs might turn
on, followed by the SNYC LED briefly.
• The boot-up process is complete when the PWR LEDs turn green and the yellow ACT/STBY
remains on. (The ACT/STBY LED will be green if this is the first TCC3 card installed, and
yellow if this is the second TCC3 card installed.)
Note It might take up to three minutes for the A and B power alarms to clear.
Note Alarm LEDs might be on; disregard alarm LEDs until you are logged into CTC and can view the
Alarms tab.
Note If you are logged into CTC, the SFTWDOWN alarm might appear as many as two times while
the TCC3 card initializes. The alarm should clear after the card completely boots.
Note If the FAIL LED is on continuously, see the tip in Step 8 about the TCC3 card automatic upload.
Step 5 Verify that the ACT/STBY LED is green if this is the first powered-up TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card
installed, or yellow for standby if this is the second powered-up TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3. The IP address,
temperature of the node, and time of day appear on the LCD. The default time and date is 12:00 AM,
January 1, 1970.
Step 6 The LCD cycles through the IP address (the default is 192.1.0.2), node name, and software version.
Verify that the correct software version is shown on the LCD. The software text string indicates the node
type (SDH or SONET) and software release. (For example: SDH 09.20-05L-20.10 indicates it is an SDH
software load, Release 9.2. The numbers following the release number do not have any significance.)
Step 7 If the LCD shows the correct software version, continue with Step 8. If the LCD does not show the
correct software version, refer to your next level of technical support, upgrade the software, or remove
the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card and install a replacement card.
Refer to the release-specific software upgrade document to replace the software. To replace the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
Step 8 Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for the redundant TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. If both TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards
are already installed, proceed to Step 9.
Tip If you install a standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card that has a different software version than the
active TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card, the newly installed standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card
automatically copies the software version from the active TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. You do not
need to do anything in this situation. However, the loading TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card does not
boot up in the normal manner. When the standby card is first inserted, the LEDs follow most of
the normal boot-up sequence. However, after the red FAIL LED turns on for about 5 seconds,
the FAIL LED and the ACT/STBY LED begin to flash alternately for up to 30 minutes while the
new software loads onto the active TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. After loading the new software,
the upgraded TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card’s LEDs repeat the appropriate bootup sequence, and the
amber ACT/STBY LED turns on.2-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 2 Install the Control Cards
Note If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card, all LEDs turn off.
Note Alarm LEDs might be on; disregard alarm LEDs until you are logged into CTC and can view the
Alarms tab.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G34 Install the AIC-I Card
Note When installing cards, allow each card to boot completely before installing the next card.
Step 1 Open the latches/ejectors on the card.
Step 2 Use the latches/ejectors to firmly slide the card along the guide rails in Slot 9 until the card plugs into
the receptacle at the back of the slot.
Step 3 Verify that the card is inserted correctly and close the latches/ejectors on the card.
Note It is possible to close the latches/ejectors when the card is not completely plugged into the
backplane. Ensure that you cannot insert the card any further.
Step 4 Verify the following:
• The red FAIL LED blinks for up to 10 seconds.
Note If the red FAIL LED does not turn on, check the power.
• The PWR A and PWR B LEDs become red, the two INPUT/OUTPUT LEDs become amber, and the
ACT LED turns green for approximately 5 seconds.
• The PWR A and PWR B LEDs turn green, the INPUT/OUTPUT LEDs turn off, and the green ACT
LED remains on.
Note It might take up to 3 minutes for the PWR A and PWR B LEDs to update.
Purpose This task installs the AIC-I card. The AIC-I card provides connections for
external alarms and controls (environmental alarms).
Tools/Equipment AIC-I card
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card, page 2-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None2-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 2 Install the Control Cards
Note If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card, no LEDs turn on.
Note If the red FAIL LED is on continuously or the LEDs act erratically, the card is not installed
properly. Remove the card and repeat Steps 1 to 4.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G309 Install the MS-ISC-100T Card
Note When installing cards, allow each card to boot completely before installing the next card.
Note The MS-ISC-100T is not supported in a subtended shelf.
Step 1 Open the latches/ejectors on the card.
Step 2 Use the latches/ejectors to firmly slide the card along the guide rails into the appropriate slot in the node
controller shelf until the card plugs into the receptacle at the back of the slot. The card can be installed
in any slot from Slot 1 to 6 or 12 to 17. Cisco recommends that you install the MS-ISC-100T cards in
Slot 6 and Slot 12.
Step 3 Verify that the card is inserted correctly and close the latches/ejectors on the card.
Note It is possible to close the latches/ejectors when the card is not completely plugged into the
backplane. Ensure that you cannot insert the card any further.
Step 4 Verify the LED activity:
• The red FAIL LED blinks for 35 to 45 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for 15 to 20 seconds.
Purpose This task installs redundant MS-ISC-100T cards. The MS-ISC-100T card
is required for a multishelf node configuration. It provides LAN
redundancy on the node controller shelf. An alternative to using the
MS-ISC-100T card is the Cisco Catalyst 2950, although Cisco recommends
using the MS-ISC-100T. For more information on the Catalyst 2950
installation, refer to the Catalyst 2950 product documentation.
Tools/Equipment MS-ISC-100T card (2)
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card, page 2-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None2-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 2 Install the Control Cards
• The red FAIL LED blinks for approximately 3 minutes.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for approximately 6 minutes.
• The green ACT or ACT/STBY LED turns on. The SF LED can persist until all card ports connect
to their far end counterparts and a signal is present.
Note If the red FAIL LED does not turn on, check the power.
Note If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card, all LEDs turn off.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for the redundant MS-ISC-100T card.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G313 Install and Configure the TNC or TSC Card
Warning During this procedure, wear grounding wrist straps to avoid ESD damage to the card. Do not directly
touch the backplane with your hand or any metal tool, or you could shock yourself. Statement 94
Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454
M6 shelf assemblies. For detailed instructions on how to wear the ESD wristband, refer to the Cisco ONS
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) and Grounding Guide.
Note If you install a card incorrectly, the FAIL LED flashes continuously.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G604 Install the TNC or TSC Card” task on page 2-9.
Purpose This procedure describes how to install and configure the TNC or TSC
card. TNC and TSC cards are the control cards needed for the ONS 15454
M2 and ONS 15454 M6 platforms.
Tools/Equipment Redundant TNC/TSC cards on ONS 15454 M6 shelf (required)
Stand-alone TNC/TSC card on ONS 15454 M2 shelf (required)
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G271 Install the Power and Ground to the ONS 15454 M2 Shelf” in
the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
“NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher2-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 2 Install the Control Cards
Note If you install the wrong card in a slot, see the “NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and
Replace DWDM Cards” task on page 13-2.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G605 Provision PPM and Port for the TNC Card” task on page 2-12.
Step 3 Complete the “DLP-G606 Configure UDC and VoIP for the TNC Card” task on page 2-12.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G604 Install the TNC or TSC Card
Caution Do not remove the TNC/TSC cards during the software installation process, which is indicated by
alternate flashing FAIL and ACT/STBY LEDs. Removing the TNC/TSC cards during the software
installation process will corrupt the system memory.
Note Allow each TNC/TSC card to boot completely before installing the redundant TNC/TSC card.
Note On the ONS 15454 M6 shelf, install the TNC/TSC cards in slots 1 and 8 for redundancy. On the ONS
15454 M2 shelf, install the stand-alone TNC/TSC card in slot 1. For more information, see the “Card
Slot Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Note You cannot insert the TNC/TSC cards in other slots due to mechanical constraints. To identify the card
slot, match the symbol placed on the lower side of the card front panel with the symbol in the shelf.
Caution To achieve redundancy, two TNC cards or two TSC cards must be installed in the ONS 15454 M6 shelf.
Do not install one TNC card and a redundant TSC card in the same shelf.
Purpose (ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only) This task installs redundant
TNC/TSC cards on the ONS 15454 M6 shelf and a stand-alone TNC/TSC
card on the ONS 15454 M2 shelf. Install and initialize the TNC/TSC card
before installing any other line cards into the shelf assemblies. On the ONS
15454 M6 shelf, install the TNC/TSC cards in slots 1 and 8 for redundancy.
On the ONS 15454 M2 shelf, install the stand-alone TNC/TSC card in slot
1.
Tools/Equipment Two TNC/TSC cards for the ONS 15454 M6 shelf and one TNC/TSC card
for the ONS 15454 M2 shelf
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None2-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 2 Install the Control Cards
Step 1 Open the latches/ejectors of the first TNC/TSC card that you will install.
Step 2 Use the latches/ejectors to firmly slide the card horizontally along the guide rails until the card plugs
into the receptacle at the back of the slot (slot 1 or 8 in the ONS 15454 M6 shelf and slot 1 in the ONS
15454 M2 shelf).
Step 3 Verify that the card is inserted correctly, and close the latches/ejectors on the card.
If you insert a card into a slot assigned for a different card, all LEDs turn off.
Step 4 As needed, verify the LED activity on the TNC/TSC card.
• The red FAIL LED, PWR LED turn on briefly.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for about 10 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED and the amber ACT/STBY LED turn on for about 30 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED blinks for about 10 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for about 15 seconds.
• All the LEDs including the CRIT, MAJ, MIN, REM, SYNC, and ACO LEDs blink once and
turn off for about 10 seconds.
• ACT/STBY LED blinks for about 1 second.
• All the LEDs including the CRIT, MAJ, MIN, REM, SYNC, and ACO LEDs turn off for about
10 seconds.
• The ACT/STBY, ACO, and PWR LEDs turn on.
• The boot-up process is complete when the PWR LEDs turn green and the amber ACT/STBY
remains on. The ACT/STBY LED turns green if this is the first TNC/TSC card installed, and
amber if this is the second TNC/TSC card installed.
Note It might take up to four minutes for the power alarms to clear.
Note Alarm LEDs might be on. After completing the TNC/TSC card installation, log in to CTC and
click the Alarms tab to display the alarms raised on the card. For procedure to clear the alarm,
see the Cisco ONS DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
Note During the TNC/TSC card initialization, the SFTWDOWN alarm appears twice. The alarm
clears after the TNC/TSC card boots completely.
Note If the FAIL LED is on continuously, see the tip in Step 8 about the TNC/TSC card automatic
upload.
Figure 2-1 illustrates the installation of TNC card on ONS 15454 M6 shelf.2-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 2 Install the Control Cards
Figure 2-1 Installing TNC Card on ONS 15454 M6 Shelf
Step 5 Verify that the ACT/STBY LED is green if this is the first powered-up TNC/TSC card installed or amber
if this is the second powered-up TNC/TSC. The IP address, temperature of the node, and time of day
appear on the LCD. The default time and date is 12:00 AM, January 1, 1970.
Step 6 The LCD cycles through the IP address (the default is 192.1.0.2), node name, and software version.
Verify that the correct software version is shown on the LCD. The software text string indicates the node
type (SDH or SONET) and software release. (For example: SDH 09.20-05L-20.10 indicates it is an SDH
software load, Release 9.2. The numbers following the release number do not have any significance.)
Step 7 If the LCD shows the correct software version, continue with Step 8. If the LCD does not show the
correct software version, refer to your next level of technical support, upgrade the software, or remove
the TNC/TSC card and install a replacement card. Refer to the release-specific software upgrade
document to replace the software.
Step 8 (ONS 15454 M6 shelf only) Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for the redundant TNC/TSC card.
Tip If you install a standby TNC/TSC card that has a different software version than the active
TNC/TSC card, the standby TNC/TSC card copies the software version from the active
TNC/TSC card. When the standby card is first inserted, the LEDs follow the normal boot-up
sequence. However, after the red FAIL LED turns on for about 5 seconds, the FAIL LED and the
ACT/STBY LED begin to flash alternately for up to 30 minutes. After loading the new software,
the upgraded TNC/TSC cards LEDs repeat the appropriate bootup sequence, and the amber
ACT/STBY LED turns on.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
279119
1 2
TNC card
Guide rail2-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 2 Install the Control Cards
DLP-G605 Provision PPM and Port for the TNC Card
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TNC card where you
want to provision PPM and port settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
• PPM—Choose 1 or 2 from the PPM drop-down list.
• PPM Type—Displays the PPM associated with the chosen PPM in the above step.
Step 5 Click OK. The newly created PPM appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable
Port Modules area becomes white when the PPM is inserted and the Actual Equipment Type column lists
the name of PPM.
Step 6 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Port dialog box appears.
Step 7 In the Create Ports dialog box, complete the following:
• Port—Choose the port you want to configure from the Port drop-down list.
• Port Type—Choose the port type, such as OC-3, FE, or ONE-GE from the Port Type drop-down list.
Note OC-3 can be configured only on PPM port 1. FE and ONE-GE can be configured on both the ports.
Step 8 Click OK. The newly created port appears in the Pluggable Ports area. The port type you provisioned is
listed in the Rate column.
Step 9 Repeat Steps 3 through 8 to provision another PPM and port on the TNC card.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G606 Configure UDC and VoIP for the TNC Card
Purpose (ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only) This task provisions a PPM and
port on a TNC card. PPMs are created to support the OSC function.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None
Purpose (ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only) This task configures UDC and
VoIP traffic for the TNC card.
Tools/Equipment None2-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 2 Install the Control Cards
Note Each TNC card supports UDC/VoIP configuration. You can configure UDC or VoIP on the two SFP ports
present on the TNC card. The TNC card supports the UDC/VoIP configuration only when OSC is
provisioned on the SFP ports.
Note If two nodes are connected through the fiber and if the TNC card in one node has UDC configuration,
the TNC card in the other node must also have UDC configuration. The same rule applies to VoIP
configuration.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TNC card where you
want to configure UDC and VoIP.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > UDC / VOIP tabs.
Step 3 From the Service Type drop-drop list, choose UDC or VOIP.
Note You can configure UDC or VoIP on only one SFP port at a time per TNC card. If you want to configure
UDC or VoIP on the second SFP port, choose NONE from the Service Type drop-down list for the first
port and then choose UDC or VoIP for the second port.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 4-126
DLP-G605 Provision PPM and Port for the TNC Card, page 2-12
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None2-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 2 Install the Control CardsCHAPTER
3-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
3
Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
This chapter explains how to connect Windows PCs and Solaris workstations to the Cisco ONS 15454
and how to log into Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) software, which is the ONS 15454 Operation,
Administration, Maintenance and Provisioning (OAM&P) user interface. Procedures for connecting to
the ONS 15454 ANSI using TL1 are provided in the Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide.
Procedures for connecting to the ONS 15454 ETSI using TL1 are provided in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH
and Cisco ONS 15600 SDH TL1 Command Guide.
Note The procedures and tasks described in this chapter for the Cisco ONS 15454 platform is applicable to
the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Before You Begin
This section lists the chapter procedures (NTPs). Turn to a procedure for applicable tasks (DLPs).
1. NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2—Complete this procedure if your Windows PC or
Solaris workstation has never been connected to an ONS 15454.
2. NTP-G18 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the ONS 15454,
page 3-9—Complete this procedure to set up your computer for an onsite craft connection to the
ONS 15454.
3. NTP-G19 Set Up a CTC Computer for a Corporate LAN Connection to the ONS 15454,
page 3-25—Complete this procedure to set up your computer to connect to the ONS 15454 using a
corporate LAN.
4. NTP-G21 Log into the GUI, page 3-28—Complete this procedure to log into CTC.
5. NTP-G190 Use the CTC Launcher Application to Manage Multiple ONS Nodes,
page 3-38—Complete this procedure to use the CTC launcher application.
Note Autonegotiation is enabled on the EMS, craft terminal, and TNC/TSC LAN ports by default. The Layer
2 switch (Cisco or third party equipment) ports where the LAN cables are connected, are also configured
with the autonegotiation enabled.3-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
For an ONS 15454 M6 shelf, we recommend the use of RJ-45 port (craft terminal port or the EMS port)
on the ECU to establish LAN connectivity. The advantages of using the RJ-45 ports on the ECU include:
• CAT-5 Ethernet cable connections can be managed better by routing the cable through the ECU
ejector.
• If the TNC or TSC card fails, the LAN connection is not lost during the TNC or TSC card switch
over.
If the ECU is absent, you can connect a CAT-5 Ethernet cable to the LAN port on the TNC/TSC card to
create an external LAN connection.
NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC
Note JRE 1.6 is required to log into nodes running Software Release 9.2. JRE 1.6 is provided on the Software
R9.2 software CD. Complete the “DLP-G52 Change the JRE Version” task on page 3-9 as needed.
Step 1 If your computer does not have an appropriate browser installed, complete one of the following:
• To install Internet Explorer 6.x, 7.x, or 8.x on a Windows PC, download the browser from
www.microsoft.com
• To install Mozilla 1.7 on a Solaris workstation, download the browser from www.mozilla.org
• To install Safari on a MacOS-X PC, download the browser fromwww.apple.com
Note Internet Explorer 8.x is supported on Windows 7, and Safari is supported on MacOS-X.
Step 2 (Windows PC only) Complete the “DLP-G331 Adjust the Java Virtual Memory Heap Size (Windows)”
task on page 3-29 to increase the size of the JVM heap to improve CTC performance.
Step 3 Complete one of the following:
• If your computer is a Windows PC, complete the “DLP-G37 Run the CTC Installation Wizard for
Windows PCs” task on page 3-3.
• If your computer is a Solaris workstation, complete the “DLP-G38 Run the CTC Installation Wizard
for Solaris Workstations” task on page 3-6.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure configures your Windows PC or Solaris workstation to run
CTC.
Tools/Equipment Cisco ONS 15454 Release 9.2 software CD
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 1, “Install the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454
M6 Shelf”
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None3-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
DLP-G37 Run the CTC Installation Wizard for Windows PCs
Note If you will log into nodes running CTC software earlier than Release 4.6, install JRE 1.3.1. To run CTC
software R9.2, install JRE 1.6.
Step 1 Verify that your computer has the following:
• Processor—Pentium III, 700 Mhz or faster
• RAM—384 MB recommended, 512 MB optimum
Note Processor and RAM requirements are guidelines. CTC performance is faster if your
computer has a faster processor and more RAM.
• Hard drive—20 GB hard drive recommended with at least 50 MB of space available
• Operating system—Windows 98 (1st and 2nd editions), Windows NT 4.0 (with Service Pack 6a),
Windows 2000 (with Service Pack 3), Windows XP (with Service Pack 1), Windows Vista, or
Windows 7. If your operating system is Windows NT 4.0, go to Step 2. If your operating system is
Windows Vista or Windows 7, go to Step 3. For all others, go to Step 4.
Step 2 Verify that Service Pack 6a or later is installed. From Windows Start menu, choose Programs >
Administrative Tools > Windows NT Diagnostics and check the service pack on the Version tab of the
Windows NT Diagnostics dialog box. If Service Pack 6a or later is not installed, do not continue. Install
Service Pack 6a following the computer upgrade procedures for your site. Go to Step 4.
Step 3 Complete DLP-G450 Configuring Windows Vista or Windows 7 to Support CTC, page 3-46 and go
toStep 4.
Step 4 Insert the Cisco ONS 15454 Release 9.2 software CD into your computer CD drive. The installation
program begins running automatically. If it does not start, navigate to the CD directory and double-click
setup.exe.
The Cisco Transport Controller Installation Wizard displays the components that will be installed on
your computer:
• JRE 1.6
• Acrobat Reader 8.1.2
• Online User Manuals
Purpose This task installs CTC online user manuals, Acrobat Reader 8.1.2, JRE 1.6,
and CTC JAR files on Windows PCs.
Tools/Equipment Cisco ONS 15454 Release 9.2 software CD
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed This task is required if you will use a Windows computer to run CTC and
if any one of the following is true:
• JRE 1.6 is not installed.
• CTC online user manuals are not installed and are needed.
• CTC JAR files are not installed and are needed.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None3-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
• CTC JAR files
Note JRE 1.6 is required to run Release 9.2. Preinstalling the CTC JAR files saves time at initial login.
If the JAR files are not installed, they are downloaded from the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC
cards the first time you log in.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 Complete one of the following:
• Click Typical to install the JRE, CTC JAR files, online user manuals, and Acrobat Reader. If you
already have JRE 1.6 installed on your computer, choose Custom.
• Click Custom if you want to choose the components that you want to install. By default, Acrobat
Reader and the online user manuals are selected.
Step 7 Click Next.
Step 8 Complete the following, as applicable:
• If you selected Typical in Step 6, skip this step and continue with Step 9.
• If you selected Custom in Step 6, check the CTC component that you want to install and click Next.
– If you selected Online User Manuals, continue with Step 9.
– If you did not select Online User Manuals, continue with Step 11.
Step 9 The directory where the installation wizard will install the CTC online user manuals appears. The default
is C:\Program Files\Cisco\CTC\Documentation.
• If you want to change the CTC online user manuals directory, type the new directory path in the
Directory Name field, or click Browse to navigate to the directory.
• If you do not want to change the directory, continue with Step 10.
Step 10 Click Next.
Step 11 Review the components that will be installed. If you want to change the components, complete one of
the following. If not, proceed to Step 12.
• If you selected Typical in Step 6, click Back twice to return to the installation setup type page.
Choose Custom and repeat Steps 7 through 10.
• If you selected Custom in Step 6, click Back once or twice (depending on the components selected)
until the component selection page appears. Repeat Steps 7 through 10.
Step 12 Click Next. It might take a few minutes for the JRE installation wizard to appear. If you selected Custom
in Step 6 and you don’t need to install a JRE, continue with Step 14.
Step 13 To install the JRE, complete the following:
a. In the Java 2 Runtime Environment License Agreement dialog box, view the license agreement and
choose one of the following:
• I accept the terms of the license agreement—Accepts the license agreement. Continue with
Step b.
• I do not accept the terms of the license agreement—Disables the Next button on the Java 2
Runtime Environment License Agreement dialog box. Click Cancel to return to the CTC
installation wizard. CTC will not install the JRE. Continue with Step 14.3-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Note If JRE 1.6 is already installed on your computer, the Java 2 Runtime Environment
License Agreement dialog box does not appear. You must click Next and then choose
Modify to change the JRE installation, or Remove to uninstall the JRE. If you choose
Modify and click Next, continue with Step e. If you choose Remove and click Next,
continue with Step i.
b. Click Next.
c. Choose one of the following:
• Click Typical to install all JRE features. If you select Typical, the JRE version installed will
automatically become the default JRE version for your browsers.
• Click Custom if you want to select the components to install and select the browsers that will
use the JRE version.
d. Click Next.
e. If you selected Typical, continue with Step i. If you selected Custom, click the drop-down list for
each program feature that you want to install and choose the desired setting. The program features
include:
• Java 2 Runtime Environment—(Default) Installs JRE 1.6 with support for European languages.
• Support for Additional Languages—Adds support for non-European languages.
• Additional Font and Media Support—Adds Lucida fonts, Java Sound, and color management
capabilities.
The drop-down list options for each program feature include:
• This feature will be installed on the local hard drive—Installs the selected feature.
• This feature and all subfeatures will be installed on the local hard drive—Installs the selected
feature and all subfeatures.
• Don’t install this feature now—Does not install the feature (not an option for Java 2 Runtime
Environment).
To modify the directory where the JRE version is installed, click Change, navigate to the desired
directory, and click OK.
f. Click Next.
g. In the Browser Registration dialog box, check the browsers that you want to register with the Java
Plug-In. The JRE version will be the default for the selected browsers. It is acceptable to leave both
browser check boxes unchecked.
Note Setting the JRE as the default for these browsers might cause problems with these browsers.
h. Click Next.
i. Click Finish.
Note If you are uninstalling the JRE, click Remove.
Step 14 In the Cisco Transport Controller Installation Wizard, click Next. The online user manuals and/or Adobe
Acrobat Reader are installed.3-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 15 Click Finish.
Step 16 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G38 Run the CTC Installation Wizard for Solaris Workstations
Note If you will log into nodes running CTC software earlier than Release 4.6, install JRE 1.3.1. To run CTC
software R9.2, install JRE 1.6.
Step 1 Verify that your computer has the following:
• RAM—384 MB recommended, 512 MB optimum
• Hard drive—20 GB hard drive recommended with at least 50 MB of space available
• Operating system—Solaris 9 or 10
Note These requirements are guidelines. CTC performance is faster if your computer has a faster
processor and more RAM.
Step 2 Change the directory. Type:
cd /cdrom/cdrom0/
Step 3 From the techdoc454 CD directory, type:
./setup.bat
The Cisco Transport Controller Installation Wizard displays the components that will be installed on
your computer:
• JRE 1.6
• Acrobat Reader 8.1.2
• Online User Manuals
• CTC JAR files
Step 4 Click Next.
Step 5 Complete one of the following:
Purpose This task installs the CTC online user manuals, Acrobat 8.1.2, and JRE 1.6
on Solaris workstations, as necessary.
Tools/Equipment Cisco ONS 15454 Release 9.2 software CD
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed This task is required if you will use a Solaris workstation to run CTC, and
any of the following is true:
• JRE 1.6 is not installed.
• CTC online user manuals are not installed and are needed.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None3-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
• Click Typical to install both the JRE and the online user manuals. If you already have JRE 1.6
installed on your computer, choose Custom.
• Click Custom if you want to install either the JRE or the online user manuals.
Step 6 Click Next.
Step 7 Complete the following, as applicable:
• If you selected Typical in Step 5, continue with Step 8.
• If you selected Custom in Step 5, check the CTC component that you want to install and click Next.
– If you selected Online User Manuals, continue with Step 8.
– If you did not select Online User Manuals, continue with Step 10.
Step 8 The directory where the installation wizard will install the CTC online user manuals appears. The default
is /usr/doc/ctc.
• If you want to change the CTC online user manuals directory, type the new directory path in the
Directory Name field, or click Browse to navigate to the directory.
• If you do not want to change the CTC online user manuals directory, skip this step.
Step 9 Click Next.
Step 10 Review the components that will be installed.
• If you selected Typical in Step 5, click Back twice to return to the installation setup type page.
Choose Custom and repeat Steps 6 through 9.
• If you selected Custom in Step 5, click Back once or twice (depending on the components selected)
until you reach the component selection page and check the desired components. Repeat Steps 7
through 9.
Step 11 Click Next. It might take a few minutes for the JRE installation wizard to appear. If you selected Custom
in Step 6 and need to install the JRE, continue with Step 13.
Step 12 To install the JRE, complete the following:
a. In the Java 2 Runtime Environment License Agreement dialog box, view the license agreement and
choose one of the following:
• I accept the terms of the license agreement—Accepts the license agreement. Continue with
Step b.
• I do not accept the terms of the license agreement—Disables the Next button on the Java 2
Runtime Environment License Agreement dialog box. Click Cancel to return to the CTC
installation wizard. CTC will not install the JRE. Continue with Step 13.
Note If JRE 1.6 is already installed on your computer, the Java 2 Runtime Environment
License Agreement dialog box does not appear. You must click Next and then choose
Modify to change the JRE installation or Remove to uninstall the JRE. If you choose
Modify and click Next, continue with Step e. If you choose Remove and click Next,
continue with Step i.
b. Click Next.
c. Choose one of the following:
• Click Typical to install all JRE features. If you select Typical, the JRE version installed will
automatically become the default JRE version for your browsers. 3-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
• Click Custom if you want to select the components to install and select the browsers that will
use the JRE version.
d. Click Next.
e. If you selected Typical, continue with Step i. If you selected Custom, click the drop-down list for
each program feature that you want to install and choose the desired setting. The program features
include:
• Java 2 Runtime Environment—(Default) Installs JRE 1.6 with support for European languages.
• Support for Additional Languages—Adds support for non-European languages.
• Additional Font and Media Support—Adds Lucida fonts, Java Sound, and color management
capabilities.
The drop-down list options for each program feature include:
• This feature will be installed on the local hard drive—Installs the selected feature.
• This feature and all subfeatures will be installed on the local hard drive—Installs the selected
feature and all subfeatures.
• Don’t install this feature now—Does not install the feature (not an option for Java 2 Runtime
Environment).
To modify the directory where the JRE version is installed, click Change, navigate to the desired
directory, and click OK.
f. Click Next.
g. In the Browser Registration dialog box, check the browsers that you want to register with the Java
Plug-In. The JRE version will be the default for the selected browsers. It is acceptable to leave both
browser check boxes unchecked.
Note Setting the JRE version as the default for these browsers might cause problems with these
browsers.
h. Click Next.
i. Click Finish.
Note If you are uninstalling the JRE, click Remove.
Step 13 In the Cisco Transport Controller Installation Wizard, click Next. The online user manuals are installed.
Step 14 Click Finish.
Note Be sure to record the names of the directories you choose for JRE and the online user manuals.
Step 15 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).3-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
DLP-G52 Change the JRE Version
Step 1 From the Edit menu, choose Preferences.
Step 2 Click the JRE tab. The JRE tab shows the current JRE version and the recommended and supported
versions.
Step 3 Click the Browse button and navigate to the JRE directory on your computer.
Step 4 Choose the JRE version.
Step 5 Click Open, then click OK.
Step 6 From the File menu, choose Exit.
Step 7 In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes.
Step 8 Log out of the ONS node.
Step 9 In the web browser that you used to log into the node, click Delete CTC Cache.
Step 10 Click Yes on the confirmation dialog then close the browser window.
Step 11 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G18 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the
ONS15454
Purpose This task changes the JRE version, which is useful if you would like to
upgrade to a later JRE version from an earlier one without using the
software CD. This does not affect the browser default version. After
selecting the desired JRE version, you must exit CTC. The next time you
log into a node, the new JRE version will be used.
Tools None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This procedure explains how to set up a PC running Windows or a Solaris
workstation for an onsite local craft connection to the ONS 15454.
Tools/Equipment Network interface card (NIC), also referred to as an Ethernet card
Straight-through (CAT-5) LAN cable
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None3-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete one of the CTC computer setup tasks shown in Table 3-1 based on your CTC connection
environment. For initial setup, use Option 1 or 3 if you are setting up a Windows PC. Use Option 4 if
you are setting up a Solaris workstation.
Table 3-1 CTC Computer Setup for Local Craft Connections to the ONS 15454
Option CTC Connection Environment CTC Computer Setup Task
1 • You are connecting from a Windows PC.
• You will connect to one ONS 15454, or ONS 15454 M2, or
ONS 15454 M6.
• You need to access non-ONS 15454 applications such as ping
and tracert (trace route).
DLP-G39 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft
Connection to an ONS 15454 on the Same
Subnet Using Static IP Addresses, page 3-12
2 • You are connecting from a Windows PC.
• Your network uses Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP) for assignment of host IP addresses.
• The CTC computer is provisioned for DHCP.
• The ONS 15454 has DHCP forwarding enabled.
• The ONS 15454 is connected to a DHCP server.
Note The ONS 15454 does not provide IP addresses. If DHCP
is enabled, it passes DCHP requests to an external DHCP
server.
DLP-G40 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft
Connection to an ONS 15454 Using Dynamic
Host Configuration Protocol, page 3-15
Note Do not use this task for initial node
turn-up. Use the task only if DHCP
forwarding is enabled on the
ONS 15454. By default, DHCP is not
enabled. To enable it, see the
“NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network
Access” procedure on page 4-18.3-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 2 Connect a straight-through CAT-5 LAN cable from the Windows PC or Solaris workstation NIC to one
of the following:
• The RJ-45 (LAN) port on the active or standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. Use this method for the
initial shelf turn-up.
• The RJ-45 (LAN) port on a hub or switch to which the ONS 15454 is physically connected.
• For multishelf mode, the DCN RJ-45 (LAN) port on the Ethernet Adapter Panel (EAP) or Port 23
or 24 of the Catalyst 2950 or the Catalyst 3560.
• If you are using an ONS 15454 M2 shelf assembly, you will connect to the TNC/TSC ethernet port
or the EMS port on the power module either directly or through a hub.
• If you are using an ONS 15454 M6 shelf assembly, you will connect to the TNC/TSC ethernet port,
or the EMS port or the craft terminal port on the ECU either directly or through a hub.
3 • You are connecting from a Windows PC.
• You will connect to ONS 15454s at different locations and
times and do not wish to reconfigure your PC’s IP settings
each time.
• You will not access or use non-ONS 15454 applications such
as ping and tracert (trace route).
• If you are using an ANSI shelf, you will connect to the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 Ethernet port or backplane LAN pins
either directly or through a hub.
• If you are using an ETSI shelf, you will connect to the
ONS 15454 Ethernet port or the RJ-45 jack on the MIC-C/T/P
FMEC either directly or through a hub.
• If you are using an ANSI or ETSI multishelf node, you will
connect to the patch panel DCN port or the Catalyst 2950 or
the Catalyst 3560 using a straight-through (CAT 5) LAN
cable.
• If you are using an ONS 15454 M6 shelf assembly, you will
connect to the TNC/TSC ethernet port, or the EMS port or the
craft terminal port on the ECU either directly or through a
hub.
• If you are using an ONS 15454 M2 shelf assembly, you will
connect to the TNC/TSC ethernet port or the EMS port on the
power module either directly or through a hub.
• If you are using an ONS 15454 M6 multishelf node, you will
connect to the patch panel DCN port or the Catalyst 2950 or
Catalyst 3560 using a straight-through (CAT 5) LAN cable.
DLP-G41 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft
Connection to an ONS 15454 Using
Automatic Host Detection, page 3-19
4 • You are connecting from a Solaris workstation.
• You will connect to one ONS 15454.
• You need to access non-ONS 15454 applications such as ping
and tracert (trace route).
DLP-G42 Set Up a Solaris Workstation for a
Craft Connection to an ONS 15454,
page 3-23
Table 3-1 CTC Computer Setup for Local Craft Connections to the ONS 15454 (continued)
Option CTC Connection Environment CTC Computer Setup Task (continued)3-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Note For instructions on crimping your own straight-through (CAT-5) LAN cables, refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
Step 3 After setting up your CTC computer, continue with the “NTP-G21 Log into the GUI” procedure on
page 3-28 as needed.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G39 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft Connection to an ONS15454 on the
Same Subnet Using Static IP Addresses
Step 1 Verify the operating system that is installed on your computer:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Settings > Control Panel.
b. In the Control Panel window, double-click the System icon.
c. On the General tab of the System Settings window, verify that the Windows operating system is one
of the following: Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, or
Windows 7.
Step 2 According to the Windows operating system installed on your computer, perform one of the following
steps:
• For Windows 98, complete Step 3.
• For Windows NT 4.0, complete Step 4.
• For Windows 2000, complete Step 5.
• For Windows XP, complete Step 6.
• For Windows Vista, complete Step 7.
• For Windows 7, complete Step 8.
Purpose This task sets up your computer for a local craft connection to the
ONS 15454 when:
• You will connect to one ONS 15454; if you will connect to multiple
ONS 15454s, you might need to reconfigure your computer’s IP
settings each time you connect to an ONS 15454.
• You need to use non-ONS 15454 applications such as ping and tracert
(trace route).
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None3-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 3 If you have Windows 98 installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Settings > Control Panel.
b. In the Control Panel dialog box, click the Network icon.
c. In the Network dialog box, choose TCP/IP for your NIC card, then click Properties.
d. In the TCP/IP Properties dialog box, click the DNS Configuration tab and choose Disable DNS.
e. Click the WINS Configuration tab and choose Disable WINS Resolution.
f. Click the IP Address tab.
g. In the IP Address window, click Specify an IP address.
h. In the IP Address field, enter an IP address that is identical to the ONS 15454 IP address except for
the last octet. The last octet must be 1 or 3 through 254. This IP address appears on the LCD unless
its display is suppressed during node provisioning.
i. In the Subnet Mask field, type the same subnet mask as the ONS 15454. The default is
255.255.255.0 (24 bit).
j. Click OK.
k. In the TCP/IP dialog box, click the Gateway tab.
l. In the New Gateway field, type the ONS 15454 IP address. Click Add.
m. Verify that the IP address appears in the Installed Gateways field, then click OK.
n. When the prompt to restart your PC appears, click Yes.
o. Proceed to Step 9.
Step 4 If you have Windows NT 4.0 installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Settings > Control Panel.
b. In the Control Panel dialog box, click the Network icon.
c. In the Network dialog box, click the Protocols tab, choose TCP/IP Protocol, then click Properties.
d. Click the IP Address tab.
e. In the IP Address window, click Specify an IP address.
f. In the IP Address field, enter an IP address that is identical to the ONS 15454 IP address shown on
the ONS 15454 LCD except for the last octet. The last octet must be 1 or 3 through 254.
g. In the Subnet Mask field, type 255.255.255.0.
h. Click Advanced.
i. In the Gateways List, click Add. The TCP/IP Gateway Address dialog box appears.
j. Type the ONS 15454 IP address in the Gateway Address field.
k. Click Add.
l. Click OK.
m. Click Apply.
n. In some cases, Windows NT 4.0 prompts you to reboot your PC. If you receive this prompt, click
Yes.
o. Proceed to Step 9.3-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 5 If you have Windows 2000 installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Settings > Network and Dial-up Connections >
Local Area Connection.
b. In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box, choose the local area connection connected to the
PC port connected to the ONS 15454.
c. Click Properties.
d. On the General tab, choose Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), then click Properties.
e. Click Use the following IP address.
f. In the IP Address field, enter an IP address that is identical to the ONS 15454 IP address shown on
the ONS 15454 LCD except for the last octet. The last octet must be 1 or 3 through 254.
g. In the Subnet Mask field, type 255.255.255.0.
h. In the Default Gateway field, type the ONS 15454 IP address.
i. Click OK.
j. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click OK.
k. In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box, click Close.
l. Proceed to Step 9.
Step 6 If you have Windows XP installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Control Panel > Network Connections.
Note If the Network Connections menu is not available, right-click the Windows screen and
choose Properties from the popup menu. Click the Appearance tab, then under Scheme,
choose Classic View.
b. From the Network Connections dialog box, click the Local Area Connection icon.
c. On the General tab of the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, choose Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP), then click Properties.
d. In the IP Address field, enter an IP address that is identical to the ONS 15454 IP address shown on
the ONS 15454 LCD except for the last octet. The last octet must be 1 or 3 through 254.
e. In the Subnet Mask field, type 255.255.255.0.
f. In the Default Gateway field, type the ONS 15454 IP address.
g. Click OK.
h. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click OK.
i. In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box, click Close.
j. Proceed to Step 9.
Step 7 If you have Windows Vista installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and
Sharing Center > Manage network connections. The Manage network connections window
appears.3-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
b. Right-click the Local Area Connection icon, then click Properties. The Local Area Connection
Properties dialog box appears.
c. Click the Networking tab. Under This connection uses the following items, click Internet
Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) > Properties. The Networking dialog box appears.
d. Click Use the following IP address and in the IP Address field, enter an IP address that is identical
to the ONS 15454 IP address shown on the ONS 15454 LCD except for the last octet. The last octet
must be 1 or 3 through 254.
e. In the Subnet Mask field, type 255.255.255.0.
f. In the Default Gateway field, type the ONS 15454 IP address.
g. Click OK.
h. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click OK.
i. Proceed to Step 9.
Step 8 If you have Windows 7 installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Control Panel.
b. In the search box, type adapter.
c. Under Network and Sharing Center, click View Network Connections. The Network Connections
dialog box appears.
d. In the Network Connections dialog box, right-click the Local Area Connection icon, then click
Properties. The Local Area Connection Properties dialog box appears.
e. Click the Networking tab. Under This connection uses the following items, click Internet
Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) > Properties. The Networking dialog box appears.
f. Click Use the following IP address and in the IP Address field, enter an IP address that is identical
to the ONS 15454 IP address shown on the ONS 15454 LCD except for the last octet. The last octet
must be 1 or 3 through 254.
g. In the Subnet Mask field, type 255.255.255.0.
h. In the Default Gateway field, type the ONS 15454 IP address.
i. Click OK.
j. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click OK.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G40 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft Connection to an ONS15454 Using
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Purpose This task sets up your computer for craft connection to the ONS 15454
using DHCP.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 4-183-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Note Do not use this task for initial node turn-up. Use the task only if DHCP forwarding is enabled on the
ONS 15454. By default, DHCP is not enabled. To enable it, see the “NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network
Access” procedure on page 4-18.
Note The ONS 15454 does not provide the IP addresses. If DHCP forwarding is enabled, it passes DCHP
requests to an external DHCP server.
Step 1 Verify the operating system that is installed on your computer:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Settings > Control Panel.
b. In the Control Panel window, double-click the System icon.
c. On the General tab of the System Settings window, verify that the Windows operating system is one
of the following: Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, or
Windows 7.
Step 2 According to the Windows operating system installed on your computer, perform one of the following
steps:
• For Windows 98, complete Step 3.
• For Windows NT 4.0, complete Step 4.
• For Windows 2000, complete Step 5.
• For Windows XP, complete Step 6.
• For Windows Vista, complete Step 7.
• For Windows 7, complete Step 8.
Step 3 If you have Windows 98 installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Settings > Control Panel.
b. In the Control Panel dialog box, click the Network icon.
c. In the Network dialog box, select TCP/IP for your NIC, then click Properties.
d. In the TCP/IP Properties dialog box, click the DNS Configuration tab and choose Disable DNS.
e. Click the WINS Configuration tab and choose Disable WINS Resolution.
f. Click the IP Address tab.
g. In the IP Address window, click Obtain an IP address automatically.
h. Click OK.
i. When the prompt to restart your PC appears, click Yes.
j. Proceed to Step 9.
Step 4 If you have Windows NT 4.0 installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Settings > Control Panel.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None3-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
b. In the Control Panel dialog box, click the Network icon.
c. In the Network dialog box, click the Protocols tab, choose TCP/IP Protocol, then click Properties.
d. Click the IP Address tab.
e. In the IP Address window, click Obtain an IP address from a DHCP server.
f. Click OK.
g. Click Apply.
h. If Windows prompts you to restart your PC, click Yes.
i. Proceed to Step 9.
Step 5 If you have Windows 2000 installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Settings > Network and Dial-up Connections >
Local Area Connection.
b. In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box, choose the local area connection connected to the
PC port connected to the ONS 15454.
c. In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box, click Properties.
d. On the General tab, choose Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), then click Properties.
e. Click Obtain an IP address automatically.
f. Click OK.
g. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click OK.
h. In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box, click Close.
i. Proceed to Step 9.
Step 6 If you have Windows XP installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Control Panel > Network Connections.
Note If the Network Connections menu is not available, right-click the Windows screen and
choose Properties from the popup menu. Click the Appearance tab, then under Scheme,
choose Classic View.
b. From the Network Connections dialog box, click the Local Area Connection icon.
c. On the General tab of the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click Properties.
d. On the General tab, choose Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), then click Properties.
e. Click Obtain an IP address automatically.
f. Click OK.
g. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click OK.
h. In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box, click Close.
i. Proceed to Step 9.3-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 7 If you have Windows Vista installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and
Sharing Center > Manage network connections. The Manage network connections window
appears.
b. Right-click the Local Area Connection icon, then click Properties. The Local Area Connection
Properties dialog box appears.
c. Click the Networking tab. Under This connection uses the following items, click Internet
Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) > Properties. The Networking dialog box appears.
d. Click Obtain an IP address automatically.
e. Click OK.
f. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click OK.
g. Proceed to Step 9.
Step 8 If you have Windows 7 installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Control Panel.
b. In the search box, type adapter.
c. Under Network and Sharing Center, click View Network Connections. The Network Connections
dialog box appears.
d. Right-click the Local Area Connection icon, then click Properties. The Local Area Connection
Properties dialog box appears.
e. Click the Networking tab. Under This connection uses the following items, click Internet
Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) > Properties. The Networking dialog box appears.
f. Click Obtain an IP address automatically.
g. Click OK.
h. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click OK.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).3-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
DLP-G41 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft Connection to an ONS15454 Using
Automatic Host Detection
Step 1 Verify the operating system that is installed on your computer:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Settings > Control Panel or, for Windows XP, Control
Panel > System.
b. In the Control Panel window, double-click the System icon.
c. On the General tab of the System Settings window, verify that the Windows operating system is one
of the following: Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, or
Windows 7.
Step 2 According to the Windows operating system installed on your computer, perform one of the following
steps:
• For Windows 98, complete Step 3.
• For Windows NT 4.0, complete Step 4.
• For Windows 2000, complete Step 5.
• For Windows XP, complete Step 6.
• For Windows Vista, complete Step 7.
• For Windows 7, complete Step 8.
Purpose This task sets up your computer for local craft connection to the
ONS 15454 when:
• You are using an ANSI shelf, you will connect to the ONS 15454
Ethernet port or backplane LAN pins either directly or through a hub.
• You are using an ETSI shelf, you will connect to the ONS 15454
Ethernet port or the RJ-45 jack on the MIC-C/T/P FMEC either
directly or through a hub.
• You are using an ONS 15454 M6 shelf assembly, you will connect to
the TNC/TSC ethernet port, or the EMS port or the craft terminal port
on the ECU either directly or through a hub.
• You are using an ONS 15454 M2 shelf assembly, you will connect to
the TNC/TSC ethernet port or the EMS port on the power module
either directly or through a hub.
• You will connect to multiple ONS 15454s and do not want to
reconfigure your IP address each time.
• You do not need to access non-ONS 15454 applications such as ping
and tracert (trace route).
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None3-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 3 If you have Windows 98 installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Settings > Control Panel.
b. In the Control Panel dialog box, click the Network icon.
c. In the Network dialog box, select TCP/IP for your NIC, then click Properties.
d. In the TCP/IP Properties dialog box, click the DNS Configuration tab and choose Disable DNS.
e. Click the WINS Configuration tab and choose Disable WINS Resolution.
f. Click the IP Address tab.
g. In the IP Address window, click Specify an IP address.
h. In the IP Address field, enter any legitimate IP address other than the node IP address as indicated
on the LCD of the ONS 15454. The default IP address is 192.1.0.2.
Note You can suppress the LCD IP address display using CTC. For more information, see the
“DLP-G162 Change IP Settings” task on page 11-24.
i. In the Subnet Mask field, type the same subnet mask as the ONS 15454. The default is
255.255.255.0 (24 bit).
j. Click OK.
k. In the TCP/IP dialog box, click the Gateway tab.
l. In the New Gateway field, type the address entered in Step h. Click Add.
m. Verify that the IP address appears in the Installed Gateways field, then click OK.
n. When the prompt to restart your PC appears, click Yes.
o. Proceed to Step 9.
Step 4 If you have Windows NT 4.0 installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Settings > Control Panel.
b. In the Control Panel dialog box, click the Network icon.
c. In the Network dialog box, click the Protocols tab, choose TCP/IP Protocol, then click Properties.
d. Click the IP Address tab.
e. In the IP Address window, click Specify an IP address.
f. In the IP Address field, enter any legitimate IP address other than the node IP address as indicated
on the LCD of the ONS 15454. The default IP address is 192.1.0.2.
Note You can suppress the LCD IP address display using CTC. For more information, see the
“DLP-G162 Change IP Settings” task on page 11-24.
g. In the Subnet Mask field, type the same subnet mask as the ONS 15454. The default is
255.255.255.0 (24 bit).
h. Click Advanced.
i. In the Gateways List, click Add. The TCP/IP Gateway Address dialog box appears.
j. Type the IP address entered in Step f in the Gateway Address field.3-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
k. Click Add.
l. Click OK.
m. Click Apply.
n. Reboot your PC.
o. Proceed to Step 9.
Step 5 If you have Windows 2000 installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Settings > Network and Dial-up Connections >
Local Area Connection.
b. In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box, click Properties.
c. On the General tab, choose Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), then click Properties.
d. Click Use the following IP address.
e. In the IP Address field, enter any legitimate IP address other than the node IP address as indicated
on the LCD of the ONS 15454. The default IP address is 192.1.0.2.
Note You can suppress the LCD IP address display using CTC. For more information, see the
“DLP-G162 Change IP Settings” task on page 11-24.
f. In the Subnet Mask field, type the same subnet mask as the ONS 15454. The default is
255.255.255.0 (24 bit).
g. Type the IP address entered in Step e in the Gateway Address field.
h. Click OK.
i. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click OK.
j. In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box, click Close.
k. Proceed to Step 9.
Step 6 If you have Windows XP installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Control Panel > Network Connections.
Note If the Network Connections menu is not available, click Switch to Classic View.
b. From the Network Connections dialog box, right-click the Local Area Connection icon and select
Properties.
c. Scroll to the bottom of the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box. Click Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) to select it, then click Properties.
d. In the IP Address field, enter any legitimate IP address other than the node IP address as indicated
on the LCD of the ONS 15454. The default IP address is 192.1.0.2.
e. Select the Use the Following IP Address: radio button.
Note You can suppress the LCD IP address display using CTC. For more information, see the
“DLP-G162 Change IP Settings” task on page 11-24.3-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
f. In the Subnet Mask field, type the same subnet mask as the ONS 15454. The default is
255.255.255.0 (24 bit).
g. Type the IP address entered in Step d in the Gateway Address field.
h. Click OK.
i. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click Close.
Step 7 If you have Windows Vista installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and
Sharing Center > Manage network connections. The Manage network connections window
appears.
b. Right-click the Local Area Connection icon, then click Properties. The Local Area Connection
Properties dialog box appears.
c. Click the Networking tab. Under This connection uses the following items, click Internet
Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) > Properties. The Networking dialog box appears.
d. Click Use the following IP address and in the IP Address field, enter any legitimate IP address other
than the node IP address indicated on the LCD of the ONS 15454. The default IP address is
192.1.0.2.
Note You can suppress the LCD IP address display using CTC. For more information, see the
“DLP-G162 Change IP Settings” task on page 11-24.
e. In the Subnet Mask field, type the same subnet mask as the ONS 15454. The default is
255.255.255.0 (24 bit).
f. Type the IP address entered in Step d in the Gateway Address field.
g. Click OK.
h. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click Close.
Step 8 If you have Windows 7 installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Control Panel.
b. In the search box, type adapter.
c. Under Network and Sharing Center, click View Network Connections. The Network Connections
dialog box appears.
d. Right-click the Local Area Connection icon, then click Properties. The Local Area Connection
Properties dialog box appears.
e. Click the Networking tab. Under This connection uses the following items, click Internet
Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) > Properties. The Networking dialog box appears.
f. Click Use the following IP address and in the IP Address field, enter any legitimate IP address other
than the node IP address indicated on the LCD of the ONS 15454. The default IP address is
192.1.0.2.
Note You can suppress the LCD IP address display using CTC. For more information, see the
“DLP-G162 Change IP Settings” task on page 11-24.3-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
g. In the Subnet Mask field, type the same subnet mask as the ONS 15454. The default is
255.255.255.0 (24 bit).
h. Type the IP address entered in Step f in the Gateway Address field.
i. Click OK.
j. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click Close.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G42 Set Up a Solaris Workstation for a Craft Connection to an ONS15454
Note This procedure does not apply to the ONS 15454 M6 and ONS 15454 M2 chassis, because they do not
have a backplane TL1 craft port.
Step 1 Log into the workstation as the root user.
Step 2 Check to see if the interface is plumbed by typing:
# ifconfig device
For example:
# ifconfig hme1
• If the interface is plumbed, a message similar to the following appears:
hme1:flags=1000842mtu 1500 index 2 inet 0.0.0.0
netmask 0
If a message similar to this one appears, go to Step 4.
• If the interface is not plumbed, a message similar to the following appears:
ifconfig: status: SIOCGLIFFLAGS: hme1: no such interface.
If a message similar to this one appears, go to Step 3.
Step 3 Plumb the interface by typing:
# ifconfig device plumb
For example:
# ifconfig hme1 plumb
Step 4 Configure the IP address on the interface by typing:
# ifconfig interface ip-address netmask netmask up
Purpose This task sets up a Solaris workstation for a craft connection to the
ONS 15454.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None3-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
For example:
# ifconfig hme0 192.1.0.3 netmask 255.255.255.0 up
Note Enter an IP address that is identical to the ONS 15454 IP address except for the last octet. The
last octet must be 1 or 3 through 254.
Step 5 In the Subnet Mask field, type 255.255.255.0. Skip this step if you checked Craft Access Only on the
Provisioning > Network > General > Gateway Settings tab.
Step 6 Test the connection:
a. Start Mozilla.
b. Enter the ONS 15454 IP address in the web address (URL) field. If the connection is established, a
Java Console window, CTC caching messages, and the Cisco Transport Controller Login dialog box
appear. If this occurs, go to Step 2 of the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 to complete
the login. If the Login dialog box does not appear, complete Steps c and d.
c. At the prompt, type:
ping ONS-15454-IP-address
For example, to connect to an ONS 15454 with a default IP address of 192.1.0.2, type:
ping 192.1.0.2
If your workstation is connected to the ONS 15454, the following message appears:
IP-address is alive
Note Skip this step if you checked the Craft Access Only check box on the Provisioning >
Network > General > Gateway Settings tab.
d. If CTC is not responding, a “no answer from x.x.x.x” message appears. Verify the IP and subnet
mask information. Check that the cables connecting the workstation to the ONS 15454 are securely
attached. Check the link status by typing:
# ndd -set /dev/device instance 0
# ndd -get /dev/device link_status
For example:
# ndd -set /dev/hme instance 0
# ndd -get /dev/hme link_status
A result of “1” means the link is up. A result of “0” means the link is down.
Note Check the man page for ndd. For example, type: # man ndd.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).3-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
NTP-G19 Set Up a CTC Computer for a Corporate LAN
Connection to the ONS15454
Step 1 If your computer is already connected to the corporate LAN, go to Step 3. If you changed your
computer’s network settings for craft access to the ONS 15454, change the settings back to the corporate
LAN access settings. This generally means:
• Set the IP Address on the TCP/IP dialog box back to Obtain an IP address automatically
(Windows 2000 and XP) or Obtain an IP address from a DHCP server (Windows NT 4.0).
• If your LAN requires that Domain Name System (DNS) or Windows Internet Naming Service
(WINS) be enabled, change the setting on the DNS Configuration or WINS Configuration tab of the
TCP/IP dialog box.
Step 2 Connect the ONS 15454 and the computer to the corporate LAN:
• Connect a straight-through (CAT-5) LAN cable from the PC or Solaris workstation NIC card to a
corporate LAN port.
• For a single ONS 15454 shelf node, connect a straight-through (CAT-5) LAN cable from the EMS
or the craft terminal port to the corporate LAN port. For a single ONS 15454 M2 shelf, connect a
straight-through (CAT-5) LAN cable from the EMS or the TNC/TSC Ethernet port to the corporate
LAN port. For a single ONS 15454 M6 shelf, connect a straight-through (CAT-5) LAN cable from
the EMS port, or the craft terminal port, or the TNC/TSC Ethernet port to the corporate LAN.
• For an ONS 15454 M6 multishelf node, connect a straight-through (CAT-5) LAN cable from the
EMS port, or the craft terminal port, or the TNC/TSC Ethernet port. For an ONS 15454, connect the
DCN RJ-45 (LAN) port on the EAP or to Port 23 or 24 of the Catalyst 2950 or the Catalyst 3560 to
corporate LAN port.
Step 3 If your computer is connected to a proxy server, disable proxy service or add the ONS 15454 nodes as
exceptions. To disable or bypass proxy service, complete one of the following tasks, depending on the
web browser that you use:
• DLP-G43 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Internet Explorer (Windows), page 3-26
• DLP-G44 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Mozilla (Solaris), page 3-27
Step 4 Continue with the “NTP-G21 Log into the GUI” procedure on page 3-28.
Purpose This procedure sets up your computer to access the ONS 15454 through a
corporate LAN.
Tools/Equipment NIC, also referred to as an Ethernet card
Straight-through (CAT-5) LAN cable
Prerequisite Procedures • NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
• The ONS 15454 must be provisioned for LAN connectivity, including
IP address, subnet mask, default gateway.
• The ONS 15454 must be physically connected to the corporate LAN.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None3-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G43 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Internet Explorer (Windows)
Note If you disable proxy on a TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC node that has secure mode enabled, the node’s
communication with other secure mode nodes may be compromised. For more information about secure
mode, refer to the “Management Network Connectivity” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Reference Manual.
Step 1 From the Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel.
Note If your computer is running Windows XP, you can select Control Panel directly from the Start
menu. Make sure that you are in Classic View before continuing with this procedure. To switch
to Classic View, right-click the Windows screen and choose Properties from the popup menu.
Click the Appearance tab, then under Scheme, choose Classic View.
Step 2 In the Control Panel window, choose Internet Options.
Step 3 In the Internet Properties dialog box, click Connections > LAN Settings.
Step 4 In the LAN Settings dialog box, complete one of the following tasks:
• Uncheck Use a proxy server to disable the service.
• To bypass the service, leave Use a proxy server selected and click Advanced. In the Proxy Setting
dialog box under Exceptions, enter the IP addresses of ONS 15454 nodes that you will access.
Separate each address with a semicolon. You can insert an asterisk (*) for the host number to include
all the ONS 15454s on your network. Click OK to close each open dialog box.
Note For ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 nodes that have
TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards installed with the TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC secure mode
option enabled, enter the backplane LAN port (or the EMS port) IP addresses. If the node is
in secure mode and the configuration has been locked, you will not be able to change the IP
address unless the lock is disabled by Cisco Technical Support. Refer to the “Management
Network Connectivity” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual for more
information about secure mode.
Purpose This task disables or bypasses proxy service for PCs running Internet
Explorer.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
Required/As Needed Required if your computer is connected to a network computer proxy
server and your browser is Internet Explorer.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None3-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G44 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Mozilla (Solaris)
Note If you disable proxy on a TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC node that has secure mode enabled, the node’s
communication with other secure mode nodes may be compromised. For more information about secure
mode, refer to the “Management Network Connectivity” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Reference Manual.
Step 1 Open Mozilla (Solaris).
Step 2 From the Edit menu, choose Tools. The Internet Options dialog box appears.
Step 3 In the Network tab, click Settings. The Connection Settings dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Connection Settings dialog box, set one of the following options:
• Click the No proxy option to disable the proxy server.
• Click the Auto-detect proxy settings for this network option to automatically detect the proxy
settings for the network.
• Click the Manual proxy configuration option to add exceptions to the proxy server. In the No
Proxy For field, enter the IP addresses of the ONS 15454 nodes that you will access. Separate each
address with a comma.
• Click OK to close the Connection Settings dialog box.
• Click OK to close the Internet Options dialog box.
Note For ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, or ONS 15454 M6 nodes that have TCC2P, TCC3, TNC,
or TSC cards installed with the TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC secure mode option enabled, enter
the backplane LAN port (or EMS port) IP addresses in the Manual proxy configuration
option. If the node is in secure mode and the configuration has been locked, you will not be
able to change the IP address unless the lock is disabled by Cisco Technical Support.
Information on contacting Cisco Technical Support is provided in the Preface Chapter of
this guide.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task disables or bypasses proxy service for Windows PCs running
Mozilla (Solaris). Required if your computer is connected to a network
computer proxy server and your browser is Mozilla (Solaris).
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None3-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
NTP-G21 Log into the GUI
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30.
Note For information about navigating in CTC, see Appendix A, “CTC Information and Shortcuts.”
During network topology discovery, CTC polls each node in the network to determine which one
contains the most recent version of the CTC software. If CTC discovers a node in the network that has
a more recent version of the CTC software than the version you are currently running, CTC generates a
message stating that a later version of the CTC has been found in the network. If you have network
discovery disabled, CTC will not seek more recent versions of the software. Unreachable nodes are not
included in the upgrade discovery.
Note Upgrading the CTC software will overwrite your existing software. You must restart CTC after
the upgrade is complete.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “DLP-G48 Create Login Node Groups” task on page 3-33. Login node groups
allow you to view and manage nodes that have an IP connection but no data communications channel
(DCC) connection to the login node.
Step 3 As needed, complete the “DLP-G49 Add a Node to the Current Session or Login Group” task on
page 3-34.
Step 4 As needed, complete the “DLP-G50 Delete a Node from the Current Session or Login Group” task on
page 3-35.
Step 5 As needed, complete the “DLP-G331 Adjust the Java Virtual Memory Heap Size (Windows)” task on
page 3-29.
Step 6 As needed, complete the “DLP-G51 Delete a Node from a Specific Login Node Group” task on
page 3-36.
Step 7 As needed, complete the “DLP-G53 Configure the CTC Alerts Dialog Box for Automatic Popup” task
on page 3-36.
Purpose This procedure logs into CTC, the graphical user interface (GUI) software
used to manage the ONS 15454. This procedure includes optional node
login tasks.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
One of the following procedures:
• NTP-G18 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the
ONS 15454, page 3-9
• NTP-G19 Set Up a CTC Computer for a Corporate LAN Connection
to the ONS 15454, page 3-25
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher3-29
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G331 Adjust the Java Virtual Memory Heap Size (Windows)
Note The task adjusts the physical memory allocation in the computer RAM so that more space is allocated
for CTC. However, less physical memory will be available for other computer processes and programs.
If you notice performance degradation of non-CTC programs after completing this task, reduce the JVM
allotted to CTC. You may need to repeat the task a few times to find the right balance between JVM
allotted to CTC and to other programs on your computer.
Step 1 From the Windows PC, click Start > Settings > Control Panel. > System, or Start > Control Panel >
System (Windows XP). The Windows Control Panel appears. The System Properties dialog box appears.
Step 2 Click the Advanced tab.
Step 3 Click Environmental Variables. The Environmental Variables dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the User Variables area, check to see whether a CTC_HEAP variable was created. If yes, complete the
following steps. If not, continue with Step 5.
a. Check the CTC_HEAP value. If it is 512, continue with Step 12. If not, continue with Step b.
b. Click the CTC_HEAP variable and click Edit.
c. In the Edit User Variable dialog box, enter the new JVM heap size. This can be any number between
256 and 512 MB.
d. Click OK, then continue with Step 9.
Step 5 click New. The New User Variable dialog box appears.
Step 6 Type “CTC_HEAP” in the Variable Name field.
Step 7 Type “512” in the Variable Value field.
Step 8 Click OK to close the New User Variable dialog box.
Step 9 Click OK to close the Environmental Variables dialog box.
Step 10 Click OK to close the System Properties dialog box.
Step 11 Reboot your PC.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task allows you to adjust the Java Virtual Memory (JVM) heap size of
a Windows PC from the default 256 MB to the maximum of 512 MB in
order to improve CTC performance.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite procedures None
Required/As needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher3-30
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Note For information about CTC views and navigation, see Appendix A, “CTC Information and Shortcuts.”
Step 1 From the computer connected to the ONS 15454, start Internet Explorer (Windows PC) or Mozilla
(Solaris workstation):
• If you are using a Windows PC, launch Internet Explorer from the Windows Start menu or a shortcut
icon.
• If you are using a Solaris workstation, navigate to the directory where Mozilla was installed, then
type:
# mozilla -install
Step 2 In Internet Explorer or Mozilla web address (URL) field, enter the ONS 15454 IPv4 or IPv6 address. For
initial setup, this is the default IP address, 192.1.0.2.
Note The IP address appears on the LCD. You can suppress the LCD IP address display using CTC
after you log in. For more information, see the “DLP-G162 Change IP Settings” task on
page 11-24.
Step 3 Press Enter. The browser displays a window with a Delete CTC Cache field and information about the
Cisco Transport Controller Java and System environments.
Note To log into CTC using an IPv6 address, you must first log into CTC using an IPv4 address
and assign an IPv6 address to the node. Then, use the IPv6 address that you assigned to the
node to log into CTC. For more information about configuring IPv6 address, see “DLP-G56
Provision IP Settings” task on page 4-19. Enter the IPv6 address in the address bar of the
browser, enclosed in square brackets.
Purpose This task logs into the graphical user interface (GUI) of CTC.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
One of the following procedures:
• NTP-G18 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the
ONS 15454, page 3-9
• NTP-G19 Set Up a CTC Computer for a Corporate LAN Connection
to the ONS 15454, page 3-25
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher3-31
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Note The Delete CTC Cache field deletes the CTC JAR (Java Archive) files that are downloaded to
your computer when you log into an ONS 15454. You perform this action if connectivity
problems occur or you want to delete older CTC JAR file versions from your computer. For more
information, refer to the “General Troubleshooting” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Troubleshooting Guide and the “CTC Operations” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Reference Manual.
Note If you are logging into ONS 15454 nodes in an operation network that are running different
releases of CTC software, log into the node running the most recent release. If you log into a
node running an older release, you will receive an INCOMPATIBLE-SW alarm for each node in
the network running a new release, and CTC will not be able to manage these nodes. To check
the software version of a node, select About CTC from the CTC Help menu. This will display
the ONS 15454 software version for each node visible on the network view. If the node is not
visible, the software version can be read from the LCD display. To resolve an alarm, refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
Step 4 If a Java Plug-in Security Warning dialog box appears, complete the “DLP-G47 Install Public-Key
Security Certificate” task on page 3-32 to install the public-key security certificate required by Software
Release 4.1 and later.
After you complete the security certificate dialog box (or if the certificate is already installed), a Java
Console window displays the CTC file download status. The web browser displays information about
your Java and system environments. If this is the first login, CTC caching messages appear while CTC
files are downloaded to your computer. The first time you connect to an ONS 15454, this process can
take several minutes. After the download, a warning message window appears.
Step 5 Click OK. The CTC Login dialog box appears.
Step 6 In the Login dialog box, type a user name and password (both are case sensitive). For initial setup, type
the user name CISCO15 and the password otbu+1.
Note The CISCO15 user is provided with every ONS 15454. CISCO15 has Superuser privileges, so
you can create other users. You must create another Superuser before you can delete the
CISCO15 user. CISCO15 is delivered with the otbu+1 password. To change the password for
CISCO15, complete the “DLP-G191 Change User Password and Security Level on a Single
Node” task on page 11-60 after you log in.
Step 7 Each time you log into an ONS 15454, you can select the following login options:
• Additional Nodes—Displays a list of current login node groups. To create a login node group or add
additional groups, see the “DLP-G48 Create Login Node Groups” task on page 3-33.
• Disable Network Discovery—Check this box to view only the ONS 15454 (and additional nodes
within the login node group, if any) entered in the Node Name field. Nodes linked to this node
through DCCs are not discovered and will not appear in CTC network view. Using this option can
decrease the CTC startup time in networks with many DCC-connected nodes, and can reduce
memory consumption.
• Disable Circuit Management—Check this box to disable discovery of existing circuits. Using this
option can decrease the CTC initialization time in networks with many existing circuits and reduce
memory consumption. After you are logged in, you can enable circuit discovery at any time by
choosing the Enable Circuit Discovery button on the Circuits tab. 3-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 8 If you keep Disable Network Discovery unchecked, CTC attempts to upgrade the CTC software by
downloading more recent versions of the JAR files it finds during the network discovery. Click Yes to
allow CTC to download the newer JAR files, or No to prevent CTC from downloading the JAR files.
Note Upgrading the CTC software will overwrite your existing software. You must restart CTC after
the upgrade is complete.
Step 9 Click Login.
If the login is successful, the CTC node view window (in single-shelf mode) or multishelf view window
(in multishelf mode) appears. From here, you can navigate to other CTC views to provision and manage
the ONS 15454. If you need to turn up the shelf for the first time, see Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node.” If
login problems occur, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G47 Install Public-Key Security Certificate
Step 1 If the Java Plug-in Security Warning dialog box appears, choose one of the following options:
Note The Java Plug-in Security Warning dialog box options that appear depend on the JRE version
you are using. If you installed JRE 1.6, you will see the following options: Yes, No, Always, and
More Details. If you are using JRE 1.3.1_02, you will see the following options (shown in
parentheses in the following list): Grant This Session, Deny, Grant Always, and
View Certificate.
• Yes (Grant This Session)—Installs the public-key certificate to your PC only for the current session.
After the session is ended, the certificate is deleted. This dialog box will appear the next time you
log into the ONS 15454.
• No (Deny)—Denies permission to install the certificate. If you choose this option, you cannot log
into the ONS 15454.
• Always (Grant Always)—Installs the public-key certificate and does not delete it after the session
is over. Cisco recommends this option.
• More Details (View Certificate)—Allows you to view the public-key security certificate.
Purpose This task installs the ITU Recommendation X.509 public-key security
certificate. The public-key certificate is required to run Software
Release 4.1 or later.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures This task is performed during the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on
page 3-30. You cannot perform it outside of this task.
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher3-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 2 Return to your originating procedure (NTP) or task (DLP).
DLP-G48 Create Login Node Groups
Step 1 From the Edit menu in node view, choose Preferences.
Step 2 Click Login Node Group and Create Group.
Step 3 Enter a name for the group in the Create Login Group Name dialog box. Click OK.
Step 4 In the Members area, type the IP address (or node name) of a node you want to add to the group. Click
Add. Repeat this step for each node that you want to add to the group.
Note If the ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 that you want to add to the login node
group has TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards installed and the TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC secure
mode option is enabled, enter the backplane LAN port (or EMS port) IP address. If the node is
in secure mode and the configuration has been locked, you will not be able to change the IP
address unless the lock is disabled by Cisco Technical Support. Refer to the “Management
Network Connectivity” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual for more
information about secure mode.
Step 5 Click OK.
The next time you log into an ONS 15454, the login node group will be available in the Additional Nodes
list of the Login dialog box. For example, in Figure 3-1, a login node group is created that contains the
IP addresses for Nodes 1, 4, and 5. During login, if you choose this group from the Additional Nodes
list and Disable Network Discovery is not selected, all nodes in the figure appear. If the login group and
Disable Network Discovery are both selected, only Nodes 1, 4, and 5 appear. You can create as many
login node groups as you need. The groups are stored in the CTC preferences file and are not visible to
other users.
Purpose This task creates a login node group to display ONS 15454s that have an IP
connection but not a data channel connection (DCC) to the login node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher3-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Figure 3-1 Login Node Group
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G49 Add a Node to the Current Session or Login Group
Step 1 In any CTC view, from the CTC File menu, click Add Node.
Step 2 In the Add Node dialog box, enter the node name (or IP address).
If the ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 that you want to add has
TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards installed and the TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC secure mode option is
enabled, enter the backplane LAN port (or the EMS port for the ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6)
IP address.
Purpose This task adds a node to the current CTC session or login node group.
Tools None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
LAN/WAN (Ethernet)
Three node ring Single
Laptop PC
Node 1
IP Address
192.168.106.143
Node 4
IP Address
192.168.105.119
Node 5
IP Address
192.168.104.109
Node 6
IP Address
192.168.103.199
Node 2 Node 3
IP Address
192.168.106.100
55029
Two node ring3-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Note If the node is in secure mode, the backplane IP address display might be disabled. A Superuser
can reenable the IP display. If the node is in secure mode and the configuration has been locked,
you will not be able to change the IP address unless the lock is disabled by Cisco Technical
Support. Refer to the “Management Network Connectivity” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM Reference Manual for more information about secure mode.
Step 3 If you want to add the node to the current login node group, check Add to current login node group.
Otherwise, leave it unchecked.
Note This check box is active only if you selected a login group when you logged into CTC.
Step 4 Click OK.
After a few seconds, the new node appears on the network view map.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G50 Delete a Node from the Current Session or Login Group
Step 1 From the CTC View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 On the network map, single-click the node that you want to delete.
Step 3 From the CTC File menu, click Delete Selected Node.
After a few seconds, the node disappears from the network view map.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task removes a node from the current CTC session or login node
group. To remove a node from a login node group that is not the current
one, see “DLP-G51 Delete a Node from a Specific Login Node Group” task
on page 3-36.
Tools None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher3-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
DLP-G51 Delete a Node from a Specific Login Node Group
Step 1 In any CTC view, from the CTC Edit menu, choose Preferences.
Step 2 In the Preferences dialog box, click the Login Node Groups tab.
Step 3 Click the login node group tab containing the node you want to remove.
Step 4 Click the node you want to remove, then click Remove.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G53 Configure the CTC Alerts Dialog Box for Automatic Popup
Step 1 Click the CTC Alerts toolbar icon. (The icon is located on the far right of the CTC toolbar.)
Step 2 In the CTC Alerts dialog box, choose one of the following:
• All alerts—Sets the CTC Alerts dialog box to open automatically for all notifications.
• Error alerts only—Sets the CTC Alerts dialog box to open automatically for circuit deletion errors
only.
• Never—Sets the CTC Alerts dialog box to never open automatically.
Step 3 Click Close.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task removes a node from a specific login node group. To remove a
node from the current login node group, see the “DLP-G50 Delete a Node
from the Current Session or Login Group” task on page 3-35.
Tools None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task sets up the CTC Alerts dialog box to open for all alerts, for circuit
deletion errors only, or never. The CTC Alerts dialog box displays network
disconnection, Send-PDIP inconsistency, circuit deletion status, condition
retrieval errors, and software download failure.
Tools None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher3-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
DLP-G448 Designate ONS 15454 SOCKS GNEs
Note This task cannot be completed until the ONS 15454 network has been provisioned. It is intended only
for users experiencing long login times, and especially users with Windows XP, Service Pack 2.
Note To complete this task, you will need a list of ONS 15454s (IP addresses or node names) that are
provisioned as GNEs. You must have connectivity to the GNEs.
Step 1 Click the CTC Alerts toolbar icon. (The icon is located on the far right of the CTC toolbar.)
Step 2 In the CTC Alerts dialog box, choose one of the following:
• All alerts—Sets the CTC Alerts dialog box to open automatically for all notifications.
• Error alerts only—Sets the CTC Alerts dialog box to open automatically for circuit deletion errors
only.
• Never—Sets the CTC Alerts dialog box to never open automatically.
Step 3 Click Close.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task designates ONS 15454s GNEs that will serve as SOCKS servers
to facilitate login performance in large networks.
Tools None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher3-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
NTP-G190 Use the CTC Launcher Application to Manage
Multiple ONS Nodes
Note JRE 1.6 must be installed on the PC you are using with the CTC Launcher application.
Step 1 As needed, complete one of the following tasks to install the CTC Launcher:
• DLP-G440 Install the CTC Launcher Application from a Release 9.2 Software CD, page 3-39
• DLP-G441 Install the CTC Launcher Application from a Release 9.2 Node, page 3-39
Step 2 As needed, complete the “DLP-G442 Connect to ONS Nodes Using the CTC Launcher” task on
page 3-40 to connect to an ONS network element with direct IP connectivity.
Step 3 As needed, complete the “DLP-G449 Install or Reinstall the CTC JAR Files” task on page 3-46.
Step 4 As needed, complete one of the following tasks to create a TL1 tunnel, which enables you to connect to
an ONS network element residing behind OSI-based, third-party GNEs:
• DLP-G443 Create a TL1 Tunnel Using the CTC Launcher, page 3-41
• DLP-G444 Create a TL1 Tunnel Using CTC, page 3-42
Step 5 As needed, complete the “DLP-G445 View TL1 Tunnel Information” task on page 3-43.
Step 6 As needed, complete the “DLP-G446 Edit a TL1 Tunnel Using CTC” task on page 3-44.
Step 7 As needed, complete the “DLP-G447 Delete a TL1 Tunnel Using CTC” task on page 3-45.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure uses the CTC Launcher to start a CTC session with an ONS
NE that has an IP connection to the CTC computer; create TL1 tunnels to
connect to ONS NEs on the other side of third-party, OSI-based GNEs; and
view, manage, and delete TL1 tunnels using CTC.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
One of the following procedures:
• NTP-G18 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the
ONS 15454, page 3-9
• NTP-G19 Set Up a CTC Computer for a Corporate LAN Connection
to the ONS 15454, page 3-25
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher3-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
DLP-G440 Install the CTC Launcher Application from a Release 9.2 Software CD
Step 1 Insert the Cisco ONS 15454 or Cisco ONS 15454 SDH or Cisco ONS 15310-CL or Cisco ONS
15310-MA Software Release 9.2 CD into your CD drive.
Step 2 Navigate to the CtcLauncher directory.
Step 3 Save the StartCTC.exe file to a local hard drive.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G441 Install the CTC Launcher Application from a Release 9.2 Node
Step 1 Using a web browser, go to the following address, where node-name is the DNS name of a node you are
going to access:
http://node-name/fs/StartCTC.exe
The browser File Download dialog box appears.
Step 2 Click Save.
Step 3 Navigate to the location where you want to save the StartCTC.exe file on the local hard drive.
Step 4 Click Save.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task installs the CTC Launcher from a Release 9.2 software CD.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None
Purpose This task installs the CTC Launcher from an ONS 15454 node running
Software R9.2.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None3-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
DLP-G442 Connect to ONS Nodes Using the CTC Launcher
Step 1 Start the CTC Launcher:
• Windows: navigate to the directory containing the StartCTC.exe file and double-click it. (You can
also use the Windows Start menu Run command.)
• Solaris: assuming the StartCTC.exe file is accessible from the current shell path, navigate to the
directory containing the StartCTC.exe file and type:
% java -jar StartCTC.exe
Step 2 In the CTC Launcher dialog box, choose Use IP.
Step 3 In the Login Node box, enter the ONS NE node name or IP address. (If the address was entered
previously, you can choose it from the drop-down menu.)
Step 4 Select the CTC version you want to launch from the following choices in the drop-down menu:
• Same version as the login node: Select if you want to launch the same CTC version as the login node
version, even if more recent versions of CTC are available in the cache.
• Latest version available: Select if you want to launch the latest CTC version available. If the cache
has a newer CTC version than the login node, that CTC version will be used. Otherwise the same
CTC version as the login node will be used.
• Version x.xx: Select if you want to launch a specific CTC version.
Note Cisco recommends that you always use the “Same version as the login node” unless the use of
newer CTC versions is needed (for example, when CTC must manage a network containing
mixed version NEs).
Step 5 Click Launch CTC. After the connection is made, the CTC Login dialog box appears.
Step 6 Log into the ONS node.
Note Because each CTC version requires particular JRE versions, the CTC Launcher will prompt the
user for the location of a suitable JRE whenever a new CTC version is launched for the first time
using a file chooser dialog (if a suitable JRE version is not known by the launcher yet). That JRE
information is then saved in the user's preferences file. From the selection dialog, select any
appropriate JRE directory.
After the JRE version is selected, the CTC will be launched. The required jar files will be
downloaded into the new cache if they are missing. The CTC Login window will appear after a
few seconds.
Purpose This task connects the CTC Launcher to ONS nodes.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None3-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G443 Create a TL1 Tunnel Using the CTC Launcher
Step 1 Double-click the StartCTC.exe file.
Step 2 Click Use TL1 Tunnel.
Step 3 In the Open CTC TL1 Tunnel dialog box, enter the following:
• Far End TID—Enter the TID of the ONS ENE at the far end of the tunnel. The TID is the name
entered in the Node Name field on the node view Provisioning > General tab.
• Host Name/IP Address—Enter the GNE DNS host name or IP address through which the tunnel will
established. This is the third-party vendor GNE that is connected to an ONS node through an OSI
DCC network. CTC uses TCP/IP over a DCN to reach the GNE. The GNE accepts TL1 connections
from the network and can forward TL1 traffic to the ENEs.
• Choose a port option:
– Use Default TL1 Port—Choose this option if you want to use the default TL1 port 3081 and
3082.
– Use Other TL1 Port—Choose this option if the GNE uses a different TL1 port. Enter the port
number in the box next to the User Other TL1 Port radio button.
• TL1 Encoding Mode—Choose the TL1 encoding:
– LV + Binary Payload— TL1 messages are delimited by LV (length value) headers and TCP
traffic is encapsulated in binary form. Cisco recommends this option because it is the most
efficient encoding mode. However, you must verify that the GNE supports LV + Binary Payload
encoding.
– LV + Base64 Payload— TL1 messages are delimited by LV headers and TCP traffic is
encapsulated using Base64 encoding.
– Raw—TL1 messages are delimited by semi-columns only, and the TCP traffic is encapsulated
using Base64 encoding.
• GNE Login Required—Check this box if the GNE requires a a local TL1 ACT-USER login before
forwarding TL1 traffic to ENEs.
• TID—If the GNE Login Required box is checked, enter the GNE TID.
Step 4 Click OK.
Purpose This task creates a TL1 tunnel using the CTC Launcher, and the tunnel
transports the TCP traffic to and from ONS ENEs through the OSI-based
GNE.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None3-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 5 If the GNE Login Required box is checked, complete the following steps. If not, continue Step 6.
a. In the Login to Gateway NE dialog box UID field, enter the TL1 user name.
b. In the PID field, enter the TL1 user password.
c. Click OK.
Step 6 When the CTC Login dialog box appears, complete the CTC login.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G444 Create a TL1 Tunnel Using CTC
Step 1 From the Tools menu, choose Manage TL1 Tunnels.
Step 2 In the TL1 Tunnels window, click Create.
Step 3 In the Create CTC TL1 Tunnel dialog box, enter the following:
• Far End TID—Enter the TID of the ONS ENE at the far end of the tunnel. The ENE must be a
Cisco ONS NE. The TID is the name entered in the Node Name field on the node view Provisioning
> General tab.
• Host Name/IP Address—Enter the GNE DNS host name or IP address through which the tunnel will
established. This is the third-party vendor GNE that is connected to an ONS NE with an OSI DCC.
CTC uses TCP/IP over a DCN to reach the GNE. The GNE accepts TL1 connections from the
network and can forward TL1 traffic to the ENEs.
• Choose a port option:
– Use Default TL1 Port—Choose this option if you want to use the GNE default TL1 port. TL1
uses standard ports, such as 3081 and 3082, unless custom TL1 ports are defined.
– Use Other TL1 Port—Choose this option if the GNE uses a different TL1 port. Enter the port
number in the box next to the User Other TL1 Port radio button.
• TL1 Encoding Mode—Choose the TL1 encoding:
– LV + Binary Payload— TL1 messages are delimited by LV (length value) headers and TCP
traffic is encapsulated in binary form. Cisco recommends this option because it is the most
efficient. However, you must verify that the GNE supports LV + Binary Payload encoding.
– LV + Base64 Payload— TL1 messages are delimited by LV headers and TCP traffic is
encapsulated using Base64 encoding.
– Raw—TL1 messages are delimited by semi-columns only, and the TCP traffic is encapsulated
using Base64 encoding.
Purpose This task creates a TL1 tunnel using CTC.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher3-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
• GNE Login Required—Check this box if the GNE requires a a local TL1 ACT-USER login before
forwarding TL1 traffic to ENEs.
• TID—If the GNE Login Required box is checked, enter the GNE TID.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 If the GNE Login Required box is checked, complete the following steps. If not, continue Step 6.
a. In the Login to Gateway NE dialog box UID field, enter the TL1 user name.
b. In the PID field, enter the TL1 user password.
c. Click OK.
Step 6 After the CTC Login dialog box appears, log into CTC.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G445 View TL1 Tunnel Information
Step 1 Log into CTC.
Step 2 From the Tools menu, choose Manage TL1 Tunnels.
Step 3 In the TL1 Tunnels window, view the information shown in Table 3-2.
Purpose This task views a TL1 tunnel created using the CTC Launcher.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
Table 3-2 TL1 Tunnels Window
Item Description
Far End TID The Target ID of the NE at the far end of the tunnel. This NE is an ONS NE. It is typically connected with an
OSI DCC to a third-party vender GNE. CTC manages this NE.
GNE Host The GNE host or IP address through which the tunnel is established. This is generally a third-party vendor
GNE that is connected to an ONS NE with an OSI DCC. CTC uses TCP/IP over a DCN to reach the GNE.
The GNE accepts TL1 connections from the network and can forward TL1 traffic to the ENEs.
Port The TCP port number where the GNE accepts TL1 connections coming from the DCN. These port numbers
are standard (such as 3081 and 3082) unless custom port numbers are provisioned on the GNE.3-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G446 Edit a TL1 Tunnel Using CTC
TL1 Encoding Defines the TL1 encoding used for the tunnel:
• LV + Binary Payload— TL1 messages are delimited by an LV (length value) header. TCP traffic is
encapsulated in binary form.
• LV + Base64 Payload— TL1 messages are delimited by an LV header. TCP traffic is encapsulated using
the base 64 encoding.
• Raw—TL1 messages are delimited by semi-columns only, and the TCP traffic is encapsulated using
Base64 encoding.
GNE TID The GNE TID is shown when the GNE requires a local TL1 ACT-USER login before forwarding TL1 traffic
to ENEs. If present, CTC asks the user for the ACT-USER user ID and password when the tunnel is opened.
State Indicates the tunnel state:
OPEN—A tunnel is currently open and carrying TCP traffic.
RETRY PENDING—The TL1 connection carrying the tunnel has been disconnected and a retry to reconnect
it is pending. (CTC automatically attempts to reconnect the tunnel at regular intervals. During that time all
ENEs behind the tunnel are unreachable.)
(empty)—No tunnel is currently open.
Far End IP The IP address of the ONS NE that is at the far end of the TL1 tunnel. This information is retrieved from the
NE when the tunnel is established.
Sockets The number of active TCP sockets that are multiplexed in the tunnel. This information is automatically
updated in real time.
Retries Indicates the number of times CTC tried to reopen a tunnel. If a network problem causes a tunnel to go down,
CTC automatically tries to reopen it at regular intervals. This information is automatically updated in real
time.
Rx Bytes Shows the number of bytes of management traffic that were received over the tunnel. This information is
automatically updated in real time.
Tx Bytes Shows the number of bytes of management traffic that were transmitted over the tunnel. This information is
automatically updated in real time.
Purpose This task edits a TL1 tunnel using CTC.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 3-2 TL1 Tunnels Window (continued)
Item Description3-45
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 1 From the Tools menu, choose Manage TL1 Tunnels.
Step 2 In the TL1 Tunnels window, click the tunnel you want to edit.
Step 3 Click Edit.
Step 4 In the Edit CTC TL1 Tunnel dialog box, edit the following:
• Use Default TL1 Port—Choose this option if you want to use the GNE default TL1 port. TL1 uses
standard ports, such as 3081 and 3082, unless custom TL1 ports are defined.
• Use Other TL1 Port—Choose this option if the GNE uses a different TL1 port. Enter the port number
in the box next to the User Other TL1 Port radio button.
• TL1 Encoding Mode—Choose the TL1 encoding:
– LV + Binary Payload— TL1 messages are delimited by LV (length value) headers and TCP
traffic is encapsulated in binary form. Cisco recommends this option because it is the most
efficient. However, you must verify that the GNE supports LV + Binary Payload encoding.
– LV + Base64 Payload— TL1 messages are delimited by LV headers and TCP traffic is
encapsulated using Base64 encoding.
– Raw—TL1 messages are delimited by semi-columns only, and the TCP traffic is encapsulated
using Base64 encoding.
• GNE Login Required—Check this box if the GNE requires a a local TL1 ACT-USER login before
forwarding TL1 traffic to ENEs.
• TID—If the GNE Login Required box is checked, enter the GNE TID.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 If the GNE Login Required box is checked, complete login in the Login to Gateway NE dialog box. If
not, continue Step 6.
a. In the UID field, enter the TL1 user name.
b. In the PID field, enter the TL1 user password.
c. Click OK.
Step 7 When the CTC Login dialog box appears, complete the CTC login. Refer to login procedures in the user
documentation for the ONS ENE.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G447 Delete a TL1 Tunnel Using CTC
Step 1 From the Tools menu, choose Manage TL1 Tunnels.
Purpose This task deletes a TL1 tunnel using CTC.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher3-46
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 2 In the TL1 Tunnels window, click the tunnel you want to delete.
Step 3 Click Delete.
Step 4 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G449 Install or Reinstall the CTC JAR Files
Step 1 Insert the Cisco ONS 15454 or Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Software Release 9.2 CD into your CD drive.
Step 2 Navigate to the CacheInstall directory.
Note The CTC cache installer is also available on Cisco.com. If you are downloading the
SetupCtc-version.exe (where version is the release version, for example, SetupCtc-085000.exe) file from
Cisco.com, skip Step 1 and Step 2.
Step 3 Copy the SetupCtc-version.exe file to your local hard drive. Use any location that is convenient for you
to access, such as the Windows desktop. Ensure that you have enough disk space to copy and extract the
SetupCtc-version.exe file.
Step 4 Double-click the SetupCtc-version.exe file. This creates a directory named SetupCtc-version (at the
same location), which contains the LDCACHE.exe file and other CTC files.
Step 5 Double-click the LDCACHE.exe file to install or reinstall the new CTC JAR files into the CTC cache
directory on your PC.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G450 Configuring Windows Vista or Windows 7 to Support CTC
Purpose This task installs or reinstalls the CTC JAR files into the CTC cache
directory on your PC. This is useful when you are using a new CTC version
and want to install or reinstall the CTC JAR files without logging into a
node or using the StartCTC application (StartCTC.exe).
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None
Purpose This task describes the configurations that must be done in Windows Vista
or Windows 7 operating system prior to launching CTC.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None3-47
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the following steps to disable Internet Explorer 7 protected mode:
Note Perform a full installation of the Windows Vista or Windows 7 operating system on your computer. If
Windows Vista or Windows 7 is installed through operating system upgrade, CTC will not work. Refer
to the manufacturer’s user guide for instructions on how to install Windows Vista or Windows 7.
Note This procedure is needed only if CTC is launched from the Internet Explorer browser. If you start CTC
by downloading the CTC Launcher application from the node, perform the “DLP-G441 Install the CTC
Launcher Application from a Release 9.2 Node” task on page 3-39.
a. Open Internet Explorer,
b. Click Tools > Internet Options.
c. Click the Security tab.
d. Select the zone that is appropriate. The available options are: Local Intranet, Internet, and Trusted
Sites.
e. Check the Disable Protect Mode check box.
Step 2 Complete the following steps to Disable TCP Autotuning:
a. From the Windows Start menu, click Search > Search for Files and Folders. The Search window
appears.
b. On the right side of the window in the Search box, type Command Prompt and press Enter.
Windows will search for the Command Prompt application and list it in the search results.
c. Right click cmd and select Run as administrator.
d. Enter the administrator user ID and password and click OK.
e. A Command prompt windows appears. At the command prompt enter the following text:
netsh interface tcp set global autotuninglevel=disabled
Autotuning can be enabled if desired using the following command:
netsh interface tcp set global autotuninglevel=normal
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None3-48
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You BeginCHAPTER
4-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
4
Turn Up a Node
This chapter explains how to provision a single Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division
multiplexing (DWDM) node and turn it up for service, including assigning the node name, date, and
time; provisioning timing references; provisioning network attributes such as IP address and default
router; setting up users and user security; installing cards; and creating DWDM connections.
Note The procedures and tasks described in this chapter for the Cisco ONS 15454 platform is applicable to
the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note Procedures in this chapter require that you have a network plan calculated for your DWDM network with
Cisco TransportPlanner, Release 9.2. Cisco TransportPlanner is a DWDM planning tool that is available
from your Cisco account representative. Cisco TransportPlanner prepares a shelf plan for each network
node and calculates the power and attenuation levels for the DWDM cards installed in the node. For
information about Cisco TransportPlanner, contact your Cisco account representative. For instructions
on using Cisco TransportPlanner, refer to the Cisco TransportPlanner DWDM Operations Guide,
Release 9.2.
Note Unless otherwise specified, in this document “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI (ONS 15454) and ETSI
(ONS 15454 SDH) shelf assemblies.
Note Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) views referenced in these procedures depend on the ONS 15454 mode.
In single-shelf mode, the views are network, node, and card. In multishelf mode, the views are network,
multishelf, shelf, and card. For more information about CTC views, refer to Appendix A, “CTC
Information and Shortcuts.”
Before You Begin
This section lists the non-trouble procedures (NTPs) needed to turn up a DWDM node. Turn to an NTP
for applicable detail-level procedures (DLPs), known as tasks.
1. NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3—Complete this procedure
first.
2. NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7—Complete this procedure next.4-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
3. NTP-G250 Verify Digital Image Signing (DIS) Information, page 4-8—Complete this procedure to
retrieve the software signature information and version of the digitally signed software. You can also
retrieve the public keys installed on the node using this procedure.
4. NTP-G144 Provision a Multishelf Node, page 4-10—Complete this procedure as needed.
5. NTP-G23 Create Users and Assign Security, page 4-12—Complete this procedure to create CTC
users and assign their security levels.
6. NTP-G24 Set Up Name, Date, Time, and Contact Information, page 4-15—Continue with this
procedure to set the node name, date, time, location, and contact information.
7. NTP-G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds, page 4-17—Continue with this procedure to set
the node battery power thresholds.
8. NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 4-18—Continue with this procedure to provision the
IP address, default router, subnet mask, and other network configuration settings.
9. NTP-G194 Set Up EMS Secure Access to the ONS 15454, page 4-33—Continue with this procedure
to connect the CTC in secure mode.
10. NTP-G27 Set Up the ONS 15454 for Firewall Access, page 4-33—Continue with this procedure if
the ONS 15454 will be accessed behind firewalls.
11. NTP-G28 Create FTP Host, page 4-34—Continue with this procedure if to create FTP host for ENE
database backup.
12. NTP-G132 Provision OSI, page 4-37—Continue with this procedure if the ONS 15454 will be
installed in networks with third-party, Open Systems Interconnection (OSI)-based network elements
(NEs).
13. NTP-G29 Set Up SNMP, page 4-47—Complete this procedure if Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP) will be used for network monitoring.
14. “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration File” procedure on
page 4-49—Complete this procedure to preprovision the ONS 15454 slots and install the card and
automatic node setup (ANS) parameters.
15. NTP-G328 Add and Delete ANS Parameters, page 4-61—Complete this procedure, as needed, to
add or delete ANS parameters.
16. NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 4-64—Complete this procedure to install the DWDM
cards, including the OSCM, OSC-CSM, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C,
80-WXC-C, 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L,
OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, OPT-PRE, 32MUX-O,
40-MUX-C, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, 4MD-xx.x, AD-1C-xx.x,
AD-2C-xx.x, AD-4C-xx.x, AD-1B-xx.x, AD-4B-xx.x, MMU, and PSM.
17. NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 4-67—Complete this
procedure, as needed, to install a dispersion compensating unit (DCU).
18. NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and
OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69—Complete this procedure, as needed, to install transponder (TXP),
muxponder (MXP), GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP cards.
19. NTP-G123 Install the Filler Cards, page 4-75—Complete this procedure, as needed, to install
ONS 15454 filler cards.
20. NTP-G239 Add and Delete Passive Units, page 4-76—Complete this procedure, as needed, to add
or delete passive units.
21. NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 4-78—Complete this
procedure, as needed, to install the fiber-optic cables on the DWDM cards.4-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
22. NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes,
page 4-82—Complete this procedure, as needed, to connect TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP cards to DWDM cards in a terminal, hub, or
reconfigurable optical add-drop multiplexer (ROADM) node through the patch panel.
23. NTP-G185 Install Fiber-Optic Cables between Mesh Nodes, page 4-101—Complete this procedure,
as needed, to connect 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C cards in a mesh node to the 4-degree or 8-degree
patch panel.
24. NTP-G141 Install Fiber-Optic Cables for Y-Cable Protection Modules, page 4-108—Complete this
procedure, as needed, to connect fiber-optic cables to Y-cable modules from client TXP, MXP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards.
25. NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 4-113—Complete this procedure to
calculate the DWDM cable connections.
26. NTP-G209 Create, Edit, and Delete Optical Sides, page 4-123—Complete this procedure to create,
edit, and delete an optical side.
27. NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 4-126—Complete this procedure next.
28. NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 4-127—Complete this procedure next.
29. NTP-G39 Verify OSCM Transmit Power, page 4-129—Complete this procedure next.
30. NTP-G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode, page 4-131—Complete this
procedure as needed.
31. NTP-G210 Provision Node for SNMPv3, page 4-133 —Complete this procedure if Simple Network
Management Protocol version 3(SNMPv3) will be used for network monitoring.
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files
Step 1 Verify that you have the Cisco TransportPlanner reports and files shown in Table 4-1 for the node that
you will provision. The reports and files can be provided in one of the following ways:
• If you have Cisco TransportPlanner, verify that you have the electronic network design plan from
which you can generate the reports in Cisco TransportPlanner. For information about generating the
reports, refer to the Cisco TransportPlanner DWDM Operations Guide.
• If you do not have Cisco TransportPlanner, you must have printouts of all reports listed in Table 4-1
except the Assisted Configuration Setup file. Assisted Configuration Setup is an electronic file that
will be imported into CTC. You must be able to access it from the CTC computer used to provision
the node
• If you not do not have all the reports and files listed in Table 4-1, do not continue. See your site
planner or network planner for the required information and files.
Purpose This procedure verifies that you have the Cisco TransportPlanner reports
and files needed to turn up the node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 1, “Install the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454
M6 Shelf”
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Retrieve or higher4-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Table 4-1 Cisco TransportPlanner Node Setup Information and Files
Source Format Description
Shelf layout JPG file Cisco TransportPlanner provides a shelf layout showing the
cards that should be installed in each ONS 15454 (Figure 4-1),
ONS 15454 M2 (Figure 4-2), and ONS 15454 M6 (Figure 4-3)
slot. Cisco TransportPlanner can export each of these cards as
a JPG file with a user-defined name.
Installation Parameters Table Provides the target reference values for the variable optical
attenuators (VOAs), output power, optical thresholds, and
amplifier configuration parameters.
Internal Connections Table Identifies the patchcords that must be installed within the shelf.
NE Update
Configuration file
XML file The Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update configuration file is an
electronic file with an XML extension and a name assigned by
the network designer for the network you are provisioning. The
file is imported into CTC where it preprovisions internal
patchcords, optical sides and card parameters for optical cards,
transponders, and passive units (DCUs and patch panels). It
configures the ANS parameters based on the network
calculated by Cisco TransportPlanner.
Traffic Matrix Table Shows the traffic flow within the node. During node turn-up,
this report is used to identify the location of Y-cable protection
groups.
Cable list Table or list A list of cables needed to provision the node. The list can be
derived from the Internal Connections Report or from the Bill
of Materials report prepared by Cisco TransportPlanner.4-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 4-1 Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout - ONS 154544-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 4-2 Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout - ONS 5454 M2
Figure 4-3 Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout - ONS 15454 M6
Step 2 Print Table 4-1 for reference. You will need information from the reports during node turn-up.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.4-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation
Step 1 Verify the following:
• TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards are installed in Slots 7 and 11 on the ONS 15454 shelf.
• Two TNC/TSC cards are installed in Slots 1 and 8 on the ONS 15454 M6 shelf.
• A stand-alone TNC/TSC card is installed in Slot 1 on the ONS 15454 M2 shelf.
Step 2 Verify that the FAIL LED is off on both TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards.
Step 3 Verify that the green ACT (active) LED is illuminated on one TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card and
that the amber STBY (standby) LED is illuminated on the other TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card.
Note If the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards are not installed, or if their LEDs are not operating
as described, do not continue. Complete the “DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3
Card” or “DLP-G604 Install the TNC or TSC Card” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide or refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide to resolve
installation problems before proceeding to Step 4.
Step 4 (On 15454-DWDM shelf) If the AIC-I card is installed, verify that it is installed in Slot 9 and that its
ACT (active) LED displays a solid green light.
Note If the AIC-I card is not installed and the card is required by the Cisco Transport Planner shelf
layout, or if it is installed and its LEDs are not operating as described, do not continue. Complete
the “DLP-G34 Install the AIC-I Card” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide or
refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide to resolve installation problems
before proceeding to Step 5.
Step 5 Verify that the software release shown on the LCD matches the software release required for your
network. On the LCD, the software release is shown under the platform (SONET or SDH) and
date/temperature. If the release does not match, perform one of the following procedures:
• Perform a software upgrade using a ONS 15454 software CD or ONS 15454 SDH software CD.
Refer to the release-specific software upgrade document.
• On ONS 15454, replace the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards with cards containing the correct release.
• On ONS 15454 M6, replace the LCD and TNC/TSC cards with cards containing the correct release.
Purpose This procedure verifies that the Cisco ONS 15454 shelf has two TCC2/
TCC2P/TCC3 cards installed. This procedure also verifies that the Cisco
ONS 15454 M6 and the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 shelves have TNC/TSC
cards installed. It also verifies the installation of the AIC-I and
MS-ISC-100T cards, if they are installed.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 1, “Install the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454
M6 Shelf”
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Retrieve or higher4-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• On ONS 15454 M2, replace the power module and TNC/TSC cards with cards containing the correct
release.
Step 6 (On ONS 15454 shelf) If the node will be configured as a multishelf node, verify that redundant
MS-ISC-100T cards are installed (Slots 6 and 12 are recommended) and that the green ACT (active) LED
is illuminated on both cards.
Note If the MS-ISC-100T card is not installed and the card is required by the Cisco Transport Planner
shelf layout, or if the card’s LEDs are not operating as described, do not continue. Complete the
“DLP-G309 Install the MS-ISC-100T Card” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide or refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide to resolve installation
problems before proceeding to the next procedure.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G250 Verify Digital Image Signing (DIS) Information
Note The DIS information is applicable for TNC/TSC cards in the ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 sM6
platforms.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to verify the DIS
information.
Step 2 Do the following as applicable:
a. To retrieve the digitally signed software version, go to Step 3.
b. To retrieve the software signature information, go to Step 4.
c. To retrieve the public keys installed on the node, go to Step 5.
Step 3 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click Maintenance > Software
tab to retrieve the digitally signed software version. The following columns appear in the pane:
• Node—Displays the node name or IP address.
Purpose This procedure retrieves the following information on the ONS 15454 M2
and ONS 15454 M6 platforms:
• Software signature information
• Version of the digitally signed software
• Public keys installed
Note In a hybrid multi-shelf configuration involving ONS 15454 and
ONS 15454 M6 shelf assemblies, DIS information is available for
the ONS 15454 M6 shelf only.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation” task on page 4-7
Required/As Needed As Needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve user4-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Type—Displays the node type.
• Node Status—Displays the node status, which is based on the highest alarm level at the node.
• Working Version—Displays the working ONS node software version (the general software release
number [n.n.n] followed by the specific software release identification number). For example, 9.2.0
(09.20-X10E-02.06).
• Protect Version—Displays the protect ONS node software version (the general software release
number [n.n.n] followed by the specific software release identification number). For example, 9.2.0
(09.20-X10E-02.06).
• Download Status—Displays the status of any in-progress network software downloads.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), click Maintenance > DIS > Info >
Retrieve Signature Information tab to retrieve signature information. The following information is
displayed in the pane:
• Attribute—The following information is displayed:
– Organization Name—Displays the owner of the software image.
– Organization Unit—Displays the business unit within Cisco.
– Serial Number—Displays the serial number of the certificate with the digital signature.
– Common Name—Displays the name of the platform.
– Hash Algorithm—Displays the hashing algorithm used.
– Image Type—Shows the type of the image-Development or Production.
– Key Version—Indicates the key version used to digitally sign the image. A key version is
identified with an alphabetical character that ranges from A to Z.
– Sign Algorithm—Refers to the RSA algorithm.
• Working Software Information—Displays the signature information of the working software.
• Protect Software Information—Displays the signature information of the protect software.
Note To refresh the signature information, click Refresh Signature Information.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), click Maintenance > DIS > Available
Keys > Retrieve All Keys tabsto retrieve public key information. The following information is
displayed in the pane:
• Key Type—Displays the public key available on the system for verification:
– Release Key—Verifies release images.
– Development Key—Verifies the development images.
• Public Key Algorithm—Displays the name of the algorithm used for public key cryptography.
• Exponent—Displays the exponent of the public key algorithm—release or development keys.
• Key Version—Displays the key version used for verification.
• Modulus—Displays the modulus of the public key algorithm with a size of 2048 bits.
Note To refresh the public key information, click Refresh All Keys.4-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G144 Provision a Multishelf Node
Caution An optical shelf in a multishelf configuration must be provisioned as the node controller shelf and not
as a subtending shelf. Otherwise, traffic will be dropped. If there are no slots available on the optical
shelf to install the MS-ISC-100T cards (needed for a node controller shelf), install and configure the
Cisco Catalyst 2950 or Cisco Catalyst 3560. See the “NTP-G302 Connect the ONS 15454 Multishelf
Node and Subtending Shelves to a Catalyst 2950” in theCisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
or “NTP-G295 Connect the ONS 15454 Multishelf Node and Subtending Shelves to a Catalyst 3560” in
Purpose This procedure provisions a multishelf node from CTC. A multishelf node
consists of a control node and subtending shelves that are configured to
operate as a single node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
• “NTP-G301 Connect the ONS 15454 Multishelf Node and Subtending
Shelves to an MS-ISC-100T Card” in theCisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide
• “NTP-G302 Connect the ONS 15454 Multishelf Node and Subtending
Shelves to a Catalyst 2950” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide
• “NTP-G295 Connect the ONS 15454 Multishelf Node and Subtending
Shelves to a Catalyst 3560” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide
• “NTP-G296 Upgrade the ONS 15454 Multishelf with MS-ISC Card
Configuration Using the Catalyst 3560” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
• “NTP-G297 Upgrade the ONS 15454 Multishelf with Catalyst 2950
Configuration Using the Catalyst 3560” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
• “NTP-G308 Connect the ONS 15454 M6 Multishelf Node and the
ONS 15454 M6 Subtending Shelves” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
• “NTP-G309 Connect the ONS 15454 M6 and the ONS 15454 in a
Mixed Multishelf Configuration” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide
• NTP-G310 Upgrade the ONS 15454 Multishelf Configuration using
the ONS 15454 M6 in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
theCisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide. If you are using an ONS 15454 M6, then refer to the
applicable procedure for connecting the ONS 15454 M6 as the node controller in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node that you want to configure as a
multishelf node.
Step 2 If you want to set up the login node as the node controller, complete the following steps. If not, continue
with Step 3.
a. In node view (single-node mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
General > Multishelf Config tabs.
b. Click Enable as Node Controller.
c. From the LAN Config drop-down list, complete one of the following:
• Choose Ethernet Switch if MS-ISC-100T cards or the Catalyst 2950 or the Catalyst 3560
switches are already installed and configured. Choose the public VLAN ID and private VLAN
ID for the ONS 15454 multishelf node. In case of an ONS 15454 M6, the public VLAN ID and
private VLAN ID are static (1 and 2 respectively).
Note Public VLAN ID is used by the node controller to communicate with the external network.
Private VLAN ID is used by the node controller to communicate with the subtending shelves.
Note If the ONS 15454 M6 shelf is used as the node controller, then you can connect the subtending
shelves directly to the MSM ports on the ECU. However, a Catalyst 3560 switch can also be used
along with the ONS 15454 M6 node controller to extend the number of subtending shelves.
• Choose Stand-Alone if MS-ISC-100T cards are not installed yet but will be included in the final
layout. This option will allow a safe migration of the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card
database when the multishelf configuration is complete.
d. Click Apply.
e. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to allow the node to reboot. The CTC view changes to
network view and the node icon changes to gray. Wait for the reboot to finish. (This might take
several minutes.)
f. After the node reboots, double-click the node. The multishelf view appears.
Note The shelf ID of the node controller is automatically assigned as 1.
Step 3 If you want to add a node as a subtending shelf (either ONS 15454 or ONS 15454 M6) in the multishelf
configuration, complete the following steps. If not, you have completed this procedure.
a. In multishelf view, right-click the white space in the rack and choose Add Shelf from the shortcut
menu.
b. Select the type of subtending shelf (ONS 15454 or ONS 15454 M6).
c. In the Shelf ID Selection dialog box, choose a shelf ID (from 2 to 30) from the drop-down list.
d. Click OK. The shelf appears in multishelf view.4-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
e. Disconnect the cross-over (CAT-5) LAN cable from the RJ-45 LAN (TCP/IP) port of the
ONS 15454 subtending shelf TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card in Slot 11 or Slot 7, or from the MSM ports
on the ONS 15454 M6 subtending shelf that correspond to the TNC/TSC card in Slot 1 or Slot 8.
f. Connect your Windows PC or Solaris workstation network interface card (NIC) to the RJ-45 LAN
(TCP/IP) port on the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card in Slot 11 or Slot 7, or to the MSM ports on the
ONS 15454 M6 subtending shelf that correspond to the TNC/TSC card in Slot 1 or Slot 8.
g. Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the subtending shelf.
h. Click the Provisioning > General > Multishelf Config tabs.
i. Click Enable as Subtended Shelf.
j. From the Shelf ID drop-down list, choose the shelf ID that you created in Step c.
k. Click Apply.
l. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to reboot the shelf. The CTC view changes to network view
and the node icon changes to gray. Wait for the reboot to finish. (This might take several minutes.)
m. Disconnect your Windows PC or Solaris workstation NIC from the RJ-45 LAN (TCP/IP) port of the
ONS 15454 subtending shelf TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card in Slot 11 or Slot 7, or from the MSM ports
on the ONS 15454 M6 subtending shelf that correspond to the TNC/TSC card in Slot 1 or Slot 8.
n. Reconnect the cross-over (CAT-5) LAN cable (disconnected in Step e) to the RJ-45 LAN (TCP/IP)
port of the subtending shelf TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card in Slot 11 or Slot 7, or to the MSM ports on
the ONS 15454 M6 subtending shelf that correspond to the TNC/TSC card in Slot 1 or Slot 8.
o. Repeat Steps a through n to set up additional subtending shelves.
Note To connect the subtending shelves to the node controller, refer to the applicable procedures in the Cisco
ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
Note Non-LAN connected Multishelf nodes are not manageable from CTC unless SOCKS Proxy is enabled
on the node.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G23 Create Users and Assign Security
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you need to create users.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Purpose This procedure creates ONS 15454 users and assigns their security levels.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note You must log in as a Superuser to create additional users. The CISCO15 user provided with each
ONS 15454 can be used to set up other ONS 15454 users. You can add up to 500 users to one
ONS 15454.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G54 Create a New User on a Single Node” task on page 4-13 or the “DLP-G55
Create a New User on Multiple Nodes” task on page 4-14 as needed.
Note You must add the same user name and password to each node that a user will access.
Step 3 If you want to modify the security policy settings, including password aging and idle user timeout
policies, complete the “NTP-G88 Modify Users and Change Security” procedure on page 11-55.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G54 Create a New User on a Single Node
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Security > Users tabs.
Step 2 In the Users window, click Create.
Step 3 In the Create User dialog box, enter the following:
• Name—Type the user name. The name must be a minimum of six and a maximum of
20 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. For Transaction Language One (TL1) compatibility, the
user name must be 6 to 10 characters.
• Password—Type the user password. The password length, by default, is set to a minimum of six and
a maximum of 20 characters. You can configure the default values in node view using the
Provisioning > NE Defaults > Node > security > passwordComplexity tabs. The minimum length
can be set to eight, ten or twelve characters, and the maximum length to 80 characters. The password
must be a combination of alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) and special (+, #,%) characters, where at
least two characters are not alphabetic and at least one character is a special character. For TL1
compatibility, the password must be six to ten characters.
Note The password must not contain the user name.
• Confirm Password—Type the password again to confirm it.
Purpose This task creates a new user for one ONS 15454.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Security Level—Choose a security level for the user: RETRIEVE, MAINTENANCE,
PROVISIONING, or SUPERUSER.
Note Each security level has a different idle time. The idle time is the length of time that CTC can
remain idle before the password must be reentered. The defaults are: Retrieve user = unlimited,
Maintenance user = 60 minutes, Provisioning user = 30 minutes, and Superuser = 15 minutes.
To change the idle times, see the “NTP-G88 Modify Users and Change Security” procedure on
page 11-55.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G55 Create a New User on Multiple Nodes
Note All nodes where you want to add users must be accessible in network view.
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Security > Users tabs.
Step 3 In the Users window, click Create.
Step 4 In the Create User dialog box, enter the following:
• Name—Type the user name. The name must be a minimum of six and a maximum of
20 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. For TL1 compatibility, the user name must be
6 to 10 characters.
• Password—Type the user password. The password length, by default, is set to a minimum of six and
a maximum of 20 characters. You can configure the default values in node view through
Provisioning > NE Defaults > Node > security > passwordComplexity. The minimum length can be
set to eight, ten or twelve characters, and the maximum length to 80 characters. The password must
be a combination of alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) and special (+, #,%) characters, where at least two
characters are not alphabetic and at least one character is a special character. For TL1 compatibility,
the password must be six to ten characters. The password must not contain the user name.
• Confirm Password—Type the password again to confirm it.
• Security Level—Choose a security level for the user: RETRIEVE, MAINTENANCE,
PROVISIONING, or SUPERUSER.
Purpose This task adds a new user to multiple ONS 15454 nodes.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note Each security level has a different idle time. The idle time is the length of time that CTC can
remain idle before it locks up and the password must be reentered. The defaults are: Retrieve
user = unlimited, Maintenance user = 60 minutes, Provisioning user = 30 minutes, and
Superuser = 15 minutes. To change the idle times, refer to the “NTP-G88 Modify Users and
Change Security” procedure on page 11-55.
Step 5 In the Select Applicable Nodes area, deselect any nodes where you do not want to add the user (all
network nodes are selected by default).
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 In the User Creation Results dialog box, verify that the user was added to all the nodes chosen in Step 5.
If not, click OK and repeat Steps 2 through 6. If the user was added to all nodes, click OK and continue
with the next step.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G24 Set Up Name, Date, Time, and Contact Information
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 for the node you will turn up. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
General > General tabs.
Step 3 In the Node Name/TID field, type a name for the node. For TL1 compliance, names must begin with an
alpha character and have no more than 20 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.
Note To avoid errors when you import the Cisco TransportPlanner configuration file using the
“NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration File” procedure on
page 4-49, the CTC node name and the Cisco TransportPlanner site name should be the same (or
at least easy to identify).
Step 4 (Optional) In the Contact field, type the name of the node contact person and the phone number, up to
255 characters.
Step 5 (Optional) In the Latitude field, enter the node latitude: N (north) or S (south), degrees, and minutes.
Step 6 (Optional) In the Longitude field, enter the node longitude: E (east) or W (west), degrees, and minutes.
Purpose This procedure provisions identification information for the node,
including the node name, a contact name and phone number, the location
of the node, and the date, time, and time zone.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note The latitude and longitude values only indicate the geographical position of the nodes in the
actual network and not the CTC node position.
Step 7 (Optional) In the Description field, type a description of the node. The description can be a maximum
of 255 characters.
Step 8 (Optional) Check the Use NTP/SNTP Server check box if you want CTC to use a Network Time Protocol
(NTP) or Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) server to set the date and time of the node. Using an
NTP or SNTP server ensures that all ONS 15454 network nodes use the same date and time reference.
The server synchronizes the node’s time after power outages or software upgrades.
a. If you check the Use NTP/SNTP Server check box, complete the following fields:
– Use NTP/SNTP Server—Type the IP address of the primary NTP/SNTP server connected to the
ONS 15454 or of another ONS 15454/15600/15310-CL/15310-MA as GNE with NTP/SNTP
enabled that is connected to the ONS 15454 ENE.
– Backup NTP/SNTP Server—Type the IP address of the secondary NTP/SNTP server connected
to the ONS 15454 or of another ONS 15454/15600/15310-CL/15310-MA as GNE with
NTP/SNTP enabled that is connected to the ONS 15454 ENE.
When the primary NTP/SNTP server fails or is not reachable, the node uses the secondary
NTP/SNTP server to synchronize its date and time. If both the primary and secondary
NTP/SNTP servers fail or are not reachable, an SNTP-FAIL alarm is raised. The node checks
for the availability of the primary or secondary NTP/SNTP server at regular intervals until it can
get the time from any one of the NTP/SNTP servers. After the node gets the time from any one
server, it synchronizes its date and time with the server’s date and time and the SNTP-FAIL
alarm is cleared. For each retry and resynchronization, the node checks the availability of the
primary NTP/SNTP server first, followed by the secondary NTP/SNTP server. The node
synchronizes its date and time every hour.
Note You will not be able to identify which NTP/SNTP server is being used for
synchronization.
Note If you plan to check gateway network element (GNE) for the ONS 15454 SOCKS proxy
server (see “DLP-G56 Provision IP Settings” task on page 4-19), external ONS 15454 nodes
must reference the gateway ONS 15454 for NTP/SNTP timing. For more information about
the ONS 15454 gateway settings, refer to the “Management Network Connectivity” chapter
in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Caution If you reference another ONS 15454 for the NTP/SNTP server, make sure that the second ONS 15454
references an NTP/SNTP server and not the first ONS 15454 (that is, do not create an NTP/SNTP timing
loop by having two ONS 15454 nodes reference each other).
b. If you do not check Use SNTP/NTP Server, complete the Date and Time fields. The ONS 15454 will
use these fields for alarm dates and times. By default, CTC displays all alarms in the CTC computer
time zone for consistency. To change the display to the node time zone, complete the “DLP-G118
Display Alarms and Conditions Using Time Zone” task on page 10-11.4-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Date—Type the current date in the format m/d/yyyy, for example, September 24, 2002 is
9/24/2002.
• Time—Type the current time in the format hh:mm:ss, for example, 11:24:58. The ONS 15454
uses a 24-hour clock, so 10:00 PM is entered as 22:00:00.
Step 9 Click the Time Zone field and choose a city within your time zone from the drop-down list. The list
displays the 80 World Time Zones from –11 through 0 (GMT) to +14. Continental United States time
zones are GMT-05:00 (Eastern), GMT-06:00 (Central), GMT-07:00 (Mountain), and GMT-08:00
(Pacific).
Step 10 Check the Use Daylight Savings Time check box if the time zone that you chose uses Daylight Savings
Time.
Note The Insert AIS-V on STS-1 SD-P and SD-P BER field are not used in DWDM networks.
Step 11 Click Apply.
Step 12 In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes.
Step 13 Review the node information. If you need to make corrections, repeat Steps 3 through 12 to enter the
corrections. If the information is correct, continue with the “NTP-G25 Set Battery Power Monitor
Thresholds” procedure on page 4-17.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds
Caution The default battery power thresholds are normally not changed. Threshold changes should only be
performed at the direction of your site administrator.
Note When the thresholds are crossed, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card generates warning alarms in
CTC. For ONS 15454 power specifications, see the “Hardware Specifications” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 for the node that you will set up. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Purpose This procedure provisions extreme high, low, and extreme low input
battery power thresholds within a –48 VDC environment.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > General >
Power Monitor tabs.
Note In multishelf mode, power monitor thresholds must be provisioned separately for each shelf
within the multishelf including the node controller and all subtending shelves.
Step 3 To change the extreme low battery voltage threshold in 0.5 VDC increments, choose a voltage from the
ELWBATVGVdc drop-down list.
Step 4 To change the low battery voltage threshold in 0.5 VDC increments, choose a voltage from the
LWBATVGVdc drop-down list.
Step 5 To change the high battery voltage threshold in 0.5 VDC increments, choose a voltage from the
HIBATVGVdc drop-down list.
Step 6 To change the extreme high battery voltage threshold in 0.5 VDC increments, choose a voltage from the
EHIBATVGVdc drop-down list.
Step 7 Click Apply.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30. If you are already logged in, continue with
Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G56 Provision IP Settings” task on page 4-19 to provision the ONS 15454 IP
address, subnet mask, default router, DHCP server, IIOP listener port, and SOCKS proxy server settings.
Tip If you cannot log into the node, you can change its IP address, default router, and network mask
by using the LCD on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly (unless LCD provisioning is
suppressed). See the “DLP-G57 Set the IP Address, Default Router, and Network Mask Using
the LCD” task on page 4-24 for instructions. However, you cannot use the LCD to provision any
other network settings. In an ONS 15454 M2 shelf assembly, the LCD is on the fan-tray
assembly. In an ONS 15454 M6 shelf assembly, the LCD is a separate unit installed above the
external connection unit (ECU).
Purpose This procedure provisions network access for a node, including its subnet
mask, default router, Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
server, Internet Inter-Orb Protocol (IIOP) listener port, gateway settings,
static routes, Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol, Routing
Information Protocol (RIP), and designated SOCKS servers.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note When accessing CTC from a machine running Windows XP operating system, CTC may sometimes fail
to reconnect to a GNE when the GNE proxies for several ENE nodes (approximately 15 ENE nodes).
This can happen when there is a side switch or when the LAN is enabled/disabled. This is due to the
Windows XP operating system limiting the number of simultaneous TCP/IP connection attempts. As a
workaround, close the existing CTC session and relaunch CTC on the GNE node. You can configure a
designated socks server list on the CTC to mitigate the problem.
Step 3 If TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards are installed and you want to turn on the ONS 15454 secure mode,
which allows two IP addresses to be provisioned for the node, complete the “DLP-G264 Enable Node
Security Mode” task on page 4-26. Secure mode is not available if TCC2 cards are installed.
Step 4 If static routes are needed, complete the “DLP-G58 Create a Static Route” task on page 4-28. For more
information about static routes, refer to the “Management Network Connectivity” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 5 If the ONS 15454 is connected to a LAN or WAN that uses OSPF and you want to share routing
information between the LAN or WAN and the ONS network, complete the “DLP-G59 Set Up or Change
Open Shortest Path First Protocol” task on page 4-29.
Step 6 If the ONS 15454 is connected to a LAN or WAN that uses RIP, complete the “DLP-G60 Set Up or
Change Routing Information Protocol” task on page 4-32.
Step 7 Complete the “DLP-G439 Provision the Designated SOCKS Servers” task on page 4-23 after the
network is provisioned and one or more of the following conditions exist:
• SOCKS proxy is enabled.
• The ratio of ENEs to GNEs is greater than eight to one.
• Most ENEs do not have LAN connectivity.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G56 Provision IP Settings
Caution All network changes should be approved by your network (or LAN) administrator.
Caution Verify that the IPv4 or IPv6 addresses assigned to the node are unique in the network. Duplicate IP
addresses in the same network cause loss of visibility.
Purpose This task provisions IP settings, which includes the IP address, IP address
version, default router, DHCP access, firewall access, and SOCKS proxy
server settings for an ONS 15454 node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Network > General tabs.
Step 2 Complete the following information in the fields listed:
• IP Address—Type the IP address assigned to the ONS 15454 node.
Note If TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards are installed, dual IP addressing is available using the
secure mode. When secure mode is off (sometimes called repeater mode), the IP address
entered in the IP Address field applies to the backplane LAN port (ONS 15454), EMS RJ-45
port or Craft port on the ECU (ONS 15454 M6), EMS RJ-45 port on the power module (ONS
15454 M2), and the TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC TCP/IP (LAN) port. When secure mode is on,
the IP Address field shows the address assigned to the TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC TCP/IP
(LAN) port and the Superuser can enable or disable display of the backplane IP address. See
the “DLP-G264 Enable Node Security Mode” task on page 4-26 as needed. Refer to the
“Management Network Connectivity” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference
Manual for more information about secure mode.
• Net/Subnet Mask Length—Type the subnet mask length (decimal number representing the subnet
mask length in bits) or click the arrows to adjust the subnet mask length. The subnet mask length is
the same for all ONS 15454 nodes in the same subnet.
• MAC Address—(Display only) Displays the ONS 15454 IEEE 802 MAC address.
Note In secure mode, the front and back TCP/IP (LAN) ports are assigned different MAC
addresses, and the backplane information can be hidden or revealed by a Superuser.
• Default Router—If the ONS 15454 is connected to a LAN, enter the IP address of the default router.
The default router forwards packets to network devices that the ONS 15454 cannot directly access.
This field is ignored if any of the following are true:
– The ONS 15454 is not connected to a LAN.
– The SOCKS proxy server is enabled and the ONS 15454 is provisioned as an end network
element (ENE).
– OSPF is enabled on both the ONS 15454 and the LAN where the ONS 15454 is connected.
(OSPF is provisioned in the “DLP-G59 Set Up or Change Open Shortest Path First Protocol”
task on page 4-29.)
• LCD IP Setting—Choose one of the following:
– Allow Configuration—Displays the node IP address on the LCD and allows users to change
the IP settings using the LCD. This option enables the “DLP-G57 Set the IP Address, Default
Router, and Network Mask Using the LCD” task on page 4-24.
– Display Only—Displays the node IP address on the LCD but does not allow users to change the
IP settings using the LCD.
– Suppress Display—Suppresses the node IP address display on the LCD.
• Suppress CTC IP Display—Check this check box if you want to prevent the node IP address from
appearing in CTC to users with Provisioning, Maintenance, or Retrieve security levels. (The IP
address suppression is not applied to users with Superuser security level.)4-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note IP address suppression is not applied to users with Superuser security level. However, in
secure mode the backplane IP address visibility can be restricted to only a locally connected
Superuser viewing the routing table. In this case, the backplane IP address is not revealed to
any user at any other NE, either on the routing table or in autonomous messages (such as the
TL1 REPT DBCHG message, alarms, and performance monitoring [PM] reporting).
• IPv6 Configuration—Allows provisioning of IPv6 addresses. After you provision an IPv6 address,
you can access the device using the IPv6 address. Configure these settings only if you want to enable
IPv6 on the node. IPv6 cannot be configured using the LCD push buttons.
– Enable IPv6—Select this check box to assign an IPv6 address to the node. The IPv6 Address,
Prefix Length, and IPv6 Default Router fields are enabled only if this check box is selected. The
check box is disabled by default.
Note Enable SOCKS Proxy on Port check box is enabled when you enable IPv6 and can be disabled
only when IPv6 is disabled.
Note By default, when IPv6 is enabled, the node processes both IPv4 and IPv6 packets on the
LAN interface. If you want the node to process only IPv6 packets, you need to disable IPv4
on the node. For more information, see DLP-G317 Change Node Access and PM Clearing
Privilege, page 11-58
– IPv6 Address—Enter the IPv6 address that you want to assign to the node. This IP address is
the global unicast IPv6 address. This field is disabled if the Enable IPv6 check box is not
selected.
– Prefix Length—Enter the prefix length of the IPv6 address. This field is disabled if the Enable
IPv6 check box is not selected.
– IPv6 Default Router—Enter the IPv6 address of the default router of the IPv6 NE. This is
optional. This field is disabled if the Enable IPv6 check box is not selected.
Note The ONS 15454 DWDM uses NAT-PT internally to support native IPv6. NAT-PT uses the
IPv4 address range 128.0.0.0 to 128.0.1.254 for packet translation. Do not use this address
range when you enable IPv6 feature.
Note You can provision IPv6 in secure or nonsecure mode. To enable secure mode, see
“DLP-G264 Enable Node Security Mode” task on page 4-26.
• Forward DHCP Request To—Check this check box to enable DHCP. Also, enter the DHCP server
IP address in the Request To field. Unchecked is the default. If you will enable any of the gateway
settings to implement the ONS 15454 SOCKS proxy server features, do not check this check box.
Note If you enable DHCP, computers connected to an ONS 15454 node can obtain temporary IP
addresses from an external DHCP server. The ONS 15454 only forwards DHCP requests; it
does not act as a DHCP server.4-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Gateway Settings—Provisions the ONS 15454 SOCKS proxy server features. (SOCKS is a standard
proxy protocol for IP-based applications.) Do not change these options until you review Scenario 7
“Provisioning the ONS 15454 Proxy Server” in the “Management Network Connectivity” chapter
of the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual. In SOCKS proxy server networks, the
ONS 15454 is either an ENE, a GNE, or a proxy-only server. Provisioning must be consistent for
each NE type.
• Enable SOCKS proxy server on port—If checked, the ONS 15454 serves as a proxy for connections
between CTC clients and ONS 15454 nodes that are connected by data communications channels
(DCCs) to the proxy ONS 15454. The CTC client establishes connections to DCC-connected nodes
through the proxy node. The CTC client does not require IP connectivity to the DCC-connected
nodes; it only requires IP connectivity to the proxy ONS 15454. If the Enable SOCKS proxy server
on port check box is unchecked, the node does not proxy for any CTC clients. When this box is
checked, you can provision one of the following options:
– External Network Element (ENE)—Choose this option when the ONS 15454 is not connected
to a LAN but has DCC connections to other ONS nodes. A CTC computer connected to the ENE
through the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card TCP/IP (craft) port can manage nodes that
have DCC connections to the ENE. However, the CTC computer does not have direct IP
connectivity to these nodes or to any LAN or WAN that those nodes might be connected to.
– Gateway Network Element (GNE)—Choose this option when the ONS 15454 is connected to
a LAN and has DCC connections to other nodes. A CTC computer connected to the LAN can
manage all nodes that have DCC connections to the GNE, but the CTC computer does not have
direct IP connectivity to them. The GNE option isolates the LAN from the DCC network so that
IP traffic originating from the DCC-connected nodes and any CTC computers connected to
them is prevented from reaching the LAN.
– SOCKS proxy only—Choose this option when the ONS 15454 is connected to a LAN and the
LAN is separated from the node by a firewall. The SOCKS proxy only option is the same as the
GNE option, except that the SOCKS proxy only option does not isolate the DCC network from
the LAN.
Note If a node is provisioned in secure mode, it is automatically provisioned as a GNE with SOCKS
proxy enabled. However, this provisioning can be overridden, and the secure node can be
changed to an ENE. In secure mode, SOCKS cannot be disabled. For information about
provisioning, including GNE and ENE status, see the “DLP-G264 Enable Node Security Mode”
task on page 4-26.
Step 3 Click Apply.
Step 4 Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
The TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards reboot one at a time if changes were made to the IP address,
subnet mask, or gateway settings. During this time (approximately 5 to 6 minutes), the active and
standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card LEDs will blink, turn on, and turn off at different intervals.
Eventually, a “Lost node connection, switching to network view” message appears.
Step 5 Click OK. The network view appears. The node icon appears in gray, during which time you cannot
access the node.
Step 6 Double-click the node icon when it becomes green.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). 4-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G439 Provision the Designated SOCKS Servers
Note To complete this task, you must have either the IP addresses or DNS names of all ONS 15454s in the
network with LAN access that have SOCKS proxy enabled.
Note SOCKS proxy servers can be any accessible ONS network nodes that have LAN access, including the
ONS 15310-MA, ONS 15310-CL, ONS 15454, ONS 15454 SDH, ONS 15600, and ONS 15600 SDH
nodes.
Note You must repeat this task any time that changes to SOCKS proxy server nodes occur, for example,
whenever LAN connectivity is added to or removed from a node, or when nodes are added or removed
from the network.
Note If you cannot log into a network node, complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30
choosing the Disable Network Discovery option. Complete this task, then login again with network
discovery enabled.
Step 1 From the CTC Edit menu, choose Preferences.
Step 2 In the Preferences dialog box, click the SOCKS tab.
Step 3 In the Designated SOCKS Server field, type the IP address or DNS node name of the first ONS 15454
SOCKS server. The ONS 15454 that you enter must have SOCKS proxy server enabled, and it must have
LAN access.
Step 4 Click Add. The node is added to the SOCKS server list. If you need to remove a node on the list, click
Remove.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to add all qualified ONS 15454s within the network. Add all ONS nodes that have
SOCKS proxy enabled and are connected to the LAN.
Purpose This task identifies the ONS 15454 SOCKS servers in
SOCKS-proxy-enabled networks. Identifying the SOCKS servers reduces
the amount of time required to log into a node and have all NEs appear in
network view (NE discovery time). The task is recommended when the
combined CTC login and NE discovery time is greater than five minutes in
networks with SOCKS proxy enabled. Long (or failed) login and NE
discovery times can occur in networks that have a high ENE-to-GNE ratio
and a low number of ENEs with LAN connectivity.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 6 Click Check All Servers. CTC verifies that all nodes can perform as SOCKS servers. Once verified, a
check is placed next to the node IP address or node name in the SOCKS server list. An X placed next to
the node indicates one or more of the following:
• The entry does not correspond to a valid DNS name.
• The numeric IP address is invalid.
• The node cannot be reached.
• The node can be reached, but the SOCKS port cannot be accessed, for example, a firewall problem
might exist.
Step 7 Click Apply. The list of ONS 15454 nodes, including ones that received an X in Step 6, are added as
SOCKS servers.
Step 8 Click OK to close the Preferences dialog box.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G57 Set the IP Address, Default Router, and Network Mask Using the LCD
Note You cannot perform this task if the LCD IP Display field on the node view Provisioning > Network tab
is set to Display Only or Suppress Display. See the “DLP-G56 Provision IP Settings” task on page 4-19
to view or change the LCD IP Display field. If the node is locked in secure mode with the LCD display
disabled, you will not be able to change this provisioning unless the lock is disabled by Cisco Technical
Support. Refer to the “Management Network Connectivity” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Reference Manual for more information about secure mode.
Note The LCD reverts to normal display mode after 5 seconds of button inactivity.
Step 1 On the ONS 15454 front panel, repeatedly press the Slot button until SHELF appears on the first line of
the LCD. You are in the Shelf menu.
Purpose This task changes the ONS 15454 IP address, default router, and network
mask using the LCD on the fan-tray assembly. Use this task if you cannot
log into CTC. In an ONS 15454 M2 shelf assembly, the LCD is on the
fan-tray assembly. In an ONS 15454 M6 shelf assembly, the LCD is a
separate unit installed above the external connection unit (ECU).
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures “DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card” in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note In an ONS 15454 M2 shelf assembly, the LCD panel and the Slot, Port, and Status buttons are present
on the fan-tray assembly. In an ONS 15454 M6 shelf assembly, the LCD is a separate unit installed above
the external connection unit (ECU); the Slot, Port, and Status buttons are present on the LCD unit.
Step 2 Repeatedly press the Port button until the following information appears:
• To change the node IP address, Node Status=IpAddress (Figure 4-4)
• To change the node network mask, Node Status=Net Mask
• To change the default router IP address, Node Status=Default Rtr
Figure 4-4 Selecting the IP Address Option—ONS 15454 Shelf Assembly
Step 3 Press the Status button to display the node IP address (Figure 4-5), the node subnet mask length, or the
default router IP address.
Figure 4-5 Changing the IP Address—ONS 15454 Shelf Assembly
Step 4 Push the Slot button to move to the digit of the IP address, subnet mask, or default router that you want
to change. The selected digit flashes.
Tip The Slot, Status, and Port button positions correspond to the positions of the commands shown
on the LCD. For example, in Figure 4-5, you press the Slot button to invoke the Next command
and the Status button to invoke the Done command.
Step 5 Press the Port button to cycle the IP address, subnet mask, or default router to the correct digit.
Step 6 When the change is complete, press the Status button to return to the relevant Node Status menu.
Step 7 Repeatedly press the Port button until the Shelf Save Configuration option appears (Figure 4-6).
FAN FAIL
Slot
Node
Status=IpAddress 151562
CRIT MAJ MIN
Status Port
FAN FAIL
Slot
172.020.214.107
44090
CRIT MAJ MIN
Status Port4-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 4-6 Selecting the Save Configuration Option—ONS 15454 Shelf Assembly
Step 8 Press the Status button to choose the Save Configuration option.
A Save and REBOOT message appears (Figure 4-7).
Figure 4-7 Saving and Rebooting the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3—ONS 15454 Shelf Assembly
Step 9 Press the Slot button to apply the new IP address, subnet mask, or default router configuration or press
Port to cancel the configuration.
Note The IP address and default router must be on the same subnet. If not, you cannot apply the
configuration.
Step 10 Saving the new configuration causes the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards to reboot. During the
reboot, a “TCC may Reset” message appears on the LCD. The LCD returns to the normal alternating
display after both TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards finish rebooting.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G264 Enable Node Security Mode
FAN FAIL
Slot
Shelf
Status=Save Cfg. 151563
CRIT MAJ MIN
Status Port
FAN FAIL
Slot
Save and REBOOT?
44092
CRIT MAJ MIN
Status Port
Purpose This task enables the security mode. When security mode is enabled, two
IP addresses are assigned to the node. One address is assigned to the
backplane LAN port (ONS 15454) or to the EMS port (ONS 15454 M2 and
M6). The other address is assigned to the TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC RJ-45
TCP/IP (LAN) port. The TCC2 card does not support security mode.
Tools/Equipment TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards must be installed.
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 14-2
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note This task requires TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards. The security mode options described in this task will
not appear in CTC if TCC2 cards are installed.
Caution The IP address assigned to the TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC TCP/IP (LAN) port must reside on a different
subnet from the backplane LAN port (ONS 15454) and the EMS port (ONS 15454 M2 and M6). Verify
that the new TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC IP address meets this requirement.
Note The node will reboot after you complete this task, causing a temporary disconnection between the CTC
computer and the node.
Note If an OTS-to-OTS PPC is created between nodes, it will no longer function if the node Security Mode is
enabled (see DLP-G264 Enable Node Security Mode, page 4-26). The reason for this is that if the Secure
mode is enabled, it is no longer possible for the DCN extension feature to use the LAN interface to
extend the internal network (due to the network isolation in this configuration mode). The result is that
the topology discovery on the OTS-to-OTS PPC no longer operates.
Step 1 Click the Provisioning > Security > Data Comm tabs.
Step 2 Click Change Mode.
Step 3 Review the information on the Change Secure Mode page, then click Next.
Step 4 On the TCC Ethernet Port page, enter the IP address and subnet mask for the TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC
TCP/IP (LAN) port. The IP address cannot reside on the same subnet as the backplane LAN port
(ONS 15454) and the EMS port (ONS 15454 M2 and M6).
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 If needed, on the Backplane Ethernet Port page, modify the backplane IP address, subnet mask, and
default router. (You normally do not modify these fields if no network changes have occurred.)
Step 7 Click Next.
Step 8 On the SOCKS Proxy Server Settings page, choose one of the following options:
• External Network Element (ENE)—If selected, the CTC computer is only visible to the
ONS 15454 where the CTC computer is connected. The CTC computer is not visible to the nodes
connected to the DCC. In addition, firewall is enabled, which means that the node prevents IP traffic
from being routed between the DCC and the LAN port.
• Gateway Network Element (GNE)—If selected, the CTC computer is visible to other
DCC-connected nodes. The node prevents IP traffic from being routed between the DCC and the
LAN port.
Note The SOCKS proxy server is automatically enabled when you enable secure mode.
Step 9 Click Finish.4-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Within the next 30 to 40 seconds, the TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards reboot. CTC switches to network
view, and the CTC Alerts dialog box appears. In network view, the node changes to gray and a
DISCONNECTED condition appears in the Alarms tab.
Step 10 In the CTC Alerts dialog box, click Close. Wait for the reboot to finish. (This might take several
minutes.)
Step 11 After the DISCONNECTED condition clears, complete the following steps to suppress the backplane IP
address from appearing in CTC and the LCD. If you do not want to suppress the backplane IP address
display, continue with Step 12.
a. Display the node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
b. Click the Provisioning > Security > Data Comm tabs.
c. In the LCD IP Setting field, choose Suppress Display. The IP address will not appear on the
ONS 15454 LCD.
d. Check the Suppress CTC IP Address check box. The IP address will not appear in the CTC
information area or the Provisioning > Security > Data Comm tabs.
e. Click Apply.
Note After you turn on secure mode, the TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC IP address becomes the node IP
address.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G58 Create a Static Route
Purpose This task creates a static route to establish CTC connectivity to a computer
on another network. This task is performed when one of the following
conditions exists:
• CTC computers on one subnet need to connect to ONS 15454 nodes
that are connected by a router to ONS 15454 nodes residing on another
subnet.
• OSPF is not enabled (the OSPF Active on LAN check box is not
checked on the Provisioning > Network > OSPF tab) and the External
Network Element (ENE) gateway setting is not checked.
• You need to enable multiple CTC sessions among ONS 15454 nodes
residing on the same subnet and the External Network Element (ENE)
gateway setting is not checked.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-29
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Network tabs.
Step 2 Click the Static Routing tab. Click Create.
Step 3 In the Create Static Route dialog box, enter the following:
• Destination—Enter the IP address of the computer running CTC. To limit access to one computer,
enter the full IP address and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255. To allow access to all computers on
the 192.168.1.0 subnet, enter 192.168.1.0 and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. You can enter a
destination of 0.0.0.0 to allow access to all CTC computers that connect to the router.
• Mask—Enter a subnet mask. If the destination is a host route (that is, one CTC computer), enter a
32-bit subnet mask (255.255.255.255). If the destination is a subnet, adjust the subnet mask
accordingly, for example, 255.255.255.0. If the destination is 0.0.0.0, CTC automatically enters a
subnet mask of 0.0.0.0 to provide access to all CTC computers. You cannot change this value.
• Next Hop—Enter the IP address of the router port or the node IP address if the CTC computer is
connected to the node directly.
• Cost—Enter the number of hops between the ONS 15454 and the computer.
Step 4 Click OK. Verify that the static route appears in the Static Route window.
Note Static route networking examples are provided in the “Management Network Connectivity”
chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G59 Set Up or Change Open Shortest Path First Protocol
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Network > OSPF tabs.
Step 2 On the top left side of the OSPF area, complete the following:
• DCC/GCC OSPF Area ID Table—In dotted decimal format, enter the number that identifies the
ONS 15454 nodes as a unique OSPF area ID. The Area ID can be any number between
000.000.000.000 and 255.255.255.255, but must be unique to the LAN OSPF area.
Purpose This task enables the OSPF routing protocol on the ONS 15454. Perform
this task if you want to include the ONS 15454 in OSPF-enabled networks.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
You will need the OSPF Area ID, Hello and Dead intervals, and
authentication key (if OSPF authentication is enabled) provisioned on the
router to which the ONS 15454 is connected.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-30
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
ANSI Nodes
• SDCC Metric—This value is normally unchanged. It sets a cost for sending packets across the
Section DCC, which is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path. This value should always
be higher than the LAN metric. The default SDCC metric is 100.
• LDCC Metric—Sets a cost for sending packets across the Line DCC. This value should always be
lower than the SDCC metric. The default LDCC metric is 33. It is usually not changed.
ETSI Nodes
• RS-DCC Metric—This value is normally unchanged. It sets a cost for sending packets across the
regenerator section DCC (RS-DCC), which is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path.
This value should always be higher than the LAN metric. The default RS-DCC metric is 100.
• MS-DCC Metric—Sets a cost for sending packets across the multiplex section DCC (MS-DCC).
This value should always be lower than the SDCC metric. The default MS-DCC metric is 33. It is
usually not changed.
Step 3 In the OSPF on LAN area, complete the following:
• OSPF active on LAN—When checked, enables the ONS 15454 OSPF topology to be advertised to
OSPF routers on the LAN. Enable this field on ONS 15454 nodes that directly connect to OSPF
routers.
• LAN Port Area ID—Enter the OSPF area ID (dotted decimal format) for the router port where the
ONS 15454 is connected. (This number is different from the DCC/GCC OSPF Area ID.)
Step 4 By default, OSPF is set to No Authentication. If the OSPF router requires authentication, complete the
following steps. If not, continue with Step 5.
a. Click the No Authentication button.
b. In the Edit Authentication Key dialog box, complete the following:
• Type—Choose Simple Password.
• Enter Authentication Key—Enter the password.
• Confirm Authentication Key—Enter the same password to confirm it.
c. Click OK.
The authentication button label changes to Simple Password.
Step 5 Provision the OSPF priority and interval settings. The OSPF priority and interval defaults are the
defaults most commonly used by OSPF routers. Verify that these defaults match the ones used by the
OSPF router where the ONS 15454 is connected.
• Router Priority—Provision the router priority, which determines the designated router for a subnet.
• Hello Interval (sec)—Provision the number of seconds between OSPF hello packet advertisements
sent by OSPF routers. Ten seconds is the default.
• Dead Interval—Provision the number of seconds that will pass while an OSPF router’s packets are
not visible before its neighbors declare the router down. Forty seconds is the default.
• Transit Delay (sec)—Provision the service speed. One second is the default.
• Retransmit Interval (sec)—Provision the number of seconds that will elapse before a packet is
resent. Five seconds is the default.
• LAN Metric—Provision the cost for sending packets across the LAN. This value should always be
lower than the SDCC or RS-DCC metric. Ten is the default.
Step 6 Under OSPF Area Range Table, create an area range table if one is needed:4-31
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note Area range tables consolidate the information that is outside an OSPF area border. One
ONS 15454 in the ONS 15454 OSPF area is connected to the OSPF router. An area range table
on this node points the router to the other nodes that reside within the ONS 15454 OSPF area.
a. Click Create.
b. In the Create Area Range dialog box, enter the following:
• Range Address—Enter the area IP address for the ONS 15454 nodes that reside within the
OSPF area. For example, if the ONS 15454 OSPF area includes nodes with IP addresses
10.10.20.100, 10.10.30.150, 10.10.40.200, and 10.10.50.250, the range address would be
10.10.0.0.
• Range Area ID—Enter the OSPF area ID for the ONS 15454 nodes. This is either the ID in the
DCC OSPF Area ID field or the ID in the Area ID for LAN Port field.
• Mask Length—Enter the subnet mask length. In the Range Address example, this is 16.
• Advertise—Check this box if you want to advertise the OSPF range table.
c. Click OK.
Step 7 All OSPF areas must be connected to Area 0. If the ONS 15454 OSPF area is not physically connected
to Area 0, use the following steps to create a virtual link table that will provide the disconnected area
with a logical path to Area 0:
a. Under the OSPF Virtual Link Table, click Create.
b. In the Create Virtual Link dialog box, complete the following fields. OSPF settings must match
OSPF settings for the ONS 15454 OSPF area:
• Neighbor—Enter the router ID of the Area 0 router.
• Transit Delay (sec)—Enter the service speed. One second is the default.
• Hello Int (sec)—Provision the number of seconds between OSPF hello packet advertisements
sent by OSPF routers. Ten seconds is the default.
• Auth Type—If the router where the ONS 15454 is connected uses authentication, choose
Simple Password. Otherwise, choose No Authentication.
• Retransmit Int (sec)—Provision the time that will elapse, in seconds, before a packet is resent.
Five seconds is the default.
• Dead Int (sec)—Provision the number of seconds that will pass while an OSPF router’s packets
are not visible before its neighbors declare the router down. Forty seconds is the default.
c. Click OK.
Step 8 After entering the ONS 15454 OSPF area data, click Apply.
If you changed the Area ID, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards reset, one at a time. The reset
takes approximately 10 to 15 minutes.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).4-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G60 Set Up or Change Routing Information Protocol
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Network > RIP tabs.
Step 2 Check the RIP Active check box if you are activating RIP.
Step 3 Choose either RIP Version 1 or RIP Version 2 from the drop-down list, depending on which version is
supported in your network.
Step 4 Set the RIP metric. The RIP metric can be set to a number between 1 and 15 and represents the number
of hops.
Step 5 By default, RIP is set to No Authentication. If the router that the ONS 15454 is connected to requires
authentication, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 6.
a. Click the No Authentication button.
b. In the Edit Authentication Key dialog box, complete the following:
• Type—Choose Simple Password.
• Enter Authentication Key—Enter the password.
• Confirm Authentication Key—Enter the same password to confirm it.
c. Click OK.
The authentication button label changes to Simple Password.
Step 6 If you want to complete an address summary, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 7.
Complete the address summary only if the ONS 15454 is a gateway NE with multiple external
ONS 15454 NEs attached with IP addresses in different subnets.
a. In the RIP Address Summary area, click Create.
b. In the Create Address Summary dialog box, complete the following:
• Summary Address—Enter the summary IP address.
• Mask Length—Enter the subnet mask length using the up and down arrows.
• Hops—Enter the number of hops. The smaller the number of hops, the higher the priority.
c. Click OK.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task enables RIP on the ONS 15454. Perform this task if you want to
include the ONS 15454 in RIP-enabled networks.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
You need to create a static route to the router adjacent to the ONS 15454
for the ONS 15454 to communicate its routing information to
non-DCC-connected nodes.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G194 Set Up EMS Secure Access to the ONS 15454
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > Security > Access pane.
Step 2 Under the EMS Access area, change the Access State to Secure.
Step 3 Click Apply. The CTC disconnects and reconnects through a secure socket connection.
Step 4 To create a secure connection, enter https://node-address.
Note After setting up a CTC connection in secure mode, http requests are automatically redirected to https
mode.
Step 5 A first time connection is authenticated by the Website Certification is Not Known dialog box. Accept
the certificate and click OK. The Security Error: Domain Name Mismatch dialog box appears. Click
OK to continue.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G27 Set Up the ONS15454 for Firewall Access
Step 1 Log into a node that is behind the firewall. See the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 for
instructions. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 If the ONS 15454 node is in a protected network and the CTC computer is in an external network,
complete the “DLP-G61 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the ONS 15454” task on page 4-35.
Figure 4-8 shows ONS 15454 nodes in a protected network and the CTC computer in an external
network. For the computer to access the ONS 15454 nodes, you must provision the IIOP listener port
specified by your firewall administrator on the ONS 15454.
Purpose This procedure provisions ONS 15454s and CTC computers for secure
access.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 4-18
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser
Purpose This procedure provisions ONS 15454 nodes and CTC computers for
access through firewalls.
Tools/Equipment IIOP listener port number provided by your LAN or firewall administrator
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 4-8 Nodes Behind a Firewall
Step 3 If the CTC computer resides behind a firewall, complete the “DLP-G62 Provision the IIOP Listener Port
on the CTC Computer” task on page 4-36.
Figure 4-9 shows a CTC computer and ONS 15454 behind firewalls. For the computer to access the
ONS 15454, you must provision the IIOP port on the CTC computer and on the ONS 15454.
Figure 4-9 CTC Computer and ONS 15454 Nodes Residing Behind Firewalls
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G28 Create FTP Host
55351
CTC computer
External network Protected network
ONS 15454
Unprotected
network
Private
network
IIOP port
IIOP port
Firewall
Port
filtering ONS 15454
55350
CTC computer
Firewall
Port
filtering
Protected network External network Protected network
ONS 15454 Private
network
Unprotected
network
Private
network
IIOP port
IIOP port
IIOP port
Firewall
Port
filtering ONS 15454
Purpose This procedure provisions an FTP Host that you can use to perform
database backup and restore or software download to an End Network
Element (ENE) when proxy or firewall is enabled.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 4-18
NTP-G27 Set Up the ONS 15454 for Firewall Access, page 4-33
Required/As Needed As needed4-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30. If you are already logged in, continue with
Step 2.
Step 2 If you want to turn on the ONS 15454 secure mode, which allows two IPv4 addresses to be provisioned
for the node if TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards are installed, complete the “DLP-G264 Enable Node
Security Mode” task on page 4-26. Refer to the “Management Network Connectivity” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual for information about secure mode.
Step 3 In Node view, click the Provisioning > Network > FTP Hosts tabs.
Step 4 Click Create.
Step 5 Enter a valid IP address in the FTP Host Address field. A maximum of 12 host can be entered.
Note In ONS 15454 Software Release 9.1 and later, you can configure an IPv6 address for an FTP server, in
addition to an IPv4 address.
Step 6 The Mask is automatically set according to the Net/Subnet Mask length specified in “DLP-G56
Provision IP Settings” section on page 4-19. To change the Mask, click the Up/Down arrows on the
Length menu.
Step 7 Check the FTP Relay Enable radio button to allow FTP commands at the GNE relay. If you will enable
the relay at a later time, go to Step 9. Certain TL1 commands executed on an ENE require FTP access
into the Data Communication Network (DCN), the FTP relay on the GNE provides this access. The FTP
hosts that you have configured in CTC can be used with the TL1 COPY-RFILE (for database backup and
restore or software download) or COPY-IOSCFG (for Cisco IOS Configuration File backup and restore)
commands.
Step 8 Enter the time, in minutes, that FTP Relay will be enabled. A valid entry is a number between 0 and 60.
The number 0 disallows FTP command relay. After the specified time has elapsed the FTP Relay Enable
flag is unset and FTP command relay is disallowed.
Step 9 Click OK.
Step 10 Repeat Step 4 through Step 9 to provision additional FTP Hosts.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G61 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the ONS15454
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser
Purpose This task sets the IIOP listener port on the ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2,
and ONS 15454 M6 which enables you to access nodes that reside behind
a firewall.
Tools/Equipment IIOP listener port number provided by your LAN or firewall administrator
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note If the Enable SOCKS proxy on port 1080 check box is checked, CTC will use Port 1080 and ignore the
configured IIOP port setting. If the check box is later unchecked, the configured IIOP listener port will
be used.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Security > Access tabs.
Step 2 In the TCC CORBA (IIOP) Listener Port area, choose a listener port option:
• Default - TCC Fixed—Uses Port 57790 to connect to ONS 15454 nodes on the same side of the
firewall or if no firewall is used (default). This option can be used for access through a firewall if
Port 57790 is available.
• Standard Constant—Uses Port 683, the Common Object Request Broker Architecture (CORBA)
default port number.
• Other Constant—If Port 683 is not used, type the IIOP port specified by your firewall
administrator.
Step 3 Click Apply.
Step 4 When the Change Network Configuration message appears, click Yes.
The TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards reboot, one at a time. The reboot takes approximately 15
minutes.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G62 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the CTC Computer
Step 1 From the Edit menu, choose Preferences.
Step 2 In the Preferences dialog box, click the Firewall tab.
Step 3 In the CTC CORBA (IIOP) Listener Port area, choose a listener port option:
• Default - Variable—Use to connect to ONS 15454 nodes from within a firewall or if no firewall is
used (default).
• Standard Constant—Use Port 683, the CORBA default port number.
• Other Constant—If Port 683 is not used, enter the IIOP port defined by your administrator.
Step 4 Click Apply. A warning appears telling you that the port change will apply during the next CTC login.
Purpose This task selects the IIOP listener port for CTC and must be completed if
the computer running CTC resides behind a firewall.
Tools/Equipment IIOP listener port number from LAN or firewall administrator
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 In the Preferences dialog box, click OK.
Step 7 To access the ONS 15454 using the IIOP port, log out of CTC then log back in. (To log out, choose Exit
from the File menu).
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G132 Provision OSI
Caution This procedure requires an understanding of OSI protocols, parameters, and functions. Before you begin,
review the OSI reference sections in the “Management Network Connectivity” chapter of the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual and ensure that you know the role of the ONS 15454 within
the OSI and IP network.
Note This procedure requires provisioning of non-ONS equipment including routers and third party NEs. Do
not begin until you have the capability to complete that provisioning.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to provision the
OSI. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the following tasks:
• DLP-G283 Provision OSI Routing Mode, page 4-38—Complete this task first.
• DLP-G284 Provision the TARP Operating Parameters, page 4-39—Complete this task second.
• DLP-G285 Add a Static TID-to-NSAP Entry to the TARP Data Cache, page 4-41—Complete this
task as needed.
• DLP-G287 Add a TARP Manual Adjacency Table Entry, page 4-42—Complete this task as needed.
• DLP-G288 Provision OSI Routers, page 4-43—Complete this task as needed.
• DLP-G289 Provision Additional Manual Area Addresses, page 4-44—Complete this task as needed.
• DLP-G290 Enable the OSI Subnet on the LAN Interface, page 4-44—Complete this task as needed.
Purpose This procedure provisions the ONS 15454 so it can be installed in networks
with other vendor NEs that use the OSI protocol stack for data
communications network (DCN) communications. This procedure
provisions the Target Identifier Address Resolution Protocol (TARP), OSI
routers, manual area addresses, subnetwork points of attachment, and
IP-over-Connectionless Network Service (CLNS) tunnels.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• DLP-G291 Create an IP-Over-CLNS Tunnel, page 4-45—Complete this task as needed.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G283 Provision OSI Routing Mode
Caution Do not complete this task until you confirm the role of the node within the network. It will be either an
End System, Intermediate System Level 1, or IS Level 1/Level 2. This decision must be carefully
considered. For additional information about OSI provisioning, refer to the “Management Network
Connectivity” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Caution Link State Protocol (LSP) buffers must be the same at all NEs within the network, or loss of visibility
might occur. Do not modify the LSP buffers unless you confirm that all NEs within the OSI have the
same buffer size.
Caution LSP buffer sizes cannot be greater than the LAP-D maximum transmission unit (MTU) size within the
OSI area.
Note For ONS 15454 nodes, three virtual routers can be provisioned. The node primary Network Service
Access Point (NSAP) address is also the Router 1 primary manual area address. To edit the primary
NSAP, you must edit the Router 1 primary manual area address. After you enable Router 1 on the Routers
subtab, the Change Primary Area Address button is available to edit the address.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > OSI
tabs.
Step 2 Choose a routing mode:
• End System—The ONS 15454 performs OSI end system (ES) functions and relies upon an
intermediate system (IS) for communication with nodes that reside within its OSI area.
Purpose This task provisions the OSI routing mode. Complete this task when the
ONS 15454 is connected to networks with third party NEs that use the OSI
protocol stack for DCN communication.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note The End System routing mode is not available if more than one virtual router is enabled.
• Intermediate System Level 1—The ONS 15454 performs OSI IS functions. It communicates with
IS and ES nodes that reside within its OSI area. It depends upon an IS L1/L2 node to communicate
with IS and ES nodes that reside outside its OSI area.
• Intermediate System Level 1/Level 2—The ONS 15454 performs IS functions. It communicates
with IS and ES nodes that reside within its OSI area. It also communicates with IS L1/L2 nodes that
reside in other OSI areas. Before choosing this option, verify the following:
– The node is connected to another IS Level 1/Level 2 node that resides in a different OSI area.
– The node is connected to all nodes within its area that are provisioned as IS L1/L2.
Step 3 If needed, change the LSP data buffers:
• L1 LSP Buffer Size—Adjusts the Level 1 link state protocol data unit (PDU) buffer size. The default
is 512. It should not be changed.
• L2 LSP Buffer Size—Adjusts the Level 2 link state PDU buffer size. The default is 512. It should
not be changed.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G284 Provision the TARP Operating Parameters
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > OSI >
TARP > Config tabs.
Step 2 Provision the following parameters, as needed:
• TARP PDUs L1 Propagation—If checked (default), TARP Type 1 PDUs that are received by the
node and are not excluded by the LDB are propagated to other NEs within the Level 1 OSI area.
(Type 1 PDUs request a protocol address that matches a target identifier [TID] within a Level 1
routing area.) The propagation does not occur if the NE is the target of the Type 1 PDU, and PDUs
are not propagated to the NE from which the PDU was received.
Note The TARP PDUs L1 Propagation parameter is not used when the Node Routing Area (on the
Provisioning > OSI > Main Setup tab) is set to End System.
Purpose This task provisions the TARP operating parameters including TARP PDU
propagation, timers, and loop detection buffer (LDB).
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• TARP PDUs L2 Propagation—If checked (default), TARP Type 2 PDUs that are received by the
node and are not excluded by the LDB are propagated to other NEs within the Level 2 OSI areas.
(Type 2 PDUs request a protocol address that matches a TID within a Level 2 routing area.) The
propagation occurs if the NE is not the target of the Type 2 PDU, and PDUs are not propagated to
the NE from which the PDU was received.
Note The TARP PDUs L2 Propagation parameter is only used when the Node Routing Area is
provisioned to Intermediate System Level 1/Level 2.
• TARP PDUs Origination—If checked (default), the node performs all TARP origination functions
including:
– TID-to-NSAP resolution requests (originate TARP Type 1 and Type 2 PDUs)
– NSAP-to-TID requests (originate Type 5 PDUs)
– TARP address changes (originate Type 4 PDUs)
Note TARP Echo and NSAP to TID are not supported.
• TARP Data Cache—If checked (default), the node maintains a TARP data cache (TDC). The TDC
is a database of TID-to-NSAP pairs created from TARP Type 3 PDUs received by the node and
modified by TARP Type 4 PDUs (TID-to-NSAP updates or corrections). TARP 3 PDUs are
responses to Type 1 and Type 2 PDUs. The TDC can also be populated with static entries entered
on the TARP > Static TDC tab.
Note TARP Data Cache is only used when the TARP PDUs Origination parameter is enabled.
• L2 TARP Data Cache—If checked (default), the TIDs and NSAPs of NEs originating Type 2
requests are added to the TDC before the node propagates the requests to other NEs.
Note The L2 TARP Data Cache parameter is designed for Intermediate System Level 1/Level 2
nodes that are connected to other Intermediate System Level 1/Level 2 nodes. Enabling the
parameter for Intermediate System Level 1 nodes is not recommended.
• LDB—If checked (default), enables the TARP loop detection buffer. The LDB prevents TARP PDUs
from being sent more than once on the same subnet.
Note The LDB parameter is not used if the Node Routing Mode is provisioned to End System or
if the TARP PDUs L1 Propagation parameter is not enabled.
• LAN TARP Storm Suppression—If checked (default), enables TARP storm suppression. This
function prevents redundant TARP PDUs from being unnecessarily propagated across the LAN
network.
• Send Type 4 PDU on Startup—If checked, a TARP Type 4 PDU is originated during the initial
ONS 15454 startup. Type 4 PDUs indicate that a TID or NSAP change has occurred at the NE. (The
default setting is not enabled.)
• Type 4 PDU Delay—Sets the amount of time that will pass before the Type 4 PDU is generated when
Send Type 4 PDU on Startup is enabled. 60 seconds is the default. The range is 0 to 255 seconds.4-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note The Send Type 4 PDU on Startup and Type 4 PDU Delay parameters are not used if TARP
PDUs Origination is not enabled.
• LDB Entry—Sets the TARP loop detection buffer timer. The loop detection buffer time is assigned
to each LDB entry for which the TARP sequence number (tar-seq) is zero. The default is 5 minutes.
The range is 1 to 10 minutes.
• LDB Flush—Sets the frequency period for flushing the LDB. The default is 5 minutes. The range is
0 to 1440 minutes.
• T1—Sets the amount of time to wait for a response to a Type 1 PDU. Type 1 PDUs seek a specific
NE TID within an OSI Level 1 area. The default is 15 seconds. The range is 0 to 3600 seconds.
• T2—Sets the amount of time to wait for a response to a Type 2 PDU. TARP Type 2 PDUs seek a
specific NE TID value within OSI Level 1 and Level 2 areas. The default is 25 seconds. The range
is 0 to 3600 seconds.
• T3—Sets the amount of time to wait for an address resolution request. The default is 40 seconds.
The range is 0 to 3600 seconds.
• T4—Sets the amount of time to wait for an error recovery. This timer begins after the T2 timer
expires without finding the requested NE TID. The default is 20 seconds. The range is
0 to 3600 seconds.
Note The T1, T2, and T4 timers are not used if the TARP PDUs Origination check box is not
checked.
Step 3 Click Apply.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G285 Add a Static TID-to-NSAP Entry to the TARP Data Cache
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > OSI >
TARP > Static TDC tabs.
Step 2 Click Add Static Entry.
Step 3 In the Add Static Entry dialog box, enter the following:
Purpose This task adds a static TID-to-NSAP entry to the TDC. The static entries
are required for NEs that do not support TARP and are similar to static
routes. For a specific TID, you must force a specific NSAP.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioner or higher4-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• TID—Enter the TID of the NE. (For ONS nodes, the TID is the Node Name parameter on the node
or multishelf view Provisioning > General tab.)
• NSAP—Enter the OSI NSAP address in the NSAP field or, if preferred, click Use Mask and enter
the address in the Masked NSAP Entry dialog box.
Step 4 Click OK to close the Masked NSAP Entry dialog box, if used, and then click OK to close the
Add Static Entry dialog box.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G287 Add a TARP Manual Adjacency Table Entry
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > OSI >
TARP > MAT tabs.
Step 2 Click Add.
Step 3 In the Add TARP Manual Adjacency Table Entry dialog box, enter the following:
• Level—Sets the TARP Type Code that will be sent:
– Level 1—Indicates that the adjacency is within the same area as the current node. The entry
generates Type 1 PDUs.
– Level 2—Indicates that the adjacency is in a different area than the current node. The entry
generates Type 2 PDUs.
• NSAP—Enter the OSI NSAP address in the NSAP field or, if preferred, click Use Mask and enter
the address in the Masked NSAP Entry dialog box.
Step 4 Click OK to close the Masked NSAP Entry dialog box, if used, and then click OK to close the Add Static
Entry dialog box.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task adds an entry to the TARP manual adjacency table (MAT). Entries
are added to the MAT when the ONS 15454 must communicate across
routers or NEs that lack TARP capability.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G288 Provision OSI Routers
Note Router 1 must be enabled before you can enable and edit the primary manual area addresses for
Routers 2 and 3.
Note The Router 1 manual area address, System ID, and Selector “00” create the node NSAP address.
Changing the Router 1 manual area address changes the node NSAP address.
Note The System ID for Router 1 is the node MAC address. The System IDs for Routers 2 and 3 are created
by adding 1 and 2 respectively to the Router 1 System ID. You cannot edit the System IDs.
Step 1 Click the Provisioning > OSI > Routers > Setup tabs.
Step 2 Chose the router you want provision and click Edit. The OSI Router Editor dialog box appears.
Step 3 In the OSI Router Editor dialog box:
a. Check Enable Router to enable the router and make its primary area address available for editing.
b. Click the manual area address, then click Edit.
c. In the Edit Manual Area Address dialog box, edit the primary area address in the Area Address field.
If you prefer, click Use Mask and enter the edits in the Masked NSAP Entry dialog box. The address
(hexadecimal format) can be 8 to 24 alphanumeric characters (0–9, a–f) in length.
d. Click OK successively to close the following dialog boxes: Masked NSAP Entry (if used), Edit
Manual Area Address, and OSI Router Editor.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task enables an OSI router and edits its primary manual area address.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G289 Provision Additional Manual Area Addresses
Step 1 Click the Provisioning > OSI > Routers > Setup tabs.
Step 2 Chose the router where you want provision an additional manual area address and click Edit. The OSI
Router Editor dialog box appears.
Step 3 In the OSI Router Editor dialog box:
a. Check Enable Router to enable the router and make its primary area address available for editing.
b. Click the manual area address, then click Add.
c. In the Add Manual Area Address dialog box, enter the primary area address in the Area Address
field. If you prefer, click Use Mask and enter the address in the Masked NSAP Entry dialog box.
The address (hexadecimal format) can be 2 to 24 alphanumeric characters (0–9, a–f) in length.
d. Click OK successively to close the following dialog boxes: Masked NSAP Entry (if used), Add
Manual Area Address, and OSI Router Editor.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G290 Enable the OSI Subnet on the LAN Interface
Note When you create communication channels (optical service channel [OSC] or generic communications
channel [GCC]), OSI subnetwork points of attachment are enabled on the communication channels. See
the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 4-126 and the “DLP-G76 Provision
DCC/GCC Terminations” task on page 8-61.
Purpose This task provisions the OSI manual area addresses. One primary area and
two additional manual areas can be created for each virtual router.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
DLP-G288 Provision OSI Routers, page 4-43
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task enables the OSI subnetwork point of attachment on the LAN
interface.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-45
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note The OSI subnetwork point of attachment cannot be enabled for the LAN interface if the OSI routing
mode is set to ES.
Note If secure mode is on, the OSI subnet is enabled on the backplane LAN port, not the front
TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC TCP/IP (LAN) port.
Step 1 Click the Provisioning > OSI > Routers > Subnet tabs.
Step 2 Click Enable LAN Subnet.
Step 3 In the Enable LAN Subnet dialog box, complete the following fields:
• ESH—Sets the End System Hello (ESH) propagation frequency. An ES NE transmits ESHs to
inform other ESs and ISs about the NSAPs it serves. The default is 10 seconds. The range is 10 to
1000 seconds.
• ISH—Sets the Intermediate System Hello (ISH) PDU propagation frequency. An intermediate
system NE sends ISHs to other ESs and ISs to inform them about the IS NEs it serves. The default
is 10 seconds. The range is 10 to 1000 seconds.
• IIH—Sets the Intermediate System to Intermediate System Hello (IIH) PDU propagation frequency.
The IS-IS Hello PDUs establish and maintain adjacencies between ISs. The default is 3 seconds. The
range is 1 to 600 seconds.
• IS-IS Cost—Sets the cost for sending packets on the LAN subnet. The IS-IS protocol uses the cost
to calculate the shortest routing path. The default IS-IS cost for LAN subnets is 20. It normally
should not be changed.
• DIS Priority—Sets the designated intermediate system (DIS) priority. In IS-IS networks, one router
is elected to serve as the DIS (LAN subnets only). Cisco router DIS priority is 64. For the
ONS 15454 LAN subnet, the default DIS priority is 63. It normally should not be changed.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G291 Create an IP-Over-CLNS Tunnel
Purpose This task creates an IP-over-CLNS tunnel to allow ONS 15454 nodes to
communicate across equipment and networks that use the OSI protocol
stack.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-46
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Caution IP-over-CLNS tunnels require two endpoints. You will create one point on an ONS 15454. The other
endpoint is generally provisioned on non-ONS equipment including routers and other vendor NEs.
Before you begin, verify that you have the capability to create an OSI-over-CLNS tunnel on the other
equipment location.
Step 1 Click the Provisioning > OSI > Tunnels tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 In the Create IP Over CLNS Tunnel dialog box, complete the following fields:
• Tunnel Type—Choose a tunnel type:
– Cisco—Creates the proprietary Cisco IP tunnel. Cisco IP tunnels add the CLNS header to the
IP packets.
– GRE—Creates a generic routing encapsulation (GRE) tunnel. GRE tunnels add the CLNS
header and a GRE header to the IP packets.
The Cisco proprietary tunnel is slightly more efficient than the GRE tunnel because it does not add
the GRE header to each IP packet. The two tunnel types are not compatible. Most Cisco routers
support the Cisco IP tunnel, while only a few support both GRE and Cisco IP tunnels. You generally
should create Cisco IP tunnels if you are tunneling between two Cisco routers or between a Cisco
router and an ONS node.
Caution Always verify that the IP-over-CLNS tunnel type that you choose is supported by the equipment at the
other end of the tunnel.
• IP Address—Enter the IP address of the IP-over-CLNS tunnel destination.
• IP Mask—Enter the IP address subnet mask of the IP-over-CLNS destination.
• OSPF Metric—Enter the OSPF metric for sending packets across the IP-over-CLNS tunnel. The
OSPF metric, or cost, is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path. The default is 110.
Normally, it is not be changed unless you are creating multiple tunnel routes and want to prioritize
routing by assigning different metrics.
• NSAP Address—Enter the destination NE or OSI router NSAP address.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Provision the other tunnel endpoint using the documentation provided by the manufacturer of the third
party vendor NE.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).4-47
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G29 Set Up SNMP
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to set up SNMP.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > SNMP
tabs.
Step 3 In the Trap Destinations area, click Create.
Step 4 Complete the following in the Create SNMP Trap Destination dialog box (Figure 4-10):
• Destination IP Address—Type the IP address of your network management system (NMS). If the
node you are logged into is an ENE, set the destination address to the GNE.
Note In ONS 15454 Software Release 9.1 and later, you can configure IPv6 addresses for SNMPv2/v3 trap
destinations and SNMPv3 proxy targets, in addition to IPv4 addresses.
• Community—Type the SNMP community name. For a description of SNMP community names,
refer to the “SNMP” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Note The community name is a form of authentication and access control. The community name
assigned to the ONS 15454 is case-sensitive and must match the community name of the
NMS.
• UDP Port—The default User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port for SNMP is 162.
• Trap version—Choose either SNMPv1 or SNMPv2. Refer to your NMS documentation to determine
which version to use.
Figure 4-10 Creating an SNMP Trap
Purpose This procedure provisions the SNMP parameters so that you can use
SNMP management software with the ONS 15454.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
Required/As Needed Required if SNMP is used at your site.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-48
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 5 Click OK. The node IP address of the node where you provisioned the new trap destination appears in
the Trap Destinations area.
Step 6 Click the node IP address in the Trap Destinations area. Verify the SNMP information that appears in
the Selected Destination list.
Step 7 If you want the SNMP agent to accept SNMP SET requests on certain MIBs, click the Allow SNMP Sets
check box. If this box is not checked, SET requests are rejected.
Step 8 If you want to set up the SNMP proxy feature to allow network management, message reporting, and
performance statistic retrieval across ONS firewalls, click the Allow SNMP Proxy check box located
on the SNMP tab.
Note The Use Generic MIB check box is normally not checked for MSTP. It is checked only when the
ONS 15454 resides in networks with multiple ONS products, and the network management
system requires MIBs with the same name to have the same object IDs. By default, the
ONS 15454 uses the CERENT-454-MIBs. Other ONS products, such as the ONS 15600, the
ONS 15327, and ONS 15310-CL, use the CERENT-GENERIC-MIBs. If Use Generic MIB is
checked, the ONS 15454 will use the CERENT-GENERIC-MIBs so the object IDs will be the
same for all products.
Note Using the ONS firewall proxy feature effectively breaches the ONS firewall to exchange
management information.
For more information about the SNMP proxy feature, refer to the “SNMP” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 9 Click Apply.
Step 10 If you are setting up SNMP proxies, you can set up to three relays that send SNMP trap error counts back
to the NE for each trap destination address:
a. Click the first trap destination IP address. The address and its community name appear in the
Destination fields.
b. Enter up to three SNMP Proxy relay addresses and community names in the fields for Relay A,
Relay B, and Relay C.
Note The community names specified for each relay node must match one of the provisioned
SNMP community names in the NE.
Note The SNMP proxy directs SNMP traps from this node through Relay A to Relay B to Relay C
to the trap destination. Ensure that you enter the IP addresses in the correct order so that this
sequence runs correctly.
Step 11 Click Apply.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.4-49
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update
Configuration File
Caution Verify that you have the correct Cisco TransportPlanner network file before you begin this procedure.
The file will have an XML extension and a name assigned by your network planner. Check with your
network planner or administrator if you have any questions.
Note The Cisco TransportPlanner configuration file contains parameters for the node, shelf, card type, port
(including the card’s wavelength), pluggable port module (PPM), as well as OTN and FEC parameters.
Only the values present in XML format appear in the configuration file parameters; if the values are not
in XML format, a column appears blank. The XML file values are independently reported and do not
affect any configuration changes that you apply.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to import the
Cisco TransportPlanner configuration file. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 If you choose the Provision Node Layout option to preprovision the cards in the shelf, complete the
following steps. If not, continue with Step 3.
a. Display the node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
b. Verify that the common control cards (TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC, AIC-I and MSC-ISC) cards
are the only cards installed. If in single or multishelf mode, verify that each shelf in the multishelf
has two TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards.
• If common control cards are the only cards installed, continue with Step 3.
• If other cards appear, continue with Step c.
c. If a physical card other than the common control cards is installed, remove it from the shelf.
d. If preprovisioned DWDM cards are present, delete them using the “DLP-G351 Delete a Card in
CTC” task on page 4-53, then repeat Steps a and b.
Purpose This procedure imports the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update
configuration file and creates a log file. The configuration file, which is
provided in XML format, provisions internal patchcords, optical sides and
card parameters for optical units, transponders, and passive units (DCUs
and patch panels). Finally, the NE Update file installs the ANS parameters
calculated by Cisco TransportPlanner. The log file, which is a text
document records the results of the NE update.
Tools/Equipment A Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update file for the network where the node
is installed must be accessible to the CTC computer.
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-50
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 3 If you have not created a log file to record the results of the NE update, complete the following steps. If
a log file has been created, continue with Step 4.
a. Open a text editor or word processing application.
b. Create a new text (TXT) document with a file name of your choosing.
c. Save the text document in a directory that is easy to navigate to from CTC.
Step 4 In CTC node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view, click the Provisioning > WDM-ANS >
Node Setup tabs.
Step 5 Choose Load latest installation file from node to reload the latest XML file that was applied and stored
in the node. Continue with Step 8.
Step 6 Choose Load installation file from network repository and navigate to the Cisco TransportPlanner
node setup file containing the parameters for the network where the node resides. This option downloads
the XML file from the remote server. Continue with Step 8.
Step 7 In the field under Select XML file, type the path to the Cisco TransportPlanner node setup file containing
the parameters for the network where your node resides, or click Browse and navigate to the file on your
computer. Click the file, then click Open. The file will have an XML extension. Continue with Step 8.
Step 8 In the field under Select Log file, type the path to the text file that you created in Step 3, or click Browse
and navigate to the file on your computer or a network server where you want the node setup results
recorded.
Note The log file records the parameters that were updated successfully and provides an explanation
of why an update could not be completed. Each node setup session overwrites the log file
contents. If you want to save the results from a previous NE update, save the log file with new
name.
Step 9 Click Apply.
Step 10 When Load installation file from network repository option is chosen, the FTP Remote Installation
File Node-Name page appears.
a. When the node is configured as a Gateway Network Element (GNE) node, enter the parameters (host
name, port, user name, password, remote directory, and XML file name of the remote server) and
click Next.
b. When the node is configured as a Elementary Network Element (ENE) node, an additional
parameter called GNE Selector appear. From the GNE Selector drop-down list, select the
appropriate GNE in the network. The FTP relay must be configured on the selected GNE to the
remote server where the XML file is stored. See “NTP-G28 Create FTP Host” procedure on
page 4-34 to configure the FTP relay on the selected GNE.
Step 11 When the Node Setup Selection for Node-Name page appears, complete the following steps. If not,
continue with Step 12.
a. Choose the node profile that you want to apply to the node. The Cisco TransportPlanner XML file
contains profiles for all nodes in the network. Choose the profile that applies to the node you are
provisioning.
b. Click Next.
Step 12 On the Node Setup for node name page, choose one or more of the following:
• Node Layout—Preprovisions the slots in each shelf in CTC for the cards defined in the network
plan. Choose this option when no DWDM cards are installed. (Errors will occur if cards are installed
or the slots are preprovisioned.) Preprovisioning the slots before the physical cards are installed 4-51
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
ensures that card installers place the cards in the correct slots. Preprovisioning the slots is also useful
if you want to set up the network prior to card installation. The node layout also preprovisions the
chassis and passive units.
• Card Parameters—If checked, provisions the following parameters, if the cards are installed.
– TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP
cards—Provisions the OTN and FEC parameters.
– OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
cards—Provisions the card mode.
• Pluggable Port Modules— If checked, allows the provisioning of PPMs on TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP cards, including PPM payloads.
• Internal Patchcords—If checked, allows creation of internal patchcords among cards provisioned in
the node.
• Optical Sides—If checked, allows the provisioning of optical sides.
• ANS Parameters—If checked, installs the ANS parameters. ANS parameters provision the values
required for the node to function within the specified network design. ANS parameters include span
losses, optical power, optics thresholds, amplifier working mode, gain, tilt, and many others. Refer
to the “Node Reference” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual for a list of
ONS 15454 ANS parameters.
Note If you are importing the Cisco TransportPlanner configuration file for the first time, you
normally choose all available options.
• Skip Interactive Mode—If checked, CTC provisions all the chosen setup components automatically
without allowing you to view the results after each one.
• Save Installation Files (XML and log) On Node—If checked, CTC saves the XML and log files on
the node.
Step 13 Click Next. If you chose Skip Interactive Mode, continue with Step 14. If not, the wizard page that
appears depends on the options chosen in Step 12: Complete the steps shown in Table 4-2 for each
option.4-52
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Table 4-2 NE Update Wizard Options
NE Update Function
Node/Shelves Layout View the cards and slots on the left side of the page and verify that they are the same as the layout in
the Cisco TransportPlanner Shelf Layout (see Table 4-1 on page 4-4). If the cards and slots match,
click Apply. If not, click Cancel. and contact your next level of support to verify that you have the
correct node setup file. If the site has a multishelf configuration, click Next and repeat this step for
each shelf at the site.
CTC preprovisions the slots. (This might take a few seconds.) The results appear in the Log window.
Slots that are successfully provisioned display an “Applied” status. A “Slot not empty” status appears
if slots cannot be provisioned because a card is physically installed or the slot is already provisioned.
If this occurs, complete the following steps. Otherwise, continue with the next NE Update function.
1. Click Cancel, then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box. The slot preprovisioning does not
revert when you click Cancel.
2. If a physical card is installed, remove it from the shelf.
3. Perform one of the following steps:
– Delete all the preprovisioned slots using the “DLP-G351 Delete a Card in CTC” task on
page 4-53, then repeat Steps 2 through Step 13.
– Delete the slot where the Slot Not Empty error occurred using the “DLP-G351 Delete a Card
in CTC” task on page 4-53. Complete the “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on page 4-55
to provision the slot manually, then repeat Steps 2 through 13 making sure to uncheck the
Provision Node Layout option in Step 12.
Note When you preprovision a slot, the card is purple in the CTC shelf graphic and “NP” (not
present) appears on the card. After the physical card is installed, the card changes to white and
“NP” is removed from the CTC shelf graphic.
Passive Units Layout 1. Review the passive unit settings.
2. Click Apply.
3. Click Next.
Pluggable Port Modules 1. Review the PPM settings for each TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, and
OTU2_XP card.
2. Click Apply.
3. Click Next.
Card Parameters 1. Review the OTN, FEC, and card mode settings for each TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, and OTU2_XP card.
2. Click Apply.
3. Click Next.
Internal Patchcords 1. Review the internal patchcords.
2. Click Apply.
3. Click Next.4-53
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 14 Click Finish, then click OK in the Wizard Complete confirmation dialog box. The confirmation box
indicates whether the xml import process was completed successfully.
Note Common control cards are not provisioned by Cisco TransportPlanner.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G351 Delete a Card in CTC
Step 1 Verify that the following conditions are not present. (During node turn-up, these conditions are normally
not present):
• The card is a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card.
• The card is part of a protection group.
• The card has optical channels or overhead circuits provisioned.
• The card is being used for timing.
• The card has an OSC/GCC termination.
Optical Sides 1. Review the optical side assignments.
2. Click Apply.
3. Click Next.
ANS Parameters 1. Review the ANS parameters on the left half of the page.
c. Click Apply. The log file displays the results. At the end, a Done status will appear. If a parameter
could not be applied, a Setting Refused status appears. If this occurs, contact your next level of
support.
Select All 1. If checked, selects all the options.
Skip Interactive Mode If checked, CTC provisions all the chosen setup components automatically without allowing you to
view the results after each one.
Save Installation Files
(XML and log) On
Node
If checked, CTC saves the XML and log files on the node.
Table 4-2 NE Update Wizard Options
NE Update Function
Purpose This task deletes a card from an ONS 15454 slot that is provisioned in
CTC.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-54
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• A port on the card is being used for a Link Management Protocol (LMP) channel or link.
• The card is part of an optical side.
• The card is assigned to DWDM patchcords.
• If a port on the card is in service.
• If a port on the card is part of a circuit.
If any of these conditions exist, do not continue. You will not be able to delete the card until the card is
removed from protection groups; circuits, DCC, and GCCs are deleted; a different timing source is
provisioned, and the LMP link or channel is deleted.
• To replace a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card, refer to the Cisco
ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
• To delete a protection group, see the “NTP-G83 Modify or Delete Card Protection Settings”
procedure on page 11-40.
• To delete optical channels see the “DLP-G347 Delete Optical Channel Client Connections” task on
page 8-11 and the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 8-26; to
delete overhead circuits, see the “DLP-G112 Delete Overhead Circuits” task on page 8-68.
• To remove the card as a timing source, see the “NTP-G87 Change Node Timing Parameters”
procedure on page 11-53.
• To remove OSC or GCC terminations, see the “NTP-G85 Modify or Delete OSC Terminations,
DCC/GCC Terminations, and Provisionable Patchcords” procedure on page 11-48.
• To delete LMP channels or links, see “NTP-G164 Configure Link Management Protocol” procedure
on page 7-35.
• To remove a DWDM patchcord, see the “DLP-G355 Delete an Internal Patchcord” procedure on
page 4-123.
• To remove an optical side, see the “DLP-G480 Delete an Optical Side” procedure on page 4-125.
Step 2 On the shelf graphic in CTC, right-click the card that you want to remove and choose Delete Card.
Note A deleted card no longer reboots and reappears in CTC after R5.0.
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). 4-55
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), right-click an empty slot where
you will install a card.
Step 2 From the Add Card shortcut menu, choose the card type that will be installed based on the
Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout (see Table 4-1 on page 4-4). Only cards that can be installed in the
slot appear in the Add Card shortcut menu. Table 4-3 shows the Add Card shortcut menu items and
submenu items, and the card groups and menu options/cards that they reference.
Purpose This task preprovisions a ONS 15454 slot in CTC. Preprovisioning of all
the slots in the shelf is normally performed when you complete the
“NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration
File” procedure on page 4-49. Use this task if you need to manually
preprovision a slot. All slot preprovisioning must be based upon the Cisco
TransportPlanner shelf layout prepared for your site.
Tools/Equipment Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout table or JPG file.
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-56
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Table 4-3 CTC Add Card Shortcut Menu for DWDM Cards
Menu Item
Submenu
Category Card Group Submenu Item 1 Submenu Item 2 Cards
DWDM nXP Transponder and
Muxponder
— 10GE_XP 10GE_XP
— 10GE_XPE 10GE_XPE
— OTU2_XP OTU2_XP
— ADM-10G ADM-10G
— GE_XP GE_XP
— GE_XPE GE_XPE
— MXPP_MR_2.5G MXPP_MR_2.5G
— MXP_2.5G_10E MXP_2.5G_10E
MXP_2.5G_10E_C
MXP_2.5G_10E_L
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C
— MXP_2.5G_10G MXP_2.5G_10G
— MXP_MR_10DME MXP_MR_10DME_C
MXP_MR_10DME_L
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C
— MXP_MR_2.5G MXP_MR_2.5G
— TXPP_MR_2.5G TXPP_MR_2.5G
— TXP_MR_10E TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_C
— TXP_MR_10G TXP_MR_10G
— TXP_MR_2.5G TXP_MR_2.5G
— 40G-MXP-C 40G-MXP-C4-57
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DWDM MD Multiplexer and
Demultiplexer
C Band 32 DMXO 32DMX-O
40 WSS 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE
32 MUXO 32MUX-O
32 WSS 32WSS
4MD 4MD-xx.x
32 DMX 32DMX
40-MUX-C 40-MUX-C
32 MUXO 32MUX-O
40-DMX-C, or
40-DMX-CE
40-DMX-C, or
40-DMX-CE
L Band 32 WSS L 32WSS-L
32 DMXL 32DMX-L
MESH — C Band 40 WXC 40-WXC-C
80 WXC 80-WXC-C
40 SMR1 C 40-SMR1-C
40 SMR2 C 40-SMR2-C
OSC Optical Service
Channel
— MMU MMU
— OSC-CSM OSC-CSM
OADM Optical Add/Drop
Multiplexer
— AD-1B AD-1B-xx.x
— AD-1C AD-1C-xx.x
— AD-2C AD-2C-xx.x
— AD-4B AD-4B-xx.x
— AD-4C AD-4C-xx.x
Ampli Optical Amplifier C Band OPT-BST E OPT-BST-E
OPT-AMP-17 OPT-AMP-17-C
OPT-RAMP-C OPT-RAMP-C
OPT-RAMP-CE OPT-RAMP-CE
OPT-AMP C OPT-AMP-C
OPT-BST OPT-BST
OPT-PRE OPT-PRE
L Band OPT-BST L OPT-BST-L
OPT-AMP L OPT-AMP-L
OTHER — — PSM PSM
Ethernet — — — MS-ISC-100T MS-ISC-100T
G1000 G1000
Table 4-3 CTC Add Card Shortcut Menu for DWDM Cards (continued)
Menu Item
Submenu
Category Card Group Submenu Item 1 Submenu Item 2 Cards4-58
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note When you preprovision a slot, the card appears purple in the CTC shelf graphic (the card appears
as white when a card is installed in the slot). NP on the card graphic indicates that the card is not
physically installed.
Step 3 Repeat Step 2 until all the cards shown in the Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout are provisioned in
CTC.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
OSCM — — — — OSCM (Slots 8 and 10 only)
TNC
TSC
— Control Cards — — TNC and TSC
Table 4-3 CTC Add Card Shortcut Menu for DWDM Cards (continued)
Menu Item
Submenu
Category Card Group Submenu Item 1 Submenu Item 2 Cards4-59
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G320 Configure the Node as a Non-DWDM Network
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Step 2 From the Selector area, select Network Type.
Step 3 Choose Not-DWDM, from the Value drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs.
Step 5 Click the Launch ANS button. The relevant ports in the node will be in IS state.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G693 Configure the Amplifier
Step 1 Display the amplifier card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Select the working mode from the Card Working Mode drop-down list.
Step 4 Change to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), then click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Step 5 From the Selector area, select the amplifier slot. If the default parameters are present, continue with
Step 6. If not, click Add to add the Channel LOS Threshold, Amplifier Tilt, Power, and Amplifier
Working Mode parameters. To add the ANS parameters, see the “DLP-G541 Add an ANS Parameter”
task on page 4-62 for instructions.
Purpose This tasks configures a node as a Non-DWDM network.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task configures the optical parameters and threshold values of the
amplifier card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-60
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 6 Click the value of the ANS parameter that you want to modify and enter the new value specified in
Table 4-4.
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Click the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs.
Step 9 Click Launch ANS.
Step 10 In the Apply Launch ANS dialog box, click Yes.
Step 11 In the Launch ANS confirmation dialog box, click OK.
Step 12 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Step 13 Verify the following in the Results column:
• Success - Changed —The parameter has been successfully changed with the ports in IS.
Step 14 Verify that the Set By column displays t he value “ANS” or “APC” as the application that sets the
ANS parameter.
Step 15 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G694 Configure the PSM
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Step 2 From the Selector area, select the PSM slot. If the default parameters are present, continue with Step 3.
If not, click Add to add the Channel LOS Threshold and VOA Attenuation parameters. To add the ANS
parameters, see the “DLP-G541 Add an ANS Parameter” task on page 4-62 for instructions.
Table 4-4 Values for the ANS Parameters (amplifier)
Port ANS Parameter Value
Slot 16 (OPT-AMP C).Port COM-RX Channel LOS Threshold 35.0 dBm
Slot 16 (OPT-AMP C).Port LINE-TX Amplifier Working Mode Control Gain
Slot 16 (OPT-AMP C).Port LINE-TX Amplifier Tilt 0.0 dB
Slot 16 (OPT-AMP C).Port LINE-TX Power 1.0 dBm
Purpose This tasks configures the PSM behavior.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-61
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 3 Click the value of the ANS parameter that you want to modify and enter the new value specified in
Table 4-4.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs.
Step 6 Click Launch ANS.
Step 7 In the Apply Launch ANS dialog box, click Yes.
Step 8 In the Launch ANS confirmation dialog box, click OK.
Step 9 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Step 10 Verify the following in the Results column:
• Success - Changed —The parameter has been successfully changed with the ports in IS.
Step 11 Verify that the Set By column displays t he value “ANS” or “APC” as the application that sets the
ANS parameter.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G328 Add and Delete ANS Parameters
Note It is recommended that you use the Cisco TransportPlanner XML configuration file to provision the ANS
parameters instead of manually adding all the parameters in CTC. ANS provisioning parameters must
be manually changed only by Cisco qualified personnel. Setting wrong ANS provisioning (either as
preamplifier or booster input power thresholds) may impact traffic.
Table 4-5 Values for the ANS Parameters (PSM)
Port ANS Parameter Value
Slot 14(PSM).Port W-RX VOA Attenuation 3.0 dB
Slot 14(PSM).Port W-RX Channel LOS Threshold 15.0 dB
Slot 14(PSM).Port P-RX VOA Attenuation 10.0 dB
Slot 14(PSM).Port P-RX Channel LOS Threshold 20.0 dB
Purpose This procedure allows you to add or delete ANS parameters for a DWDM
node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher 4-62
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to add or delete
ANS parameters. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the following tasks:
• Complete the “DLP-G541 Add an ANS Parameter” task on page 4-62.
• Complete the “DLP-G542 Delete an ANS Parameter” task on page 4-63.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G541 Add an ANS Parameter
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Step 2 Click Add. The Add ANS Parameter dialog box appears.
Step 3 Select the ANS parameter from the Parameter drop-down list.
Step 4 In the Port Selection area, complete the following fields:
• Type—Displays the card type.
• Shelf—Choose the shelf from the drop-down list.
• Slot— Choose the card from the Slot drop-down list. The drop-down list lists all the cards that
support the ANS parameter selected in Step 3.
• Port—Choose the port from the Port drop-down list. The drop-down list lists all the ports for the
card selected in Step 4 that support the ANS parameter selected in Step 3.
Step 5 Type or choose the value for the ANS parameter in the Value field.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This tasks adds an ANS parameter.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-63
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G542 Delete an ANS Parameter
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Step 2 Click the ANS parameter you want to remove.
Note Only threshold related ANS parameters can be removed if the port is in service state.
Step 3 Click Remove, and then Yes.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This tasks removes an ANS parameter.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher 4-64
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards
Warning This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you
work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar
with standard practices for preventing accidents. To see translations of the warnings that appear in
this publication, refer to the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information document for the
appropriate Cisco chassis. Statement 274
Warning During this procedure, wear grounding wrist straps to avoid ESD damage to the card. Do not directly
touch the backplane with your hand or any metal tool, or you could shock yourself. Statement 94
Warning Class I (CDRH) and Class 1M (IEC) laser products. Statement 1055
Purpose This procedure describes how to install the DWDM multiplexer,
demultiplexer, wavelength selective switch, wavelength cross-connect,
OADM, OSC, PSM, and optical amplifier cards.
Tools/Equipment • Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout
• The following C-band or L-band cards, as required by your site plan:
– C-band: OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, 32MUX-O,
40-MUX-C, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE,
32WSS, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C,
TDC-CC, TDC-FC, 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, OPT-AMP-17-C,
OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, MMU, 4MD-xx.x,
AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, AD-4C-xx.x, AD-1B-xx.x,
AD-4B-xx.x, OSCM, OSC-CSM, and PSM cards (as applicable)
– L-band: 32WSS-L, 32DMX-L, OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, and
PSM cards (as applicable)
• The ONS 15454 NE defaults file if the node uses custom NE defaults
Prerequisite Procedures • “NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards” in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide
• “NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
• NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
• NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update
Configuration File, page 4-49
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-65
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Warning Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector. Do
not view directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments
(for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm may pose an eye
hazard. Statement 1056
Warning High-performance devices on this card can get hot during operation. To remove the card, hold it by
the faceplate and bottom edge. Allow the card to cool before touching any other part of it or before
placing it in an antistatic bag. Statement 201
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge (ESD) wristband when working with a powered
ONS 15454. For detailed instructions on how to wear the ESD wristband, refer to the Cisco ONS
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) and Grounding Guide.
Note For United States installations, complies with the United States Federal Drug Administration Code of
Federal Regulations Title 21, Sections 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser
Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.
Note If protective clips are installed on the backplane connectors of the cards, remove the clips before
installing the cards.
Note If you install a card incorrectly, the FAIL LED flashes continuously.
Step 1 If the node requires a custom NE default settings to be installed on the node, complete the “NTP-G136
Import Network Element Defaults” procedure on page 14-51. If not, continue with Step 2. (For
information about the ONS 15454 NE defaults, refer to the “Network Elements Defaults” appendix in
the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.)
Caution If custom NE defaults are required, they must be installed before you install the DWDM cards.
Step 2 Verify that you have one of the following guides for the DWDM card installation:
• The slots that were preprovisioned when you completed the “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco
TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration File” procedure on page 4-49.
• The Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout report (see Table 4-1 on page 4-4).
Step 3 If the slots are preprovisioned, continue with Step 4. If you are using the Cisco TransportPlanner shelf
layout report, complete the “DLP-G348 Use the Cisco TransportPlanner Shelf Layout Report” task on
page 4-66.
Step 4 Remove a DWDM card from its packaging, then remove the protective caps from the backplane
connectors. (Safety caps are typically yellow.)
Step 5 Open the card latches/ejectors. 4-66
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 6 Use the latches/ejectors to firmly slide the card along the slot guide rails until the card plugs into the
receptacle at the back of the slot. The correct slot is designated by the Cisco TransportPlanner shelf
layout.
Step 7 Verify that the card is inserted correctly. Simultaneously close the latches/ejectors on the card.
Note It is possible to close the latches/ejectors when the card is not completely plugged in. Ensure
that you cannot insert the card any further.
After installing the card, the following LED activity will occur:
• The card’s LEDs will go through a sequence of activities (turn on, turn off, blinking.) This will take
2 to 3 minutes.
• The ACT LED turns on.
• The signal fail (SF) LED might persist until all card ports connect to their far-end counterparts and
a signal is present.
Step 8 If the card does not boot up properly, or the LED activity is not similar to the activity in Step 7, check
the following:
• When a physical card type does not match the type of card provisioned for that slot in CTC, the card
might not boot. If a DWDM card does not boot, open CTC and ensure that the slot is not provisioned
for a different card type before assuming that the card is faulty.
• If the red FAIL LED does not turn on, check the power.
• If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card, all LEDs turn off and a minor
equipment mismatch alarm appears on the CTC Alarms tab.
• If the red FAIL LED is on continuously or the LEDs behave erratically, the card is not installed.
If any of conditions are present, remove the card and repeat Steps 4 to 7. If the card does not boot up
properly the second time, it might be defective. Contact your next level of support.
Step 9 Repeat Steps 5 through 8 until all the DWDM cards are installed in the node.
Step 10 If an OPT-PRE card (or the OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, or OPT-AMP-C card in OPT-PRE card
mode) are installed, complete one of the following steps for each OPT-PRE card based on the Cisco
TransportPlanner shelf layout. If an OPT-PRE is not installed, you have completed this procedure.
• If the Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout does not include DCUs, install a patchcord and 4-dB
attenuator with a tolerance of +/–1 dB between the OPT-PRE or OPT-AMP-L DC TX and RX ports
for each OPT-PRE or OPT-AMP-L card installed in the shelf.
• If the shelf layout includes DCUs, complete the “NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion
Compensating Units” procedure on page 4-67 for each side of the shelf that requires a DCU.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G348 Use the Cisco TransportPlanner Shelf Layout Report
Purpose This task describes how to use the Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout
report to install cards in a DWDM node.
Tools/Equipment None4-67
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 1 Display the Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout report for your site. The report can be viewed in
Cisco TransportPlanner. It can also be viewed as a JPEG graphic. Refer to the Cisco TransportPlanner
DWDM Operations Guide for information about generating shelf layout reports.
Step 2 Review the following installation information:
• Rack—Indicates the rack in the node where the cards must be installed.
• Shelf—Indicates the shelf in the rack where the cards must be installed. Shelf options include:
– Flex Shelf—The ONS 15216 FlexLayer mechanical shelf houses Y-cable modules. Flex shelf
positions are numbered 1 to 4 from left to right.
– DCU Shelf—The Cisco ONS 15216 dispersion compensation shelf assembly houses DCUs.
DCU positions are numbered 1 to 2 from left to right.
– Shelf-ANSI-n or Shelf-ETSI-n—The ONS 15454 shelf assembly houses ONS 15454 common,
DWDM, and client cards. Positions in this type of shelf are numbered 1 to 17 from left to right.
Multiple shelves might appear.
• Slot—Indicates the slot in the specific shelf where the cards must be installed:
– Unit Name (Product ID)— Identifies the card by its Product ID.
– Unit Description—Identifies the card by its name.
• Unit Side—Identifies the side of the node that the specific card is serving: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, or H.
• Unit Plug-in Modules—Identifies the type and number of PPMs that will be used with specific TXP,
MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards.
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This procedure describes how to install the DCUs for DWDM shelves.
Tools/Equipment DCUs
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
“NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide
NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 4-64
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-68
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Warning Class I (CDRH) and Class 1M (IEC) laser products. Statement 1055
Warning Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector. Do
not view directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments
(for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm may pose an eye
hazard. Statement 1056
Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. For detailed
instructions on how to wear the ESD wristband, refer to the Cisco ONS Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
and Grounding Guide.
Note For US installations, complies with the US Federal Drug Administration Code of Federal Regulations
Title 21, Sections 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated
July 26, 2001.
Step 1 Remove the DCU from its packaging, then remove the protective caps from the connectors. (Safety caps
are typically yellow.)
Step 2 Use both hands to push the DCU all the way into the chassis until the connector spring lock on the right
side of the module clicks into place.
Step 3 Open the cover with the laser warning on the connector adapter and then connect the cable connector.
Note The Side A DCU is commonly installed on the left side and the Side B DCU is commonly
installed on the right side.
Note Double-check the placement of the DCU card(s) with your Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout.
If you install the wrong DCU in a slot, remove the DCU and install the correct one.
Stop. You have completed this procedure. 4-69
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards
Warning During this procedure, wear grounding wrist straps to avoid ESD damage to the card. Do not directly
touch the backplane with your hand or any metal tool, or you could shock yourself. Statement 94
Warning Class 1 laser product. Statement 1008
Warning Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector. Do
not view directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments
(for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm may pose an eye
hazard. Statement 1056
Warning Class I (CDRH) and Class 1M (IEC) laser products. Statement 1055
Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. For detailed
instructions on how to wear the ESD wristband, refer to the Cisco ONS Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
and Grounding Guide.
Caution A fan-tray assembly (15454E-CC-FTA for the ETSI shelf or 15454-CC-FTA for the ANSI shelf) must
be installed in a shelf where a GE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card is installed.
Purpose This procedure describes how to install the ONS 15454 TXP, MXP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP
cards.
Tools/Equipment TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L,
TXP_MR_10EX_C, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXPP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, MXP_MR_2.5G,
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, MXP_MR_10DMEX_C,
40G-MXP-C, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP cards (as applicable)
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
“NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-70
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note For US installations, complies with the US Federal Drug Administration Code of Federal Regulations
Title 21, Sections 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated
July 26, 2001.
Note If protective clips are installed on the backplane connectors of the cards, remove the clips before
installing the cards.
Note If you install a card incorrectly, the FAIL LED flashes continuously.
Step 1 Display the Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout (see Table 4-1 on page 4-4) for the node where you will
install the card.
Step 2 Remove the card from its packaging, then remove the protective clips from the backplane connectors.
Step 3 Open the card latches/ejectors.
Step 4 Use the latches/ejectors to firmly slide the card along the guide rails until the card plugs into the
receptacle at the back of the slot designated by the Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout.
Step 5 Verify that the card is inserted correctly and simultaneously close the latches/ejectors on the card.
Note It is possible to close the latches and ejectors when the card is not completely plugged into the
backplane. Ensure that you cannot insert the card any further.
Note If you install the card in the wrong slot, CTC will raise a MEA (EQPT) alarm. To clear this
alarm, open the latches, slide the card out, then insert it in the correct slot.
After you install the card, the FAIL, ACT, and SF LEDs will go through a sequence of activities. They
will turn on, turn off, and blink at different points. After approximately 2 to 3 minutes, the ACT or
ACT/STBY LED turns on. The SF LED might persist until all card ports connect to their far-end
counterparts and a signal is present.
Note Until a card is provisioned, the card is in the standby condition and the ACT/STBY LED remains
amber in color.
Step 6 If the card does not boot up properly or the LEDs do not progress through the activities described in
Step 5, check the following:
• When a physical card type does not match the type of card provisioned for that slot in CTC, the card
might not boot and CTC will show a MEA (EQPT) alarm. If the card does not boot, open CTC and
ensure that the slot is not provisioned for a different card type before assuming that the card is faulty.
• If the red FAIL LED does not turn on, check the power.
• If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card, all LEDs turn off.
• If the red FAIL LED is on continuously or the LEDs behave erratically, the card is not installed
properly.4-71
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
If any of these conditions are present, remove the card and repeat Steps 3 to 5. If the card does not boot
up properly the second time, contact your next level of support.
Step 7 If the card requires a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP) connector, complete one of the
following tasks:
• DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 4-71—Complete this task to install the physical SFP or XFP
into the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card.
• DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot, page 4-73—(Optional) Complete this task if you do
not have the physical SFP or XFP and need to preprovision the SFP or XFP slot.
Note SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, OTU2_XP, or line card port to link the port with
the fiber-optic network. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to For more
information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual and the Installing GBIC,
SFP, and XFP Optics Modules in ONS Platforms document.
Note PPM provisioning determines how the SFPs and XFPs are used in CTC. PPM provisioning
procedures are provided in Chapter 6, “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards.”
Step 8 If you need to remove an SFP or XFP, complete the “DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or XFP” task on
page 4-74.
Note You will provision the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP
cards after you complete all node turn-up procedures. TXP and MXP provisioning procedures are
provided in Chapter 6, “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards.”
Note Until a card is provisioned, the card is in the standby condition and the ACT/STBY LED remains amber
in color.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP
Purpose This task installs SFPs and XFPs into TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP cards. SFPs and XFPs
provide a fiber interface to the card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-72
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Warning The intrabuilding ports of the ONS 15454 are suitable for connection to intrabuilding or unexposed
wiring or cabling only. The intrabuilding ports of the ONS 15454 must not be metallically connected
to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as
intrabuilding interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4), and
require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient
protection while connecting these interfaces metallically to the OSP wiring.
Warning The intrabuilding ports of the ONS 15454 are suitable for connection only to shielded intrabuilding
cabling, grounded at both ends.
Note In case of a full C-band tunable XFP, it is mandatory to use optical cables that are fully compliant with
NEBS Telcordia GR-326-CORE, Issue 3 recommendation. The Cisco patchcord indicated by the Cisco
Transport Planner (CTP) tool is fully compliant with NEBS Telcordia GR-326-CORE, Issue 3
recommendation.
Note The CC-FTA fan tray assembly must be installed in a shelf where CWDM and DWDM SFPs or XFPs
are used.
Note SFPs and XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. For
more information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual and the Installing GBIC,
SFP, and XFP Optics Modules in ONS Platforms document.
Note If you have installed a fan tray lower than CC-FTA on the MSTP unit, you must have the TXP_MR_10E
transponder card (only if you have installed ONS-XC-10G-L2 XFP on the TXP_MR_10E card) installed
in Slot 5, 6, 12, or 13. This limitation does not exist for fan-tray versions higher than CC-FTA.
Note SFPs and XFPs are generically called PPMs in CTC. After installing multirate SFPs or XFPs, multirate
PPMs must be provisioned in CTC. To complete the provisioning of the pluggable port, complete the
“DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM” task on page 6-11.
Step 1 Verify that the SFP or XFP is correct for your network and TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card (see the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual for card and SFP/XFP compatibility information). Check
that you are installing compatible SFPs or XFPs, for example, SX to SX or LX/LH to LX/LH.
Step 2 Install the SFP or XFP:
• For a mylar tab SFP or XFP: Slide the SFP or XFP into the slot.
• For an actuator/button SFP or XFP: Slide the SFP or XFP all the way into the slot until you hear a
click.4-73
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• For a bail clasp SFP or XFP: Latch (flip upwards) the bail clasp before inserting the SFP or XFP
into the slot and then slide it into the slot.
Note SFP and XFPs are keyed to prevent incorrect installation.
Step 3 Do not remove the protective caps from the SFP or XFP until you are ready to attach the network
fiber-optic cable.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot
Note SFPs and XFPs are generically called PPMs in CTC. After installing multirate SFPs or XFPs, multirate
PPMs must be provisioned in CTC.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card where you want to provision PPM
settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
• PPM—Choose the PPM slot number where the SFP or XFP is installed from the drop-down list.
• PPM Type—Choose the number of ports supported by your SFP or XFP from the drop-down list.
The drop-down list displays the number of PPMs that are available for provisioning. If only one port
is supported, PPM (1 port) is the only option.
Step 5 Click OK. The newly created port appears in the Pluggable Port Modules pane. The row in the Pluggable
Port Modules pane turns light blue. The Actual Equipment Type column remains blank until the actual
SFP or XFP is installed. After the SFP or XFP is installed, the row in the pane turns white and the
Actual Equipment Type column shows the equipment name.
Step 6 Verify that the PPM appears in the list in the Pluggable Port Modules pane. If it does not, repeat Steps 3
through 5.
Step 7 Repeat the task to provision a second PPM, if needed. If not, continue with Step 8.
Step 8 Click OK.
Purpose This task preprovisions SFPs and XFPs, which connect fiber to TXP, MXP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP
cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-74
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or XFP
Note This task removes the SFP or XFP hardware. To delete the provisioning for an SFP or XFP, see the
“DLP-G280 Delete a PPM” procedure on page 6-19.
Step 1 If a fiber is connected, disconnect the network fiber cable from the SFP or XFP LC-type connector.
Step 2 Release the SFP or XFP from the slot by performing one of the following actions (depending which latch
is on the SFP or XFP):
• For a mylar tab SFP or XFP: Pull out the mylar tab.
• For an actuator/button SFP or XFP: Press the actuator/button.
• For a bail clasp SFP or XFP: Unlatch the bail clasp and swing it downward.
Step 3 Slide the SFP or XFP out of the slot.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Note Removing an SFP from the client ports of a Y-cable protection group card causes an IMPROPRMVL
(PPM) alarm. The working port raises the - CR,IMPROPRMVL,SA alarm and the protected port raises
the MN,IMPROPRMVL,NSA alarm. The severity on the client ports is changed according to the
protection switch state.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This task removes SFPs and XFPs from TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-75
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G123 Install the Filler Cards
Warning Blank faceplates (filler panels) serve three important functions: they prevent exposure to hazardous
voltages and currents inside the chassis; they contain electromagnetic interference (EMI) that might
disrupt other equipment; and they direct the flow of cooling air through the chassis. Do not operate
the system unless all cards and faceplates are in place. Statement 156
Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. For detailed
instructions on how to wear the ESD wristband, refer to the Cisco ONS Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
and Grounding Guide.
Note In an ONS 15454 shelf assembly, a filler card (Cisco P/N 15454-FILLER) can be installed in any unused
traffic or AIC-I card slots (Slots 1 through 6, 9, and 12 through 17). These cards are detected by CTC in
Software Release 6.0 and later.
Note In an ONS 15454 M6 shelf assembly, the line card fillers (15454-M-FILLER) can be installed in any
unused line card slots (Slots 1 through 7), and a control card filler (15454-MT-FILLER) can be installed
in any unused control card slot (Slot 1 or Slot 8). In an ONS 15454 M2 shelf assembly, the line card filler
(15454-M-FILLER) can be installed in any unused line card slots (Slot 2 or Slot 3). CTC does not detect
the filler card in Release 9.2; however, CTC may detect it in later software releases.
Step 1 Open the card ejectors.
Step 2 Slide the card along the guide rails into the correct slot.
Step 3 Close the ejectors.
Step 4 Repeat for any remaining unused card slots.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure explains how to install the filler cards (blank faceplates).
The filler card aids in maintaining proper air flow and electro-magnetic
interference (EMI) requirements.
Tools/Equipment Filler cards
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 4-64
NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 4-67
NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-76
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G239 Add and Delete Passive Units
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 to log in to an ONS 15454 node on the
network.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G543 Add Passive Units Manually” task on page 4-76 to manually preprovision a
passive unit.
Step 3 Complete the “DLP-G544 Delete a Passive Unit” task on page 4-77 to delete a passive unit.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G543 Add Passive Units Manually
Step 1 In the node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Passive Cards tabs.
Step 2 Click Create. The Create Passive Card dialog box appears.
Step 3 Choose the passive unit from the Card Type drop-down list and click OK.
The passive unit is installed in the first available slot in the rack.
Purpose This procedure explains how to add or delete passive units on a DWDM
node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task preprovisions passive units (patch panels and DCUs) in CTC.
Preprovisioning of the passive units is normally performed when you
complete the“NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update
Configuration File” section on page 4-49. Use this task if you need to
manually preprovision a passive unit. All slot preprovisioning must be
based upon the Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout prepared for your site.
Tools/Equipment Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout table or JPG file.
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-77
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note You can also add a passive unit in the multishelf view by right-clicking the slot inside the rack.
Refer to “NTP-G146 Add a Rack, Passive Unit, or Shelf to a Multishelf Node” section on
page 13-13.
Note If you need to view the details of the passive units that have been installed on a node, click the
Inventory tab.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G544 Delete a Passive Unit
Step 1 In the node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Passive Cards tabs.
Step 2 Click the passive unit you want to delete.
Step 3 Click Delete, then click Yes.
Note You can also delete a passive unit in the multi-shelf view. Refer to “NTP-G147 Delete a Passive
Unit, Shelf, or Rack from a Multishelf Node” section on page 13-16.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task deletes a passive unit.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-78
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs
Warning Class I (CDRH) and Class 1M (IEC) laser products. Statement 1055
Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS, Issue 5 standard, do not use optical fibers with exposed
metallic ferrules. Exposed metallic ferrules may result in ESD damage to the system and can be service
affecting.
Note For US installations, complies with the US Federal Drug Administration Code of Federal Regulations
Title 21, Sections 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated
July 26, 2001.
Note In this procedure, you will generally connect fibers in an Side B-to-Side A or Side B-to-Side B pattern
only. “Side A” refers to cards and ports in Slots 1 through 8. “Side B” refers to cards and ports installed
in Slots 10 through 17.
Note You will install fiber-optic cables on TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G,
and OTU2_XP cards later in the chapter during the “NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between
Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes” procedure on page 4-82.
Step 1 Refer to the “DLP-G349 Use the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report” task on
page 4-80 to install cables to the DWDM cards.
Step 2 Verify that the appropriate fiber optic cables are available to complete the connections shown in the
Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections report:
a. Count the number of connections listed in the Internal Connections and verify that you have the
same number of cables.
b. Measure the distance between Origination Position and Destination Position for each connection,
then verify that the fiber lengths will fit each one.
Purpose This procedure attaches fiber-optic cables on the DWDM cards and DCUs.
Tools/Equipment Fiber-optic cables
Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 4-64
NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 4-67
(as applicable)
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-79
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 3 Complete the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 for all fiber connections,
even new fiber. Dust particles can degrade performance. Put caps on any fiber connectors that are not
used.
Step 4 On the front of the fiber-storage tray (usually installed below the node you are fibering), push the tabs
on the left and right sides inward to release the lock on the tray.
Step 5 Pull the fiber-storage tray away from the shelf until it is fully opened.
Step 6 Open the fold-down door that at the bottom of the shelf assembly to expose the cable-routing channel
(Figure 4-11).
Figure 4-11 Managing Cables on the Front Panel
Step 7 Using the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report, connect one end of the fiber cable plug
into the Origination Position.
Step 8 Route the fiber cable on the card faceplate through the fiber clip on the faceplate, if provided. (Fiber clips
are factory-attached to the faceplates of 32MUX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-O, OSCM, OSC-CSM, OPT-PRE,
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, and
OPT-RAMP-CE cards.)
Step 9 Route the fiber cable through the cable-routing channel and cutout on the appropriate side of the shelf
assembly, as necessary.
Step 10 As needed, route slack fiber-optic cable around the round cable retainers in the fiber-storage tray
(Figure 4-12).
FAN FAIL CRIT MAJ MIN
145262
Cable-routing
channel posts
Fold down
front door4-80
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 4-12 Fiber-Storage Tray
Caution When you close the fiber-storage tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must
be equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the fiber-storage tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 11 Route the fiber cable out either side of the fiber-storage tray as necessary.
Step 12 Plug the other end of the cable into the Destination position.
Note Cards display an SF LED after the OSC terminations are created (see the “NTP-G38 Provision
OSC Terminations” procedure on page 4-126) if transmit and receive fibers are not connected
correctly. For example, an RX port is connected to another RX port or a TX port is connected to
another TX port.
Step 13 Repeat Steps 4 through 12 until you have connected the intra-shelf fibers according to the
Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections report.
Step 14 To close the fiber-storage tray, push the tray back toward the rack until it locks into place.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G349 Use the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report
134609
West
entry/exit
East
entry/exit
Purpose This task describes how to use the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal
Connections report to install cables on the DWDM cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-81
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 1 Display the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections report for the node that you are provisioning.
The Internal Connections report is presented in two views, a patchcord installation view and a software
provisioning view. The Patchcord installation view lists all the patchcord connections that the installer
has to mechanically cable within the site between the different ports of the DWDM cards. The SW
Provisioning view contains all the connections to be manually set or removed via CTC with respect to
the default connections that are automatically generated by the system software running on the node.
The tables identify the patchcords that you must cable by their endpoints. Starting from the left side of
report, Position identifies the fiber origination point. The location shown in the next Position to right is
the destination point for the fiber connection. The patchcord endpoints are identified by site, assembly
shelf, slot, and port number. Information provided by the Internal Connections Software report includes:
• Name—Displays the name of the site. On the SW provisioning view, this column indicates whether
the connection was automatically set, or should be manually set or removed via CTC.
• Position—The cable origination in the format is Rack.Shelf.Slot. For example, Rack#1.Shelf
Assembly 1.Slot 2 refers to Slot 2 in shelf assembly 1(DWDM) shelf of Rack 1. Refer to the Cisco
TransportPlanner Site Dialog box for rack and shelf names and locations.
• Unit—The ONS 15454 DWDM card (unit) that is installed in the Position’s slot. This is where the
patchcord originates.
• Port Number—The port number where the patchcord connection originates.
• Port ID—(Software provisioning view only) The port identifier shown in TL1 for the Position-1
connection.
• Port Label—The name of the physical port printed on the DWDM card’s front panel and shown in
CTC card view.
• Attenuator—If attenuation is required, the product ID (PID) of the bulk fixed attenuator is shown.
“Att-Lpbk-4dB” indicates that the DC TX and DC RX ports on an OPT-PRE (or OPT-AMP-L,
OPT-AMP-17-C, or OPT-AMP-C card provisioned in OPT-PRE card mode) card are to be connected
with an attenuated loopback that is shipped with the OPT-PRE card. This parameter also indicates
when an internal attenuator must be placed between the OPT-PRE DC-TX and DC-RX ports on the
when a DCU is equipped.
Note If the Attenuator field is blank, no attenuation is needed.
• Position—The cable termination in the format is Rack.Shelf.Slot.
• Unit—The ONS 15454 DWDM card that is installed in the Position’s slot. This is where the cabling
terminates.
• Port—The port number where the patchcord connection terminates.
• Port ID—(Software provisioning view only) The port identifier shown in TL1 for the Position-2
connection.
• Port Label—The name of the physical port printed on the DWDM card’s front panel and shown in
CTC card view.
• P/F—Indicates whether you must create the connection manually in CTC. A Yes appearing in this
column means that you must create the connection manually.
Caution Failure to create the required manual connections will prevent the node from turning up properly4-82
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 2 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or
ROADM Nodes
Step 1 Determine which type of node you are fibering.
The following node types require the listed equipment. The cards and patch panels should already be
installed before you begin this procedure.
• Terminal node:
– One of 32DMX-O card and 32MUX-O card, and one standard or deep patch panel tray
– One of 32WSS card and 32DMX or 32DMX-O card, and one standard or deep patch panel tray
– One of 32WSS-L card and 32DMX-L card, and one standard or deep patch panel tray
– One of 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE card and 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE card, and one standard
or deep patch panel tray
– One of 40-MUX-C card and 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE card, and one standard or deep patch
panel tray
– One 40-SMR1-C card and one 15216-MD-40-ODD,15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD (ONS 15216 40 or 48-channel mux/demux) patch panel
– One 40-SMR2-C card and one 15216-MD-40-ODD,15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD (ONS 15216 40 or 48-channel mux/demux) patch panel
Purpose This procedure routes fiber-optic cables from the DWDM optical cards in
a terminal, hub, or ROADM node to the patch panel, and from the patch
panel to TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G cards.
Tools/Equipment • See Step 1 for a list of equipment specific to each node type.
• All node types require fiber-optic cables, terminated with a single
LC-type connector on each end.
• Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections Report
Prerequisite Procedures • “DLP-G28 Install the Fiber Patch-Panel Tray” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
• “DLP-G29 Install the Fiber-Storage Tray” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
• NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 4-78
• DLP-G348 Use the Cisco TransportPlanner Shelf Layout Report,
page 4-66
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-83
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
– One 80-WXC-C card, one 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD
unit, and one 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN unit, and
one 15216-MD-ID-50 or 15216-MD-48-CM unit
• Hub node:
– Two of 32MUX-O cards and 32DMX-O or 32DMX cards, and two standard or deep patch panel
trays
– Two of 32WSS cards and 32DMX or 32DMX-O cards, and two standard or deep patch panel
trays
– Two of 32WSS-L cards and 32DMX-L cards, and two standard or deep patch panel trays
– Two of 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE cards and 40-DMX-C or 40DMX-CE cards, and two standard
or deep patch panel trays
– Two 40-SMR1-C cards and two 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD patch panels
– Two 40-SMR2-C cards and two 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD patch panels
• ROADM node:
– Two 32WSS cards, optionally, two 32DMX or 32DMX-O cards, and two standard or deep patch
panel trays
– Two 32WSS-L cards, optionally, two 32DMX-L cards, and two standard or deep patch panel
trays
– Two 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE cards, optionally, two 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE cards, and
two standard or deep patch panel trays
– Two 40-SMR1-C cards and two 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD patch panels
– Two 40-SMR2-C cards and two 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD patch panels
– Two 80-WXC-C cards and two 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD units and 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or
15216-MD-48-EVEN units and two 15216-MD-ID-50 or 15216-MD-48-CM units
• Expanded ROADM node:
– Two of 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE cards and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards, and two 40-channel
patch panel trays, preinstalled with MPO-LC cables
Note If you are using standard patch panels, you will also need eight multifiber push-on (MPO)
cables per standard patch panel. MPO cables are fiber-optic cables terminated on one end
with one MPO connector and with eight LC-type connectors on the other end. Deep patch
panel trays come preinstalled with MPO cables.
Step 2 On the front of the patch panel tray, push the tabs on the left and right sides inward to release the lock
on the tray.
Step 3 Pull the patch panel tray away from the shelf until it is fully opened.
Note The red latch inside the patch panel tray at the top left corner will automatically click and lock
the tray in the open position when you have fully opened the tray.4-84
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 4 Depending on the type of patch panel tray you are using:
• Standard patch panel tray:
– Complete the “DLP-G315 Install Fiber-Optic Cables From the 32WSS/32DMX and
32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Standard Patch Panel Tray” task on page 4-85.
– Complete the “DLP-G316 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP Cards to the Standard Patch Panel Tray” task
on page 4-89.
• Deep patch panel tray:
– Complete the “DLP-G356 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 32WSS/32DMX and
32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Deep Patch Panel Tray” task on page 4-90.
– Complete the “DLP-G357 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP Cards to the Deep Patch Panel Tray or
40-Channel Patch Panel Tray” task on page 4-97.
• 40-channel patch panel tray:
– As needed, complete the “DLP-G427 Reroute Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel
Tray” task on page 4-93 to route the MPO cables out of the right side of the tray so they can be
easily connected to cards installed on the right side of the shelf (Slots 12 through 17).
– Complete the “DLP-G428 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and
40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE Cards in an Expanded ROADM, Terminal, or Hub Node to the
40-Channel Patch Panel Tray” task on page 4-95.
• 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel:
– Complete the “DLP-G530 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, or
80-WXC-C Cards in a ROADM, Terminal, or Hub Node to the 15216-MD-40 or 15216-MD-48
Patch Panel Tray” task on page 4-99
Step 5 To close the patch panel tray, unlock it by pressing the red latch in the top left corner, and then push the
tray back toward the rack until it locks into place.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.4-85
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G315 Install Fiber-Optic Cables From the 32WSS/32DMX and
32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Standard Patch Panel Tray
Note For a ROADM or hub node, two patch panels will be used, one for Side B side and one for Side A. The
Side B 32WSS/32DMX card will connect to the Side B patch panel. The Side A 32WSS/32DMX card
will connect to the Side A patch panel.
Step 1 Choose either the Side B or Side A to cable the 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards (or the 32WSS and
32DMX cards for a ROADM node).
Purpose This task describes how to route fiber-optic cables from 32MUX-O,
32WSS, 32DMX-O, and 32DMX cards in a terminal, hub, or ROADM node
to the standard patch panel.
Tools/Equipment The following node types require the following equipment. The cards and
patch panels should already be installed before you begin this procedure.
Terminal node:
• One 32DMX-O card
• One 32MUX-O card
• One standard patch panel tray
• Eight fiber-optic MPO cables: each MPO cable is terminated on one
end with one MPO connector and on the other end with eight LC-type
connectors
Hub node:
• Two 32DMX-O cards
• Two 32MUX-O cards
• Two standard patch panel trays
• Sixteen fiber-optic MPO cables: each MPO cable is terminated on one
end with one MPO connector and on the other end with eight LC-type
connectors
ROADM node:
• Two 32WSS cards
• Two 32DMX cards
• Two standard patch panel trays
• Sixteen fiber-optic MPO cables: each MPO cable is terminated on one
end with one MPO connector and on the other end with eight LC-type
connectors
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 4-78
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-86
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 2 On the patch panel, pull up firmly on the two latches and use them to slide the patch panel up until it
snaps in place above the tray (Figure 4-13).
Figure 4-13 Using the Patch Panel Latches to Slide the Patch Panel Away from the Tray
Step 3 At the 32WSS or 32MUX-O card in the node, plug the MPO connector of an MPO cable (Figure 4-14)
into the top Add RX (30.3–36.6) port of the card. If you are connecting a subsequent MPO cable, plug
the MPO connector into the first vacant Add RX card port below the last MPO cable that was installed.
134825
Patch-panel
latches
Patch-panel
latches
MXP/TXP-DWDM
connections
MPO fan-out connections
and slack
Patch-panel
bar4-87
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 4-14 MPO Cable
.
Step 4 Route the MPO cable slack through the patch panel tray as necessary.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 5 While facing the front of the patch panel, at the rear side of the patch panel, plug the eight LC-connector
fan-out cables on the MPO cable into their corresponding connectors on the bottom row of the patch
panel. You should plug the fan-out cables from left to right (as you face the patch panel), following the
numbers tagged (1 through 8) on the cables.
Figure 4-15 shows the patch panel connectors from the rear of the patch panel tray. Figure 4-16 shows
the assigned wavelengths for each port on the patch panel, as indicated at the top of the patch panel bar.
The numbers on the patch panel bar correspond to a wavelength on the ITU grid.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
134826
MPO connector
To the Add/Drop port
on a 32WSS, 40-WSS-C,
or 32-MUX-O card
LC-type connectors
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
84-88
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 4-15 Rear View of the Patch Panel
.
Figure 4-16 Top View of the Patch Panel Bar
Step 6 As necessary, repeat Steps 3 through 5 for the remaining three Add RX ports on the 32WSS or
32MUX-O card, until all 32 LC connectors on the bottom row of the rear of the patch panel are
connected.
Step 7 At the adjacent 32DMX or 32DMX-O card in the same side of the shelf, plug the MPO connector of an
MPO cable into the top Drop TX (30.3–36.6) port of the 32DMX or 32DMX-O card. If you are
connecting a subsequent MPO cable, plug the MPO connector into the first vacant Drop TX card port
below the last MPO cable that was installed.
Step 8 Route the MPO cable slack through the patch panel tray as necessary.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 9 While facing the front of the patch panel, at the rear of the patch panel, plug the eight LC-connector
fan-out cables on the MPO cable into their corresponding connectors on the top row of the patch panel.
You should plug the fan-out cables from left to right (as you face the patch panel), following the numbers
tagged (1 through 8) on the cables.
Step 10 As necessary, repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the remaining three Drop TX ports on the 32DMX or DMX-O
card, until all 32 LC connectors on the top row of the rear of the patch panel are connected.
Step 11 For a hub or ROADM node, repeat Steps 2 through 10 to cable the other side of the shelf to the second
patch panel. For a terminal node, go to Step 12.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
134882
DEMUX connectors (TX port [drop] from the 32DMX or 32DMX-O cards)
MUX connectors (RX port [add] to the 32WSS or 32MUX-O cards)
134824
CLIENT
30.3
31.1
31.9
32.6
34.2
35.0
35.8
36.6
CLIENT
38.1
38.9
39.7
40.5
42.1
42.9
43.7
44.5
CLIENT
46.1
46.9
47.7
48.5
50.1
50.9
51.7
52.6
CLIENT
54.1
54.9
55.7
56.5
58.1
58.9
59.7
60.64-89
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G316 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP Cards to the Standard Patch Panel Tray
Step 1 At the appropriate TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP
card, plug one end of a fiber-optic cable into the TX port of the DWDM adapter.
Step 2 As needed, route slack fiber-optic cable around the round cable retainers in the fiber-storage tray.
Caution When you close the fiber-storage tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must
be equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the fiber-storage tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 3 On the DWDM (front) side of the patch panel, plug the other end of the cable into the connector on the
bottom row that corresponds to the wavelength to which the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP port is tuned. (See Figure 4-16 on page 4-88 for a view of the
wavelengths assigned to the patch panel connectors).
Figure 4-17 shows the patch panel connectors from the front of the patch panel tray.
Figure 4-17 Front View of the Patch Panel
.
Step 4 Plug one end of a fiber-optic cable into the RX port of the DWDM adapter on the TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card.
Purpose This task describes how to route fiber-optic cables from the patch panel to
TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP cards.
Tools/Equipment TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP card(s)
Fiber-optic cable(s)
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 4-78
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
134823
DEMUX connectors (to the RX ports on the TXP/MXP cards)
MUX connectors (to the TX ports on the TXP/MXP cards)4-90
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 5 On the DWDM (front) side of the patch panel, plug the other end of the cable into the connector on the
top row that corresponds to the wavelength to which the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card is tuned.
Step 6 Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for all of the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE,
ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP cards that you want to connect to this patch panel.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
.
DLP-G356 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 32WSS/32DMX and
32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Deep Patch Panel Tray
Purpose This task describes how to route fiber-optic cables from 32MUX-O,
32WSS, 32DMX-O, and 32DMX cards in a terminal, hub, or ROADM node
to the deep patch panel tray.
Tools/Equipment The following node types require the following equipment. The cards and
patch panels should already be installed before you begin this procedure.
For terminal nodes, one of the following card sets:
• One 32MUX-O card and one 32DMX-O or 32DMX card
• One 32WSS card and one 32DMX or 32DMX-O card
• One 32WSS-L cards and one 32DMX-L card
Plus one deep patch panel tray, preinstalled with MPO cables (each MPO
cable is terminated on one end with one MPO connector and on the other
end with eight LC-type connectors)
For hub nodes, one of the following card sets:
• Two 32MUX-O cards and two 32DMX-O or 32DMX cards
• Two 32WSS cards and two 32DMX or 32DMX-O cards
• Two 32WSS-L cards and two 32DMX-L cards
Plus two deep patch panel trays, preinstalled with MPO cables (each MPO
cable is terminated on one end with one MPO connector and on the other
end with eight LC-type connectors)
For ROADM nodes, one of the following card sets:
• Two 32WSS cards and two 32DMX or 32DMX-O cards
• Two 32WSS-L cards and two 32DMX-L cards
Plus two deep patch panel trays, preinstalled with MPO cables (each MPO
cable is terminated on one end with one MPO connector and on the other
end with eight LC-type connectors)
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 4-78
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-91
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note For a ROADM or hub node, two patch panels will be used, one for Side A (Slots 1 through 6) and one
for Side B (Slots 12 through 17). The Side B 32WSS/32DMX card will connect to the Side B patch panel.
The Side A 32WSS/32DMX card will connect to the Side A patch panel. The MPO cables in the patch
panel are preinstalled and routed out of the right side of the patch panel tray.
Step 1 Choose either Side A or Side B of the shelf to cable the 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards (or the 32WSS
and 32DMX cards for a ROADM node).
Step 2 On the patch panel, locate the MPO connectors (Figure 4-14 on page 4-87).
Step 3 Route the preinstalled MPO cables out of the tray to the right or left (Figure 4-18).
Figure 4-18 Deep Patch Panel Tray
Step 4 At the 32WSS or 32MUX-O card in the node, plug the MPO connector labeled 1 RX on an MPO cable
(Figure 4-14 on page 4-87) into the top Add RX (30.3–36.6) port of the card.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 5 Plug the MPO connector labeled 2-RX into the Add RX (38.1–44.5) port on the card.
Step 6 Plug the MPO connector labeled 3-RX into the Add RX (46.1–52.5) port on the card.
Step 7 Plug the MPO connector labeled 4-RX into the Add RX (54.1–60.6) port on the card.
Figure 4-19 shows the deep patch panel ports and corresponding wavelengths.
144679
LC-LC cables MPO-LC Cables4-92
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 4-19 Deep Patch Panel Port Wavelengths
Step 8 At the adjacent 32DMX or 32DMX-O card in the same side of the shelf, plug the MPO connector labeled
1 TX on the MPO cable (Figure 4-14 on page 4-87) into the top Drop TX (30.3–36.6) port of the card
(Figure 4-19).
Step 9 Plug the MPO connector labeled 2-TX into the Drop TX (38.1–44.5) port on the card.
Step 10 Plug the MPO connector labeled 3-TX into the Drop TX (46.1–52.5) port on the card.
Step 11 Plug the MPO connector labeled 4-TX into the Drop TX (54.1–60.6) port on the card.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 12 For a hub or ROADM node, repeat Steps 2 through 11 to cable the other side of the shelf to the second
patch panel. For a terminal node, go to Step 13.
Step 13 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
1532.6nm
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
1536.6nm
1531.8nm 1531.1nm 1530.3nm
1535.8nm 1535.0nm 1534.2nm
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
1540.5nm
1544.5nm
1539.7nm 1538.9nm 1538.1nm
1543.7nm 1542.9nm 1542.1nm
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
1548.5nm
1552.5nm
1547.7nm 1546.9nm 1546.1nm
1551.7nm 1550.9nm 1550.1nm
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
1556.5nm
1560.6nm
1555.7nm 1554.9nm 1554.1nm
1559.7nm 1558.9nm 1558.1nm
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
144676
1 3 2 5 4 7 6 84-93
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G427 Reroute Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray
Step 1 Carefully unwind all of the MPO cables in the patch panel tray and gently set the cables to the side of
the tray, out of the way of the internal hardware.
Figure 4-20 and Figure 4-21 show the 40-channel patch panel tray.
Figure 4-20 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray, Side View
Purpose This task reroutes the MPO cables that are preinstalled in the 40-channel
patch panel tray. The cables exit to the left when shipped; this task reroutes
the cables out of the right side of the tray. Use this task when you want to
connect these MPO cables to cards installed on the right side of the shelf
(Slots 12 through 17).
Tools/Equipment #2 Phillips screwdriver
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
1598174-94
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 4-21 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray, Top View
Step 2 Slide each of the ten LC-port adapter packs upward.
Step 3 Unscrew the two screws in the bottom left bending limiter and remove the bending limiter.
Step 4 Remove the single screw below the center of the patch panel to free the patch panel hardware.
Step 5 Slide the patch panel to the left, and reinstall the screw below the center of the patch panel.
Step 6 Install the bending limiter to the right of the patch panel by installing the two screws.
Step 7 Carefully route all of the MPO cables around the bending limiter and out the exit on the right side of the
patch panel tray.
Step 8 Slide each of the ten LC-port adapter packs downward.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
159816
Bending limiter4-95
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G428 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and
40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE Cards in an Expanded ROADM, Terminal, or Hub Node to
the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray
Note For a ROADM node, two patch panels will be used, one for the Side A (Slots 1 through 6) and one for
Side B (Slots 12 through 17). The Side B 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE card will connect to the Side B patch
panel. The Side A 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE will connect to the Side A patch panel. The MPO cables in
the patch panel are preinstalled and routed out of the left side of the patch panel tray.
Step 1 Choose either the Side A or Side B side of the shelf to cable the 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and
40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards.
Note If you are cabling cards on Side B of the shelf, you must first perform the “DLP-G427 Reroute
Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray” task on page 4-93 to route the MPO
cables out of the right side of the patch panel tray, or route the cables through a fiber storage
panel.
Purpose This task describes how to route fiber-optic cables from
40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards in an
expanded ROADM, terminal, or hub node to the 40-channel (80-port) patch
panel tray (15454-PP-80).
Tools/Equipment The following node types require the following equipment. The cards and
patch panels should already be installed before you begin this procedure.
Expanded terminal nodes:
• One 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE card
• One 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE card
Plus one 40-channel patch panel tray, preinstalled with MPO cables (each
MPO cable is terminated on one end with one MPO connector and on the
other end with eight LC-type connectors)
Expanded hub or ROADM nodes:
• Two 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE cards
• Two 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE cards
Plus two 40-channel patch panel trays, preinstalled with MPO cables (each
MPO cable is terminated on one end with one MPO connector and on the
other end with eight LC-type connectors)
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 4-78
DLP-G427 Reroute Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray,
page 4-93
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-96
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 2 On the patch panel, locate the MPO cables and connectors.
Step 3 At the 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE card in the node, plug the MPO connector labeled 1 RX on an MPO cable
(Figure 4-14 on page 4-87) into the top Add RX (30.3–35.8) port of the card.
Step 4 Plug the MPO connector labeled 2-RX into the Add RX (36.6–42.1) port on the card.
Step 5 Plug the MPO connector labeled 3-RX into the Add RX (42.9–48.5) port on the card.
Step 6 Plug the MPO connector labeled 4-RX into the Add RX (49.3–54.9) port on the card.
Step 7 Plug the MPO connector labeled 5-RX into the Add RX (55.7–61.4) port on the card.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Figure 4-22 shows the 40-channel patch panel ports and corresponding wavelengths.
Figure 4-22 40-Channel (15454-PP-80) Patch Panel Port Wavelengths
Step 8 At the adjacent 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE card in the same side of the shelf, plug the MPO connector
labeled 1 TX on the MPO cable into the top Drop TX (30.3–35.8) port of the card.
Step 9 Plug the MPO connector labeled 2-TX into the Drop TX (36.6–42.1) port on the card.
Step 10 Plug the MPO connector labeled 3-TX into the Drop TX (42.9–48.5) port on the card.
Step 11 Plug the MPO connector labeled 4-TX into the Drop TX (49.3–54.9) port on the card.
Step 12 Plug the MPO connector labeled 5-TX into the Drop TX (55.7–61.4) port on the card.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 13 Repeat Steps 2 through 12 to cable the other side of the shelf to the second patch panel.
159712
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
1557.3nm
1560.6nm
1558.1nm
1561.4nm
1555.7nm
1558.9nm
1556.5nm
1559.7nm
1546.1nm 1546.9nm 1547.7nm 1548.5nm
1542.9nm 1543.7nm 1544.5nm 1545.3nm
1539.7nm 1540.5nm 1541.3nm 1542.1nm
1536.6nm 1537.4nm 1538.1nm 1538.9nm
1533.4nm 1534.2nm 1535.0nm 1535.8nm
1530.3nm 1531.1nm 1531.8nm 1532.6nm
1549.3nm 1550.1nm 1550.9nm 1551.7nm
1552.5nm 1553.3nm 1554.1nm 1554.9nm4-97
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 14 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G357 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP Cards to the Deep Patch Panel Tray
or 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray
Step 1 Refer to the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report to connect the TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card to the proper (Side A or Side B) patch
panel. Cisco TransportPlanner designates Side A as Slots 1 to 6 and Side B as Slots 12 to 17. At the
appropriate TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card, plug
one end of a fiber-optic cable into the TX port of the DWDM adapter.
Step 2 As needed, route slack fiber-optic cable around the round cable retainers in the fiber-storage tray.
Caution When you close the fiber-storage tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must
be equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the fiber-storage tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 3 Plug the other end of the cable into the RX connector on the patch panel that corresponds to the
wavelength to which the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP port is tuned. (See Figure 4-19 on page 4-92 for a view of the wavelengths assigned to the
deep patch panel connectors or Figure 4-22 on page 4-96 for a view of the wavelengths assigned to the
40-channel patch panel connectors).
Step 4 On the patch panel tray, slide each of the ten LC-port adapter packs upward.
Step 5 Plug one end of a fiber-optic cable into the RX port of the DWDM adapter on the TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card.
Step 6 Plug the other end of the cable into the TX connector on the patch panel that corresponds to the
wavelength to which the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP port is tuned.
Purpose This task describes how to route fiber-optic cables from the deep patch
panel (32-channel) or 40-channel patch panel to TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP cards.
Tools/Equipment TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP card(s)
Deep (32-channel) patch panel tray or 40-channel patch panel tray
Fiber-optic cable(s)
Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 4-78
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-98
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 7 Repeat Steps 1 through 6 for each TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP card that you want to connect to this patch panel.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).4-99
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G530 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, or
80-WXC-C Cards in a ROADM, Terminal, or Hub Node to the 15216-MD-40 or
15216-MD-48 Patch Panel Tray
Purpose This task describes how to route fiber-optic cables from the 40-SMR1-C1
,
40-SMR2-C1
, or 80-WXC-C2
cards in a ROADM, terminal, or hub node to
the 15216-MD-40 or 15216-MD-48 patch panel tray..
1. The 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C cards can be connected only to the odd patch panel (15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD).
Tools/Equipment The following node types require the following equipment. The cards and
patch panels should already be installed before you begin this procedure.
Terminal nodes:
• One 40-SMR1-C1
and one 15216 Odd patch panel3
• One 40-SMR2-C1
and one 15216 Odd patch panel3
• One 80-WXC-C2
card, one 15216 Odd patch panel3
, and one
15216 Even patch panel4
, and one 15216-MD-ID-50 or
15216-MD-48-CM unit
Hub nodes:
• Two 40-SMR1-C1
cards and two 15216 Odd patch panels3
• Two 40-SMR2-C1
cards and two 15216 Odd patch panels3
ROADM nodes:
• Two 40-SMR1-C1
cards and two 15216 Odd patch panels3
• Two 40-SMR2-C1
cards and two 15216 Odd patch panels3
• Two 80-WXC-C2
cards, two 15216 Odd patch panels3
, and
15216 Even patch panels4
and 15216-MD-ID-50 or 15216-MD-48-CM
units
Prerequisite Procedures Install and route fiber-optic cables on the patch panel. For more
information, see the required installation guide:
• Installing the Cisco ONS 15216-MD-40-ODD and
15216-MD-40-EVEN Mux/Demux Patch Panels
• Installing the Cisco ONS 15216-EF-40-ODD and 15216-EF-40-EVEN
Mux/Demux Patch Panels
• Installing the Cisco ONS 15216-MD-48-ODD and
15216-MD-48-EVEN Mux/Demux Patch Panels
• Installing Cisco ONS 15216-MD-ID-50 Optical Interleaver and
Deinterleaver Pluggable
• Installing the Cisco ONS 15216-MD-48-CM Interleaver and
Deinterleaver Pluggable
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-100
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note For optical interconnections between the odd patch panel, interleaver and deinterleaver module, and the
even patch panel, see the “Installing Cisco ONS 15216-MD-ID-50 Optical Interleaver and Deinterleaver
Pluggable” or “Installing the Cisco ONS 15216-MD-48-CM Interleaver and Deinterleaver Pluggable”
guide.
Note For a ROADM node, two patch panels will be used, one for the Side A (Slots 1 through 6) and one for
Side B (Slots 12 through 17). The Side B 40-SMR1-C1
or 40-SMR2-C1
card will connect to the Side B
patch panel. The Side A 40-SMR1-C1
or 40-SMR2-C1
will connect to the Side A patch panel.
Step 1 Choose Side A or Side B of the shelf to route the cables from the 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, or
80-WXC-C card.
Step 2 On the 15216 patch panel1,2, locate the COM TX port and insert one end of an LC-LC cable.
Step 3 Route the LC-LC cable through the 15216 patch panel1,2 to the 40-SMR1-C1
card, 40-SMR2-C1
card, or
80-WXC-C2
card on Side A of the node.
Step 4 Connect the other end of the LC-LC cable to the ADD RX port on the 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C cards
or the AD port on the 80-WXC-C card.
Step 5 On the 15216 patch panel1,2, locate the COM RX port and insert one end of an LC-LC cable.
Step 6 Route the LC-LC cable through the 15216 patch panel1,2 to the 40-SMR1-C1
, 40-SMR2-C1
or
80-WXC-C2
card on Side A of the node.
Step 7 Connect the other end of the LC-LC cable to the DROP TX port on the 40-SMR1-C1
, 40-SMR2-C1
, or
80-WXC-C2
card.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 8 For a hub or ROADM node, repeat Steps 2 through 7 to cable the other side of the shelf to the second
patch panel. For a terminal node, go to Step 9.
Note For a ROADM node using 40-SMR2-C1
cards, you must use a special reversed MPO cable
(15454-MPO-XMPO-2=) to connect the EXP ports of the Side A 40-SMR2-C to the EXP ports of the
Side B 40-SMR2-C1
.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
2. The 80-WXC-C card can be connected to the odd patch panel (15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD) and the even patch panel (15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN ) in the
presence of interleaver and deinterleaver pluggable (15216-MD-ID-50 or 15216-MD-48-CM).
3. 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel.
4. 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN patch panel.4-101
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G185 Install Fiber-Optic Cables between Mesh Nodes
Step 1 Open the patch panel tray:
• 40-channel patch panel tray—On the front of the patch panel tray, push the tabs on the left and right
sides inward to release the lock on the tray. Pull the patch panel tray away from the shelf until it is
fully opened.
• Mesh patch panel tray—On the front of the patch panel tray, push the tabs on the left and right sides
inward to open the front door. Raise the plunger located to the right of the TEST ACCESS TX port
and pull the tray away from the rack.
Purpose This procedure describes how to install fiber-optic cables to create mesh
nodes. You must route fiber-optic cables from:
• 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C cards in a mesh node to the 40-channel
(80-port) patch panel tray (15454-PP-80)
• 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C cards in a mesh node to one of the mesh
patch panel trays (four-degree or eight-degree)
• 40-SMR2-C cards in a mesh node to the 15454-PP-4-SMR patch panel
tray.
Tools/Equipment Mesh nodes require the following equipment. The cards and patch panels
should already be installed before you begin this procedure.
• One 40-MUX-C card per side of the mesh node (up to 8 sides per node)
• One 40-DMX-C card per side of the mesh node (up to 8 sides per node)
• One 40-channel patch panel tray per side of the mesh node (up to 8
sides per node)
• One 40-WXC-C card per side (up to 8 sides per node)
• One 80-WXC-C card per side (up to 8 sides per node)
• One 40-SMR2-C card per side (up to 4 sides per node)
• One MPO-MPO fiber-optic cable per side (up to 8 sides per node)
• One LC-LC fiber-optic cable per side (up to 8 sides per node)
• One PP-MESH-4 (four-degree), PP-MESH-8 (eight-degree), or
15454-PP-4-SMR (four-degree) mesh patch panel tray depending on
the type of mesh node you want to install
Note Use the PP-MESH-4 or PP-MESH-8 mesh patch panel trays for the
40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C cards and the 15454-PP-4-SMR mesh
patch panel tray for the 40-SMR2-C card.
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 4-78
DLP-G427 Reroute Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray,
page 4-93
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-102
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G430 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C Cards in a
Mesh Node to the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray” task on page 4-102.
Step 3 Complete the “DLP-G431 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-WXC-C, or 40-SMR2-C Cards in a
Mesh Node to a Mesh Patch Panel Tray” task on page 4-104.
Step 4 Close the patch panel tray:
• 40-channel patch panel tray: Push the tray back toward the rack until it locks into place.
• Mesh patch panel tray: Raise the plunger located on the right of the TEST ACCESS Tx port and
push the tray until the plunger locks into the closed position.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G430 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C Cards in
a Mesh Node to the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray
Step 1 Choose Side A of the shelf to cable the 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C cards.
Purpose This task describes how to route fiber-optic cables from 40-MUX-C and
40-DMX-C cards in mesh node to the 40-channel (80-port) patch panel tray
(15454-PP-80). In a mesh node, one 40-channel patch panel tray is required
for each direction. The Side A 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C cards will
connect to the Side A 40-channel patch panel. The Side B 40-MUX-C and
40-DMX-C cards will connect to the Side B 40-channel patch panel, and so
forth, up to a maximum of an eight-degree mesh node (Sides A through H).
Tools/Equipment The cards and patch panels should already be installed before you begin
this procedure.
• One 40-MUX-C card per side of the mesh node
• One 40-DMX-C card per side of the mesh node
• One 40-channel patch panel trays per side of the mesh node,
preinstalled with MPO cables (each MPO cable is terminated on one
end with one MPO connector and on the other end with eight LC-type
connectors)
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 4-78
DLP-G427 Reroute Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray,
page 4-93
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-103
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note If you are cabling any cards from the right side of the shelf (Slots 12 through 17), you must first
perform the “DLP-G427 Reroute Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray” task
on page 4-93 to route the MPO cables out of the right side of the patch panel tray, or route the
cables through a fiber storage panel.
Step 2 On the patch panel, locate the MPO cables and connectors.
Step 3 At the 40-MUX-C card in the node, plug the MPO connector labeled 1 RX on an MPO cable into the top
Add RX (30.3–35.8) port of the card.
Step 4 Plug the MPO connector labeled 2-RX into the Add RX (36.6–42.1) port on the card.
Step 5 Plug the MPO connector labeled 3-RX into the Add RX (42.9–48.5) port on the card.
Step 6 Plug the MPO connector labeled 4-RX into the Add RX (49.3–54.9) port on the card.
Step 7 Plug the MPO connector labeled 5-RX into the Add RX (55.7–61.4) port on the card.
Step 8 At the adjacent 40-DMX-C card in the same side of the shelf, plug the MPO connector labeled 1 TX on
the MPO cable.
Step 9 Plug the MPO connector labeled 2-TX into the Drop TX (36.6–42.1) port on the card.
Step 10 Plug the MPO connector labeled 3-TX into the Drop TX (42.9–48.5) port on the card.
Step 11 Plug the MPO connector labeled 4-TX into the Drop TX (49.3–54.9) port on the card.
Step 12 Plug the MPO connector labeled 5-TX into the Drop TX (55.7–61.4) port on the card.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 13 Repeat Steps 2 through 12 for the remaining sides of the mesh node (Sides B through H, depending on
the type of mesh node you want to cable).
Step 14 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).4-104
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G431 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-WXC-C, or 40-SMR2-C Cards in
a Mesh Node to a Mesh Patch Panel Tray
Step 1 Choose Side A of the shelf to cable the 40-WXC-C, or 40-SMR2-C card to the mesh patch panel.
Step 2 On the mesh patch panel, locate the EXP TX A port (for PP-MESH-4 and PP-MESH-8) or EXP-A port
(for 15454-PP-4-SMR) and insert one end of an MPO-MPO cable.
Step 3 Route the MPO cable through the mesh patch panel and out to the 40-WXC-C, or 40-SMR2-C card on
Side A of the node.
Step 4 Connect the other end of the MPO cable to the EXP RX port on the 40-WXC-C, or EXP port on the
40-SMR2-C card.
Purpose This task connects fiber-optic cables from the 40-WXC-C or 40-SMR2-C
cards in a mesh node to the 4-degree (PP-MESH-4 or 15454-PP-4-SMR) or
8-degree (PP-MESH-8) mesh patch panel. The four-degree patch panel
allows up to 4 sides to be used per node, while the eight-degree patch panel
allows up to 8 sides to be used per node.
Tools/Equipment The cards and patch panel trays should already be installed before you
begin this procedure.
• One 40-WXC-C card per side (up to 8 sides per node)
• One 40-SMR2-C card per side (up to 4 sides per node)
• One MPO-MPO fiber-optic cable per side
• One LC-LC fiber-optic cable per side
• One PP-MESH-4 (four-degree), PP-MESH-8 (eight-degree), or
15454-PP-4-SMR (four-degree) mesh patch panel tray
• Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections Report
Note Use the PP-MESH-4 or PP-MESH-8 mesh patch panel trays for the
40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C cards and the 15454-PP-4-SMR mesh
patch panel tray for the 40-SMR2-C card.
Prerequisite Procedures • “DLP-G28 Install the Fiber Patch-Panel Tray” in theCisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
• “DLP-G29 Install the Fiber-Storage Tray” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
• NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 4-78
• DLP-G348 Use the Cisco TransportPlanner Shelf Layout Report,
page 4-66
• Install and route fiber-optic cables on the 15454-PP-4-SMR mesh
patch panel. For more information, see the Installing Cisco ONS
15454-PP-4-SMR Patch Panel.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-105
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note If you are connecting a 40-SMR2-C card to the 15454-PP-4-SMR mesh patch panel, skip steps
5 through 7.
Step 5 On the PP-MESH-4 or PP-MESH-8 mesh patch panel, locate the COM RX A port and insert one end of
an LC-LC cable.
Step 6 Route the LC cable through the mesh patch panel to the 40-WXC-C card on Side A of the node.
Step 7 Connect the other end of the LC cable to the EXP TX port on the 40-WXC-C.
Step 8 Repeat Steps 1 through 7 as necessary to cable Sides B through D for a 4-degree patch panel, and Sides B
through H for an 8-degree patch panel.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G191 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on Passthrough ROADM
Nodes
Step 1 Choose either the East or West side of the first shelf to cable the 32WSS card for the first ROADM node.
Purpose This procedure routes fiber-optic cables from a 32WSS card in a ROADM
node in one shelf to the corresponding 32WSS card in a ROADM node in
another shelf. The purpose of this routing is to connect East and West
intershelf ROADMs in a passthrough configuration.
Tools/Equipment Each ROADM node requires the listed equipment. The cards and
fiber-storage trays should already be installed before you begin this
procedure.
• One 32WSS card
• One fiber-storage tray
• Two 3-meter fiber-optic cables, each terminated with a single LC
connector on each end.
• Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report
Prerequisite Procedures “DLP-G29 Install the Fiber-Storage Tray” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
DLP-G348 Use the Cisco TransportPlanner Shelf Layout Report, page 4-66
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-106
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 2 Choose the corresponding West or East side of the second shelf to cable the 32WSS card for the second
ROADM node.
Step 3 On the front of the fiber-storage tray that will be used for routing the fiber-optic cable, push the tabs on
the left and right sides inward to release the lock on the tray.
Step 4 Pull the fiber-storage tray away from the shelf until it is fully opened.
Step 5 Open the fold-down door located at the bottom of both shelf assemblies to expose the cable-routing
channels for each (Figure 4-23).
Figure 4-23 Managing Cables on the Front Panel
Step 6 Plug one end of the first 3-meter fiber-optic cable into the EXP-TX connector on the first 32WSS card.
Step 7 Route the fiber-optic cable through the shelf cable-routing channel and cutout on the appropriate side of
the shelf assembly, as necessary.
Step 8 Route the fiber-optic cable through the vertical fiber guide as needed to reach the entry to the
fiber-storage tray.
Step 9 Thread the cable into the fiber-storage tray at the appropriate side and around the first bend radius
delimiter as shown (Figure 4-24).
Step 10 As needed, route slack fiber-optic cable around the slack management cable retainers in the fiber-storage
tray (Figure 4-24).
FAN FAIL CRIT MAJ MIN
145262
Cable-routing
channel posts
Fold down
front door4-107
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 4-24 Fiber-Storage Tray
Caution When you close the fiber-storage tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must
be equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the fiber-storage tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 11 Thread the fiber cable through the second bend delimiter and out the appropriate side of the fiber-storage
tray as necessary.
Step 12 Route the fiber-optic cable through the vertical fiber guide as needed to reach the second ROADM shelf
where the second 32WSS is located.
Step 13 Route the fiber-optic cable through the shelf cutout and through the shelf cable routing channel as
needed.
Step 14 Plug the end of the 3-meter fiber-optic cable into the EXP-RX port of the second 32WSS card.
Step 15 Plug one end of the second 3-meter fiber-optic cable into the EXP-TX connector on the second 32WSS
card.
Step 16 Follow Step 7 through Step 14 to connect the EXP-TX connector of the second 32WSS card to the
EXP-RX port of the first 32WSS card.
Step 17 Close the fold-down doors located at the bottom of both shelf assemblies and slide the fiber-storage tray
back into its normal locked position.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
240291
West
entry/exit
Bend radius delimiter Slack management
cable retainers
Bend radius delimiter
East
entry/exit4-108
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G141 Install Fiber-Optic Cables for Y-Cable Protection
Modules
Note Refer to the “Shelf Assembly Hardware” and “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapters in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual for more information about Y-cable protection.
Note To use Y-cable protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, the cards must be
provisioned in 10GE MXP, 20GE MXP, or 10GE TXP mode. (See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 6-8.) Y-cable protection cannot be used
for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards that are provisioned in L2-over-DWDM mode.
Step 1 As needed, complete the “DLP-G375 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on the Y-Cable Modules in the
FlexLayer Shelf” task on page 4-109.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “DLP-G376 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on the Y-Cable Modules in the Y-Cable
Module Tray” task on page 4-110.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure installs and routes fiber-optic cables from the client signal
to the Y-cable protection module (single mode or multimode), and from the
Y-cable module to the transponder node. Using one Y-cable protection
module, you can protect one client signal with two TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards, and two client
signals with four TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
OTU2_XP cards. You can use Y-cable protection modules that you have
installed in a FleyLayer shelf, or Y-cable modules installed in a Y-cable
module tray.
Tools/Equipment Fiber-optic cables
Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report
Prerequisite Procedures “DLP-G32 Install the Y-Cable Protection Modules in the FlexLayer Shelf”
in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
“DLP-G377 Install the Y-Cable Protection Modules in the Y-Cable Module
Tray” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-109
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G375 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on the Y-Cable Modules in the FlexLayer
Shelf
Step 1 Referring to the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report, install a fiber-optic cable between
a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card and a Y-cable module.
If you want to protect one client signal, connect the fiber-optic cables according to either Table 4-6 or
Table 4-7. To protect two client signals using a single Y-cable module, connect the cables according to
both Table 4-6 and Table 4-7.
Purpose This task installs fiber-optic cables from the TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards to the Y-cable modules installed
in the FlexLayer shelves, and from the Y-cable modules to the client
devices.
Tools/Equipment Fiber-optic cables
Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report
Prerequisite Procedures “DLP-G32 Install the Y-Cable Protection Modules in the FlexLayer Shelf”
in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
Table 4-6 Cable Connections for Y-Cable Protection of One Client Signal
From To (Y-Cable Port Number)
Client 1 TX port 10
Client 1 RX port 5
TXP/MXP/GE_XP/GE_XPE/10GE_XP/10GE_XPE 1 TX port 1
TXP/MXP/GE_XP/GE_XPE/10GE_XP/10GE_XPE 1 RX port 2
TXP/MXP/GE_XP/GE_XPE/10GE_XP/10GE_XPE 2TX port 6
TXP/MXP/GE_XP/GE_XPE/10GE_XP/10GE_XPE2RX port 7
Table 4-7 Cable Connections for Y-Cable Protection of a Second Client Signal
From To (Y-Cable Port Number)
Client 2 TX port 12
Client 2 RX port 11
TXP/MXP/GE_XP/GE_XPE/10GE_XP/10GE_XPE3 TX port 3
TXP/MXP/GE_XP/GE_XPE/10GE_XP/10GE_XPE 3 RX port 4
TXP/MXP/GE_XP/GE_XPE/10GE_XP/10GE_XPE 4 TX port 8
TXP/MXP/GE_XP/GE_XPE/10GE_XP/10GE_XPE 4 RX port 94-110
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 2 As needed, route slack fiber-optic cable around the round cable retainers in the fiber-storage tray as you
install cables between the Y-cable module and the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE cards (Figure 4-12 on page 4-80).
Caution When you close the fiber-storage tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must
be equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the fiber-storage tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 3 Install a fiber-optic cable between the client device and the Y-cable module where you just installed a
fiber-optic cable to the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card.
Step 4 Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for each Y-cable module you need to use for Y-cable protection.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G376 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on the Y-Cable Modules in the Y-Cable
Module Tray
Step 1 Open the drawer of the tray by pushing inward on the latches located at the left and right front of the tray.
Step 2 On each Y-cable module you will connect, use the tab to slide the module up so that it is fully extended
and easily accessible in the tray.
Step 3 Referring to the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report, install a 4-meter (13.12-foot)
fiber-optic cable (single-mode or multimode, as appropriate) between a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card and the Y-cable module installed farthest to the left. Proceed according to
the port label affixed to the front of the tray to identify the ports on each installed module (Figure 4-25).
Purpose This task installs fiber-optic cables from the TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards to the Y-cable modules installed
in the Y-cable module tray, and from the Y-cable modules to the client
devices.
Tools/Equipment Fiber-optic cables (4-meter [13.12-foot]), single-mode or multimode as
appropriate
Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report
Prerequisite Procedures “DLP-G32 Install the Y-Cable Protection Modules in the FlexLayer Shelf”
in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-111
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 4-25 Y-Cable Protection Port Label
Note You can use the label shown in Figure 4-25 to take notes as to which wavelength/port you are
connecting to each Y-cable module. “W” denotes the indicated Working port on the TXP, MXP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card. “P” denotes the indicated Protect port on the
TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card.
Note Protective covers are installed over the third and fourth ports on the Y-cable modules because
they are not used.
As needed, route slack fiber-optic cable around the round cable retainers in theY-cable module tray as
you install cables between the Y-cable module and the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE card (Figure 4-26).
Client TX
Client RX
TXP W TX
TXP W RX TXP W RX TXP W RX TXP W RXTXP W RX TXP W RX TXP W RX TXP W RX
TXP P RX
TXP P TX TXP P TX TXP P TX TXP P TX TXP P TX TXP P TX TXP P TX TXP P TX
TXP P RX TXP P RX TXP P RX TXP P RX TXP P RX TXP P RX TXP P RX
TXP W TX TXP W TX TXP W TX TXP W TX TXP W TX TXP W TX TXP W TX
Client RX Client RX Client RX Client RX Client RX Client RX Client RX
Client TX Client TX Client TX Client TX Client TX Client TX Client TX
#1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8
1446774-112
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 4-26 Y-Cable Protection Module Tray
Caution When you close the Y-cable module tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must
be equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 4 Referring to the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report, install a fiber-optic cable of
adequate length (single-mode or multimode, as appropriate) between the Y-cable module and the client
signal that you want to protect.
Step 5 As needed, route slack fiber-optic cable around the round cable retainers in theY-cable module tray as
you install cables between the Y-cable module and the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE card.
Step 6 Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for each Y-cable module you need to use for Y-cable protection.
Step 7 To close the tray, unlock the drawer from the open position by depressing the red lock at the back left of
the tray and push the tray closed.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
144678
LC-LC cables
Y cable modules4-113
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to provision the
DWDM cable connections. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration File” procedure
on page 4-49 to import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE update file.
Step 3 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcords tabs.
Note The Internal Patchcords tab does not show OPT-PRE DCU connections or span connections.
Note The number of rows in the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcords tab are created
dynamically, as per the number of sides present in a node.
Note On the 15454-M2 and the 15454-M6 shelves, you can create internal patchcords between the
TNC card and the optical amplifier cards.
Step 4 Verify that the connections in the Internal Patchcords tab match the connections in the Cisco
TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report for the DWDM cards (see the “DLP-G349 Use the Cisco
TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report” task on page 4-80). The Internal Patchcords tab will not
show OPT-PRE DCU connections or span connections.
Step 5 Complete the “NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually” procedure on page 4-114 for any
connections that require manual provisioning, for example, to create patchcords between TXP and MXP
trunk ports and OCH filter ports. If you need to delete a connection, complete the “DLP-G355 Delete an
Internal Patchcord” task on page 4-123.
Note Connections related to optical bypass circuits must be manually provisioned.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure imports the internal patchcords using the CTP XML file.
Internal patchcords can also be manually provisioned.
Tools/Equipment • Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout
• Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-114
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually
Note Use only one management interface to complete the creation of internal patchcords. For example, do not
begin the internal patchcord creation using the TL1 interface or CTP XML file and end the internal
patchcord creation using CTC.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcord tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 Choose one of the following link types for the internal patchcord:
• Trunk to Trunk (L2)—Creates a bidirectional patchcord between the trunk ports of GE_XP and
10GE_XP cards. If you choose this option, complete “DLP-G354 Create an Internal Patchcord
Manually Using the Trunk to Trunk (L2) Option” task on page 4-115.
• OCH-Trunk to OCH-Filter—Creates an internal patchcord between an optical channel trunk port on
a TXP/MXP stage card (which includes TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE,
ADM-10G, OTU2_XP, or ITU-T line cards) and an optical channel filter port on an add/drop stage
card (which includes 32MUX, 40-MUX-C, 32WSS, 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE, 32DMX, 32DMX-O,
40DMX, 40-SMR1-C, or 40-SMR2-C cards).
You can use this option to also create an internal patchcord between an optical channel trunk port
on a TXP/MXP stage card (which includes TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE,
ADM-10G, OTU2_XP, or ITU-T line cards) and the COM port on a PSM card in channel protection
configuration (where, PSM card is equipped between one TXP/MXP stage and two add/drop stages).
In this case, the Internal Patchcord Creation wizard will prompt you to create patchcords between
the working and protect ports on the PSM card and the ports on the two different add/drop stage
cards (which includes 32MUX, 40-MUX-C, 32WSS, 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE, 32DMX, 32DMX-O,
40DMX, 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, or 80-WXC-C cards). If you choose this option, complete
“DLP-G547 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OCH-Trunk to OCH-Filter Option”
task on page 4-116.
• OCH-Filter to OCH-Filter—Creates an unidirectional or bidirectional internal patchcord between a
MUX input port and a DMX output port. If you choose this option, complete “DLP-G548 Create an
Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OCH-Filter to OCH-Filter Option” task on page 4-118.
• OTS to OTS—Creates a unidirectional or bidirectional internal patchcord between two optical
transport section (OTS) ports, between two optical cards, between an optical card and a passive card,
between two passive cards, or between the TNC card and an optical amplifier card. This option also
includes OSC ports. If you choose this option, complete “DLP-G549 Create an Internal Patchcord
Manually Using the OTS to OTS Option” task on page 4-120.
Purpose This procedure creates an internal patchcord manually.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-115
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Optical Path—Creates an internal patchcord between two optical cards, or between an optical card
and a passive card. If you choose this option, complete “DLP-G531 Create an Internal Patchcord
Manually Using the Optical Path Option” task on page 4-122.
Note Manual creation of OTS/OCH to OTS/OCH internal patchcords is not required for standard
DWDM nodes. However, manual creation might be required for non-standard nodes, for
example, a hub node that has wavelength selective switches installed. In such cases, manual
creation is recommended by Cisco Transport Planner.
Note To successfully create an internal patchcord between WSS/DMX channel port and TXP trunk
port, choose the TXP as the source endpoint and WSS/DMX as the destination endpoint.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G354 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the Trunk to Trunk (L2)
Option
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcord tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 On the Internal Patchcord Type Selection page, choose the patchcord type as Trunk to Trunk (L2) and
click Next.
Step 4 On the Internal Patchcord Origination page, provision the internal patchcord origination parameters:
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord originates.
• Tx Port—Choose the TX port where the internal patchcord originates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 In the Internal Patchcord Termination page, provision the internal patchcord termination parameters:
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord terminates.
• Port—Choose the RX port where the internal patchcord terminates. CTC automatically displays the
list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Purpose This task creates a bidirectional internal patchcord between the trunk ports
of two GE_XP or 10GE_XP cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-116
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 7 Click Next.
Step 8 Review the display-only information on the Internal Patchcord Origination Reverse page. This page
shows the slot, and port that CTC will use for the opposite internal patchcord origination route.
Step 9 Click Next.
Step 10 Review the information displayed on the Internal Patchcord Termination Reverse page. This
display-only page shows the slot, and port that CTC will use for the reverse internal patchcord
termination route.
Step 11 Click Finish. The new internal patchcord appears in the Internal Patchcord table.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G547 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OCH-Trunk to
OCH-Filter Option
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcord tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 On the Internal Patchcord Type Selection page, choose the patchcord type as OCH-Trunk to OCH-Filter
option and click Next.
Step 4 On the Internal PatchcordOCH Attributes page, provision the following parameters:
• OCHNC Wavelength—Sets the OCHNC wavelength for the OCH trunk to OCH filter internal
patchcord. Use the unnamed band selection box below to display C-band or L-band wavelengths in
the OCHNC Wavelength field. Provision the OCHNC wavelength to the wavelength provisioned for
the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, OTU2_XP, or ITU-T line
card trunk port.
• PSM Protection—Select this check box if you have provisioned a PSM card in channel protection
configuration.
• Colorless—Select this check box if you want to create a colorless patchcord.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 On the Internal Patchcord Origination page, provision the internal patchcord origination parameters:
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord originates.
• Tx Port—Choose the TX port where the internal patchcord originates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Purpose This task creates a bidirectional internal patchcord between a TXP, MXP,
or XP trunk and a DWDM add and drop channel port.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-117
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 7 In the Internal Patchcord Termination page, provision the internal patchcord termination parameters:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord terminates.
• Side—Choose the side where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if you have
chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
• Rx Port—Choose the RX port where the internal patchcord terminates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 8 Click Next.
Step 9 In the Internal Patchcord Origination Reverse page, provision the internal patchcord parameters for the
reverse internal patchcord origination route:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord originates.
• Side—Choose the side where the internal patchcord originates. This field is visible only if you have
chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord originates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord originates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
Note Choose the same passive card that you chose in Step 7.
• Tx Port—Choose the TX port where the internal patchcord originates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 10 Click Next.
Step 11 In the internal Patchcord Termination Reverse page, provision the internal patchcord parameters for the
reverse internal patchcord termination route:
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord originates.
• Rx Port—Choose the RX port where the internal patchcord originates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 12 Click Next.
Step 13 Click Finish. The new internal patchcord appears in the Internal Patchcord table.
Return to your originating procedure (NTP).4-118
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G548 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OCH-Filter to
OCH-Filter Option
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcord tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 On the Internal Patchcord Type Selection page, choose the patchcord type as OCH-Filter to OCH-Filter
option and click Next.
Step 4 On the Internal Patchcord OCH Attributes page, provision the following parameters:
• OCHNC Wavelength—Sets the OCHNC wavelength for the OCH trunk to OCH filter internal
patchcord. Use the unnamed band selection box below to display C-band or L-band wavelengths in
the OCHNC Wavelength field. Provision the OCHNC wavelength to the wavelength provisioned for
the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, OTU2_XP, or ITU-T line
card trunk port.
• Bidirectional—If checked, creates a bidirectional internal patchcord.
• PSM Protection—Select this check box if you have provisioned a PSM card in channel protection
configuration.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 On the Internal Patchcord Origination page, provision the internal patchcord origination parameters:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord terminates.
• Side—Choose the side where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if you have
chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
• Tx Port—Choose the TX port where the internal patchcord terminates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 7 In the Internal Patchcord Termination page, provision the internal patchcord termination parameters:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord terminates.
• Side—Choose the side where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if you have
chosen the type as Optical Card.
Purpose This task creates a unidirectional or bidirectional internal patchcord
between two DWDM add and drop channel ports.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-119
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
• Rx Port—Choose the RX port where the internal patchcord terminates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 8 If you did not choose bidirectional in Step 4, continue with Step 13. Otherwise, continue with the next
step.
Step 9 Click Next.
Step 10 In the Internal Patchcord Origination Reverse page, provision the internal patchcord parameters for the
reverse internal patchcord origination route:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord originates.
• Side—Choose the side where the internal patchcord originates. This field is visible only if you have
chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord originates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord originates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
Note Choose the same passive card that you chose in Step 7.
• Tx Port—Choose the TX port where the internal patchcord originates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 11 Click Next.
Step 12 In the internal Patchcord Termination Reverse page, provision the internal patchcord parameters for the
reverse internal patchcord termination route:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord terminates.
• Side—Choose the side where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if you have
chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
Note Choose the same passive card that you chose in Step 6.
• Rx Port—Choose the RX port where the internal patchcord terminates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 13 Click Finish. The new internal patchcord appears in the Internal Patchcord table.
Return to your originating procedure (NTP).4-120
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G549 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OTS to OTS Option
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcord tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 On the Internal Patchcord Type Selection page, choose the patchcord type as OTS to OTS and click
Next.
Step 4 On the Internal Patchcords OTS Attributes page, provision the following parameters:
• Bidirectional—If checked, creates a bidirectional internal patchcord.
• MPO Connection—Creates all the patchcords between two MPO connectors. If this option is
checked, the bidirectional option is disabled.
• Exclude Used Port—If checked, excludes the used ports for patchcord creation. If unchecked, more
than one patchcord can be created starting from the same port.
• Grid Filter—Select the grid option from the drop-down list.
• Port Type—Select the port type from the drop-down list. The options are:
– OSC only—Cards with OSC ports and OSCM cards are available for patchcord creation. The
MPO Connection and Exclude Used Ports checkboxes are disabled and the Bidirectional option
is checked.
– DC only—Cards with DC ports and passive DCUs are available for patchcord creation. The
MPO Connection and Exclude Used Ports checkboxes are disabled and the Bidirectional option
is checked. Allows to create an internal patchcord between an optical card and a passive card.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 On the Internal Patchcord Origination page, provision the internal patchcord origination parameters:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord originates.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord originates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord originates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
• Tx Port—Choose the TX port where the internal patchcord originates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
• MPO—Choose the port where the internal patchcord originates.CTC automatically displays the list
of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose. This field is visible only if you
have chosen MPO connection in Step 4.
Purpose This task creates a unidirectional or bidirectional internal patchcord
between two optical transport section (OTS) ports.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-121
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 7 Click Next.
Step 8 In the Internal Patchcord Termination page, provision the internal patchcord termination parameters:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord terminates.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
• Rx Port—Choose the RX port where the internal patchcord terminates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
• MPO—Choose the port where the internal patchcord originates.CTC automatically displays the list
of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose. This field is visible only if you
have chosen MPO connection in Step 4.
Step 9 If you did not choose bidirectional in Step 4, continue with Step 14. Otherwise, continue with the next
step.
Step 10 Click Next.
Step 11 In the Internal Patchcord Origination Reverse page, provision the internal patchcord parameters for the
reverse internal patchcord origination route:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord originates.
• Side—Choose the side where the internal patchcord originates. This field is visible only if you have
chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord originates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord originates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
Note Choose the same passive card that you chose in Step 8.
• Tx Port—Choose the TX port where the internal patchcord originates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 12 Click Next.
Step 13 In the internal Patchcord Termination Reverse page, provision the internal patchcord parameters for the
reverse internal patchcord termination route:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord terminates.
• Side—Choose the side where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if you have
chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
Note Choose the same passive card that you chose in Step 6.4-122
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Rx Port—Choose the RX port where the internal patchcord terminates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 14 Click Finish. The new internal patchcord appears in the Internal Patchcord table.
Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G531 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the Optical Path Option
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcord tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 On the Internal Patchcord Type Selection page, choose the patchcord type as Optical Path and click
Next.
Step 4 On the Internal Patchcord Card List page, provision the following parameters:
• Card From Selection area:
– Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord originates.
– Shelf—(Multishelf nodes only) Choose the shelf where the internal patchcord originates.
– Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord originates.
• Card To Selection area:
– Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord
terminates.
– Shelf—(Multishelf nodes only) Choose the shelf where the internal patchcord terminates.
– Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord terminates.
• Choose the required patchcord from the list that CTC generates.
Step 5 Click Next to continue creating internal patchcords between cards and repeat Step 4. In the Internal
Patchcord Card List page that follows, CTC automatically populates the Card From Selection fields with
the values you entered in the Card To Selection fields in the previous page.
Step 6 After creating all the internal patchcords between cards, click Finish. The new internal patchcords
appear on the Internal Patchcord table.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task creates an internal patchcord manually between two optical cards
or between an optical card and a passive card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-123
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G355 Delete an Internal Patchcord
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcord tabs.
Step 2 Click the connection you want to delete.
Step 3 Click Delete, then click Yes.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G209 Create, Edit, and Delete Optical Sides
Note For any node type including mesh nodes, the association between the shelf, line card and side is reported
in the left top window of CTC (Vital Status Pane) in the mode view.
Note For mesh nodes, the association between sides and the 40-WXC-C cards can be found in the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcords screen.
For example:
PP-MESH, LC (A): Shelf 1, Slot 3 (40 WXC), port EXP-TX
PP-MESH, MPO (A): Shelf 1, Slot 3 (40 WXC), port EXP-RX
The above rows indicate that the:
WXC port located in Shelf 1, Slot 3 is connected to the LC connector A (Side A) on PP-MESH.
WXC port located in Shelf 1, Slot 3 is connected to the MPO connector A (Side A) on PP-MESH.
Purpose This task deletes an internal patchcord.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This procedure allows you to create, edit, and delete optical sides on a
DWDM node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration
File, page 4-49
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-124
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to provision the
optical side. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the following tasks:
• Complete the “DLP-G491 Create an Optical Side” task on page 4-124.
• Complete the “DLP-G492 Edit an Optical Side” task on page 4-125.
• Complete the “DLP-G480 Delete an Optical Side” task on page 4-125.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G491 Create an Optical Side
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Optical Sides tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 In the Create Side dialog box, enter the following:
• Side ID—Choose a side ID (A, B,C, D, E, F, G, or H) from the drop-down list.
• Line In—Choose an RX port from the drop-down list.
• Line Out—Choose a TX port from the drop-down list.
Note For a terminal node equipped with a PSM card in line or multiplex section protection
configuration, you can only choose the W-RX and W-TX ports while creating an optical side.
After you create the working (w) optical side, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card
automatically creates the protected (p) optical side involving the P-RX and P-TX ports of the
PSM card. CTC refreshes the Optical Sides tab with both the working and protected optical
sides.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task creates an optical side. For more details on optical sides, refer to
the “Node Reference” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference
Manual.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-125
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G492 Edit an Optical Side
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Optical Sides tabs.
Step 2 Click the optical side that you want to edit.
Step 3 Click Edit.
Step 4 In the Edit Side ID dialog box, choose a side ID (A, B,C, D, E, F, G, or H) from the drop-down list.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G480 Delete an Optical Side
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Optical Sides tabs.
Step 2 Click the optical side that you want to delete.
Step 3 Click Delete.
Step 4 In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to continue.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task edits the side ID of an optical side.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This task deletes an optical side.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-126
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations
Note This procedure automatically turns on any OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE cards installed in the
DWDM ring.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to provision the
OSC terminations. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Comm Channels > OSC tabs.
Step 3 In the OSC Terminations area, click Create.
Step 4 In the Create OSC Terminations dialog box, choose the ports where you want to create the OSC
termination. To select more than one port, press the Shift key (to select a range of ports) or the Ctrl key
(to select multiple individual ports).
Note The number of OSC terminations that you create depends on the node type defined by
Cisco TransportPlanner. Terminal nodes require one OSC termination. Hub, OADM, and
ROADM nodes require two OSC terminations.
Step 5 In the Layer 3 area, check the OSI box if the following conditions are met:
• The OSC termination is between the ONS 15454 and another ONS node.
• Third party NEs that use the OSI protocol stack are on the same network.
If you checked OSI, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 6.
a. Click Next.
b. Provision the following fields:
• Router—Choose the OSI router.
• ESH—Set the ESH propagation frequency. End system NEs transmit ESHs to inform other ESs
and ISs about the NSAPs they serve. The default is 10 seconds. The range is 10 to 1000 seconds.
• ISH—Sets the ISH PDU propagation frequency. Intermediate system NEs send ISHs to other
ESs and ISs to inform them about the IS NETs it serves. The default is 10 seconds. The range
is 10 to 1000 seconds.
Purpose This procedure provisions the OSC terminations. The OSC provides a
bidirectional channel that connects all nodes within a DWDM ring. The
OSC carries a supervisory data channel and synchronizes clocking at
network nodes. The OSC also carries a user data channel.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration
File, page 4-49
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-127
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• IIH—Sets the IIH PDU propagation frequency. The IS-IS Hello PDUs establish and maintain
adjacencies between ISs. The default is 3 seconds. The range is 1 to 600 seconds.
• Metric—Sets the cost for sending packets on the LAN subnet. The IS-IS protocol uses the cost
to calculate the shortest routing path. The default metric cost for LAN subnets is 20. It normally
should not be changed.
Step 6 Click Finish. Ports are automatically placed in service. The following alarms might appear in the node
view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) Alarms tab Description field. They will
remain until all the network OSC connections between the adjacent nodes are created:
• SDCC Termination Failure (ANSI) or RS-DCC Termination Failure (ETSI) on the OSCM or
OSC-CSM card
• LOS on the OC-3 port (Port 1) on the OSCM, OSC-CSM, or OPT-BST card
• OPWR-LFAIL on the OPT-BST or OSC-CSM card
Note After the OSC termination is created, the line ports are placed in service and span power levels
are checked.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup
Note ANS provisioning parameters must be calculated by Cisco Transport Planner. ANS provisioning
parameters must be manually changed only by Cisco qualified personnel. Setting wrong ANS
provisioning (either as preamplifier or booster input power thresholds) may impact traffic.
Purpose This procedure runs the Launch ANS function. Launch ANS applies the
ANS parameters (calculated in the “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco
TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration File” procedure on page 4-49)
to the node and to the ports for cards installed in the node. The applied
ANS parameters include span loss values, threshold values, power
references, and others. Launch ANS also sets the VOA references based on
the calculated power references.
Tools/Equipment The Cisco TransportPlanner Installation Parameters file
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 4-64
NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 4-113
NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration
File, page 4-49
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-128
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to run ANS. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Referring to the Cisco TransportPlanner Installation Parameters (see Table 4-1 on page 4-4), identify the
parameters that have a Yes in the Manually Set column. If there are no parameters that have a Yes in the
Manually Set column, continue with Step 6.
Step 3 In CTC, display the card where the parameter is to be manually provisioned in card view.
Step 4 Enter the specified Calibration parameter from the Cisco TransportPlanner Installation Parameters table.
Click Apply.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each parameter in the Cisco TransportPlanner Installation Parameters table
that displays Yes in the Manually Set field.
Step 6 Change to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 7 Click the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs.
Step 8 Click Launch ANS.
Step 9 In the Apply Launch ANS dialog box, click Yes.
Step 10 In the Launch ANS confirmation dialog box, click OK.
Step 11 Verify that one of the following status appears in the Result column for all the ports:
• Success - Changed—The parameter setpoint was recalculated successfully.
• Success - Unchanged—The parameter setpoint did not need recalculation.
• Not applicable—When ports are not in use.
If one of the following statuses is shown, complete the provided instructions:
• Fail - Out of Range—The calculated setpoint is outside the expected range. If this status appears, do
not continue until you have investigated and cleared the cause. This status might appear because of
an error in the Cisco TransportPlanner file. It could also appear because the insertion loss of the
installed cards is greater than the estimated insertion loss calculated by Cisco TransportPlanner. If
so, the Cisco TransportPlanner file will need to be recalculated. All of these possible causes should
be investigated. Contact your next level of support if you are unable to clear this status.
• Fail - Missing Input Parameter—The parameter could not be calculated because the required
provisioning data is unknown or unavailable. If this status appears, check if the correct Cisco
TransportPlanner file was imported.
• Unchanged - Port in IS—The parameter could not be calculated because the port is in service. This
status should normally not appear at this point in node turn-up. If it does, display the card in card
view, change the port administrative state to OOS,DSLB (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI), and
repeat Steps 6 through 11.
Note If the ports that are in service carry circuits, you must delete the circuits before you can place
the ports out of service. See the “DLP-G347 Delete Optical Channel Client Connections” task
on page 8-11, the “DLP-G418 Delete an Optical Channel Trail” task on page 8-19, or the
“DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 8-26.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.4-129
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G39 Verify OSCM Transmit Power
Note Throughout this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 6, and Side B refers to Slots 12 through 17.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to verify the
OSCM or OSC-CSM transmit power. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Disable automatic laser shutdown (ALS) on Side A or (for terminal nodes) the terminal side OSCM or
OSC-CSM card:
a. In the node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the Side A or
terminal-side OSCM or OSC-CSM card.
b. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
c. From the ALS Mode drop-down list, choose Disable.
d. Click Apply. Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 3 If an OSC-CSM or OSCM card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If not, continue with
Step 4.
a. In the node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the Side B
OSCM or OSC-CSM card.
b. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
c. From the ALS Mode drop-down list, choose Disable.
d. Click Apply. Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 4 Complete the “DLP-G314 Verify OSCM Transmit Power” task on page 4-130.
Step 5 Change ALS to Auto Restart on the Side A or (for terminal nodes) the terminal side OSCM or OSC-CSM
card:
a. In the node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the Side A or
terminal-side OSCM or OSC-CSM card.
b. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
c. From the ALS Mode drop-down list, choose Auto Restart.
d. Click Apply. Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 6 If an OSC-CSM or OSCM card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If not, you have
completed this procedure.
a. In the node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click Side B OSCM
or OSC-CSM card.
b. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
Purpose This procedure verifies that the transmit power for the ONS 15454 OSCM
and the OSC-CSM cards is correct.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 4-127
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-130
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
c. From the ALS Mode drop-down list, choose Auto Restart.
d. Click Apply. Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G314 Verify OSCM Transmit Power
Step 1 Display the OSCM card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Record the Port 3 (OSC TX) Power value: _____.
Step 4 Change to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), then click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Step 5 Record the OSC Power value under the OSCM card in the tree view.
Step 6 If the power value recorded in Step 3 is not within the range of +/– 0.5 dBm recorded in Step 5, complete
the following steps. Otherwise, continue with Step 7.
a. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs. Verify that the ALS Command is set to OSRI Off. If not, choose
Off from the drop-down list. Click Apply, then click Yes.
b. Clean the optical connections. See the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on
page 14-31.
c. Complete the following procedures:
• Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on
page 11-50.
• Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
• Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
d. Repeat Step 3 through 6. If the power level is still not within the specified range, contact your next
level of support.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task verifies that the transmit power of the OSCM card is correct.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-131
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf
Mode
Caution An optical shelf in a multishelf configuration must be provisioned as the node controller shelf and not a
subtending shelf, otherwise traffic will be dropped. If no slots are available on an optical shelf to install
the MS-ISC-100T cards needed for a node controller shelf, install and configure the Cisco Catalyst 2950.
See the “NTP-G302 Connect the ONS 15454 Multishelf Node and Subtending Shelves to a Catalyst
2950” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node that you want to configure as a
multishelf node.
Step 2 If you want to configure a shelf as the node controller, continue with Step 3. If you want to configure a
shelf as a subtending shelf, continue with Step 4.
Step 3 To set up the login node as the node controller, complete the following steps:
a. In node view (single-node mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
General > Multishelf Config tabs.
b. Click Enable as Node Controller.
c. From the LAN Config drop-down list, complete one of the following:
Purpose This procedure upgrades nodes in single-shelf mode to multishelf mode.
Tools/Equipment The node you plan to use as the node controller must be equipped with
optical units and cannot have a cross-connect card installed. Any nodes
that you plan to add to the multishelf configuration as subtending shelves
can be equipped with transponder and muxponder units. For more
information on multishelf configurations, see the “Node Reference”
chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
One of the following procedures:
• “NTP-G301 Connect the ONS 15454 Multishelf Node and Subtending
Shelves to an MS-ISC-100T Card” in theCisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide, or
• “NTP-G302 Connect the ONS 15454 Multishelf Node and Subtending
Shelves to a Catalyst 2950” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide.
• “NTP-G308 Connect the ONS 15454 M6 Multishelf Node and the
ONS 15454 M6 Subtending Shelves” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide.
• “DLP-G682 Connect the ONS 15454 M6 as the Node Controller in a
Mixed Multishelf Configuration” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only4-132
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Choose Ethernet Switch if MS-ISC-100T cards or the Catalyst 2950 switches are already
installed and configured.
• Choose Stand-Alone if MS-ISC-100T cards are not installed yet but will be in the final layout
or if this is a line amplifier or an OSC-only site. This option will allow a safe migration of the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC database when the multishelf configuration is complete.
d. Click Apply.
e. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to allow the node to reboot. The CTC view changes to
network view and the node icon changes to gray. Wait for the reboot to finish. (This might take
several minutes.)
f. After the node reboots, double-click the node. The multishelf view appears.
Note The shelf ID of the node controller is automatically assigned as 1.
Step 4 To add a node as a subtending shelf in the multishelf configuration, complete the following:
a. In multishelf view, right-click in the white space in the rack and choose Add Shelf.
b. Select the type of subtending shelf (ONS 15454 or ONS 15454 M6).
c. In the Shelf ID Selection dialog box, choose a shelf ID (from 2 to 30) from the drop-down list.
d. Click OK. The shelf appears in the multishelf view.
e. Preprovision the new shelf so that it has the same provisioning as the actual shelf that you will add
as the subtending shelf:
Caution If the subtending shelf is not preprovisioned, traffic will be lost.
• Cards, PPMs, administrative states, client and trunk port configuration—For more information
on card and port settings, see Chapter 6, “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards.”
• Timing—For more information, see the “NTP-G53 Set Up Timing” procedure on page 7-22.
• GCC—For more information, see the “DLP-G76 Provision DCC/GCC Terminations” task on
page 8-61.
f. Disconnect the cross-over (CAT-5) LAN cable from the RJ-45 (LAN) port of the ONS 15454
subtending shelf TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card in Slot 7 or Slot 11, or from the MSM port that
corresponds to the TNC/TSC card in Slot 1 or Slot 8 of the ONS 15454 M6 subtending shelf.
g. Connect your Windows PC or Solaris workstation NIC to the RJ-45 (LAN) port on the ONS 15454
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card in Slot 7 or Slot 11, or to the MSM port that corresponds to the TNC/TSC
card in Slot 1 or Slot 8 of the ONS 15454 M6 subtending shelf.
h. Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the subtending shelf.
i. Click the Provisioning > General > Multishelf Config tabs.
j. Click Enable as Subtended Shelf.
k. Select the appropriate subtending shelf (ONS 15454 or ONS 15454 M6).
l. From the Shelf ID drop-down list, choose the shelf ID that you created in Step c.
m. Click Apply. 4-133
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
n. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to reboot the shelf. The CTC view changes to network
view and the node icon changes to gray. Wait for the reboot to finish. (This might take several
minutes.)
o. Disconnect your Windows PC or Solaris workstation network interface card (NIC) from the RJ-45
(LAN) port of the subtending shelf TTC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card in Slot 7 or Slot 11, or from the MSM
port that corresponds to the TNC/TSC card in Slot 1 or Slot 8 of the ONS 15454 M6 subtending
shelf.
p. Reconnect the cross-over (CAT-5) LAN cable (disconnected in Step f) to the RJ-45 (LAN) port of
the subtending shelf TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card in Slot 7 or Slot 11, or to the MSM port that
corresponds to the TNC/TSC card in Slot 1 or Slot 8 of the ONS 15454 M6 subtending shelf.
Note The Ethernet cable must e connected to the subtended shelf TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC
card soon after this TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card completes its boot phase (when it
becomes active and its peer TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card starts rebooting).
Connecting it before the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card completes its boot phase is a
risk in the conversion process. Connecting it long time after completion of the boot phase
might affect traffic due to missing provisioning.
q. Repeat Steps a through p to set up additional subtending shelves.
Note Cisco Transport Manager (CTM) users can use the CTM NE Explorer to monitor and configure
single-shelf and multishelf nodes. When the upgrade is complete, the original individual
subtending shelves will remain the CTM network view and must be manually deleted. For
detailed information, refer to the Cisco Transport Manager User Guide, Appendix B, “NE
Explorer Information.”
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G210 Provision Node for SNMPv3
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 on the node on which you want to set up
SNMPv3. If you are already logged in, go to Step 2.
Step 2 In node view, click the Provisioning > SNMP > SNMP V3 tabs.
Step 3 Complete the following tasks as required:
• DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User, page 4-138
Purpose This procedure provisions the node to allow SNMPv3 access.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
Required/As Needed Required if you want to implement SNMPv3 on your network.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-134
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• DLP-G498 Create Group Access, page 4-139
Note A group named default_group is defined in the initial configuration. The default group has read
and notify access to the complete MIB tree.
• DLP-G497 Create MIB Views, page 4-139
Note A view named full_view is defined in the initial configuration. It includes the complete MIB tree
supported on the node.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G211 Provision Node to Send SNMPv3 Traps
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 on the node on which you want to set up
SNMPv3. If you are already logged in, go to Step 2.
Step 2 In node view, click the Provisioning > SNMP > SNMP V3 tabs.
Step 3 Complete the following tasks as required:
• DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User, page 4-138
• DLP-G498 Create Group Access, page 4-139
• DLP-G497 Create MIB Views, page 4-139
• DLP-G501 Create Notification Filters, page 4-142
• DLP-G499 Configure SNMPv3 Trap Destination, page 4-140. When you configure an SNMPv3 trap
destination, use the IP address of the NMS, and the port number on which the NMS is listening for
traps.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure provisions a node to send SNMP v3 traps.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
Required/As Needed Required if you want to implement SNMPv3 on your network.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-135
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G212 Manually Provision a GNE/ENE to Manage an ENE
using SNMPv3
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 on the node on which you want to set up
SNMPv3. If you are already logged in, go to Step 2.
Step 2 Go to network view.
Step 3 Double-click the ENE.
Step 4 Click Provisioning > SNMP > SNMP V3 > General and note the context engine ID. The is required in
Step 8.
Step 5 Double-click the GNE.
Step 6 Complete the “DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User” task on page 4-138 to create an SNMPv3 user on
the GNE.
Step 7 Complete the following tasks as needed on the ENE:
• DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User, page 4-138
• DLP-G498 Create Group Access, page 4-139
• DLP-G497 Create MIB Views, page 4-139
Step 8 Complete the “DLP-G502 Manually Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table” task on
page 4-142. Use the from Step 4, the local user details created in Step 6, and the remote user created in
Step 7.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure describes how to manually configure a GNE/ENE to allow
the NMS to manage an ENE using SNMPv3.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
Required/As Needed Required if you want to implement SNMPv3 on your network.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-136
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G213 Automatically Provision a GNE to Manage an ENE
using SNMPv3
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 on the node on which you want to set up
SNMPv3. If you are already logged in, go to Step 2.
Step 2 Go to network view.
Step 3 Double-click the GNE.
Step 4 Complete the “DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User” task on page 4-138 to create an SNMPv3 user on
the GNE.
Step 5 Complete the “DLP-G503 Automatically Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table” task on
page 4-143. Use the GNE user that you defined in Step 4 when you configure the Proxy Forwarder table.
Note When you use the automatic procedure, CTC automatically creates an ons_proxy user on the ENE,
provides ENE user details for the proxy configuration, and provides the of the ENE.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G214 Manually Provision a GNE/ENE to Send SNMPv3
Traps from an ENE using SNMPv3
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 on the node on which you want to set up
SNMPv3. If you are already logged in, go to Step 2.
Step 2 Go to network view.
Purpose This procedure describes how to automatically configure a GNE to allow
an NMS to manage an ENE using SNMPv3.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
Required/As Needed Required if you want to implement SNMPv3 on your network.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This procedure describes how to manually configure the GNE/ENE to
allow an ENE to send SNMPv3 traps to the NMS.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
Required/As Needed Required if you want to implement SNMPv3 on your network.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-137
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 3 Double-click the GNE.
Step 4 Complete the “DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User” task on page 4-138 to create an SNMPv3 user on
the GNE.
Step 5 On the GNE, complete the “DLP-G499 Configure SNMPv3 Trap Destination” task on page 4-140. The
target IP address must be the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the NMS. For the UDP Port number, use the port
number on which the NMS is listening for traps. Use the user name configured in Step 4. Also, specify
a target tag name.
Step 6 Double-click the ENE.
Step 7 Complete the “DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User” task on page 4-138 to create an SNMPv3 user on
the ENE.
Step 8 Complete the following tasks as required:
• DLP-G498 Create Group Access, page 4-139 to create a group on the ENE
• DLP-G497 Create MIB Views, page 4-139 to create a MIB view on the ENE
• DLP-G501 Create Notification Filters, page 4-142
Step 9 On the ENE, complete the “DLP-G499 Configure SNMPv3 Trap Destination” task on page 4-140. The
target IP address should be the IP address of the GNE. The UDP port number is 161. Use the user name
configured in Step 7.
Step 10 From the network view, click the Provisioning > SNMPv3 tabs.
Step 11 Complete the “DLP-G504 Manually Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table” task on
page 4-144.
The source of the trap must be the IP address of the ENE. For the field, provide the of the ENE. Also,
you need to specify the target tag defined in Step 5, and the incoming user details configured in Step 7.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G215 Automatically Provision a GNE/ENE to Send SNMPv3
Traps from an ENE Using SNMPv3
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 on the node on which you want to set up
SNMPv3. If you are already logged in, go to Step 2.
Step 2 Go to Network View.
Step 3 Double-click the GNE.
Purpose This procedure describes how to automatically configure the GNE/ENE to
allow an ENE to send SNMPv3 traps to the NMS.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
Required/As Needed Required if you want to implement SNMPv3 on your network.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-138
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 4 Complete the task “DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User” task on page 4-138 to create an SNMPv3 user
on the GNE.
Step 5 On the GNE, complete the following tasks:
• DLP-G499 Configure SNMPv3 Trap Destination, page 4-140. The target IP address must be the
IPv4 or IPv6 address of the NMS. For the UDP Port number, use the port number on which the NMS
is listening for traps. Also, specify a target tag name.
• DLP-G505 Automatically Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table, page 4-145. Use the
target tag configured in Step 4. Use the IP address of the ENE as the source of trap. The following
details are created automatically:
– A user named ons_trap_user on the ENE
– Trap destination on the ENE with an IP address of the GNE as the target IP and 161 as the UDP
port number
– Remote user details of the ENE on the GNE
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > SNMP > SNMP V3 > User tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 In the Create User dialog box, enter the following information:
• User Name—Specify the name of the user on the host that connects to the agent. The user name must
be a minimum of six and a maximum of 20 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. For TL1
compatibility, the user name must be of 6 to 10 characters.
• Group Name—Specify the group to which the user belongs.
• Authentication
– Protocol—Select the authentication algorithm that you want to use. The options are NONE,
MD5, and SHA.
– Password—Enter a password if you select MD5 or SHA. By default, the password length is set
to a minimum of eight characters.
• Privacy—Initiates a privacy authentication level setting session that enables the host to encrypt the
contents of the message that is sent to the agent.
– Protocol—Select NONE or DES as the privacy authentication algorithm.
– Password—Enter a password if you select DES.
Purpose This procedure creates an SNMPv3 user.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-139
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click OK to save the information.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G497 Create MIB Views
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > SNMP > SNMP V3 > MIB views tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 In the Create Views dialog box, enter the following information:
• Name—Name of the view.
• Subtree OID—The MIB subtree which, when combined with the mask, defines the family of
subtrees.
• Bit Mask—A family of view subtrees. Each bit in the bit mask corresponds to a sub-identifier of the
subtree OID.
• Type—Select the view type. Options are Include and Exclude. Type defines whether the family of
subtrees that are defined by the subtree OID and the bit mask combination are included or excluded
from the notification filter.
Step 4 Click OK to save the information.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G498 Create Group Access
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > SNMP > SNMP V3 > Group Access tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Purpose This procedure creates an SNMPv3 MIB view.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This procedure creates a user group and configures the access parameters
for the users in the group.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-140
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 3 In the Create Group Access dialog box, enter the following information:
• Group Name—The name of the SNMP group, or collection of users, who share a common access
policy.
• Security Level—The security level for which the access parameters are defined. Select from the
following options:
– noAuthNoPriv—Uses a user name match for authentication.
– AuthNoPriv—Provides authentication based on the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA algorithms.
– AuthPriv—Provides authentication based on the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA algorithms.
Provides DES 56-bit encryption based on the CBC-DES (DES-56) standard, in addition to
authentication.
If you select authNoPriv or authPriv for a group, the corresponding user must be configured with an
authentication protocol and password, with privacy protocol and password, or both.
• Views
– Read View Name—Read view name for the group.
– Notify View Name—Notify view name for the group.
• Allow SNMP Sets—Select this check box if you want the SNMP agent to accept SNMP SET
requests. If this check box is not selected, SET requests are rejected.
Note SNMP SET request access is implemented for very few objects.
Step 4 Click OK to save the information.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G499 Configure SNMPv3 Trap Destination
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > SNMP > SNMP V3 > Trap Destinations (V3) tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 In the Configure SNMPv3 Trap dialog box, enter the following information:
• Target Address—Target to which the traps should be sent. Use an IPv4 or an IPv6 address.
• UDP Port—UDP port number that the host uses. Default value is 162.
• User Name—Specify the name of the user on the host that connects to the agent.
• Security Level—Select one of the following options:
Purpose This procedure provisions SNMPv3 trap destination.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-141
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
– noAuthNoPriv—Uses a user name match for authentication.
– AuthNoPriv—Provides authentication based on the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA algorithms.
– AuthPriv—Provides authentication based on the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA algorithms.
Provides DES 56-bit encryption based on the CBC-DES (DES-56) standard, in addition to
authentication.
• Filter Profile—Select this check box and enter the filter profile name. Traps are sent only if you
provide a filter profile name and create a notification filter. For more information, see “DLP-G501
Create Notification Filters” task on page 4-142.
• Proxy Traps Only—If selected, forwards only proxy traps from the ENE. Traps from this node are
not sent to the trap destination identified by this entry.
• Proxy Tags—Specify a list of tags. The tag list is needed on a GNE only if an ENE needs to send
traps to the trap destination identified by this entry, and wants to use the GNE as the proxy.
Step 4 Click OK to save the information.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G500 Delete SNMPv3 Trap Destination
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > SNMP> SNMPv3 > Trap Destination tabs.
Step 2 In the Trap Destinations area, select the trap you want to delete.
Step 3 Click Delete. A confirmation dialog box appears.
Step 4 Click Yes.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This procedure deletes an SNMPv3 trap destination.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-142
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G501 Create Notification Filters
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > SNMP > SNMP V3 > Notification Filters tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 In the Create Notify dialog box, enter the following information:
• Filter Profile Name—Specify a name for the filter.
• Subtree OID—The MIB subtree which, when combined with the mask, defines the family of
subtrees.
• Bit Mask—A family of view subtrees. Each bit in the bit mask corresponds to a sub-identifier of the
subtree OID.
• View Type—Select the view type. Options are Include and Exclude. Type defines whether the
family of subtrees that are defined by the subtree OID and the bit mask combination are included or
excluded from the notification filter.
Step 4 Click OK to save the information.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G502 Manually Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table
Step 1 In network view, click Provisioning > SNMPv3.
Step 2 In the SNMPv3 Proxy Server area, complete the following:
• Select the GNE to be used as the SNMPv3 proxy server from the drop-down list.
• Select the Enable IPv6 Target/Trap check box if the nodes and the NMS stations are on an IPv6
network.
Step 3 In the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table area, click Manual Create.
Step 4 In the Manual Configuration of SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder dialog box, enter the following information:
Purpose This procedure creates SNMPv3 notification filters.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This procedure creates an entry in the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-143
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Target IP Address—Target to which the request should be forwarded. Use an IPv4 or an IPv6
address.
• Context Engine ID—The context engine ID of the ENE to which the request is to be forwarded. The
context engine ID should be the same as the context engine ID of the incoming request.
• Proxy Type—Type of SNMP request that needs to be forwarded. The options are Read and Write.
• Local User Details—The details of the local user who proxies on behalf of the ENE user.
– User Name—Specify the name of the user on the host that connects to the agent.
– Local Security Level—Select the security level of the incoming requests that are to be
forwarded. The options are noAuthNoPriv, AuthNoPriv, and AuthPriv.
• Remote User Details—User to which the request is forwarded.
– User Name—Specify the user name of the remote user.
– Remote Security Level—Select the security level of the outgoing requests. The options are
noAuthNoPriv, AuthNoPriv, and AuthPriv.
• Authentication
– Protocol—Select the authentication algorithm you want to use. The options are NONE, MD5,
and SHA.
– Password—Enter the password if you select MD5 or SHA.
• Privacy—Enables the host to encrypt the contents of the message that is sent to the agent.
– Protocol—Select NONE or DES as the privacy authentication algorithm.
– Password—Enter the password if you select DES. The password should not exceed 64
characters.
Step 5 Click OK to save the information.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G503 Automatically Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table
Step 1 In network view, click Provisioning > SNMPv3 tabs.
Step 2 In the SNMPv3 Proxy Server area, complete the following:
• Select the GNE to be used as the SNMPv3 proxy server from the drop-down list.
• Select the Enable IPv6 Target/Trap check box if the nodes and the NMS stations are on an IPv6
network.
Step 3 In the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table area, click Auto Create.
Purpose This procedure creates an entry in the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-144
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 4 In the Automatic Configuration of SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder dialog box, enter the following
information:
• Proxy Type—Select the type of proxies to be forwarded. The options are Read and Write.
• Security Level—Select the security level for the incoming requests that are to be forwarded. The
options are:
– noAuthNoPriv—Uses a username match for authentication.
– AuthNoPriv—Provides authentication based on the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA algorithms.
– AuthPriv—Provides authentication based on the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA algorithms.
Provides DES 56-bit encryption based on the CBC-DES (DES-56) standard, in addition to
authentication.
• Target Address List—Select the proxy destination.
• Local User Name—Select the user name from the list of users.
Note When you configure SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table automatically, the default_group is used on the
ENE. The default_group does not have write access. To enable write access and allow SNMP sets, you
need to edit the default_group on ENE.
Step 5 Click OK to save the settings.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G504 Manually Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table
Step 1 In network view, click Provisioning > SNMPv3 tabs.
Step 2 In the SNMPv3 Proxy Server area, complete the following:
• Select the GNE to be used as the SNMPv3 proxy server from the drop-down list.
• Select the Enable IPv6 Target/Trap check box if the nodes and the NMS stations are on an IPv6
network.
Step 3 In the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table area, click Manual Create.
Step 4 In the Manual Configuration of SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder dialog box, enter the following
information:
• Remote Trap Source—Select the IP address from which the traps are sent. If the IP address is not
listed, enter the IP address manually.
Purpose This procedure creates an entry in the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder
Table.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-145
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Context Engine ID—Specify the context engine ID of the ENE from which traps need to be
forwarded. This field is automatically populated if the source of trap is selected. If the source of trap
is not specified, you need to manually enter the context engine ID.
• Target Tag—Specify the tag name. The tag identifies the list of NMS that should receive the
forwarded traps. Traps are forwarded to all GNE Trap destinations whose proxy tags list contains
this tag.
• Remote User Details
– User Name—Specify the user name.
– Security Level—Select the security level for the user. The options are noAuthNoPriv,
AuthNoPriv, and AuthPriv.
• Authentication—Select the authentication algorithm.
– Protocol—Select the authentication algorithm you want to use. The options are NONE, MD5,
and SHA. Default is None.
– Password—Enter the password if you select MD5 or SHA.
• Privacy—Enables the host to encrypt the contents of the message that is sent to the agent.
– Protocol—Select NONE or DES as the privacy authentication algorithm. Encryption is disabled
if NONE is selected.
– Password—Enter the password if you select DES. The password should not exceed 64
characters.
Step 5 Click OK to save the information.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G505 Automatically Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table
Step 1 In network view, click Provisioning > SNMPv3 tabs.
Step 2 In the SNMPv3 Proxy Server area, complete the following:
• Select the GNE to be used as the SNMPv3 proxy server from the drop-down list.
• Select the Enable IPv6 Target/Trap check box if the nodes and the NMS stations are on an IPv6
network.
Step 3 In the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table area, click Auto Create.
Step 4 In the Automatic Configuration of SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder dialog box, enter the following
information:
Purpose This procedure creates an entry in the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder
Table automatically.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-146
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Target Tag—Specify the tag name. The tag identifies the list of NMS that should receive the
forwarded traps. All GNE Trap destinations that have this tag in their proxy tags list are chosen.
• Source of Trap—The list of ENEs whose traps are forwarded to the SNMPv3 Trap destinations that
are identified by the Target Tag.
Step 5 Click OK to save the information.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).CHAPTER
5-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
5
Perform Node Acceptance Tests
This chapter provides test procedures to verify that installed cards are operating correctly in a
Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) node. The procedures are optional.
Note The procedures and tasks described in this chapter for the Cisco ONS 15454 platform is applicable to
the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI (SONET) and ETSI (SDH) shelf
assemblies.
Note This chapter does not test the transponder (TXP), muxponder (MXP), GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card installation. Installation and verification for those cards is performed in
Chapter 6, “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards.”
Before You Begin
This section lists the non-trouble procedures (NTPs) required to validate a DWDM node. Turn to a
procedure for applicable detailed level procedures (DLPs).
1. NTP-G41 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O Cards Acceptance
Test, page 5-3—Complete this procedure to test terminal and hub nodes with 32MUX-O and
32DMX-O cards installed.
2. NTP-G168 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance
Test, page 5-9—Complete this procedure to test terminal and hub nodes with 40-MUX-C and
40-DMX-C cards installed. This procedure can also be performed for 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-CE
cards.
3. NTP-G42 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS and 32DMX Cards Acceptance Test,
page 5-12—Complete this procedure to test terminal nodes with 32WSS and 32DMX cards
installed.
4. NTP-G167 Perform the Terminal Node with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test,
page 5-17—Complete this procedure to test terminal nodes with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C cards
installed. This procedure can also be performed to test terminal nodes for 40-WSS-CE and
40-DMX-CE cards5-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
5. NTP-G153 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test,
page 5-22—Complete this procedure to test terminal nodes with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L cards
installed.
6. NTP-G43 Perform the ROADM Node with 32WSS and 32DMX Cards Acceptance Test,
page 5-29—Complete this procedure to test reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexing
(ROADM) nodes with 32WSS and 32DMX cards installed.
7. NTP-G154 Perform the ROADM Node with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test,
page 5-51—Complete this procedure to test ROADM nodes with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L cards
installed.
8. NTP-G180 Perform the ROADM Node with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test,
page 5-74—Complete this procedure to test a ROADM node with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C cards
installed. This procedure can also be performed for 40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-CE cards.
9. NTP-G276 Perform the 80-Channel n-degree ROADM Node Acceptance Tests,
page 5-97—Complete this procedure to test a n- degree ROADM node with 80-WXC-C cards
installed.
10. NTP-G44 Perform the Anti-ASE Hub Node Acceptance Test, page 5-101—Complete this procedure
to test anti-amplified spontaneous emission (anti-ASE) hub nodes.
11. NTP-G45 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM Cards Acceptance Test,
page 5-104—Complete this procedure to test C-band line amplifier nodes with OSCM cards
installed on both Side A and Side B of the shelf.
12. NTP-G155 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM Cards Acceptance Test,
page 5-108—Complete this procedure to test L-band line amplifier nodes with OSCM cards
installed on both Side A and Side B of the shelf.
13. NTP-G46 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test,
page 5-111—Complete this procedure to test C-band line amplifier nodes with OSC-CSM cards
installed on both Side A and Side B of the shelf.
14. NTP-G156 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test,
page 5-115—Complete this procedure to test L-band line amplifier nodes with OSC-CSM cards
installed on both Side A and Side B of the shelf.
15. NTP-G47 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance
Test, page 5-120—Complete this procedure to test C-band line amplifier nodes with OSCM and
OSC-CSM cards installed.
16. NTP-G157 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance
Test, page 5-124—Complete this procedure to test L-band line amplifier nodes with OSCM and
OSC-CSM cards installed.
17. NTP-G48 Perform the OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSCM Cards,
page 5-128—Complete this procedure to test optical add/drop multiplexing (OADM) nodes with
OSCM cards installed on both Side A and Side B of the shelf.
18. NTP-G49 Perform the Active OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM
Cards, page 5-140—Complete this procedure to test OADM nodes with OSC-CSM and OPT-BST
or OPT-BST-E cards installed on both Side A and Side B of the shelf.
19. NTP-G50 Perform the Passive OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM
Cards, page 5-146—Complete this procedure to test OADM nodes with OSC-CSM cards installed
on both Side A and Side B of the shelf and no OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards installed.
20. NTP-G186 Perform the Four-Degree and Eight-Degree Mesh Patch Panel Acceptance Test,
page 5-148—Complete this procedure to test four-degree or eight-degree mesh nodes.5-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
21. NTP-G187 Perform the Multiring Site Acceptance Test, page 5-160—Complete this procedure to
test multiring sites.
22. NTP-G188 Perform the Native Mesh Node Acceptance Test, page 5-168—Complete this procedure
to test native mesh nodes.
23. NTP-G189 Perform the Node Upgrade Acceptance Test, page 5-173—Complete this procedure to
test an upgraded node. The upgraded node connects an existing in-service ROADM node with two
sides (each equipped with MMU cards) to a native mesh node with two sides.
24. NTP-G243 Perform the Two-Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-1-C and OPT-AMP-17-C Cards
Acceptance Test, page 5-181—Complete this procedure to test ROADM nodes with 40-SMR-1-C
and OPT-AMP-17-C cards installed.
25. NTP-G244 Perform the Four Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-2-C Cards Acceptance Test,
page 5-185—Complete this procedure to test ROADM nodes with 40-SMR-2-C cards installed.
NTP-G41 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 32MUX-O and
32DMX-O Cards Acceptance Test
Note Throughout this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 6, and Side B refers to Slots 12 through 17.
Note This procedure tests Side A of hub nodes first, then Side B. If you are testing a terminal node, apply
instructions for Side A of the hub node to the terminal side (Side B or Side A) of the terminal node.
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the hub or terminal node that you want to
test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Purpose This procedure tests a DWDM terminal or hub node with 32MUX-O and
32DMX-O cards installed.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note If optical service channel (OSC) terminations are created, there will be two alarms, one for
low power on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card and one for the OSC channel.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If a different status appears, complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node
Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
Step 5 Create a physical loopback on the Side A (or terminal) OSC-CSM, OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier
by using a patchcord with 10-dB bulk attenuators to connect the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will appear due to the OSC signal
loopback.
Step 6 Wait approximately two minutes, then verify that the OSC link is active on the Side A OSCM or
OSC-CSM card by observing whether or not the LOS alarm on the OSCM or OSC-CSM (and the
OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, if present) clears. (The OSC termination must already be provisioned. If
not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 4-126.)
Note If the LOS alarm does not clear on the OSC-CSM card, verify that the opwrMin (dBm) Optic
Thresholds setting for the OSC-RX port is not higher than the port's Optical Line power value.
In the OSC-CSM card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optic Thresholds tabs
and record the opwrMin (dBm) setting and compare it to the value found in the Power column
for the OSC-RX port in the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Reduce the Optic
Thresholds setting for the opwrMin (dBm) value temporarily until the loopback test has been
completed to clear the LOS alarm. Reset the Optic Thresholds setting to its original value after
clearing the physical loopback.
Step 7 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_MR_10E_C card to the first wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T C-band
grid (1530.33 nm). Refer to the tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G268
Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5.
Step 8 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the CHAN RX 01
port on the Side A (or terminal) 32MUX-O card using the available patch panel.
Step 9 Display the Side A (or terminal) 32MUX-O card in card view.
Step 10 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
Step 11 Change the Port 1 administrative state to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI).
Step 12 Verify that the Port 1 power level reaches the provisioned VOA Power Ref set point. 5-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note The tunable laser minimum optical output power (Pout) must be 6 dBm. If the output power is
lower than the specified value, the 32MUX-O card might not reach the provisioned set point.
Step 13 If an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L card is installed, complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-6 on the Side A (or
terminal) OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L to ensure that the amplifier is working properly. If an
OSC-CSM card is installed, go to Step 15.
Step 14 Complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7 on the
Side A (or terminal) OPT-PRE card to ensure that the amplifier is working properly.
Step 15 Complete the “DLP-G78 Verify the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C Card Power” task on page 5-8 to verify
that the 32MUX-O is powered correctly.
Step 16 Complete the “DLP-G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power” task on page 5-8 to verify
that the 32DMX-O card is powered correctly.
Step 17 Restore the default IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) administrative state to the
32MUX-O card port that was changed to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) in Step 11.
Step 18 Repeat Steps 7 through 17 for the remaining 31 wavelengths of the 100-GHz grid to verify the correct
behavior of all variable optical attenuators (VOAs) inside the 32MUX-O card.
Step 19 Remove the loopback created in Step 5.
Step 20 If the node is a hub node, repeat Steps 5 through 19 for the Side B cards.
Step 21 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 22 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing
Purpose This task provisions a TXP_MR_10E_C card for acceptance testing when
a tunable laser is not available.
Tools/Equipment TXP_MR_10E_C
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 4-78
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed5-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 1 If you have installed and verified the TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 2. If not, install the TXP
card using the “NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G,
and OTU2_XP Cards” procedure on page 4-69.
Step 2 Display the TXP_MR_10E_C in card view.
Step 3 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) tabs.
Step 4 Click the Admin State column for the trunk port and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled
(ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 5 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 6 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 7 In the Wavelength field, choose the first wavelength required by the acceptance test.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) tabs.
Step 10 Click the Admin State column for the trunk port and choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 11 Click Apply.
Step 12 Connect a power meter to the DWDM TX port. Verify that the output power falls within 4.5 dBm
(+/–1 dBm). If it does not fall within this range, replace the card or contact your next level of support.
Step 13 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and
Power
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node that you want to test. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L amplifier to display the card view.
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This task verifies that the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L amplifier
laser is on and provisioned to the correct power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only5-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 3 Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs. If the value in the Currently Shutdown field is NO, continue with
Step 4. If not, complete the following steps:
a. Check the optical safety remote interlock (OSRI) setting. If it is set to On, change it to Off. If the
OSRI setting is set to Off and the Currently Shutdown field is Yes, contact your next level of support.
b. Click Apply, then click Yes.
c. Check the Currently Shutdown field. If it changes to NO, continue with Step 4. If not, contact your
next level of support. The amplifier might need to be replaced.
Note The Currently Shutdown field will not change to NO until an active channel is flowing
through the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L amplifier.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Opt Ampli Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 5 Click Reset.
Step 6 Scroll to the right and locate the Signal Output Power parameter for Port 6 (LINE-TX). Verify that the
Signal Output Power value is greater than or equal to the Channel Power Ref.
If the Signal Output Power is not greater than or equal to 1.5 dBm, do not continue. Begin
troubleshooting or contact your next level of support.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node that you want to test. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf view) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OPT-PRE amplifier to
display the card view.
Step 3 Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
Step 4 If the value shown in the Currently Shutdown field is NO, continue with Step 5. If not, complete the
following steps:
a. Check the OSRI setting. If it is set to ON, click the table cell and chose OFF from the drop-down
list. If the OSRI setting is set to OFF and the Currently Shutdown field is Yes, contact your next
level of support.
b. Click Apply, then click Yes.
Purpose This task verifies that the OPT-PRE amplifier laser is on and provisioned
to the correct power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only5-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
c. Check the Currently Shutdown field. If it changes to NO, continue with Step 5. If not, contact your
next level of support. The amplifier might need to be replaced.
Step 5 Click the Provisioning > Opt Ampli Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 6 Locate the Signal Output Power parameter for Port 2 (COM-TX). Verify that the Signal Output Power
value is greater than or equal to the Channel Power Ref. If the Signal Output Power is greater than or
equal to the Channel Power Ref, continue with Step 7. If the Signal Output Power is less than the
Channel Power Ref, check your connections and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber
Connectors” procedure on page 14-31. If this does not change the power value, consult your next level
of support.
Step 7 Scroll to the right to locate the DCU Insertion Loss parameter. Verify that the DCU Insertion Loss value
is less than or equal to 10 dB.
If the DCU Insertion Loss is greater than 10 dB, do not continue. Begin troubleshooting or contact your
next level of support.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G78 Verify the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C Card Power
Step 1 Display the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Change the administrative state of the corresponding port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI).
Step 4 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 5 Check that the value in the Power column for the port reaches the value shown in the VOA Power Ref
column.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power
Purpose This task verifies 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C card power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This task verifies that the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C card is provisioned to
the correct power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-305-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 1 Display the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Change the administrative state for the appropriate port to OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled
(ETSI).
Step 4 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 5 Verify that the value in the Power table cell is the same as the VOA Power Ref table cell value for the
port under test.
Step 6 Connect a power meter to the CHAN TX 01 port through the patch panel. Verify that the physical optical
power value coming from drop Port 1 on the Side A 32DMX-O card is consistent with the value read
(the maximum allowed error is +/– 0.5 dBm).
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G168 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 40-MUX-C
and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test
Note Throughout this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 6, and Side B refers to Slots 12 through 17.
Note This procedure tests Side A of hub nodes first, then Side B. If you are testing a terminal node, apply
instructions for Side A of the hub node to the terminal side (Side B or Side A) of the terminal node.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This procedure tests a DWDM terminal or hub node with 40-MUX-C and
40-DMX-C cards installed.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the hub or terminal node that you want to
test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note If OSC terminations are created, there will be two alarms, one for low power on the
OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, and the other an OSC channel alarm.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If a different status appears, complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node
Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
Step 5 Create a physical loopback on the Side A (or terminal) OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier by using a
patchcord with 10-dB bulk attenuators to connect the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will appear due to the OSC signal
loopback.
Step 6 Verify that the OSC link becomes active on the Side A OSCM or OSC-CSM card. (The OSC termination
must already be provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure
on page 4-126.)
Step 7 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_MR_10E_C card to the first wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T C-band
grid (1530.33 nm). Refer to the tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G268
Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5.
Step 8 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the CHAN RX 01
port on the Side A (or terminal) 40-MUX-C card using the available patch panel.
Step 9 Display the Side A (or terminal) 40-MUX-C card in card view.
Step 10 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
Step 11 Change the Port 1 administrative state to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI).
Step 12 Verify that the Port 1 power level reaches the provisioned VOA Power Ref set point.
Note The tunable laser minimum optical output power (Pout) must be 6 dBm. If the output power is
lower than the specified value, the 40-MUX-C card might not reach the provisioned set point.5-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 13 If an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L card is installed, complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-6 on the Side A (or
terminal) OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L to ensure that the amplifier is working properly.
Step 14 Complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7 on the
Side A (or terminal) OPT-PRE card to ensure that the amplifier is working properly.
Step 15 Complete the “DLP-G78 Verify the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C Card Power” task on page 5-8 to verify
that the 40-MUX-C card is powered correctly.
Step 16 Complete the “DLP-G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power” task on page 5-8 to verify
that the 40-DMX-C card is powered correctly.
Step 17 Restore the default IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) administrative state to the
40-MUX-C port that was changed to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) in Step 11.
Step 18 Repeat Steps 7 through 17 for the remaining 31 wavelengths of the 100-GHz grid to verify the correct
behavior of all variable optical attenuators (VOAs) inside the 40-MUX-C card.
Step 19 Remove the loopback created in Step 5.
Step 20 If the node is a hub node, repeat Steps 5 through 19 for the Side B cards.
Step 21 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 22 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.5-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
NTP-G42 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS and 32DMX
Cards Acceptance Test
Note Throughout this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 6, and Side B refers to Slots 12 through 17.
Note This procedure creates an optical loopback on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E line. An optical signal is sent
from the 32WSS input (add) to the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E common receive (RX) port and back out
the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E transmit (TX) line. The OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E line receives the looped
signal from the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E TX port. It then passes the signal to the OPT-BST or
OPT-BST-E common TX port and into the OPT-PRE common RX line. The OPT-PRE sends the signal
to the 32DMX card. The optical signal from the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card must pass
successfully through the 32WSS card and out the 32DMX card.
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the terminal node that you want to test. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Display the terminal node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
Purpose This acceptance test verifies that a terminal node with 32WSS and 32DMX
cards installed is operating properly before you connect it to the network.
The test verifies the operation of the amplifiers and also verifies that each
32WSS and 32DMX add/drop and pass-through port operates properly.
The test also checks the power levels at each transmit and receive port to
ensure that power loss in the cabling is within tolerance. If MMU cards are
installed, the test verifies that the MMU insertion loss does not impact add,
drop, or pass-through circuits.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
1 bulk attenuator (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Verify that no equipment alarms (indicated by EQPT in the Cond column) appear indicating
equipment failure or other hardware problems. If equipment failure alarms appear, investigate and
resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for
procedures.
Note If OSC terminations are created, an OSC channel alarm will appear.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If a different status appears, or if errors (indicated in red) appear, delete the
OSC channels and complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
Provision the OSC channels when automatic node setup (ANS) is complete.
Step 5 Create a physical loopback on the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card by using a patchcord with
10-dB bulk attenuators to connect the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will appear due to the OSC signal
loopback. This is observed as an alarm on Port 1 of the OSCM or OSC-CSM card.
Step 6 Wait approximately two minutes, then verify that the OSC link is active on the Side A OSCM or
OSC-CSM card by observing whether or not the loss of signal (LOS) alarm on the OSCM or OSC-CSM
(and the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, if present) clears. (The OSC termination must already be
provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 4-126.)
Note If the LOS alarm does not clear on the OSC-CSM card, verify that the opwrMin (dBm) Optic
Thresholds setting for the OSC-RX port is not higher than the port's Optical Line power value.
In the OSC-CSM card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optic Thresholds tabs
and record the opwrMin (dBm) setting and compare it to the value found in the Power column
for the OSC-RX port in the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Reduce the Optic
Thresholds setting for the opwrMin (dBm) value temporarily until the loopback test has been
completed to clear the LOS alarm. Reset the Optic Thresholds setting to its original value after
clearing the physical loopback.
Step 7 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following
substeps. If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 8.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you will test, then continue with Step 9.
Step 8 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test. Refer to
Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 9 Using the available patch panel, connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card
DWDM TX port to the CHAN RX 01 port on the 32WSS card.
Note The tunable laser minimum Pout must be –6 dBm. If the output power is lower than –6 dBm, the
32WSS card might not reach the provisioned set point.
Step 10 Display the 32WSS card in card view.5-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 11 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 12 Click the Admin State table cell for the add (CHAN-RX) port carrying the tested wavelength, then
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list. For example, if the
tested wavelength is 1530.33 nm (shown as 1530.3), you would click the Port 1 (CHAN-RX)
Admin State field and choose OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list.
Step 13 Change the administrative state of the pass-through port corresponding to the port in Step 9 to OOS,MT
(ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). For example, if the tested wavelength is 1530.33 nm (shown
as 1530.3), you would click the Port 33 (PASS-THROUGH) Admin State field and choose OOS,MT or
Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 14 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 15 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 16 For Channel #1, change the Operating Mode to Add Drop.
Step 17 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 18 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelength under test.
Step 19 Verify that the actual power coming from the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card shown under the
Power column is equal to the specified VOA Power Ref power (+/– 0.2 dB) shown in the same row.
Step 20 Click the Optical Line tab.
Step 21 Verify that the power value from Step 19 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS or 32DMX).Port
COM-TX.Power set point +/– 1.0 dBm. To view this set point:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 32WSS or 32DMX card.
c. Expand the Port COM-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS or 32DMX).Port COM-TX.Power parameter on the right
pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 19 (+/– 0.5 dB), contact your next level
of support.
Step 22 If an OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-6 on the OPT-BST or
OPT-BST-E to ensure that the amplifier is working properly.
Step 23 If an OSC-CSM is installed, continue with Step 25. If an OPT-BST is installed, verify the connection
between Port 67 (COM-TX) on the 32WSS and Port 1 (COM-RX) on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards:
a. Display the 32WSS card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 83 (COM-TX).
d. Display the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.5-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card and the 32WSS cards. Check
the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 24 If an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L card is installed on the Side A or terminal side, complete
the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on
page 5-6 to ensure that the amplifier is working properly.
Step 25 Complete the following steps to verify the connection between Port 67 (COM-TX) on the 32WSS and
Port 2 (COM-RX) on the OSC-CSM card:
a. Display the 32WSS card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line tabs.
c. Record the value in Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OSC-CSM and 32WSS cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 26 Complete the following steps to verify the connection between Port 2 (COM-TX) on the OPT-PRE card
and Port 33 (COM-RX) on the 32DMX card:
a. Display the OPT-PRE card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > OptAmpliLine > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in Power table cell for Port 2 (COM-TX).
d. Display the 32DMX card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 33 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OPT-PRE and 32DMX cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 27 Complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7 on the
OPT-PRE to ensure that the amplifier is working properly.
Step 28 Complete the “DLP-G270 Verify the 32DMX or 40-DMX-C Power” task on page 5-16 to verify that the
32DMX card is powered correctly.
Step 29 Display the 32WSS in card view.
Step 30 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 31 For the circuit (channel) under test, click the Operating Mode table cell and choose Not Assigned from
the drop-down list.
Step 32 Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 33 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelength under test.
Step 34 Click the Admin State table cell. Choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
from the drop-down list for all ports that were changed to OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance.
Step 35 Click Apply, then Yes.5-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 36 Repeat Steps 7 through 35 for the remaining 31 wavelengths of the 100-Ghz grid to verify the correct
behavior of all VOAs inside the 32WSS card.
Step 37 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the 32WSS card.
Step 38 Remove the loopback created in Step 5.
Step 39 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 40 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G270 Verify the 32DMX or 40-DMX-C Power
Step 1 Display the 32DMX or 40-DMX-C card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Change the administrative state for the COM TX (Port 33 for the 32DMX or Port 41 for the 40-DMX-C)
to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
Step 4 Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 5 Verify that the value shown in the power column is equal to the specified VOA Power Ref column
(+/- 0.2dB).
Step 6 (Optional) Connect a power meter to the CHAN TX 01 port through the patch panel. Verify that the
physical optical power value coming from the 32DMX or 40-DMX-C drop Port 1 is consistent with the
Power value on the Parameters tab, +/– 1.0 dBm.
Step 7 Change the administrative state for the COM TX port to IS,AINS (ANSI) or
Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI).
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task verifies that the 32DMX or 40-DMX-C card is provisioned to the
correct power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only5-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
NTP-G167 Perform the Terminal Node with 40-WSS-C and
40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test
Note Throughout this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 6, and Side B refers to Slots 12 through 17.
Note This procedure creates an optical loopback on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E line. An optical signal is sent
from the 40-WSS-C input (add) to the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E common receive (RX) port and back out
the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E transmit (TX) line. The OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E line receives the looped
signal from the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E TX port. It then passes the signal to the OPT-BST or
OPT-BST-E common TX port and into the OPT-PRE common RX line. The OPT-PRE sends the signal
to the 40-DMX-C. The optical signal from the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C must pass successfully
through the 40-WSS-C and out the 40-DMX-C.
Note If the shelf is equipped with an OSC-CSM, this procedure creates an optical loopback on the OSC-CSM
line. An optical signal is sent from the 40-WSS-C input (add) to the OSC-CSM common receive (RX)
port and back out the OSC-CSM transmit (TX) line. The OSC-CSM line receives the looped signal from
the OSC-CSM-TX port. It then passes the signal to the OSC-CSM common TX port and sends the signal
to the 40DMX-C. The optical signal from the tunable lase or TXP_MR_!)E_C must pass successfully
through the 40-WSS-C and out the 40DMX-C.
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Purpose This acceptance test verifies that a terminal node with 40-WSS-C and
40-DMX-C cards installed is operating properly before you connect it to
the network. The test verifies the operation of the amplifiers and also
verifies that each 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C add/drop and pass-through
port operates properly. The test also checks the power levels at each
transmit and receive port to ensure that power loss in the cabling is within
tolerance. If MMU cards are installed, the test verifies that the MMU
insertion loss does not impact add, drop, or pass-through circuits.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
1 bulk attenuator (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Warning The OSC-RX port opwrMin (dBm) Optic Thresholds setting provisioned by CTP can be set too high and
generate LOS and Power Fail alarms for this port while performing an optical loopback on the
OSC-CSM card. CTP provisions the opwrMin (dBm) Optic Thresholds value higher than the power
received during the loopback test, because CTP calculates the thresholds based on the incoming
amplified signal from an adjacent node instead of a loopbacked signal from the OSC-CSM card. To
clear the alarms, reduce the Optic Thresholds setting for the opwrMin (dBm) value temporarily until
the loopback test has been completed. Reset the Optic Thresholds setting to its original value after
clearing the physical loopback.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the terminal node that you want to test. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Display the terminal node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms (indicated by EQPT in the Cond column) appear indicating
equipment failure or other hardware problems. If equipment failure alarms appear, investigate and
resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for
procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate LOS alarms on the OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-AMP-17-C cards, and on the OSC-CSM and OSCM cards. If OSCM cards
are installed in ANSI shelves, EOC SDCC Termination Failure alarms will appear.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If other statuses appear, or if errors (indicated in red) appear, delete the OSC
channels and complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127. Provision
the OSC channels when ANS is complete.
Step 5 If no OSC terminations are present, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure
on page 4-126.
Step 6 Create a physical loopback on the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-AMP-17, or OSC-CSM card by
connecting a fiber optic jumper between the LINE TX and RX ports. For OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards,
connect a 10 dB bulk attenuator to each end of the jumper. The OSC-CSM card does not require
attenuation.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC SDCC Termination Failure alarm will appear due to the OSC signal
loopback. This is observed as an alarm on Port 1 of the OSCM or OSC-CSM card.
Step 7 Provision OSC terminations. Complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Step 8 Wait approximately two minutes, then verify that the OSC link is active on the Side A OSCM or
OSC-CSM card by observing whether or not the LOS alarm on the OSCM or OSC-CSM (and the
OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, if present) clears. (The OSC termination must already be provisioned. If
not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 4-126.)5-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note If the LOS alarm does not clear on the OSC-CSM card, verify that the opwrMin (dBm) Optic
Thresholds setting for the OSC-RX port is not higher than the port's Optical Line power value.
In the OSC-CSM card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optic Thresholds tabs
and record the opwrMin (dBm) setting and compare it to the value found in the Power column
for the OSC-RX port in the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Reduce the Optic
Thresholds setting for the opwrMin (dBm) value temporarily until the loopback test has been
completed to clear the LOS alarm. Reset the Optic Thresholds setting to its original value after
clearing the physical loopback.
Step 9 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following
substeps. If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 10.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you will test, then continue with Step 11.
Step 10 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test. Refer to
Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 11 Using the available patch panel, connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card
DWDM TX port to the correct CHAN RX port on the 40-WSS-C card for the wavelength that you want
to test. Refer to Table 4-1 on page 4-28, if needed. For example, if the tested wavelength is 1530.33 nm
(shown as 1530.3), then connect the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the Optical Connector
1, CHAN RX 01 port on the 40-WSS-C card.
Note The tunable laser minimum Pout must be –6 dBm. If the output power is lower than –6 dBm, the
40-WSS-C card might not reach the provisioned set point.
Step 12 Display the 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Step 13 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 14 Click the Admin State table cell for the add (CHAN-RX) port carrying the tested wavelength, then
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list. For example, if the
tested wavelength is 1530.33 nm (shown as 1530.3), you would click the Port 1 (CHAN-RX)
Admin State field and choose OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list.
Step 15 Change the administrative state of the pass-through port corresponding to the port in Step 11 to
OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). For example, if the tested wavelength is 1530.33 nm
(shown as 1530.3), you would click the Port 41 (PASS-THROUGH) Admin State field and choose
OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 16 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 17 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 18 For Channel #1, change Operating Mode to Add Drop.
Step 19 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 20 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelength under test.
Step 21 Verify that the actual power coming from the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card shown under the
Power column is equal to the specified VOA Power Ref power (+/– 0.2 dB) shown in the same row.5-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 22 Click the Optical Line tab.
Step 23 Verify that the power value from Step 21 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (40-WSS-C or 40-DMX-C).Port
COM-TX.Power set point +/– 1.0 dBm. To view this set point:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 40-WSS-C or 40-DMX-C card.
c. Expand the Port COM-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (40-WSS-C or 40-DMX-C).Port COM-TX.Power parameter on
the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 21 (+/– 0.5 dB), contact your next level
of support.
Step 24 If an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L card is installed, complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-6 on the OPT-BST
or OPT-BST-E to ensure that the amplifier is working properly. If an OSC-CSM is installed, complete
the “DLP-G84 Verify the OSC-CSM Incoming Power” task on page 5-137.
Step 25 If an OSC-CSM is installed, continue with Step 27. If an OPT-BST is installed, verify the connection
between Port 83 (COM-TX) on the 40-WSS-C and Port 1 (COM-RX) on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E
cards:
a. Display the 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power column for Port 83 (COM-TX).
d. Display the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power column for Port 1 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card and the 40-WSS-C cards.
Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 26 If an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L card is installed on the Side A or terminal side, complete
the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on
page 5-6 to ensure that the amplifier is working properly. Continue with Step 29.
Step 27 Complete the following steps to verify the connection between Port 83 (COM-TX) on the 40-WSS-C and
the Port 2 (COM-RX) on the OSC-CSM card:
a. Display the 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line tabs.
c. Record the value in Power table cell for Port 83 (COM-TX).
d. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OSC-CSM and 40-WSS-C cards. Check the values again. If
they still do not match, contact your next level of support.5-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 28 Complete the following steps to verify the connection between Port 2 (COM-TX) on the OPT-PRE card
and Port 41 (COM-RX) on the 40-DMX-C card:
a. Display the OPT-PRE card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > OptAmpliLine > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the total output power in Power column for Port 2 (COM-TX).
d. Display the 40-DMX-C card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power column for Port 41 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OPT-PRE and 40-DMX-C cards. Check the values again. If
they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 29 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on the Side A or terminal side, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the
OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7 on the OPT-PRE card to ensure that the amplifier
is working properly. If OSC-CSM cards are installed, complete the “DLP-G84 Verify the OSC-CSM
Incoming Power” task on page 5-137.
Step 30 Complete the “DLP-G270 Verify the 32DMX or 40-DMX-C Power” task on page 5-16 to verify that the
40-DMX-C card is powered correctly.
Step 31 Display the 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Step 32 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 33 For the circuit (channel) under test, click the Operating Mode table cell and choose Not Assigned from
the drop-down list.
Step 34 Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 35 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelength under test.
Step 36 Click the Admin State table cell. Choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
from the drop-down list for all ports that were changed to OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance in Steps 13
and 14 of this procedure. For example, if the tested wavelength is 1430-33 nm (shown as 1530.3), you
would click the Admin State field and choose IS,ANSI (ANSI) or Unlocked,AutomaticInService (ETSI)
from the drop-down list for both Port 1 (CHAN-RX) and Port 41 (PASS-THROUGH).
Step 37 Repeat Steps 9 through 36 for the remaining 39 wavelengths of the 100-Ghz grid to verify the correct
behavior of all VOAs inside the 40-WSS-C card.
Step 38 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the 40-WSS-C card.
Step 39 Remove the loopback created in Step 6.
Step 40 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 41 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.5-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G153 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS-L and
32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Note This procedure creates an optical loopback on the OPT-BST-L line. An optical signal is sent from the
32WSS-L input (add) to the OPT-BST-L common RX port and back out the OPT-BST-L TX line. The
OPT-BST-L line receives the looped signal from the OPT-BST-L TX port. It then passes the signal to the
OPT-BST-L common TX port and into the OPT-AMP-L (when provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) common
RX port. The OPT-AMP-L card sends the signal to the 32DMX-L card. The optical signal from the
tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_L card must pass successfully through the 32WSS-L card and out the
32DMX-L card.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the hub or terminal node that you want to
test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Display the terminal node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
Purpose This acceptance test verifies that a terminal node provisioned for L-band
wavelengths is operating properly before you connect it to the network.
The test verifies the operation of the amplifiers and also verifies that each
add/drop and pass-through port on the 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L cards
operates properly. The test also checks the power levels at each transmit
and receive port to ensure that power loss in the cabling is within tolerance.
If MMU cards are installed, the test verifies that the MMU insertion loss
does not impact add, drop, or pass-through circuits.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_L
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
1 bulk attenuator (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note If OSC terminations are created, an OSC channel alarm will appear.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success -
Changed, or Success - Unchanged. If a different status appears, or if errors (indicated in red) appear,
delete the OSC channels and complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on
page 4-127. Provision the OSC channels when ANS is complete.
Step 5 Create a physical loopback on the OPT-BST-L, OCSM, or OSC-CSM card by using a patchcord with
10-dB bulk attenuators to connect the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will appear due to the OSC signal
loopback. This is observed as an alarm on Port 1 of the OSCM or OSC-CSM card.
Step 6 Wait approximately two minutes, then verify that the OSC link is active on the Side A OSCM or
OSC-CSM card by observing whether or not the LOS alarm on the OSCM or OSC-CSM card (and the
OPT-BST-L card, if present) clears. (The OSC termination must already be provisioned. If not, complete
the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 4-126.)
Step 7 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following
substeps. If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 8.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you will test, then continue with Step 9.
Step 8 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-26 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test.
Step 9 Using the available patch panel, connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card
DWDM TX port to the CHAN RX 01 port on the 32WSS-L card.
Note The tunable laser minimum Pout must be –6 dBm. If the output power is lower than –6 dBm, the
32WSS-L card might not reach the provisioned set point.
Step 10 Display the 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 11 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 5-2 on page 5-53, if needed.
Step 12 Click the Admin State table cell for the add (CHAN-RX) port carrying the tested wavelength, then
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list. For example, if the
tested wavelength is 1577.86 nm (shown as 1577.8), you would click the Port 1 (CHAN-RX)
Admin State field and choose OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list.
Step 13 Change the administrative state of the pass-through port corresponding to the port in Step 9 to OOS,MT
(ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). For example, if the tested wavelength is 1577.86 nm (shown
as 1577.86), you would click the Port 33 (PASS-THROUGH) Admin State field and choose OOS,MT or
Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list. Refer to Table 5-2 on page 5-53, if needed.
Step 14 Click Apply, then click Yes.5-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 15 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 16 For channel under test, change Operating Mode to Add Drop.
Step 17 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 18 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters n tabs where n = the optical connector number that
carries the wavelength under test.
Step 19 Verify that the actual power coming from the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_L card shown under the
Power column is equal to the specified VOA Power Ref power (+/– 0.2 dB) shown in the same row.
Step 20 Click the Optical Line tab.
Step 21 Verify that the power value from Step 19 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS-L or 32DMX-L).Port
COM-TX.Power set point +/– 1.0 dBm. To view this set point:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 32WSS-L or 32DMX-L card.
c. Expand the Port COM-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS-L or 32DMX-L).Port COM-TX.Power parameter on the
right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 19 (+/– 0.5 dB), contact your next level
of support.
Step 22 If an OPT-BST-L card is installed, complete the “DLP-G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L
(OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-27 on the OPT-BST-L card to ensure that
the amplifier is working properly.
Step 23 If an OSC-CSM is installed, continue with Step 24. If an OPT-BST-L card is installed, verify the
connection between Port 67 (COM-TX) on the 32WSS-L and Port 1 (COM-RX) on the OPT-BST-L
cards:
a. Display the 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the OPT-BST-L card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST-L and 32WSS-L cards. Check the values again. If
they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 24 If an OPT-BST-L card is installed on the Side A or terminal side, complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-6 to ensure the
amplifier is working properly.
Step 25 Complete the following steps to verify the connection between Port 67 (COM-TX) on the 32WSS-L and
the Port 2 (COM-RX) on the OSC-CSM card:
a. Display the 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line tabs.
c. Record the value in Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).5-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
d. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OSC-CSM and 32WSS-L cards. Check the values again. If
they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 26 Complete the following steps to verify the connection between Port 2 (COM-TX) on the OPT-AMP-L
card provisioned in OPT-PRE mode and Port 33 (COM-RX) on the 32DMX-L card:
a. Display the OPT-AMP-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > OptAmpliLine > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in Power table cell for Port 2 (COM-TX).
d. Display the 32DMX-L card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 33 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OPT-AMP-L and 32DMX-L cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 27 Complete the “DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task
on page 5-27 on the OPT-PRE card to ensure that the amplifier is working properly.
Step 28 Complete the “DLP-G361 Verify the 32DMX-L Power” task on page 5-28 to verify that the 32DMX card
is powered correctly.
Step 29 Display the 32WSS-L in card view.
Step 30 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 31 For the circuit (channel) under test, click the Operating Mode table cell and choose Not Assigned from
the drop-down list.
Step 32 Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 33 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelength under test.
Step 34 Click the Admin State table cell. Choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
from the drop-down list for all ports that were changed to OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance.
Step 35 Repeat Steps 7 through 34 for the remaining wavelengths of the 100-Ghz grid to verify the correct
behavior of all VOAs inside the 32WSS-L card.
Step 36 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the 32WSS-L card.
Step 37 Remove the loopback created in Step 5.
Step 38 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 39 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.5-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card for Acceptance Testing
Step 1 If you have installed and verified the TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 2. If you have not
installed it, install the card using the “NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards” procedure on page 4-69.
Step 2 In Cisco Transport Controller (CTC), display the TXP_MR_10E_L card in card view.
Step 3 Click the Provisioning > Line > Service-Type tabs.
Step 4 Click the Admin State table cell for the trunk port and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 5 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 6 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 7 In the Wavelength field, choose the first wavelength required by the acceptance test.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Click the Provisioning > Line > Service-Type tabs.
Step 10 Click the Admin State table cell for the trunk port and choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or
Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 11 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 12 Connect a power meter to the DWDM TX port. Verify that the output power falls within –4.5 dBm and
1.0 dBm. If it does not fall within this range, replace the card or contact your next level of support.
Step 13 Repeat Steps 3 through 12 for all the installed TXP cards.
Step 14 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This procedure provisions a TXP_MR_10E_L card for acceptance testing
when a tunable laser is not available.
Tools/Equipment TXP_MR_10E_L
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 4-78
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
DLP-G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier
Laser and Power
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-BST-L or
OPT-AMP-L amplifier to display the card view.
Step 2 Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs. If the value in the Currently Shutdown field is NO, continue with
Step 3. If not, complete the following steps:
a. Check the OSRI setting. If it is set to On, change it to Off and click Apply.
b. Check the Currently Shutdown field. If it changes to NO, continue with Step 3. If not, contact your
next level of support. The amplifier might need to be replaced.
Step 3 Click the Provisioning > Opt Ampli Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 4 Click Reset.
Step 5 Scroll to the right and locate the Signal Output Power parameter for Port 6. Verify that the Signal Output
Power value is greater than or equal to 1.5 dBm.
If the Signal Output Power is not greater than or equal to 1.5 dBm, do not continue. Begin
troubleshooting or contact your next level of support.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf view) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OPT-AMP-L amplifier
to display the card view.
Step 2 Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
Purpose This task verifies that the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (when provisioned
in OPT-Line mode) amplifier laser is on and provisioned to the correct
power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This task verifies that the OPT-AMP-L (when provisioned in OPT-PRE
mode) amplifier laser is on and provisioned to the correct power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only5-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 3 If the value shown in the Currently Shutdown field is NO, continue with Step 4. If not, complete the
following steps:
a. If the OSRI setting is set to ON, click the table cell and choose OFF from the drop-down list.
b. Click Apply.
c. Check the Currently Shutdown field. If it changes to NO, continue with Step 4. If not, contact your
next level of support.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Opt Ampli Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 5 Locate the Signal Output Power parameter for Port 2. Verify that the Signal Output Power value is
greater than or equal to 1.5 dBm. If the optical power is greater than or equal to 1.5 dBm, continue with
Step 7. If the optical power is less than 1.5 dBm, check your connections and clean the fibers using the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31. If this does not change the power value,
consult your next level of support.
Step 6 Scroll to the right to locate the DCU Insertion Loss parameter. Verify that the DCU Insertion Loss value
is less than or equal to 10 dB.
If the optical power is not greater than or equal to 10 dB, do not continue. Begin troubleshooting or
contact your next level of support.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G361 Verify the 32DMX-L Power
Step 1 Display the 32DMX-L card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Change the administrative state for Port 33 to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
Step 4 Verify that the VOA Power Ref reaches the provisioned set point.
Step 5 Connect a power meter to the CHAN TX 01 port through the patch panel. Verify that the physical optical
power value coming from drop Port 1 on the Side A 32DMX card is consistent with the value read (the
maximum allowed error is +/– 1.0 dBm).
Step 6 Change the administrative state for Port 1 to OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI).
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task verifies that the 32DMX-L card is provisioned to the correct
power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only5-29
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
NTP-G43 Perform the ROADM Node with 32WSS and 32DMX
Cards Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Note Because the node is isolated and no line-side fibers are connected during the test, the power levels going
into the line-side cards will not be the same as the levels after the node is connected to the network.
Therefore, if the ROADM shelf does not contain either OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifiers, and
OPT-PRE amplifiers on both Side B and Side A, lower the OPT-PRE power thresholds so that it turns
on properly. At the end of the test, you will run ANS to configure the node with the correct parameters
for the network acceptance test.
Note Throughout this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Step 1 Make a copy of Table 5-1 on page 5-30 and place it in a convenient location for reference throughout
this procedure. The table shows the 32WSS ports and the wavelengths assigned to them. The
32 wavelengths are divided among four physical multifiber push on (MPO) connectors on the 32WSS
card. Each MPO connector is assigned eight wavelengths. In CTC, the MPO connector appears in the
card view Provisioning > Optical Connector tab. Each Optical Connector subtab represents an MPO
connector. Ports 1 through 32 are the RX (add) ports; Ports 33 through 64 are the pass-through ports.
Purpose This acceptance test verifies that a ROADM node provisioned for C-band
wavelengths is operating properly before you connect it to the network.
The test verifies the operation of the amplifiers and also verifies that each
add/drop and pass-through port on the 32WSS and 32DMX cards operates
properly. The test also checks the power levels at each transmit and receive
port to ensure that power loss in the cabling is within tolerance. If MMU
cards are installed, the test verifies that the MMU insertion loss does not
impact add, drop, or pass through circuits.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-30
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the ROADM node that you want to test. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 3.
Table 5-1 32WSS Ports and Wavelengths Test Checklist
32WSS Provisioning
Subtab Port # Wavelength
Tested:
Pass-Through
Tested:
Add/Drop
Side A
Tested:
Add/Drop
Side B
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 1
RX 1, PT 33 1530.33
RX 2, PT 34 1531.12
RX 3, PT 35 1531.90
RX 4, PT 36 1532.68
RX 5, PT 37 1534.25
RX 6, PT 38 1535.04
RX 7, PT 39 1535.82
RX 8, PT 40 1536.61
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 2
RX 9, PT 41 1538.19
RX 10, PT 42 1538.98
RX 11, PT 43 1539.77
RX 12, PT 44 1540.56
RX 13, PT 45 1542.14
RX 14, PT 46 1542.94
RX 15, PT 47 1543.73
RX 16, PT 48 1544.53
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 3
RX 17, PT 49 1546.12
RX 18, PT 50 1546.92
RX 19, PT 51 1547.72
RX 20, PT 52 1548.51
RX 21, PT 53 1550.12
RX 22, PT 54 1550.92
RX 23, PT 55 1551.72
RX 24, PT 56 1552.52
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 4
RX 25, PT 57 1554.13
RX 26, PT 58 1554.94
RX 27, PT 59 1555.75
RX 28, PT 60 1556.55
RX 29, PT 61 1558.17
RX 30, PT 62 1558.98
RX 31, PT 63 1559.79
RX 32, PT 64 1560.615-31
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 3 Display the ROADM node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate two alarms for each side of the
shelf: one an LOS alarm on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, and the other an LOS alarm on
the OSC-CSM or OSCM card. If OSCM cards are installed in ANSI shelves, EOC DCC
Termination Failure alarms will appear.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are either Success - Changed,
or Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following steps:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on
page 11-50.
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Step 6 If MMU cards are installed, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 7.
a. Display the Side B MMU in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Click the Admin State table cell for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
d. Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
e. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
f. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
g. Click the Admin State table cell for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 7 Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
Step 8 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connector n > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 9 Click the Admin State table cell for the add port carrying the tested wavelength, then choose OOS,MT
(ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list. For example, if the tested wavelength
is 1530.33 nm (shown as 1530.3), you would click the Port 1 (CHAN-RX) Admin State field and choose
OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list.
Step 10 Change the administrative state of the pass-through port corresponding to the port in Step 9 to OOS,MT
(ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). For example, if the tested wavelength is 1530.33 nm (shown
as 1530.3), you would click the Port 33 (PASS-THROUGH) Admin State field and choose OOS,MT or
Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 11 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm. 5-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 12 Repeat Steps 8 through 11 for each wavelength that you will test.
Step 13 Display the Side A 32WSS card in card view.
Step 14 Repeat Steps 8 through 12 for the Side A 32WSS card.
Step 15 Display the Side B 32DMX card in card view and complete the following steps:
a. Choose the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
b. For Port 33 (COM-RX), click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or
Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
c. Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 16 Repeat Step 15 for the Side A 32DMX card.
Step 17 Complete the “DLP-G310 Verify ROADM Node C-Band Pass-Through Channels” task on page 5-33.
Step 18 Complete the following tasks for channels that will be added or dropped on the node.
• DLP-G311 Verify the Side B ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 32WSS Cards, page 5-41
• DLP-G312 Verify the Side A ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 32WSS Cards, page 5-46
Step 19 If MMU cards are installed, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 20.
a. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Click Admin State for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and choose IS,AINS
(ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
d. Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
e. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
f. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
g. Click Admin State for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and choose IS,AINS
(ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 20 Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
Step 21 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you tested.
Step 22 Click the Admin State table cell then choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService
(ETSI) from the drop-down list for all ports that were changed to OOS,MT or Locked,Maintenance in
Steps 9 and 10.
Step 23 Click Apply.
Step 24 Repeat Steps 21 through 23 for all the ports that are in OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance state on the
Side B 32WSS card.
Step 25 Display the Side A 32WSS card in card view.
Step 26 Repeat Steps 21 through 23 for all ports on the Side A 32WSS card.
Step 27 Display the Side B 32DMX card in card view.
Step 28 Choose the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 29 For Port 33, click the Admin State table cell and choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or
Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 30 Click Apply.
Step 31 Display the Side A 32DMX card in card view.5-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 32 Repeat Steps 28 through 30 for the Side A 32DMX card.
Step 33 Delete both OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on page 11-50.
Step 34 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
Step 35 Create the two OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Step 36 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment failure alarms appear on the node. If alarms appear, investigate and resolve
them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for
procedures.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G310 Verify ROADM Node C-Band Pass-Through Channels
Note Throughout this task, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Step 1 Create a physical loopback on the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card by connecting the
LINE TX port to its LINE RX port. For OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards, connect a 10-dB bulk attenuator
to the fiber. (OSC-CSM cards do not require attenuation.)
Purpose This task verifies the signal flow through a ROADM node for C-band
pass-through channels. Pass-through channels pass through both 32WSS
cards. The channels pass through the first 32WSS from the COM-RX port
to the EXP-TX port. In the second 32WSS, the channel goes from the
EXP-RX port to the COM-TX port. The channel is not terminated inside
the node. If MMU cards are installed, the channel passes through the MMU
COM-RX and EXP-TX ports to the 32WSS COM-RX and EXP-TX ports
on one side. On the other side, the channel goes from the 32WSS EXP-RX
and COM-TX ports to the MMU EXP-RX and COM-TX ports.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 4-126
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 2 If an OPT-PRE amplifier or OSC-CSM card is installed on Side A (where the physical loopback was
created), perform the following steps. If not, continue with Step 3.
a. Display the OPT-PRE card in card view, then click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Optics Thresholds tabs.
b. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh. The alarm thresholds for the OPT-PRE card will
appear.
c. Double-click the Power Failure Low table cell for Port 1 (COM-RX) and delete the current value.
d. Type a new value of –30.0 and press the Enter key.
e. In the CTC window, click Apply, then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 3 If an OPT-PRE or OSC-CSM card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If not, continue
with Step 4.
a. Display the Side B OPT-PRE card in card view, then click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Optics Thresholds tabs.
b. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh. The alarm thresholds for the OPT-PRE card will
appear.
c. Double-click the Power Failure Low table cell for Port 1 (COM-RX) and delete the current value.
d. Type a new value of –30.0 and press the Enter key.
e. In the CTC window, click Apply, then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 4 Wait 2 to 3 minutes, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side A OSCM or OSC-CSM card and the OPT-BST
or OPT-BST-E card have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the OSC link is active
on Side A. If the alarms do not clear, contact your next level of support.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC SDCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
Step 5 Display the Side A 32WSS card in card view.
Step 6 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 7 Click the Operating Mode table cell for the wavelength under test and choose Pass Through from the
drop-down list.
Step 8 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 9 Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
Step 10 Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for the Side B 32WSS card.
Step 11 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 12.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you will test, then continue with Step 13.
Step 12 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test.5-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 13 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the Side B
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM LINE RX port. If a Side B OPT-PRE is installed, insert a 10-dB
attenuator on the fiber coming from the TXP_MR_10E_C card.
Note If using a pre-installed TXP_MR-10E_C card that is connected to the 32DMX, there is no need to
connect the TXP_MR_10E_C DWDM TX port to the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM LINE RX
port. Install an optical loopback between the LINE TX and RX ports on the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or
OSC-CSM card.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 14 If an OPT-PRE or OSC-CSM card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If not, continue
with Step 15.
a. Display the Side B OPT-PRE card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power parameter for Port 1 (COM-RX). Record the value.
d. Display the Side B OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX) (OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E) or Port 3 (COM-TX)
(OSC-CSM). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 2.0 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-PRE card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card. Check the values
again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side B OPT-PRE card, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-7.
Step 15 If an MMU card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps, then continue with Step 17. If an
MMU card is not installed, continue with Step 16.
a. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 3 (COM-RX) power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side B OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-PRE Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output
Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.5-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the MMU card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-PRE, or OSC-CSM cards. Check the
values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
j. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX) of the Side B MMU card.
m. Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 17.
Step 16 Verify the Side B 32WSS card to OPT-BST, OPT-PRE, or OSC-CSM card cable connection:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side B OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If an OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed on Side B, display it in card view and complete Step
g. If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for
Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 32WSS card and the OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card. Check the
values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 17 Verify the EXPRESS cable connection between the two 32WSS cards:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 65 (EXP-TX) Power parameter. Record the value.
a. Display the Side A 32WSS in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power value for EXPRESS Port 66 (EXP-RX). Verify that the value matches the power
recorded in Step c, +/–1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on
page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 18 Display the Side A 32WSS card in card view.5-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 19 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn> Parameters tabs, where n = the connector
number containing the wavelength you are testing. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 20 Wait 60 to 70 seconds (or click Reset), then locate the Power and VOA Power Ref parameters for the
tested PASS-THROUGH port. Verify that the Power value is equal to the VOA Power Ref value,
+/– 1.5 dBm. If the Power value is not equal to the VOA Power Ref value +/–1.5 dBm, contact your next
level of support.
Step 21 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side A, continue with Step 22.
a. Display the Side A 32WSS card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).
h. If a Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i.
If not, continue with Step j.
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the MMU cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 23.
Step 22 If an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If
not, continue with Step 23.
a. Display the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 1 (COM-RX) Power parameter (OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards) or the Port 2
(COM-RX) Power parameter (OSC-CSM cards). Record the value.
d. Display the Side A 32WSS in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 67 (COM-TX). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in
Step c, +/–1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the 32WSS
card. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-6.5-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 23 If a OPT-PRE card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 24.
a. Display the Side A OPT-PRE in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 1 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. Display the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX) (OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E) or Port 3 (COM-TX)
(OSC-CSM). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 2.0 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-PRE card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card. Check the values
again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side A OPT-PRE, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-7.
Step 24 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps, then continue with Step 26. If an
MMU card is not installed on Side A, continue with Step 25.
a. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 3 (COM-RX) power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side A OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-PRE Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output
Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the MMU card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-PRE, or OSC-CSM cards. Check the
values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
j. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX) of the Side A MMU card.
m. Display the Side A 32WSS card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS cards and the MMU cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 26.5-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 25 Verify the Side A 32WSS card to OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-PRE, or OSC-CSM card cable
connection:
a. Display the Side A 32WSS in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side A OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for
Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 32WSS card and the OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card. Check the
values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 26 Verify the EXPRESS cable connection between the two 32WSS cards:
a. Display the Side A 32WSS card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 65 (EXP-TX) Power parameter. Record the value.
a. Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power value for Port 66 (EXP-RX). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in
Step c, +/– 1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS cards. Check the values again. If they still do not
match, contact your next level of support.
Step 27 Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
Step 28 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn> Parameters tabs, where n = the connector
number containing the wavelength you are testing. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 29 Wait 60 to 70 seconds (or click Reset), then locate the Power and VOA Power Ref parameters for the
tested PASS-THROUGH port. Verify that the Power value is equal to the VOA Power Ref value,
+/– 1.5 dBm. If the Power value is not equal to the VOA Power Ref value +/– 1.5 dBm, consult your next
level of support.
Step 30 If an MMU card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side B, continue with Step 31.
a. Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.5-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).
h. If a Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i. If
not, continue with Step j.
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the MMU cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 32.
Step 31 If an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If
not, continue with Step 32.
a. Display the Side B OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 1 (COM-RX) Power parameter (OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards) or the Port 2
(COM-RX) Power parameter (OSC-CSM cards). Record the value.
d. Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 67 (COM-TX). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in
Step c, +/–1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the 32WSS
cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-6.
Step 32 Complete Steps 18, 19, 27, and 28 for the additional wavelengths that you want to test. If you have tested
all the wavelengths, continue with Step 33.
Step 33 Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
Step 34 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 35 In the Operating Mode area, click the table cell and choose Not Assigned from the drop-down list for
all wavelengths.
Step 36 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 37 Display the Side A 32WSS card in card view.
Step 38 Repeat Steps 34 through 36 for the Side A 32WSS card.
Step 39 If you used a tunable laser or installed a TXP_MR_10E_C card for this test, disconnect it from the Side B
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM line side RX ports.
Step 40 Remove the loopback fiber from the line RX and TX in the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM
card.5-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 41 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G311 Verify the SideB ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 32WSS
Cards
Note Throughout this task, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), display the Alarms tab.
Step 2 Create a physical loopback on the Side B OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card by connecting the
LINE TX port to its LINE RX port. For OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards, connect a 10-dB bulk attenuator
to the fiber. (OSC-CSM cards do not require attenuation.)
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 3 Wait 2 to 3 minutes, then click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side B OSCM or
OSC-CSM card and the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms
indicates that the OSC link is active on Side B.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
Step 4 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 5.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you are testing, then continue with Step 7.
Step 5 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test. Refer to
Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Purpose This task verifies the signal flow through Side B of a ROADM node for
C-band add/drop channels.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 6 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the following steps. If you are using a tunable laser
continue with Step 7.
a. Display the TXP_MR_10E_C in card view.
b. Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
c. Locate the Port 2 (Trunk) table cell for the TX Optical Pwr parameter. Record the value.
Step 7 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the Side B fiber
patch panel MUX port that is connected to the Side B 32WSS card CHAN RX port carrying the tested
wavelength. (If the TXP_MR_10E_C card was installed during Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node,” simply
verify the cable connection.)
Step 8 Connect the TXP_MR_10E_C DWDM RX port or the power meter RX port to Side B fiber patch panel
DMX port that is connected with the Side B 32DMX card CHAN-TX port carrying the tested
wavelength. (If the TXP_MR_10E_C card was installed during Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node,” simply
verify the cable connection.)
Step 9 Display the 32WSS card in card view.
Step 10 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 11 For each wavelength that you will test, click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose
Add Drop from the drop-down list.
Step 12 Click Apply and then Yes, to confirm.
Step 13 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 14 Find the tested wavelength CHAN RX port, then scroll to the right until you see the Power Add
parameter. Verify that the Power Add value for the tested port CHAN RX is equal to the output power
level of the tunable laser or the TXP_MR_10E_C card measured in Step 6, +/– 1.0 dBm.
Step 15 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table cell
for Port 67 (COM-TX) for the wavelength under test.
Step 16 Verify that the power value from Step 15 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS).Port COM-TX.Power set
point +/– 1.0 dBm on Side B. To view this set point:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 32WSS card on Side B.
c. Expand the Port COM-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS).Port COM-TX.Power parameter on the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 15 (+/– 2.0 dBm), contact your next
level of support.
Step 17 If an MMU card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side B, continue with Step 18.
a. Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.5-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).
h. If a Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i. If
not, continue with Step j.
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the MMU cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 19.
Step 18 Verify the connection between the 32WSS card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E or OSC-CSM cards:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. If a OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed on Side B, display it in card view and complete Step
e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
f. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
g. Verify that the value in Step e or f matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If so, continue
with Step 19. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean
the fiber connection between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the 32WSS cards.
Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 19 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 20.
a. Display the Side B OPT-PRE in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power parameter for Port 1 (COM-RX). Record the value.
d. Display the Side B OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Port 2 (COM-TX) Power value (for OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards) or Port 3 (COM-TX)
Power value (for OSC-CSM cards). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/–
1.5 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the
fiber connection between the OPT-PRE card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card.
Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side B OPT-PRE card, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-7.5-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 20 If an MMU card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side B, continue with Step 21.
a. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side B, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not,
continue with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-PRE Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs. Record the Total Output
Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display a Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters
tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the MMU card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
j. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX).
m. Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 22.
Step 21 Verify the connection between the Side B 32WSS card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-PRE, or
OSC-CSM card:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side B OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.5-45
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 32WSS card and the OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, or OSC-CSM card.
Step 22 Verify the Side B 32WSS and 32DMX connection:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table
cell for Port 69 (DROP-TX).
c. Display the Side B 32DMX card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Record the value in the Port 33
(COM-RX) table cell. Verify that the value is equal to the value recorded in b, +/– 1.0 dBm. If not,
use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 32WSS and 32DMX cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact
your next level of support.
Step 23 Display the Side B 32DMX card in card view.
Step 24 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tab. Record the CHAN-TX port value under the
Power parameter for the wavelength under test.
Step 25 Verify that the power value from Step 24 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (32DMX).Port CHAN-TX.Power set
point +/– 2 dBm on Side B. To view this set point:
a. Go to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) and click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 32DMX card on Side B.
c. Expand the Port CHAN-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (32DMX).Port CHAN-TX.Power parameter on the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 24 (+/– 2 dBm), contact your next level
of support.
Step 26 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, display it in card view. If not, read the values called for in
Step 28 from the optical test set or tunable laser you are using.
Step 27 Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
Step 28 In the Port 2 (Trunk) column, locate the RX Optical Power value. Verify that the value matches the power
recorded in Step 24, +/– 2 dBm. If the power values do not match (+/– 2 dBm), complete the following
steps:
a. Remove, clean, and replace the cable connecting the TXP_MR_10E_C RX port to the Side B fiber
patch panel DMX port for the tested wavelength. See the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors”
procedure on page 14-31.
b. Repeat this step. If the power values still do not match (+/– 2 dBm) contact your next level of
support.
Step 29 Repeat Steps 4 through 28 for the remaining wavelengths.
Step 30 Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
Step 31 Click the Maintenance tab.5-46
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 32 Click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose Not Assigned from the drop-down list for
all wavelengths.
Step 33 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 34 If you used a tunable laser or installed a TXP_MR_10E_C card for this test, disconnect it from the Side B
patch panel.
Step 35 Unplug the physical loopback fiber from the line TX and RX in the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM
card.
Step 36 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G312 Verify the SideA ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 32WSS
Cards
Note Throughout this task, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), display the Alarms tab.
Step 2 Create a physical loopback on the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card by connecting the
LINE TX port to its LINE RX port. For OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards, connect a 10-dB bulk attenuator
to the fiber. (OSC-CSM cards do not require attenuation.)
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 3 Wait 2 to 3 minutes, then click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side A OSCM or
OSC-CSM card and the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms
indicates that the OSC link is active on Side A.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
Purpose This procedure verifies the signal flow through Side A of an ROADM node
for C-band add/drop channels.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-47
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 4 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 5.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you are testing, then continue with Step 7.
Step 5 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test. Refer to
Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 6 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the following steps. If you are using a tunable laser
continue with Step 7.
a. Display the TXP_MR_10E_C in card view.
b. Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
c. Locate the Port 2 (Trunk) table cell for the TX Optical Pwr parameter. Record the value.
Step 7 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the Side A fiber
patch panel MUX port that is connected to the Side A 32WSS card CHAN RX port carrying the tested
wavelength. (If the TXP_MR_10E_C card was installed during Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node,” simply
verify the cable connection.)
Step 8 Connect the TXP_MR_10E_C DWDM RX port or the power meter RX port to the Side A fiber patch
panel DMX port that is connected with the Side A 32DMX card CHAN-TX port carrying the tested
wavelength. (If the TXP_MR_10E_C card was installed during Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node,” simply
verify the cable connection.)
Step 9 Display the 32WSS card in card view.
Step 10 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 11 For each wavelength that you will test, click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose
Add Drop from the drop-down list.
Step 12 Click Apply and then Yes, to confirm.
Step 13 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 14 Find the tested wavelength CHAN RX port, then scroll to the right until you see the Power Add
parameter. Verify that the Power Add value for the tested port CHAN RX is equal to the output power
level of the tunable laser or the TXP_MR_10E_C card measured in Step 6, +/– 1.0 dBm.
Step 15 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table cell
for Port 67 (COM-TX) for the wavelength under test.
Step 16 Verify that the power value from Step 15 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS).Port COM-TX.Power set
point +/– 1.0 dBm on Side A. To view this set point:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 32WSS card on Side A.
c. Expand the Port COM-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS).Port COM-TX.Power parameter on the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 15 (+/– 2.0 dBm), contact your next
level of support.5-48
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 17 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side A, continue with Step 18.
a. Display the Side A 32WSS card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).
h. If a Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i.
If not, continue with Step j.
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the MMU cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 19.
Step 18 Verify the connection between the 32WSS card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM cards:
a. Display the Side A 32WSS card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. If a OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed on Side A, display it in card view and complete Step
e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
f. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
g. Verify that the value in Step e or f matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If so, continue
with Step 19. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean
the fiber connection between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the 32WSS cards.
Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 19 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 20.
a. Display the Side A OPT-PRE in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power parameter for Port 1 (COM-RX). Record the value.
d. Display the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card in card view.5-49
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Port 2 (COM-TX) Power value (for OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards) or Port 3 (COM-TX)
Power value (for OSC-CSM cards). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c,
+/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean
the fiber connection between the OPT-PRE card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card.
Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side A OPT-PRE card, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-7.
Step 20 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side A, continue with Step 21.
a. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side A, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not,
continue with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-PRE Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs. Record the Total Output
Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the MMU card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
j. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX).
m. Display a Side A 32WSS card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 22.
Step 21 Verify the connection between the Side A 32WSS card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-PRE, or
OSC-CSM card:
a. Display the Side A 32WSS in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.5-50
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
d. If a Side A OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display a Side A OSC-CSM card in card view. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 32WSS card and the OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, or OSC-CSM card.
Step 22 Verify the Side A 32WSS and 32DMX connection:
a. Display the Side A 32WSS card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table
cell for Port 69 (DROP-TX).
c. Display the Side A 32DMX card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Record the value in the Port 2
(COM-RX) table cell. Verify that the value is equal to the value recorded in Step b, +/– 1.0 dBm. If
not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber
connection between the 32WSS and 32DMX cards. Check the values again. If they still do not
match, contact your next level of support.
Step 23 Display the Side A 32DMX card in card view.
Step 24 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tab. Record the CHAN-TX port value under the
Power parameter for the wavelength under test.
Step 25 Verify that the power value recorded in Step 24 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (32DMX).Port
CHAN-TX.Power set point +/– 2 dBm on Side A. To view this set point:
a. Go to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) and click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand 32DMX card on Side A.
c. Expand the CHAN-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (32DMX).Port CHAN-TX.Power parameter on the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 24 (+/– 2 dBm), contact your next level
of support.
Step 26 Display the TXP_MR_10E_C card in card view.
Step 27 Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
Step 28 In the Port 2 (Trunk) column, locate the RX Optical Power value. Verify that the value matches the power
in Step 24, +/– 2 dBm. If the power values do not match (+/– 2 dBm), complete the following steps:
a. Remove, clean, and replace the cable connecting the TXP_MR_10E_C RX port to the Side A fiber
patch panel DMX port for the tested wavelength. See the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors”
procedure on page 14-31. 5-51
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Repeat this step. If the power values still do not match (+/– 2 dBm) contact your next level of
support.
Step 29 Repeat Steps 4 through 28 for the remaining wavelengths.
Step 30 Display the Side A 32WSS card in card view.
Step 31 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 32 Click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose Not Assigned from the drop-down list for
all wavelengths.
Step 33 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 34 Disconnect the TXP or tunable laser from the Side A patch panel.
Step 35 Unplug the physical loopback fiber from the line TX and RX in the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM
card.
Step 36 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G154 Perform the ROADM Node with 32WSS-L and
32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Purpose This acceptance test verifies that a ROADM node provisioned for L-band
wavelengths is operating properly before you connect it to the network.
The test verifies the operation of the amplifiers and also verifies that each
add/drop and pass-through port on the 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L cards
operates properly. The test also checks the power levels at each transmit
and receive port to ensure that power loss in the cabling is within tolerance.
If MMU cards are installed, the test verifies that the MMU insertion loss
does not impact add, drop, or pass-through traffic.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_L
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-52
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Because the node is isolated and no line-side fibers are connected during the test, the power levels going
into the line-side components will not be the same as they would be in a real network setup. Therefore,
if the ROADM shelf does not contain OPT-BST-L and OPT-AMP-L (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode)
amplifiers on both Side B and Side A, you must lower the OPT-AMP-L power thresholds so that it turns
on properly. At the end of the test, you will run ANS to configure the node with the correct parameters
for the network acceptance test.
Step 1 Make a copy of Table 5-2 on page 5-53 and place it in a convenient location for reference throughout
this procedure. The table shows the 32WSS-L ports and the wavelengths assigned to them. The
32 wavelengths are divided among four physical MPO connectors on the 32WSS-L card. Each MPO
connector is assigned eight wavelengths. In CTC, the MPO connector appears in the card view
Provisioning > Optical Connector tab. Each Optical Connector subtab represents an MPO connector.
Ports 1 through 32 are the channel RX (add) ports; Ports 33 through 64 are the pass-through ports. 5-53
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the ROADM node that you want to test. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 3.
Table 5-2 32WSS-L Ports and Wavelengths Test Checklist
32WSS-L Provisioning
Subtab Port # Wavelength
Tested:
Pass-Through
Tested:
Add/Drop
Side A
Tested:
Add/Drop
Side B
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 1
RX 1, PT 33 1577.86
RX 2, PT 34 1578.69
RX 3, PT 35 1579.52
RX 4, PT 36 1580.35
RX 5, PT 37 1581.18
RX 6, PT 38 1582.02
RX 7, PT 39 1582.85
RX 8, PT 40 1583.69
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 2
RX 9, PT 41 1584.53
RX 10, PT 42 1585.36
RX 11, PT 43 1586.20
RX 12, PT 44 1587.04
RX 13, PT 45 1587.88
RX 14, PT 46 1588.73
RX 15, PT 47 1589.57
RX 16, PT 48 1590.41
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 3
RX 17, PT 49 1591.26
RX 18, PT 50 1592.10
RX 19, PT 51 1592.95
RX 20, PT 52 1593.79
RX 21, PT 53 1594.64
RX 22, PT 54 1595.49
RX 23, PT 55 1596.34
RX 24, PT 56 1597.19
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 4
RX 25, PT 57 1598.04
RX 26, PT 58 1598.89
RX 27, PT 59 1599.75
RX 28, PT 60 1600.60
RX 29, PT 61 1601.46
RX 30, PT 62 1602.31
RX 31, PT 63 1603.17
RX 32, PT 64 1604.035-54
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 3 Display the ROADM node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate two alarms for each side of the
shelf, one for an LOS on the OPT-BST-L card, and the other for an LOS on the OSC-CSM or
OSCM card. If OSCM cards are installed on ANSI shelves, EOC DCC Termination Failure
alarms will appear.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following steps:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on
page 11-50.
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Step 6 If MMU cards are installed, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 7.
a. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Click the Admin State table cell for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
d. Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
e. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
f. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
g. Click the Admin State table cell for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 7 Display the Side B 32WSS-L in card view.
Step 8 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 5-2 on page 5-53, if needed.
Step 9 Click the Admin State table cell for the add port carrying the tested wavelength, then choose OOS,MT
(ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list. For example, if the tested wavelength
is 1530.33 nm (shown as 1530.3), you would click the Port 1 (CHAN-RX) Admin State field and choose
OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list.
Step 10 Change the administrative state of the pass-through port corresponding to the port in Step 9 to OOS,MT
(ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). For example, if the tested wavelength is 1577.86 nm (shown
as 1577.8), you would click the Port 33 (PASS-THROUGH) Admin State field and choose OOS,MT or
Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list. Refer to Table 5-2 on page 5-53, if needed.
Step 11 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm. 5-55
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 12 Repeat Steps 8 through 11 for all wavelengths that you will test.
Step 13 Display the Side A 32WSS-L in card view.
Step 14 Repeat Steps 8 through 12 for the Side A 32WSS-L card.
Step 15 Display the Side B 32DMX-L in card view and complete the following steps:
a. Choose the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
b. For Port 33 (COM-RX), click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or
Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
c. Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 16 Repeat Step 15 for the Side A 32DMX-L card.
Step 17 Complete the “DLP-G362 Verify ROADM Node L-Band Pass-Through Channels” task on page 5-56.
Step 18 Complete the following tasks for channels that will be added or dropped on the node.
• DLP-G363 Verify the Side B ROADM L-Band Add/Drop Channels, page 5-64
• DLP-G364 Verify the Side A ROADM L-Band Add/Drop Channels, page 5-69
Step 19 If MMU cards are installed, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 20.
a. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Click the Admin State table cell for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and
choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
d. Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
e. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
f. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
g. Click the Admin State table cell for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and
choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 20 Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 21 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you tested.
Step 22 Click the Admin State table cell then choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService
(ETSI) from the drop-down list for all ports that were changed to OOS,MT or Locked,Maintenance.
Step 23 Click Apply.
Step 24 Repeat Steps 21 through 23 for all the ports that are OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance on the Side B
32WSS-L card.
Step 25 Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 26 Repeat Steps 21 through 24 for all ports on the Side A 32WSS-L card.
Step 27 Display the Side B 32DMX-L card in card view.
Step 28 Choose the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 29 For Port 33, click the Admin State table cell and choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or
Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 30 Click Apply.
Step 31 Display the Side A 32DMX-L card in card view.
Step 32 Repeat Steps 28 through 30 for the Side A 32DMX-L card.5-56
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 33 Delete both OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on page 11-50.
Step 34 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
Step 35 Create the two OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Step 36 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment failure alarms appear on the node. If alarms appear, investigate and resolve
them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for
procedures.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G362 Verify ROADM Node L-Band Pass-Through Channels
Note Throughout this task, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Step 1 Create a physical loopback on the Side A OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX
port to its LINE RX port. For OPT-BST-L cards, connect a 10-dB bulk attenuator to the fiber. (OSC-CSM
cards do not require attenuation.)
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Purpose This task verifies the signal flow through a ROADM node for L-band
pass-through channels. Configuring a channel pass-through mode means
that the channel passes through both 32WSS-L cards. The channel passes
through the first 32WSS-L card from the COM RX port to the EXP TX
port. In the second 32WSS-L card, the channel goes from the EXP RX port
to the COM TX port. The channel is not terminated inside the node. If
MMU cards are installed, the channel passes through the MMU COM RX
and EXP TX ports to the 32WSS-L COM RX and EXP TX ports on one
side. On the other side, the channel goes from the 32WSS-L EXP RX and
32WSS-L COM TX ports to the MMU EXP RX and COM TX.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_L
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-57
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 2 If an OPT-AMP-L amplifier (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on Side A (where the physical
loopback was created), perform the following steps. If not, continue with Step 3.
a. Display the OPT-AMP-L card in card view, then click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Optics Thresholds tabs.
b. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh. The alarm thresholds for the OPT-AMP-L card
will appear.
c. Double-click the Power Failure Low table cell for Port 1 (1-Line-2-1 RX) and delete the current
value.
d. Type a new value of –30. Press the Enter key.
e. In the CTC window, click Apply, then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 3 If an OPT-AMP-L amplifier (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on Side B (where the physical
loopback was created), perform the following steps. If not, continue with Step 4.
a. Display the OPT-AMP-L card in card view, then click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Optics Thresholds tabs.
b. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh. The alarm thresholds for the OPT-AMP-L card
will appear.
c. Double-click the Power Failure Low table cell for Port 1 (1-Line-2-1 RX) and delete the current
value.
d. Type a new value of –30. Press the Enter key.
e. In the CTC window, click Apply, then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 4 Wait 2 to 3 minutes, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side A OSCM or OSC-CSM card and the OPT-BST-L
card have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the OSC link is active on Side A. If the
alarms do not clear, contact your next level of support.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
Step 5 Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 6 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 7 Click the Operating Mode table cell and choose Pass Through from the drop-down list.
Step 8 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 9 Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 10 Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for the Side B 32WSS-L card.
Step 11 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 12.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you will test, then continue with Step 13.
Step 12 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-26 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test.
Step 13 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card DWDM TX port to the Side B
OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM LINE RX port. If a Side B OPT-AMP-L card is installed, insert a 10-dB
attenuator on the fiber coming from the TXP_MR_10E_L card.5-58
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 14 If an OPT-AMP-L card configured as an OPT-PRE is installed on Side B, complete the following steps.
If not, continue with Step 15.
a. Display the Side B OPT-AMP-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power parameter for Port 1. Record the value.
d. Display the Side B OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 2 (if an OPT-BST-L card) or Port 3 (if an OSC-CSM card). Verify
that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean
Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection between the OPT-AMP-L
card and the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card. Check the values again. If they still do not match,
contact your next level of support.
g. Complete the “DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-27.
Step 15 If MMU cards are installed complete the following steps. If an MMU cards are not installed, continue
with Step 16.
a. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 3 (COM-RX) power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side B OPT-AMP-L card provisioned as an OPT-PRE is installed, display it in card view and
complete Step e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-AMP-L Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total
Output Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side B OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g. If not, continue
with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the MMU card and the OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, or OSC-CSM cards. Check the values
again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
j. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX) of the Side B MMU card.
m. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.5-59
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 17.
Step 16 Verify the Side B 32WSS-L to OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, or OSC-CSM card cable connection:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side B OPT-AMP-L card provisioned as an OPT-PRE is installed, display it in card view and
complete Step e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2, then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side B OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g. If not, continue
with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3,
then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2, then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 32WSS-L card and the OPT-AMP-L, OPT-BST-L, or OSC-CSM card. Check the values
again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 17 Verify the EXPRESS cable connection between the two 32WSS-L cards:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 65 (EXP-TX) Power parameter. Record the value.
a. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power value for Port 66 (EXP-RX). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in
Step c, +/–1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L cards. Check the values again. If they still do not
match, contact your next level of support.
Step 18 Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 19 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn> Parameters tabs, where n = the connector
number containing the wavelength you are testing. Refer to Table 5-2 on page 5-53, if needed.
Step 20 Wait 60 to 70 seconds, then locate the Power and VOA Power Ref parameters for the tested
PASS-THROUGH port. Verify that the Power value is equal to the VOA Power Ref value, +/– 1.5 dBm.
If the Power value is not equal to the VOA Power Ref value, +/– 1.5 dBm, contact your next level of
support.
Step 21 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side A, continue with Step 22.
a. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.5-60
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).
h. If an OPT-BST-L card is installed on Side A, display it in card view and complete Step i. If not,
continue with Step j.
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card, and the MMU card. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 23.
Step 22 If an OPT-BST-L card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 23.
a. Display the Side B OPT-BST-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 1 Power parameter. Record the value.
d. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 67. Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c,
+/–1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the
fiber connection between the OPT-BST-L and 32WSS-L cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-6.
Step 23 If a Side A OPT-AMP-L card provisioned as an OPT-PRE is installed, complete the following steps. If
not, continue with Step 24.
a. Display the Side A OPT-AMP-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power parameter for Port 1 (COM-RX). Record the value.
d. Display the Side A OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.5-61
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
f. Locate the Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX) (OPT-BST-L) or Port 3 (COM-TX) (OSC-CSM).
Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 2.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115
Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection between the
OPT-AMP-L card and the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card. Check the values again. If they still do
not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side A OPT-AMP-L card provisioned as an OPT-PRE, complete the “DLP-G360 Verify the
OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-27.
Step 24 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps, then continue with Step 26. If an
MMU card is not installed on Side A, continue with Step 25.
a. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 3 (COM-RX) power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side A OPT-AMP-L card provisioned in OPT-PRE mode is installed, display it in card view and
complete Step e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-AMP-L Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total
Output Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If an OPT-BST-L card is installed on Side A, display it in card view and complete Step g. If not,
continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the MMU card and the OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, or OSC-CSM cards. Check the values
again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
j. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX) of the Side A MMU card.
m. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS and cards and the MMU cards. Check the values
again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 26.
Step 25 Verify the Side A 32WSS-L card to OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, or OSC-CSM card cable connection:
a. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side A OPT-AMP-L card is installed, display it in card view, and complete Step e. If not,
continue with Step f. 5-62
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side A OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view, and complete Step g. If not, continue
with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/–1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 32WSS-L card and the OPT-AMP-L, OPT-BST-L, or OSC-CSM card. Check the values
again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 26 Verify the EXPRESS cable connection between the two 32WSS-L cards:
a. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 65 (EXP-TX) Power parameter. Record the value.
a. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power value for Port 66 (EXP-RX). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in
Step c, +/– 1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L cards. Check the values again. If they still do not
match, contact your next level of support.
Step 27 Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 28 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn> Parameters tabs, where n = the connector
number containing the wavelength you are testing. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 29 Wait 60 to 70 seconds (or click Reset), then locate the Power and VOA Power Ref parameters for the
tested PASS-THROUGH port. Verify that the Power value is equal to the VOA Power Ref value,
+/– 1.5 dBm. If the Power value is not equal to the VOA Power Ref value +/– 1.5 dBm, consult your next
level of support.
Step 30 If an MMU card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side B, continue with Step 31.
a. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).
h. If a Side B OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i. If not, continue
with Step j.5-63
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card and the MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 32.
Step 31 If an OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If not, continue
with Step 32.
a. Display the Side B OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 1 (COM-RX) Power parameter (OPT-BST-L card) or the Port 2 (COM-RX) Power
parameter (OSC-CSM card). Record the value.
d. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 67 (COM-TX). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in
Step c, +/–1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST-L card and the OSC-CSM or 32WSS-L card.
Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-6.
Step 32 Repeat Steps 18 through 20 and 27 through 29 for the remaining wavelengths to be tested. If you have
tested all the wavelengths, continue with Step 33.
Step 33 Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 34 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 35 In the Operating Mode, click the table cell and choose Not Assigned from the drop-down list for all
wavelengths.
Step 36 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 37 Display the Side A 32WSS-L in card view.
Step 38 Repeat Steps 34 through 36 for the Side A 32WSS-L card.
Step 39 Remove the TXP or tunable laser from the Side B OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM line side TX and RX ports.
Step 40 Remove the loopback fiber from the line RX and TX in the Side A OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card.
Step 41 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).5-64
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
DLP-G363 Verify the SideB ROADM L-Band Add/Drop Channels
Note Throughout this task, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), display the Alarms tab.
Step 2 Create a physical loopback on the Side B OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX
port to its LINE RX port. For OPT-BST-L cards, connect a 10-dB bulk attenuator to the fiber. (OSC-CSM
cards do not require attenuation.)
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 3 Wait 2 to 3 minutes, then click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side B OSCM or
OSC-CSM card and the OPT-BST-L card have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the
OSC link is active on Side B.
Note For ANSI shelves, EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the OSC
signal loopback.
Step 4 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 5.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you are testing, then continue with Step 7.
Step 5 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-26 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test. See
Table 5-2 on page 5-53, if needed.
Step 6 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the following steps. If you are using a tunable laser,
continue with Step 7.
a. Display the TXP_MR_10E_L in card view.
b. Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
c. Locate the Port 2 (Trunk) table cell for the TX Optical Pwr parameter. Record the value.
Purpose This procedure verifies the signal flow through Side B of a ROADM node
for L-band add/drop channels.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_L
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-65
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 7 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card DWDM TX port to the Side B fiber
patch panel MUX port that corresponds to the Side B 32WSS-L card port carrying the tested wavelength.
Step 8 Connect the TXP_MR_10E_L DWDM RX port or the power meter RX port to the Side B fiber patch
panel DMX port that is connected with the Side B 32DMX-L card CHAN-TX port carrying the tested
wavelength. (If the TXP_MR_10E_L card was installed during Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node,” simply
verify the cable connection.)
Step 9 Display the 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 10 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 11 For each wavelength that you will test, click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose
Add Drop from the drop-down list.
Step 12 Click Apply and then Yes, to confirm.
Step 13 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 5-2 on page 5-53, if needed.
Step 14 Find the tested wavelength CHAN RX port, then scroll to the right until you see the Power Add
parameter. Verify that the Power Add value for the tested port CHAN RX is equal to the output power
level of the tunable laser or the TXP_MR_10E_L card measured in Step 6, +/– 1.0 dBm.
Step 15 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table cell
for Port 67 (COM-TX) for the wavelength under test.
Step 16 Verify that the power value from Step 15 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS-L).Port COM-TX.Power set
+/– 1.0 dBm on Side B. To view this set point:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 32WSS-L card on Side B.
c. Expand the COM-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS-L).Port COM-TX.Power parameter on the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 15 (+/– 2.0 dBm), contact your next
level of support.
Step 17 If an MMU card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side B, continue with Step 18.
a. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).
h. If a Side B OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i. If not, continue
with Step j.5-66
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card and the MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 19.
Step 18 Verify the connection between the 32WSS-L card and the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM cards:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. If a OPT-BST-L card is installed on Side B, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not,
continue with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
f. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
g. Verify that the value in Step e or f matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If so, continue
with Step 19. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean
the fiber connection between the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card and the 32WSS-L cards. Check the
values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 19 If an OPT-AMP-L card provisioned in OPT-PRE mode is installed on Side B, complete the following
steps. If not, continue with Step 20.
a. Display the Side B OPT-AMP-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power parameter for Port 1 (COM-RX). Record the value.
d. Display the Side B OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Port 2 (COM-TX) Power value (for OPT-BST-L cards) or Port 3 (COM-TX) Power value
(for OSC-CSM cards). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If
not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber
connection between the OPT-AMP-L card and the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card. Check the values
again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side B OPT-AMP-L card, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-7.
Step 20 If an MMU card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side B, continue with Step 21.
a. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.5-67
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
d. If an OPT-AMP-L card provisioned in OPT-PRE mode is installed on Side B, display it in card view
and complete Step e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-PRE Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs. Record the Total Output
Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side B OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g. If not, continue
with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters
tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the MMU card and the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
j. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX).
m. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 22.
Step 21 Verify the connection between the Side B 32WSS-L card and the OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L (in
OPT-PRE mode), or OSC-CSM card:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS-L in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side B OPT-AMP-L card provisioned in OPT-PRE mode is installed, display it in card view and
complete Step e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side B OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g. If not, continue
with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 32WSS-L card and the OPT-AMP-L, OPT-BST-L, or OSC-CSM card.5-68
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 22 Verify the Side B 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L connection:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table
cell for Port 69 (DROP-TX).
c. Display the Side B 32DMX-L card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Record the value in the Port 2
(COM-RX) table cell. Verify that the value is equal to the value recorded in b, +/– 1.0 dBm. If not,
use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match,
contact your next level of support.
Step 23 Display the Side B 32DMX-L card in card view.
Step 24 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tab. Record the CHAN-TX port value under the
Power parameter for the wavelength under test.
Step 25 Verify that the power value from Step 24 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (32DMX-L).Port CHAN-TX.Power
set point +/– 2 dBm on Side B. To view this set point:
a. Go to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) and click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 32DMX-L card.
c. Expand the CHAN-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Side B Shelf i Slot i (32DMX-L).Port CHAN-TX.Power parameter on the right
pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 24 (+/– 2 dBm), contact your next level
of support.
Step 26 Display the TXP_MR_10E_L card in card view.
Step 27 Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
Step 28 In the Port 2 (Trunk) column, locate the RX Optical Power value. Verify that the value matches the power
in Step 24, +/– 2 dBm. If the power values do not match (+/– 2 dBm), complete the following steps:
a. Remove, clean, and replace the cable connecting the TXP_MR_10E_C RX port to the Side B fiber
patch panel DMX port for the tested wavelength. See the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors”
procedure on page 14-31.
b. Repeat this step. If the power values still do not match (+/– 2 dBm) contact your next level of
support.
Step 29 Repeat Steps 4 through 28 for the remaining wavelengths.
Step 30 Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 31 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 32 Click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose Not Assigned from the drop-down list for
all wavelengths.
Step 33 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 34 Disconnect the TXP or tunable laser from the Side B patch panel.
Step 35 Unplug the physical loopback fiber from the line TX and RX in the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card.5-69
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 36 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G364 Verify the SideA ROADM L-Band Add/Drop Channels
Note Throughout this task, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), display the Alarms tab.
Step 2 Create a physical loopback on the Side A OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX
port to its LINE RX port. For OPT-BST-L cards, connect a 10-dB bulk attenuator to the fiber. (OSC-CSM
cards do not require attenuation.)
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 3 Wait 2 to 3 minutes, then click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side A OSCM or
OSC-CSM card and the OPT-BST-L card have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the
OSC link is active on Side A.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
Step 4 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 5.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you are testing, then continue with Step 7.
Step 5 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-26 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test. Refer
to Table 5-2 on page 5-53, if needed.
Purpose This procedure verifies the signal flow through Side A of a ROADM node
for L-band add/drop channels.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_L
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-70
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 6 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the following steps. If you are using a tunable laser,
continue with Step 7.
a. Display the TXP_MR_10E_L in card view.
b. Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
c. Locate the Port 2 (Trunk) table cell for the TX Optical Pwr parameter. Record the value.
Step 7 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card DWDM TX port to the Side A fiber
patch panel MUX port that corresponds to the Side A 32WSS-L card port carrying the tested wavelength.
Step 8 Connect the TXP_MR_10E_L DWDM RX port or the power meter RX port to the Side A fiber patch
panel DMX port that is connected with the Side A 32DMX-L card CHAN-TX port carrying the tested
wavelength. (If the TXP_MR_10E_L card was installed during Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node,” simply
verify the cable connection.)
Step 9 Display the 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 10 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 11 For each wavelength that you will test, click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose
Add Drop from the drop-down list.
Step 12 Click Apply and then Yes, to confirm.
Step 13 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 5-2 on page 5-53, if needed.
Step 14 Find the tested wavelength CHAN RX port, then scroll to the right until you see the Power Add
parameter. Verify that the Power Add value for the tested port CHAN RX is equal to the output power
level of the tunable laser or the TXP_MR_10E_L card measured in Step 6, +/– 1.0 dBm.
Step 15 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table cell
for Port 67 (COM-TX) for the wavelength under test.
Step 16 Verify that the power value from Step 15 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS-L).Port COM-TX.Power +/–
1.0 dBm on Side A. To view this set point:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 32WSS-L card on Side A.
c. Expand the Port COM-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS-L).Port COM-TX.Power parameter on the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 15 (+/– 2.0 dBm), contact your next
level of support.
Step 17 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side A, continue with Step 18.
a. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.5-71
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).
h. If a Side A OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i. If not, continue
with Step j.
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card and the MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 19.
Step 18 Verify the connection between the 32WSS-L card and the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM cards:
a. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. If a OPT-BST-L card is installed on Side A, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not,
continue with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
f. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
g. Verify that the value in Step e or f matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If so, continue
with Step 19. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean
the fiber connection between the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card and the 32WSS-L cards. Check the
values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 19 If an OPT-AMP-L card provisioned in OPT-PRE mode is installed on Side A, complete the following
steps. If not, continue with Step 20.
a. Display the Side A OPT-AMP-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power parameter for Port 1 (COM-RX). Record the value.
d. Display the Side A OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Port 2 (COM-TX) Power value (for OPT-BST-L cards) or Port 3 (COM-TX) Power value
(for OSC-CSM cards). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If
not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber
connection between the OPT-AMP-L card and the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card. Check the values
again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side A OPT-AMP-L card, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-7.5-72
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 20 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side A, continue with Step 21.
a. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If an OPT-AMP-L card provisioned in OPT-PRE mode is installed on Side A, display it in card view
and complete Step e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-PRE Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs. Record the Total Output
Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side A OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g. If not, continue
with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the MMU card and the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
j. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX).
m. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 22.
Step 21 Verify the connection between the Side A 32WSS-L card and the OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L (in
OPT-PRE mode), or OSC-CSM card:
a. Display the Side A 32WSS-L in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side A OPT-AMP-L card provisioned in OPT-PRE mode is installed, display it in card view and
complete Step e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side A OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g. If not, continue
with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.5-73
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
h. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 32WSS-L card and the OPT-AMP-L, OPT-BST-L, or OSC-CSM card.
Step 22 Verify the Side A 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L connection:
a. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table
cell for Port 69 (DROP-TX).
c. Display the Side A 32DMX-L card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Record the value in the Port 2
(COM-RX) table cell. Verify that the value is equal to the value recorded in b, +/– 1.0 dBm. If not,
use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match,
contact your next level of support.
Step 23 Display the Side A 32DMX-L card in card view.
Step 24 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tab. Record the CHAN-TX port value under the
Power parameter for the wavelength under test.
Step 25 Verify that the power value from Step 24 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (32DMX-L).Port CHAN-TX.Power
set point +/– 2 dBm on Side A. To view this set point:
a. Go to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) and click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 32DMX-L card on Side A.
c. Expand the Port CHAN-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (32DMX-L).Port CHAN-TX.Power parameter on the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 24 (+/– 2 dBm), contact your next level
of support.
Step 26 Display the TXP_MR_10E_L card in card view.
Step 27 Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
Step 28 In the Port 2 (Trunk) column, locate the RX Optical Power value. Verify that the value matches the power
in Step 24, +/– 2 dBm. If the power values do not match (+/– 2 dBm), complete the following steps:
a. Remove, clean, and replace the cable connecting the TXP_MR_10E_L RX port to the Side A fiber
patch panel DMX port for the tested wavelength. See the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors”
procedure on page 14-31.
b. Repeat this step. If the power values still do not match (+/– 2 dBm) contact your next level of
support.
Step 29 Repeat Steps 4 through 28 for the remaining wavelengths.
Step 30 Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 31 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 32 Click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose Not Assigned from the drop-down list for
all wavelengths.
Step 33 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.5-74
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 34 Disconnect the TXP or tunable laser from the Side A patch panel.
Step 35 Unplug the physical loopback fiber from the line TX and RX in the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card.
Step 36 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G180 Perform the ROADM Node with 40-WSS-C and
40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Note Because the node is isolated and no line-side fibers are connected during the test, the power levels going
into the line-side cards will not be the same as the levels after the node is connected to the network.
Therefore, if the ROADM shelf does not contain either OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifiers, and
OPT-PRE amplifiers on both the Side B and Side A sides, lower the OPT-PRE power thresholds so that
the ROADM shelf turns on properly. At the end of the test, you will run ANS to configure the node with
the correct parameters for the network acceptance test.
Note Throughout this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Purpose This acceptance test verifies that a ROADM node provisioned for C-band
wavelengths is operating properly before you connect it to the network.
The test verifies the operation of the amplifiers and also verifies that each
add/drop and pass-through port on the 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C cards
operates properly. The test also checks the power levels at each transmit
and receive port to ensure that power loss in the cabling is within tolerance.
If MMU cards are installed, the test verifies that the MMU insertion loss
does not impact add, drop, or pass through circuits.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-75
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 1 Make a copy of Table 5-3 on page 5-76 and place it in a convenient location for reference throughout
this procedure. The table shows the 40-WSS-C ports and the wavelengths assigned to them. The
40 wavelengths are divided among five physical multi-fiber push on (MPO) connectors on the
40-WSS-C card. Each MPO connector is assigned eight wavelengths. In Cisco Transport controller
(CTC), the MPO connector appears in the card view Provisioning > Optical Chn:Optical Connector tab.
Each Optical Connector subtab represents an MPO connector. Ports 1 through 40 are the channel
(CHAN) RX (add) ports; Ports 41 through 80 are the pass-through ports.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the ROADM node that you want to test. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 Display the ROADM node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate LOS alarms on the OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-AMP-C cards, and on the OSC-CSM and OSCM cards. If OSCM cards are
installed in ANSI shelves, EOC SDCC Termination Failure alarms will also appear.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are either Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following steps:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on
page 11-50.
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Note The OSC terminations created will generate LOS alarms on the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E,
OPT-AMP-C cards and on the OSC-CSM and OSCM cards. If OSCM cards are installed in
ANSI shelves, EOC DCC Termination Failure alarms will also appear.
Step 6 If MMU cards are installed, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 7.
a. Display the Side B MMU in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Click the Admin State table cell for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
d. Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
e. Display the Side A MMU in card view.
f. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. 5-76
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
g. Click the Admin State table cell for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 7 Display the Side B 40-WSS-C in card view.
Step 8 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connector n > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 5-3, if needed.
Step 9 Click the Admin State table cell for the add port carrying the tested wavelength, then choose OOS,MT
(ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list. For example, if the tested wavelength
is 1530.33 nm (shown as 1530.3), you would click the Port 1 (CHAN-RX) Admin State field and choose
OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list.
Step 10 Change the administrative state of the pass-through port corresponding to the port in Step 9 to OOS,MT
(ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). For example, if the tested wavelength is 1530.33 nm (shown
as 1530.3), you would click the Port 33 (PASS-THROUGH) Admin State field and choose OOS,MT or
Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list. Refer to Table 5-3, if needed.
Table 5-3 40-WSS-C Ports and Wavelengths Test Checklist
40-WSS-C Provisioning
Subtab Port # Wavelength
Tested:
Pass-Through
Tested:
Add/Drop
Side A
Tested:
Add/Drop
Side B
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 1
RX 1, PT 41 1530.33
RX 2, PT 42 1531.12
RX 3, PT 43 1531.90
RX 4, PT 44 1532.68
RX 5, PT 45 1533.47
RX 6, PT 46 1533.47
RX 7, PT 47 1535.04
RX 8, PT 48 1535.82
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 2
RX 9, PT 49 1536.81
RX 10, PT 50 1537.40
RX 11, PT 51 1538.19
RX 12, PT 52 1538.98
RX 13, PT 53 1539.77
RX 14, PT 54 1540.56
RX 15, PT 55 1541.35
RX 16, PT 56 1542.145-77
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 11 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 12 Repeat Steps 8 through 11 for each wavelength that you will test.
Step 13 Display the Side A 40-WSS-C in card view.
Step 14 Repeat Steps 8 through 12 for the Side A 40-WSS-C card.
Step 15 Display the Side B 40-DMX-C card in card view and complete the following steps:
a. Choose the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
b. For Port 41 (COM-RX), click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or
Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
c. Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 16 Repeat Step 15 for the Side A 40-DMX-C card.
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 3
RX 17, PT 57 1542.19
RX 18, PT 58 1543.73
RX 19, PT 59 1544.53
RX 20, PT 60 1545.32
RX 21, PT 61 1546.12
RX 22, PT 62 1546.92
RX 23, PT 63 1547.72
RX 24, PT 64 1548.51
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 4
RX 25, PT 65 1549.32
RX 26, PT 66 1550.12
RX 27, PT 67 1550.92
RX 28, PT 68 1551.72
RX 29, PT 69 1552.52
RX 30, PT 70 1553.33
RX 31, PT 71 1554.13
RX 32, PT 72 1554.94
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 5
RX 33, PT 73 1555.75
RX 34, PT 74 1556.55
RX 35, PT 75 1557.36
RX 36, PT 76 1558.17
RX 37, PT 77 1558.98
RX 38, PT 78 1559.71
RX 39, PT 79 1560.61
RX 40, PT 80 1561.42
Table 5-3 40-WSS-C Ports and Wavelengths Test Checklist (continued)
40-WSS-C Provisioning
Subtab Port # Wavelength
Tested:
Pass-Through
Tested:
Add/Drop
Side A
Tested:
Add/Drop
Side B5-78
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 17 Complete the “DLP-G310 Verify ROADM Node C-Band Pass-Through Channels with 40-WSS-C
Cards” task on page 5-79.
Step 18 Complete the following tasks for channels that will be added or dropped on the node.
• DLP-G311 Verify the Side B ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 40-WSS-C Cards,
page 5-87
• DLP-G312 Verify the Side A ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 40-WSS-C Cards,
page 5-92
Step 19 If MMU cards are installed, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 20.
a. Display the Side B MMU in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Click Admin State for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and choose IS,AINS
(ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
d. Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
e. Display the Side A MMU in card view.
f. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
g. Click Admin State for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and choose IS,AINS
(ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 20 Display the Side B 40-WSS-C in card view.
Step 21 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you tested.
Step 22 Click the Admin State table cell then choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService
(ETSI) from the drop-down list for all ports that were changed to OOS,MT or Locked,Maintenance in
Steps 9 and 10.
Step 23 Click Apply.
Step 24 Repeat Steps 21 through 23 for all the ports that are in OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance state on the
Side B 40-WSS-C card.
Step 25 Display the Side A 40-WSS-C in card view.
Step 26 Repeat Steps 21 through 23 for all ports on the Side A 40-WSS-C card.
Step 27 Display the Side B 40-DMX-C in card view.
Step 28 Choose the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 29 For Port 33, click the Admin State table cell and choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or
Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 30 Click Apply.
Step 31 Display the Side A 40-DMX-C card in card view.
Step 32 Repeat Steps 28 through 30 for the Side A 40-DMX-C card.
Step 33 Delete both OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on page 11-50.
Step 34 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
Step 35 Create the two OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.5-79
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 36 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment failure alarms appear on the node. If alarms appear, investigate and resolve
them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for
procedures.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G310 Verify ROADM Node C-Band Pass-Through Channels with 40-WSS-C
Cards
Note Throughout this task, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Step 1 Create a physical loopback on the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card by connecting the
LINE TX port to its LINE RX port. For OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards, connect a 10-dB bulk attenuator
to the fiber. (OSC-CSM cards do not require attenuation.)
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Purpose This task verifies the signal flow through a ROADM node for C-band
pass-through channels. Pass-through channels pass through both
40-WSS-C cards. The channels pass through the first 40-WSS-C from the
COM-RX port to the EXP-TX port. In the second 40-WSS-C, the channel
goes from the EXP-RX port to the COM-TX port. The channel is not
terminated inside the node. If MMU cards are installed, the channel passes
through the MMU COM-RX and EXP-TX ports to the 40-WSS-C
COM-RX and EXP-TX ports on one side. On the other side, the channel
goes from the 40-WSS-C EXP-RX and COM-TX ports to the MMU
EXP-RX and COM-TX ports.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 4-126
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-80
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 2 If an OPT-PRE amplifier is installed on Side A (where the physical loopback was created), perform the
following steps. If not, continue with Step 3.
a. Display the OPT-PRE card in card view, then click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Optics Thresholds tabs.
b. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh. The alarm thresholds for the OPT-PRE card will
appear.
c. Double-click the Power Failure Low table cell for Port 1 (COM-RX) and delete the current value.
d. Type a new value of –30.0 and press the Enter key.
e. In the CTC window, click Apply, then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 3 If an OPT-PRE or OSC-CSM card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If not, continue
with Step 4.
a. Display the Side B OPT-PRE card in card view, then click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Optics Thresholds tabs.
b. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh. The alarm thresholds for the OPT-PRE card will
appear.
c. Double-click the Power Failure Low table cell for Port 1 (COM-RX) and delete the current value.
d. Type a new value of –30.0 and press the Enter key.
e. In the CTC window, click Apply, then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 4 Wait 2 to 3 minutes, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side A OSCM or OSC-CSM card and the OPT-BST
or OPT-BST-E card have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the OSC link is active
on Side A. If the alarms do not clear, contact your next level of support.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC SDCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
Step 5 Display the Side A 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Step 6 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 7 Click the Operating Mode table cell for the wavelength under test and choose Pass Through from the
drop-down list.
Step 8 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 9 Display the Side B 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Step 10 Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for the Side B 40-WSS-C card.
Step 11 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 12.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you will test, then continue with Step 13.
Step 12 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test.
Step 13 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the Side B
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM LINE RX port. If a Side B OPT-PRE is installed, insert a 10-dB
attenuator on the fiber coming from the TXP_MR_10E_C card.5-81
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note If using a pre-installed TXP_MR-10E_C card that is connected to the 40-DMX-C, there is no need to
connect the TXP_MR_10E_C DWDM TX port to the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM LINE RX
port. Install an optical loopback between the LINE TX and RX ports on the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or
OSC-CSM card.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 14 If an OPT-PRE or OSC-CSM card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If not, continue
with Step 15.
a. Display the Side B OPT-PRE in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power parameter for Port 1 (COM-RX). Record the value.
d. Display the Side B OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX) (OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E) or Port 3 (COM-TX)
(OSC-CSM). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 2.0 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-PRE card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card. Check the values
again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side B OPT-PRE card, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-7.
Step 15 If an MMU card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps, then continue with Step 17. If an
MMU card is not installed, continue with Step 16.
a. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 3 (COM-RX) power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side B OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-PRE Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output
Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the MMU card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-PRE, or OSC-CSM cards. Check the
values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
j. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.5-82
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX) of the Side B MMU card.
m. Display the Side B 40-WSS-C card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 40-WSS-C and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 17.
Step 16 Verify the Side B 40-WSS-C card to OPT-BST, OPT-PRE, or OSC-CSM card cable connection:
a. Display the Side B 40-WSS-C in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 84 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side B OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If an OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed on Side B, display it in card view and complete Step
g. If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for
Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 40-WSS-C card and the OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card. Check
the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 17 Verify the EXPRESS cable connection between the two 40-WSS-C cards:
a. Display the Side B 40-WSS-C in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 81 (EXP-TX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. Display the Side A 40-WSS-C in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for EXPRESS Port 82 (EXP-RX). Verify that the value matches the power
recorded in Step c, +/–1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on
page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection between the 40-WSS-C cards. Check the values again. If
they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 18 Display the Side A 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Step 19 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn> Parameters tabs, where n = the connector
number containing the wavelength you are testing. Refer to Table 5-3 on page 5-76, if needed.
Step 20 Wait 60 to 70 seconds (or click Reset), then locate the Power and VOA Power Ref parameters for the
tested PASS-THROUGH port. Verify that the Power value is equal to the VOA Power Ref value,
+/– 1.5 dBm. If the Power value is not equal to the VOA Power Ref value +/–1.5 dBm, contact your next
level of support.5-83
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 21 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side A, continue with Step 22.
a. Display the Side A 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 83 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 40-WSS-C and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).
h. If a Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i.
If not, continue with Step j.
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the MMU cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 23.
Step 22 If an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If
not, continue with Step 23.
a. Display the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 1 (COM-RX) Power parameter (OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards) or the Port 2
(COM-RX) Power parameter (OSC-CSM cards). Record the value.
d. Display the Side A 40-WSS-C in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 83 (COM-TX). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in
Step c, +/–1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the
40-WSS-C card. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of
support.
g. For the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-6.
Step 23 If a OPT-PRE card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 24.
a. Display the Side A OPT-PRE in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 1 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. Display the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card in card view.5-84
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX) (OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E) or Port 3 (COM-TX)
(OSC-CSM). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 2.0 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-PRE card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card. Check the values
again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side A OPT-PRE, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-7.
Step 24 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps, then continue with Step 26. If an
MMU card is not installed on Side A, continue with Step 25.
a. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 3 (COM-RX) power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side A OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-PRE Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output
Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the MMU card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-PRE, or OSC-CSM cards. Check the
values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
j. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX) of the Side A MMU card.
m. Display the Side A 40-WSS-C card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 84 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 40-WSS-C and cards and the MMU cards. Check the values
again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 26.
Step 25 Verify the Side A 40-WSS-C card to OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-PRE, or OSC-CSM card cable
connection:
a. Display the Side A 40-WSS-C in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 84 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.5-85
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
d. If a Side A OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for
Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 40-WSS-C card and the OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card. Check
the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 26 Verify the EXPRESS cable connection between the two 40-WSS-C cards:
a. Display the Side A 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 81 (EXP-TX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. Display the Side B 40-WSS-C card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 82 (EXP-RX). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in
Step c, +/– 1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 40-WSS-C cards. Check the values again. If they still do not
match, contact your next level of support.
Step 27 Display the Side B 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Step 28 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn> Parameters tabs, where n = the connector
number containing the wavelength you are testing. Refer to Table 5-3 on page 5-76, if needed.
Step 29 Wait 60 to 70 seconds (or click Reset), then locate the Power and VOA Power Ref parameters for the
tested PASS-THROUGH port. Verify that the Power value is equal to the VOA Power Ref value,
+/– 1.5 dBm. If the Power value is not equal to the VOA Power Ref value +/– 1.5 dBm, consult your next
level of support.
Step 30 If an MMU card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side B, continue with Step 31.
a. Display the Side B 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 83 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 40-WSS-C and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).5-86
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
h. If a Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i. If
not, continue with Step j.
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the MMU cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 32.
Step 31 If an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If
not, continue with Step 32.
a. Display the Side B OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 1 (COM-RX) Power parameter (OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards) or the Port 2
(COM-RX) Power parameter (OSC-CSM cards). Record the value.
d. Display the Side B 40-WSS-C card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 83 (COM-TX). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in
Step c, +/–1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the
40-WSS-C cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of
support.
g. For the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-6.
Step 32 Complete Steps 18, 19, 27, and 28 for the additional wavelengths that you want to test. If you have tested
all the wavelengths, continue with Step 33.
Step 33 Display the Side B 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Step 34 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 35 In the Operating Mode column, click the table cell and choose Not Assigned from the drop-down list
for all wavelengths.
Step 36 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 37 Display the Side A 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Step 38 Repeat Steps 34 through 36 for the Side A 40-WSS-C card.
Step 39 If you used a tunable laser or installed a TXP_MR_10E_C card for this test, disconnect it or the tunable
laser from the Side B OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM line side RX ports.
Step 40 Remove the loopback fiber from the line RX and TX in the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM
card.
Step 41 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).5-87
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
DLP-G311 Verify the SideB ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 40-WSS-C
Cards
Note Throughout this task, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), display the Alarms tab.
Step 2 Create a physical loopback on the Side B OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card by connecting the
LINE TX port to its LINE RX port. For OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards, connect a 10-dB bulk attenuator
to the fiber. (OSC-CSM cards do not require attenuation.)
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 3 Wait 2 to 3 minutes, then click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side B OSCM or
OSC-CSM card and the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms
indicates that the OSC link is active on Side B.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
Step 4 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 5.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you are testing, then continue with Step 7.
Step 5 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test. Refer to
Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 6 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the following steps. If you are using a tunable laser
continue with Step 7.
a. Display the TXP_MR_10E_C in card view.
b. Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
Purpose This task verifies the signal flow through Side B of a ROADM node for
C-band add/drop channels.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-88
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
c. Locate the Port 2 (Trunk) table cell for the TX Optical Pwr parameter. Record the value.
Step 7 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the Side B fiber
patch panel MUX port that is connected to the Side B 40-WSS-C card CHAN RX port carrying the tested
wavelength. (If the TXP_MR_10E_C card was installed during Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node,” simply
verify the cable connection.)
Step 8 Connect the TXP_MR_10E_C DWDM RX port or the power meter RX port to the Side B fiber patch
panel DMX port that is connected with the Side B 40-DMX-C card CHAN-TX port carrying the tested
wavelength. (If the TXP_MR_10E_C card was installed during Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node,” simply
verify the cable connection.)
Step 9 Display the 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Step 10 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 11 For each wavelength that you will test, click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose
Add Drop from the drop-down list.
Step 12 Click Apply and then Yes, to confirm.
Step 13 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 14 Find the tested wavelength CHAN RX port, then scroll to the right until you see the Power Add
parameter. Verify that the Power Add value for the tested port CHAN RX is equal to the output power
level of the tunable laser or the TXP_MR_10E_C card measured in Step 6, +/– 1.0 dBm.
Step 15 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table cell
for Port 67 (COM-TX) for the wavelength under test.
Step 16 Verify that the power value from Step 15 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (40-WSS-C).Port COM-TX.Power set
point +/– 1.0 dBm on Side B. To view this set point:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 40-WSS-C card on Side B.
c. Expand the Port COM-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (40-WSS-C).Port COM-TX.Power parameter on the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 15 (+/– 2.0 dBm), contact your next
level of support.
Step 17 If an MMU card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side B, continue with Step 18.
a. Display the Side B 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 40-WSS-C and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).5-89
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
h. If a Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i. If
not, continue with Step j.
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the MMU cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 19.
Step 18 Verify the connection between the 40-WSS-C card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E or OSC-CSM cards:
a. Display the Side B 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. If a OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed on Side B, display it in card view and complete
Step e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
f. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
g. Verify that the value in Step e or f matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If so, continue
with Step 19. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean
the fiber connection between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the 40-WSS-C
cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 19 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 20.
a. Display the Side B OPT-PRE in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power parameter for Port 1 (COM-RX). Record the value.
d. Display the Side B OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Port 2 (COM-TX) Power value (for OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards) or Port 3 (COM-TX)
Power value (for OSC-CSM cards). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/–
1.5 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the
fiber connection between the OPT-PRE card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card.
Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side B OPT-PRE card, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-7.
Step 20 If an MMU card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side B, continue with Step 21.
a. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.5-90
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
d. If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side B, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not,
continue with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-PRE Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs. Record the Total Output
Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters
tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the MMU card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
j. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX).
m. Display the Side B 40-WSS-C card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 40-WSS-C and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 22.
Step 21 Verify the connection between the Side B 40-WSS-C card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-PRE, or
OSC-CSM card:
a. Display the Side B 40-WSS-C in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side B OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 40-WSS-C card and the OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, or OSC-CSM card.5-91
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 22 Verify the Side B 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C connection:
a. Display the Side B 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table
cell for Port 69 (DROP-TX).
c. Display the Side B 40-DMX-C card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Record the value in the Port 33
(COM-RX) table cell. Verify that the value is equal to the value recorded in b, +/– 1.0 dBm. If not,
use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match,
contact your next level of support.
Step 23 Display the Side B 40-DMX-C card in card view.
Step 24 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tab. Record the CHAN-TX port value under the
Power parameter for the wavelength under test.
Step 25 Verify that the power value from Step 24 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (40-DMX-C).Port CHAN-TX.Power
set point +/– 2 dBm on Side B. To view this set point:
a. Go to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) and click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 40-DMX-C card on Side B.
c. Expand the CHAN-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (40-DMX-C).Port CHAN-TX.Power parameter on the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 24 (+/– 2 dBm), contact your next level
of support.
Step 26 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, display it in card view. If not, read the values called for in
Step 28 from the optical test set or tunable laser you are using.
Step 27 Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
Step 28 In the Port 2 (Trunk) column, locate the RX Optical Power value. Verify that the value matches the power
recorded in Step 24, +/– 2 dBm. If the power values do not match (+/– 2 dBm), complete the following
steps:
a. Remove, clean, and replace the cable connecting the TXP_MR_10E_C RX port to the Side B fiber
patch panel DMX port for the tested wavelength. See the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors”
procedure on page 14-31.
b. Repeat this step. If the power values still do not match (+/– 2 dBm) contact your next level of
support.
Step 29 Repeat Steps 4 through 28 for the remaining wavelengths.
Step 30 Display the Side B 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Step 31 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 32 Click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose Not Assigned from the drop-down list for
all wavelengths.
Step 33 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 34 Disconnect the TXP or tunable laser from the Side B patch panel.
Step 35 Unplug the physical loopback fiber from the line TX and RX in the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM
card.5-92
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 36 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G312 Verify the SideA ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 40-WSS-C
Cards
Note Throughout this task, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), display the Alarms tab.
Step 2 Create a physical loopback on the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card by connecting the
LINE TX port to its LINE RX port. For OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards, connect a 10-dB bulk attenuator
to the fiber. (OSC-CSM cards do not require attenuation.)
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 3 Wait 2 to 3 minutes, then click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side A OSCM or
OSC-CSM card and the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms
indicates that the OSC link is active on Side A.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
Step 4 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 5.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you are testing, then continue with Step 7.
Step 5 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test. Refer to
Table 5-3 on page 5-76, if needed.
Purpose This task verifies the signal flow through Side A of an ROADM node for
C-band add/drop channels.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-93
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 6 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the following steps. If you are using a tunable laser
continue with Step 7.
a. Display the TXP_MR_10E_C in card view.
b. Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
c. Locate the Port 2 (Trunk) table cell for the TX Optical Pwr parameter. Record the value.
Step 7 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the Side A fiber
patch panel MUX port that is connected to the Side A 40-WSS-C card CHAN RX port carrying the tested
wavelength. (If the TXP_MR_10E_C card was installed during Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node,” simply
verify the cable connection.)
Step 8 Connect the TXP_MR_10E_C DWDM RX port or the power meter RX port to the Side A fiber patch
panel DMX port that is connected with the Side A 40-DMX-C card CHAN-TX port carrying the tested
wavelength. (If the TXP_MR_10E_C card was installed during Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node,” simply
verify the cable connection.)
Step 9 Display the 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Step 10 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 11 For each wavelength that you will test, click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose
Add Drop from the drop-down list.
Step 12 Click Apply and then Yes, to confirm.
Step 13 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 14 Find the tested wavelength CHAN RX port, then scroll to the right until you see the Power Add
parameter. Verify that the Power Add value for the tested port CHAN RX is equal to the output power
level of the tunable laser or the TXP_MR_10E_C card measured in Step 6, +/– 1.0 dBm.
Step 15 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table cell
for Port 67 (COM-TX) for the wavelength under test.
Step 16 Verify that the power value from Step 15 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (40-WSS -C).Port COM-TX.Power
set point +/– 1.0 dBm on Side A. To view this set point:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 40-WSS -C card on Side A.
c. Expand the COM-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (40-WSS -C).Port COM-TX.Power parameter on the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 15 (+/– 2.0 dBm), contact your next
level of support.
Step 17 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side A, continue with Step 18.
a. Display the Side A 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.5-94
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 40-WSS-C and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).
h. If a Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i.
If not, continue with Step j.
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the MMU cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 19.
Step 18 Verify the connection between the 40-WSS-C card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM cards:
a. Display the Side A 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. If a OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed on Side A, display it in card view and complete Step
e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
f. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
g. Verify that the value in Step e or f matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If so, continue
with Step 19. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean
the fiber connection between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the 40-WSS-C
cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 19 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 20.
a. Display the Side A OPT-PRE in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power parameter for Port 1 (COM-RX). Record the value.
d. Display the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Port 2 (COM-TX) Power value (for OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards) or Port 3 (COM-TX)
Power value (for OSC-CSM cards). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c,
+/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean
the fiber connection between the OPT-PRE card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card.
Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side A OPT-PRE card, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-7.5-95
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 20 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side A, continue with Step 21.
a. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side A, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not,
continue with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-PRE Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs. Record the Total Output
Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the MMU card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
j. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX).
m. Display the Side A 40-WSS-C card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 40-WSS-C and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 22.
Step 21 Verify the connection between the Side A 40-WSS-C card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-PRE, or
OSC-CSM card:
a. Display the Side A 40-WSS-C in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side A OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.5-96
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
h. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 40-WSS-C card and the OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, or OSC-CSM card.
Step 22 Verify the Side A 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C connection:
a. Display the Side A 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table
cell for Port 69 (DROP-TX).
c. Display the Side A 40-DMX-C card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Record the value in the Port 2
(COM-RX) table cell. Verify that the value is equal to the value recorded in Step b, +/– 1.0 dBm. If
not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber
connection between the 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C cards. Check the values again. If they still do
not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 23 Display the Side A 40-DMX-C card in card view.
Step 24 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tab. Record the CHAN-TX port value under the
Power parameter for the wavelength under test.
Step 25 Verify that the power value recorded in Step 24 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (40-DMX-C).Port
CHAN-TX.Power set point +/– 2 dBm on Side A. To view this set point:
a. Go to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) and click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 40-DMX-C card on Side A.
c. Expand the Port CHAN-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (40-DMX-C).Port CHAN-TX.Power parameter on the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 24 (+/– 2 dBm), contact your next level
of support.
Step 26 Display the TXP_MR_10E_C card in card view.
Step 27 Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
Step 28 In the Port 2 (Trunk) column, locate the RX Optical Power value. Verify that the value matches the power
in Step 24, +/– 2 dBm. If the power values do not match (+/– 2 dBm), complete the following steps:
a. Remove, clean, and replace the cable connecting the TXP_MR_10E_C RX port to the Side A fiber
patch panel DMX port for the tested wavelength. See the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors”
procedure on page 14-31.
b. Repeat this step. If the power values still do not match (+/– 2 dBm) contact your next level of
support.
Step 29 Repeat Steps 4 through 28 for the remaining wavelengths.
Step 30 Display the Side A 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Step 31 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 32 Click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose Not Assigned from the drop-down list for
all wavelengths.
Step 33 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.5-97
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 34 Disconnect the TXP or tunable laser from the Side A patch panel.
Step 35 Unplug the physical loopback fiber from the line TX and RX in the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM
card.
Step 36 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G276 Perform the 80-Channel n-degree ROADM Node
Acceptance Tests
Note Identify the sides that are already carrying traffic and the sides that are going to be tested.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the mesh native node where you want to
perform the acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. Complete the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
Purpose This procedure checks the power values and the optical connections for an
80 channel n-degree ROADM node. Use this test for both existing and new
installations of 80 channel ROADM nodes. Use this procedure to also test
the installation of a new side to a node. This procedure cannot be
performed on the node on which the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE
card is installed.
Tools/Equipment • Fully C-band tunable transponder or tunable laser source with an LC
patchcord
• 1 LC-LC adapter
• 15dB optical attenuator
• Optical power meter
Prerequisite Procedures • All sides must be completely fibered (including mesh patch panels);
for more information, see Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node.”
• “NTP-G186 Perform the Four-Degree and Eight-Degree Mesh Patch
Panel Acceptance Test” section on page 5-148 (optional)
• “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-98
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(An equipment alarm is indicated in the Alarms tab, Cond column as EQPT.) If equipment failure
alarms are present, investigate and resolve them before continuing. For information on how to clear
an alarm, see the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
Step 4 Insert a full C-band tunable transponder into an available slot on the side that you want to test.
Note In this procedure Side A through H is referred as Side x.
Step 5 Connect the TX port of the transponder to the EADi (where i=1) port of the 80-WXC-C card on the side
to be tested.
Step 6 Select a wavelength that is not already used by a side carrying traffic. Select 1530.33 nm for a new
installation. Set the transponder wavelength to the selected wavelength yyyy.yy by completing the
“DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 5-158.
Step 7 Place the trunk port of the transponder in the In-Service (IS) state.
Step 8 In node view, click the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs and record the Power value of
the COM port of the 80-WXC-C card for the side you are verifying.
Step 9 On Side x, go to the card view of the 80-WXC-C card and complete the following steps:
a. Click the Provisioning > WXC Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the EADi
port.
b. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs.
• Set the Target Power to the value recorded in Step 8.
• From the Port pull-down menu, select EADi and from the Wavelength pull-down menu, select
yyyy.yy
c. Click Refresh and verify that the target power is reached.
d. Place the trunk port of the transponder in OutofService (OOS) state.
Step 10 To check the wavelengths for the EAD1 port, repeat from Step 6 and Step 9d for the remaining 79
wavelengths.
Note It is not mandatory to test the 80 wavelengths for all the ports (EADi where i = 1 to 8).
Step 11 Disconnect the transponder from EADi port and restore the fiber connection to the EADi port.
Step 12 Repeat Step 5 through Step 11 for the remaining EADi ports where i = 2 to 8.
Step 13 Plug a 15-dB LC attenuator into the trunk TX port of the transponder card.
Step 14 Select a wavelength that is not already used by a side carrying traffic. Select 1530.33 nm for a new
installation. Set the transponder wavelength to the selected wavelength yyyy.yy by completing the
“DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 5-158.
Step 15 Connect the optical power meter to the trunk TX port of the transponder card.
Step 16 Complete the “DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power” task on page 5-159.
Step 17 Disconnect the optical power meter from the TX port of the transponder card.
Step 18 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-C card configured as LINE for Side x (slot 1 or 17) and complete
the following steps:
a. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs and from the OSRI pull-down menu, select OFF.5-99
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. From the ALS Mode pull-down menu, select Disable.
Step 19 Make the following connections:
a. Connect the transponder output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) to the Line RX port of the booster
amplifier (OPT-AMP-C configured as LINE in slot 1 or 17) on Side x.
b. Connect the optical power meter to the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier (OPT-AMP-C
configured as LINE in slot 1 or 17) on Side x.
c. Use a fiber jumper to connect the DROP-TX port to the AD port of the 80-WXC-C card for Side x.
Step 20 Create an OCHNC DCN circuit for wavelength yyyy.yy from LINE amplifier of Side x to local add/drop
ports of the 80-WXC-C card of Side x using the “DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network
Connections” task on page 8-23 and wait till all the alarms clear.
Step 21 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side x. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record
the IL02 (LINE RX->COM TX) insertion loss value.
Step 22 In card view, display the transponder card and click the Provisioning > Line tabs. For the trunk port,
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list and
click Apply.
Step 23 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side x, and complete the following steps:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
b. Verify the power value of the COM-TX port = (Optical power meter value in Step 16) – (LINE
RX->COM TX insertion loss value read in Step 21) (+\– 1 dB).
Step 24 In card view, display the preamplifier card (OPT-AMP-C configured as PRE in slot 2 or 16) for Side x
and complete the following steps:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify that the COM-RX power value matches the value in Step 23 b(+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line > Parameters tabs and record the Total Output Power
value of the LINE-TX port.
Step 25 In card view, display the 80-WXC-C card for Side x and complete the following steps:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify that the value matches the LINE-TX port power value in Step 24c (+/- 1dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the COM-RX -> EXP-TX insertion loss.
d. Record the COM-RX -> DROP-TX insertion loss.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
EXP-TX port.
f. Record the Power value of the DROP-TX port.
g. Verify that the EXP-TX Power value inStep 25e = (COM-RX value in Step 25a) – (COM-RX ->
EXP-TX value in Step 25c) (+\– 1 dB).
h. Click the Provisioning > WXC Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the AD port.
i. Verify that the value matches the DROP-TX port power value in Step 25f (+/- 1dB).
j. Click the Provisioning > WXC Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the COM
port.5-100
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
k. Verify that the power value in Step 25j matches the COM port power value in the node view >
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs for the 80-WXC-C card under test.
Step 26 In card view, display the 80-WXC-C card for a side different from Side x and complete the following
steps:
Note This step must be performed for a single wavelength yyyy.yy only that is not used on any of the installed
sides.
a. Click the Maintenance > Wavelength Power tabs and select PORT EADi, where i depends on the
value of x. (x,i) = (A,1) (B,2) (C,3) (D,4) (E,5) (F,6) (G,7) (H,8)
b. Record the power value for wavelength yyyy.yy.
c. Verify if the power value in Step 26b is equal to the (power value recorded in Step 25e - 8dB) if a
PP-MESH-4 is used or is equal to the (power value recorded in Step 25e - 12dB) if a PP-MESH-8
is used.
Step 27 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side x, and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify COM-RX Power value matches the COM Power value in Step 25j (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
LINE-TX port.
d. Verify that the LINE-TX value matches the power on the LINE-TX port power value in node view
> Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs (+\– 2 dB).
e. Record the optical power meter value.
f. Verify that the optical power meter value matches the LINE-TX value in Step 27c (+\– 1 dB).
Step 28 Delete the OCHNC DCN circuit on wavelength yyyy.yy from LINE amplifier of Side x to local add/drop
ports of the 80-WXC-C card of Side x using the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel Network
Connections” task on page 8-26.
Step 29 In card view, display the transponder card and click the Provisioning > Line tabs. For the trunk port,
choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list and
click Apply.
Step 30 To test all wavelengths, repeat Step 6 through Step 29 for each wavelength. In Step 6, set the wavelength
to the next wavelength.
Step 31 Remove the fiber jumper connected between the DROP-TX port and the AD port in the 80-WXC-C card
on Side x.
Step 32 Restore the original connections between the AD and DROP-TX ports of the 80-WXC-C card and the
respective ports of the 15216 40 or 48 -channel mux/demux patch panel according to the Cisco Transport
Planner Internal Connections Report.
Step 33 Use a fiber jumper to connect the TX port to the RX port associated to the wavelength yyyy.yy to be tested
in the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD or in the 15216-MD-40-EVEN,
15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN unit for Side x (depending on which 15216 40 or 48
-channel mux/demux patch panel the wavelength yyyy.yy is managed).
Step 34 Select a wavelength yyyy.yy on the full C band tunable transponder. Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the
Transponder Wavelength” task on page 5-158 to tune the transponder for the selected wavelength
yyyy.yy.5-101
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 35 Create an OCHNC DCN circuit on wavelength yyyy.yy from LINE amplifier of side x to local add/drop
ports of the 80-WXC-C card of Side x using the “DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network
Connections” task on page 8-23 and wait till all the alarms clear on the node.
Step 36 In card view, display the 80-WXC-C card for Side x and complete the following steps:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
DROP-TX port.
b. Click the Provisioning > WXC Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the AD port.
c. Verify that the Power value of the AD port in Step 36b is > the Power value of the DROP-TX port
in Step 36a – 18dB.
Step 37 Delete the OCHNC DCN circuit on wavelength yyyy.yy from LINE amplifier of Side x to local add/drop
ports of the 80-WXC-C card of Side x using the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel Network
Connections” task on page 8-26.
Step 38 In card view, display the transponder card and click the Provisioning > Line tabs. For the trunk port,
choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list and
click Apply.
Step 39 Remove the fiber jumper that was connected in Step 33 between the TX and RX ports associated to the
tested wavelength yyyy.yy on the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD or
the 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN unit for Side x.
Step 40 To verify all the 40 ports of the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit
and the 40 ports of the 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN unit, repeat
the previous steps from Step 33 through Step 38 by changing the wavelength yyyy.yy to cover all other
79 available wavelengths.
Step 41 Disconnect the optical power meter from the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier of the Side x.
Step 42 Disconnect the transponder output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) from the LINE-RX port of the
booster amplifier of the Side x.
Step 43 Repeat Step 4 through Step 42 for all the others sides that are being installed.
Step 44 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-C card configured as LINE for Side x (slot 1 or 17) and complete
the following:
a. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs and from the OSRI pull-down menu, select OFF.
b. From the ALS Mode pull-down menu, select Auto Restart.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G44 Perform the Anti-ASE Hub Node Acceptance Test
Purpose This procedure tests an anti-ASE hub node.
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C card
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed5-102
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If alarms appear,
investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate two alarms for each side of the
shelf: one for LOS on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, and the other for LOS on the OSC-CSM
or OSCM card.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are Success - Changed or
Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following steps:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on
page 11-50.
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Step 5 From your Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file, identify the dropped and added channels that
are configured in pass-through mode in both directions.
Note Configuring a channel pass-through mode means that the channel is dropped along one direction
by a 32DMX-O/32DMX or 40-DMX-C (15xx.xx TX port) located on one side (Side A or
Side B) of the shelf, and then added by a 32MUX-O/40-DMX-C (1522.22 RX port) on the
opposite side of the shelf but in the same direction. The channel is not terminated inside the site.
Step 6 Create a loopback on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier by connecting a patchcord from the
LINE TX port to the LINE RX port with a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 7 Verify that the OSC link becomes active on the Side A OSCM or OSC-CSM card. (The OSC termination
must already be provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure
on page 4-126.)
Step 8 For pass-through channels, continue with Step 9. For add and drop channels, continue with Step 18.
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-103
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 9 Verify the first channel connection configured in pass-through mode in both directions:
a. If you are using a tunable laser, set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm. If you are
using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step b.
b. Set the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card to a corresponding wavelength on the 100-GHz
ITU-T grid. Refer to the tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G268 Provision
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5.
c. Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the LINE RX
port of the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 10 Complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7 for the
Side B OPT-PRE amplifier.
Step 11 Complete the “DLP-G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power” task on page 5-8 for the
Side A 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C cards.
Step 12 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-6 for the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier.
Step 13 Complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7 for the
Side A OPT-PRE amplifier.
Step 14 Complete the “DLP-G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power” task on page 5-8 for the
Side A 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C cards.
Step 15 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-6 for the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier.
Step 16 Repeat Steps 9 through 15 for the remaining wavelengths on the 100-GHz grid that are pass-through
wavelengths.
Step 17 If you have add and drop channels, continue with Step 18 to verify the channels. If not, continue with
Step 30.
Step 18 Set the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card to the first wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T grid that is
not a pass-through wavelength. Refer to the tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the
“DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5.
Step 19 Connect the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card to the CHAN RX nn port on the Side A 32MUX-O
card, where nn is the first add or drop channel.
Step 20 Display the Side A 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C card in card view.
Step 21 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
Step 22 Change the administrative state of Port nn to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI).
Step 23 Check that the power value on Port nn reaches the provisioned set point (VOA Power Ref).
Step 24 Display the Side A 32DMX-O/32DMX OR 40-DMX-C card in card view.
Step 25 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
Step 26 Change the administrative state of Port nn to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI).
Step 27 Check that the power value on Port nn reaches the provisioned set point (VOA Power Ref).
Step 28 Connect a power meter to the CHAN TX nn port through the patch panel and verify that the physical
optical power coming out of drop Port nn on the Side A 32DMX-O/32DMX or 40-DMX-C card is
consistent with the value read on the meter within 0.5 dB.
Step 29 Repeat Steps 18 through 28 for the remaining wavelengths on the 100-GHz grid that are not pass-through
wavelengths.
Step 30 Remove the loopback connection on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.5-104
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 31 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 32 Create a loopback on the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier by connecting a patchcord from the
LINE TX port to the LINE RX port with 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 33 Verify that the OSC link becomes active on the Side B OSCM card. (The OSC termination must be
already provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.)
Step 34 Repeat 18 through 31 for Side B add and drop cards.
Step 35 Remove the loopback on the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.
Step 36 Restore the default administrative state (IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService) on all the ports
previously set to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI).
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G45 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM
Cards Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 3.
Step 2 If you are using TXP_MR_10E_C cards, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5. If not, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 From the View menu, choose Go to Home View.
Purpose This procedure tests a C-band line amplifier node with OSCM cards
installed on both the Side B and Side A sides of the shelf by looping a
single wavelength through the shelf.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-105
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If alarms appear,
investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate two alarms for each side of the
shelf, one for LOS on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, and the other for LOS on the OSCM
card.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success -
Changed or Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following steps:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on
page 11-50.
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Step 6 Create a loopback on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card by using a fiber with a 10-dB bulk
attenuator to connect the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port.
Step 7 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 8.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 9.
Step 8 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test. Refer to
Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 9 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the LINE RX port
of the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 10 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E and OSCM
cards have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the OSC link is active on Side A.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback. An LOS-O alarm appears on the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card,
and an LOS alarm appears on the Side B OCSM card.
If the alarms clear, continue with Step 11. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Display the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card in card view.5-106
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
c. In the Types area, click Alarms, then click Refresh.
d. Locate the Port 2 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
e. Locate the Port 4 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
f. Click Apply, and then Yes.
g. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card has
cleared. If so, continue with Step 11. If not, disconnect the OSCM card from the OPT-BST card.
h. Create a loopback on the OSCM card by connecting a patch cable from the OSC TX port to the
OSC RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
i. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the Side A OSCM card has cleared. If so, replace
the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card. If not, replace the OSCM card. See the “NTP-G30 Install the
DWDM Cards” procedure on page 4-64.
Step 11 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser
and Power” task on page 5-7. If not, continue with Step 12.
Step 12 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-6 for the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier.
Step 13 If an OPT-PRE amplifier is installed on Side A, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier
Laser and Power” task on page 5-7. It not, continue with continue with Step 14.
Step 14 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-6 for the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier.
Step 15 Disconnect the TXP or tunable laser from the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.
Step 16 Remove the loopback on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card created in Step 6.
Step 17 Create a loopback on the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card by connecting a patchcord from the LINE
TX port to the LINE RX port with a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 18 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 19.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 20.
Step 19 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test. Refer to
Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 20 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the LINE RX port
of the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 21 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card and the Side B
OSCM card have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the OSC link is active on Side B. 5-107
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback. An LOS-O alarm appears on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card,
and an LOS alarm appears on the Side A OCSM card.
If the alarms clear, continue with Step 22. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Display the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
c. In the Types area, click Alarms, then click Refresh.
d. Locate the Port 2 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
e. Locate the Port 4 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
f. Click Apply, and then Yes.
g. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card has
cleared. If so, continue with Step 22. If not, disconnect the OSCM card from the OPT-BST or
OPT-BST-E card.
h. Create a loopback on the OSCM card by connecting a patch cable from the OSC TX port to the
OSC RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
i. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side B OSCM card has cleared. If so,
replace the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card. If not, replace the OSCM card. See the “NTP-G30 Install
the DWDM Cards” procedure on page 4-64.
Step 22 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side A, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser
and Power” task on page 5-7. If not, continue with Step 23.
Step 23 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-6 for the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier.
Step 24 If an OPT-PRE amplifier is installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier
Laser and Power” task on page 5-7. It not, continue with continue with Step 25.
Step 25 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-6 for the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier.
Step 26 Disconnect the TXP or tunable laser from the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.
Step 27 Remove the loopback on the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier created in Step 17.
Step 28 Delete both OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on page 11-50.
Step 29 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 30 Create the two OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.5-108
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
NTP-G155 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM
Cards Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 If you are using TXP_MR_10E_L cards, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card for
Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-26. If not, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 From the View menu, choose Go to Home View.
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If alarms appear,
investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate two alarms for each side of the
shelf, one for an LOS on the OPT-BST-L card, and the other for an LOS on the OSCM card.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following steps:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on
page 11-50.
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
Purpose This procedure tests a L-band line amplifier node with OSCM cards
installed on both the Side B and Side A sides of the shelf by looping a
single wavelength through the shelf.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_L
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-109
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Step 6 Create a loopback on the Side A OPT-BST-L card by using a fiber with a 10-dB bulk attenuator to
connect the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port.
Step 7 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 8.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 9.
Step 8 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-26 for the wavelength you will test.
Step 9 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card DWDM TX port to the LINE RX port
of the Side B OPT-BST-L card using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 10 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side A OPT-BST-L and OSCM cards have cleared.
The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the OSC link is active on Side A.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback. An LOS-O alarm appears on the Side B OPT-BST-L card, and an LOS
alarm appears on the Side B OCSM card.
If the alarms clear, continue with Step 11. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Display the Side A OPT-BST-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
c. In the Types area, click Alarms, then click Refresh.
d. Locate the Port 2 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
e. Locate the Port 4 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
f. Click Apply, and then Yes.
g. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the Side A OPT-BST-L card has cleared. If so,
continue with Step 11. If not, disconnect the OSCM card from the OPT-BST-L card.
h. Create a loopback on the OSCM card by connecting a patch cable from the OSC TX port to the
OSC RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
i. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the Side A OSCM card has cleared. If so, replace
the OPT-BST-L card. If not, replace the OSCM card. See the “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards”
procedure on page 4-64.
Step 11 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned as an OPT-PRE) is installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G360
Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-27. If not,
continue with Step 12.5-110
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 12 Complete the “DLP-G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-27 for the Side A OPT-BST-L amplifier.
Step 13 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned as an OPT-PRE) is installed on Side A, complete the “DLP-G360
Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-27. It not,
continue with continue with Step 14.
Step 14 Complete the “DLP-G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-27 for the Side B OPT-BST-L amplifier.
Step 15 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the Side B OPT-BST-L card.
Step 16 Remove the loopback on the Side A OPT-BST-L created in Step 6.
Step 17 Create a loopback on the Side B OPT-BST-L card by connecting a patchcord from the LINE TX port to
the LINE RX port with a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 18 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 19.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 20.
Step 19 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-26 for the wavelength you will test.
Step 20 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card DWDM TX port to the LINE RX port
of the Side A OPT-BST-L card using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 21 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side B OPT-BST-L and OSCM cards have cleared.
The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the OSC link is active on Side B.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback. An LOS-O alarm appears on the Side A OPT-BST-L card, and an LOS
alarm appears on the Side A OCSM card.
If the alarms clear, continue with Step 22. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Display the Side B OPT-BST-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
c. In the Types area, click Alarms, then click Refresh.
d. Locate the Port 2 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
e. Locate the Port 4 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
f. Click Apply, and then Yes.
g. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side B OPT-BST-L card has cleared. If so,
continue with Step 22. If not, disconnect the OSCM card from the OPT-BST-L card.5-111
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
h. Create a loopback on the OSCM card by connecting a patch cable from the OSC TX port to the
OSC RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
i. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side B OSCM card has cleared. If so,
replace the OPT-BST-L card. If not, replace the OSCM card. See the“NTP-G30 Install the DWDM
Cards” procedure on page 4-64.
Step 22 If an OPT-AMP-L (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) card is installed on Side A, complete the “DLP-G80
Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7. If not, continue with Step 23.
Step 23 Complete the “DLP-G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-27 for the Side B OPT-BST-L amplifier.
Step 24 If an OPT-AMP-L (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) card is installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G360
Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-27. It not,
continue with continue with Step 25.
Step 25 Complete the “DLP-G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-27 for the Side A OPT-BST-L amplifier.
Step 26 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the Side A OPT-BST-L card.
Step 27 Remove the loopback on the Side B OPT-BST-L amplifier created in Step 17.
Step 28 Delete both OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on page 11-50.
Step 29 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 30 Create the two OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G46 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with
OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test
Purpose This procedure tests a C-band line amplifier node with OSC-CSM cards
installed on both Side B and Side A of the shelf by looping a single
wavelength through the shelf.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C card
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-112
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 If you are using TXP_MR_10E_C cards, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5. If not, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 From the View menu, choose Go to Home View.
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If alarms appear,
investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate an LOS alarm on the
OSC-CSM card.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on
page 11-50.
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Step 6 Create a physical loopback on the Side A OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX port to the
LINE RX port with a fiber and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 7 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the Side A OSC-CSM card has cleared. The clearing of
the LOS alarm indicates that the OSC link is active on Side A.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback, and an LOS alarm will appear for the Side B OSC-CSM card, Port 1
(OSC).5-113
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
If the alarm clears, continue with Step 8. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator on the OSC-CSM LINE TX and LINE RX ports and reconnect
using only the patchcord.
b. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the Side A OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 8. If not, continue with Step c.
c. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
e. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh.
f. Locate the Port 3 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
g. Locate the Port 6 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
h. Click Apply, and then Yes.
i. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the Side A OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 8. If not, replace the OSC-CSM
card.
Step 8 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 9.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 10.
Step 9 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test. Refer to
Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 10 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the Side B
OSC-CSM LINE RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 11 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser
and Power” task on page 5-7. If not, continue with Step 12.
Step 12 Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 13 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Locate the Port 3 Power value. Verify that
the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your connections
and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31. If this does
not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 14 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side A of the shelf, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE
Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7. If not, continue with Step 15.
Step 15 Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 16 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Locate the Port 2 Power value. Verify that
the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your connections
and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31. If this does
not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 17 Disconnect the TXP or tunable laser from the Side B OSC-CSM card.5-114
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 18 Remove the physical loopback created on the Side A OSC-CSM card in Step 6.
Step 19 Create a loopback on the Side B OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX port with LINE RX port
using a patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 20 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the Side B OSC-CSM card has cleared. The clearing of
the LOS alarm indicates that the OSC link is active on Side B.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback, and an LOS alarm will appear for the Side A OSC-CSM card, Port 1
(OSC).
If the alarm clears, continue with Step 21. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator on the OSC-CSM LINE TX and LINE RX ports and reconnect
using only the patchcord.
b. Wait 90 to 100 seconds then, in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode),
click the Alarms tab. If the LOS alarm on the Side B OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 21.
If not, continue with Step c.
c. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
e. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh.
f. Locate the Port 3 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
g. Locate the Port 6 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
h. Click Apply, and then Yes.
i. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the Side B OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 21. If not, replace the
OSC-CSM card.
Step 21 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 22.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 23.
Step 22 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test. Refer to
Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 23 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the Side A
OSC-CSM LINE RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.5-115
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 24 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side A, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser
and Power” task on page 5-7. If not, continue with Step 25.
Step 25 Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 26 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Locate the Port 3 Power value. Verify that
the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your connections
and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31. If this does
not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 27 If an OPT-PRE is installed on Side B of the shelf, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE
Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7 for the Side B OPT-PRE amplifier. If not, continue with
Step 28.
Step 28 Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 29 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and locate the Power value for Port 2. Verify
that the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your
connections and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on
page 14-31. If this does not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 30 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the Side A OSC-CSM card.
Step 31 Remove the loopback created on the Side B OSC-CSM card in Step 19.
Step 32 Delete both OSC channels. See the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on page 11-50.
Step 33 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 34 Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 4-126.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G156 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with
OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test
Purpose This procedure tests a L-band line amplifier node with OSC-CSM cards
installed on both Side B and Side A of the shelf by looping a single
wavelength through the shelf.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_L card
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-116
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 If you are using TXP_MR_10E_L cards, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card for
Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-26. If not, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 From the View menu, choose Go to Home View.
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If alarms appear,
investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate an LOS alarm on the
OSC-CSM card.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on
page 11-50.
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Step 6 Create a physical loopback on the Side A OSC-CSM by connecting the LINE TX port to the LINE RX
port with a fiber and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 7 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the Side A OSC-CSM card has cleared. The clearing of
the LOS alarm indicates that the OSC link is active on Side A.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback, and an LOS alarm will appear for the Side B OSC-CSM card, Port 1
(OSC).5-117
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
If the alarm clears, continue with Step 8. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator on the OSC-CSM LINE TX and LINE RX ports and reconnect
using only the patchcord.
b. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the Side A OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 8. If not, continue with Step c.
c. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
e. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh.
f. Locate the Port 3 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
g. Locate the Port 6 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
h. Click Apply, and then Yes.
i. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the Side A OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 8. If not, replace the OSC-CSM
card.
Step 8 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 9.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 10.
Step 9 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-26 for the wavelength you will test.
Step 10 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card DWDM TX port to the Side B
OSC-CSM LINE RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 11 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G360
Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-27. If not,
continue with Step 12.
Step 12 Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 13 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Locate the Port 3 Power value. Verify that
the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your connections
and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31. If this does
not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 14 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on Side A of the shelf, complete
the “DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task on
page 5-27. If not, continue with Step 15.
Step 15 Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 16 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Locate the Port 2 Power value. Verify that
the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your connections
and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31. If this does
not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 17 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the Side B OSC-CSM card.5-118
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 18 Remove the physical loopback created on the Side A OSC-CSM card in Step 6.
Step 19 Create a loopback on the Side B OSC-CSM by connecting the LINE TX port with LINE RX port using
a patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 20 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the Side B OSC-CSM card has cleared. The clearing of
the LOS alarm indicates that the OSC link is active on Side B.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback, and an LOS alarm will appear for the Side A OSC-CSM card, Port 1
(OSC).
If the alarm clears, continue with Step 21. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator on the OSC-CSM LINE TX and LINE RX ports and reconnect
using only the patchcord.
b. Wait 90 to 100 seconds then, in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode),
click the Alarms tab. If the LOS alarm on the Side B OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 21.
If not, continue with Step c.
c. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
e. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh.
f. Locate the Port 3 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
g. Locate the Port 6 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
h. Click Apply, and then Yes.
i. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the Side B OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 21. If not, replace the
OSC-CSM card.
Step 21 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 22.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 23.
Step 22 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-26 for the wavelength you will test.
Step 23 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card DWDM TX port to the Side A
OSC-CSM LINE RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.5-119
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 24 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on Side A, complete the
“DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-27.
If not, continue with Step 25.
Step 25 Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 26 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Locate the Port 3 Power value. Verify that
the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your connections
and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31. If this does
not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 27 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G360
Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-27. If not,
continue with Step 28.
Step 28 Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 29 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and locate the Power value for Port 2. Verify
that the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your
connections and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on
page 14-31. If this does not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 30 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the Side A OSC-CSM card.
Step 31 Remove the loopback created on the Side B OSC-CSM card in Step 19.
Step 32 Delete both OSC channels. See the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on page 11-50.
Step 33 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 34 Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 4-126.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.5-120
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
NTP-G47 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM
and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Note Because the node is isolated and no line-side fibers are connected during the test, the power levels going
into the line-side cards will not be the same as the levels when the node is connected to the network.
Therefore, if the line amplifier shelf does not contain OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifiers and OPT-PRE
amplifiers on both Side B and Side A, you must lower the OPT-PRE power thresholds so that it turns on
properly. At the end of the test, you will run ANS to configure the node with the correct parameters for
the network acceptance test.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 If you are using TXP_MR_10E_C cards, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5. If not, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 Display the terminal node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If alarms appear,
investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Purpose This procedure tests a C-band line amplifier node provisioned with an
OSC-CSM card installed on one side of the shelf and an OSCM card
installed on the other. This test verifies that a line amplifier node
provisioned is operating properly before you connect it to the network. The
test verifies the operation of the amplifiers and checks the power levels at
each transmit and receive port to ensure that power loss in the cabling is
within tolerance.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser or
• TXP_MR_10E_C card
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-121
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate two alarms for each side of the
shelf, one for an LOS on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, and the other for an LOS on the
OSC-CSM or OSCM card.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on
page 11-50.
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Step 6 Create a loopback on the OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port using a
patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 7 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the OSC-CSM card has cleared. The clearing of the LOS
alarm indicates that the OSC link is active for this side of the shelf.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
If the alarm clears, continue with Step 8. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator on the OSC-CSM LINE TX and LINE RX ports and reconnect
using only the patchcord.
b. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 8. If not, continue with Step c.
c. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
e. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh.
f. Locate the Port 3 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
g. Locate the Port 6 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
h. Click Apply, and then Yes.
i. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 8. If not, replace the OSC-CSM card.
Step 8 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 9.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm. 5-122
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 10.
Step 9 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test. Refer to
Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 10 Measure the TXP output power by connecting the TXP DWDM TX port to a test meter. Record the
results for future reference.
Step 11 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the OPT-BST or
OPT-BST-E LINE RX port using a fiber patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 12 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on the side opposite the OSC-CSM, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the
OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7. If not, continue with Step 13.
Step 13 Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 14 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and locate the Port 2 (COM-RX) Power
value. Verify that the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check
your connections and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on
page 14-31. If this does not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 15 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on the same Side As the OSC-CSM, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the
OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7. If not, continue with Step 16.
Step 16 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-6 for the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.
Step 17 Disconnect the TXP or tunable laser from the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.
Step 18 Remove the loopback fiber on the OSC-CSM card.
Step 19 Delete both OSC channels. See the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on page 11-50.
Step 20 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 21 Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 4-126.
Step 22 Create a loopback on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card by connecting the LINE TX port with LINE RX
port using a patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 23 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card and the OSCM card
have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the OSC link is active for this side of the
shelf.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
If the alarms clear, continue with Step 24. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Display the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
c. In the Types area, click Alarms, then click Refresh. 5-123
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
d. Locate the Port 2 (COM-TX) Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change
the value to –30 dBm.
e. Locate the Port 4 (OSC-TX) Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change
the value to –40 dBm.
f. Click Apply, and then Yes.
g. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card has cleared.
If so, continue with Step 24. If not, disconnect the OSCM card from the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E
card.
h. Create a loopback on the OSCM card by connecting a patch cable from the OSC TX port to the
OSC RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
i. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the OSCM card has cleared. If not, check your
connections and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on
page 14-31. If this does not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 24 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the OSC-CSM
LINE RX port using a fiber patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 25 If an OPT-PRE is installed on the same side of the shelf as the OSC-CSM, complete the “DLP-G80
Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7. If not, continue with Step 26.
Step 26 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-6 for the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.
Step 27 Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 28 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Verify that the power value on Port 3
(COM-TX) is equal to the optical power from the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card (measured in
Step 10) –10 dB, +/– 2 dB. If not, check your connections and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115
Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31. If this does not change the power value, consult your
next level of support.
Step 29 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on the side opposite the OSC-CSM, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the
OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7. If not, continue with Step 30.
Step 30 Disconnect the TXP or tunable laser from the OSC-CSM card.
Step 31 Remove the loopback fiber on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier card.
Step 32 Delete both OSC channels. See the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on page 11-50.
Step 33 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 34 Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 4-126.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.5-124
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
NTP-G157 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM
and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 If you are using TXP_MR_10E_L cards, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card for
Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-26. If not, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 From the View menu, choose Go to Home View.
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If alarms appear,
investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate two alarms for each side of the
shelf, one for an LOS on the OPT-BST-L card, and the other for an LOS on the OSC-CSM or
OSCM card. If OSCM cards are installed on ANSI shelves, EOC DCC Termination Failure
alarms will appear.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on
page 11-50.
Purpose This procedure tests a L-band line amplifier node with an OSC-CSM card
installed on one side of the shelf and an OSCM card installed on the other.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser or
• TXP_MR_10E_L card
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-125
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Step 6 Create a loopback on the OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port using a
fiber patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 7 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the OSC-CSM card has cleared. The clearing of the LOS
alarm indicates that the OSC link is active for this side of the shelf.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
If the alarm clears, continue with Step 8. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator on the OSC-CSM LINE TX and LINE RX ports and reconnect
using only the patchcord.
b. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 8. If not, continue with Step c.
c. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
e. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh.
f. Locate the Port 3 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
g. Locate the Port 6 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
h. Click Apply, and then Yes.
i. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 8. If not, replace the OSC-CSM card.
Step 8 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 9.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 10.
Step 9 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-26 for the wavelength you will test.
Step 10 Measure the TXP card output power by connecting the TXP card DWDM TX port to a test meter. Record
the results for future reference.
Step 11 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card DWDM TX port to the OPT-BST-L
LINE RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.5-126
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 12 Display the OPT-BST-L card in card view.
Step 13 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Verify that the power value on Port 2
(Out Com) is equal to the optical power from the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_L card (measured in
Step 10), +/– 1.0 dBm.
Step 14 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on the side opposite the OSC-CSM
card, complete the “DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-27. If not, continue with Step 15.
Step 15 Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 16 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and locate the Port 3 Power value. Verify that
the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your connections
and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31. If this does
not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 17 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on the same Side As the OSC-CSM,
complete the “DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task
on page 5-27. If not, continue with Step 18.
Step 18 Complete the “DLP-G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-27 for the OPT-BST-L card.
Step 19 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the OPT-BST-L card.
Step 20 Remove the loopback fiber on the OSC-CSM card.
Step 21 Delete both OSC channels. See the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on page 11-50.
Step 22 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 23 Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 4-126.
Step 24 Create a loopback on the OPT-BST-L card by connecting the LINE TX port with LINE RX port using a
patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 25 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the OPT-BST-L and OSCM cards have cleared. The
clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the OSC link is active for this side of the shelf.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
If the alarms clear, continue with Step 26. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Display the OPT-BST-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
c. In the Types area, click Alarms, then click Refresh.
d. Locate the Port 2 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
e. Locate the Port 4 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
f. Click Apply, and then Yes.
g. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the OPT-BST-L card has cleared. If so, continue
with Step 26. If not, disconnect the OSCM card from the OPT-BST-L card.5-127
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
h. Create a loopback on the OSCM card by connecting a patch cable from the OSC TX port to the
OSC RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
i. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode),
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the OSCM card has cleared. If so, replace the
OPT-BST-L card. If not, replace the OSCM card. See the “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards”
procedure on page 4-64.
Step 26 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card DWDM TX port to the OSC-CSM
LINE RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 27 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on the same side of the shelf as the
OSC-CSM, complete the “DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-27. If not, continue with Step 28.
Step 28 Complete the “DLP-G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-27 for the OPT-BST-L card.
Step 29 Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 30 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Verify that the power value on Port 3
(Out Com) is equal to the optical power from the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_L card (measured in
Step 10), +/– 1.0 dBm.
Step 31 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on the side opposite the OSC-CSM,
complete the “DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task
on page 5-27. If not, continue with Step 32.
Step 32 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the OSC-CSM card.
Step 33 Remove the loopback fiber on the OPT-BST-L amplifier card.
Step 34 Delete both OSC channels. See the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on page 11-50.
Step 35 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 36 Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 4-126.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.5-128
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
NTP-G48 Perform the OADM Node Acceptance Test on a
Symmetric Node with OSCM Cards
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the OADM node where you want to
perform the acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are Success - Changed or
Success - Unchanged. If not, complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on
page 4-127.
Step 5 Check your Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file to verify the presence of added and dropped
bands (including four channels at 100 GHz) configured in pass-through mode in either direction.
Note Configuring a band in pass-through mode means that the band is dropped in one direction by an
AD-xB-xx.x card on one side (Side B or Side A) of the node, then added by another AD-xB-x.xx
card on the opposite side in the same direction. The band is not terminated inside the node.
Purpose This procedure checks the integrity of all the optical connections inside an
OADM node with OSCM cards installed on both Side B and Side A of the
shelf. Three connection types are tested:
• Express
• Pass-through
• Add/Drop
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C card
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node.”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-129
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 6 If no bands are configured in pass-through mode, continue with Step 7. If a band is configured in
pass-through mode, mark it and skip the related optical test for the express, add, and drop sections. Band
pass-through connections are verified separately.
Step 7 Check the site configuration file from Cisco TransportPlanner to verify the presence of dropped or added
channels configured in pass-through mode in either direction.
Note Configuring a channel in pass-through mode means that the channel is dropped in one direction
by an AD-xC-xx.x card on one side (Side B or Side A) of the node, then added by another
AD-xC-x.xx card on the opposite side in the same direction. The channel is not terminated inside
the node.
Step 8 If no channels are configured in pass-through mode, continue with Step 9. If a channel is configured in
pass-through mode, mark it and skip the related optical test for the express, add, and drop sections.
Channel pass-through connections are verified separately.
Step 9 Create a loopback on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card by connecting the LINE TX port to the
LINE RX port using a patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 10 Verify that the OSC link becomes active on the Side A OSCM card. (The OSC termination must be
already provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.) If the OSC link becomes active, continue with Step 11. If the OSC link does not turn up,
complete the following steps:
a. Modify the OSC Fail Low thresholds. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds
tabs and change the Port 4 opwrMin (minimum power) to –40 dBm.
b. Modify the COM TX Fail Low Threshold. Change the Port 2 opwrMin (minimum power) to
–30 dBm.
c. If the OSC link turns up, continue with Step 11. If the OSC link is still down, disconnect the OSCM
card from the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.
d. Create a loopback on the OSCM card by connecting patch cable from the OSC TX port to the
OSC RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
e. If the OSC link turns up, replace the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card. If the OSC link does not turn
up, replace the OSCM card.
Note Due to the OSC signal loopback, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm might be raised on
ANSI shelves.
Step 11 If the node has express bands or channels, complete the “DLP-G85 Verify Express Channel Connections
on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards” task on page 5-130. If the node does not have express bands or
channels, continue with Step 12.
Step 12 If connections configured in pass-through mode are present (noted in Steps 6 and 8), complete the
“DLP-G89 Verify OADM Node Pass-Through Channel Connections” task on page 5-133. If not,
continue with Step 13.
Step 13 If connections have add/drop connections, complete the “DLP-G93 Verify Add and Drop Connections
on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards” task on page 5-138.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.5-130
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
DLP-G85 Verify Express Channel Connections on an OADM Node with OSCM
Cards
Step 1 If you are using a tunable laser, set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm. If not, continue
with Step 2.
Step 2 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the Side B
OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E LINE RX port.
Step 3 Based on the Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file, tune the tunable laser of the
TXP_MR_10E_C card to a wavelength (on the 100-GHz ITU-T grid) that runs on the express path of all
AD-xB-xx.x and AD-xC-xx.x cards on the Side B-to-Side A and Side A-to-Side B directions. Refer to
the tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5.
Step 4 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side B, insert a 10-dB bulk attenuator on the COM RX port and
complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7. If an
OPT-PRE card is not installed on Side B, continue with Step 5.
Step 5 If AD-xB-xx.x cards are installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G87 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output
Express Power” task on page 5-131 for each Side B card. If not, continue with Step 6.
Note If AD-xB-xx.x and AD-xC-xx.x cards are both installed in one direction, the received express
channels will go into the AD-xB-xx.x cards first, then into the AD-xC-xx.x cards.
Step 6 If AD-xC-xx.x cards are installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G88 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output
Express Power” task on page 5-131 for each Side B card. If not, continue with Step 7.
Step 7 If AD-xC-xx.x cards are installed on Side A, complete the “DLP-G271 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output
Common Power” task on page 5-132 for each Side A card. If not, continue with Step 8.
Step 8 If AD-xB-xx.x cards are installed on Side A, complete the “DLP-G272 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output
Common Power” task on page 5-132 for each Side A card. If not, continue with Step 9.
Step 9 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-6 for the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card installed on Side B.
Step 10 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side A, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser
and Power” task on page 5-7. If an OPT-PRE card is not installed, continue with Step 11.
Step 11 Repeat Steps 5 through 8 for the AD-xB-xx.x and AD-xC-xx.x cards along the Side A-to-Side B
direction.
Step 12 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-6 for the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card installed on Side A.
Purpose This task verifies the express channel connections during an OADM node
acceptance test.
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-131
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 13 Return to the originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G87 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output Express Power
Step 1 Display the AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Change the Output Express port administrative state to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI). Click Apply.
Step 4 Verify that the Output Express port Power value is greater than the default no-power value of –28 dBm.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G88 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output Express Power
Step 1 Display the AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Change the Output Express port administrative state to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI). Click Apply.
Step 4 Verify that the Output Express port Power value is greater than the default no-power value of –30 dBm.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task verifies the output express power of AD-xB-xx.x cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This task verifies the output express power of the AD-xC-xx.x cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only5-132
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
DLP-G271 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output Common Power
Step 1 Display the AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Verify that the Output Com port Power value is greater than the default no-power value of –30 dBm.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G272 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output Common Power
Step 1 Display the AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Verify that the Output Com port Power value is greater than the default no-power value of –28 dBm.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task verifies the common power of the AD-xC-xx.x cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This task verifies the output common power of the AD-xB-xx.x cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only5-133
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
DLP-G89 Verify OADM Node Pass-Through Channel Connections
Step 1 Identify the first band connection configured in pass-through mode in both directions.
Step 2 Set the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card to the wavelength of the band to be tested. Refer to the
tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for
Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5.
Step 3 Complete the “DLP-G90 Verify an AD-xB-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power” task on page 5-135
for the first pass-through connection.
Step 4 Complete one of the following:
• If OSCM cards are installed, connect a power meter to the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E LINE
TX port and verify that the Side B amplifier is turned on by the pass-through wavelength.
• If OSC-CSM cards are installed, complete the “DLP-G84 Verify the OSC-CSM Incoming Power”
task on page 5-137 for the Side B OSC-CSM card.
Step 5 Complete Steps 2 through 4 for each band connection configured in pass-through mode in both
directions.
Step 6 If channel pass-through connections are not present, continue with Step 15. If channel pass-through
connections are present, continue with one of the following steps:
• If the pass-through channel connections use an AD-xC-xx.x card, continue with Step 7.
• If the pass-through channel connections use a 4MD-xx.x card, continue with Step 11.
Step 7 Tune the tunable laser on a wavelength (1 of 4) belonging to the channel to be tested.
Step 8 Complete the “DLP-G91 Verify an AD-xC-xx.x Pass-Through Connection” task on page 5-136 for the
first pass-through connection.
Step 9 Complete one of the following:
• If an OSCM card is installed, connect a power meter to LINE TX port on the front-pane and verify
that the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier is turned on by the pass-through wavelength.
• If an OSC-CSM card is installed, complete the “DLP-G84 Verify the OSC-CSM Incoming Power”
task on page 5-137 for the Side B OSC-CSM card.
Step 10 If the pass-through connections use a 4MD-xx.x card, continue with Step 11. If not, continue with
Step 15.
Step 11 Identify the first channel connection that is configured in pass-through mode using the 4MD-xx.x cards
in both directions.
Step 12 Tune the tunable laser on the corresponding wavelength.
Step 13 Complete the “DLP-G92 Verify 4MD-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power” task on page 5-134.
Step 14 Perform one of the following:
Purpose This task verifies the pass-through channel connections during an OADM
node acceptance test.
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-134
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
• If an OSCM card is installed, connect a power meter to LINE TX port on the card front panel and
verify that the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier is turned on by the pass-through
wavelength.
• If an OSC-CSM card is installed, complete the “DLP-G84 Verify the OSC-CSM Incoming Power”
task on page 5-137 for the Side B OSC-CSM card.
Step 15 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G92 Verify 4MD-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power
Step 1 Verify the TX band power on the related Side B AD-xB-xx.x card:
a. Display the Side B AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the BAND TX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength selected on the tunable laser.
d. Verify that the BAND TX Power value is higher than the default no-power value of –30 dBm.
Step 2 Verify the TX power on the Side B 4MD-xx.x card (Side B-to-Side A):
a. Display the Side B 4MD-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Verify that the Power value on the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
Step 3 Verify the RX band power on the related Side A AD-xB-xx.x card (Side B-to-Side A):
a. Display the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
c. Verify that the BAND RX Power value is higher than the default no-power values of –30 dBm.
Step 4 Verify the Side A 4MD-xx.x card (Side B-to-Side A):
a. Display the Side A 4MD-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the CHAN RX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength selected on the tunable laser.
d. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN RX port reaches the provisioned set point (VOA Power
Ref).
Purpose This task verifies 4MD-xx.x pass-through connection power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only5-135
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 5 Verify the TX band power on the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card (Side A-to-Side B):
a. Display the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the BAND TX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength selected on the tunable laser.
d. Verify that the BAND TX Power value is higher than the default no-power value of –30 dBm.
Step 6 Verify the Side A 4MD-xx.x card (Side A-to-Side B):
a. Display the Side A 4MD-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Verify that the Power value on the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
Step 7 Verify the Side B 4MD-xx.x card (Side A-to-Side B):
a. Display the Side B 4MD-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the CHAN RX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength selected on the tunable laser.
d. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN RX port reaches the provisioned set point (VOA Power
Ref).
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G90 Verify an AD-xB-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power
Step 1 Verify the Side B AD-xB-xx.x band TX power:
a. Display the Side B AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the BAND TX (Side B-to-Side A) port related to the wavelength
selected on the tunable laser to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). Click Apply.
d. Verify that the BAND TX port Power value is higher than the default no-power value of –30 dBm.
Step 2 Verify the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card RX and TX power:
a. Display the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
Purpose This task verifies an AD-xB-xx.x pass-through connection.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only5-136
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
c. Verify that the Power value of the BAND RX (Side B-to-Side A) port is higher than the default
no-power value of –30 dBm.
d. Change the administrative state of the BAND TX (Side A-to-Side B) port related to the wavelength
selected on the tunable laser to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). Click Apply.
e. Verify that the BAND TX port Power value is higher than the default no-power value of –30 dBm.
Step 3 Verify the BAND RX port on the Side B AD-xB-xx.x card:
a. Display the Side B AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
c. Verify that the Power value of the BAND RX (Side A-to-Side B) port is higher than the default
no-power value of –30 dBm.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G91 Verify an AD-xC-xx.x Pass-Through Connection
Step 1 Verify the Side B AD-xC-xx.x channel TX power:
a. Display the Side B AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Verify that the power value for the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
d. If the AD-xC-xx.x card is an AD-4C-xx.x card, a VOA (applied to all four channels) is installed
along the drop path and needs to be activated in Step e.
e. Change the administrative state of the CHAN TX port related to the wavelength selected on the
tunable laser to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). Click Apply.
f. Verify that the power value of the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
Step 2 Verify the channel power for the corresponding Side A AD-xC-xx.x card:
a. Display the Side A AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Verify that the power value of the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
d. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN RX port reaches the provisioned set point (VOA Power
Ref).
Purpose This task verifies an AD-xC-xx.x pass-through connection.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only5-137
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
e. Change the administrative state of the CHAN TX port related to the wavelength selected on the
tunable laser to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). Click Apply.
f. If the AD-xC-xx.x is an AD-4C-W card, a VOA (applying to all four channels) is installed along the
drop path and needs to be activated in Step g.
g. Change the administrative state of the CHAN TX port related to the wavelength selected on the
tunable laser to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). Click Apply.
h. Verify that the power value of the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
Step 3 Verify the Side B AD-xC-xx.x channel RX power:
a. Display the Side B AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the CHAN RX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength selected on the tunable laser.
d. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN RX port reaches the provisioned set point (VOA Power
Ref).
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G84 Verify the OSC-CSM Incoming Power
Step 1 Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Verify that the Power value for Port 2 is higher than the default no-power value of –30 dBm. The
calculated expected power for Port 2 is the OPT-PRE card Pout COM TX value. Normally, this is +
2 dBm.
Note Actual output power is affected by many factors. Always consider the calculated expected power
to be a general guideline and not a precise value.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task verifies the OSC-CSM card incoming power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only5-138
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
DLP-G93 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards
Note In this task, you will verify add and drop connections in the following order: Side B-to-Side A add and
Side A-to-Side B drop, Steps 1 through 15; Side A-to-Side B add and Side B-to-Side A drop, Steps 16
through 17.
Step 1 Based on the Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file, tune the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C
card to a wavelength (belonging to the 100-GHz ITU-T grid) of the channel running on the first add path
of the first Side A AD-xC-xx.x or Side A 4MD-xx.x card in the Side B-to-Side A direction. Refer to the
tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for
Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5.
Step 2 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the corresponding
15xx.x RX port (on the card front panel) of the Side A AD-xC-xx.x or 4MD-xx.x card.
Step 3 Verify the Side A AD-xC-xx.x or 4MD-xx.x card (Side B-to-Side A):
a. Display the Side A AD-xC-xx.x or 4MD-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the CHAN RX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength chosen on the tunable laser.
d. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN RX port reaches the provisioned set point (VOA Power
Ref).
Step 4 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-6 on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier to verify that the added wavelength
turns on the laser.
Step 5 If the add connection uses a 4MD-xx.x card, continue with Step 6. If the add connection uses an
AD-xC-xx.x card, move to Step 10.
Step 6 Verify the RX band port on the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card:
a. Display the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
Step 7 Verify that the BAND RX Power value is higher than the default no-power value of –30 dBm.
Step 8 Verify the band TX port on the Side A AD-xB-xx.x (Side A-to-Side B):
a. Display the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
Purpose This task verifies the add and drop channel connections for an OADM node
with OSCM cards installed.
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C card
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-139
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
c. Change the administrative state of the BAND TX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength selected on the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C
card.
d. Verify that the Power value of the BAND TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–30 dBm.
Step 9 Verify the Side A 4MD-xx.x card (Side A-to-Side B):
a. Display the Side A 4MD-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–30 dBm.
Step 10 Verify the Side A AD-xC-xx.x (Side A-to-Side B) card:
a. Display the Side A AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
b. If the AD-xC-xx.x card is an AD-4C-xx.x card, a VOA (applied to all four channels) is installed
along the drop path and needs to be activated according to Step g.
c. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
d. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
e. Display the Side B AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
f. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
g. Change the administrative state of the CHAN TX port related to the wavelength selected on the
tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). Click
Apply.
h. Verify that the power value for the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
i. Perform the output power check.
Step 11 Connect a power meter to the proper 15xx.x TX port on the front panel (the dual port compared with the
port where the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card is connected). Verify that the physical optical
power value from that port is consistent with the value displayed on the Provisioning > Optical Chn >
Parameters tab for the proper CHAN TX power value +/– 0.5 dB.
Step 12 Repeat Steps 5 through 11 for all add paths of any Side A AD-xC-xx.x or 4MD-xx.x cards along the
Side B-to-Side A direction.
Step 13 Remove the loopback on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier and create a loopback on the
Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier.
Step 14 Verify that the OSC link becomes active on the Side B OSCM card. (The OSC termination must be
already provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.) If the OSC link becomes active, continue with Step 15. If the OSC link does not become
active, perform the following steps:
a. Modify the OSC Fail Low thresholds by clicking the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Optics Thresholds tabs and changing the Port 2 opwrMin (minimum power) to –40 dBm.
b. If the OSC link turns up, continue with Step 15. If the OSC link remains down, disconnect the
OSCM card from the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.
c. Create a loopback on the OSCM card by connecting patch cable from the OSC TX port to the
OSC RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.5-140
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
d. If the OSC link turns up, replace the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card. If the OSC link does not turn
up, replace the OSCM card. See the “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” procedure on page 4-64.
Note Due to the OSC signal loopback, an EOC DCC Termination Failure might be raised on ANSI
shelves.
Step 15 Based on the Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file, tune the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C
card to a wavelength (belonging to the 100-GHz ITU-T grid) of the channel running on the first add path
of the first add path of the first AD-xC-xx.x or 4MD-xx.x card on the Side A-to-Side B direction. Refer
to the tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5.
Step 16 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the correspondent
15xx.x RX port (on the card front panel) of the Side B AD-xC-xx.x or Side B 4MD-xx.x card.
Step 17 Repeat Steps 3 through 15, applying the steps to the Side A-to-Side B direction.
Step 18 Remove the loopback connection and restore the default administrative state (IS,AINS or
Unlocked,automaticInService) on all the ports previously set to OOS,MT (ANSI) or
Locked,maintenance (ETSI).
Step 19 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to recover the correct
node configuration.
Step 20 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G49 Perform the Active OADM Node Acceptance Test on a
Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM Cards
Purpose This procedure checks the integrity of all the optical connections in an
OADM node with OSC-CSM cards and OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards
installed on both Side B and Side A of the shelf. Three connection types
are tested:
• Express
• Pass-through
• Add/Drop
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C card
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-141
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the OADM node where you want to
perform the acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are Success - Changed or
Success - Unchanged. If not, complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on
page 4-127.
Step 5 Check the Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file to verify the presence of added and dropped
bands (including four channels at 100 GHz) configured in pass-through mode in either direction.
Note Configuring a band in pass-through mode means that the band is dropped in one direction by an
AD-xB-xx.x card on one side (Side B or Side A) of the node, then added by another AD-xB-x.xx
card on the opposite side in the same direction. The band is not terminated inside the node.
Step 6 If no bands are configured in pass-through mode, continue with Step 7. If a band is configured in
pass-through mode, mark it and skip the related optical test for the express, add, and drop sections. Band
pass-through connections are verified separately.
Step 7 Check the site configuration file from Cisco TransportPlanner to verify the presence of dropped or added
channels configured in pass-through mode in either direction.
Note Configuring a channel in pass-through mode means that the channel is dropped in one direction
by an AD-xC-xx.x card on one side (Side B or Side A) of the node, then added by another
AD-xC-x.xx card on the opposite side in the same direction. The channel is not terminated inside
the node.
Step 8 If no channels are configured in pass-through mode, continue with Step 9. If a channel is configured in
pass-through mode, mark it and skip the related optical test for the express, add, and drop sections.
Channel pass-through connections are verified separately.
Step 9 Create a loopback on the Side A OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port
using a patchcord and a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 10 Verify that the OSC link becomes active on the Side A OSC-CSM card. (The OSC termination must be
already provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.)5-142
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Due to the OSC signal loopback, an EOC Termination Failure alarm might be raised on ANSI
shelves.
Step 11 If the OSC link becomes active, continue with Step 12. If the OSC link does not turn up, perform the
following troubleshooting steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator between the LINE TX and LINE RX connection. If the OSC link
becomes active, continue with Step 12. If not, continue with Step b.
b. Modify the OSC Fail Low thresholds. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds
tabs and change the Port 6 opwrMin (minimum power) to –40 dBm.
c. Modify the COM TX Fail Low Threshold. Change the Port 3 opwrMin (minimum power) to
–30 dBm.
d. If the OSC link turns up, continue with Step 12. If it does not turn up, replace the OSC-CSM card.
Step 12 If the node has express bands or channels, complete the “DLP-G86 Verify Express Channel Connections
on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards” task on page 5-142. If the node does not have express bands
or channels, continue with Step 13.
Step 13 If connections configured in pass-through mode are present (noted in Steps 6 and 8), complete the
“DLP-G89 Verify OADM Node Pass-Through Channel Connections” task on page 5-133. If not,
continue with Step 14.
Step 14 If connections have add/drop connections, complete the “DLP-G94 Verify Add and Drop Connections
on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards” task on page 5-144.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G86 Verify Express Channel Connections on an OADM Node with
OSC-CSM Cards
Step 1 If you are using a tunable laser, set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm. If not, continue
with Step 2.
Step 2 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the LINE RX port
of the Side B OSC-CSM card.
Step 3 If an OPT-PRE amplifier card is installed on Side B, install a 10-dB bulk attenuator on the COM RX
port.
Purpose This task verifies the express channel connections for an OADM node with
OSC-CSM cards during a node acceptance test.
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C card
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-143
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 4 Based on the Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file, tune the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C
card to a wavelength (on the 100-GHz ITU-T grid) that runs on the express path of all AD-xB-xx.x and
AD-xC-xx.x cards on the Side B-to-Side A and Side A-to-Side B directions. Refer to the tunable laser
manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance
Testing” task on page 5-5.
Step 5 Complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7 for the
OPT-PRE amplifier card installed on Side A.
Step 6 If AD-xB-xx.x cards are installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G87 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output
Express Power” task on page 5-131 for each Side B card. If not, continue with Step 7.
Note If AD-xB-xx.x and AD-xC-xx.x cards are both installed in one direction, the received express
channels will go into the AD-xB-xx.x cards first, then into the AD-xC-xx.x cards.
Step 7 If AD-xC-xx.x cards are installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G88 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output
Express Power” task on page 5-131 for each Side B card. If not, continue with Step 8.
Step 8 If AD-xC-xx.x cards are installed on Side A, complete the “DLP-G271 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output
Common Power” task on page 5-132 for each Side A card. If not, continue with Step 9.
Step 9 If AD-xB-xx.x cards are installed on Side A, complete the “DLP-G272 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output
Common Power” task on page 5-132 for each Side A card. If not, continue with Step 10.
Step 10 Complete the “DLP-G83 Verify the OSC-CSM Power on OADM Nodes” task on page 5-143 for the
OSC-CSM card installed on Side A.
Step 11 Complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7 for the
OPT-PRE card installed on Side B.
Step 12 Repeat Steps 6 through 11 for the AD-xB-xx.x and AD-xC-xx.x cards along the Side A-to-Side B
direction.
Step 13 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G83 Verify the OSC-CSM Power on OADM Nodes
Step 1 Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Verify that the Power value for Port 3 is higher than the default no-power value of –30 dBm. The
calculated expected power value for Port 3 is:
Pout COM TX of last AD-xy-xx.x – IL02 OSC-CSM (COM RX > LINE TX) – 10 dB (bulk attenuator)
Purpose This task verifies the OSC-CSM card power on OADM nodes.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only5-144
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 4 Double-check the value.
Note Actual output power is affected by many factors. Always consider the calculated expected power
to be a general guideline and not a precise value.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G94 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM
Cards
Step 1 Based on the Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file, tune the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C
card to a wavelength (belonging to the 100-GHz ITU-T grid) of the channel running on the first add path
of the first Side A AD-xC-xx.x or Side A 4MD-xx.x card on the Side B-to-Side A direction. Refer to the
tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for
Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5.
Step 2 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the corresponding
15xx.x RX port (on the card front panel) of the Side A AD-xC-xx.x or 4MD-xx.x card.
Step 3 Verify the Side A AD-xC-xx.x or 4MD-xx.x card (Side B-to-Side A):
a. Display the Side A AD-xC-xx.x or 4MD-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the CHAN RX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength selected on the tunable laser.
d. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN RX port reaches the provisioned set point (VOA Power
Ref).
Step 4 Complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7 on the
Side A OPT-PRE amplifier to verify that the added wavelength turns on the laser.
Step 5 If the add connection uses a 4MD-xx.x card, continue with Step 6. If the add connection uses an
AD-xC-xx.x card, move to Step 10.
Step 6 Verify the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card:
a. Display the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the BAND TX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength selected on the tunable laser.
Purpose This task verifies the add and drop channel connections for an OADM node
with OSC-CSM cards installed.
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C card
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-145
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
d. Verify that the Power value of the BAND TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–30 dBm.
Step 7 Display the related AD-xB-xx.x card (Side A-to-Side B direction) in card view.
Step 8 Change the administrative state of the drop BAND TX port related to the wavelength selected on the
tunable laser to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI).
Step 9 (Optional) Connect a power meter to the proper 15xx.xx TX port on the front panel (the dual port
compared with the port where the tunable laser is connected). Verify that the physical optical power
value from that port is consistent with the value displayed on the Provisioning > Optical Chn >
Parameters tab for the proper CHAN TX power value, +/– 0.5 dB.
Step 10 Verify the Side A AD-xC-xx.x (Side A-to-Side B) card:
a. Display the Side A AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
d. Display the Side B AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the power value for the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
g. If the AD-xC-xx.x card is an AD-4C-xx.x card, a VOA (applied to all four channels) is installed
along the drop path and needs to be activated in Step h.
h. Change the administrative state of the CHAN TX port related to the wavelength selected on the
tunable laser to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). Click Apply.
i. Perform the output power check.
Step 11 (Optional) Connect a power meter to the proper 15xx.xx TX port on the front panel (the dual port
compared with the port where the tunable laser is connected). Verify that the physical optical power
value from that port is consistent with the value on Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tab for the
proper CHAN TX power value, +/– 0.5 dB.
Step 12 Repeat Steps 10 through 11 for all add paths of any Side A AD-xC-xx.x cards along the Side B-to-Side A
direction.
Step 13 Remove the loopback on the Side A OSC-CSM card.
Step 14 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs.
Step 15 Click Launch ANS.
Step 16 Create a loopback on the Side B OSC-CSM card by connecting the OSC-CSM LINE RX and LINE TX
ports using a patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 17 Verify that the OSC link becomes active on the Side A OSC-CSM card. (The OSC termination must be
already provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.)
Note Due to the OSC signal loopback, an EOC Termination Failure alarm might be raised on ANSI
shelves.5-146
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 18 If the OSC link becomes active, continue with Step 19. If the OSC link does not turn up, perform the
following troubleshooting steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator between the LINE TX and LINE RX connection. If the OSC link
becomes active, continue with Step 19. If not, continue with Step b.
b. Modify the OSC Fail Low thresholds. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds
tabs and change the Port 6 opwrMin (minimum power) to –40 dBm.
c. Modify the COM TX Fail Low Threshold. Change the Port 3 opwrMin (minimum power) to
–30 dBm.
d. If the OSC link turns up, continue with Step 19. If it does not turn up, replace the OSC-CSM card.
Step 19 Check the site configuration file from Cisco TransportPlanner and identify the wavelength (belonging to
the 100 Ghz ITU-T grid) of the channel running on the first add path of the first AD-xC-xx.x or
4MD-xx.x card on the Side A-to-Side B direction.
Step 20 Connect the tunable laser to the corresponding 15xx.x RX port (on the card front panel) of the Side B
AD-xC-xx.x or Side B 4MD-xx.x card.
Step 21 Repeat Steps 3 through 20, applying the steps to the Side B-to-Side A direction.
Step 22 Restore the default administrative state (IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService) on all the ports
previously set to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI).
Step 23 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to recover the correct
node configuration.
Step 24 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G50 Perform the Passive OADM Node Acceptance Test on
a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM Cards
Purpose This procedure checks the integrity of all the optical connections inside an
OADM node with OSC-CSM cards and no OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards
installed on Side B and Side A of the shelf. Three connection types are
tested:
• Express
• Pass-through
• Add/Drop
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C card
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-147
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the OADM node where you want to
perform the acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are Success - Changed or
Success - Unchanged. If not, complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on
page 4-127.
Step 5 Check the Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file to verify the presence of a dropped or added
bands (including four channels at 100 GHz) configured in pass-through mode in either direction.
Note Configuring a band in pass-through mode means that the band is dropped in one direction by an
AD-xB-xx.x card on one side (Side B or Side A) of the node, then added by another AD-xB x.xx
card on the opposite side in the same direction. The band is not terminated inside the node.
Step 6 If no bands are configured in pass-through mode, continue with Step 7. If a band is configured in
pass-through mode, mark it and skip the related optical test for the express, add, and drop sections. Band
pass-through connections are verified separately.
Step 7 Check the site configuration file from Cisco TransportPlanner to verify the presence of dropped or added
channels configured in pass-through mode in either direction.
Note Configuring a channel in pass-through mode means that the channel is dropped in one direction
by an AD-xC-xx.x card on one side (Side B or Side A) of the node, then added by another
AD-xC-x.xx card on the opposite side in the same direction. The channel is not terminated inside
the node.
Step 8 If no channels are configured in pass-through mode, continue with Step 9. If a channel is configured in
pass-through mode, mark it and skip the related optical test for the express, add, and drop sections.
Channel pass-through connections are verified separately.
Step 9 Create a loopback on the Side A OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port
using a patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 10 Verify that the OSC link becomes active on the Side A OSC-CSM card. (The OSC termination must be
already provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.)5-148
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Due to the OSC signal loopback, an EOC Termination Failure alarm might be raised on ANSI
shelves.
Step 11 If the OSC link becomes active, continue with Step 12. If the OSC link does not turn up, perform the
following troubleshooting steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator between the LINE TX and LINE RX connection. If the OSC link
becomes active, continue with Step 12. If not, continue with Step b.
b. Modify the OSC Fail Low thresholds. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds
tabs and change the Port 6 opwrMin (minimum power) to –40 dBm.
c. Modify the COM TX Fail Low Threshold. Change the Port 3 opwrMin (minimum power) to
–30 dBm.
d. If the OSC link turns up, continue with Step 12. If it does not turn up, replace the OSC-CSM card.
Step 12 If the node has express bands or channels, complete the “DLP-G86 Verify Express Channel Connections
on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards” task on page 5-142. If the node does not have express bands
or channels, continue with Step 13.
Step 13 If connections configured in pass-through mode are present (noted in Steps 5 through 8), complete the
“DLP-G89 Verify OADM Node Pass-Through Channel Connections” task on page 5-133. If not,
continue with Step 14.
Step 14 If connections have add/drop connections, complete the “DLP-G94 Verify Add and Drop Connections
on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards” task on page 5-144.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G186 Perform the Four-Degree and Eight-Degree Mesh
Patch Panel Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Purpose This procedure checks the insertion loss for a four-degree or eight-degree
patch panel.
Tools/Equipment 1 fully-tunable transponder or tunable laser source with an LC patchcord
1 optical power meter with LC input connector
1 MPO-LC multicable (LC if the optical power meter has LC input)
Prerequisite Procedures • The mesh patch panel must be installed. See the “DLP-G28 Install the
Fiber Patch-Panel Tray” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-149
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Step 4 If you are installing a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C
Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 5 Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 5-158 to tune the transponder
to a wavelength not used in any of the sides already carrying traffic (1530.33 nm, for example).
Step 6 Complete the “DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power” task on page 5-159.
Step 7 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 8 Connect the transponder to the COM-RX A port of the four-degree or eight-degree patch panel.
Step 9 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,MT (ANSI)
or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 10 Verify the COM-RX port power results for Side A (Table 5-4).
Step 11 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 12 Connect the transponder to the COM-RX B port of the four-degree or eight-degree patch panel.
Step 13 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 14 Verify the COM-RX port power results for Side B (Table 5-5).
Table 5-4 From COM-RX Side A Verification
Connect MPO Connector to Patch Panel Port Refer to...
EXP A TX Table 5-12 on page 5-154
EXP B TX Table 5-14 on page 5-155
EXP C TX Table 5-15 on page 5-156
EXP D TX Table 5-16 on page 5-156
EXP E TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-17 on page 5-156
EXP F TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-18 on page 5-157
EXP G TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-19 on page 5-157
EXP H TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-20 on page 5-158
TEST ACCESS TX Table 5-13 on page 5-1555-150
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 15 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 16 Connect the transponder to the COM-RX C port of the four-degree or eight-degree patch panel.
Step 17 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 18 Verify the COM-RX port power results for Side C (Table 5-6).
Step 19 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 20 Connect the transponder to the COM-RX D port of the four-degree or eight-degree patch panel.
Step 21 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 22 Verify the COM-RX port power results for Side D (Table 5-7).
Table 5-5 From COM-RX Side B Verification
Connect MPO Connector to Patch Panel Port Refer to...
EXP A TX Table 5-13 on page 5-155
EXP B TX Table 5-12 on page 5-154
EXP C TX Table 5-15 on page 5-156
EXP D TX Table 5-16 on page 5-156
EXP E TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-17 on page 5-156
EXP F TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-18 on page 5-157
EXP G TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-19 on page 5-157
EXP H TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-20 on page 5-158
TEST ACCESS TX Table 5-14 on page 5-155
Table 5-6 From COM-RX Side C Verification
Connect MPO Connector to Patch Panel Port Refer to...
EXP A TX Table 5-13 on page 5-155
EXP B TX Table 5-14 on page 5-155
EXP C TX Table 5-12 on page 5-154
EXP D TX Table 5-16 on page 5-156
EXP E TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-17 on page 5-156
EXP F TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-18 on page 5-157
EXP G TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-19 on page 5-157
EXP H TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-20 on page 5-158
TAP TX Table 5-15 on page 5-1565-151
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 23 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 24 If you are testing a four-degree patch panel, continue with Step 77. If you are testing an eight-degree
patch panel, continue with Step 25.
Step 25 Connect the transponder to the COM-RX E port of the eight-degree patch panel.
Step 26 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 27 Verify the COM-RX port power results for Side E (Table 5-8).
Step 28 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 29 Connect the transponder to the COM-RX F port of the eight-degree patch panel.
Step 30 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 31 Verify the COM-RX port power results for Side F (Table 5-9).
Table 5-7 From COM-RX Side D Verification
Connect MPO Connector to Patch Panel Port Refer to...
EXP A TX Table 5-13 on page 5-155
EXP B TX Table 5-14 on page 5-155
EXP C TX Table 5-15 on page 5-156
EXP D TX Table 5-12 on page 5-154
EXP E TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-17 on page 5-156
EXP F TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-18 on page 5-157
EXP G TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-19 on page 5-157
EXP H TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-20 on page 5-158
TEST ACCESS TX Table 5-16 on page 5-156
Table 5-8 From COM-RX Side E Verification
Connect MPO Connector to Patch Panel Port Refer to...
EXP A TX Table 5-13 on page 5-155
EXP B TX Table 5-14 on page 5-155
EXP C TX Table 5-15 on page 5-156
EXP D TX Table 5-16 on page 5-156
EXP E TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-12 on page 5-154
EXP F TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-18 on page 5-157
EXP G TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-19 on page 5-157
EXP H TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-20 on page 5-158
TEST ACCESS TX Table 5-17 on page 5-1565-152
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 32 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 33 Connect the transponder to the COM-RX G port of the eight-degree patch panel.
Step 34 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 35 Verify the COM-RX port power results for Side G (Table 5-10).
Step 36 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 37 Connect the transponder to the COM-RX H port of the eight-degree patch panel.
Step 38 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 39 Verify the COM-RX port power results for Side H (Table 5-11).
Table 5-9 From COM-RX Side F Verification Table
Connect MPO Connector to Patch Panel Port Refer to...
EXP A TX Table 5-13 on page 5-155
EXP B TX Table 5-14 on page 5-155
EXP C TX Table 5-15 on page 5-156
EXP D TX Table 5-16 on page 5-156
EXP E TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-17 on page 5-156
EXP F TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-12 on page 5-154
EXP G TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-19 on page 5-157
EXP H TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-20 on page 5-158
TEST ACCESS TX Table 5-18 on page 5-157
Table 5-10 From COM-RX Side G Verification
Connect MPO Connector to Patch Panel Port Refer to...
EXP A TX Table 5-13 on page 5-155
EXP B TX Table 5-14 on page 5-155
EXP C TX Table 5-15 on page 5-156
EXP D TX Table 5-16 on page 5-156
EXP E TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-17 on page 5-156
EXP F TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-18 on page 5-157
EXP G TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-12 on page 5-154
EXP H TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-20 on page 5-158
TEST ACCESS TX Table 5-19 on page 5-1575-153
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 40 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 41 Connect the transponder to the test access RX port of the four- or eight-degree patch panel.
Note There are two local access RX ports on the 8-degree patch panel. Select the left Local Access
port for testing.
Step 42 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 43 Connect the MPO connector of the MPO-LC (FC or SC) multifiber fan-out to EXP A TX port of the four-
or eight-degree patch-panel.
Step 44 Connect the optical power meter to the fan-out cable 1.
Step 45 Collect the actual reading from the optical power meter.
Step 46 Verify the IL is less than 11dB for an 8-degree patch panel or less than 8dB for a 4-degree patch panel.
Step 47 Connect the MPO connector of the MPO-LC (FC or SC) multifiber fan-out to EXP B TX port of the four-
or eight-degree patch panel.
Step 48 Connect the optical power meter to the fan-out cable 2.
Step 49 Collect the actual reading from the optical power meter.
Step 50 Verify the IL is less than 11dB for an 8-degree patch panel or less than 8dB for a 4-degree patch panel.
Step 51 Connect the MPO connector of the MPO-LC (FC or SC) multifiber fan-out to EXP C TX port of the four-
or eight-degree patch panel.
Step 52 Connect the optical power meter to the fan-out cable 3.
Step 53 Collect the actual reading from the optical power meter.
Step 54 Verify the IL is less than 11dB for an 8-degree patch panel or less than 8dB for a 4-degree patch panel.
Step 55 Connect the MPO connector of the MPO-LC (FC or SC) multifiber fan-out to EXP D TX port of the four-
or eight-degree patch panel.
Step 56 Connect the optical power meter to the fan-out cable 4.
Step 57 Collect the actual reading from the optical power meter.
Table 5-11 From COM-RX Side H Verification
Connect MPO Connector to Patch Panel Port Refer to...
EXP A TX Table 5-13 on page 5-155
EXP B TX Table 5-14 on page 5-155
EXP C TX Table 5-15 on page 5-156
EXP D TX Table 5-16 on page 5-156
EXP E TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-17 on page 5-156
EXP F TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-18 on page 5-157
EXP G TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-19 on page 5-157
EXP H TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-12 on page 5-154
TEST ACCESS TX Table 5-20 on page 5-1585-154
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 58 Verify the IL is less than 11dB for an 8-degree patch panel or less than 8dB for a 4-degree patch panel.
Step 59 Connect the MPO connector of the MPO-LC (FC or SC) multifiber fan-out to EXP E TX port of the four-
or eight-degree patch panel.
Step 60 Connect the optical power meter to the fan-out cable 5.
Step 61 Collect the actual reading from the optical power meter.
Step 62 Verify the IL is less than 11dB for an 8-degree patch panel.
Step 63 Connect the MPO connector of the MPO-LC (FC or SC) multifiber fan-out to EXP F TX port of the four-
or eight-degree patch panel.
Step 64 Connect the optical power meter to the fan-out cable 6.
Step 65 Collect the actual reading from the optical power meter.
Step 66 Verify the IL is less than 11dB for an 8-degree patch panel.
Step 67 Connect the MPO connector of the MPO-LC (FC or SC) multifiber fan-out to EXP G TX port of the four-
or eight-degree patch panel.
Step 68 Connect the optical power meter to the fan-out cable 7.
Step 69 Collect the actual reading from the optical power meter.
Step 70 Verify the IL is less than 11dB for an 8-degree patch panel.
Step 71 Connect the MPO connector of the MPO-LC (FC or SC) multifiber fan-out to EXP H TX port of the four-
or eight-degree patch panel.
Step 72 Connect the optical power meter to the fan-out cable 8.
Step 73 Collect the actual reading from the optical power meter.
Step 74 Verify the IL is less than 11dB for an 8-degree patch panel.
Step 75 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 76 Repeat Steps 41 through 75 for the right side Local Access RX port.
Step 77 Complete the “NTP-G188 Perform the Native Mesh Node Acceptance Test” procedure on page 5-168.
The tables below are used for verification in Steps 10 through 39 of this procedure.
Table 5-12 Same Side Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 No power No power
Cable 2 No power No power
Cable 3 No power No power
Cable 4 No power No power
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —5-155
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 5-13 Side A Power Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 IL < 11 dB IL < 8 dB
Cable 2 No power No power
Cable 3 No power No power
Cable 4 No power No power
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 5-14 Side B Power Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 No power No power
Cable 2 IL < 11 dB IL < 8 dB
Cable 3 No power No power
Cable 4 No power No power
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 5-12 Same Side Verification (continued)
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel5-156
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Table 5-15 Side C Power Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 No power No power
Cable 2 No power No power
Cable 3 IL < 11 dB IL < 8 dB
Cable 4 No power No power
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 5-16 Side D Power Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 No power No power
Cable 2 No power No power
Cable 3 No power No power
Cable 4 IL < 11 dB IL < 8 dB
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 5-17 Side E Power Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 No power No power
Cable 2 No power No power
Cable 3 No power No power
Cable 4 No power No power5-157
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
IL < 11 dB —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 5-18 Side F Power Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 No power No power
Cable 2 No power No power
Cable 3 No power No power
Cable 4 No power No power
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
IL < 11 dB —
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 5-19 Side G Power Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 No power No power
Cable 2 No power No power
Cable 3 No power No power
Cable 4 No power No power
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 5-17 Side E Power Verification (continued)
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel5-158
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength
Step 1 In card view, display the transponder card.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 In the Wavelength field, choose the desired wavelength (C-Band, odd) from the drop-down list.
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
IL < 11 dB —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 5-20 Side H Power Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 No power No power
Cable 2 No power No power
Cable 3 No power No power
Cable 4 No power No power
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
IL < 11 dB —
Table 5-19 Side G Power Verification (continued)
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Purpose This task tunes transponder wavelength.
Tools/Equipment Fully C-band tunable transponder or tunable laser source with an LC
patchcord
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-159
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Module > Pluggable Port Module tabs and click Create to
preprovision a pluggable port module (PPM), if necessary.
Step 6 Click Ok, then Apply.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power
Step 1 Connect the optical power meter to the transponder output.
Step 2 Display card view for the transponder card.
Step 3 Click the Provisioning > Line tabs, and choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from
the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 4 Record the optical power meter value.
Step 5 Choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 6 Disconnect the optical power meter from the TX port of the transponder card.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task checks and records optical power.
Tools/Equipment Fully C-band tunable transponder or tunable laser source with an LC
patchcord
Optical power meter
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
ANS successfully completed
All sides completely wired (including patch panels)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-160
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
NTP-G187 Perform the Multiring Site Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the multiring node where you want to
perform the acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Step 4 Insert a full C-band tunable transponder card into an available slot.
Step 5 Plug a 15 dB LC attenuator to the TX port of the transponder card.
Step 6 Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 5-158 to tune the transponder
to a wavelength yyyy.yy (1530.33 nm, for example).
Step 7 Complete the “DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power” task on page 5-159.
Step 8 Disconnect the optical power meter from the TX port of the transponder card.
Purpose This procedure checks the connections and the output power values for a
multiring node. A multiring node connects two existing in-service
two-sides ROADM nodes with two sides (each equipped with MMU
cards).
Tools/Equipment Fully C-band tunable transponder or tunable laser source
1 15-dB LC attenuator
1 optical power meter with LC input connector
1 MPO-LC multicable (LC if the optical power meter has LC input)
3 LC-LC adapters
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
All sides must be completely wired (including patch panels), except the
connections with the MMU cards in the existing in-service ROADM node;
for more information, see Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
NTP-G186 Perform the Four-Degree and Eight-Degree Mesh Patch Panel
Acceptance Test, page 5-148 (as needed)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-161
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 9 Make the following connections:
a. Connect the transponder card output port (with the 15 dB attenuator) to the COM-RX port of the
40-WXC-C card on Side A.
b. Connect the optical power meter to the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A.
c. Connect, using an LC-LC adapter, the patchcord from the COM-TX port to the patchcord in the
COM-RX port of the Side B 40-WXC-C card.
d. Connect, using an LC-LC adapter, the patchcord from the COM-TX port to the patchcord in the
COM-RX port of the Side C 40-WXC-C card.
e. Connect, using an LC-LC adapter, the patchcord from the COM-TX port to the patchcord in the
COM-RX port of the Side D 40-WXC-C card.
Step 10 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs. Complete the following:
a. Record the values of the following parameters:
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side A
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side A
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side B
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side B
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side C
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side C
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side C
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side C
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side D
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side D
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side D
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side D
b. Change the values of the parameters as follows:
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side A = 1 dBm
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A = –15 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A = –15 dBm
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side A = –30 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side B = 1 dBm
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B = –15 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B = –15 dBm
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side B = –30 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side C = 1 dBm 5-162
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side C = –15 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side C = –15 dBm
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side C = –30 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side D = 1 dBm
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side D = –15 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side D = –15 dBm
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side D = –30 dBm
Step 11 In card view, display the transponder card and click the Provisioning > Line tabs. Choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 12 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side A and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Record the Power value of the COM-RX
port.
b. Verify that the COM-RX value matches the transponder card optical power meter value recorded in
the “DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power” task on page 5-159 (+\–1dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the CRX -> EXP insertion loss.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
EXP-TX port.
e. Verify that the EXP-TX port power value = (COM-RX port power value in Step a) – (CRX -> EXP
insertion loss value in Step d) (+\– 1dB).
Step 13 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-17 card for Side A and complete the “DLP-434 Record the
OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value” task on page 5-165.
Step 14 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side B and complete the following:
a. Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 5-166. Set the Input
Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 1.
b. Complete the “DLP-436 Record the 40-WXC-C Power Value” task on page 5-167.
Step 15 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-17 card for Side B and complete the “DLP-434 Record the
OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value” task on page 5-165.
Step 16 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side C and complete the following:
a. Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 5-166. Set the Input
Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 1.
b. Complete the “DLP-436 Record the 40-WXC-C Power Value” task on page 5-167.
Step 17 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-17 card for Side C and complete the “DLP-434 Record the
OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value” task on page 5-165.
Step 18 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side D and complete the following:
a. Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 5-166. Set the Input
Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 1.
b. Complete the “DLP-436 Record the 40-WXC-C Power Value” task on page 5-167.
Step 19 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-17 card for Side D and complete the “DLP-434 Record the
OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value” task on page 5-165.
Step 20 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side A and complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C
OCHNC Parameters” task on page 5-166. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert
Value tabs to 2.5-163
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 21 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-17 card for Side A and complete the “DLP-434 Record the
OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value” task on page 5-165.
Step 22 Record the optical power meter value and verify that the optical power meter value matches the value
recorded in the “DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power” task on page 5-159 (+\– 1dB).
Step 23 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side A. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the
Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and then Delete. Repeat for Sides B,
C, and D of the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 24 To test all wavelengths, repeat Steps 6, 11, 18, and 20 for all supported wavelengths.
Step 25 In card view, display the transponder card and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 26 Disconnect the patchcord in the COM-TX port from the patchcord in the COM-RX port for Side B of
the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 27 Connect, using an LC-LC adapter, the patchcord from the COM-TX port with the patchcord in the
COM-RX port for Side A of the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 28 Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 5-158 to tune the transponder
card to the wavelength set in Step 6.
Step 29 Connect the transponder card output port (with the 15-dB-attenuator) to the COM-RX port of the
40-WXC-C card for Side B.
Step 30 In card view, display the transponder card. Click the Provisioning > Line tabs, and choose IS (ANSI)
or Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 31 Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 5-166 for Sides C and D
of the 40-WXC-C card. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 2.
Step 32 Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 5-166 for Side B of the
40-WXC-C card. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 3.
Step 33 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side B. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the
Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and then Delete. Repeat for Sides A,
C, and D.
Step 34 To test all wavelengths, repeat Steps 28 through 33 (omit Step 29) for all supported wavelengths.
Step 35 In card view, display the transponder card. Click the Provisioning > Line tabs, and choose
OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 36 Disconnect the patchcord in the COM-TX port from the patchcord in the COM-RX port of Side C of the
40-WXC-C card.
Step 37 Connect, using an LC-LC adapter, the patchcord from the COM-TX port to the patchcord in the
COM-RX port for Side B of the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 38 Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 5-158 to tune the transponder
card to the wavelength set in Step 6.
Step 39 Connect the transponder card output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) to the COM-RX port of the
40-WXC-C card for Side C.
Step 40 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 41 Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 5-166 for Sides A and D
of the 40-WXC-C card. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 3.
Step 42 Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 5-166 for Side C of the
40-WXC-C card. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 4.5-164
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 43 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card and click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the Return
Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and then Delete. Repeat for Sides A, B, and
D.
Step 44 To test all wavelengths, repeat Steps 38 through 43 (omit Step 39) for all supported wavelengths.
Step 45 Disconnect the patchcord in the COM-TX port from the patchcord in the COM-RX port of Side D of the
40-WXC-C card.
Step 46 Connect, using an LC-LC adapter, the patchcord from the COM-TX port to the patchcord in the
COM-RX of Side C of the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 47 Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 5-158 to tune the transponder
card to the desired wavelength for testing.
Step 48 Connect the transponder card output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) to the COM-RX port of the
40-WXC-C card of Side D.
Step 49 In card view, display the transponder card. Click the Provisioning > Line tabs, and choose IS (ANSI)
or Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 50 Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 5-166 for Sides A and B
of the 40-WXC-C card. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 4.
Step 51 Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 5-166 for Side C of the
40-WXC-C card. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 1.
Step 52 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side D. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the
Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and then Delete. Repeat for Sides
A, B, and C of the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 53 To test all wavelengths, repeat Steps 47 through 52 for all supported wavelengths, except Step 48.
Step 54 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs. Restore the values recorded in Step 10a for the following parameters:
• Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side A
• Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A
• Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A
• Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side B
• Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side B
• Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B
• Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B
• Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side B
• Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side C
• Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side C
• Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side C
• Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side C
• Power on the COM-TX port of the pre-amplifier on Side D
• Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side D
• Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side D
• Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side D5-165
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 55 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Click Launch ANS.
Step 56 Disconnect the patchcord in the COM-TX port from the patchcord in the COM-RX port of Side A of the
40-WXC-C card.
Step 57 Disconnect the patchcord in the COM-TX port from the patchcord in the COM-RX port of Side B of the
40-WXC-C card.
Step 58 Disconnect the patchcord in the COM-TX port from the patchcord in the COM-RX port of Side C of the
40-WXC-C card.
Step 59 Restore the connections to the MMU cards of the eight sides using the patchcords tested in this
procedure:
a. Connect the patchcord from the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A to the EXP-A-RX
port of the MMU in the lowest slot of the upgraded ROADM Node 1.
b. Connect the patchcord from the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A to the EXP-A-TX
port of the MMU in the lowest slot of the upgraded ROADM Node 1.
c. Connect the patchcord from the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B to the EXP-A-RX
port of the MMU in the highest slot of the upgraded ROADM Node 1.
d. Connect the patchcord from the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B to the EXP-A-TX
port of the MMU in the highest slot of the upgraded ROADM Node 1.
e. Connect the patchcord from the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side C to the EXP-A-RX
port of the MMU in the lowest slot of the upgraded ROADM Node 2.
f. Connect the patchcord from the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side C to the EXP-A-TX
port of the MMU in the lowest slot of the upgraded ROADM Node 2.
g. Connect the patchcord from the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side D to the EXP-A-RX
port of the MMU in the highest slot of the upgraded ROADM Node 2.
h. Connect the patchcord from the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side D to the EXP-A-TX
port of the MMU in the highest slot of the upgraded ROADM Node 2.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-434 Record the OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value
Purpose This task records the power value of the OPT-AMP-17 card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
DLP-436 Record the 40-WXC-C Power Value, page 5-167
ANS successfully completed
All sides completely wired (including patch panels)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-166
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 1 In card view for the OPT-AMP-17 card for Side x, complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify the COM-RX port power value matches the value of the EXP-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card
in the “DLP-436 Record the 40-WXC-C Power Value” task on page 5-167 (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Provisioning > Op. Ampli. Line > Parameters tabs and record the Total Output Power
value of the COM-TX port.
d. Verify that the value is 1 dBm (+\– 1 dB).
Step 2 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters
Step 1 In the 40-WXC-C card view for Side x, complete the following:
a. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs and set the parameters as follows:
– Target Power (dBm) = –15.0
Note The target power is not set if the power value is higher than the channel power that is allocated
and equalized.
– Input Port = x (EXP-RX) (for x, refer to the step in the originating procedure)
– VOA Attenuation (dB) = 13
– Wavelength = Value set in the originating procedure
b. Click Apply.
c. Click Refresh. In the Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength field, verify that the Actual
Power (dBm) is –15 +\– 0.5dB.
Step 2 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task sets the OCHNC parameters for the 40-WXC-C card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
ANS successfully completed
All sides completely wired (including patch panels)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-167
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
DLP-436 Record the 40-WXC-C Power Value
Step 1 In card view for the 40-WXC-C card for Side x, complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
b. Verify that the COM-TX port value matches Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength value
retrieved in the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 5-166 (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
EXP-TX port.
d. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the CRX -> EXP insertion loss value.
e. Verify that the EXP-TX port power value = (COM-TX port power value) – (CRX -> EXP insertion
loss value) (+\– 1 dB).
Step 2 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task records the power value of the 40-WXC-C card for a multiring
configuration.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power, page 5-159
DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters, page 5-166
ANS successfully completed
All sides completely wired (including patch panels)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-168
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
NTP-G188 Perform the Native Mesh Node Acceptance Test
Step 1 Identify the sides that are already carrying traffic and which sides are going to be tested.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the mesh native node where you want to
perform the acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(An equipment alarm is indicated in the Alarms tab, Cond column as EQPT.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Step 5 Insert a full C-band tunable transponder into an available slot of the side that you want to test (Side A
through H, referred to as Side x in this procedure).
Step 6 Plug a 15-dB LC attenuator into the trunk TX port of the transponder card.
Step 7 Select a wavelength that is not used on any of the sides for carrying traffic (or 1530.33 nm if it is a new
installation). Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 5-158 to tune the
transponder for the selected wavelength yyyy.yy.
Step 8 Connect the optical power meter to the trunk TX port of the transponder card.
Step 9 Complete the “DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power” task on page 5-159.
Step 10 Disconnect the optical power meter from the TX port of the transponder card.
Step 11 In card view, display the OSC-CSM or OSCM card for Side x and complete the following:
a. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs and from the OSRI pull-down menu, select OFF.
b. From the ALS Mode pull-down menu, select Disable.
Purpose This procedure checks the power values and the optical connections for a
native mesh node. Use this test for both new installations and directional
upgrades of native mesh nodes. Use this to also test the installation of a
new side n to a node.
Tools/Equipment • Fully C-band tunable transponder or tunable laser source with an LC
patchcord
• 1 MPO-LC multicable (LC if the optical power meter has LC input)
• 1 LC-LC adapter
Prerequisite Procedures • All sides must be completely fibered (including mesh patch panels);
for more information, see Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node.”
• NTP-G186 Perform the Four-Degree and Eight-Degree Mesh Patch
Panel Acceptance Test, page 5-148 (optional)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-169
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 12 Make the following connections:
a. Connect the transponder output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) to the Line RX port of the booster
amplifier (OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-AMP-17-C, or OSC-CSM) of Side x.
b. Connect the optical power meter to the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier (OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-AMP-17-C, or OSC-CSM) of Side x.
c. Use a fiber to connect the 40-DMX-C TX port to the 40-MUX-C RX port for the selected
wavelength yyyy.yy in the 15454-PP-80-LC patch panel for Side x.
Step 13 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs. Complete the following:
a. Record the actual values of the following parameters:
– Power on the COM-TX port of preamplifier on Side X
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X
– Power on the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier on Side X
b. Set the previous values of the parameters as follows:
– Power on the COM-TX port of preamplifier on Side X = +8 dBm
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X = +8 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X = –18 dBm
– Power on the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier on Side X = –1 dBm
c. Click Apply.
Step 14 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Click Launch ANS.
Step 15 In card view, display the 40-DMX-C card for Side x and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the VOA Attenuation Ref.
value y.
b. Set the VOA Attenuation Calib. to –y.
c. Choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
d. Click Apply.
Step 16 In card view, display the 40-MUX-C card for Side x. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs, and choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the Admin State
drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 17 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side x. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record
the IL02 (LINE RX->COM TX) insertion loss value.
Step 18 In card view, display the transponder card and click the Provisioning > Line tabs. For trunk port, choose
OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list and click
Apply.
Step 19 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side x, and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
b. Verify the power value of the COM-TX port = (Optical power meter value in Step 9) – (LINE
RX->COM TX insertion loss value read in Step 17) (+\– 1 dB).5-170
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 20 In card view, display the preamplifier card (OPT-PRE, OPT-AMP-C, or OPT-AMP-17C) for Side x and
complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify that the COM-RX power value matches the value in Step 19b (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line > Parameters tabs and record the Total Output Power
value of the COM-TX port.
d. Verify that the value is +8 dBm (+\– 1 dB).
Step 21 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side x and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify that the value matches the COM-TX port power value in Step 20c (+/- 1dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the CRX -> EXP insertion loss.
d. Record the CRX -> DROP insertion loss.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
EXP-TX port.
f. On the same screen, record the Power value of the DROP-TX port.
g. Verify that the EXP-TX Power value in Step 21e = (COM-RX value in Step 21a) – (CRX -> EXP
value in Step 21c) (+\– 1 dB).
h. Verify that the DROP-TX value in Step 21f = (COM-RX value in Step 21a) – (CRX -> DROP value
in Step 21d) (+\– 1 dB).
Step 22 In card view, display the 40-DMX-C card for Side x and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify that the COM-RX power value in Step a matches the value in Step 21f (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the 1RX -> xTX insertion loss (where x is the channel
number associated with yyyy.yy wavelength).
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
CHAN-TX port associated with yyyy.yy wavelength.
e. Verify that the CHAN-TX port Power value = (COM-RX power value in Step 22a) – (1RX -> xTX
insertion loss value in Step 22c) (+\– 1 dB).
Step 23 In card view, display the 40-MUX-C card for Side x and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
CHAN-RX port associated with the selected yyyy.yy wavelength.
b. Verify that the CHAN-RX value in Step 23a = (CHAN-TX value in Step 22d) (+\– 1.5 dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the xRX -> 1TX insertion loss (where x is the channel
number associated with yyyy.yy wavelength).
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs, record the Power value of the COM-TX
port.
e. Verify that the COM-TX Power value = (CHAN-RX value in Step 23a) – (yRX -> 1TX value in
Step 23c) (+\– 1 dB).5-171
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 24 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side x and complete the following:
a. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs, and in the Insert Value section, set the available parameters
as follows:
– Target Power (dBm) = –18.0
Note The target power is not set if the power value is higher than the channel power that is allocated
and equalized.
– Input port = 9 (ADD-RX)
– VOA Attenuation (dB) = 13
– Wavelength = yyyy.yy (wavelength selected in Step 7)
b. Click Apply.
c. In the Return Value COM-TX section on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and verify that the
Actual Power (dBm) is the Target Power from Step 24a +\– 0.5 dB. If the channel does not come up,
reduce VOA Attenuation by 5dB in Step 24a until the target power is reached.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
e. Verify that the COM-TX Power value matches the Actual Power value in Step 24c (+\– 1 dB).
Step 25 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side x, and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify COM-RX Power value matches the COM-TX Power value in Step 24d (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
LINE-TX port.
d. Verify that the LINE-TX value matches the power on the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier on
Side x recorded in Step 13b (+\– 1 dB).
e. Record the optical power meter value.
f. Verify that the optical power meter value matches the LINE-TX value in Step 25c (+\– 1 dB).
Step 26 Select the 40-WXC-C card on Side n where n is A, B, C, D, E, F, G, or H but n is not equal to x, go to
the card view and complete the following:
a. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs, and in the Insert Values section, set the available
parameters as follows:
– Target Power (dBm) = –22.0
Note The target power is not set if the power value is higher than the channel power that is allocated
and equalized.
– Input port = x (EXP-RX)
– VOA Attenuation (dB) = 20
– Wavelength = yyyy.yy (wavelength selected in Step 7)
b. Click Apply.5-172
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
c. In the Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and verify that the
Actual Power (dBm) is Target Power of Step 26a +\– 0.5 dB. If the channel does not come up, reduce
VOA Attenuation by 5dB in Step 26a until the target power is reached.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
e. Verify that the value of the COM-TX port matches the Actual Power value in Step 26c (+\– 1 dB).
f. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area,
click Refresh and then Delete.
Step 27 Repeat Step 26 for all the others of Side n, where n is A, B, C, D, E, F, G, or H but n not equal to x.
Step 28 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side x and click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the
Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and then Delete.
Step 29 In card view, display the transponder card and click the Provisioning > Line tabs. For trunk port, choose
OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 30 To test all wavelengths, repeat Step 7 through Step 29 for each wavelength. In Step 7, set the wavelength
to the next odd wavelength.
Step 31 Disconnect the optical power meter from the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier of the Side x.
Step 32 Disconnect the transponder output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) from the LINE-RX port of the
booster amplifier of the Side x.
Step 33 In card view, display the 40-DMX-C card for Side x and click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs. Complete the following:
a. Choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the Admin State
drop-down list.
b. Change the VOA Attenuation Calib. from the existing value to 0 (zero).
c. Click Apply.
Step 34 In card view, display the 40-MUX-C card for Side x and click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs. Choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the Admin
State drop-down list and click Apply.
Step 35 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs and restore the values recorded in Step 13a for the following
parameters:
• Power on the COM-TX port of preamplifier on Side X
• Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C on Side X
• Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C on Side X
• Power on the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier on Side X
Step 36 Repeat Steps 5 through 35 for all the others sides that are being installed.
Step 37 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Click Launch ANS.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.5-173
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
NTP-G189 Perform the Node Upgrade Acceptance Test
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the upgrade node where you want to
perform the acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Step 4 Insert a full C-band tunable transponder into an available slot for the node that you want to test.
Step 5 Plug a 15-dB LC attenuator to the TX port of the transponder.
Step 6 Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 5-158 to tune the transponder
to a wavelength yyyy.yy that is not used in any of the sides already carrying traffic (or 1530.33 nm if it
is a new installation).
Step 7 Complete the “DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power” task on page 5-159.
Step 8 Disconnect the optical power meter from the TX port of the transponder card.
Step 9 Make the following connections:
a. Connect the transponder card output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) to the COM-RX port of the
40-WXC-C card on Side A.
Purpose This procedure checks the connections and the output power values for a
node in an upgraded ring. The upgraded node connects an existing
in-service ROADM node with two sides (each equipped with MMU cards)
to a native mesh node with two sides.
Tools/Equipment Fully C-band tunable transponder or tunable laser source with an LC
patchcord
1 15-dB LC attenuator
1 optical power meter with LC input connector
2 LC-LC patchcords (or at least one for each native side)
1 LC-LC adapter
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
All sides completely wired (including patch panels), except the
connections with the MMU cards in the existing in-service ROADM node;
for more information, see Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
NTP-G186 Perform the Four-Degree and Eight-Degree Mesh Patch Panel
Acceptance Test, page 5-148
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-174
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Connect the optical power meter to the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A.
c. Connect, using the LC-LC adapter, the patchcord from the COM-TX port with the patchcord from
the COM-RX port of the Side B 40-WXC-C card.
Step 10 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs. Complete the following:
a. Record the values of the following parameters:
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side A
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side A
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side B
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side B
b. Change the values of the parameters as follows:
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side A = 1 dBm
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A = –15 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A = –15 dBm
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side A = –30 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side B = 1 dBm
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B = –15 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B = –15 dBm
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side B = –30 dBm
c. Click Apply.
d. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Click Launch ANS.
Step 11 Display card view for the OPT-AMP-17 card on Side A and click the Provisioning > Card tabs. From
the Working Card Mode drop-down list, verify that OPT-PRE appears and if not, choose it. Click Apply.
Repeat for Side B.
Step 12 Display card view for the transponder card and click the Provisioning > Line tabs. Choose IS (ANSI)
or Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list and click Apply.
Step 13 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card of Side A and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Record the Power value of the COM-RX
port.
b. Verify that the COM-RX value matches the transponder card optical power meter value recorded in
Step 7 (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the CRX -> EXP insertion loss.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
EXP-TX port.5-175
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
e. Verify that the EXP-TX port power value = (COM-RX port power value in Step a) - (EXP-TX Power
value in Step d) (+\– 1 dB).
Step 14 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-17 card for Side A and complete the “DLP-434 Record the
OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value” task on page 5-165.
Step 15 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side B and complete the following:
a. Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 5-166. Set the Input
Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 1.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
c. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
d. Verify that the COM-RX Power value matches the COM-TX port Power value in b (+\– 1 dB).
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
EXP-TX port.
f. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the CRX -> EXP insertion loss value.
g. Verify that the EXP-TX port power value = (COM-RX port power value) - (CRX -> EXP insertion
loss value) (+\– 1 dB)
Step 16 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-17 card for Side B and complete the “DLP-434 Record the
OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value” task on page 5-165.
Step 17 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C for Side A and complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC
Parameters” task on page 5-166. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs
to 2.
Step 18 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C for Side C and complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC
Parameters” task on page 5-166. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs
to 1.
Step 19 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C for Side D and complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC
Parameters” task on page 5-166. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs
to 1.
Step 20 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C for Side A and click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the
Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and then Delete. Repeat for Sides B,
C, and D of the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 21 Display card view for the transponder card and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled
(ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 22 Disconnect the patchcord in the COM-TX port from the patchcord in the COM-RX port of Side B of the
40-WXC-C card.
Step 23 Connect, using the LC-LC adapter, the patchcord from the COM-TX port with the patchcord in the
COM-RX port for Side A of the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 24 Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 5-158 to tune the transponder
to the wavelength set in Step 6.
Step 25 Connect the transponder card output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) to the COM-RX port of the
40-WXC-C card on Side B.
Step 26 Display card view for the transponder card. Click the Provisioning > Line tabs, and choose IS (ANSI)
or Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.5-176
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 27 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side A and complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C
OCHNC Parameters” task on page 5-166. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert
Value tabs to 2.
Step 28 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C for Side B and complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC
Parameters” task on page 5-166. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs
to 1.
Step 29 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C for Side C and complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC
Parameters” task on page 5-166. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs
to 2.
Step 30 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C for Side D and complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC
Parameters” task on page 5-166. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs
to 2.
Step 31 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C for Side B and click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the
Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and then Delete. Repeat for Sides
A, C, and D of the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 32 Display the card view for the transponder card. Click the Provisioning > Line tabs, and choose
OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 33 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs. Restore the values recorded in Step 10a for the following parameters:
• Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side A
• Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A
• Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A
• Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side A
• Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side B
• Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B
• Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B
• Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side B
Step 34 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Click Launch ANS.
Step 35 Disconnect the patchcord in the COM-TX port from the patchcord in the COM-RX port of Side A of the
40-WXC-C card.
Step 36 Make the following connections:
a. Connect the transponder output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) to the LINE-RX port of the booster
amplifier of Side C.
b. Connect the optical power meter to the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier of Side C.
c. Connect the client TX of lambda yyyy.yy to the client RX of lambda yyyy.yy on the Side C patch
panel.
Step 37 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs and complete the following:
a. Record the actual values of the following parameters:
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side X
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X5-177
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
– Power on the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier on Side X
b. Set the values of the parameters as follows:
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side X = 8 dBm
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X = 8 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X = –18 dBm
– Power on the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier on Side X = –8 dBm
c. Click Apply.
Step 38 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Click Launch ANS.
Step 39 In card view, display the 40-DMX-C card for Side C and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the VOA Attenuation Ref.
value y.
b. Set the VOA Attenuation Calib. to –y.
c. Choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
d. Click Apply.
Step 40 In card view, display the 40-MUX-C card for Side C and click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs. Choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the Admin State
drop-down list and click Apply.
Step 41 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side C. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record
the LINE-RX -> COM TX insertion loss.
Step 42 Display the transponder card in card view and click the Provisioning > Line tabs. Choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list and click Apply.
Step 43 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side C and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
b. Verify the COM-TX Power value = (Optical power meter value) – (LINE RX -> COM TX insertion
loss value in Step 41) (+\– 1 dB).
Step 44 In card view, display the preamplifier card for Side C and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify that the COM-RX Power value matches the COM-TX port Power value in Step 43a
(+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line > Parameters tabs and record the Total Output Power
value of the COM-TX port.
d. Verify that the COM-TX Total Output Power value is 8 dBm (+\– 1 dB).
Step 45 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side C and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify that the COM-RX power value matches the Total Output Power value of the COM-TX port
value in Step 44c (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the CRX -> EXP insertion loss.5-178
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
d. Record the CRX -> DROP insertion loss.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
EXP-TX port.
f. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
DROP-TX port.
g. Verify that the EXP-TX Power value in Step e = (COM-RX value in Step a) - (CRX -> EXP value
in Step c) (+\– 1 dB).
h. Verify that the DROP-TX value in Step f = (COM-RX value in Step a) - (CRX -> DROP value in
Step d) (+\– 1 dB).
Step 46 In card view, display the 40-DMX-C card for Side C and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify that the COM-RX port Power value in Step a matches the COM-TX port Power value in
Step 45b (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the 1RX -> yTX insertion loss (where y is the channel
number associated with yyyy.yy wavelength).
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
CHAN-TX port associated with yyyy.yy wavelength.
e. Verify that the CHAN-TX Power value = (COM-RX Power value in Step a) - (1RX -> yTX insertion
loss value in Step c) (+\– 1 dB).
Step 47 In card view, display the 40-MUX-C card for Side C and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
CHAN-RX port associated with yyyy.yy wavelength.
b. Verify that the CHAN-RX value matches the CHAN-TX Power value in Step 46d (+\– 1.5 dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the yRX -> 1TX insertion loss (where y is the channel
number associated with yyyy.yy wavelength).
d. In the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs, record the Power value of the COM-TX
port.
e. Verify that the COM-TX Power value = (CHAN-RX Power value in Step a) – (yRX -> 1TX insertion
loss value in Step c) (+\– 1 dB).
Step 48 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side C, and complete the following:
a. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs, and set the available parameters as follows:
– Target Power (dBm) = –18.0
Note The target power is not set if the power value is higher than the channel power that is allocated
and equalized.
– Input port = 9 (ADD-RX)
– VOA Attenuation (dB) = 13
– Wavelength = yyyy.yy (value set in Step 6)
b. Click Apply.5-179
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
c. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area,
click Refresh and verify that the Actual Power (dBm) is –18 +\– 0.5 dB.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
e. Verify that the COM-TX Power value matches the Actual Power value in Step c (+\– 1 dB).
Step 49 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side C, and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Click the Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
LINE-TX port.
c. Verify that the LINE-TX value matches the Side C Tx Amplifier Ch Power recorded in
Step 37a (+\– 1 dB).
d. Record the optical power meter value.
e. Verify that the optical power meter value matches the LINE-TX Power value in Step b (+\– 1 dB).
Step 50 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side C, and click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the
Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and then Delete.
Step 51 Display Side A of the 40-WXC-C card in card view, and complete the following:
a. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs, and set the available parameters as follows:
– Target Power (dBm) = –18.0
Note The target power is not set if the power value is higher than the channel power that is allocated
and equalized.
– Input port = 3 (EXP-RX)
– VOA Attenuation (dB) = 13
– Wavelength = yyyy.yy (value set in Step 6)
b. Click Apply.
c. In the Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and verify that the
Actual Power (dBm) is –18 +\– 0.5 dB.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
e. Verify that the value of the COM-TX port matches the Actual Power value in Step c (+\– 1 dB).
f. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area,
click Refresh and then Delete.
Step 52 Repeat Step 51 for the 40-WXC-C card of Side B.
Step 53 Repeat Step 51 for the 40-WXC-C card of Side D.
Step 54 Display card view for the transponder card and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled
(ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 55 Connect the transponder output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) to the Line RX port of the booster
amplifier of Side D.
Step 56 Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 5-158 to tune the transponder
to the next odd wavelength after yyyy.yy nm.5-180
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 57 Disconnect the patchcord between the client TX of lambda yyyy.yy from the client RX of lambda yyyy.yy
on the Side C patch panel. Use this patchcord to connect the client TX of lambda yyyy.yy to the client
RX of lambda yyyy.yy on the Side D patch panel. Note that yyyy.yy was recorded in Step 6.
Step 58 Repeat Steps 37 to 51 for Side D.
Step 59 Display Side A of the 40-WXC-C card in card view, and complete the following:
a. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs, and set the available parameters as follows:
– Target Power (dBm) = –18.0
Note The target power is not set if the power value is higher than the channel power that is allocated
and equalized.
– Input port = 4 (EXP-RX)
– VOA Attenuation (dB) = 13
– Wavelength = yyyy.yy (value set in Step 6)
b. Click Apply.
c. In the Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and verify that the
Actual Power (dBm) is –18 +\– 0.5 dB.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
e. Verify that the value of the COM-TX port matches the Actual Power value in Step c (+\– 1 dB).
f. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area,
click Refresh and then Delete.
Step 60 Repeat Step 59 for the 40-WXC-C card of Side B.
Step 61 Repeat Step 59 for the 40-WXC-C card of Side C.
Step 62 Disconnect the optical power meter from the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier of Side D.
Step 63 Disconnect the transponder output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) from the LINE-RX port of the
booster amplifier of the Side x.
Step 64 In card view, display the 40-DMX-C card for Side C, and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
b. Choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the Admin State
drop-down list.
c. Set the VOA Attenuation Calib to 0 (zero).
d. Click Apply.
Step 65 In card view, display the 40-MUX-C card for Side C and click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs. Choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the Admin
State drop-down list and click Apply.
Step 66 Repeat Steps 64 and 65 for Side D.
Step 67 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs and restore the values recorded in Step 37a for the following
parameters for Sides C and D:
• Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side X5-181
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
• Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X
• Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X
Step 68 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Click Launch ANS.
Step 69 Restore the connections to the MMU cards of the four sides using the patchcords tested in this procedure:
a. Connect the patchcord from the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A to the EXP-A-RX
port of the MMU in the lowest slot of the upgraded ROADM node.
b. Connect the patchcord from the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A to the EXP-A-TX
port of the MMU in the lowest slot of the upgraded ROADM node.
c. Connect the patchcord from the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B to the EXP-A-RX
port of the MMU in the highest slot of the upgraded ROADM node.
d. Connect the patchcord from the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B to the EXP-A-TX
port of the MMU in the highest slot of the upgraded ROADM node.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G243 Perform the Two-Degree ROADM Node with
40-SMR-1-C and OPT-AMP-17-C Cards Acceptance Test
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Purpose This procedure tests a two-degree ROADM node with 40-SMR-1-C and
OPT-AMP-17-C cards installed.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_DME_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration
File” task on page 4-49
“NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” task on page 4-64
“NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs” task
on page 4-78
“NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” task on page 4-127
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-182
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 2 On the 40-SMR-1-C card on Side A, do the following steps:
a. Remove the LC connectors between the ADD/DROP ports of the 40-SMR-1-C card and the MUX
and DMX units.
b. Create a physical loopback by connecting a fiber optic jumper between the ADD and DROP ports.
Step 3 Retrieve the power set point of the DROP-TX port of the 40-SMR-1-C card on Side A. To view this set
point, do the following:
a. Go to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) and click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 40-SMR-1-C card on Side A.
c. Expand the Port DROP-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. Record the value of the Shelf i Slot i (40-SMR-1-C).Port DROP-TX.Power parameter in the right
pane.
f. If the value of the Power set point is greater than -6dBm, continue with Step 4, else edit the Power
set point to -6dBm and complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on
page 4-127.
This will ensure there is enough power to perform the optical validation procedure.
Step 4 Display the OPT-AMP-17-C on Side A in card view, and complete the following steps:
a. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
b. From the ALS Mode pull-down menu, select Disable.
Step 5 Connect a tunable laser or a fully tunable TXP_DME_10E_C card to the LINE RX port of the
OPT-AMP-17-C card on Side A. Connect a 10dB bulk attenuator to the fiber or regulate the output power
of the tunable laser to -10dBm.
Step 6 Create an OCHNC DCN for channel 1 on Side A related to the ADD-DROP path using the “DLP-G105
Provision Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 8-23. The circuit must be bidirectional
connecting the ADD-RX port of the 40-SMR-1-C card to the LINE-TX port of the OPT-AMP-17-C card
and vice-versa (LINE-RX port of the OPT-AMP-17-C card to the DROP-TX port of the 40-SMR-1-C
card)
Step 7 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_DME_10E_C card to the first wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T
C-band grid (1530.33 nm) and place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in the In-Service (IS)
state.
Step 8 Verify the power levels of channel 1 by performing the following steps:
a. Check the optical connection between the OPT-AMP-17-C and 40-SMR-1-C cards. The power
difference between the COM-TX port of OPT-AMP-17-C and the LINE-RX port of 40-SMR-1-C
must not exceed of +/- 1.5dB.
b. Check the following parameters of the RX-amplifier in the 40-SMR-1-C card:
– The Working mode on the EXP-TX port must be the same as the ANS set point value that is set
to Gain.
– The total power on the EXP-TX port must be equal to Channel Power Ref. with a tolerance
+/-1.5dB.
– The DCU insertion loss must be equal to the power difference between the DC-TX and DC-RX
ports and the absolute value of the DCU insertion loss must be less than 11dB.5-183
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
c. Check the parameters of the drop VOA in the 40-SMR-1-C card. The value of the VOA Attenuation
parameter on the DROP-TX port must be equal to the value of the VOA Attenuation Ref. parameter
with a tolerance of +/-1.0dB.
d. Check the following parameters of the add VOA in the 40-SMR-1-C card:
– In the card view, click the Provisioning > OCH > Parameters tabs.
– Select the first channel from the Wavelength drop-down list and click Retrieve. The optical path
from the ADD-RX port to the LINE-TX port is highlighted.
– Verify if the value of the Power To parameter is the same as that of the VOA Power Ref.
parameter with a tolerance +/-1.0dB.
e. Check the optical connection between the 40-SMR-1-C and OPT-AMP-17-C card. The power
difference between the LINE-TX port of the 40-SMR-1-C card and the COM-RX port of the
OPT-AMP-17-C card must not exceed +/- 1.5dB.
f. Check the following parameters of the OPT-AMP-17-C card:
– The Working mode on the LINE-TX port must be the same as the ANS set point value that is
set to Gain.
– The value of the Gain parameter must be equal to the Gain set point +/-1.0dB. The gain set point
for the OPT-AMP-17-C card is 17dB.
Step 9 Delete the OCHNC DCN circuit for channel 1 on Side A that is related to the ADD-DROP path created
in Step 6 using the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 8-26.
Step 10 Create an OCHNC DCN circuit for channel 1 on Side A related to the EXP path using the “DLP-G105
Provision Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 8-23. The circuit must be bidirectional
and connects the LINE-RX port of the OPT-AMP-17-C card on Side A to the LINE-TX port of the
OPT-AMP-17-C card on Side B.
Step 11 Verify the power levels of channel 1 by performing the following steps:
a. Check the optical connection between the OPT-AMP-17-C and 40-SMR-1-C card on Side A. The
power difference between the COM-TX port of OPT-AMP-17-C and the LINE-RX port of
40-SMR-1-C must not exceed +/- 1.5dB.
b. Check the following parameters of the RX-amplifier in the 40-SMR-1-C card:
– The Working mode on the EXP-TX port must be the same as the ANS set point value that is set
to Gain.
– The total power on the EXP-TX port must be equal to Channel Power Ref. with a tolerance
+/-1.5dB.
– The DCU insertion loss must be equal to the power difference between the DC-TX and DC-RX
ports and the absolute value of the DCU insertion loss must be less than 11dB.
c. Check the optical connection between 40-SMR-1-C on Side A and 40-SMR-1-C on Side B. The
power difference between the EXP-TX port and the EXP-RX port must not exceed +/- 1.5dB.
d. Check the parameters of the pass-through VOA in the 40-SMR-1-C card on Side B:
– In the card view, click the Provisioning > OCH > Parameters tabs.
– Select the first channel from the Wavelength drop-down list and click Retrieve. The optical path
from the EXP-RX port to the LINE-TX port is highlighted.
– Verify if the value of the Power To parameter is the same as the value of the VOA Power Ref.
parameter with a tolerance +/-1.0dB.5-184
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
e. Check the optical connection between the 40-SMR-1-C and OPT-AMP-17-C card on Side B. The
power difference between the LINE-TX port of the 40-SMR-1-C card and the COM-RX port of the
OPT-AMP-17-C card must not exceed +/- 1.5dB.
f. Check the following parameters of the OPT-AMP-17-C card on Side B:
– The Working mode on the LINE-TX port must be the same as the ANS set point value that is
set to Gain.
– The value of the Gain parameter must be equal to the Gain set point +/-1.0dB. The gain set point
for the OPT-AMP-17-C card is 17dB.
Step 12 Turn off the laser or place the trunk port of the TXP card in OutofService (OOS) state and delete the
OCHNC DCN circuit on Side A related to channel 1 created in Step 10 using the “DLP-G106 Delete
Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 8-26.
Step 13 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_DME_10E_C card to the second wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T
C-band grid and place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in the In-Service (IS) state. Repeat
Step 6 through Step 12 for the second wavelength.
Step 14 Repeat Step 13 for the remaining 38 wavelengths on Side A.
Step 15 Delete the OCHNC DCN circuit related to channel 40 using the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel
Network Connections” task on page 8-26 and turn off the laser or place the trunk port of the
TXP_DME_10E_C card in OutofService (OOS) state.
Step 16 On the 40-SMR-1-C card on Side A, do the following steps:
a. Remove the physical loopback between the ADD and DROP ports on the 40-SMR-1-C card created
in Step 2.
b. Reconnect the DROP-TX port to the RX port on the DMX side of the 15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel.
Step 17 On the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit on Side A, do the
following steps:
a. Create a physical loopback between the MUX and DMX ports on the 15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit.
b. Connect the TX port on the MUX side of the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD unit to a power meter. If the power meter is not available, reconnect the TX
port of the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit to the ADD-RX
port of the 40-SMR-1-C card on Side A.
Step 18 Create an OCHNC DCN for channel 1 on Side A related to the ADD-DROP path as done in Step 6.
Step 19 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_DME_10E_C card to the first wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T
C-band grid (1530.33 nm) and place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in the In-Service (IS)
state.
Step 20 To verify the insertion loss on the optical path of the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD unit, do the following steps:
a. Retrieve the power value on the DROP-TX port of the 40-SMR-1-C card and record it as Pin.
b. Measure the optical power on the power meter or the ADD-RX port and record it as Pout.
c. Verify that the power difference between the power values obtained in step 21 a.and step 21 b. does
not exceed the insertion loss value specified for the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD unit. (Pin - Pout must be less than 13dB with a tolerance of 1dB).
Step 21 Turn off the laser or place the trunk port of the TXP card in OutofService (OOS) state and delete the
OCHNC DCN circuit on Side A related to channel 1 using the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel
Network Connections” task on page 8-26.5-185
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 22 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_DME_10E_C card to the next wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T
C-band grid (1530.33 nm) and place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in the In-Service (IS)
state and repeat Step 18 through Step 21 for the new wavelength.
Step 23 Restore the initial configuration after checking all the 40 available wavelengths:
a. Remove the power meter and reconnect the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD unit to the ADD-RX port of the 40-SMR-1-C card.
b. Remove the physical loopbacks between the MUX and DMX ports on the 15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit on Side A.
c. Reset the ALS parameter on the 40-SMR-1-C card. Complete the following:
– In card view, display the 40-SMR-1-C card on Side A and click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
– From the ALS Mode pull-down menu, select Auto Restart.
d. Import the CTP XML file again using the “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE
Update Configuration File” procedure on page 4-49 to overwrite any manual settings.
e. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 and verify that there
are no errors.
Step 24 Repeat all the steps from Step 2 through Step 23 related to Side B.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G244 Perform the Four Degree ROADM Node with
40-SMR-2-C Cards Acceptance Test
Purpose This procedure tests a four-degree ROADM node with 40-SMR-2-C cards
installed.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_DME_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration
File” task on page 4-49
“NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” task on page 4-64
“NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs” task
on page 4-78
“NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” task on page 4-127
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-186
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 On the 40-SMR-2-C card on Side A, do the following steps:
a. Remove the LC connectors between the ADD/DROP ports of the 40-SMR-2-C card and the MUX
and DMX units.
b. Create a physical loopback by connecting a fiber optic jumper between the ADD and DROP ports.
Step 3 Retrieve the power set point of the DROP-TX port of the 40-SMR-2-C card on Side A. To view this set
point, do the following:
a. Go to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) and click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 40-SMR-2-C card on Side A.
c. Expand the Port DROP-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. Record the value of the Shelf i Slot i (40-SMR-2-C).Port DROP-TX.Power parameter in the right
pane.
f. If the value of the Power set point is greater than -6dBm, continue with Step 4, else edit the Power
set point to -6dBm and complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on
page 4-127.
This will ensure there is enough power to perform the optical validation procedure.
Step 4 Display the 40-SMR-2-C card for Side A in card view and complete the following steps:
a. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
b. From the ALS Mode pull-down menu, select Disable.
Step 5 Connect a tunable laser or a fully tunable TXP_DME_10E_C to the LINE RX port of the 40-SMR-2-C
card on Side A. Connect a bulk attenuator to the fiber or regulate the output power of the tunable laser
to -10dBm.
Step 6 Create an OCHNC DCN on Side A related to the ADD-DROP path of channel 1 using the “DLP-G105
Provision Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 8-23. The circuit must be bidirectional
connecting the ADD-RX port to the LINE-TX port of the 40-SMR-2-C card and vice-versa (LINE-RX
port to the DROP-TX port of the 40-SMR-2-C card)
Step 7 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_DME_10E_C card to the first wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T
C-band grid (1530.33 nm) and place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in the In-Service (IS)
state.
Step 8 Verify the power levels of channel 1 by performing the following steps:
a. Check the parameters of the RX-amplifier in the 40-SMR-2-C card:
– The Working mode on the EXP-TX port must be the same as the ANS set point value that is set
to Gain.
– The total power on the EXP-TX port must be equal to the value of the Channel Power Ref.
parameter with a tolerance +/-1.5dB.
– The DCU insertion loss must be equal to the power difference between the DC-TX and DC-RX
ports and the absolute value of the DCU insertion loss must be less than 11dB.
b. Check the parameters of the drop VOA in the 40-SMR-2-C card. The value of the VOA Attenuation
parameter on the DROP-TX port must be the same value as the VOA Attenuation Ref. parameter
with a tolerance +/-1.0dB. 5-187
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
c. Check the parameters of the add VOA in the 40-SMR-2-C card:
– In the card view, click the Provisioning > OCH > Parameters tabs.
– Select the first channel from the Wavelength drop-down list and click Retrieve. The optical path
from the ADD-RX port to the LINE-TX port is highlighted.
– Verify if the value of the Power To parameter is the same as the value of the Channel Power Ref.
parameter with a tolerance +/-1.0dB
– The Working mode on the LINE-TX port must be the same as the ANS set point value that is
set to Gain.
– The value of the Gain parameter must be equal to the Gain set point +/-1.0dB. The gain set point
for the 40-SMR-2-C card is 17dB.
Step 9 Delete the OCHNC DCN circuit for channel 1 on Side A related to the ADD-DROP path that was created
in Step 6 using the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 8-26.
Step 10 Create an OCHNC DCN circuit for channel 1 on Side A related to the EXP-TX path towards Side B
using the “DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 8-23. The circuit
must be bidirectional and connects the LINE-RX port of the 40-SMR-2-C card on Side A to the
LINE-TX port of the 40-SMR-2-C card on Side B.
Step 11 Verify the power levels of channel 1 by performing the following steps:
a. Check the parameters of the RX-amplifier in the 40-SMR-2-C card:
– The Working mode on the EXP-TX port must be the same as the ANS set point value that is set
to Gain.
– The total power on the EXP-TX port must be equal to Channel Power Ref. with a tolerance
+/-1.5dB.
– The DCU insertion loss must be equal to the power difference between the DC-TX and DC-RX
ports and the absolute value of the DCU insertion loss must be less than 11dB.
b. Check the optical connection between Side A and Side B through the 15454-PP-4-SMR patch panel.
Depending on the source side, the EXP-i-RX port of the destination side varies. Verify the
connectivity among the different sides using the 15454-PP-4-SMR patch panel block diagram in the
“Node Reference” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual. For example, on
Side A, EXP-TX is connected to Side B on EXP-1-RX, Side C on EXP-2-RX, and Side D on
EXP-3-RX. The power difference between the EXP-TX port and the EXP-i-RX port must be less
than 7 dB.
c. Check the parameters of the pass-through VOA and TX-amplifier in the 40-SMR-2-C card on
Side B:
– In the card view, click the Provisioning > OCH > Parameters tabs.
– Select the first channel from the Wavelength drop-down list and click Retrieve. The optical path
from the EXP-i-RX port to the LINE-TX port is highlighted.
– Verify if the value of the Power To parameter is the same as the value of the Channel Power Ref.
parameter with a tolerance +/-1.0dB
– The Working mode on the LINE-TX port must be the same as the ANS set point value that is
set to Gain.
– The value of the Gain parameter on the LINE-TX port must be equal to the Gain set point
+/-1.0dB. The gain set point for the 40-SMR-2-C card is 17dB.
Step 12 Delete the OCHNC DCN circuit towards Side B related to channel 1 created in Step 10 using the
“DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 8-26.5-188
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 13 Create the OCHNC DCN circuit for channel 1 on Side A related to EXP-TX path towards Side C using
the “DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 8-23. Repeat Step 11
and Step 12 for the circuit that is created.
Step 14 Repeat Step 13 towards Side D, turn off the laser or place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card
in OutofService (OOS) state.
Step 15 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_DME_10E_C card to the second wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T
C-band grid and place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in the In-Service (IS) state. Repeat
Step 6 through Step 14 for the second wavelength.
Step 16 Repeat Step 15 for the remaining 38 wavelengths on Side A.
Step 17 Delete the OCHNC DCN circuit related to channel 40 using the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel
Network Connections” task on page 8-26 and turn off the laser or place the trunk port of the
TXP_DME_10E_C card in OutofService (OOS) state.
Step 18 On the 40-SMR-2-C card on Side A, do the following steps:
a. Remove the physical loopback between the ADD and DROP ports on the 40-SMR-2-C card created
in Step 2.
b. Reconnect the DROP-TX port to the RX port on the DMX side of the 15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel.
Step 19 On the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit on Side A, do the
following steps:
a. Create a physical loopback between the MUX and DMX ports of the 15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit that are related to the same wavelength.
b. Connect the TX port on the MUX side of the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD unit to a power meter. If the power meter is not available, reconnect the TX
port of the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit to the ADD-RX
port of the 40-SMR-2-C card on Side A.
Step 20 Create an OCHNC DCN for channel 1 on Side A related to the ADD-DROP path as done in Step 6.
Step 21 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_DME_10E_C card to the first wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T
C-band grid (1530.33 nm) and place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in the In-Service (IS)
state.
Step 22 To verify the insertion loss on the optical path of the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD unit on Side A, do the following steps:
a. Retrieve the power value on the DROP-TX port of the 40-SMR-2-C card and record it as Pin.
b. Measure the optical power on the power meter or the ADD-RX port and record it as Pout.
c. Verify that the power difference between the power values obtained in step 21 a.and step 21 b. does
not exceed the insertion loss value specified for the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD unit. (Pin - Pout must be less than 13dB with a tolerance of 1dB).
Step 23 Turn off the laser or place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in OutofService (OOS) state and
delete the OCHNC DCN circuit on Side A related to channel 1 using the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical
Channel Network Connections” task on page 8-26.
Step 24 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_DME_10E_C card to the next wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T
C-band grid (1530.33 nm) and place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in the In-Service (IS)
state and repeat Step 20 through Step 23 for the new wavelength.
Step 25 Restore the initial configuration after checking all the 40 available wavelengths:
a. Remove the power meter and reconnect the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD unit to the ADD-RX port of the 40-SMR-2-C card.5-189
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Remove the physical loopbacks between the MUX and DMX ports on the 15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit on Side A.
c. Reset the ALS parameter on the 40-SMR-2-C card. Complete the following:
– In card view, display the 40-SMR-2-C and click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
– From the ALS Mode pull-down menu, select Auto Restart.
d. Import the CTP XML file again using the “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE
Update Configuration File” procedure on page 4-49 to overwrite any manual settings.
e. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 and verify no errors
are present.
Step 26 Repeat all the steps from Step 2 through Step 25 related to Side B.
Step 27 Repeat all the steps from Step 2 through Step 25 related to Side C.
Step 28 Repeat all the steps from Step 2 through Step 25 related to Side D.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.5-190
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You BeginCHAPTER
6-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
6
Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
This chapter explains how to provision transponder (TXP), muxponder (MXP), Xponder (GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE), and ADM-10G cards. The provisioning must be performed
before you provision the dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) network and create circuits.
Note The procedures and tasks described in this chapter for the Cisco ONS 15454 platform is applicable to
the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Before You Begin
Before performing any of the following procedures, investigate all alarms and clear any trouble
conditions. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide as necessary.
Caution Provisioning TXP and MXP cards can be service affecting. You should make all changes during a
scheduled maintenance window.
This section lists the chapter procedures (NTPs). Turn to a procedure for applicable tasks (DLPs).
1. NTP-G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules, page 6-3—Complete this procedure to provision a
multirate pluggable port module (PPM), provision or change the optical line rate of a PPM, or delete
a PPM. PPMs provide the fiber interface to the TXP, MXP, and ADM-10G cards. With the exception
of the TXP_MR_10G card, all TXPs, MXPs, and ADM-10G cards accept PPMs.
2. NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 6-21—As needed, complete this procedure for
TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards that will be protected
with Y-cable protection.
3. NTP-G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP Card, page 6-24—As needed,
complete this procedure to create a splitter protection group for an OTU2_XP card.
4. NTP-G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards,
page 6-26—As needed, complete this procedure to create 1+1 protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.6-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
5. NTP-G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter
Thresholds, page 6-28—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for
TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
6. NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and
Thresholds, page 6-48—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for
TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C
cards.
7. NTP-G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Ethernet Settings, Line Settings, PM
Parameters, and Thresholds, page 6-74—As needed, complete this procedure to provision the
transmission settings for ADM-10G cards.
8. NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 6-98—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for
MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards.
9. NTP-G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 6-119—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
10. NTP-G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 6-137—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards.
11. NTP-G293 Modify the 40G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 6-159—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for
40G-MXP-C card.
12. NTP-G281 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Channel Group
Settings, page 6-182—As needed, complete this procedure to change the channel group settings for
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
13. NTP-G283 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card CFM Settings,
page 6-193—As needed, complete this procedure to change the CFM settings for GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
14. NTP-G285 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card EFM Settings,
page 6-206—As needed, complete this procedure to change the EFM settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
15. NTP-G287 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card REP Settings,
page 6-211—As needed, complete this procedure to change the REP settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
16. NTP-G165 Modify the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE Cards Ethernet Parameters, Line
Settings, and PM Thresholds, page 6-217—As needed, complete this procedure to change the
transmission settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
17. NTP-G314 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring, page 6-260—As needed, complete
this procedure to add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring.
18. NTP-G197 Provision the OTU2_XP Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds,
page 6-263—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for OTU2_XP
cards.
19. NTP-G162 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings, page 6-285—As needed, complete this
procedure to change the automatic laser shutdown settings for a TXP or MXP card.6-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
20. NTP-G192 Force FPGA Update, page 6-286—As needed, complete this procedure to force an
upgrade of the FPGA image on the MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards.
21. NTP-G196 Force FPGA Update When the Card is Part of a Protection Group, page 6-288—As
needed, complete this procedure to force an upgrade of the FPGA image on the
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards when the card is
part of a protection group.
22. NTP-G232 Enabling Error Decorrelator, page 6-289—As needed, complete this procedure to enable
error decorrelator on a TXP_MR_10EX_C, MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card.
Note Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM supports IBM's 5G DDR (Double Data Rate) InfiniBand1
interfaces.
NTP-G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules
Note If a single-rate PPM is installed, the PPM screen will autoprovision and no further steps are necessary.
Note When you autoprovision a PPM, initial alarm and TCA defaults are supplied by Cisco Transport
Controller (CTC) depending on your port and rate selections and the type of PPM. These default values
can be changed after you install the PPM.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G,
or OTU2_XP card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs
are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network.
Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs,
refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference
Manual.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 to log into an ONS 15454 on the network. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
1. 5G DDR InfiniBand is referred to as IB_5G.
Purpose Complete this procedure to provision a multirate PPM, provision the
optical line rate of a multirate PPM, or delete a single-rate or multirate
PPM.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 4-71
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 2 Click the Alarms tab:
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not turned on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no unexplained conditions appear. If unexplained conditions appear, resolve them before
continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
Step 3 If you are provisioning a MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card, complete the “DLP-G235 Change
the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Mode” task on page 6-4. If not, continue with Step 4
Step 4 If you are provisioning a MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C
card, complete the “DLP-G332 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Port Mode” task on page 6-6. If not,
continue with Step 5.
Step 5 If you are provisioning a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card, complete the “DLP-G379
Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 6-8. If not, continue
with Step 6.
Step 6 If you are provisioning a OTU2_XP card, complete the “DLP-G452 Change the OTU2_XP Card Mode”
task on page 6-10. If not, continue with Step 7.
Step 7 If you are provisioning a PPM on an ADM-10G card, complete the “DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G
PPM and Port” task on page 6-9. If not, continue with Step 8.
Step 8 Complete the “DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM” task on page 6-11 for TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP ports with multirate PPMs. If you already
preprovisioned the multirate PPM (DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot, page 4-73), skip this
step and continue with Step 9.
Step 9 If you are provisioning an IBM ETR_CLO (External Time Reference – Control Link Oscillator) or
InterSystem Coupling Link (ISC) service on the PPM, complete “DLP-G274 Verify Topologies for
ETR_CLO and ISC Services” task on page 6-12. Otherwise, continue with Step 10.
Step 10 Complete the “DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate” task on page 6-14 to assign a line rate to a
TXP, MXP, or OTU2_XP port after the PPM is provisioned. (This task is not performed for GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.)
Step 11 If you need to delete a PPM at any point in this procedure, complete the “DLP-G280 Delete a PPM” task
on page 6-19.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G235 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Mode
Purpose This task changes the card mode for MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards. The card mode determines which
PPMs can be provisioned for the card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) tabs.
Step 3 Locate the Trunk port table row and verify that the Service State column value is OOS-MA,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI). If the service state is correct, continue with Step 6. If not,
complete the following steps:
a. Click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,Maintenance
(ETSI).
b. Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Line > Client tabs.
Step 5 Locate the Trunk port table row and verify that the Service State column value is OOS-MA,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI). If the service state is correct, continue with Step 6. If not,
complete the following steps:
a. Click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,Maintenance
(ETSI).
b. Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 6 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 7 Change the Card Mode as needed:
• FC-GE—Choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G (Ports
1-1 and 2-1 only), FC2G (Port 1-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 1-1 and 2-1 only), FICON2G (Port 1-1
only), and ONE_GE (Ports 1-1 through 8-1).
• Mixed—Choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G and
ONE_GE (Port 1–1 only), ESCON (Ports 5–1 through 8-1 only)
• ESCON—Choose this option if you will provision the ESCON PPM on Ports 1-1 through 8-1.
Note The Provisioning > Card tab also has the display-only Tunable Wavelengths field. This field shows the
supported wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is installed in the format:
first wavelength-last wavelength-frequency spacing-number of supported wavelengths.
For example, 1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-82.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).6-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G332 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Port Mode
Note The MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards have two port
mode groups, one for Ports 1 through 4, and the second for Ports 5 through 8. To change the port mode,
all ports within the selected port group must be in OOS (out-of-service) service state. Ports in the second
port group do not need to be in OOS service state if you are not changing the port mode for the second
port group. Before you change the port mode, you must also ensure that any PPM port rate provisioned
for the selected port group is deleted (see “DLP-G280 Delete a PPM” task on page 6-19).
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card where you want to
change the port mode.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Change the port mode as described in Table 6-1.
Note The PPM port rates are provisioned in the “DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM” task on
page 6-11.
Purpose This task changes the port mode for the MXP_MR_10DME_C,
MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder cards.
The port mode determines which PPMs can be provisioned on the ports.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note The Provisioning > Cards tab also has a display-only Tunable Wavelengths field which shows the
wavelengths supported by the card. If a MXP_MR_10DME_C card is installed, the 32 C-band
wavelengths appear. If the MXP_MR_10DME_L card is installed, the 32 L-band wavelengths appear. If
the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card is installed, the 82 C-band wavelengths appear.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Note Loopbacks on MXP-MR-10DME are not applicable when Fiber Channel switches are present.
Note If the Fiber Channel switch version is not present then the Distance Extension settings are not supported.
Table 6-1 10G Data Muxponder Card Port Modes
Parameter Description Options
Port 1-4 Mode Sets the mode of
operation for Ports
1-1 through 4-1.
Chose one of the following:
• FC-GE_ISC—Choose this option if you will provision any
of the following PPM port rates: FC1G (Ports 1-1 through
4-1), FC2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 1-1
through 4-1), FICON2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only),
ONE_GE (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), ISC3 COMPAT (Ports
1-1 through 4-1), ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 1-1 through 4-1),
and ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only).
• FC4G—Choose this option if you will provision an FC4G
or FICON4G PPM (Port 1-1 only).
Port 5-8 Mode Sets the mode of
operation for
Ports 5-1 through
8-1.
Chose one of the following:
• FC-GE_ISC—choose this option if you will provision any
of the following PPM port rates: FC1G (Ports 5-1 through
8-1), FC2G (Ports 5-1 and 7-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 5-1
through 8-1), FICON2G (Ports 5-1 and 7-1 only),
ONE_GE (Ports 5-1 through 8-1), ISC3 COMPAT (Ports
5-1 through 8-1), ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 5-1 through 8-1),
and ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 5-1 and 7-1 only).
• FC4G—choose this option if you will provision an FC4G
or FICON4G PPM port rate (Port 5-1 only).6-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the card mode.
Step 2 In card view, click Provisioning > Ether Ports > Ports.
Step 3 Verify that any provisioned client or trunk ports have an OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state in the Service State column. If so, continue with Step 4.
If not, complete the following substeps.
a. For the first port that is not out of service, in the Admin State column, choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI)
or Locked,disabled (ETSI).
b. Repeat Step a for each port that is not out of service.
c. Click Apply.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 5 Choose one of the card modes shown in Table 6-2.
:
Purpose This task changes the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card
mode. 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards can be provisioned as a Layer 2
Ethernet switch or a 10G Ethernet TXP. GE_XP and GE_XPE cards can be
provisioned as a Layer 2 Ethernet switch, 10G Ethernet MXP, or 20G
Ethernet MXP.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-2 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Modes
Mode Cards Description
L2 over DWDM GE_XP
10GE_XP
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
Provisions the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE as
a Layer 2 switch.
10GE TXP 10GE_XP
10GE_XPE
Provisions the 10GE_XP or 10GE_XPE as a 10 Gigabit
Ethernet transponder. Traffic received on the 10GE client Port
1-1 is sent to 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 3-1, and traffic
received on 10 Gigabit Ethernet client Port 2-1 is sent to
10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 4-1.6-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
The GE-XP and GE-XPE cards operating in 10GE MXP mode and configured for 100% traffic flow, do
not drop frames when up to nine ports are in use. However, when all the ten ports are in use, some frames
are dropped. When the tenth port is to be used, configure the Committed Info Rate (CIR) at 55% on any
one of the ports. For more information about configuring the CIR, see the “DLP-G380 Provision the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings” task on page 6-218.
Step 6 Click Apply, then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to provision PPM settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
• PPM—Choose the SFP you want to install from the drop-down list.
• PPM Type—Choose the number of ports supported by your SFP from the drop-down list. If only one
port is supported, PPM (1 port) is the only option.
Step 5 Click OK. The newly created PPM appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable
Port Modules area turns white and the Actual Equipment Type column lists the equipment name.
Step 6 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Ports dialog box appears.
10GE MXP GE_XP
GE_XPE
Provisions the GE_XP or GE_XPE as a 10 Gigabit Ethernet
muxponder. Traffic received on Gigabit Ethernet client Ports
1-1 through 10-1 is multiplexed and sent to 10 Gigabit
Ethernet trunk Port 21-1, and traffic received on Gigabit
Ethernet client Ports 11-1 through 20-1 is multiplexed and sent
to 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 22-1.
20GE MXP GE_XP
GE_XPE
Provisions the GE_XP or GE_XPE as a 20 Gigabit Ethernet
muxponder. Traffic received on Gigabit Ethernet client Ports
1-1 through 20-1 is multiplexed and sent to 10 Gigabit
Ethernet trunk Port 21-1. Trunk port 22-1 is not used.
Table 6-2 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Modes
Mode Cards Description
Purpose This task provisions a fixed-rate PPM and port on an ADM-10G PPM card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 7 In the Create Ports dialog box, complete the following:
• Port—Choose the port you want to configure from the drop-down list.
• Port Type—Choose the port type, such as OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, or ONE-GE from the drop-down
list.
– Ports 1 - 8 can only be OC-3, OC-12, or ONE_GE
– Ports 9 - 12 can on be OC-3 or OC-12
– Ports 13 - 16 can only be OC-3, OC-12, or OC-48
Step 8 Click OK. The newly created port appears in the Pluggable Ports area. The port type you provisioned is
listed in the Rate column.
Step 9 If you want to provision a PPM or another port, repeat Steps 4 through 8.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G452 Change the OTU2_XP Card Mode
Caution Changing the card configuration to 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy automatically replaces the
current port configurations (Ports 1 and 3) to 10G Ethernet and OC192. This resets and reboots the
OTU2_XP card.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card where
you want to change the card mode.
Step 2 In card view, click the Provisioning > Line > Ports tab.
Step 3 Verify that all provisioned client or trunk ports have an OOS-MA, DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,
disabled (ETSI) service state in the Service State column. If so, continue with Step 4. If not, complete
the following substeps.
a. For the first port that is not out of service, in the Admin State column, choose OOS, DSBLD (ANSI)
or Locked, disabled (ETSI).
b. Repeat Step a for each port that is not out of service.
c. Click Apply.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Card tab.
Step 5 Change the Card Configuration as needed:
• Transponder—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as a transponder. Port pairs 1-3
and 2-4 are both configured as transponders. This is the default card configuration.
Purpose This task changes the OTU2_XP card mode. The card mode determines
which PPMs can be provisioned for the card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
• Standard Regen—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as a standard regenerator
(with E-FEC only on one port). Port pairs 1-3 and 2-4 are both configured as regenerators.
• Enhanced FEC—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as an E-FEC regenerator
(with E-FEC on two ports). Port pair 3-4 is configured as enhanced regenerator. Ports 1 and 2 are
not used.
• Mixed—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as a transponder and a standard
regenerator (mixed configuration). One of the port pair (1-3 or 2-4) is configured as a transponder
and the other port pair as a standard regenerator.
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card to
enable the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion. Port pair 1-3 supports LAN Phy to WAN
Phy conversion. Port pair 2-4 can be configured either as a transponder or a standard regenerator.
Note If you revert to the previous release (release earlier than 9.10), be sure to disable the 10G
Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion feature. If you do not disable the 10G Ethernet LAN
Phy to WAN Phy feature, an error message stating that the user needs to disable 10G Ethernet
LAN Phy to WAN Phy feature before reverting to the previous release is displayed.
Note Table 6-125 on page 6-276 lists the Ethernet variables supported on Ports 1 and 3 of the
OTU2_XP card that has the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy enabled. When the card is in
the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, no 10G FC RMONS are supported on Ports 2
and 4.
For more information on OTU2_XP card configuration rules, refer to the “Transponder and
Muxponder Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 6 Click Apply. Then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM
Note If the PPM was preprovisioned using the “DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot” task on
page 4-73 this task is unnecessary, unless the PPM has an Out-of-Service and Autonomous Management,
Unassigned (OOS-AUMA,UAS) (ANSI) or unlocked-disabled, unassigned (ETSI) service state.
Purpose This task provisions a multirate PPM on a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card where you want to provision PPM
settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
• PPM—Choose the PPM slot number where the SFP is installed from the drop-down list.
• PPM Type—Choose the number of ports supported by your SFP from the drop-down list. If only one
port is supported, PPM (1 port) is the only option.
Step 5 Click OK. The newly created port appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable
Port Modules area turns white and the Actual Equipment Type column lists the equipment name.
Step 6 If you want to provision a PPM on another port, repeat Steps 3 through 5. If not, continue with Step 7.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G274 Verify Topologies for ETR_CLO and ISC Services
Step 1 Display your site plan in Cisco TransportPlanner.
Step 2 Verify that the topology where you plan to run the ETR_CLO or ISC service can support the service.
The following topologies support ETR_CLO or ISC:
• Single span—Two terminal sites with no intermediate sites in between and one of the following sets
of cards installed:
– 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards
– 32WSS and 32DMX cards
– 32WSS and 32-DMX-O cards
– 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
– 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
Figure 6-1 shows a single-span topology as displayed in Cisco Transport Planner.
Purpose This task verifies that the DWDM network topology can support the IBM
ETR_CLO and ISC services.
Tools/Equipment Cisco TransportPlanner site plan
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Figure 6-1 Single-Span Topology
• Point-to-Point—Two terminal sites with one of the following sets of cards installed:
– 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards
– 32WSS and 32DMX cards
– 32WSS and 32-DMX-O cards
– 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
– 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
Line amplifiers can be installed between the terminal sites, but intermediate (traffic terminating)
sites cannot be installed. Figure 6-2 shows a point-to-point topology as shown in
Cisco TransportPlanner.
Figure 6-2 Point-to-Point Topology
• Two hubs—Two hub nodes in a ring with one of the following sets of cards installed:
– 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards
– 32WSS and 32DMX cards
– 32WSS and 32-DMX-O cards
– 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
– 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
Line amplifiers can be installed between the hubs. Figure 6-3 shows two hub nodes with no line
amplifier nodes installed. Figure 6-4 shows two hub nodes with line amplifier nodes installed.
Site 1 Site 4 134361
W E
Site 1 Site 4 134360
Site 2
E W
E
W
Site 3
E
W6-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Figure 6-3 Hubs with No Line Amplifiers
Figure 6-4 Hubs with Line Amplifiers
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
Site 1
Site 2
W
E
E
W
134358
Purpose This task provisions the line rate for TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 6-11
DLP-G274 Verify Topologies for ETR_CLO and ISC Services, page 6-12,
if you are provisioning an ETR_CLO service.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
134359
Site 1 Site 2
Site 2
W
E
E
W
W E
E W
Site 46-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note The optical line rate for cards with single-rate PPMs is provisioned automatically when you complete
the “DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM” task on page 6-11 if the trunk port is out of service. If the
optical line rate was provisioned automatically, you do not need to complete this task for the
MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, MXP_2.5G_10EX_C,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card. If the trunk port was in-service when you
provisioned the PPM, complete this task to provision the optical line rate manually for those cards.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card where you want to provision PPM ports. If the data
rate that you are provisioning is DV-6000, HDTV, ESCON, SDI/D1 Video, ISC1, ISC3 (for
TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards), or ETR_CLO, complete the following steps. Otherwise,
continue with Step 4.
a. Click the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tabs.
b. In the ITU-T G.709 OTN field for the respective PPM, choose Disable.
c. In the FEC field for the respective PPM, choose Disable.
d. Click Apply.
Step 2 For the TXP_MR-10G card, click the Provisioning > Data Rate Selection tabs. For all other cards, go
to Step 4.
Step 3 In the Data Rate Selection area, click Create and choose the type of port from the drop-down list. The
supported port types are SONET (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy) and 10G Ethernet LAN Phy.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 5 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Port dialog box appears.
Step 6 In the Create Port dialog box, complete the following:
• Port—Choose the port and port number from the drop-down list. The first number indicates the PPM
in the Pluggable Port Modules area, and the second number indicates the port number on the PPM.
For example, the first PPM with one port appears as 1-1 and the second PPM with one port appears
as 2-1. The PPM number can be 1 to 4, but the port number is always 1.
• Port Type—Choose the type of port from the drop-down list. The port type list displays the
supported port rates on your PPM. See Table 6-3 on page 6-16 for definitions of the supported rates
on the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card.
Step 7 Click OK. The row in the Pluggable Ports area turns white if the physical SFP is installed and light blue
if the SFP is not installed.
If the optical parameter values differ from the NE Default settings, change the port state to In-Service
(for ANSI) or Unlocked (for ETSI) to synchronize the values with the NE Default settings.
Step 8 Repeat Steps 5 through 7 to configure the rest of the port rates as needed.6-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-3 PPM Port Types
Card Port Type
TXP_MR_2.5G
TXPP_MR_2.5G
• OC-3/STM1—155 Mbps
• OC-12/STM4—622 Mbps
• OC-48/STM16—2.48 Gbps
• ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps
• ESCON—Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM
signal)
• DV6000—Proprietary signal from video vendor
• SDI_D1_VIDEO—Serial Digital Interface and Digital Video
signal type 1
• HDTV—High Definition Television
• PASS-THRU—Not specified
• FC1G—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps
• FC2G—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps
• FICON1G—Fiber connectivity1.06 Gbps (IBM signal)
• FICON2G—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal)
• ETR_CLO—External Time Reference–Control Link Oscillator
• ISC compat—InterSystem Coupling Link 1 (ISC1)
• ISC peer—InterSystem Coupling Link 3 (ISC3)
• DVB-ASI — Proprietary signal from video vendor. Digital
Video Broadcast - Asynchronous Serial Interface
• ISC1— InterSystem Channel 1 Gbps (IBM signal)
MXP_2.5G_10G
MXP_2.5G_10E
MXP_2.5G_10E_C
MXP_2.5G_10E_L
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C
• OC-48/STM16—2.48 Gbps1
TXP_MR_10G2
• SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) including 10G Ethernet
WAN Phy
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_C
• SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) including 10G Ethernet
WAN Phy—10 Gbps
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy—10 Gbps Ethernet
• 10G Fibre Channel—10 Gbps Fibre Channel
• (TXP_MR_10EX_C only) IB_5G6-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
MXP_MR_2.5G
MXPP_MR_2.5G
If the card mode is FC_GE:
• FC1G ISL—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps (Ports 1-1 and 2-1)
• FC2G ISL—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps (Port 1-1 only)
• FICON1G ISL—Fiber connectivity 1.06 Gbps (IBM signal)
(Ports 1-1 and 2-1)
• FICON2G ISL—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal)
(Port 1-1 only)
• ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps (Ports 1-1 and
2-1 only)
If the card mode is Mixed:
• FC1G ISL—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps (Port 1-1 only)
• FICON1G ISL—Fiber connectivity 1.06 Gbps (IBM signal)
(Port1-1 only)
• ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps (Port 1-1 only)
• ESCON—Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM
signal) (Ports 5-1 through 8-1)
If the card mode is ESCON:
• ESCON—Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM
signal) (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
Table 6-3 PPM Port Types (continued)
Card Port Type6-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
MXP_MR_10DME_C
MXP_MR_10DME_L
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C
If the port mode is FC_GE_ISC:
• FC1G—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
• FC2G—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps (Ports 1-1, 3-1, 5-1, and 7-1
only; ports are not available if the port that follows—2-1, 4-1,
6-1, or 8-1—has a PPM provisioned.)
• FICON1G—Fiber connectivity 1.06 Gbps (IBM signal)
FICON2G—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal) (Ports
1-1, 3-1, 5-1, and 7-1 only; ports are not available if the port
that follows—2-1, 4-1, 6-1, or 8-1—has a PPM provisioned.)
• ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps (Ports 1-1
through 8-1)
• ISC COMPAT (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
• ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
• ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 1-1, 3-1, 5-1, and 7-1 only; ports are not
available if the port that follows—2-1, 4-1, 6-1, or 8-1—has a
PPM provisioned.)
If the port mode is FC4G:
• FC4G—Fibre Channel 4.25 Gbps (Ports 1-1 or 5-1 only; ports
are not available if any of the three ports that follow has a PPM
provisioned.)
• FICON4G—Fiber connectivity 4.25 Gbps (IBM signal) (Ports
1-1 or 5-1 only; ports are not available if any of the three ports
that follow has a PPM provisioned.)
40G-MXP-C • SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64)
• FC8G
• FC10G
• TEN_GE
• OTU2
Table 6-3 PPM Port Types (continued)
Card Port Type6-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G280 Delete a PPM
Note Before deleting a PPM, delete the PPM from the provisioning pane.
Note This task does not apply to the TXP_MR_10G card. To change the TXP_MR_10G data rate, complete
the “DLP-G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate” task on page 6-49.
GE_XP
10GE_XP
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
• GE_XP and GE_XPE client ports1
• 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE client and trunk ports; GE_XP and
GE_XPE trunk ports1
OTU2_XP • SONET (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy)—10 Gbps
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy—10 Gbps Ethernet
• 10G Fiber Channel—10 Gbps Fibre Channel
• IB_5G—InfiniBand 5 Gbps
Note If you have an OTU2 signal in which the OPU2 has been
generated by multiplexing four ODU1 signals, choose
SONET as the port rate. This allows the OTU2 signal to be
transported transparently in standard or E-FEC regenerator
configuration.
1. Automatically provisioned when the PPM is created if the trunk port is out of service.
2. Provisioned on the Data Rate Selection tab.
Purpose This task deletes PPM provisioning for SFPs or XFPs installed on TXP,
MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP
card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 4-71 or
DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot, page 4-73
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-3 PPM Port Types (continued)
Card Port Type6-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note You cannot delete a PPM if the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card
is part of a regenerator group. For OTU2_XP card, you cannot delete a PPM if the card configuration is
in Standard Regen or Enhanced FEC mode.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card where you want to delete PPM settings.
Step 2 Verify that the PPM port Service State is OOS,DSBLD. If the PPM port is OOS,DSBLD, go to Step 3.
If it is not OOS,DSBLD, follow the tasks in NTP-G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules, page 6-3, to
change the Service State of the PPM port to OOS,DSBLD.
Step 3 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 4 To delete a PPM and the associated ports:
a. In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click the PPM that you want to delete. The highlight changes
to dark blue.
b. Click Delete. The Delete PPM dialog box appears.
c. Click Yes. The PPM provisioning is removed from the Pluggable Port Modules area and the
Pluggable Ports area.
Note You cannot delete a PPM until its port is in the OOS,DSBLD state. You cannot delete a client
port if the client is in the In Service and Normal (IS-NR) (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled
(ETSI) service state, is in a protection group, has a generic communications channel (GCC)
or data communications channel (DCC), is a timing source, has circuits or overhead circuits,
or transports Link Management Protocol channels or links. You can delete a client port
(except the last port) if the trunk port is in service and the client port is in the
OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state. You can delete the
last client port only if the trunk port is in a OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state for all cards except the MXP_MR_2.5G,
MXPP_MR_2.5G, MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards. For more information about port states, refer to the
“Administrative and Service States” appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference
Manual.
Step 5 Verify that the PPM provisioning is deleted:
• In the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card view,
CTC shows an empty port after the PPM is deleted.
• If the SFP or XFP is physically present when you delete the PPM provisioning, CTC transitions to
the deleted state, the ports (if any) are deleted, and the PPM is represented as a gray graphic in CTC.
The SFP or XFP can be provisioned again in CTC, or the equipment can be removed. If the
equipment is removed, the graphic disappears.
Step 6 If you need to remove the PPM hardware (the SFP or XFP), complete the “DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or
XFP” task on page 4-74.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). 6-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group
Note Y-cable protection is available for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards when they are
provisioned in 10GE MXP, 20GE MXP, or 10GE TXP mode. Y-cable protection cannot be provisioned
for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards when they are provisioned in
L2-over-DWDM mode. Y-cable protection is available for the OTU2_XP card when it is provisioned in
the TXP card mode. Y-cable protection is not supported on IB_5G.
Note If you are provisioning Y-cable protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, the
Ethernet mode must be set to 1000 and 10000 Mbps respectively. To provision the Ethernet mode, see
the “DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings”
task on page 6-218.
Note There is a traffic hit of upto a couple hundred milliseconds on the MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXP_MR_10DME cards in Y-cable configuration when a fiber cut or SFP failure occurs on one of the
client ports.
Note For SONET or SDH payloads, Loss of Pointer Path (LOP-P) alarms can occur on a split signal if the
ports are not in a Y-cable protection group.
Purpose This procedure creates a Y-cable protection group between the client ports
of two TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
OTU2_XP cards. For additional information about Y-cable protection, see
the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM Reference Manual.
Tools/Equipment Installed TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
OTU2_XP card
Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
“NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 1 View the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix (see Table 4-1 on page 4-4) for your site. Verify the
TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards that need Y-cable protection
groups. (Cards requiring Y-cable protection are indicated with “Y-Cable” in the Traffic Matrix table
Protection Type column. Refer to the Cisco TransportPlanner DWDM Operations Guide for more
information.)
Step 2 Verify that the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards are installed
according to the requirements specified in Table 4-6 on page 4-109. Table 6-4 lists the protection types
available in the ONS 15454 for DWDM client cards.
Table 6-4 Protection Types
Protection Type Cards Description and Installation Requirements
Y-cable MXP_2.5_10G
MXP_2.5_10E
MXP_2.5_10E_C
MXP_2.5_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_C
TXP_MR_10G
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_2.5G
MXP_MR_2.5G
MXP_MR_10DME_C
MXP_MR_10DME_L
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C
40G-MXP-C
GE_XP1
10GE_XP2
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
OTU2_XP
Pairs a working transponder or muxponder card or port with a protect
transponder or muxponder card or port. The protect port must be on a
different card than the working port and it must be the same card type as
the working port. The working and protect port numbers must be the
same, that is, Port 1 can only protect Port 1, Port 2 can only protect Port
2, and so on.
Note Working and Protect card must be in the same
shelf for a multishelf node.6-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 3 Verify that pluggable ports are provisioned for the same payload and payload rate on the TXP, MXP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards where you will create the Y-cable
protection group:
a. Display the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Module tab.
c. Verify that a pluggable port is provisioned in the Pluggable Port Module area, and the payload type
and rate is provisioned for it in the Pluggable Ports area. If they are not the same, for example, if the
pluggable port and rate are not the same, you must either delete the provisioned rate and create a
new rate to match using the “DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot” task on page 4-73 or
replace the pluggable port (SFP or XFP) using the “DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or XFP” task on
page 4-74.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > Protection
tabs.
Step 5 In the Protection Groups area, click Create.
Step 6 In the Create Protection Group dialog box, enter the following:
• Name—Type a name for the protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z,
0-9) characters. Special characters are permitted. For TL1 compatibility, do not use question mark
(?), backslash (\), or double quote (“) characters.
• Type—Choose Y Cable from the drop-down list.
• Protect Port—From the drop-down list, choose the port that will be the standby or protection port to
the active port. The list displays the available transponder or muxponder ports. If transponder or
muxponder cards are not installed, no ports appear in the drop-down list.
After you choose the protect port, a list of available working ports appear in the Available Ports list. If
no cards are available, no ports appear. If this occurs, you can not complete this task until you install the
physical cards or preprovision the ONS 15454 slots using the “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on
page 4-55.
Step 7 From the Available Ports list, select the port that will be protected by the port you selected in
Protect Ports. Click the top arrow button to move the port to the Working Ports list.
Splitter TXPP_MR_2.5G
MXPP_MR_2.5G
A splitter protection group is automatically created when a
TXPP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card is installed. You can edit the
splitter protection group name.
OTU2_XP A splitter protection group is configurable for the OTU2_XP card. You
can create a splitter protection group on Ports 3 and 4 of the OTU2_XP
card using the “NTP-G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the
OTU2_XP Card” procedure on page 6-24.
1+1 GE_XP
10GE_XP
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
In the Layer 2 (L2) card mode 1+1 protection is provided to protect the
card against client port and card failure.
1. When provisioned in 10GE MXP or 20GE MXP card mode.
2. When provisioned in 10GE TXP card mode.
Table 6-4 Protection Types
Protection Type Cards Description and Installation Requirements6-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 8 Complete the remaining fields:
• Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working port after failure
conditions remain corrected for the amount of time entered in the Reversion Time field.
• Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, select a reversion time from the drop-down list. The range
is 0.5 to 12.0 minutes. The default is 5.0 minutes. Reversion time is the amount of time that will
elapse before the traffic reverts to the working card. The reversion timer starts after conditions
causing the switch are cleared.
Note The Bidirectional switching option is available for Y-cable protection groups only in the following cases:
• On the MXP_MR_10DME card when ISC3_PEER_1G/ISC3_PEER_2G is the client payload.
• On the MXP_MR_10DME and MXP_MR_2.5G cards when Fibre Channel is the client payload. In
this case Bidirectional switching is:
– Automatically enabled when Distance Extension is enabled.
– Automatically disabled when Distance Extension is disabled.
The Bidirectional switching option is available for all SONET and SDH 1+1 protection groups.
Step 9 Click OK.
Step 10 Repeat this procedure for every Y-cable protection group indicated in the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic
Matrix.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP
Card
Purpose This procedure creates a splitter protection group between the trunk ports
of an OTU2_XP card. For additional information about splitter protection,
see the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Tools/Equipment Installed OTU2_XP card
Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
“NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note A splitter protection group is automatically created when a TXPP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, or PSM
card is installed. You can edit the splitter protection group name for these cards. The splitter protection
group is deleted when you delete the TXPP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, or PSM card.
Note Splitter protection is available for the OTU2_XP card when it is provisioned in Transponder
configuration only. In a splitter-protected Transponder configuration, Port 1 is the client port, Port 3 is
the working trunk port, and Port 4 is the standby trunk port.
Note For SONET or SDH payloads, Loss of Pointer Path (LOP-P) alarms can occur on a split signal if the
ports are not in a splitter protection group.
Step 1 View the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix (see Table 4-1 on page 4-4) for your site. Verify which
OTU2_XP card needs a splitter protection group. (Cards requiring splitter protection are indicated with
“Splitter” in the Traffic Matrix table Protection Type column. Refer to the Cisco TransportPlanner
DWDM Operations Guide for more information.)
Step 2 Verify that the OTU2_XP card is installed according to the requirements specified in Table 4-6 on
page 4-109.
Step 3 Verify that the pluggable port (SFP or XFP) slot is provisioned for the same payload rate as the pluggable
port on the OTU2_XP card where you will create the splitter protection group:
a. Display the OTU2_XP card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Module tabs.
c. Verify that a pluggable port (SFP or XFP) slot is provisioned in the Pluggable Port Module area, and
that the payload rate of the pluggable port (SFP or XFP) slot is same as the payload rate of the
pluggable port on the OTU2_XP card provisioned in the Pluggable Ports area. If they are not the
same, you must either delete the provisioned rate and create a new rate to match using the
“DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot” task on page 4-73 or replace the pluggable port (SFP
or XFP) using the “DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or XFP” task on page 4-74.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), click the Provisioning > Protection
tabs.
Step 5 In the Protection Groups area, click Create.
Step 6 In the Create Protection Group dialog box, enter the following:
• Name—Type a name for the protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z,
0-9) characters. Special characters are permitted. For TL1 compatibility, do not use question mark
(?), backslash (\), or double quote (“) characters.
• Type—Choose Splitter from the drop-down list.
• Protect Card—From the drop-down list, choose the port that will be the standby or protection port
to the active port. The list displays the available OTU2_XP ports. If transponder or muxponder cards
are not installed or if the trunk ports of the card are part of a regenerator group, no ports appear in
the drop-down list. 6-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
After you choose the protect port, a list of available working ports appear in the Available Cards list. If
no cards are available, no ports appear. If this occurs, you cannot complete this task until you install the
physical cards or preprovision the ONS 15454 slots using the “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on
page 4-55.
Step 7 From the Available Cards list, select the port that will be protected by the port you selected in
Protect Cards. Click the top arrow button to move the port to the Working Cards list.
Step 8 Complete the remaining fields:
• Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working port after failure
conditions remain corrected for the amount of time entered in the Reversion Time field.
• Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, select a reversion time from the drop-down list. The range
is 0.5 to 12.0 minutes. The default is 5.0 minutes. Reversion time is the amount of time that will
elapse before the traffic reverts to the working card. The reversion timer starts after conditions
causing the switch are cleared.
Note The Bidirectional Switching option is not applicable for splitter protection groups.
Step 9 Click OK.
Step 10 Repeat this procedure for every splitter protection group indicated in the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic
Matrix.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
or 10GE_XPE Cards
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to protect the
card against client port and card failure. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Purpose This procedure creates a 1+1 protection group to protect against client port
and card failure of GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE cards. For
additional information about 1+1 protection, see the “Transponder and
Muxponder Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference
Manual.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
“NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed according to the
requirements specified in Table 4-6 on page 4-109.
Step 3 Complete the NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually, page 4-114 by selecting the Trunk to
Trunk (L2) option, at the trunk port where you want to create 1+1 protection.
Step 4 Complete the “DLP-G461 Create a 1+1 Protection Group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE Cards” task on page 6-27 to create a protection group.
Step 5 Configure the standby port behavior, by setting the Protection Action to None or Squelch. For detailed
information on how to configure the standby port behavior, see the, “DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings” task on page 6-218.
Note Do not enable squelch in a 1 + 1 protection group, if the 100FX, 100LX, and ONS-SE-ZE-EL
SFP are used in the protection group and is connected to the peer via the parallel cable (not
Y-cable).
Note When you configure L2 1 + 1 protection on 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards, set the Protection
Action to None on the client ports. Setting the Protection Action as Squelch results in
unexpected switching behavior.
Step 6 Configure the standby and active port speed, by setting the mode parameter to Auto or 1000 or any other
values. For detailed information on how to configure the standby port behavior, see the “DLP-G380
Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings” task on page 6-218.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G461 Create a 1+1 Protection Group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Protection tabs.
Step 2 In the Protection Groups area, click Create.
Step 3 In the Create Protection Group dialog box, enter the following:
• Name—Type a name for the protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z,
0-9) characters. Special characters are permitted. For TL1 compatibility, do not use question mark
(?), backslash (\), or double quote (“) characters.
Purpose This procedure creates a 1+1 protection group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE slots where internal patchcords were created.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G344 Verify Provisionable and Internal Patchcords, page 8-41
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
• Type—Choose L2 1+1 (port) from the drop-down list.
• Protect Port—From the drop-down list, choose the port that will be the standby or protection port
for the active port. The list displays the available transponder or muxponder ports. If transponder or
muxponder cards are not installed, no ports appear in the drop-down list.
After you choose the protect port, a list of available working ports appear in the Available Ports list. If
no cards are available, no ports appear. If this occurs, you cannot complete this task until you install the
physical cards or preprovision the ONS 15454 slots using the “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on
page 4-55.
Step 4 From the Available Ports list, select the port that will be protected by the port you selected in the
Protected Port drop-down list. Click the top arrow button to move the port to the Working Ports list.
Step 5 Complete the remaining fields:
• Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working port after failure
conditions remain corrected for the amount of time entered in the Reversion Time field.
• Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, select a reversion time from the drop-down list. The range
is 0.5 to 12.0 minutes. The default is 5.0 minutes. Reversion time is the amount of time that will
elapse before the traffic reverts to the working card. The reversion timer starts after conditions
causing the switch are cleared.
The bidirectional switching option is available for SONET and SDH 1+1 protection groups.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 Repeat this procedure for every 1+1 protection group indicated in the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic
Matrix.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line
Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to change the
transponder card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Purpose This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for TXP_MR_2.5G
and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 4-71
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 6-11 (if necessary)
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-29
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 14-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G229 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Settings, page 6-29
• DLP-G230 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Settings, page 6-30
• DLP-G231 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings, page 6-33
• DLP-G232 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder SONET or SDH Line Threshold Settings,
page 6-35
• DLP-G320 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G
FC/FICON Payloads, page 6-38
• DLP-G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 6-39
• DLP-G306 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 6-41
• DLP-G234 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings, page 6-45
• DLP-G367 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings, page 6-34
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G229 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-5.
Note The Card subtab Framing Type and Tunable Wavelengths fields are display-only. Framing Type
shows the card framing type, either SONET or SDH, depending on whether the card is installed
in an ANSI or ETSI chassis. The Tunable Wavelengths field shows the tunable wavelengths for
the physical TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G that is installed.
Purpose This task changes the card settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and
TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-30
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G230 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Settings
Table 6-5 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Settings
Parameter Description Options
Termination
Mode
Sets the mode of operation (option only
supported for SONET/SDH payloads).
Refer to the “Transponder and
Muxponder Cards” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference
Manual for more details.
• Transparent
• Section (ANSI) or Regeneration
Section (ETSI)
• Line (ANSI) or Multiplex Section
(ETSI)
Regeneration
Peer Slot
Sets the slot containing another
TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card
to create a regeneration peer group. A
regeneration peer group facilitates the
management of two TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G cards that are needed to
perform a complete signal regeneration.
The regeneration peer group
synchronizes provisioning of the two
cards. Payload type and ITU-T G.709
optical transport network (OTN) changes
made on one TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card are reflected on the
peer TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G
card.
Note Y-cable protection groups cannot
be created on TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G cards that are in
a regeneration peer group.
• None
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5
• 6
• 12
• 13
• 14
• 15
• 16
• 17
Regeneration
Group Name
Sets the regeneration peer group name. User defined
Purpose This task changes the line settings for the client port of the TXP_MR_2.5G
and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-31
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-6.
Note The 2.5G multirate transponder trunk settings are provisioned in the “DLP-G305 Provision the
2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds” task on page 6-39.
Table 6-6 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. • 1
• 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G card only)
Port Name The user can assign a logical name for each of the
ports shown by filling in this field.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task
on page 8-3.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network conditions
prevent the change. For more information about
administrative states, refer to the “Administrative
and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or
Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled
(ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI)
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of the
port. Service states appear in the format: Primary
State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For
more information about service states, refer to the
“Administrative and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
SF BER (OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the signal
fail bit error rate.
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
SD BER (OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the signal
degrade bit error rate.
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-96-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
ALS Mode Sets the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. • Disabled (default)
• Auto Restart
• Manual Restart
• Manual Restart for Test
Reach Displays the optical reach distance of the client port. Options: ANSI/ETSI
• Autoprovision/Autoprovision (default)
• SR
• SR 1/I-1—Short reach up to 2-km distance
• IR 1/S1—Intermediate reach, up to 15-km
distance
• IR 2/S2—Intermediate reach up to 40-km
distance
• LR 1/L1—long reach, up to 40-km distance
• LR 2/L2—long reach, up to 80-km distance
• LR 3/L3—long reach, up to 80-km distance
Wavelength Displays the wavelength of the client port. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths: 1310 nm through
1560.61 nm, 100-GHz ITU spacing; coarse
wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM)
spacing
Note: supported wavelengths are marked by
asterisks (**)
AINS Soak (OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the
automatic in-service soak period.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
Type (OC-N and STM-N payloads only) The optical
transport type.
• SONET
• SDH
Table 6-6 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G231 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings
Note This task only applies to SONET services.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-7.
Purpose This task changes the section trace settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and
TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-7 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Section Trace
Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. • 1
• 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm
arises because of a J0 overhead string
mismatch, no alarm indication signal is
sent to downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets
a new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size6-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G367 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 6-8.
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets
a new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to
keep this display updated automatically.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 seconds.
Checked/unchecked (default)
Purpose This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the TXP_MR_2.5G
and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-7 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Section Trace
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G232 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder SONET or SDH Line
Threshold Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds tabs.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and
Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings in Table 6-9.
Table 6-8 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. • 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
Wavelength The wavelength provisioned for the trunk. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths in 100-GHz
ITU-T, C-band spacing. If the card is
installed, the wavelengths it carries
are identified with two asterisks.
Other wavelengths have a dark grey
background. If the card is not
installed, all wavelengths appear
with a dark grey background.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and
TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards carrying OC-3/STM-1,
OC-12/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note Some parameters and options in Table 6-9 do not apply to all TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G cards. If a parameter or option does not apply, that parameter or option does
not appear in CTC.
Table 6-9 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Thresholds Settings
for OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 Payloads
Parameter Description Options - ANSI Options - ETSI
Port (Display only) Port
number
• 1
• 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
• 1
• 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
EB Path Errored Block
indicates that one or
more bits are in error
within a block
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh. 6-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
FC (Line or Multiplex
Section only) Failure
count
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
SEFS (Near End Section or
Regeneration Section
only) Severely
errored framing
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
BBE Background block
errors
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 6-9 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Thresholds Settings
for OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 Payloads (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ANSI Options - ETSI6-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G320 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for
1GEthernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads
Step 1 In card view, display the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line
threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See Table 6-10 for a list of available
Ethernet variables.
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold,
the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Purpose This task changes the line remote monitoring (RMON) threshold settings
for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards carrying the
1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-10 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card 1G Ethernet and 1G FC/FICON
Thresholds
Variable Description
ifInErrors Number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing
them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
rxTotalPkts Total number of received packets.
8b10bStatsEncodingDispErrors Number of IETF 8b10b disparity violations on the Fibre Channel
line side.
8b10bIdleOrderedSets Number of received packets containing idle ordered sets.
8b10bNonIdleOrderedSets Number of received packets containing non-idle ordered sets.
8b10bDataOrderedSets Number of received packets containing data ordered sets.6-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Enter the appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the
rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every
15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the
rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple
times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA
Thresholds
Note In this task, trunk port refers to Port 2 for TXP_MR_2.5G cards, and to Ports 2 and 3 for
TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Pluggable Port Modules tab. Under Pluggable Ports, record the Rate that is provisioned.
Step 3 Look up the rate in Table 6-11 and note whether it is 2R or 3R.
Purpose This task changes the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G trunk port
alarm and threshold crossing alert (TCA) thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 5 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it and click Refresh.
Step 6 Referring to Table 6-12, verify the trunk port TCA thresholds for RX Power High and RX Power Low
depending on whether the rate is 2R or 3R. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the
threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-11 2R and 3R Mode and ITU-T G.709 Compliance by Client Interface
Client Interface Input Bit Rate 3R vs. 2R ITU-T G.709
OC-48/STM-16 2.488 Gbps 3R On or Off
DV-6000 2.38 Gbps 2R —
2 Gigabit Fibre Channel (2G-FC)/fiber
connectivity (FICON)
2.125 Gbps 3R1
1. No monitoring
On or Off
High-Definition Television (HDTV) 1.48 Gbps 2R —
Gigabit Ethernet (GE) 1.25 Gbps 3R On or Off
1 Gigabit Fibre Channel (1G-FC)/FICON 1.06 Gbps 3R On or Off
OC-12/STM-4 622 Mbps 3R On or Off
OC-3/STM-1 155 Mbps 3R On or Off
Enterprise System Connection (ESCON) 200 Mbps 2R —
SDI/D1 video 270 Mbps 2R —
ISC-1 Compact 1.06 Gbps 3R Off
ISC-3 1.06 or
2.125 Gbps
2R —
ETR_CLO 16 Mbps 2R —
Table 6-12 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
Signal TCA RX Power Low TCA RX Power High
3R –23 dBm –9 dBm
2R –24 dBm –9 dBm6-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 9 Verify the trunk port Alarm thresholds for RX Power High is –7 dBm, and for RX Power Low is
–26 dBm. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to
change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Step 10 Click Apply.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G306 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA
Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to Table 6-13, verify the Port 1 (client) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low,
TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end. Provision new
thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a
new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in
the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-13 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA RX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
OC-3 15454-SFP3-1-IR –23 –8 –21 –2
STM-1 15454E-SFP-L.1.1 –24 –10 –21 –2
OC-12 15454-SFP12-4-IR –28 –7 –21 –2
STM-4 15454E-SFP-L.4.1 –28 –8 –21 –2
OC-48 ONS-SE-2G-S1 –18 –3 –16 3
15454-SFP-OC48-IR –18 0 –11 6
STM-16 ONS-SE-2G-S1
15454E-SFP-L.16.1
–18 –3 –16 3
ONE_GE 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
ESCON 15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
–21 –14 –35 –8
DV6000 15454-SFP-OC48-IR –18 0 –11 6
15454E-SFP-L.16.1 –18 –3 –16 3
SDI_D1_
VIDEO
15454-SFP12-4-IR –28 –7 –21 –2
15454E-SFP-L.4.1 –28 –8 –21 –2
HDTV 15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
PASS-THRU 2R MODE
(not specified)
————
FC1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
FC2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–15 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 36-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 6 Referring to Table 6-14, verify the Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power
High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned. Provision new thresholds as
needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and
hitting Enter.
FICON1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
FICON2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–15 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
ETR_CLO 15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
–17 0 –16 3
ISC compat 15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
ISC peer 15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
Table 6-14 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
OC-3 15454-SFP3-1-IR –26 –5 –17 –6
STM-1 15454E-SFP-L.1.1 –27 –7 –17 –6
OC-12 15454-SFP12-4-IR –31 –4 –17 –6
STM-4 15454E-SFP-L.4.1 –31 –5 –17 –6
OC-48 ONS-SE-2G-S1 –21 0 –12 –1
15454-SFP-OC48-IR –21 3 –7 2
STM-16 ONS-SE-2G-S1
15454E-SFP-L.16.1
–21 0 –12 –1
Table 6-13 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds (continued)
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA RX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High6-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
ONE_GE 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –12 –2
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
ESCON 15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
–24 –11 –31 –12
DV6000 15454-SFP-OC48-IR –21 3 –7 2
15454E-SFP-L.16.1 –21 0 –12 –5
SDI_D1_
VIDEO
15454-SFP12-4-IR –31 –4 –17 –6
15454E-SFP-L.4.1 –31 –5 –17 –6
HDTV 15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
PASS-THRU 2R MODE
(not specified)
————
FC1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –12 –2
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
FC2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–18 3 –12 –2
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
FICON1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –12 –2
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
FICON2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–18 3 –12 –2
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
Table 6-14 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds (continued)
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High6-45
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G234 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines, G.709
Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 6-15 through 6-18.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End; 15 Min and 1 Day; and SM and PM settings
independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-15 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
ETR_CLO 15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
–20 3 –12 –2
ISC compat 15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
ISC peer 15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
Purpose This task changes the OTN settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and
TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-14 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds (continued)
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High6-46
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-16 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 6-17 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Threshold tab.
Table 6-15 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card OTN Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. • 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
G.709 OTN Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709.
• Enable
• Disable
FEC Sets the OTN lines to forward error
correction (FEC).
• Enable
• Disable
SF BER (Display only) The signal fail bit error
rate.
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Table 6-16 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port1
1. Latency for a 1G-FC payload without ITU-T G.709 is 4 microseconds, and with ITU-T G.709 is 40 microseconds. Latency
for a 2G-FC payload without ITU-T G.709 is 2 microseconds, and with ITU-T G.709 is 20 microseconds. Consider these
values when planning a FC network that is sensitive to latency.
(Display only) Port number. • 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh. 6-47
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-18 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 6-17 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. • 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
Bit Errors
Corrected
Sets the value for bit errors corrected. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Uncorrectable
Words
Sets the value for uncorrectable words. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Table 6-18 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Trail Trace Identifier
Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. • 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
Level Sets the level. • Section
• Path
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable FDI on
TIM
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm
arises because of a J0 overhead string
mismatch, no alarm indication signal is
sent to downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets
a new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets
a new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size6-48
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line
Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds
Note The TXP_MR_10G card does not support PPMs.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to change the
transponder card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 14-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 If you are provisioning a TXP_MR_10G card, complete the “DLP-G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G
Data Rate” task on page 6-49, and if you are provisioning a TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C card,
complete the “DLP-G712 Provision the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C Data Rate” task on
page 6-50. If not, continue with Step 4.
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to
keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 minutes.
Checked/unchecked (default)
Purpose This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for 10G multirate
transponder cards including the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 4-71
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 6-11 (if necessary)
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-18 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Trail Trace Identifier
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-49
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G216 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Settings, page 6-50
• DLP-G217 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Settings, page 6-52
• DLP-G218 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings, page 6-56
• DLP-G219 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads
Including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy, page 6-59
• DLP-G319 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 10G Ethernet LAN
Phy Payloads, page 6-62
• DLP-G301 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 6-66
• DLP-G302 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 6-67
• DLP-G221 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings, page 6-69
• DLP-G368 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings, page 6-58
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G card
where you want to change the card data rate settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Data Rate Selection tabs.
Step 3 Click Create.
Step 4 In the Create Port dialog box, choose one of the following data rates:
• SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy)
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
Step 5 Click Ok.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure.
Purpose This task changes the TXP_MR_10G card data rate.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-50
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G712 Provision the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C Data Rate
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10E or
TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the card data rate settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
• PPM—Choose the SFP you want to install from the drop-down list.
• PPM Type—Choose the number of ports supported by your SFP from the drop-down list. If only one
port is supported, PPM (1 port) is the only option.
Step 5 Click OK. The newly created PPM appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable
Step 6 Port Modules area turns white and the Actual Equipment Type column lists the equipment name.
Step 7 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Ports dialog box appears.
Step 8 In the Create Port dialog box, choose one of the following data rates:
• SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy)
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
• 10G FIBER Channel
• (TXP-MR-10EX_C card only) IB_5G
Step 9 Click Ok.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure.
DLP-G216 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Settings
Purpose This task changes the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C card data rate.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task changes the card settings for the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-51
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L card where you want to change the card
settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-19.
Table 6-19 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 Options ONS 15454 SDH Options
Termination
Mode
Sets the mode of operation. (This option is
only available for SONET/SDH payloads).
Refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder
Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM Reference Manual for more details.
• Transparent
• Section (TXP_MR_10E
only)
• Line
• Transparent
• Regeneration Section
(TXP_MR_10E only)
• Multiplex Section
AIS/Squelch
Configuration
(TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C,
TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
only) Sets the transparent termination mode
configuration.
• Squelch
• AIS
• Squelch
• AIS
Regeneration
Peer Slot
Sets the slot containing another
TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or
TXP_MR_10EX_C card to create a
regeneration peer group. A regeneration peer
group facilitates the management of two
TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or
TXP_MR_10EX_C cards that are needed to
perform a complete signal regeneration.
The regeneration peer group synchronizes
provisioning of the two cards. Payload type
and ITU-T G.709 optical transport network
(OTN) changes made on one TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C,
TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card
are reflected on the peer TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C,
TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
card.
Note Y-cable protection groups cannot be
created on TXP cards that are in a
regeneration peer group.
• None
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5
• 6
• 12
• 13
• 14
• 15
• 16
• 17
• None
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5
• 6
• 12
• 13
• 14
• 15
• 16
• 176-52
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G217 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET/SDH/Ethernet tabs. SONET is the option for ANSI shelves
when 10G Ethernet WAN phy is the Pluggable Port Rate, SDH is the option for ETSI shelves when 10G
Ethernet WAN phy is the Pluggable Port Rate, and Ethernet is the option for ANSI or ETSI shelves when
10GE LAN Phy is the Pluggable Port Rate.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-20.
Regeneration
Group Name
(Display only) The regeneration peer group
name.
— —
Tunable
Wavelengths
(Display only) Shows the supported
wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is
installed. For the TXP_MR_10E_C, or
TXP_MR_10E_L cards, the first and last
supported wavelength, frequency spacing, and
number of supported wavelengths are shown in
the format: first wavelength-last
wavelength-frequency spacing-number of
supported wavelengths. For example, the
TXP_MR_10E_C card would show:
1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-82. The
TXP_MR_10E show the four wavelengths
supported by the card that is installed. The
TXP_MR_10G show the two wavelengths
supported by the card that is installed.
— —
Purpose This task changes the line settings for TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-19 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 Options ONS 15454 SDH Options6-53
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note In Table 6-20, some parameter tabs do not always apply to all 10G multirate transponder cards.
If a tab does not apply, it will not appear in CTC.
Table 6-20 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Line Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port (Display only) Displays
the port number.
• 1 (OC192) (10G Ethernet WAN
Phy) (if TXP_MR_10G)
• 1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is
provisioned on the TXP_MR_10G
card)
• 1-1 (OC192) (10G Ethernet WAN
Phy on the TXP_MR_10E card)
• 1-1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is
provisioned on the TXP_MR_10E
card)
• 1-1 (FC10G) (if 10G fiber channel
is provisioned on the
TXP_MR_10E card)
• 2 (Trunk)
• (TXP_MR_10EX_C only) IB_5G
• 1 (STM-64) (10G Ethernet WAN
Phy) (if TXP_MR_10G)
• 1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is
provisioned on the TXP_MR_10G
card)
• 1-1 (STM-64) (10G Ethernet WAN
Phy on the TXP_MR_10E card)
• 1-1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is
provisioned on the TXP_MR_10E
card)
• 1-1 (FC10G) (if 10G fiber channel is
provisioned on the TXP_MR_10E
card)
• 2 (Trunk)
• (TXP_MR_10EX_C only) IB_5G
Port Name Provides the ability to
assign the specified port a
name.
User-defined. Name can be up to
32 alphanumeric/special characters.
Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a
Port” task on page 8-3.
User-defined. Name can be up to
32 alphanumeric/special characters.
Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a
Port” task on page 8-3.
Admin
State
Sets the port service state.
For more information
about administrative
states, refer to the
“Administrative and
Service States” appendix
in the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM Reference
Manual.
• IS
• IS,AINS
• OOS,DSBLD
• OOS,MT
• Unlocked
• Unlocked,automaticInService
• Locked,disabled
• Locked,maintenance6-54
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Service
State
(Display only) Identifies
the autonomously
generated state that gives
the overall condition of the
port. Service states appear
in the format: Primary
State-Primary State
Qualifier, Secondary
State. For more
information about service
states, refer to the
“Administrative and
Service States” appendix
in the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM Reference
Manual.
• IS-NR
• OOS-AU,AINS
• OOS-MA,DSBLD
• OOS-MA,MT
• Unlocked-enabled
• Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• Locked-enabled,disabled
• Locked-enabled,maintenance
SF BER (SONET [ANSI] or SDH
[ETSI] including 10G
Ethernet WAN Phy only)
Sets the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
SD BER (SONET [ANSI] or SDH
[ETSI] including 10G
Ethernet WAN Phy only)
Sets the signal degrade bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Type (SONET [ANSI] or SDH
[ETSI] including 10G
Ethernet WAN Phy only)
The optical transport type.
• SONET
• SDH
• SONET
• SDH
Table 6-20 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Line Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options6-55
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function
mode. The DWDM
transmitter supports ALS
according to ITU-T G.644
(06/99). ALS can be
disabled, or it can be set
for one of three mode
options.
• Disabled (default): ALS is off; the
laser is not automatically shut down
when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser
automatically shuts down when
traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the
conditions that caused the outage
are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the
laser automatically shuts down
when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must be
manually restarted when conditions
that caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually
restarts the laser for testing.
• Disabled (default): ALS is off; the
laser is not automatically shut down
when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser
automatically shuts down when
traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the
conditions that caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser
automatically shuts down when
traffic outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must be manually
restarted when conditions that caused
the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually
restarts the laser for testing.
AINS Soak (SONET [ANSI] or SDH
[ETSI] including 10G
Ethernet WAN Phy only)
Sets the automatic
in-service soak period.
Double-click the time and
use the up and down
arrows to change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal, in
hh.mm format, after which the card
becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
• Duration of valid input signal, in
hh.mm format, after which the card
becomes in service (IS) automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
ProvidesS
ync
(TXP_MR_10E, OC192
only) Sets the
ProvidesSync card
parameter. If checked, the
card is provisioned as a
network element (NE)
timing reference.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
SyncMsgI
n
(TXP_MR_10E, OC192
only) Sets the EnableSync
card parameter. Enables
synchronization status
messages (S1 byte), which
allow the node to choose
the best timing source.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
Max Size (TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10G LAN Phy
only) Sets the maximum
Ethernet packet size.
• 1548 bytes
• Jumbo (64 to 9,216 bytes)
• 1548 bytes
• Jumbo (64 to 9,216 bytes)
Table 6-20 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Line Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options6-56
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G218 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings
Note The Section Trace tab is available for the 10G Multirate Transponder cards only if no PPMs are
provisioned, or the OC192 PPM is provisioned. The tab is not available if a 10G Ethernet LAN Phy or
10G Fibre Channel PPM is provisioned.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-21.
Incoming
MAC
Address
(TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10G LAN Phy
only) Sets the incoming
MAC address.
Value of MAC address. Six bytes in
hexadecimal format.
Value of MAC address. Six bytes in
hexadecimal format.
Wavelengt
h
Displays the wavelength
of the client port.
• First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths: 1310 nm
through 1560.61 nm, 100-GHz ITU
spacing; coarse wavelength
division multiplexing (CWDM)
spacing
Note: supported wavelengths are
marked by asterisks (**)
• First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths: 1310 nm
through 1560.61 nm, 100-GHz ITU
spacing; coarse wavelength division
multiplexing (CWDM) spacing
Note: supported wavelengths are marked
by asterisks (**)
Reach Displays the optical reach
distance of the client port.
The Reach options depend on the traffic
type that has been selected.
The Reach options depend on the traffic
type that has been selected.
Purpose This task changes the line section trace settings for the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and
TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-20 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Line Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options6-57
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 6-21 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Section Trace Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 Options Options — ONS 15454 SDH
Port Sets the port number. • 1-1 (OC192)
• 2—Trunk
• 1-1 (STM64)
• 2—Trunk
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
• Off/None
• Manual
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
• 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets a
new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display. Its
title changes, based on the current display
mode. Click Hex to change the display to
hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII);
click ASCII to change the display to ASCII
(button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises
because of a J0 overhead string mismatch,
no alarm indication signal is sent to
downstream nodes if this box is checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is not disabled)
• Checked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is not disabled)
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets a
new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display. Its
title changes, based on the current display
mode. Click Hex to change the display to
hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII);
click ASCII to change the display to ASCII
(button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current received
string. You can click Refresh to manually
refresh this display, or check the
Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep
this panel updated.
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 seconds.
Checked/unchecked (default) Checked/unchecked (default)6-58
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G368 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Note Before modifying the wavelength settings, change the port state to OOS,DSBLD (for ANSI) or
Locked,disabled (for ETSI) and delete the circuit and patchcord provisioning present on the port.
Payload or communication channel provisioning can be retained.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 6-22.
Purpose This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and
TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-22 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. Port 2 (Trunk)
Band Indicates the wavelength band that can be
provisioned. If the physical
TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L,
and TXP_MR_10EX_C is installed, this
field is display-only.
• C—The C-band wavelengths are
available in the Wavelength field.
• L—The L-band wavelengths are
available in the Wavelength field.6-59
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G219 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or
SDH Payloads Including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI)
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-23.
Even/Odd Sets the wavelengths available for
provisioning for TXP_MR_10E_C, and
TXP_MR_10E_L cards. (This field does
not apply to TXP_MR_10G or
TXP_MR_10E cards.)
• Even—Displays even C-band or
L-band wavelengths in the
Wavelength field.
• Odd—Displays odd C-band or
L-band wavelengths in the
Wavelength field.
Wavelength The wavelength provisioned for the trunk. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths in 100-GHz
ITU-T C-band or L-band spacing,
depending on the card that is
installed. For TXP_MR_10G and
TXP_MR_10E cards, the
wavelengths carried by the card are
identified with two asterisks. If the
card is not installed, all wavelengths
appear with a dark grey background.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and
TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards carrying SONET or SDH payloads,
including the physical 10G Ethernet WAN Phy payload.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-22 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card Wavelength Trunk Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-60
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note Parameters shown in Table 6-23 do not apply to all 10G multirate transponder cards. If the
parameter or option does not apply, it is not shown in CTC.
Table 6-23 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Line Threshold
Settings
Parameter Description Options - ANSI Options - ETSI
Port (Display only) Port
number
• 1-1 (OC192)
• 2 (Trunk)
• 1-1 (STM64)
• 2 (Trunk)
EB Path Errored Block
indicates that one or
more bits are in error
within a block
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh. 6-61
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
SEFS (Near End Section or
Regeneration Section
only) Severely
errored framing
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
OFS (Near End Section or
Regeneration Section
only) Out of frame
seconds
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
BBE Background block
errors
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 6-23 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Line Threshold
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ANSI Options - ETSI6-62
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G319 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for
10GEthernet LAN Phy Payloads
Step 1 Display the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or
TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the line threshold settings in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
FC (Line or Multiplex
Section only) Failure
count
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
UAS (Line or Multiplex
Section only)
Unavailable seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and
TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards carrying the physical 10G Ethernet
LAN payload.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-23 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Line Threshold
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ANSI Options - ETSI6-63
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See Table 6-24 for a list of available
Ethernet variables.
Table 6-24 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card GE LAN Phy Variables
Variable Description
ifInOctets Total number of octets received on the interface, including framing
characters.
rxTotalPkts Total number of received packets.
ifInMulticastPkts Number of multicast frames received error free.
ifInBroadcastPkts Number of packets, delivered by a sublayer to an higher sublayer,
that were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer.
ifInErrors Number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them
from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
ifInErrorBytePkts
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of receive error bytes.
ifInFramingErrorPkts
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of receive framing error counters.
ifInJunkInterPkts
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of receive interpacket junk counters.
ifOutOctets
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including
framing characters.
txTotalPkts
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Total number of transmit packets.
ifOutMulticastPkts
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of multicast frames transmitted error free.
ifOutBroadcastPkts
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be
transmitted, and that were addressed to a broadcast address at this
sublayer, including those that were discarded or not sent.
dot3StatsFCSErrors Number of frames with frame check errors, that is, there is an
integral number of octets, but an incorrect Frame Check Sequence
(FCS).
dot3StatsFrameTooLong
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of received frames that were larger than the maximum size
permitted.
etherStatsUndersizePkts Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were
otherwise well formed.6-64
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
etherStatsFragments Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in
length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had
either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or
a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Note that it is entirely normal for etherStatsFragments to
increment. This is because it counts both runts (which are normal
occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits.
etherStatsPkts64Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets).
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that
were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsBroadcastPkts Total number of good packets received that were directed to the
broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast
packets.
etherStatsMulticastPkts Total number of good packets received that were directed to a
multicast address. Note that this number does not include packets
directed to the broadcast address.
etherStatsOversizePkts Total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were
otherwise well formed.
etherStatsJabbers Total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either
a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad
FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error).
etherStatsOctets Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets)
received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets).
Table 6-24 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card GE LAN Phy Variables (continued)6-65
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold,
the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type in an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the
rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every
15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the
rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple
times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Note To view all RMON thresholds, click Show All RMON thresholds.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
etherStatsCRCAlignErrors
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Total number of packets received that had a length (excluding
framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and
1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad FCS with an integral
number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a nonintegral
number of octets (Alignment Error).
rxPauseFrames
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of received IETF 802.x pause frames.
rxControlFrames Number of MAC control frames passed by the MAC sublayer to the
MAC control sublayer.
rxUnknownOpcodeFrames
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of MAC control frames received that contain an opcode
that is not supported by the device.
Table 6-24 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card GE LAN Phy Variables (continued)6-66
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G301 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA
Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 6-25, verify the trunk port (Port 2) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power
Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the
threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing value, and entering the new value. Hit Enter,
then click Apply.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Purpose This task provisions the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C trunk port
alarm and threshold cross alert (TCA) thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-25 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
Card
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
TXP_MR_10G –8 dBm –18 dBm 7 dBm –1 dBm
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_
C
–9 dBm –18 dBm 9 dBm 0 dBm6-67
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 7 Referring to Table 6-26, verify the trunk port (Port 2) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power
Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the
threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing value, and entering the new value. Hit Enter,
then click Apply.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G302 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA
Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh.
Table 6-26 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds
Card
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
TXP_MR_10G –8 dBm –20 dBm 4 dBm 2 dBm
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_
C
–8 dBm –20 dBm 7 dBm 3 dBm
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and
TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-68
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Referring to Table 6-27, verify the Port 1 (Client) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low,
TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end. Provision new
thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing
value, and entering the new value. Hit Enter, then click Apply.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in
the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 6-28, provision the Port 1 (Client) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power
Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned.
Table 6-27 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds
Pluggable Port
Rate Pluggable Port Module (XFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power
Low
SONET (or
SDH)
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
–1 –11 –1 –6
10G Ethernet
LAN Phy
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
0.5 –14.4 –1 –6
10G Fibre
Channel
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
0.5 –14.4 –1 –6
IB_5G1
1. Only the TXP_MR_10EX_C card supports IB_5G.
TXP_MR_10EX_C uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1 Version 3
1.0 –14.0 5.0 12.06-69
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G221 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the OTN settings.
Table 6-28 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds
Pluggable Port
Rate
Pluggable Port
Module (XFP)
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
SONET (or SDH) TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
3 –16 1 –8
10G Ethernet
LAN Phy
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
3 –16 1 –8
10G Fibre
Channel
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
3 –16 1 –8
IB_5G1
1. Only the TXP_MR_10EX_C card supports IB_5G.
TXP_MR_10EX_C
uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
Version 3
3.0 –16 1.0 –8
Purpose This task changes the line OTN settings for the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and
TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-70
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then click one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines,
G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 6-29 through 6-32.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently, 15 Min and 1 Day independently, and
SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-29 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Table 6-30 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 6-29 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card OTN Lines Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
2
G.709 OTN Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709. Check the box to enable.
For TXP-MR-10EX_C cards, the G.709
OTN should be enabled.
• Enable
• Disable
FEC Sets the OTN lines FEC mode. FEC mode
can be Disabled, Enabled, or, for the
TXP_MR_10E, Enhanced FEC mode can
be enabled to provide greater range and
lower bit error rate. For TXP_MR_10E
cards, Standard is the same as enabling
FEC. For TXP-MR-10EX_C cards, the
FEC should be enabled.
• Enable—(TXP_MR_10G only) FEC
is on.
• Disable—FEC is off.
• Standard—(TXP_MR_10E only)
Standard FEC is on.
• Enhanced—(TXP_MR_10E only)
Enhanced FEC is on.
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
SF BER (Display only) Indicates the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
Asynch/Synch
Mapping
(TXP_MR_10E only) Sets how the
ODUk (client payload) is mapped to the
optical channel (OTUk).
• Asynch mapping
• Synch mapping6-71
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-30 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
2
ES Severely errored seconds. Two types of
thresholds can be asserted. Selecting the
SM (OTUk) radio button selects FEC,
overhead management, and PM using
OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button
selects path PM using ODUk.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709
optical channel transport unit
order of k overhead frame used
for management and performance
monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the
ITU-T G.709 optical channel data
unit order of k overhead frame
unit used for path performance
monitoring.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh. 6-72
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-31 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab.
Table 6-32 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 6-30 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
Table 6-31 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
2
Bit Errors
Corrected
Displays the number of bit errors
corrected during the selected time period.
Numeric display. Can be set for
15-minute or one-day intervals.
Uncorrectable
Words
Displays the number of uncorrectable
words in the selected time period.
Numeric display. Can be set for
15-minute or one-day intervals.
Table 6-32 10G Multirate Transponder Trail Trace Identifier Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port Sets the port number. • 1
• 2
Level Sets the level. • Section
• Path
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual6-73
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Disable FDI on
TTIM
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section
overhead alarm arises because of a J0
overhead string mismatch, no Forward
Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to
the downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
• Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not
disabled)
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets
a new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size;
trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets
a new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to
keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 minutes.
Checked/unchecked (default)
Table 6-32 10G Multirate Transponder Trail Trace Identifier Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-74
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
NTP-G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Ethernet
Settings, Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to change the
ADM-10G card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 14-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 To provision a peer group, complete the “DLP-G403 Create the ADM-10G Peer Group” task on
page 6-75.
Step 4 To provision Ethernet settings, complete the “DLP-G469 Provision the ADM-10G Card Ethernet
Settings” task on page 6-76.
Step 5 To change line settings, complete the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G397 Change the ADM-10G Line Settings, page 6-77
• DLP-G398 Change the ADM-10G Line Section Trace Settings, page 6-83
• DLP-G399 Change the ADM-10G Line Thresholds for SONET and SDH Payloads, page 6-84
• DLP-G412 Change the ADM-10G Line RMON Thresholds for the 1G Ethernet Payload, page 6-88
Step 6 To change thresholds, complete the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G400 Provision the ADM-10G Interlink or Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 6-91
• DLP-G401 Provision the ADM-10G Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 6-92
• DLP-G402 Change the ADM-10G OTN Settings, page 6-93
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure creates an ADM-10G peer group and changes line settings,
PM parameters, and threshold settings for ADM-10G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 4-71
DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port, page 6-9 (if necessary)
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-75
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G403 Create the ADM-10G Peer Group
Note You cannot perform this task on a single ADM-10G card; it is only available if a second ADM-10G card
can be accessed through the interlink ports (Port 17 and Port 18).
Note Due to a hardware limitation, you cannot provision the SDCC/LDCC on Port 17.
Note Perform this task on only one of the two peer cards.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 In the ADM Group Peer drop-down list, choose the slot number (for example, 14) where the companion
ADM-10G card is located.
Step 4 In the ADM Peer Group field, enter a group name.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Note The Card Parameters Tunable Wavelengths area is read-only and does not contain any
wavelengths until circuits are separately provisioned for the card.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task creates peer group protection for two ADM-10G cards within the
same node, located on the same shelf.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69, for two
ADM-10G cards (located on the same shelf) for which a peer group is
desired.
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-76
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G469 Provision the ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the Ethernet settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Ethernet tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Ethernet tab as described in Table 6-33. The parameters that appear
depend on the card mode.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task changes the Ethernet settings for the ADM-10G card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-33 ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) The Port number (n-n) and
rate.
—
MTU The maximum size of the Ethernet frames
accepted by the port.
Jumbo. Default: 64 to 9216
Numeric: 1548
Mode Sets the Ethernet mode. 1000 Mbps
Framing Sets the framing type. • GFP-F
• HDLC
CRC Encap Sets the CRC encap values for the framing
type.
CRC encap value for GFP-F:
• None (default)
• 32-Bit
CRC encap value for HDLC:
• 16-Bit
• 32-Bit (default)
AINS Soak Automatic in-service soak time. The duration
of time that must pass with an uninterrupted
signal before the traffic/termination
transitions to the IS-NR (ANSI) or
unlocked-enabled (ETSI) service state.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after
which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments6-77
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G397 Change the ADM-10G Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Ports tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-34 as needed.
Note In Table 6-34, some parameter tabs do not always apply to all ADM-10G cards. If a tab does not
apply, it will not appear in CTC.
Purpose This task changes the line settings for ADM-10G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-78
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-34 ADM-10G Line Port Tab Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
Port (Display only) Displays
the port number.
• 1-1 to 1-16
(OC3/OC12/OC48/GE)
• 17-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 17 and Port 18
are trunk ports that
support OC192
payload in a
single-card
configuration. These
ports are interlink
ports in a double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
• 1-1 to 1-16
(STM1/STM4/STM16/G
E)
• 17-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 17 and Port 18
are trunk ports that
support STM64
payload in a
single-card
configuration. These
ports are interlink
ports in a double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
Port Name Provides the ability to
assign the specified port
a name.
User-defined. Name can be
up to
32 alphanumeric/special
characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a
Name to a Port” task on
page 8-3.
User-defined. Name can be
up to
32 alphanumeric/special
characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a
Name to a Port” task on
page 8-3.
Admin
State
Sets the port service
state. For more
information about
administrative states,
refer to the
“Administrative and
Service States”
appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM Reference
Manual.
• IS
• IS,AINS
• OOS,DSBLD
• OOS,MT
• Unlocked
• Unlocked,automaticInServ
ice
• Locked,disabled
• Locked,maintenance6-79
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Service
State
(Display only)
Identifies the
autonomously
generated state that
gives the overall
condition of the port.
Service states appear in
the format: Primary
State-Primary State
Qualifier, Secondary
State. For more
information about
service states, refer to
the “Administrative and
Service States”
appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM Reference
Manual.
• IS-NR
• OOS-AU,AINS
• OOS-MA,DSBLD
• OOS-MA,MT
• Unlocked-enabled
• Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• Locked-enabled,disabled
• Locked-enabled,maintenan
ce
Table 6-34 ADM-10G Line Port Tab Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options6-80
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function
mode. The DWDM
transmitter supports
ALS according to
ITU-T G.644 (06/99).
ALS can be disabled, or
it can be set for one of
three mode options.
• Disabled (default): ALS
is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down
when traffic outages
(LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: (Not
applicable for Gigabit
Ethernet client
interfaces) ALS is on;
the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic
outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts
when the conditions that
caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is
on; the laser
automatically shuts
down when traffic
outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must
be manually restarted
when conditions that
caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test:
Manually restarts the
laser for testing.
• Disabled (default): ALS
is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down
when traffic outages
(LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: (Not
applicable for Gigabit
Ethernet client
interfaces) ALS is on;
the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic
outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts
when the conditions that
caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is
on; the laser
automatically shuts
down when traffic
outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must
be manually restarted
when conditions that
caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test:
Manually restarts the
laser for testing.
AINS Soak Sets the automatic
in-service soak period.
Double-click the time
and use the up and down
arrows to change
settings.
• Duration of valid input
signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card
becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute
increments
Note The AINS service
state is not supported
on interlink ports.
• Duration of valid input
signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card
becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute
increments
Note The AINS service
state is not supported
on interlink ports.
Table 6-34 ADM-10G Line Port Tab Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options6-81
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET or SDH tabs.
Step 6 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-35 as needed.
Reach Displays the optical
reach distance of the
client port.
The Reach options depend on
the traffic type that has been
selected.
The Reach options depend on
the traffic type that has been
selected.
Wavelength Tunable wavelength. Shows the supported
wavelengths of the trunk port
after the card is installed in
the format: first
wavelength-last
wavelength-frequency
spacing-number of supported
wavelengths. For example,
1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50g
Hz-8 are supported
wavelengths.
Shows the supported
wavelengths of the trunk port
after the card is installed in
the format: first
wavelength-last
wavelength-frequency
spacing-number of supported
wavelengths. For example,
1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50g
Hz-8 are supported
wavelengths.
Table 6-35 ADM-10G Line SONET or SDH Tab Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
Port (Display only) Displays
the client and trunk port
number.
• 1-1 to 1-16
(OC3/OC12/OC48/GE)
• 17-1 (OC192)
• 18-1 (OC192/Interlink)
• 19-1 (OC192)
Note Port 17 and Port 18
are trunk ports that
support OC192
payload in a
single-card
configuration. These
ports are interlink
ports in a double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
• 1-1 to 1-16
(STM1/STM4/STM16/G
E)
• 17-1(STM64)
• 18-1 (STM64/Interlink)
• 19-1 (STM64
Note Port 17 and Port 18
are trunk ports that
support STM64
payload in a
single-card
configuration. These
ports are interlink
ports in a double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
ProvidesSync When checked, the card is
provisioned as an NE
timing reference.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
Table 6-34 ADM-10G Line Port Tab Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options6-82
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
SyncMsgIn Enables synchronization
status messages (S1 byte),
which allow the node to
choose the best timing
source.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
SF BER Sets the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
Send
DoNotUse
When checked, sends a
DUS message on the S1
byte.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Type (Display only) Type of
node.
• SONET
• SDH
• SDH
Admin SSM
In
Overrides the
synchronization status
message (SSM)
synchronization
traceability unknown
(STU) value. If the node
does not receive an SSM
signal, it defaults to STU.
• PRS—Primary Reference
Source (Stratum 1)
• ST2—Stratum 2
• TNC—Transit node clock
• ST3E—Stratum 3E
• ST3—Stratum 3
• SMC—SONET minimum
clock
• ST4—Stratum 4
• DUS—Do not use for
timing synchronization
• RES—Reserved; quality
level set by user
• G811—Primary reference
clock
• STU—Sync traceability
unknown
• G812T—Transit node clock
traceable
• G812L—Local node clock
traceable
• SETS—Synchronous
equipment
• DUS—Do not use for
timing synchronization
Table 6-35 ADM-10G Line SONET or SDH Tab Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options6-83
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G398 Change the ADM-10G Line Section Trace Settings
Note The Section Trace tab is available for ports configured as OC-N (Ports 1 through 16, Ports 17 and 18
[only in a single-card configuration] and Port 19). Section trace is not available on interlink ports.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the section trace settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-36.
Purpose This task changes the line section trace settings for the ADM-10G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-36 ADM-10G Section Trace Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
Port Sets the port number. • 1-1 to 1-16
(OC3/OC12/OC48/G
E)
• 17-1 (OC 192)
• 18-1 (OC192)
• 19-1 (OC192)
Note Port 17 and Port
18 are trunk ports
that support
OC192 payload in
a single-card
configuration.
These ports are
interlink ports in a
double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
• 1-1 to 1-16
(STM1/STM4/STM1
6/GE)
• 17-1 (STM64)
• 18-1 (STM64)
• 19-1 (STM64)
Note Port 17 and Port
18 are trunk ports
that support
STM64 payload
in a single-card
configuration.
These ports are
interlink ports in a
double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
Received
Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
• Off/None
• Manual6-84
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G399 Change the ADM-10G Line Thresholds for SONET and SDH Payloads
Transmit
Section
Trace
String
Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
• 64 byte
• 1 byte
• 16 byte
• 64 byte
Current Current Transmit String
displays the current
transmit string; New
Transmit String sets a
new transmit string.
Current String Type
allows you to choose
between ASCII or
Hexadecimal format.
Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal
(button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to
change the display to
ASCII (button changes to
Hex).
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Current
Received String displays
the current received
string. You can click
Refresh to manually
refresh this display, or
check the Auto-refresh
every 5 sec check box to
keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Auto-refr
esh
If checked, automatically
refreshes the display
every 5 seconds.
Checked/unchecked
(default)
Checked/unchecked
(default)
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for ADM-10G cards carrying
SONET payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Table 6-36 ADM-10G Section Trace Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options6-85
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the line threshold settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET or SDH Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-37.
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-37 ADM-10G Card Line Threshold Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port (Display only) Port
number
• 1-1 to 1-16
(OC3/OC12/OC48/GE)
• 17-1 (OC 192)
• 18-1 (OC192)
• 19-1 (OC192)
Note Port 17 and Port 18
are trunk ports that
support OC192
payload in a
single-card
configuration. These
ports are interlink
ports in a double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
• 1-1 to 1-16
(STM1/STM4/STM16/GE)
• 17-1 (STM 64)
• 18-1 (STM64)
• 19-1 (STM64)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are
trunk ports that support
STM64 payload in a
single-card
configuration. These
ports are interlink ports
in a double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer group).
EB Path Errored Block
indicates that one or
more bits are in error
within a block
— Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far
End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes)
or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section
or Regeneration Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.6-86
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
—
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far
End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes)
or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far
End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes)
or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
BBE Background block
errors
— Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far
End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes)
or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section
or Regeneration Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
Table 6-37 ADM-10G Card Line Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options6-87
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
FC (Line Section only)
Failure count
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
—
PSC Protection Switching
Count
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
—
PSD Protection Switching
Duration
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
—
UAS (Line Section only)
Unavailable seconds
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far
End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes)
or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
Table 6-37 ADM-10G Card Line Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options6-88
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G412 Change the ADM-10G Line RMON Thresholds for the 1GEthernet
Payload
Note This task can only be performed if the ADM-10G card has at least one PPM port provisioned for Gigabit
Ethernet.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the line RMON thresholds. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose the applicable Ethernet variable. See Table 6-38 for a list of
available Ethernet variables.
Purpose This task changes the line RMON threshold settings for an ADM-10G card
carrying the 1G Ethernet payload.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port, page 6-9
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-38 ADM-10G Gigabit Ethernet Thresholds
Variable Description
ifInOctets Total number of octets received on the interface, including
framing characters.
ifInErrors Number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing
them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
ifOutOctets Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including
framing characters.
ifInMulticastPkts Number of multicast frames received error-free.
ifInBroadcastPkts Number of packets, delivered by a sublayer to a higher layer or
sublayer, that were addressed to a broadcast address at this
sublayer.
ifInErrorBytePkts Number of receive error bytes.
dot3StatsFCSErrors Number of frames with frame check errors; that is, there is an
integral number of octets, but there is also an incorrect frame
check sequence (FCS).
dot3StatsFrameTooLong Number of received frames that were larger than the permitted
maximum size.6-89
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
dot3ControlInUnknownOpcodes A count of MAC control frames received on this interface that
contain an opcode not supported by this device.
dot3InPauseFrames A count of MAC control frames received on this interface with an
opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
dot3OutPauseFrames A count of MAC control frames transmitted on this interface with
an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
etherStatsUndersizePkts Total number of packets received that were well-formed and less
than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits and including FCS
octets).
etherStatsFragments Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in
length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had
either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS error) or
a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (alignment error).
Note It is normal for etherStatsFragments to increment. This is
because it counts both runts (which are normal
occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits.
etherStatsPkts64Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and
received by the interface that were 64 octets in length (excluding
framing bits and including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and
received by the interface that were between 65 and 127 octets in
length, inclusive.
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted
and received by the interface that were between 128 and 255
octets in length, inclusive, excluding framing bits and including
FCS octets.
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and
received by the interface that were between 256 and 511 octets in
length, inclusive.
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and
received by the interface that were between 512 and 1023 octets
in length, inclusive, excluding framing bits and including FCS
octets.
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and
received by the interface that were between 1024 and 1518 octets
in length, inclusive, excluding framing bits and including FCS
octets.
etherStatsBroadcastPkts Total number of good packets transmitted and received by the
interface that were directed to the broadcast address.
Note Multicast packets are not included.
Table 6-38 ADM-10G Gigabit Ethernet Thresholds (continued)6-90
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold,
the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the
rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every
15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the
rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple
times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
etherStatsMulticastPkts Total number of good packets transmitted and received by the
interface that were directed to a multicast address.
Note This number does not include packets directed to the
broadcast address.
etherStatsOversizePkts Total number of packets transmitted and received by the interface
that were well-formed and longer than 1518 octets, excluding
framing bits and including FCS octets.
etherStatsJabbers Total number of packets received that were longer than 1518
octets (excluding framing bits and including FCS octets), and had
a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS error) or a bad
FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (alignment error).
rxTotalPkts Total number of received packets.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmit packets.
Table 6-38 ADM-10G Gigabit Ethernet Thresholds (continued)6-91
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G400 Provision the ADM-10G Interlink or Trunk Port Alarm and TCA
Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the interlink or trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 6-39, verify the interlink or trunk port TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power
Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the
threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and pressing Enter.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 6-40, verify the interlink or trunk port alarm thresholds for RX Power High,
RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by
double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and pressing
Enter.
Purpose This task provisions the ADM-10G interlink or trunk port alarm and
threshold crossing alert (TCA) thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-39 ADM-10G Interlink and Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
Port
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
17-1 and 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports in
single-card configuration and an
interlink port in double-card
configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
–7.0 dBm –27.0 dBm 6.0 dBm –4.0 dBm
19-1 (Trunk) –7.0 dBm –27.0 dBm 6.0 dBm –4.0 dBm6-92
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G401 Provision the ADM-10G Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 6-13 on page 6-42 and Table 6-14 on page 6-43, verify the Port 1 to 16 (Client) Alarm
thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client
interface that is provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value
you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and pressing Enter.
Table 6-40 ADM-10G Interlink and Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds
Port
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
17-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
Note Port 17 is a trunk port in single-card
configuration and an interlink port in
double-card configuration (ADM-10G
peer group).
1.0 dBm –13.0 dBm 1.0 dBm –8.0 dBm
18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in single-card
configuration and an interlink port in
double-card configuration (ADM-10G
peer group).
–5.0 dBm –30.0 dBm 5.0 dBm –3.0 dBm
19-1 (Trunk) –5.0 dBm –30.0 dBm 5.0 dBm –3.0 dBm
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
ADM-10G card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-93
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 6-13 and Table 6-14 on page 6-43, verify the interlink ports 17-1 and 18-1 for RX
Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low settings. Provision new thresholds as
needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and
pressing Enter.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G402 Change the ADM-10G OTN Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then click one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines,
ITU-T G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 6-41 through 6-44.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and
SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio buttons and click Refresh.
Table 6-41 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Purpose This task changes the line OTN settings for the ADM-10G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-94
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-42 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > ITU-T G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 6-41 ADM-10G Card OTN Lines Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
• 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in
single-card configuration and an
interlink port in double-card
configuration (ADM-10G peer
group).
ITU-TG.709
OTN
Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709.
• Enable
• Disable
FEC Sets the OTN lines FEC mode. FEC mode
can be Disabled, Enabled, or, for the
TXP_MR_10E, Enhanced FEC mode can
be enabled to provide greater range and
lower bit error rate. For TXP_MR_10E
cards, Standard is the same as enabling
FEC.
• Disable—FEC is off.
• Standard—Standard FEC is on.
• Enhanced—Enhanced FEC is on.
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
SF BER (Display only) Indicates the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
Synch
Mapping
Sets how the ODUk (client payload) is
mapped to the optical channel (OTUk).
Synch mapping6-95
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-42 ADM-10G Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
• 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in
single-card configuration and an
interlink port in double-card
configuration (ADM-10G peer
group).
ES Errored seconds. Selecting the SM
(OTUk) radio button selects FEC,
overhead management, and PM using
OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button
selects path PM using ODUk.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709
optical channel transport unit
order of k overhead frame used
for management and performance
monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the
ITU-T G.709 optical channel data
unit order of k overhead frame
unit used for path performance
monitoring.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh. 6-96
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-43 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab.
Table 6-44 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 6-42 ADM-10G Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
Table 6-43 ADM-10G Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
• 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in
single-card configuration and an
interlink port in double-card
configuration (ADM-10G peer
group).
Bit Errors
Corrected
Displays the number of bit errors
corrected during the selected time period.
Numeric display. Can be set for
15-minute or 1 day intervals.
Uncorrectable
Words
Displays the number of uncorrectable
words in the selected time period.
Numeric display. Can be set for
15-minute or 1 day intervals. 6-97
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-44 ADM-10GTrail Trace Identifier Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port Sets the port number. • 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in
single-card configuration and an
interlink port in double-card
configuration (ADM-10G peer
group).
Level Sets the level. • Section
• Path
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable FDI on
TTIM
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on
Section/Path overhead alarm arises
because of a J0/J1 overhead string
mismatch, no Forward Defect Indication
(FDI) signal is sent to the downstream
nodes if this box is checked.
• Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
• Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not
disabled)
Transmit Current Transmit String displays the
current transmit string; New sets a new
transmit string. You can click the button
on the right to change the display. Its title
changes, based on the current display
mode. In Transmit String Type, click Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII); click ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button
changes to Hex).
String of trace string size;
trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
Expected Current Expected String displays the
current expected string; New sets a new
expected string. You can click the button
on the right to change the display. Its title
changes, based on the current display
mode. In Expected String Type, click Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII); click ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button
changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Current Received String
displays the current received string. You
can click Refresh to manually refresh this
display, or check the Auto-refresh every
5 sec check box to keep this panel
updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh
(every 5 sec)
If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 seconds.
Checked/unchecked (default)6-98
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and
PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to change the
muxponder card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 14-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G222 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Settings, page 6-99
• DLP-G223 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line Settings, page 6-101
• DLP-G224 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Section Trace Settings, page 6-103
• DLP-G225 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Settings, page 6-105
• DLP-G226 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder SONET/SDH Line Thresholds Settings, page 6-108
• DLP-G303 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 6-111
• DLP-G304 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 6-112
• DLP-G228 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line OTN Settings, page 6-114
• DLP-G369 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings, page 6-107
Step 4 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 14-2.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for the
MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69.
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 4-71
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 6-11 (if necessary)
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-99
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G222 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-45.
Note Parameters shown in Table 6-45 do not apply to all 4x2.5G muxponder cards. If the parameter
or option does not apply, it is not shown in CTC.
Purpose This task changes the card settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards, including payload type,
termination mode, and wavelength.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-100
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Table 6-45 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Settings
Parameter Description Options
Termination
Mode
Sets the mode of operation. Options that
do not apply to a card do not display.
The MXP_2.5G_10G card is based on
SONET/SDH multiplexing. The
transparent mode terminates and rebuilds
the B1 byte (as well as other bytes) of the
incoming OC-48/STM-16 signal. The B2
byte is not touched.
The MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L,
and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards are fully
transparent in transparent mode based on
the OTN/ITU-T G.709 multiplexing
scheme. It does not terminate the B1 byte
or other bytes.
It encapsulates OC-48/STM-16 bytes into
ODU1 first, then multiplexes them into an
OTU2.
Refer to the “Transponder and
Muxponder Cards” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference
Manual for more details.
For ANSI platforms:
• Transparent
• Section (MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C only)
• Line (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
For ETSI platforms:
• Transparent
• Multiplex Section (MXP_2.5G_10G,
only)
• Regeneration Section
(MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C only)
AIS/Squelch (MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C only) Sets the
transparent termination mode
configuration.
• Ais
• Squelch
Tunable
Wavelengths
(Display only) Shows the supported
wavelengths of the trunk port after the
card is installed. For the
MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or
MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards, the first and
last supported wavelength, frequency
spacing, and number of supported
wavelengths are shown in the format: first
wavelength-last wavelength-frequency
spacing-number of supported
wavelengths. For example, the
MXP_2.5G_10E_C card would show:
1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-82. The
MXP_2.5G_10G and MXP_2.5G_10E
show the four wavelengths supported by
the card that is installed.
—6-101
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G223 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) tabs.
Note The SONET tab appears only if you have created a PPM for a given port.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-46.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and
Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Purpose This task changes the line settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-46 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line
Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. Ports 1 to 4 are client
ports (OC-48/STM-16). Port 5 is the DWDM trunk
(OC-192/STM-64) that provides wavelength
services. Client ports will not appear of the
pluggable port module is not provisioned for it.
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5 (Trunk) (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a
logical name.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on
page 8-3.6-102
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states, refer to the
“Administrative and Service States” appendix in
the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService
(ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of
the port. Service states appear in the format:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary
State. For more information about service states,
refer to the “Administrative and Service States”
appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Reference Manual.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
SF BER Sets the signal fail bit error rate. • 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM
transmitter supports ALS according to
ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled or can
be set for one of three mode options.
• Disable (default): ALS is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down when traffic outages
(LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the conditions that
caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must be manually restarted
when conditions that caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the
laser for testing.
AINS Soak Sets the automatic in-service soak period.
Double-click the time and use the up and down
arrows to change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
Table 6-46 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-103
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G224 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Section Trace Settings
Type Sets the optical transport type. • SONET
• SDH
SyncMsgIn Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte),
which allow the node to choose the best timing
source. (This parameter does not appear for the
MXP_2.5G_10E trunk port.)
Checked or unchecked
ProvidesSync Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If checked,
the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
(This parameter does not appear for the
MXP_2.5G_10E trunk port.)
Checked or unchecked
Reach Displays the optical reach distance of the client
port.
Options: ANSI/ETSI
• Autoprovision/Autoprovision (default)
• SR
• SR 1/I-1—Short reach up to 2-km distance
• IR 1/S1—Intermediate reach, up to 15-km
distance
• IR 2/S2—Intermediate reach up to 40-km distance
• LR 1/L1—long reach, up to 40-km distance
• LR 2/L2—long reach, up to 80-km distance
• LR 3/L3—long reach, up to 80-km distance
Wavelength Displays the wavelength of the client port. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths: 850 nm through 1560.61 nm
100-GHz ITU spacing CWDM spacing
Purpose This task changes the section trace settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-46 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-104
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note The Section Trace tab appears only if you have created a PPM for the card.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-47.
Table 6-47 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Section Trace Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port Sets the port number. • 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5 (Trunk; MXP_2.5G_10G only)
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm
arises because of a J0 overhead string
mismatch, no alarm indication signal is
sent to downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. Select either
radio button.
• 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets
a new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets
a new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size6-105
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G225 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Settings
Note This task does not apply to the MXP_2.5G_10G card.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you want to change the
trunk settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Trunk tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-48.
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to
keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 minutes.
Checked/unchecked (default)
Purpose This task provisions the trunk settings for the MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C
muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-47 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Section Trace Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-106
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Table 6-48 MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Trunk Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. Port 5 is
the DWDM trunk (OC-192/STM-64) that provides
wavelength services.
5 (Trunk)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a
logical name.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task
on page 8-3.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network conditions
prevent the change. For more information about
administrative states, refer to the “Administrative
and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or
Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled
(ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI)
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of the
port. Service states appear in the format: Primary
State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For
more information about service states, refer to the
“Administrative and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM
transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644
(06/99). ALS can be disabled or can be set for one of
three mode options.
• Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down when traffic outages
(LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the conditions that
caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser
automatically shuts down when traffic outages
(LOS) occur. However, the laser must be
manually restarted when conditions that caused
the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the
laser for testing.
AINS Soak (OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the
automatic in-service soak period.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments 6-107
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G369 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-49.
Purpose This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-49 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 5 (Trunk)
Band (Display only) Indicates the wavelength
band available from the card that is
installed. If the card is preprovisioned,
the field can be provisioned to the band of
the card that will be installed.
• C—The C-band wavelengths are
available in the Wavelength field.
• L—The L-band wavelengths are
available in the Wavelength field.6-108
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G226 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder SONET/SDH Line Thresholds Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-50.
Note In Table 6-50, some parameter tabs or selections do not always apply to all 4x2.5G muxponder
cards. If the tabs or selections do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Even/Odd Sets the wavelengths available for
provisioning for MXP_2.5G_10E_C and
MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards. (This field
does not apply to MXP_2.5G_10G or
MXP_2.5G_10E cards.)
• Even—Displays even C-band or
L-band wavelengths in the
Wavelength field.
• Odd—Displays odd C-band or
L-band wavelengths in the
Wavelength field.
Wavelength The wavelength provisioned for the trunk. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths in 100-GHz
ITU-T C-band or L-band spacing,
depending on the card that is
installed. For MXP_2.5G_10G and
MXP_2.5G_10E cards, the
wavelengths carried by the card are
identified with two asterisks. If the
card is not installed, all wavelengths
appear with a dark grey background.
Purpose This task changes the SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) line threshold
settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-49 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Wavelength Trunk Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-109
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-50 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line
Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH
Port (Display only) Port
number
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5 (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5 (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
EB Path Errored Block
indicates that one or
more bits are in error
within a block
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh. 6-110
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
SEFS (Near End Section or
Regeneration Section
only) Severely
errored framing
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
BBE Background block
errors
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
FC (Line or Multiplex
Section only) Failure
count
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
UAS (Line or Multiplex
Section only)
Unavailable seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 6-50 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line
Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH6-111
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G303 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA
Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Select TCA (if not already selected), a 15 Min or 1 Day PM interval radio button and then click Refresh.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 6-51, verify the trunk port (Port 5) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power
Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the
threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Purpose This task changes the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C trunk
port alarm and TCA thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-51 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
Card
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
MXP_2.5G_10G –8 dBm –18 dBm 7 dBm –1 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10E –9 dBm –18 dBm 9 dBm 0 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10E_C –9 dBm –18 dBm 9 dBm 0 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10E_L –9 dBm –18 dBm 9 dBm 0 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10EX_
C
–9 dBm –18 dBm 9 dBm 0 dBm6-112
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 7 Referring to Table 6-52, verify the trunk port (Port 5) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power
Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the
threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G304 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA
Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Table 6-52 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds
Card
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
MXP_2.5G_10G –8 dBm –20 dBm 4 dBm 2 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10E –8 dBm –20 dBm 7 dBm 3 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10E_C –8 dBm –20 dBm 7 dBm 3 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10E_L –8 dBm –20 dBm 7 dBm 3 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10EX_
C
–8 dBm –20 dBm 7 dBm 3 dBm
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-113
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 3 Referring to Table 6-53, verify the client Port N (where N = 1 through 4) TCA thresholds for RX Power
High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end.
Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting
it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in
the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 4 Repeat Step 3 to provision each additional client port.
Step 5 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 6 Referring to Table 6-54, verify the client Port N (where N = 1 through 4) Alarm thresholds for RX Power
High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is
provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to
change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Table 6-53 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
OC-48 ONS-SE-2G-S1 –3 –18 3 –16
15454-SFP-OC48-IR 0 –18 6 –11
STM-16 ONS-SE-2G-S1 –3 –18 3 –16
15454E-SFP-L.16.1 0 –18 6 –116-114
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Repeat Steps 6 and 7 to provision each additional client port.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G228 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line OTN Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the line OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines,
OTN G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 6-55 through 6-58.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently, 15 Min and 1 Day independently, and
SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-55 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Note In Table 6-55, some parameter tabs or values do not always apply to all MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards. If the tabs or values do not
apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Table 6-54 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L Card Client
Interfaces Alarm Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
OC-48 ONS-SE-2G-S1 0 –21 0 –13
15454-SFP-OC48-IR 3 –21 3 –8
STM-16 ONS-SE-2G-S1 0 –21 0 –13
15454E-SFP-L.16.1 3 –21 3 –8
Purpose This task changes the line OTN settings for MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-115
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-56 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 6-55 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line OTN Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port
number.
5 (Trunk)
G.709 OTN Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709.
• Enable
• Disable
FEC Sets the OTN line FEC mode. FEC
mode can be Disabled or Enabled.
With the MXP_2.5G_10E card,
Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) mode can be
enabled to provide greater range and
lower bit error rate. E-FEC applies
only to the MXP_2.5G_10E card.
• Enable—(MXP_2.5G_10G only)
FEC is on.
• Disable—FEC is off.
• Standard—(MXP_2.5G_10E only)
FEC is on.
• Enhanced—(MXP_2.5G_10E only)
Enhanced FEC is on.
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
SF BER (Display only) Sets the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
Asynch/Synch
Mapping
(MXP_2.5G_10E only) The
MXP_2.5G_10E can perform
standard ODU multiplexing
according to ITU-T G.709. The card
uses this to aggregate the four OC-48
client signals.
• ODU Multiplex6-116
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-56 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number 5 (Trunk)
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709
optical channel transport unit
order of k overhead frame used
for management and performance
monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the
ITU-T G.709 optical channel data
unit order of k overhead frame
unit used for path performance
monitoring.
SES Severely errored seconds. Two types of
thresholds can be asserted. Selecting the
SM (OTUk) radio button selects FEC,
overhead management, and PM using
OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button
selects path PM using ODUk.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh. 6-117
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-57 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab.
Table 6-58 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 6-56 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
Table 6-57 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 5 (Trunk)
Bit Errors
Corrected
Displays the number of bit errors
corrected during the interval selected.
The interval can be set for 15 minutes or
one day.
Numeric
Uncorrectable
Words
Displays the number of uncorrectable
words during the interval selected. The
interval can be set for 15 minutes or one
day.
Numeric 6-118
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 6-58 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trail Trace Identifier Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port Sets the port number. The trail trace
identifier is applicable only to the trunk
interface, which handles ITU-T G.709
frames.
5 (Trunk)
Level Sets the level. • Section
• Path
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable FDI on
TTIM
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section
overhead alarm arises because of a J0
overhead string mismatch, no Forward
Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to
the downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
• Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not
disabled)
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets
a new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size;
trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets
a new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec box to keep
this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 minutes.
Checked/unchecked (default)6-119
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
NTP-G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings
and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to change the
muxponder card settings. If you are already logged in, proceed to Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 14-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G236 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings, page 6-120
• DLP-G237 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings, page 6-122
• DLP-G238 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) Settings,
page 6-124
• DLP-G239 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings, page 6-126
• DLP-G240 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds, page 6-129
• DLP-G321 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Line Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON
Payloads, page 6-131
• DLP-G307 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 6-133
• DLP-G308 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 6-134
• DLP-G370 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings, page 6-128
Note To use the Alarm Profiles tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see
Chapter 10, “Manage Alarms.”
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for the
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 4-71
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 6-11 (if necessary)
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-120
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G236 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Client tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM
provisioning.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in
the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Client tab as described in Table 6-59.
Purpose This task changes the client line settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-59 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. • 1
• 2
Port Name The user can assign a logical name for
each of the ports shown by filling in this
field.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special
characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 8-3.
Note You can provision a string (port name) for each fiber
channel/FICON interface on the MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G cards, which allows the MDS Fabric
Manager to create a link association between that SAN port
and a SAN port on a Cisco MDS 9000 switch.
Admin
State
Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states,
refer to the “Administrative and Service
States” appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM Reference Manual.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)6-121
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Service
State
Identifies the autonomously generated
state that gives the overall condition of the
port. Service states appear in the format:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier,
Secondary State. For more information
about service states, refer to the
“Administrative and Service States”
appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Reference Manual.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled
(ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function. • Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically
shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: (MXP_MR_2.5G only) ALS is on; the laser
automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the
outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down
when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be
manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
Table 6-59 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-122
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G237 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings
Reach Displays the optical reach distance of the
client port.
The reach distances that appear in the drop-down list depend on the
card:
• Autoprovision—The system to automatically provision the
reach from the pluggable port module (PPM) reach value on
the hardware.
• SX—Short laser wavelength on multimode fiber optic cable
for a maximum length of 550 meters. The operating
wavelength range is 770-860 nm.
• LX—Long wavelength for a long haul fiber optic cable for a
maximum length of 10 km. The operating wavelength range is
1270-1355 nm.
• CX—Two pairs of 150-ohm shielded twisted pair cable for a
maximum length of 25 meters.
• T—Four pairs of Category 5 Unshielded Twisted Pair cable
for a maximum length of 100 meters.
• DX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength
range is 1430-1580 nm.
• HX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength
range is 1280-1335 nm.
• ZX—Extended wavelength single-mode optical fiber for up to
100 km. The operating wavelength range is 1500-1580 nm.
• VX—Single mode up to 100 km. The operating wavelength
range is 1500-1580 nm.
Wavelength Displays the wavelength of the client port. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths:850 nm through 1560.61 nm; 100-GHz
ITU spacing; CWDM spacing
Purpose This task changes the distance extension settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-59 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-123
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note Distance extension settings can be changed only if the facilities are out of service (OOS,DSBLD).
Note The distance extension parameters only apply to client ports (Ports 1 to 8) and not to the trunk ports
(Port 9 for MXP_MR_2.5G card or Ports 9 and 10 for the MXPP_MR_2.5G card).
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the distance extension settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Client tabs. A client port must be provisioned for the tab to be present.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in
the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
Step 3 Locate the Client port table row and verify that the Service State column value is OOS-MA,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI). If yes, continue with Step 4. If not, complete the following
substeps:
a. Click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,Maintenance
(ETSI).
b. Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Line > Distance Extension tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according
to PPM provisioning.
Step 5 Modify any of the settings for the Distance Extension tab as described in Table 6-60.
Table 6-60 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Distance Extension Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number • 1
• 2
Enable
Distance
Extension
Allows end-to-end distances of up to
1600 km for FC1G and up to 800 km for
FC2G. If Distance Extension is enabled,
set the connected Fibre Channel switches
to Interop or Open Fabric mode,
depending on the Fibre Channel switch.
By default, the MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G card will interoperate
with the Cisco Multilayer Director
Switch (MDS) storage products.
Checked or unchecked
Auto Detect
Credits
Allows automatic detection of buffer
credits for Fibre Channel flow control.
Checked or unchecked6-124
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G238 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16)
Settings
Note SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) settings apply only to the trunk ports (Port 9 for the MXP_MR_2.5G
card and Ports 9 and 10 for the MXPP_MR_2.5G card.)
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the OC-48/STM-64 settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI). Tabs and parameter selections vary
according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the SONET or SDH tab as described in Table 6-61.
Credits
Available
(Display only) Displays the number of
buffer credits available.
Numeric (range depends on the client
equipment attached to the card)
Autoadjust
GFP Buffer
Threshold
Allows the threshold of the generic
framing procedure (GFP) buffer between
two MXP_MR_2.5G or two
MXPP_MR_2.5G cards to be
automatically adjusted.
Checked or unchecked
GFP Buffers
Available
Displays the number of GFP buffers
available between two MXP_MR_2.5G
or two MXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
Numeric
Purpose This task changes the SONET (OC-48) or SDH (STM-16) settings for
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-60 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Distance Extension Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-125
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-61 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line SONET or SDH Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. 9 (trunk for MXP_MR_2.5G) or 9 and 10 (trunks for
MXPP_MR_2.5G)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a
name.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on
page 8-3.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states, refer to
the “Administrative and Service States” appendix
in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference
Manual.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService
(ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of
the port. Service states appear in the format:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier,
Secondary State. For more information about
service states, refer to the “Administrative and
Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
SF BER1
Sets the signal fail bit error rate. • 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
SD BER1
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM
transmitter supports ALS according to
ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled or
can be set for one of three mode options.
• Disable (default): ALS is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS)
occur.
• Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the conditions that
caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must be manually restarted when
conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser
for testing.6-126
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G239 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to
PPM provisioning.
AINS Soak Sets the automatic in-service soak period.
Double-click the time and use the up and down
arrows to change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
Type The optical transport type. • SONET (ANSI)
• SDH (ETSI)
SyncMsgIn Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables
synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which
allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Checked or unchecked
Send
DoNotUse
Sets the Send DoNotUse card state. When
checked, sends a DUS message on the S1 byte.
Checked or unchecked
ProvidesSync Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If
checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing
reference.
Checked or unchecked
1. SF BER and SD BER thresholds apply only to trunk ports (Port 9 for MXP_MR_2.5G and Ports 9 and 10 for MXPP_MR_2.5G).
Purpose This task changes the section trace settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-61 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line SONET or SDH Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-127
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in
the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings in the Section Trace tab as described in Table 6-62.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 6-62 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Section Trace Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. • 9 (trunk port for MXP_MR_2.5G)
• 9 and 10 (trunk ports for
MXPP_MR_2.5G)
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the received trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0
overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to
downstream nodes if this box is checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its
title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to
change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII);
click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to
Hex).
String of trace string size
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its
title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to
change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII);
click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to
Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current received string. You can
click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the
Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds. Checked/unchecked (default)6-128
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G370 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 6-63.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the MXP_MR_2.5G
and MXPP_MR_2.5G.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-63 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 9 (Trunk)
10 (Trunk) (MXPP_MR_2.5G only)
Band (Display only) Indicates the wavelength
band that can be provisioned.
C—Only the C band is available
Even/Odd Sets the wavelengths available for
provisioning. This field does not apply to
MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G
cards
—
Wavelength The wavelength provisioned for the trunk. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths in 100-GHz
ITU-T, C-band spacing. If the card is
installed, the wavelengths it carries
are identified with two asterisks.
Other wavelengths have a dark grey
background. If the card is not
installed, all wavelengths appear
with a dark grey background.6-129
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G240 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI)
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as shown in Table 6-64.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently, 15 Min and 1 Day independently, and
Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note In Table 6-64, some parameters or options do not apply to all MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G cards. If the parameters or options do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Purpose This task changes the SONET or SDH line threshold settings for
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-64 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Threshold Settings
Field Description ONS 15454 Options ONS 15454 SDH Options
Port (Display only)
Port number
• 9 (MXP_MR_2.5G)
• 9 and 10 (MXPP_MR_2.5G)
• 9 (MXP_MR_2.5G)
• 9 and 10 (MXPP_MR_2.5G)
EB Path Errored
Block indicates
that one or
more bits are in
error within a
block
— Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
CV Coding
violations
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
—6-130
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
ES Errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
SES Severely
errored seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
BBE Background
block errors
— Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
SEFS (Section or
Regeneration
Section only)
Severely
errored framing
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Section only
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
—
FC (Line or
Multiplex
Section only)
Failure count
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Section only
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
—
UAS (Line or
Multiplex
Section only)
Unavailable
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Section only
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Regeneration Section (only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
Table 6-64 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Threshold Settings (continued)
Field Description ONS 15454 Options ONS 15454 SDH Options6-131
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G321 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Line Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or
1G FC/FICON Payloads
Step 1 Display the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line threshold
settings in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See Table 6-65 for a list of available
Ethernet variables.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for MXP_MR_10G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards carrying the 1G Ethernet or
1G FC/FICON payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-65 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR 2.5G Card 1G Ethernet or 1G, 2G FC/FICON Variables
Variable Description
ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
rxTotalPkts Total number of receive packets.
ifInDiscards Number of inbound packets that were chosen to be discarded
even though no errors had been detected to prevent their
being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
ifInErrors Total number of receive errors.
ifOutOctets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface,
including framing characters.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
ifOutDiscards Number of outbound packets that were chosen to be
discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent
their being transmitted.6-132
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold,
the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type in an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the
rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every
15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the
rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple
times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated Total number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes.
This value is a part of high-level data link control (HDLC)
and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong Number of received frames that exceed the maximum
transmission unit (MTU). This value is part of HDLC and
GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC Number of receive data frames with payload cyclic
redundancy check (CRC) errors when HDLC framing is
used.
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC errors
when HDLC framing is used.
8b10bInvalidOrderedSets Number of 8b10b disparity violations on the Fibre Channel
line side.
8b10bStatsEncodingDispErrors Number of 8b10b disparity violations on the Fibre Channel
line side.
Table 6-65 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR 2.5G Card 1G Ethernet or 1G, 2G FC/FICON Variables
(continued)6-133
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G307 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA
Thresholds
Note Throughout this task, trunk port refers to Port 9 (MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G) and Port 10
(MXPP_MR_2.5G only).
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 3 Verify the trunk port TCA thresholds for RX Power High is –9 dBm and for RX Power Low is –23 dBm.
Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting
it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Step 4 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 5 Verify the trunk port Alarm thresholds for RX Power High is –7 dBm and for RX Power Low is –26 dBm.
Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting
it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task changes the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G trunk port
alarm and TCA thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-134
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G308 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA
Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to Table 6-66, verify the client port (Ports 1 through 8) TCA thresholds for RX Power High,
RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end.
Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting
it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in
the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-135
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to provision each additional client port.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 6-67, verify the client port (Ports 1 through 8) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High,
RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned.
Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting
it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Table 6-66 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port
Module (XFP)
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA RX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
FC1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
FC2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–15 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
FICON1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
FICON2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
ONE_GE 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
ESCON ONS-SE-200-MM –21 –14 –32 –116-136
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 to provision each additional client port. When you have finished provisioning client
ports, continue with Step 10.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 6-67 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port
Module (XFP)
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
FC1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
FC2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–18 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
FICON1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
FICON2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
ONE_GE 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
ESCON ONS-SE-200-MM –24 –11 –35 –86-137
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
NTP-G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings
and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to change the
muxponder card settings. If you are already logged in, proceed to Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 14-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G333 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings, page 6-138
• DLP-G334 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings, page 6-140
• DLP-G340 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings, page 6-142
• DLP-G335 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings,
page 6-143
• DLP-G336 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings, page 6-145
• DLP-G341 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds, page 6-146
• DLP-G337 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 1G FC/FICON,
or ISC/ISC3 Payloads, page 6-148
• DLP-G338 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 6-151
• DLP-G339 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 6-152
• DLP-G366 Change the 10G Data Muxponder OTN Settings, page 6-156
Note To use the Alarm Profiles tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see
Chapter 10, “Manage Alarms.”
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for the
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 4-71
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 6-11 (if necessary)
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-138
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G333 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card where you want to
change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Client tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM
provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Client tab as described in Table 6-68.
Purpose This task changes the line settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C,
MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-68 MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Line Client Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. 1 through 8
Port Name The user can assign a logical name for each
of the ports shown by filling in this field.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/ special
characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 8-3.
Note You can provision a string (port name) for each fiber
channel/FICON interface on the MXP_MR_10DME_C,
MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards,
which allows the MDS Fabric Manager to create a link
association between that SAN port and a SAN port on a
Cisco MDS 9000 switch.
Admin
State
Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states,
refer to the Appendix B, “Administrative
and Service States” in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference
Manual.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
Service
State
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall
condition of the port. Service states appear
in the format: Primary State-Primary State
Qualifier, Secondary State. For more
information about service states, refer to
Appendix B, “Administrative and Service
States” in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Reference Manual.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled
(ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)6-139
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. • Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically
shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down
when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be
manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
Reach Sets the optical reach distance of the client
port.
The reach distances that appear in the drop-down list depend on the
card:
• Autoprovision—The system to automatically provision the
reach from the pluggable port module (PPM) reach value on
the hardware.
• SX—Short laser wavelength on multimode fiber optic cable
for a maximum length of 550 meters. The operating
wavelength range is 770-860 nm.)
• LX—Long wavelength for a long haul fiber optic cable for a
maximum length of 10 km. The operating wavelength range is
1270-1355 nm.)
• CX—Two pairs of 150-ohm shielded twisted pair cable for a
maximum length of 25 meters.)
• T—Four pairs of Category 5 Unshielded Twisted Pair cable
for a maximum length of 100 meters.)
• DX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength
range is 1430-1580 nm.)
• HX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength
range is 1280-1335 nm.)
• ZX—Extended wavelength single-mode optical fiber for up to
100 km. The operating wavelength range is 1500-1580 nm.)
• VX—Single mode up to 100 km. The operating wavelength
range is 1500-1580 nm.)
Wavelength Displays the wavelength of the client port. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths:
850 nm through 1560.61 nm
100-GHz ITU spacing
CWDM spacing
Squelch Shuts down the far-end laser in response to
certain defects. (Squelch does not apply to
ISC COMPACT payloads.)
• Squelch
• Disable
Table 6-68 MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Line Client Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-140
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G334 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings
Note The distance extension parameters only apply to client ports (Ports 1 to 8) and not to the trunk port
(Port 9).
Note The client port must be in the OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) state in order to change
the distance extension settings. If a Y-cable is provisioned on the client port, both the working and
protect client ports must be in OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) state before you change
the distance extension settings.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card where you want to
change the distance extension settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Distance Extension tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 6-69.
Purpose This task changes the distance extension settings for the
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder card ports provisioned for Fibre
Channel or FICON payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-69 MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Line Distance
Extension Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. Up to eight
ports might appear based on the number
of pluggable port modules that are
provisioned.
—6-141
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Enable
Distance
Extension
Allows end-to-end distances of up to
1600 km for FC1G and up to 800 km for
FC2G. If Distance Extension is enabled,
set the connected Fibre Channel switches
to Interop or Open Fabric mode,
depending on the Fibre Channel switch.
By default, the MXP_MR_10DME_C
and MXP_MR_10DME_L card will
interoperate with the Cisco MDS storage
products.
Checked or unchecked
Fast Switch If unchecked, the end-to-end fiber
channel link is reinitialized every time a
Y-cable protection switch occurs. If
checked, reinitialization of the link is
avoided when a Y-cable protection switch
occurs, thus reducing the traffic hit
considerably.
This feature is supported for FC1G,
FC2G, FC4G, FICON1G, FICON2G, and
FICON4G trunk failures as well as
user-initiated Y-cable protection switch
such as, Manual, Force, or Lockout. It is
recommended that you do not enable the
Fast Switch option as the link may not
come up after a Y-cable protection switch
in certain cases.
Note This option can be used only if
you have unchecked Enable
Distance Extension option.
Checked or unchecked (default)
Table 6-69 MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Line Distance
Extension Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-142
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G340 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the trunk wavelength
settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Wavelength Trunk Settings tab as described in Table 6-70.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-70 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. Port 9 (Trunk)
Band Indicates the wavelength band that can be
provisioned. The field is display-only
when a physical MXP_MR_10DME_C or
MXP_MR_10DME_L is installed. If the
card is provisioned in CTC only, you can
provision the band for the card that will
be installed.
• C—The C-band wavelengths are
available in the Wavelength field.
• L—The L-band wavelengths are
available in the Wavelength field.
Even/Odd Sets the wavelengths available for
provisioning.
• Even—Displays even C-band or
L-band wavelengths in the
Wavelength field.
• Odd—Displays odd C-band or
L-band wavelengths in the
Wavelength field.
Wavelength The wavelength provisioned for the trunk. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU
spacing6-143
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G335 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64)
Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the SONET
(OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI). Tabs and parameter selections vary
according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 6-71.
Purpose This task changes the OC-192 (ANSI)/STM-64 (ETSI) settings for the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-71 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Line SONET or SDH Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. 9 (Trunk)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a
name.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on
page 8-3.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states, refer to
the “Administrative and Service States” appendix
in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference
Manual.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService
(ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of
the port. Service states appear in the format:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier,
Secondary State. For more information about
service states, refer to the “Administrative and
Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
SF BER1
Sets the signal fail bit error rate. • 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-56-144
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
SD BER1
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Type The optical transport type. • SONET (ANSI)
• SDH (ETSI)
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM
transmitter supports ALS according to
ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled or
can be set for one of three mode options.
• Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS)
occur.
• Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the conditions that
caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must be manually restarted when
conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser
for testing.
AINS Soak Sets the automatic in-service soak period.
Double-click the time and use the up and down
arrows to change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
ProvidesSync Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If
checked, the card is provisioned as a NE timing
reference.
Checked or unchecked
SyncMsgIn Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables
synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which
allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Checked or unchecked
Send
DoNotUse
Sets the Send DoNotUse card state. When
checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on
the S1 byte.
Checked or unchecked
1. SF BER and SD BER thresholds apply only to trunk ports (Port 9 for MXP_MR_2.5G and Ports 9 and 10 for MXPP_MR_2.5G).
Table 6-71 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Line SONET or SDH Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-145
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G336 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the section trace
settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to
PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings in the Section Trace tab as described in Table 6-72.
Purpose This task changes the section trace settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C
and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-72 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Line Section Trace Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. • 9 (trunk only)
Received
Trace Mode
Sets the received trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
If a TIM on section overhead alarm arises because of a J0
overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to
downstream nodes if this box is checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title
changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change
the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title
changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change
the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click
Refresh to manually refresh this display, or select the
Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds. Checked/unchecked (default)6-146
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G341 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the line threshold
settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI)
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as shown in Table 6-73.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and
Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note In Table 6-73, some parameters and options do not apply to all MXP_MR_10DME cards. If the
parameter or options do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Purpose This task changes the SONET or SDH line threshold settings for the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-73 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_LCard Line Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH
Port (Display only) Port
number
• 9 (Trunk) • 9 (Trunk)
EB Path Errored Block
indicates that one or
more bits are in error
within a block
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh. 6-147
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
SEFS (Near End Section or
Regeneration Section
only) Severely
errored framing
seconds
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
BBE Background block
errors
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 6-73 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_LCard Line Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH6-148
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G337 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet,
1GFC/FICON, or ISC/ISC3 Payloads
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), display the MXP_MR_10DME_C or
MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the line threshold settings in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port, either the payload port, for example “1-1
(ONE_GE)”, or the equivalent ITU-T G.7041 GFP (Generic Frame Procedure) port.
FC (Line or Multiplex
Section only) Failure
count
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
UAS (Line or Multiplex
Section only)
Unavailable seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for MXP_MR_10DME_C and
MXP_MR_10DME_L cards carrying Ethernet, FC/FICON, or ISC/ISC3
payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-73 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_LCard Line Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH6-149
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet, FC, FICON, or ISC variable. See Table 6-74 for
a list of available Ethernet variables, Table 6-75 for a list of FC and FICON variables, Table 6-76 for a
list of ISC and ISC3 variables, and Table 6-77 for a list of GFP variables.
Table 6-74 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Ethernet Variables
Variable Description
ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
rxTotalPkts Total number of receive packets.
ifInErrors Total number of receive errors.
ifOutOctets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface,
including framing characters.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated Total number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes.
This value is a part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong Number of received frames that exceed the MTU. This
value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC Number of receive data frames with payload CRC errors
when HDLC framing is used.
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC
errors when HDLC framing is used.
8b10bInvalidOrderedSetsDispErrorsSu
m
Number of code violations/running disparity errors in the
8b/10b encoded characters received.
Table 6-75 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L FC/FICON Variables
Variable Description
ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
rxTotalPkts Total number of receive packets.
ifInErrors Total number of receive errors.
ifOutOctets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface,
including framing characters.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
ifOutOversizePkts Total number of oversized packets output from the
interface.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated Total number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes.
This value is a part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong Number of received frames that exceed the MTU. This
value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC Number of receive data frames with payload CRC errors
when HDLC framing is used.6-150
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC
errors when HDLC framing is used.
fcStatsZeroTxCredits This is a count that increments when the FC/FICON Tx
credits go from a non-zero value to zero.
fcStatsRxRecvrReady Number of received RDY (Receive Ready) order set.
fcStatsTxRecvrReady Number of transmitted RDY (Receive Ready) order set.
8b10bInvalidOrderedSetsDispErrorsSu
m
Number of Code Violations/Running Disparity errors in
the 8b/10b encoded characters received.
Table 6-76 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L ISC and ISC3Variables
Variable Description
ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
rxTotalPkts Total number of receive packets.
ifOutOctets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface,
including framing characters.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
8b10bInvalidOrderedSetsDispErrorsSu
m
Number of Code Violations/Running Disparity errors in
the 8b/10b encoded characters received.
Table 6-77 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L GFP RMON Variables
Variable Description
gfpStatsRxSBitErrors Received generic framing protocol (GFP) frames with
single bit errors in the core header (these errors are
correctable).
gfpStatsRxTypeInvalid Received GFP frames with invalid type (these are
discarded). For example, receiving GFP frames that
contain Ethernet data when we expect Fibre Channel data.
gfpStatsRxSblkCRCErrors Total number of superblock CRC errors with the receive
transparent GFP frame. A transparent GFP frame has
multiple superblocks which each contain Fibre Channel
data.
gfpStatsCSFRaised Number of Rx client management frames with Client
Signal Fail indication.
gfpStatsLFDRaised The number of Core HEC CRC Multiple Bit Errors.
Note This count is only for cHEC multiple bit error
when in frame. It is a count of when the state
machine goes out of frame.
Table 6-75 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L FC/FICON Variables (continued)
Variable Description6-151
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold,
the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type in an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the
rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every
15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the
rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple
times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Note To view all RMON thresholds, click Show All RMON thresholds.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G338 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA
Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and
TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Purpose This task changes the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L
trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-152
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 3 If TCA is not selected, click TCA and then click Refresh. If it is selected, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Verify the trunk port (Port 9) TCA thresholds are set at the values shown as follows. Provision new
thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a
new value, and press Enter.
• RX Power High: –9 dBm
• RX Power Low: –18 dBm
• TX Power High: 9 dBm
• TX Power Low: 0 dBm
Step 5 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 6 Verify the trunk port (Port 9) Alarm thresholds are set at the values shown as follows. Provision new
thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a
new value, and press Enter.
• RX Power High: –8 dBm
• RX Power Low: –20 dBm
• TX Power High: 7 dBm
• TX Power Low: 3 dBm
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G339 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA
Thresholds
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed Required6-153
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the client port alarm
and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to Table 6-78, verify the client ports (Ports 1 through 8) TCA thresholds for RX Power High,
RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end.
Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting
it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in
the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-78 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds
PPM Port
Rate
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
FC1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
0 –17 3 –16
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–3 –20 3 –16
FC2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
0 –15 3 –16
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–3 –20 3 –166-154
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to provision each additional client port.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 6-79, verify the client port (Ports 1 through 8) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High,
RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned.
Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting
it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
FICON1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
0 –17 3 –16
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–3 –20 3 –16
FICON2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
0 –17 3 –16
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–3 –20 3 –16
ISC3
PEER 1G
ISC3
PEER 2G
ONS-SE-G2F-SX 0 –17 3 –16
ONS-SE-G2F-LX 0 –20 3 –16
FC4G ONS-SE-4G-MM 0 –12 4 –15
ONS-SE-4G-SM –1 –15 4 –15
FICON4G ONS-SE-4G-MM 0 –12 4 –15
ONS-SE-4G-SM –1 –15 4 –15
Table 6-79 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds
PPM Port
Rate
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
FC1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
Table 6-78 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds
PPM Port
Rate
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low6-155
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 to provision each additional client port.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
FC2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–18 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
FICON1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
FICON2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
ISC3
PEER 1G
ISC3
PEER 2G
ONS-SE-G2F-SX –20 3 –13 –1
ONS-SE-G2F-LX –23 0 –13 0
FC4G ONS-SE-4G-MM –15 3 –11 –1
ONS-SE-4G-SM –18 2 –11 0
FICON4G ONS-SE-4G-MM –15 3 –11 –1
ONS-SE-4G-SM –18 2 –11 0
Table 6-79 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds (continued)
PPM Port
Rate
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High6-156
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G366 Change the 10G Data Muxponder OTN Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines, G.709
Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 6-80 through 6-83.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End; 15 Min and 1 Day; and SM and PM independently. To
do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-80 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Table 6-81 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
Purpose This task changes the OTN settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and
MXP_MR_10DME_L cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-80 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card OTN Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 9 (Trunk)
G.709 OTN Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709.
• Enable
• Disable
FEC Sets the OTN lines to forward error
correction (FEC).
• Standard
• Enhanced
SF BER (Display only) Sets the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Asynch/Synch
Mapping
Sets how the ODUk (client payload) is
mapped to the optical channel (OTUk).
• Asynch mapping
• Synch mapping6-157
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-82 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Threshold tab.
Table 6-83 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 6-81 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port1
1. Latency for a 1G-FC payload without ITU-T G.709 is 4 microseconds, and with ITU-T G.709 is 40 microseconds. Latency
for a 2G-FC payload without ITU-T G.709 is 2 microseconds, and with ITU-T G.709 is 20 microseconds. Consider these
values when planning a FC network that is sensitive to latency.
(Display only) Port number. 9 (Trunk)
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
Table 6-82 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. 2
Bit Errors
Corrected
Sets the value for bit errors corrected. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Uncorrectable
Words
Sets the value for uncorrectable words. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Table 6-83 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Trail Trace Identifier
Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. 2
Level Sets the level. • Section
• Path
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual6-158
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets
a new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Disable FDI on
TTIM
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section
overhead alarm arises because of a J0
overhead string mismatch, no Forward
Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to
the downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
• Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not
disabled)
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets
a new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to
keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Table 6-83 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Trail Trace Identifier
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-159
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
NTP-G293 Modify the 40G Muxponder Card Line Settings and
PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to change the
muxponder card settings. If you are already logged in, proceed to Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 14-2 to save the existing settings
before modifying.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G662 Change the 40G Multirate Muxponder Card Settings, page 6-160
• DLP-G666 Change the 40G Muxponder Line Settings, page 6-161
• DLP-G667 Change the 40G Muxponder Line SONET (OC-192) or SDH (STM-64), or Ethernet Line
Settings, page 6-163
• DLP-G668 Change the 40G Muxponder Section Trace Settings, page 6-167
• DLP-G669 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds, page 6-168
• DLP-G670 Change the 40G Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 8G FC, or 10G FC
Payloads, page 6-170
• DLP-G671 Provision the 40G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 6-174
• DLP-G672 Provision the 40G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 6-176
• DLP-G673 Change the 40G Muxponder OTN Settings, page 6-179
Note To use the Alarm Profiles tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see
Chapter 10, “Manage Alarms.”
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure changes the line and parameter threshold settings for the
40G-MXP-C muxponder card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 4-71
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 6-11 (Optional)
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14 (Optional)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-160
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G662 Change the 40G Multirate Muxponder Card Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card
where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Modify either of the settings described in Table 6-84.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task changes the card settings for the 40G-MXP-C card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-84 40G-MXP-C Card Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 Options ONS 15454 SDH Options
Card Mode Sets the card mode. • Muxponder
• Unidirectional Regen
Set the mode to
Unidirectional Regen
under the following
conditions:
– Trunk port is in
OOS,DSBLD state.
– Pluggable port
modules of the card
must not be
configured for
payload.
– Regeneration peer
slot must be set to
None.
• Muxponder
• Unidirectional Regen
Set the mode to
Unidirectional Regen
under the following
conditions:
– Trunk port is in
locked,disabled
state.
– Pluggable port
modules of the card
must not be
configured for
payload.
– Regeneration peer
slot must be set to
None.
Trunk
Wavelengths
(Display only) Shows supported wavelengths
of the trunk port after the card is installed.
40G-MXP-C show the C-band wavelengths
supported by the card that is installed.
— —6-161
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G666 Change the 40G Muxponder Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card
where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Ports tabs. Tabs and parameters vary according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 6-85.
Purpose This task changes the line settings for the 40G-MXP-C muxponder card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-85 40G-MXP-C Card Line Client Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. • 1 through 4 (client)
• 5 (trunk)
Port Name A logical name for each of the port. This
field is blank by default.
Type up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters.
For details, see the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task
on page 8-3.
Note You can assign a port name for each fiber
channel/FICON interface on the 40G-MXP-C card,
enabling the MDS Fabric Manager to associate the
SAN port and a SAN port on the
Cisco MDS 9000 switch.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information, see Appendix B,
“Administrative and Service States” in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference
Manual.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
Service State (Display only) Shows the general condition
of the port. Service states appear in the
format: Primary State-Primary State
Qualifier, Secondary State. For more
information about service states, see
Appendix B, “Administrative and Service
States” in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Reference Manual.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled
(ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance
(ETSI)6-162
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
ALS Mode (client ports only) Activates the ALS mode. • Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down during LOS.
• Auto Restart: (OC-192/STM-64 only) ALS is on; the laser
automatically shuts down during LOS. It automatically
restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts
down during LOS. However, the laser must be manually
restarted when conditions that caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for
testing.
AINS Soak Sets the automatic in-service soak period.
Double-click the time and use the up and
down arrows to change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after
which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
Reach Sets the optical reach distance of the client
port.
• Autoprovision—The system automatically provisions the
reach from the pluggable port module (PPM) reach value
on the hardware.
• EW
• LW
• SW
• LRM
• ER
• LR
• SR
• ZR
• IR 2
• LR 2
• DWDM
• CWDM40km
Wavelength Provisions the port wavelength. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths:
Further wavelengths in the 100-GHz ITU-T C-band
spacing. The card wavelengths are marked by asterisks. If
the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a
dark grey background.
Squelch Shuts down the far-end laser in response to
certain defects.
• Squelch (Squelch does not apply to ISC COMPACT
payloads.)
• Disable
Table 6-85 40G-MXP-C Card Line Client Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-163
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G667 Change the 40G Muxponder Line SONET (OC-192) or SDH (STM-64), or
Ethernet Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card
where you want to change the SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI). Tabs and parameters vary according
to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 To modify the line SONET or SDH settings, see Table 6-86. To modify the ethernet line settings see
Table 6-87.
Overclock (trunk port only) Enables or disables
overclock mode on the trunk port.
• OFF (default)
• ON
Rx Wavelength (trunk port only) Provisions the trunk port
wavelength.
• First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths:
Further wavelengths in the 100-GHz ITU-T C-band
spacing. The card wavelengths are marked by asterisks. If
the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a
dark grey background.
Purpose This task changes the line SONET OC-192 or SDH STM-64, or ethernet
line settings for the 40G-MXP-C muxponder card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-86 40G-MXP-C Card Line SONET or SDH Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. 1 through 4 (client)
Port Name A logical name assigned to a port. This field is
blank by default.
Type up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by
default.
For details, see the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port”
task on page 8-3.
Table 6-85 40G-MXP-C Card Line Client Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-164
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
SF BER Sets the signal fail bit error rate. • 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
ProvidesSync (Display only) Displays the ProvidesSync card
parameter state.
Checked or unchecked
SyncMsgIn Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables
synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which
allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Checked or unchecked
Send
DoNotUse
Sets the Send DoNotUse card state. When
checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on
the S1 byte.
Checked or unchecked
Type The optical transport type. • SONET (ANSI)
• SDH (ETSI)
Termination
Mode
(Display-only for Standard Regeneration and
Enhanced FEC card configurations) Sets the
mode of operation.
• Transparent
• Section (ANSI) or Regeneration Section (RS)
(ETSI)
• Line (ANSI) or Multiplex Section (MS) (ETSI)
Table 6-87 Ethernet Line Settings of the 40G-MXP-C Card
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port
number.
1 through 4 (client) 1 through 4 (client)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the
specified port a name.
User-defined. Name can be up to
32 alphanumeric/special
characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a
Name to a Port” task on page 8-3.
User-defined. Name can be up
to 32 alphanumeric/special
characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a
Name to a Port” task on
page 8-3.
Admin State Sets the port service state. For more
information about administrative
states, refer to the “Administrative
and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Reference Manual.
• IS
• IS,AINS
• OOS,DSBLD
• OOS,MT
• Unlocked
• Unlocked,automaticInService
• Locked,disabled
• Locked,maintenance
Table 6-86 40G-MXP-C Card Line SONET or SDH Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-165
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Service State (Display only) Identifies the
autonomously generated state that
gives the overall condition of the
port. Service states appear in the
format: Primary State-Primary
State Qualifier, Secondary State.
For more information about service
states, refer to the “Administrative
and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Reference Manual.
• IS-NR
• OOS-AU,AINS
• OOS-MA,DSBLD
• OOS-MA,MT
• Unlocked-enabled
• Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• Locked-enabled,disabled
• Locked-enabled,maintenance
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. The
DWDM transmitter supports ALS
according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99).
ALS can be disabled, or it can be set
for one of three mode options.
• Disabled (default): ALS is off;
the laser is not automatically
shut down when traffic
outages (LOS) occur.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the
laser automatically shuts down
when traffic outages (LOS)
occur. However, the laser must
be manually restarted when
conditions that caused the
outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test:
Manually restarts the laser for
testing.
• Disabled (default): ALS is
off; the laser is not
automatically shut down
when traffic outages (LOS)
occur.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on;
the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic
outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must be
manually restarted when
conditions that caused the
outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test:
Manually restarts the laser
for testing.
AINS Soak Sets the automatic in-service soak
period. Double-click the time and
use the up and down arrows to
change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal,
in hh.mm format, after which
the card becomes in service
(IS) automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute
increments
Note The AINS service state is
not supported on interlink
ports.
• Duration of valid input
signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card
becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute
increments
Note The AINS service state
is not supported on
interlink ports.
Table 6-87 Ethernet Line Settings of the 40G-MXP-C Card
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options6-166
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Reach Displays the optical reach distance
of the client port.
• Autoprovision—The system
automatically provisions the
reach.
• LR
• LR2
• SR
• SR1
• IR 1
• ER
• ZR
• DWDM
• CWDM40km
• IR2
• MM
• Autoprovision—The
system automatically
provisions the reach.
• LR
• I1
• I2
• S2
• ER
• L1
• L2
• DWDM
• MM
• ZR
• IR 1
• CWDM40km
MTU Displays the maximum size of the
Ethernet frames accepted by the
port.
• Jumbo (16384 bytes) • Jumbo (16384 bytes)
Mapping
Mode
Displays the mapping mechanism.
Choose GFP framing (the default)
or WIS framing. The framing type
needs to match the framing type at
the far end.
• GFP
• WIS
• GFP
• WIS
Enable Flow
Control (Only
when the
framing type
is WIS)
Enables/disables flow control
messaging with its peer port. When
enabled, the port can send and
receive PAUSE frames when buffer
congestion occurs. When disabled,
no PAUSE frames are transmitted
and the PAUSE frames received are
discarded.
• ON —Flow control is enabled.
• OFF(default)—Flow control is
disabled.
• ON —Flow control is
enabled.
• OFF(default)—Flow
control is disabled.
Table 6-87 Ethernet Line Settings of the 40G-MXP-C Card
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options6-167
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G668 Change the 40G Muxponder Section Trace Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card
where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to
PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-88.
Purpose This task changes the section trace settings for the 40G-MXP-C
muxponder card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-88 40G-MXP-C Card Line Section Trace Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number, applicable for only OC192/STM64
payloads.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
Received
Trace Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
Disables alarm indication signal. • Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays and sets the current transmit string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title
changes, based on the current display mode. In Transmit String
Type, click Hex Mode to change the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to
ASCII (button changes to Hex Mode). The supported range for 1
bit Hex TX trace is 20 to 7E. If TX trace is provisioned outside
this range, client transmits 00.
Transmit string size6-168
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G669 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card
where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI)
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings shown in Table 6-89.
Note In Table 6-89, some parameters and options do not apply to all 40-G-MXP-C cards. If the
parameter or options do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Expected Displays and sets the current expected string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title
changes, based on the current display mode. In Expected String
Type, click Hex Mode to change the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to
ASCII (button changes to Hex Mode).
Expected string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current received string. Click Refresh
to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every
5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
Received string size
Auto-refresh Automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds. • Checked
• Unchecked (default)
Purpose This task changes the SONET or SDH line threshold settings for the
40G-MXP-C muxponder card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-88 40G-MXP-C Card Line Section Trace Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-169
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-89 40G-MXP-C Card Line Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH
Port (Display only) Port
number.
Applicable for only
OC192/STM64
payloads.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
—
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.6-170
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G670 Change the 40G Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet,
8GFC, or 10G FC Payloads
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), display the 40G-MXP-C card where
you want to change the line threshold settings in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
FC (Line or Multiplex
Section only) Failure
count
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
—
UAS (Line or Multiplex
Section only)
Unavailable seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for 40G-MXP-C card carrying
Ethernet, 8G FC, or 10G FC payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-89 40G-MXP-C Card Line Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH6-171
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port, either the payload port, for example “1-1
(TEN_GE)”, or the equivalent ITU-T G.7041 GFP (Generic Frame Procedure) port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet or FC variable. See Table 6-90 for a list of
available Ethernet variables, Table 6-91 for a list of FC, and Table 6-92 for a list of GFP variables.
Table 6-90 40G-MXP-C Ethernet Variables
Variable Description
ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
rxTotalPkts Total number of receive packets.
ifInUcastPkts The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a
higher (sub-)layer, which were not addressed to a multicast
or broadcast address at this sub-layer.
inInMulticastPkts The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a
higher (sub-)layer, which were addressed to a multicast
address at this sub-layer. For a MAC layer protocol, this
includes both Group and Functional addresses.
ifInBroadcastPkts The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a
higher (sub-)layer, which were addressed to a broadcast
address at this sub-layer.
ifInErrors Total number of receive errors.
ifOutOctets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface,
including framing characters.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
dot3StatsFCSErrors A count of frames received on a particular interface that
are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass
the FCS check.
dot3StatsFrameTooLong A count of frames received on a particular interface that
exceed the maximum permitted frame size.
dot3StatsInPauseFrames A count of frames received on this interface with an
opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
dot3StatsOutPauseFrames A count of MAC Control frames transmitted on this
interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
etherStatsUndersizePkts The total number of packets transmitted and received by
the interface that were less than 64 octets long (excluding
framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise
well formed.
etherStatsFragments The total number of packets transmitted and received by
the interface that were less than 64 octets in length
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had
either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral
number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a
non-integral.6-172
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
etherStatsPkts The total number of packets (including bad
packets,broadcast packets, and multicast packets)
transmitted and received by the interface.
etherStatsPkts64Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets)
transmitted and received by the interface that were 64
octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets).
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets The total number of packets (including error packets)
transmitted and received by the interface that were
between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets The total number of packets (including error packets)
transmitted and received by the interface that were
between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets The total number of packets (including error packets)
transmitted and received by the interface that were
between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets The total number of packets (including error packets)
transmitted and received by the interface that were
between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets The total number of packets (including error packets)
transmitted and received by the interface that were
between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsBroadcastPkts The total number of good packets transmitted and received
by the interface that were directed to the broadcast address
etherStatsMulticastPkts The total number of good packets transmitted and received
by the interface that were directed to a multicast address.
Note that this number does not include packets directed to
the broadcast address.
etherStatsOversizePkts The total number of packets transmitted and received by
the interface that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding
framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise
well formed.
etherStatsJabbers The total number of packets transmitted and received by
the interface that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding
framing bits, but including FCS octets), and were not an
integral number of octets in length or had a bad FCS.
etherStatsOctets The total number of octets of data (including those in bad
packets) transmitted and received by the interface on the
network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Table 6-90 40G-MXP-C Ethernet Variables (continued)6-173
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-91 40G-MXP-C FC Variables
Variable Description
ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
rxTotalPkts Total number of receive packets.
ifInErrors Total number of receive errors.
ifOutOctets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface,
including framing characters.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
ifOutErrors Number of outbound packets or transmission units that
could not be transmitted because of errors.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated Total number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes.
This value is a part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong Number of received frames that exceed the MTU. This
value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC Number of receive data frames with payload CRC errors
when HDLC framing is used.
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC
errors when HDLC framing is used.
mediaIndStatsTxFramesTooLong Total number of transmitted data frames that are less than
5 bytes. This value is a part of HDLC and GFP port
statistics.
mediaIndStatsTxFramesTruncated Number of transmitted data frames that exceed the MTU.
This value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
Table 6-92 40G-MXP-C GFP RMON Variables
Variable Description
gfpStatsRxFrame Total number of received data frames.
gfpStatsTxFrame Total number of transmitted data frames.
gfpStatsRxSblkCRCErrors Total number of superblock CRC errors with the receive
transparent GFP frame. A transparent GFP frame has
multiple superblocks which each contain Fibre Channel
data.
gfpStatsRxOctets Total number of GFP data octets received.
gfpStatsTxOctets Total number of GFP data octets transmitted.
gfpStatsRxSBitErrors Received generic framing protocol (GFP) frames with
single bit errors in the core header (these errors are
correctable).6-174
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, choose an alarm type. The alarm type indicates whether or not an
event is triggered by the type of threshold.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type the number of Sample Period occurrences.
Step 9 Type the number of Rising Threshold occurrences.
To trigger alarm, the measured value of a threshold must always move from below the falling threshold
to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network moves from below a rising threshold of 1000
collisions every 15 seconds to 1001 collisions.
Step 10 Type the appropriate number of occurrences for the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the exact opposite of a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above
the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded.
Step 11 Click OK.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G671 Provision the 40G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
gfpStatsRxMBitErrors Received GFP frames with multiple bit errors in the core
header (these errors are not correctable).
gfpStatsRxTypeInvalid Received GFP frames with invalid type (these are
discarded). For example, receiving GFP frames that contain
Ethernet data when we expect Fibre Channel data.
gfpStatsLFDRaised Indicates the count of core HEC CRC multiple bit errors.
Note This count is only of eHec multiple bit errors when
in frame. This can be looked at as a count of when
the state machine goes out of frame.
gfpRxCmfFrame —
gfpTxCmfFrame —
Table 6-92 40G-MXP-C GFP RMON Variables (continued)
Purpose This task changes the 40G-MXP-C trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed6-175
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card
where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 3 If TCA is not selected, click TCA and then click Refresh. If it is selected, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Verify the trunk port (Port 5) TCA thresholds are set at the values shown as follows:
• Laser Bias High (%): 95.0
• RX Power High (dBm): –9.0
• RX Power Low (dBm): –22.0
• TX Power High (dBm): 9.0
• TX Power Low (dBm): 0.0
Provision new thresholds as needed replacing the old values with new ones.
Step 5 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 6 Verify the trunk port (Port 5) Alarm thresholds are set at the values shown as follows:
• Laser Bias High (%): 98.0
• RX Power High (dBm): –8.0
• RX Power Low (dBm): –24.0
• TX Power High (dBm): 7.0
• TX Power Low (dBm): 3.0
Provision new thresholds as needed replacing the old values with new ones.
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-176
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G672 Provision the 40G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card
where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 If TCA is not selected, click TCA and then click Refresh. If it is selected, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Referring to Table 6-93, verify the client ports (Ports 1 through 4) TCA thresholds for RX Power High,
RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end.
Provision new thresholds as needed replacing the old values with new ones.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
40G-MXP-C card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-93 40G-MXP-C Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds
PPM Port Rate
Pluggable Port Module1
(XFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
FC8G ONS-XC-8G-FC-SM –9 –22 9.0 0.0
FC10G ONS-XC-10G-1470
through
ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-S1
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
ONS-XC-10G-I2 2.0 –15.8 8.0 –7.0
ONS-XC-10G-L2 1.0 –14.0 5.0 –12.0
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM 0.0 0.0 6.0 –6.06-177
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to provision additional client ports.
Step 7 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 8 Referring to Table 6-94, verify the client port (Ports 1 through 8) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High,
RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned.
Provision new thresholds as needed replacing the old values with new ones.
10GE ONS-XC-10G-30.3
through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-SR-M
ONS-XC-10G-S1
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
ONS-XC-10G-I2 2.0 –15.8 8.0 –7.0
ONS-XC-10G-L2 –7.0 –24.0 6.5 –2.5
OC192 ONS-XC-10G-30.3
through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-1470
through
ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-I2
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
ONS-XC-10G-L2 –9.0 –26.0 8.0 –8.0
ONS-XC-10G-S1 –1.0 –11.0 5.0 –12.0
OTU2 ONS-XC-10G-30.3
through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-1470
through
ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-I2
ONS-XC-10G-L2
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
ONS-XC-10G-S1
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
1. In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the
“Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Table 6-93 40G-MXP-C Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds (continued)
PPM Port Rate
Pluggable Port Module1
(XFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low6-178
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-94 40G-MXP-C Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds
PPM Port Rate
Pluggable Port Module1
(XFP)
1. In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the
“Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
FC8G ONS-XC-8G-FC-SM
ONS-XC-10G-S1
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
FC10G ONS-XC-10G-30.3 through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-1470
through
ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-S1
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
ONS-XC-10G-I2 4.5 –18.3 4.5 –3.5
ONS-XC-10G-L2 –4.5 –26.5 6.5 –2.5
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM 2.0 –2.0 2.0 –2.0
10GE ONS-XC-10G-30.3 through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-S1
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
ONS-XC-10G-I2 4.5 –18.3 4.5 –3.5
ONS-XC-10G-L2 –4.5 –26.5 6.5 –2.5
OC192 ONS-XC-10G-30.3 through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-1470
through
ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-I2
ONS-XC-8G-FC-SM
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
ONS-XC-10G-L2 –7.0 –28.0 4.0 –4.0
ONS-XC-10G-S1 –1.0 –13.0 1.0 –8.0
OTU2 ONS-XC-10G-30.3 through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-1470
through
ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-S1
ONS-XC-10G-I2
ONS-XC-10G-L2
ONS-XC-8G-FC-SM
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
–9 –22 9.0 0.06-179
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 9 Click Apply.
Step 10 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 to provision additional client ports.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G673 Change the 40G Muxponder OTN Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card
where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines,
ITU-T G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 6-95 through 6-98.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End; 15 Min and 1 Day; and SM and PM independently. To
do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-95 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Purpose This task changes the OTN settings for the 40G-MXP-C card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-95 40G-MXP-C Card OTN Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number.
Applicable for trunk ports and ports with
OTU2 payload.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
• 5 (Trunk)
ITU-T G.709
Thresholds
Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709.
• Enable
• Disable
FEC Sets the OTN lines to forward error
correction (FEC).
• Standard
• Enhanced6-180
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-96 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 6-97 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Threshold tab.
SF BER (Display only) Sets the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Table 6-95 40G-MXP-C Card OTN Line Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
Table 6-96 40G-MXP-C ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the
port number.
Applicable for trunk ports and
ports with OTU2 payload.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
• 5 (Trunk)
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select radio button individually and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default values.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a radio button individually and
click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select radio button individually and
click Refresh.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select radio button individually and
click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select radio button individually and
click Refresh.6-181
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-98 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 6-97 40G-MXP-C Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number.
Applicable for trunk ports and ports with
OTU2 payload.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
• 5 (Trunk)
Bit Errors
Corrected
Sets the value for bit errors corrected. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Uncorrectable
Words
Sets the value for uncorrectable words. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Table 6-98 40G-MXP-C Card Trail Trace Identifier Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number.
Applicable for trunk ports and ports with
OTU2 payload.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
• 5 (Trunk)
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
Disables alarm indication signal. • Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays and sets the current transmit
string.
You can click the button on the right to
change the display. Its title changes,
based on the current display mode. In
Transmit String Type, click Hex Mode to
change the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII); click ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button
changes to Hex Mode).
Transmit string size6-182
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G281 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Card Channel Group Settings
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to change the
channel group settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
Expected Displays and sets the current expected
string.
You can click the button on the right to
change the display. Its title changes,
based on the current display mode. In
Expected String Type, click Hex Mode to
change the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII); click ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button
changes to Hex Mode).
Expected string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. Click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to
keep this panel updated.
Received string size
Auto-refresh Automatically refreshes the display every
5 seconds.
• Checked
• Unchecked (default)
Purpose This procedure changes the channel group settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
• “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 6-8
• DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 6-11 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-98 40G-MXP-C Card Trail Trace Identifier Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-183
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
• DLP-G611 Create a Channel Group Using CTC, page 6-183
• DLP-G612 Modify the Parameters of the Channel Group Using CTC, page 6-184
• DLP-G613 Add or Remove Ports to or from an Existing Channel Group Using CTC, page 6-188
• DLP-G614 Delete a Channel Group Using CTC, page 6-189
• DLP-G615 Retrieve Information on Channel Group, REP, CFM, and EFM Using CTC, page 6-190
• DLP-G616 View Channel Group PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
Cards Using CTC, page 6-191
• DLP-G617 View Channel Group Utilization PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC, page 6-192
• DLP-G618 View Channel Group History PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC, page 6-192
• DLP-G619 Create a Channel Group on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Using PCLI, page B-24
• DLP-G620 Add Ports to a Channel Group on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Using PCLI, page B-25
Step 3 Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G611 Create a Channel Group Using CTC
Note You can create up to 11 channel groups on the GE_XP and GE_XPE cards and up to 2 channel groups
on the 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards. You can create a channel group with ports only when the ports
do not have any UNI QinQ settings or NNI SVLAN settings. Otherwise, the channel group will be
created with empty ports.
For information on interaction of LACP with other protocols, see the Protocol Compatibility list in the
Transponder and Muxponder Cards chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to create a
channel group. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed according to the
requirements specified in Table 4-6 on page 4-109.
Purpose This task creates a channel group on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-184
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 3 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 6-8.
Step 4 In card view, click the Provisioning > Channel Groups tabs.
Step 5 Click Create. The Channel Group Creation dialog box appears.
Step 6 Enter the name of the channel group in the Name field.
Step 7 From the Stand Alone list, choose the ports that will belong to this channel group and click the right
arrow button to move the selected ports to the Bundled list.
Step 8 From the LACP Mode drop-down list, choose the LACP mode as needed:
• On—Default mode. In this mode, the ports will not exchange LACP packets with the partner ports.
• Active—In this mode, the ports will send LACP packets at regular intervals to the partner ports.
• Passive—In this mode, the ports will not send LACP packets until the partner ports send LACP
packets. After receiving the LACP packets from the partner ports, the ports will send LACP packets.
Step 9 From the LACP Hashing drop-down list, select the LACP hashing algorithm that the protocol uses to
perform the load balancing task between the bundled ports.
The following hashing algorithms are supported:
• Ucast SA VLAN Incoming Port
• Ucast DA VLAN Incoming Port
• Ucast SA DA VLAN Incoming port
• Ucast Src IP TCP UDP
• Ucast Dst IP TCP UDP
• Ucast Src Dst IP TCP UDP
Step 10 Click Create.
A new row is added in the LACP table and all the other parameters in the channel group are set to default
values. The default values of these parameters are taken from the first port that is attached to the channel
group.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G612 Modify the Parameters of the Channel Group Using CTC
Purpose This task modifies the parameters of the channel group.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-185
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note Ports cannot be added or removed using this procedure. For adding or removing the ports, see
“DLP-G613 Add or Remove Ports to or from an Existing Channel Group Using CTC” task on
page 6-188.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to modify the
parameters of the channel group. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to modify the parameters of the channel group.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > Channel Groups tabs.
Step 4 Choose a channel group from the existing channel groups.
Step 5 Modify the channel group settings as described in Table 6-99.
Table 6-99 Channel Group Settings
Parameter Description Options
Channel Group (Display only) ID and name of the channel group. N.A.
Name Sets the name of the channel group. —
Ports (Display only) Port number (n-n) and rate (GE or
TEN_GE of the channel group).
N.A.
LACP Mode Sets the LACP mode. The channel group must be in
OOS-DSBLD admin state.
• On
• Active
• Passive
Hashing Sets the LACP hashing algorithm. The channel
group must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state.
• Ucast SA VLAN
Incoming Port
• Ucast DA VLAN
Incoming Port
• Ucast SA DA VLAN
Incoming port
• Ucast Src IP TCP
UDP
• Ucast Dst IP TCP
UDP
• Ucast Src Dst IP
TCP UDP
Admin State Sets the administrative state on the channel group. • IS
• OOS, DSBLD
Service State (Display only) Sets the service state that indicates
the operational state of the channel group.
• IS-NR
• OOS-MA, DSBLD6-186
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
MTU Sets the maximum transfer unit (MTU), which sets
the maximum number of bytes per frame accepted
on the port. The member ports must be in
OOS-DSBLD admin state. The default MTU value
in the channel group is taken from the default
settings in the node.
Numeric. Default: 9700
Range: 64 to 9700
Mode Sets the provisional port mode. If the port mode is
Auto, the Expected Speed field determines which
ports can belong to the bundle. The member ports
must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state.
• Auto
• 1000 Mbps
Expected Speed Sets the expected speed of ports of the channel
group. The channel group must be in OOS-DSBLD
admin state.
• 10 Mbps
• 100 Mbps
• 1000 Mbps
Duplex (Display only) Expected duplex capability of ports
of the channel group.
• Full
Committed Info
Rate
Sets the guaranteed information rate as per the service
provider service-level agreement. The channel group
must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state.
Numeric. Default: 100
Range: 0 to 100%
Committed
Burst Size
Sets the maximum number of bits transferred per
second. The channel group must be in OOS-DSBLD
admin state.
• 4k (default)
• 8k
• 16k
• 32k
• 64k
• 128k
• 256k
• 512k
• 1M
• 2M
• 4M
• 8M
• 16M
Table 6-99 Channel Group Settings
Parameter Description Options6-187
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Excess Burst
Size
Sets the maximum number of bits credited for later
transfer if the committed burst rate cannot be
transmitted. The channel group must be in
OOS-DSBLD admin state.
• 4k (default)
• 8k
• 16k
• 32k
• 64k
• 128k
• 256k
• 512k
• 1M
• 2M
• 4M
• 8M
• 16M
NIM Sets the network interface mode (NIM) for the
channel group. The member ports must be in
OOS-DSBLD admin state.
The channel group NIM is set to UNI or NNI based
on the mode of the first port that is added to the
channel group.
• UNI Mode
(Default)—provisions
the port as a
User-Network
Interface (UNI). This
is the interface that
faces the subscriber.
• NNI
Mode—provisions
the port as a
Network-to-Network
Interface (NNI). This
is the interface that
faces the service
provider network.
Ingress CoS Provisions the IEEE 802.1p ingress class of service
(CoS). Ingress CoS is used to set the priority of the
Ethernet frame in the service provider network. The
member ports must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state.
• 0
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5
• 6
• 7
• Trust
• CVLAN
• DSCP
Table 6-99 Channel Group Settings
Parameter Description Options6-188
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note When you set the Committed Info Rate above 40% on 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards, the Committed
Burst Size and Excess Burst Size must be set to at least 32K. The Committed Burst Size and Excess Burst
Size can be increased based on the packet size and Committed Info Rate value.
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G613 Add or Remove Ports to or from an Existing Channel Group Using CTC
Inner Ethertype
(Hex)
Defines the inner Ethertype field. The Ethertype
field indicates which protocol is being transported
in an Ethernet frame. The member ports must be in
OOS-DSBLD admin state to modify the Inner
Ethertype value to a non-default value.
Numeric.
Default: 8100 (IEEE Std
802.1Q customer VLAN
tag type)
Range: 0x600 to 0xffff.
Outer Ethertype
(Hex)
Defines the outer Ethertype field. The Ethertype
field identifies which protocol is being transported
in an Ethernet frame. The member ports must be in
OOS-DSBLD admin state.
Numeric.
Default: 8100 (IEEE
standard 802.1Q service
provider VLAN tag type)
Range: 0x600 to 0xffff
MAC Learning Enables or disables MAC learning for the port on
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
cards. MAC learning is used by Layer 2 switches to
learn the MAC addresses of network nodes so that
the Layer 2 switches send traffic to the right
location. In GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE cards, enable
MAC address learning per SVLAN.
• Checked—MAC
learning is enabled
for this port.
• Unchecked—(Default)
MAC learning is
disabled for this port.
Table 6-99 Channel Group Settings
Parameter Description Options
Purpose This task adds or removes ports to or from an existing channel group.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-189
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Before You Begin
• You can assign up to eight ports to a channel group on GE_XP and GE_XPE cards and up to three
ports on the 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards.
• You can assign the ports to a channel group only if the ports are in OOS-DSBLD admin state. The
ports must not have any UNI QinQ rule or NNI SVLAN configuration.
• If the channel group is configured in UNI mode, only the UNI ports can be added to the channel
group. If the channel group is configured in NNI mode, only the NNI ports can be added to the
channel group.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want add ports to an
existing channel group. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to add ports to an existing channel group.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > Channel Groups tabs.
Step 4 Choose a channel group from the existing channel groups.
Step 5 Click Add/Remove Ports. The Add/Remove Ports dialog box appears.
Step 6 To add ports to an existing channel group, complete the following:
From the Stand Alone list, choose the required ports and click the right arrow button to move the selected
ports to the Bundled list.
Step 7 To remove ports from an existing channel group, complete the following:
From the Bundled list, choose the required ports and click the left arrow button to move the selected ports
to the Stand Alone list.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G614 Delete a Channel Group Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to delete the
channel group. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XP card where you want to delete the channel group.
Purpose This task deletes a channel group.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-190
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > Channel Groups tabs.
Step 4 Choose a channel group that you want to delete.
Step 5 Click Delete.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G615 Retrieve Information on Channel Group, REP, CFM, and EFM Using
CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to view and
retrieve information on the channel group, REP, CFM, and EFM. If you are already logged in, continue
with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 6-8.
Step 3 In card view, click the Maintenance > Show Commands tabs.
Step 4 From the Command drop-down list, choose a command.
The following commands are supported:
• ETH LACP—Displays detailed LACP information from the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE cards.
• REP TOPO—Displays the topology information for a specific REP segment.
• REP TOPO ARCHIVE—Displays the previous topology information for a specific REP segment.
• REP INTERFACE—Displays information on the REP interface status and configuration. You can
retrieve detailed information for each segment by selecting Detailed from the Level drop-down list
and providing the segment ID.
• OAM DISCOVERY—Displays discovery information for all the EFM interfaces or for a specific
EFM interface.
• OAM SUMMARY—Displays the active EFM sessions on a device.
• OAM STATISTICS—Displays detailed information about the EFM packets.
Purpose This task enables you to view and retrieve information on the channel
group, Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP), Connectivity Fault
Management (CFM), and Ethernet in the First Mile (EFM) on the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher6-191
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
• OAM STATUS—Displays information about the EFM configurations for all the EFM interfaces or
for a specific interface.
For more information, see the Pseudo Command Line Interface Reference chapter in the Cisco ONS
15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 5 From the Level drop-down list, choose Normal or Detailed.
Step 6 Click Show. Depending on the command, the appropriate output appears in the text area.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G616 View Channel Group PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to view the
channel group PM counts on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to view the channel group statistics. The card view
appears.
Step 3 Click the Performance > Channel Groups > Statistics tabs.
Step 4 Click Refresh. Performance monitoring statistics for each channel group on the card appear in the
Statistics tab.
View the PM parameter names in the Param column. The current PM parameter values appear in the Port
# (CHGRP) column. For PM parameter definitions, refer to the “Performance Monitoring” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Note To refresh, reset, or clear PM counts, see the “NTP-G73 Change the PM Display” procedure on
page 9-2.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task enables you to view current statistical performance monitoring
(PM) counts on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards
and channel groups to detect possible performance problems.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher6-192
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G617 View Channel Group Utilization PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to view the
channel group utilization PM parameters on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Step 2 In node view, double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to view
the channel group utilization. The card view appears.
Step 3 Click the Performance > Channel Groups > Utilization tabs.
Step 4 Click Refresh. The utilization percentages for each channel group on the card appear in the Utilization
tab.
View the Port # column to find the channel group you want to monitor.
The transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) bandwidth utilization values, for the previous time intervals, appear
in the Prev-n columns. For PM parameter definitions, refer to the “Performance Monitoring” chapter in
the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Note To refresh, reset, or clear PM counts, see the “NTP-G73 Change the PM Display” procedure on
page 9-2.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G618 View Channel Group History PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
Purpose This task enables you to view line utilization PM counts on the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards and channel groups to detect
possible performance problems.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
Purpose This task enables you to view historical PM counts at selected time
intervals on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards and
channel groups to detect possible performance problems.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher6-193
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to view the
channel group history PM parameters on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card where you want to view the channel group history PM data. The card
view appears.
Step 3 Click the Performance > Channel Groups > History tabs.
Step 4 From the Port field, choose a channel group.
Step 5 Click Refresh. Performance monitoring statistics for each channel group on the card appear in the
History tab.
View the PM parameter names that appear in the Param column. The PM parameter values appear in the
Prev-n columns. For PM parameter definitions, refer to the “Performance Monitoring” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Note To refresh, reset, or clear PM counts, see the “NTP-G73 Change the PM Display” procedure on
page 9-2.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G283 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Card CFM Settings
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to change the
CFM settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G621 Enable or Disable CFM on the Card Using CTC, page 6-194
• DLP-G622 Enable or Disable CFM for Each Port Using CTC, page 6-195
• DLP-G623 Create a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC, page 6-196
Purpose This procedure changes the CFM settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
• “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 6-8
• DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 6-11 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-194
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
• DLP-G624 Delete a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC, page 6-197
• DLP-G625 Create a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC, page 6-198
• DLP-G626 Modify a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC, page 6-199
• DLP-G627 Delete a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC, page 6-199
• DLP-G628 Map a Maintenance Association Profile to a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC,
page 6-200
• DLP-G629 Create a MEP Using CTC, page 6-201
• DLP-G630 Delete a MEP Using CTC, page 6-202
• DLP-G631 Create a MIP Using CTC, page 6-202
• DLP-G632 Delete a MIP Using CTC, page 6-203
• DLP-G633 Ping MEP Using CTC, page 6-204
• DLP-G634 Traceroute MEP Using CTC, page 6-205
• DLP-G615 Retrieve Information on Channel Group, REP, CFM, and EFM Using CTC, page 6-190
• DLP-G635 Enable CFM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI,
page B-29
• DLP-G636 Create a Maintenance Domain on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Using PCLI, page B-29
• DLP-G637 Create a Maintenance Intermediate Point on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI, page B-30
• DLP-G638 Create a Maintenance End Point on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Cards Using PCLI, page B-31
Step 3 Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G621 Enable or Disable CFM on the Card Using CTC
Note CFM is disabled on the card by default. CFM must be enabled at both card and port levels for the CFM
service to work.
For information on interaction of CFM with other protocols, see the Protocol Compatibility list in the
Transponder and Muxponder Cards chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Purpose This task allows you to enable or disable CFM on GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher6-195
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to enable or
disable CFM on the card. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 6-8.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > Security tab.
Step 4 Uncheck the MAC security check box to disable MAC security.
Step 5 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > Global Settings tabs.
Step 6 Check the Enable CFM check box that is present at the bottom of the screen.
Step 7 Choose the value for CC Timer field. The value can be 1 second, 10 seconds, or 1 minute.
Note Continuity Check (CC) messages are periodically exchanged between maintenance end points (MEPs).
The CC Timer field is used to set the time frequency for transmission of CC messages.
Step 8 Click Apply to enable CFM on the card.
Note Uncheck the Enable CFM check box to disable CFM on the card.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G622 Enable or Disable CFM for Each Port Using CTC
Note CFM must be enabled at both card and port levels for the CFM service to work. However, CFM is
enabled on all the ports by default.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to enable or
disable CFM for each port. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 6-8.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > Global Settings tabs.
Purpose This task allows you to enable or disable CFM for each port on GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher6-196
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 If you want to enable CFM on a specific port, check the Enable CFM check box against that port.
Step 5 Choose the value for CC Timer field. The value can be 1 second, 10 seconds, or 1 minute.
Note Continuity Check (CC) messages are periodically exchanged between MEPs. The CC Timer field is used
to set the time frequency for transmission of CC messages.
Step 6 Click Apply to enable CFM on the port.
Note Uncheck the Enable CFM check box against the port to disable CFM on the port.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G623 Create a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC
Before You Begin
• You can create up to eight maintenance domain profiles on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE cards.
• The maximum number of characters for the maintenance domain profile and the maintenance
association profile must not exceed 43 characters.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to create a
maintenance domain profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 6-8.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > Domain Profiles tabs or in
node/network view, click the Provisioning > CFM Profiles > Domain Profiles tabs.
Note Use the network view to store the domain profile on multiple nodes.
Step 4 Click Add row(s).
Purpose This task allows you to create a maintenance domain profile on the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher6-197
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 5 Enter the name of the domain in the Domain Name field.
Step 6 Enter the level of the domain profile in the Level field. The range of the domain profile level is from 0
to 7.
Step 7 Click Store.
Step 8 Choose the card slot where you want to store this domain profile and click OK.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G624 Delete a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to delete a
maintenance domain profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 6-8.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > Domain Profiles tabs or in
node/network view, click the Provisioning > CFM Profiles > Domain Profiles tabs.
Step 4 Select the domain profiles that you want to delete.
Step 5 Check the on Node check box.
Step 6 Click Delete Sel. row(s). The CFM Profile Deleting dialog box appears.
Step 7 Choose the card slot where you want to delete this profile and click OK. The Deleting Profile dialog
box appears.
Step 8 In the Deleting Profile dialog box, click Yes.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task allows you to delete a maintenance domain profile on the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher6-198
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G625 Create a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC
Note You can create up to 1500 maintenance association profiles on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE cards.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to create a
maintenance association profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 6-8.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MA Profiles tabs or in node/network
view, click the Provisioning > CFM Profiles > MA Profiles tabs.
Note Use the network view to store the maintenance association profile on multiple nodes.
Step 4 Click Add row(s).
Step 5 Enter the name of the maintenance association in the Maintenance Profile Name field.
Step 6 Enter the VLAN ID in the VLAN ID field. The range of the VLAN ID is from 1 to 4093.
Step 7 Check the CC Enable check box to receive Continuity Check messages.
Step 8 Click Store.
Step 9 Choose the card slot where you want to store this maintenance association profile and click OK.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task allows you to create a maintenance association profile on
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher6-199
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G626 Modify a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC
Note Ensure that the maintenance association profile you want to modify is not associated with a maintenance
domain profile.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to modify a
maintenance association profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 6-8.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MA Profiles tabs or in node/network
view, click the Provisioning > CFM Profiles > MA Profiles tabs.
Step 4 Select the maintenance association profiles that you want to modify.
Step 5 Click Modify Selected Profile(s). The Modify MA Profile dialog box appears.
Step 6 Modify the values as required and click OK.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G627 Delete a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC
Note Ensure that the maintenance association profile you want to delete is not associated with a maintenance
domain profile.
Purpose This task allows you to modify a maintenance association profile on
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
Purpose This task allows you to delete a maintenance association profile on
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher6-200
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to delete a
maintenance association profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 6-8.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MA Profiles tabs or in node/network
view, click the Provisioning > CFM Profiles > MA Profiles tabs.
Step 4 Select the maintenance association profiles that you want to delete.
Step 5 Check the on Node check box.
Step 6 Click Delete Sel. row(s). The CFM Profile Deleting dialog box appears.
Step 7 Choose the card slot where you want to delete this profile and click OK. The Deleting Profile dialog
box appears.
Step 8 In the Deleting Profile dialog box, click Yes.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G628 Map a Maintenance Association Profile to a Maintenance Domain
Profile Using CTC
Note Ensure that you have already created maintenance domain profiles and maintenance association profiles.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to map a
maintenance association profile to a maintenance domain profile. If you are already logged in, continue
with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 6-8.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MA-Domain Mapping tabs.
Step 4 From the main drop-down list, choose a maintenance domain profile.
Step 5 Click Link MA Profiles. The Link MA Profiles dialog box appears.
Purpose This task allows you to map a maintenance association profile to a
maintenance domain profile on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher6-201
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 6 From the Available Profiles list, choose the required MA profiles and click the right arrow button to
move the MA profiles to the Linked Profiles list and click OK.
Note The maintenance association profiles that are mapped with a specific maintenance domain
profile must have a unique SVLAN ID.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G629 Create a MEP Using CTC
Note You can create up to 255 MEPs and MIPs on the GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards. You can create up to 500
MEPs and MIPs on the GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to create a MEP.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 6-8.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MEP tabs.
Step 4 Click Create. The Create MEP dialog box appears.
Step 5 From the Port drop-down list, choose a port where you want to create the MEP.
Note CFM must be enabled on the port to create a MEP. The port must not belong to a channel group.
Step 6 From the Domain drop-down list, choose a maintenance domain.
Step 7 Enter the SVLAN ID in the Vlan Id field.
Note The specified VLAN must be configured on the selected port. The specified VLAN must also appear in
the MA-Domain Mapping table.
Step 8 Enter the MP ID (identifier of the maintenance end point) in the MPID field and click OK. The range of
the MP ID is from 1 to 8191.
Purpose This task allows you to create a Maintenance End Point (MEP) for a
given VLAN range on a specific maintenance domain.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher6-202
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
The MP ID must not be the same between the maintenance end points.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G630 Delete a MEP Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to delete a MEP.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 6-8.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MEP tabs.
Step 4 Select the MEPs that you want to delete.
Step 5 Click Delete.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G631 Create a MIP Using CTC
Note You can create up to 255 MEPs and MIPs on the GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards. You can create up to 500
MEPs and MIPs on the GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards.
Purpose This task allows you to delete a MEP on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
Purpose This task allows you to create a Maintenance Intermediate Point (MIP)
for a given VLAN range with a specific maintenance level.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher6-203
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to create a MIP.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 6-8.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MIP tabs.
Step 4 Click Create. The Create MIP dialog box appears.
Step 5 From the Port drop-down list, choose a port where you want to create the MIP.
Note The port must not belong to a channel group.
Step 6 From the Level drop-down list, choose a maintenance level. The range of the maintenance level is from
0 to 7.
Step 7 Enter the SVLAN range in the Vlan range field. The range of the SVLAN is from 1 to 4093.
Note The specified SVLAN must be configured on the selected port.
About this Document